Illtlllll TRIBUNE POPULAE SCIENCE. BY LOUIS AGASSIZ, R. A. PROCTOR, DR. C. E. BROWN-sfQUARD, BAYARD TAYLOR, PROF. C. F. CHANDLER, JOHN LEE CONTE, M. D., PROF. FAIRMAN ROGERS, PROF. A. M. MAYER, PROF. W. A. NORTON, MAJOR J. W. POWELL, PROF. SIMON NEWCOMB, PROF. WM. FERREL. PROF. WOLCOTT GIBBS, PROF. S. ALEXANDER, PROF. F. V. HAYDEN, PROF B. SILLIMAN, DR. E. BESALS, PROF. S. ALEXANDER, PROF. ELIAS LOOMIS, PROF. J. S. NEWBERRY, CAPT. C. E. DUTTON, PROF. O. C. MARSH, LIEUT. G. M. WHEELER, WM. A. HAMMOND, M. D., PROF. F. ALLEN, HON. J. H. TRUMBULL, AND CONTAINING " THE POET LONGFELLOW," BY JAMES T. FIELDS, AND " THE PRAYER OF AGASSIZ," BY I. G. WHITTIER. BOSTON : HENRY L. SHEPARD & (Successors to SHEPARD & GILL,) I874. CO., TKIBUNE POPULAK SCIENCE. PAR!.' I. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PROCTOR'S LECTURES ON ASTRONOMY. PAGE. THE SUN 1 THE SUN'S FAMILY OF 1 'LANETS 10 COMETS AND METEORS . 18 TRANSIT ov VENUS AND THE MOON 25 WONDERS OF THE STAR-DEPTHS 33 BIRTH AND GROWTH OF THE SOLAR SYSTEM 40 THE PRAYER OF AGASSIZ. A POEM BY JOHN G. WHITTIER 46 AGASSIZ'S LECTURES AT PENIKESE. FIRST LESSONS TO THE ANDERSON SCHOOL 47 THE A RT ( >F TEAI KING 48 THE BIIST BOOKS TO STUDY 49 CLASSIFICATION F/ NATURAL HISTORY 50 GLACIAI HISTORY OF THIS CONTINENT 53 MEMORABLIC \VORDS OF PROF. AGASSIZ 60 A RAINY DAY AT PENIKESE 62 * PIIOCTOR — AGASSIZ. There is no science that has been more illuminated than astronomy, by the discov- eries of th<> last ten or fifteen years. Mr. Proctor, in the course of lectures which is here presented, exhibits the most recent theo- ries warranted by the facts. Hence the fresh- ness and charm of these lectures, their free- dom Iron i what is now the common-place knowledge of the text-books ; and a certain rush and vitality about them, as if — which was the case— -there were not time enough to tell their mighty tale. To this story of the heavens we have added some chapteis from the teachings of one who knew more of this globe and the life that dwells and has dwelt upon it, than any other man of this generation. We feel assured that thousands will welcome our uublication of several of the lectures of Prof. Agassiz to the students of the Anderson School of Natural History on Penikese Island. Very little that was there said by that great teacher has hith- erto found its way into print. The latest words of the old man eloquent will be found pregnant with the wisdom of his accumulated years. SIX LECTURES BY It. A. PROCTOR. •A STUDY OF THE SUN. THE FIRST LECTURE. DISTANCE, SIZE, AND MASS OF THE SUN ; MARVELOUS AMOUNT OF HEAT AND LIGHT EVOLVED ; WHAT IS KNOWN ABOUT THE SOLAR SPOTS AND ATMOS- PHERE. The first of the series of six lectures was given on January 9, at Association Hall, by Prof. Richard A. Proctor, Secretary of the Royal Astronomical Society, London, and author of several noted works upon astronomical topics. The audience packed the capa- cious hall to its utmost limits. The treatment of the subject was largely facilitated by views illuminated with the oxy-hydrogen light. THE LECTURE. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN : I need hardly tell you that a subject so wide as astronomy cannot be dealt with in a single course of lectures, except by way of survey. Every one of the subjects of my lectures might very well occupy a whole course. I have myself twice given a course of lectures on the Sun ; two years ago on the stars ; and I expect next May to give a course of lectures at the Royal Institution on the planets — the subject of the next lecture in my covirse in New York. Therefore you will readily understand that all of my lectures will be mere •sur- veys. I only aim to present the leading features and those characteristic of modern research. The subject of our lecture to-night is the Sun — not the most magnificent of all created- objects, as indeed I shal1 ^ able to show you when I deal with the 7 Tribune Extras — Pamphlet Series. stars, but the noblest of all created things that min- ister to the wants of man. In Ions; p;i-t ages there were men who worshiped the sun. ami knelt down in adoration before him, because they believed he was the source of all good upon the earth ; he was, in fact, their God. Although in this they forgot the Creator and worshiped the creature, yet if there was any fault it may be pardoned. How little we think when we see the sun rising as a ruddy globe above the horizon, involved in leaden-colored clouds — how little we think that at every instant that globe with a mighty force is attracting not only the earth but other planets far larger than the earth ! Still less do we think how, not merely in the daytime, but through all time, that sun is pouring forth supplies of light and heat, infinitely greater than are required for the wants of this earth. Now let us consider first the facts we have to deal with, in order that we may see how large and how powerful he is, and thus thor- oughly appreciate his physical characteristics when we come to consider them. DISTANCE AND SIZE OF THE SUN. In the first place, let us consider the distance and size of the sun, which I need hardly say are nearly related. There is a comparison by which we arc enabled to indicate at, once the relation of the sun to us in magnitude and distance. It' this earth were represented by a globe one inch in diameter, then the sun's globe would be represented by an orb three yards in diameter. Jt' the sun's globe in turn were represented by a globe one inch in diameter, then the distance would be represented by three yards ; our earth a globe one inch in diameter, the sun three yard- ; the -1111 a globe one inch in diameter, the dis- tance i lii-re yards. Now let us consider what an enormous distance that means. An Armstrong gun tire* a bullet at the rate of 400 yards per second. A bullet tired at that rate, and maintaining it to the -mi, would take 13 years to get there, and the sound of the explosion would reach the sun half a year Liter. In the case, therefore, of those men who wor- shiped the sun and rai.-ed their voices in prayer to him. if their voices could have been heard, and there were .in atmi'-phere, a medium of intercommunica- tion by which the sound of their voices could reach him. 1.;^, years \\miid have been needed before their prayen could ha\e reached their god. If there were .1 tee! rod '-"line, ung the earth with the sun, and the earth wen' by it brought into communication with tin- HIM, ::'»o years would elapse before the strain would reach Hie earth. Aunt IPT consideration — and this wa^ suggested by Prut. Mendeiihall of your coun- try— i- this: Feeling i-, e.inveycd along the nerves 10 times slower than sound travels. If, therefore, an infant were born having an arm of the somewhat inconvenient length of 91,000,000 miles, so as to reach the sun; and if, while in the cradle in boyhood, he were to stretch out his arm and touch the sun, that infant mi^lit grow to the three-score years and ten allotted to man, or even to four-score, but he would never be conscious of the fact that the tip of his finger was burned. He must live 135 years before any effect would be experienced. GKAVITY ACTS INSTANTANEOUSLY. Light, which travels with such velocity, which travels L'00,000 miles in a single second of time, take- eight minutes to reach us from the sun. -o that when we look at the sun we see him not in the place he actually occupies in the ecliptic, but the place which he occupied eight minutes before. And this lead- to the strange consideration that if gravity, the force by which the sun rules the earth, were to occupy the same time in passing over the interval between the sun and the earth that light does, the years would grow continually longer. Let us suppose the earth, traveling from my left to my right around the sun, which is directly opposite. When a body is traveling forward against a material shower, such as rainfall, the shower will appear to come somewhat from the direction in which the shower is moving. Thus the light from the sun come*, somewhat obliquely to meet the earth. Suppose the fore.- of attraction occupied the same time; that force would occupy a line, not from I he sun but from a point on the right of the sun; it would draw the earth not. toward the sun but somewhat in the direction toward which the earth is moving, and there would be a continued increase in the earth's velocity and an increase in the length of the year: and tin- would be manifested in a few \ears, and stjll more in the hundreds of years during which a-tninom> ha- been a science; and because there is no appreciable in- crease in the length of the year, it is shown that the force of gravity acts instantaneously; that it acts very much more quickly than light. Xow thai, is a wonderful thought. That is a kind of force entirely unlike that with which we are familiar. It' we strike the water, a wave travels almm the .surface. If we raise the voice in sound, it. is conveyed along the waves of air, -and there is a certain rate of tran>ini- sion. Light would circle the earth ei'_dii times in a single second, but still it take- a certain lime in trav- eling; but gravity, the. sun'-, might, acts, so far a.- we can judge, instantaneously. It is one of the forces of which we are able to ijive no account \\hatevei, for all our laws of matter are opposed lo the concep- tion of force acting otherwise than by eout.i'i. Newton is reported to have said that a man must be mad. who could assume (hat any force whatever could act except by direct contact. ProctorJ8 Astronomical Lectures. THE SUN'S Mianr. Now let us consider the might that resides in the eun. If the suii were merely an orb very much larger than the earth, as we see he is, there might still not he the force necessary to the sun as a ruler over the earth. Let me give you an idea of how- large the sun ia. I am in the habit, in England, when I wish to speak of the siza of the sun, of informing my audience that " this country (England) in which we live, which seems to us so large, ia nevertheless small by comparison with the earth, for if the earth were one inch in diameter, England would be a small triangular speck, which you could scarcely recognize." But I am afraid that to an American audience that comparison would be im- perfect. In fact, I have heard that an American traveling in England found the country so small that he at once sought the central counties, and was even then afraid to go out in the evening for fear of falling off the little island. [Laughter.] We in England, whether it be the natural courage of our disposition or the effect of longhabit, are not troubled •with that feeling. But even America is so small compared with the sun, that if there were a spot upon the sun as large as the whole of America, it would be quite invisible to the naked eye. In- deed, if an object as large aa the earth were placed immediately before the sun, and there appeared as a black disk, it would nevertheless require a large telescope to make it visible ; 108 times does the sun's diameter exceed that of the earth, and the surface of the sun exceeds that of the earth 108 tirnea 108 times, or 11,600 times, while the volume of the su,n exceeds that of the earth 1,250,000 times. But the mass of the sun is not so much greater than the earth. It would appear aa thoush the body of the sun wero constituted of matter about a quarter lighter on au average than that which constitutes the earth, and the result is that the suu'a mass instead of exceeding the mass of the earth 1,250,000 times, only exceeds it 815,000 times. But only consider what that means! If this earth were to grow in density until its mass •were equal to that of the sun, then a half-ounce weight — one of those that are used to balance our letters — would weigh 4* tons. A man of average weight would be drawn to the earth as a weight of 20,000 Ions. An object raised from the earth a single inch would, in falling that short distance, acquire a velocity three times greater than that of an express train. Such ia the might with which the sun rules this earr.li. Till SOURCE OF HEAT AND LIGHT. But, now let us pass from the question of the sun's might to its heat and light. The sun is the source of all these forms of light and life which exist upon the earth. That ia no idle dream. Every form of force upou the earth, every action that we perform, all the forms of energy we know of, even the very thoughts we think, may be said to coma from the sun. It is by the sun's heat that life is maintained upon the earth. And now as to the quantity of that heat. Sir John Herschel in the South of Africa made experiments to determine the actual quantity of heat that is received from the sun. The heat thsre was so great that at the depth of four inches below the sand tho thermometer rose to 160°. He was able to cook a steak by placing it in a box covered with glass, and that inside another box with a glass cover; and to boil eggs hard. He made experiments, and found in the first place that about one-fourth of the sun's light and heat were cut off at midday by the air, and taking that into account, and making the requisite calcula- tion for a largo extent of surface, he found that the quantity of the sun's heat that fell on an area of one square mile would be sufficient to melt in a single hour 26,000 tons of ice. Well, now that is merely the quantity received by a square mile of the earth'a surface. But the earth presents to the sun a surface (regarding her for a moment aa a flat disk) 50,000,000 square miles in extent. And then how small is the quantity of the sun's light and heat that thia earth actually captures. You have only to consider how small the sun looka in the heavens, and consider how small our earth would look beside him, with this small diameter compared with his, of one inch to three yards, and you can aee how small a proportion of the sun'a heat we capture. B\r a cal- culation which can be readily made, it is found that only the 2,000,000,000th part, or less than that pro- portion, of the sun's heat ia captured by the earth; and all the planets together receive only one 227,000,000th part of the sun'a heat. Here is another mystery the study of astronomy presents. Oaly one part in 227,000,000 parts appears to be applied to any useful purpose, and the rest seems wasted. It is not for us to judge of the operations of Nature. But here at any rate do we ssern to find a confirma- tion of the saying of the atheist that sounds so strange tc us, that " Nature in filling a wine-glas» upsets a gallon." There ia the sun's heat being con- tinually sent forth, and only the 227,000,000th part received. Only imagine a merchant who spent large sums of money, and who employed only one cent usefully for every $3,000,000 of hia income. And that is what > the sun appears to be continually doing/ -'The actual emission of solar light and heat corresponds to what would bo obtained if on every square yarf of the sun's surface six tons of coal were conaumet. every hour. In every second the sun gives oci ft much heat aa would be given out by bom* m Tribune Frtras— Pamphlet Scries. 11.0">0,000.0()0,000.000 tons: and this earth on v. hii:li \vu llvo. if its whole surface were glowing . tie- -.Hue heat as the sun, would give >-ut in Bverj -•>•,. ml tli.- Bailie ainoiiiit nf heat that would 1 jiveu by burning up 1,000,000.000,000 tons of coal. < 'a • inilli-in niilliun t >n.s of coal in every second of tiint — -i irlohe only a^ lai !_re as our earth ! while the sun, th'- iM'ea1 eeiiter nf our system, gives out every ,l • siipplv (.f that coal which we look at as iuexli.iM-.ti'-.le, hut which Wi> a TO consuming at such HI a- t mi in ::,'i 1 1 t.r 4,c'i:i years hence there can be I- :• ', ; 1 • .I ) iiit the coal N.'ill bo exhausted upon the «• ii ih. Tin: sr.v's SPOTS. Nn.v. w.- have tn con-idi-r what t ho telescope and other imtru mem- of r.-^-arrh tell us ahout the globe. We have si-i-n its si/e, its mass, what a wonderful nmniint of liL'lit and heat it '.rives; and now we have to ciHiM'h-r what the telescope tells us. J need not P> over i he >,-[-i a of researches by which the aspect of t h • -mi ha> ln-en studied ; but I will only remark that if i ;alil:-o and t IP- ut In T.S who studied the sun — Jf th:-y had hut known, a-i we know, how much we owe to tin- sun— the\ would with a hundred-fold de- gl nf iutei.-st have studied that wonderful orh. A; ihe In-iriniiiiiir of their research they found tho Bun's surface marked from t line to time with large spots, which will now be shown you u, A IT i \u \vri-: <>p TIU: I • o '«r rt from > |r. i :r-- r,f tlir mm »• m«n |.» Tnr.-li in na tho rtnrof ';,,,., ,„ l-,7r- • ' '<> iv • of • "i« «on *p"»H :n, I | i whirh I »liuuld have been very glad to have suspended all tto time for you, but 1 found the size of the screen would not permit me. You will have the diagrams one by one before you, interspersed with lantern views, which by tho kindness of Prof. Morton I can exhibit to you. By the first I will show you the general aspect of the suu, the way the sun appearj with its various spots. That diagram now before you has been taken at tho Cambridge Observatory It ia a photographic picture of the sun. There are four such pictures, and they show you the different appearances of the sun. Sometimes there are a few spots; at others more; at others two zones appear to be strewn with spots. It was discovered early that thess spots aro actually attached to the surface of tho sun, that they are carried round, that the sun's globe re- volves in about twenty-live of our days, carrying these spots along with it. Other features were soon recognized in these spots. We will have the second of these diagrams shown, in which you will have a larger picture of these soots, and other pictures will show you what will afterward bo presented on a large scale — the appearance of bright spots around the spots called faculu). The spots are not uniform in color, and have an outer fringe, while inside there is a dark pait which the first observers thought was actually black. But no part of the sun's surface, so far as we know, would seem to be actually black. Certain of the bright parts aro strained into white bright streaks, surrounding tho spot, and when the lantern is used you will find clear views of that phenomena will be presented. Wo will next have a picture of the sun's spots presented, and after- ward tho photographic pictures of the spots brought before yon. There is on 3 oth^r pictara which, like tho last, was taican at the Cambridge Observatory, and shows th^ feature.} of these spots. They are well defined. Tho outer outline of the spot is sbaiply defined, and the outliuoof the central spot is well marked, an I then there are white streaks from tho central part towards the surrounding por- tion. All that surrounding portion, especially near the edge of the spot, is, on the sun, brighter than tlu rest of the sun's surface. Now we will have tho room darkened, and these things will bo shown to you by photographs taken by Mr. Rutherfurd. Yon will KCC these various spots, and you will have the assurance that you are not looking at a picture taken by the baud of man, but sun-painted, in which all the features were actually existingon tho surface of the sun at t lie time ; and meantime we will pass on to tho consideration of various features that will have to be presented. In this diairrnm you will perceive that the central »*rt fc Mftrrounde4 by whitick utreakt, called tb* Procter's Astronomical Lectures. facnlro, and yon vrill recognize on the border of tho sun's disk mottled markings, the first sign of the complexity of the solar surface. That is a feature which can be recognized in a telescope of *hreeinches ic aperture. We will have another of those pictures brought on the scene, differing from the last in the fact that there are spots oi considerable size on this view of the sun. These spots are stin-paintcd and actual pictures of the spots themselves. You can recognize the half shadow boundary, and the greater brightness of the interior part — the mottled part, the border, and the bright facular streaks. But now we will have pictures of one and the same spot in various stages of its progress, and you will recognize the evidence by which Pr. Wilson of Glasgow in 1776 recognized tho fact that spots are depressions below the surface of the sun. PECULIARITIES OP THE SPOTS. Here are various pictures of the same spot. Tht«y are all numbered, and you will see, first of all, the spots appearing on the edge of the sun, and you are able to look on the further half shadow part of that spot, and it would seem as if you were looking on the edge. The half shadow part around the dark region becomes more and more uniform in breadth. You see the shape of the spot, and the formation acros-< it of a streak of bright light, and you see it gradually changes in shape. All these spots are ac- tually sun painted, and you will recognize the fact that you are looking on the actual economy of the solar surface, able to review some of the processes rcaiiy taking place there. You may not bo able to find an explanation of these changes of form. They remain still a mystery of astronomy. The processes are continually taking place, although the sun looks so calm and still. I have spoken of the irreg- ularity of the sun's surface, and we will now have a picture showing that irregularity on a larger scale. Father Seccki took a picture of one of those faculae. If you look on the surrounding part as representing the general surface of the sun, you will see that the facuhsare very large, and distinguished from tha rest by their brightness. The irregularities around the faculse are not the rough mottling, but a feature more delicate. This was recognized by Herschel, and railed by him the corrugation. He compared ic to the irieirularity of the surface of an orange. Now vou have another picture showing the same corrugations, the whole picture being devoted to that one leatuiv. There are the corrugations, and y..n see them surrounding a small spot without a penumbra, Now you can recognize the justice of Herschel's description. These corrugations have p i v'en rise to a great deal of study in late times. You can recognize the central part of these corruga- tions as bright granules, but in preference I will use the terra " rice-grains," because Prof. Langley has found it convenient to distinguish the rice-graina from still smaller spots to which tho name of granules has been given by him. The picture next to be shown will indicate tho rice-grains, which are not so delicate as those Prof. Laugley has discovered. Dr. Huggins in England has taken the picture, and from its regular aspect it has been called Dr. Huggins's floor cloth. Still 1 have very little doubt that he perceived these gen- eral features. You can see the general darkness of that portion where granules are few. 1'heso dark regions are the dark parts of that mottling which is seen in smaller telescopes. These rice- grains are not in reality small, although they look small in the telescope. Their length is about COO or 700 miles, and the breadth about 300 miles ; in other words, they are about as large as Great Britain. [Laughter.] The study of these objects led to a very singular theory. It was thought by one gentleman from the aspect of the spots that the sun is sur- rounded by double coating, the outer giving light, the inner coating only able to reflect the light, but with no power of its own to give light, and that when the inner coating is broken you see through, the dark surface of the sun, and that surface may be so slightly illuminated and heated by surrounding cloud layers, that life may be possible there. Sir John Herschel said that whatever view we michfe form about these rice-grains, it was certain tha greater part of the light and heat of the sun cornea from them, and he thought that vital energy ia living organisms might be the secietof that light; that, because vitality is connected with electricity, and electricity with light, some of these spots of 600 miles long by 300 miles wide, might be living crea- tures ! OBSERVATIONS OF ASTRONOMERS. I now pass to the particular observations whic't suggested these thoughts. On the sun's surface there were observed " willow leaves," which gavo rise to a great deal of controversy as to their char- acter. You all see those willow leaves of Nasmyth. You will notice that the whole of the broad surfaco of the sun appears to be made up by the crossing of a multitude of willow leaves. They appear moro distinctly in the central part, and are very well recognized on the outlying border of the spot. But Avhen that matter was submitted to careful study, it was found that there was great occasion to doubt whether the long willow-leaved streaks existed all over tho surface of the sun, and an astronomer of your own has given a good account of them. But before I come to Laugley's work 1 must gire a picture by Father Secchi. It would appear that ho, observing the solar spots in the clear atmosphere of Eome, was able to recognize the true nature of thesa streaks. The general surface of the aun is made up B Tribune Extras— FampJtlct Scries. of that peciiliar rough dotted appearance already desciibed. It would seem as thouglx from this gen- era] Mirt'ace there was a gradual streaking out in tlio neiu'liooi h 1 uf the spots. You will see that they spread around and across these spots, and are there cjiiitc •di.-tinct in character from the rice-grains in tii'- Lreneral surface of the sun. "VYe will now have a picture from Prof. Langley, Tvim worked in tin- in -iirhborhood of Pittsburgh, at a bight of about 1,100 feet. lie would seem to have been a'di* to rccoirni/e ilic fact that the rice-grains may In- divided into smaller particles. lie has found thai tin- invatcr part of the sunlight undoubtedly comes fiom these little specks of brightness on the FIII I :;<•'• of the sun, while the General level of the Bun, the background on which these bright specks an- proj eted, is very rnui-li darker. And the picture now presented is a drawing by Prof. Laugley. It would appear to be the e.isc that little more than about one-hundredth part of the sun's light is given l.v the dark background on which these bright (.peeks of li_rllt lliay lie seen. I have to pass on to the spectroscope discoveries l«y \\liieh the real nature of tl is wonderful orb, •whose appearance we have been considering, has 1). en determined— I mean spectroscopic analysis. "We have to consider what are the real substances in the sun, and what the processes taking place on that sol: a- surface. In Langlcy's picture you will notice the details are on a minuter se.°le than in Fr. hi's pictiire. LaiiL'ley has been a'de to recognize in these -rraiiH multitudes of granules, and in the neighborhood of the spots you will see how they lengthen out, how they se«-in carried across this dark region in the spot. In some places Lanyie.v has been to recognize on the dark background of the t pot what seem to be- long filaments, the breadth of v, hieli cannot be less than 50 miles. They seem to be iided vertically with respect to the sun, and in the neighborhood of the spot some wonderful force H'-ems t<> sway them toward the center of the spot. These wonderful lilamcnts are thousands of miles in leiiL'tn, and 40 or oi) miles in width. We will now .di T tin- r. -ult- ..{ 'the spectroscopic study of the Bun. J v, ill show you a diagram of the solar spectrum. You lake tin- li'jhi of the sun, and you receive it 1hroiii:h certain triangular pieces of glass, and the li-ht of the -mi is spread into the rainbow-tinted >k, ulncli .streak is crossed by a multitude, of llal'k li: I lii- picture, to which I M»W point, Is a picture of the solar spectrum. On further investigation, it was found that an incandescent body used as a source of I'-ht, in-:, ad of basing a rainbow-tinted streak < Bdbya multitinle of dark lines, threw a rain- bow-tinted streak without any dark lines al all. It was also found that a gaseous body gives a sp»c!rao different from this, consisting of two or three dark lines. Here is the spectrum given by sodium in a vap"»r- ous condition; and that— a dark spectrum wiila bright lines— was found to be the quality of a spec- trum given by a gaseous body. FIG. I. FIC.S. FIG 3. FI a. 4. COMPARISON OF SPECTRUM LINES. Fis. 1. Spectrum of the soiar prominences. Fig. 1*. Solar spectrum. Vis. 3. Coat nuous snectrnm. with (inrk lines of sntlinm. ¥>£. 4. Double brijrbt Hue: the spectra Ji of so limn. I will now call your attention to a comparison between these results and the musical scale. Tho red lisiht corresponds with the basa, and the purplo with the treble notes, and then this rainbow-tinted streak without dark is the complete scale without breaks. The one with the dark lines is the scale crossed by dark chords. If a musician were to hear a piano played in another room out of his sight, and he heard a chord struck, he would know which it was, and in the same way, if you see that a gaseous light gives a certain kind of spectrum, the chemist knows what the light is ; and it was found that tho dark lines of the solar spectrum indicated vapors cooler than the sun's mass and cutting oil' a portion of the sun's light. These vapors are giving out a quantity of light, but being cooler than the sun, around which they lie, thevcut oft' a portion of his lifiht. Thus arise tho dark lines, and the chemist only want- to determine the exact position of these. lines to find out what elements are in the sun. Thus iron, copper, and other elements known to us were discovered to bo in tho vaporon? atmosphere surrounding the sun. A well-known German physicist came to the con- clusion that c.'rtain elements urivine out tho bright line, spectrum, give more lines the greater I he pres- sure, and that tho first lines given correspond to those POCII in tho solar spectrum. The research was continued at tho Mint, where it is important in connection \vith alloys of metals, and Dr. Henry Draper, of your country, is con t inning it. These ro- Astronomical Lectures. searches will throw important light ou the coudi- tioii of the sun. SOLAR PROMINENCES AND CORONA. It was observed that the spots waxed and waned in number over the surface of the sun, and alter brilf a century of research, that the spots increase and diminish (until they disappear altogether), and that the period within which they waxed and wane is about eleven of our years. After that was discov- ered, it was noted that the magnetic influences of the earth waxed and waned in about the same time. The magnetic needle which points in England to west of north, in this country not to due north, has a swaying motion as if endeavoring t<> move to- ward the sun. That motion undergoes varia- tions, sometimes greater and sometimes less, and physicists watched, and they found that in about eleven years the swaying of the magnetic needle, which was so insignificant us to seem diffi- cult of detection, undergoes a slight change which corresponds with the number of spots on the sun. When the spots are greatest it has its greatest sway, and when the spots are fewest it has the least sway. The aurora also was associated with the sun. But further evidence of these influences was needed, and it came in 1859, when a bright spot suddenly made its appearance on the sun, and it was found that the Bslf-recerding magnetic needle at Kew made certain jumps at the same instant ; auroras appeared in both hemispheres, and everything proved that at that moment the sun had given out magnetic influences, not to our earth alone, but doubtless to Mercury and Venus and Mars, then to the asteroids and to Jupiter and Saturn. Anew bond of harmony had been found within the solar system. [A photographic picture representing prominences 011 the sun was here exhibited.] In 1842 these were looked upon as belonging to the atmosphere of the moon, but they were proved in 1868 to belong to the sun. They were like garneta around a brooch of jet, and these were found to be actually existing on the surface of the sun. What were they? During the eclipse of 1868 that question was answered, and it was found that they are not flames or mountains, but masses of glowing hydro- gen. It was by the spectroscope that it was discov- ered. Consisting of glowing gas, they would give Btich lines as these, and the four lines of the gas hydrogen were recognized. A curious experiment will be produced by glow- Ing hydrogen. Tubes are filled with hydrogen under a low pressure corresponding to the pressure which is believed to exist on the prominences of the sun, and yon will have the true color of these promi- nences, shining with the true light of glowing hydrogen. [An exceedingly brilliant experiment was hero made, the hydrogen appearing to glo\v brightly even with all the lights in the room in fall blaze, and showing an exact imitation of the solar promi- nences.] A new method of research was applied ; it was now known that the flames shone with a light that could be divided into separate lines in the day time. Tho spectroscope spread out these lines; they were visible. It was found even possible to see the promi- nences themselves. [A picture of the sun's chromosphere was uext produced.] THE CHROMOSPHERE. This ruddy matter around the sun is called tho chromosphere. You will presently see injected into it a still more ruddy matter, as if there was an ex- plosion on the surface of the sun. [A bright crimson mass was here shot through the chromosphere and slowly fell back. The audience applauded vigor- ously.] Processes such as this have been watched, and have taken place on the surface of the sun, be- fore the eyes of observers. Another of these experi- ments will be made for you by Prof. Morton's assist- ant, Mr. Wale. In this picture you see the whole fieid covered with ruddy matter, and this corre- sponds with diagrams of real pictures taken by as- tronomers. ERUPTION PROMINENCES. First sta?e of a prominence observed byZolliierat lOb. 22m., An?. 29 1860. Hight about 45,000 miles. In this picture you see the explosion just as if a rocket was sent up, and here, in the next picture, one hour later, the upper part of the eruption sink- ing back to the surface of the sun. The next picture is one taken at the Cambridge Observatory. Nothing is clearer than that here some matter has bee3 thrown lorth from the sun. Here is a ruddy cascade Tribune Extras— Pamphlet Series. of hydrogen, and there you see it gradually returu- ing to a position of rest. FRUPTTON PROMINENCES. Pcoo-il stage of proiniuence observed by Ziillner at lib. 20ni., Any. 20, 18C9. One thingon tins subject is very suggestive, tnoufrn its true meaning is yet to be discovered. The spots on the sun are arranged in two zones, and these cor- espoiul with the temperate zones on the earth. Ii ^8 in these zones that the largest spots appear, and rpoisare never seen far outside these zones. In *ho other parts of the sun's surface we have a gradual spreading out of this ruddy matter, as if yon should pour an oily liquid into water or other matter of a slis/Mly diH<>rent density. You see that matter spreading through the water. It is matter of one kind of density spreading through another. In the region outside of the spouting zone it is as it this hydrogen were floating about, finding its own level. The prominences are in many cases 80,000, in one case 200.000 miles in hight. Ten globes such as this earth might ho piled one on the other, and only reach the higlit of one of these. We have manifest evidence th.it t here is really an eruptive activity in these spouting zones. In this picture yon see how there was a real erjpticn, propelling something un- li mml" unrinj ihe solar ecUp Proctor'* Astronomical I/ectures. THE SOLAR CORONA. I pass on to another object, the solar corona, which gives us further indication of the force acting out- ward from the sun. I have a third of those ingenious experiments by Prof. Morton to illustrate these vari- ous phenomena. We shall have the natural progress of a solar eclipse. The inoon'3 dark body will pass over the snn's disk. In America the moon is allowed to travel faster than under ordinary circumstances, and an eclipse which usually takes about three hours will here take but a minute. [Laughter.] You will notice the formation of Bailey's beads, and see that the bright edge of light is broken up. Then instantly bursts out the corona. I am told that this jrcally corresponds very closely indeed to what is Been during a total eclipse of the sun. Now what is that corona ? It was once thought to be merely due to the sun's light shining through our atmosphere. When it was found that the prominences of hydro- gen exist at a very low pressure, it was a natural conclusion that there cannot be a solar atmosphere extending to the hight of this corona. The pressure at the Dase would be enormously great. As time went on. it was seen that it must be a solar appendage. In the first place, we will have a picture taken by a noted French as- tronomer. It is a very remarkable view, so much so that considerable doubt was expressed; but that has now been all removed. In the eclipse of 1868 this question of the corona naturally came into great prominence. Now it was to be dealt with. The point was that pictures should be taken of it very carefully indeed. In 1809, a picture was taken of it by Mr. Gilmau of New-York, which showed a new appearance — an appearance of radiation, as if it was combed out. You will notice all these streaks spreading out. Here is a picture of the same on a larger scale. In this I shall invite you to notice the number of minute bright specks. Mr. Gilmau says they were there as distinct entities. Zolluer has no- ticed such bright specks constantly flashing out. They seem to be masses of incandescent, exceed- ingly bright matter. Now we begin to see that the corona gives evidence of a force going out of the sun. It seems to me that the evidence of such a force is to be found in photographic pictures. If we can show that during the progress of an eclipse the moon's dark body traverses the corona, it must be material belonging to the sun. We will have apicture showing the corona of 1870. It was photographed in Syracuse. So the doubt began to be re- moved that it is really a solar phenomenon, radi- ating in this wonderful way. Upon the confirming evidences and features here presented, not in a pic- ture subject to artistic fancies, but from the corona itself, you begin to realize that there is continuous action outward from the sun, and that there are means by which thig corona, extending a million, miles from the sun, is repelled by some central forces. They do not seem to be constant, for in other pic- tures, taken in the eclipse of 1871, the corona was very much unlike this. This picture shows tho corona photographed in India by Lord Lindsay's party. During the time of the eclipse six photo- graphs were taken. By combining these pictures, instead of that radiation there are various curves of double curvature, as we call it. This will show that from the center of the sun a force is produced out- ward, and then there is a drawing back until a new force is exerted and there is another throwing out. So that there seems clear evidence that the corona belongs to the sun, and that it is acted upon by a propulsive force. THE EXHAUSTION OF SOLAR HEAT. Here, then, we have an immense mass of matter, glowing with an enormous intensity of heat, sur- rounded by vast flames, swept by storms of a nature we cannot conceive, surrounded by the glowing coro- na.which spreads out again into another phenomenon, the zodiacal light, growing more and more tenuous, and extending even as far as the orbit of Mars if not to the end of the solar system. The sun seems to us to be perfectly still. When we consider what we have learned about him we know that all the forms of uproar on this earth are as absolute quiet compared with what is taking place on his surface. Even the hideous groanings of the earthquake are surpassed a million fold by the disturbances on every square mile of that inflamed sea. This is no idle dream. This great central machine of the solar orb, the central heart, pulsates with life and will continue to do so until the fuel is exhausted. How does the sun maintain this fire ? Why is there no gradual loss of energy ? If the sun were a mass of coal of the same bulk, that coal, in the course of 5,000 years, would bo entirely consumed, and the sun would be a mere cinder. If the sun were a mass of water, which has a quality of specific heat in its combinations by which it gives out more heat in cooling by any num- ber of degrees than any other matter, in the course of 5,000 years it would lose 1,500 degrees Fahrenheit in temperature. There are two theories of the man- ner in which the sun's heat is kept up. One is by the downfall of meteoric matter. The other is that it is maintained by the gradual contraction of its substance, the same process by which the rest of the solar system was formed. In any case there is cer- tainly a lime in the far future when the sun's heat will be exhausted. There is indeed one wav in which we may imagine that the perennial supply may be continued. Oar sun is traveling along through space, carrying with him the planets, the comets, &c., which circle around him as he sweeps onward, and it may be JUPITER 10 Tribune Extras — Pamphlet Series. f'vit he comes to now regions of mnteorie mat ti-r, or. a- u wore, tu l're-li lields ami paMinv.-, new, where the supply may lie rcne\ved. \Vhet her this be so or not we do not know. ]'>iu tlxio is this process of exhaustion "which must mie day come to an end ; an.l y.-t tin-re is mi eoiitrivanre l»y whicli tliat waste, that squandering of v.lndil have spoken, may lie prevented. Ooulil it In-, every year of that supply w .ulil l.c eh.iiiL'ed in;o :.".T.iM;i,OUO of years. The v a>te is runt imially Lii'ini: cm. Verily we have here a problem which may will tax. all our thoughts. J.'-t H- mit eli-ini - it at once, as we are apt to do, with the tlicm^lit that our new knowledge has shown us imperfection in the scheme of creation. Let us ratlier say witli the 1'oet Laureate : ] 1-1 Uiiowle !»,'<• u'nnv from more to more, But Mime nf reverence in us dwell ; TLi;it miiiil and soal. according well, May make one music as before, but vaMer. [Applause.] varies in shape as the planet Is pursuing different part* of its course round the heavens. SATURM MARS VENUS THE FAMILY OE PLANETS. B 1 ( '« >M > LECTURE OF R. A. PROCTOR DISTINcil -I-IIINc; CUARACTERISTICS OF THE INXEIl I \MII.V OF PLAXETS— MERCURY AND VEXUS— 'i in: I:\IM ii, I:I:C;U:DED AS A PLANET— UNDS AMI -I IS, POLAR SNOWS, OCEANS, AND AIR-CTJR- J:IMS (,i M\I:S — WONDERFUL CHANGES 03- BERVED IV .11 ri I r:i:'S EQUATORIAL BELT— SIMI- 1 \l: 1 KAIl l:l S OF SATURN, URANUS, AJS'D M;i'- •\\-\r. The M'eiind lecture of the course on astronomy by Mr. 1,'ic lianl A. Proctor, Honorary Secretary of tho i al A>ir "iiMmii al Society, was given at As- sociation Hall. January 15. Tho subject— "The Family of J'lauets" — was illustrated, like tho lii-t leetiiro on "The Sun," by means of a sc-ric'scii ]iic-turc-s and diagrams, made specially to illu.-tratc- Pn. |. Proctor's lectures in America. A lari:e aiidienc'i- greeted the lecturer, who spuke a3 {ollu\\B: LOOPED PATHS OF THE PLANETS. Till: LECTURE. The plain-is an- so <• illc-d from a Greek word sisjnlfvlnsr \vand. i." in-cviu-i- thc'v ch;inzo their position on Iho ln-.ivi n~. I 'nlike ill • sail and moon, the planets do not tr.ivi-1 :il\va\ s in .,!,<• ilin-ctiou roaud the heavens, but on 1" ]"'l| (llllll-, plll'-llill,' Tlii'ir \v iiid'riii^ e.,m •*<-,— now high, now low, then hid, l'n._-r. -.-iv.', i-c-t re i^i-adi-, or standing still. In t be I r-i pii I urc- lierr ->]IM\VII ycin liavo vlows of loci;)8 pnrsiic-il liy ihc- dill' n nt plaiic-ts n. uiied m the diagram. In the MI- xi \ I -u \ mi arc- Mlniwii Imw th.- loop !r iverseci (Jupucr In the ilh -.tratod cube), VAItlETIES OF LOOPS TRAVmSED BY THE PLANET ,1111 1 GO. It sr, in< to inn d"sira .li'. m takinz the subject of plan. eta, to oonBidor them from tbe jicilnt of view of life in c.i le-r wurids. Although it is not of any very jnvat scl- value, the subject is ono in which we all take Proctor's Astronomical Tjecfuret. II Interest. A simple method will enable us-- to remember readily tin- various (acts regarding tho planets. I divide the solar family into two parts— tho Interior family, Mercury. Venus, the earth and moon, a nil Mars ; and the outer family, Jirnter, Saturn, Uranus, and Neptune. Quo of tlie facts is tho utter diversity of char- acter between these two families. I want to show that instead of being regarded as two similar families, they ought to be looked upon as two sep- arate families, utterly unlike each other. Whatever •we think of the outer family of larger planets ought to bo derived from the evidences wo have, and not from the analogy of our own earth. It is only tho inner family of planets that wo can judge by our own earth. Ana even in this case we must not fall into the mistake that life on other worlds must be like that of our earth. Our earth itself eives us some such lesson. If we saw one part, and heard of but were prevented from seeing the oiher _>arts, ws might think that life would not exist uudcrtbe varying conditions. Yet we know it does. Even very recently tliero was a very striking case in illustration. We all thought that there could be no life at the bottom of the sea ; that in the deepest peas there was a great darkness and a pressure which must prevent life. At the depth of a mile or two the pressure is so great that when wood is carried down the water is forced into it, so that it will never float again. We know also that light is a desirable quality for all living creatures we are acquainted with, aod we came to the conclusion that light could not exist there. But Drs. Carpenter and Thompson have let down their dredges and drawn up, from the depth of two or three miles, living creatures— and not merely living creatures, but having eyes and able to see, not- withstanding the darkness that was supposed to reign there. So unlike are the conditions there, that when these creatures were brought up where the pressure was less, they burst. There was quite enough remaining to show that they had been alive but had been torn apart when the pressure diminished. That was one example. We might also consider the Arctic regions, and say how unlikely it would l>e to anybody in the temperate zones that life could exist there. How utterly unlikely, again, that life should exist in the torrid zone ; or, a train, when you climb the higiits of mountains, and coma to places where the at- mospheric pressure is very much diminished, and great cold prevails, and all the conditions are unlike those that exist at the sea level, you would be certain nc life could exi-;t there, if it were not for the fact that we visit those regions and ascertain that life does exist there. So that in dealing with the different planets we need iiot concern ourselves to show that the conditions are absolutely lik* those prevailing on the earch. But it •will be a useful thing to compare the conditions of things as they exist in those planets with what prevails on the earth. In order to get rid of those numbers, which will be found in thf text-books of astronomy, lot us take re.ative conceptions as to the distance. If you call the distance of the earth 10, tiien for the distance of Mer- cuiy from tho sun you have the number!; Venus 7, and Mars 16. For the diameters of those planets we have Mercury 3,000 miles ; Venus, 7,500 miles ; for tho earth, 7,900, and for Mars, 4,500. You see we have an increase upward to tho earth and then downward. Mercury being 3,000, Venua 7,500, tho earth 7.90D — tho largest of all these planets, and also dlgnlflo:! by having a moon ; and then we have Mars with its diameter of 4,500 miles. All these planets rotate on their axes In about 24 hours. They all resemble each other in that respect. They all seem to have very similar densities, to be composed of matter of about the same density aa of this earth, tho density of our earth being about 4J times, some say as much as 6.J times the density of water. 1C is somewhere between these values. MARS ORBITS OF THE INNER PLANETS. To begin with Mercury, the nearest, of all those planets to the sun. Tue feature waich strikes u* first ia dealing with Mercury is tho great heat to which that planet is exposed. Mercury travels on an eccentric •orbit, and is exposed to a greater heat from the sun at certain times than at others. We have before us dia- grams of the orints. This inner orbit is the orbit of Mercury, and you will notice Mercury is at one time much nearer to the sun tnan in another part of his year. The year of Mercury is 88 of our days, so that in the course of 88 days Mercury passes from a verv great hoat when nearest, to a comparatively less heat when farthest from the sun. But, even when the sun's heat, is least, it is much greater than that to which our earth is exposed. Tho quantity of heat received by Mer- curv varies from four times to ten times what wo have. Now, that is really a serious difference. Only imagine what would happen to us if the sun's light and beat were increased four-fold, and then extend your conception to an increase ten-fold. I think I need hardly say that the heat in that case would bo so great that creatures such as we are could not exist ; animal life would be destroyed on the earth if the sun suddenly gave out from four to ten times as much heat as ho actually does. Then, can there be inhabitants in Mer- 12 Tribunt Extras— cury I Some say that !f only the atmosphere were very tare which surrounds Mercury, that planet could pos- sibly have life there. Tu the Torrid Zone, at a certain liighf you reach the snow line, and above tbat line there •would seem to be no life ; bat yet it does seem possible that life may exist and does exist there. But there is one circumstance that is overlooked in that. lu reality when you go to the higher regions vhere the air is so rare, the sun's rays are not dimin- ished. The air docs not tret warm : it does not prevent the heat from passing through it; it does not get warm, end ir. the .-ha. le the air is cold. But iu the direct heat of the sun expose your baud, and the heat is more in- tense than is easily bearable. Even with snow and ice covering the mountain tops, the face and hands are blis- tered by the heat of the sun. We should have a more intolerable contrast in Mercury than in the case of an atmosphere like our own. There would be very intense beat under the direct rays of the sun, and comparative cold iu the shadow, and life would be almost unendura- ble to us; and if the atmosphere of Mercury were so thin there would be. evaporation of all the water, aud that would be another condition opposed to ours. It iipp.-ars to me that that difficulty is sufficiently great to make us doubt whether life can exist on Mercury; I will not say such life as can exist on the earth, but; any ot the higher forms of life, underthese conditious. LIFE IN OTHER WORLDS. Mercury is a planet waiting for the time when life may exist on it; when the sun'a heat sball be sufficiently reduced, aud then life will bo as comfortable as it is on ( anh. Heie \ve are introduced to considerations of great importance in this point of view of life in other worlds. Though life now exists on tho earth, there have be.eu long successions of ages, during which life has not been possible on, earth; and there may be long successions of ages during which life will be tolerable on the planets. A plain t j< intended to support life, but not for all time, but lor a small poll Ion of the planet's existence. Now, coming t( tho gravity of tho planets. The pravity of Mercury, ov ing to its smalluess, is so reduced that one pound would only press about five ounces; aud here we are introduced to a considera- tion of tho Importance of gravity to ourselves. Wo sometimes look on gravity and weight of matter as be- JIIL' an inconvenience rather than otherwise, but if it Were not for : raviij- we should be continually at a loss ; objects would not stand firm, and we should stagger for want of weight, and would be iu that difficulty which we find in endeavoring to walk in water beyond a cer- tain depth. As you know, divers wishing to walkabout in deep water have iieavy weights attached, so as to keep thi-m.-elves in place. It is an absolute necessity, therefore, that gravity chould e.\i>i. ami what wo are in the habit of lookiug upon as an incon\ . menco is, therefore, in reality, a verv important part of Iho earth's economy. If tho caithV gravity were reduced to that in Mercury all the plants would Miller; flowers droop or keep their heads erect according to their structure, and it is absolutely i ' >-ai v to continuance In life that a plant whose i r coni'.itiou !* '.hat of uprightness, should remain Pamphlet Scries. so, and that that which droop? gTionlfl droop fit a props* angle. It is shown that if that were not the case tho •stamens and pistils would not be properly adjusted for the fertilization of the germs. And so it has been re- marked that the whole mass of the earth, from pole to pole, is engaged in keeping the snowdrop, the crocus, &?., iu their proper position. In the case of Mercury gravity is so much reduced that all these things would be changed. The same difficulty applies to the plansC Mars, which is so much smaller thau the earth. THE CHARACTERISTICS OF THE PLANET VENUS. But I now pass from Mercury to tho next planet, Venus. Venus is the most beautiful, and we would imagine from ordinary appearances to be the noblest ol all except the sun and our moou. You will remember Milton's words: Now yloive ! the firmament With living snpphires: Herperu*, that kd The staiy_v bost, ruile lirig.itest. * * * But Venus, examiued by tiie telescope, docs not re- ward the astronomers so well as you might expect. She Is too gloriously illuminated by the sun, and the applica- tion of the telescope is disappointing. Again, we never see Veuus under proper conditions. You never see the whole portion of the illuminated surface. Look at this diagram. You have the path of the earth here, aud the path of Venus is inside. Wuen Venus is nearest to the earth tho sun lies in the same direction, and therefore Venus turns her darkened siile and can- not be seen. When beyoud the sun his brightness obscures her. The only time Venus can be studied ia when she is on the two opposite sidss of her path, and then she is seen either as a gibbous moon or a half moon. We know, with respect to Venus, that she, being very much nearer to the sun than the earth is, must have a great deal more heat. Her heat is not so great as that of Mercury; still she has twice as much heat as the earth has. Iu other respects Venus is more like the earth. Although Veuus has no moon, yet being nearer the sun she must have tides, and they are barely comparable with those that exist on the earth. But there is one peculiarity iu the condition of Venus that seems very unfavorable to life, as we know it here. According to the observations of the Italian astronomers, who seem to have been able to see spots on Venus, (pro- bably on account of tha clearness of tho atmosphere.) which we cannot see at all iu England, tho axis, instead of being sloping at a small angle, is much inclined. Only for a short time would she have equal day anl night, but when tho northern pole is toward ths i;uii, all the polar pans would bo continually turno 1 toward the sun; not merely a small part, but vory nearly half of the planet on that side. When the southern polo would bo turned toward the sun, that si.lo would have a con- tinual day, and there would be continual night over nearly half of tho planet. So there would be a very great change iu tho condition of the planet in Winter aud Summer. The 3 ear of Veuus is about seven and a half months. It must be remembered that this sunshines with twice the size and gives out twice tho heat that it does to tho earth. The change between the two condi- tions of W inter and Summer would bo even more serious than the extreme heat and cold in either couditiou. In Proctor1 1 Astronomical Lectures. 13 of fhls lot tin tatas New-York. You know the pole is ruiBou about 41. degrees. In Spring the sun rises to a bight or about 60 degrees above the horizon, in Summer 33 degrees higher, iii Winter it rises 23 decrees lower afc midday. Suppose instead of 23 decrees tUe change amounted to 60 degrees. Then you would have at the New- York of Venus— you would have it 60 degrees higher in Summer, which would carry it 10 de- grees north of the point overhead. Tlie sun is circling about the pole, round and round. There would be day all the time, and then there would be tnat tremendous sun, •with all the effect of tropical sunshine. Tlie accumulation of heat in the Summer by Venus must be enormously preat. Copsider the Winter. There is the sun in the Spring 60 degrees above the horizon, but in Winter itis 50 degrees below. It does not rise at all above the horizon. It is continual merht, and that after that extremely heated Summer. Those changes are not agreeable to our ideas of the possibilities of life. They sugarest the necessity — migration. That is absolutely necessary to certain classes of beings here on this earth. Now, human beings on the earth do not migrate, but the inhabitants of Venus, if there are any, must migrate so as always to bo in parts where the sun does not rise too high. That would be quite possible ; it may be '.a absolute essential condition there, not for a portion of living beincs as here, but for all. RELATIONS OF THE MOON TO THE EARTH. I shall only pause to spe.ik of tho earth in relation to the moon. Our earth has a companion, the moon. We looK upon it as a mere satellit3, but it is another member of the inner family of planets. If you were a member of a world circling around some distant star, you would be unable to distinguish the motion of the moon from that of the earth. It is only from our earrh that it seems to go around us. It really goes around the sun. Every world must have that peculiarity, that it m ist eeein to its inhabitants to be the center of the whole universe. In Venus. Mars, in even the asteroids, each seems to bo the center of the universe. Thus the astron- omers of oil time fell into the mistake of thinking the earth was the fixed center of the universe. Mars, instead of being like Venus, is a planet that we can study very fully indeed. We have here the orbits; here is that of the earth, there that of Mars. A portion of the time the face of Mars is turned toward the sun and is also turned toward the earrh, and thus illumi- nated is studied to great advantage. You can conceive therefore how it is that astronomers have been able to take siu;h pictures as these of the planet, having fea- tures resembling those of the earth. There is an appear- ance of two bright white points at opposite sides, which have always been called the snowy poles of Mars. Her- schel was the first to perceive that they waxed and waned in siz1. He noticed that the axis was inclined very much like that of our earth, or rather more than our earth, but so nearly like, it tnat the same sort of seasons prevail. He noticed that when the Summer was in pro- gress the polar regions seemed smaller than in Winter. ' lhat was the first thing to show that the planet was like our earth. Our snowy regions do not cover more than the arctic regiona, and they occupy about the same proportions as those of Mnr.s's surface. Slncn th» polar snows do not extend further, therefore the same sort of climate it seemed probable prevailed there. Other features corresponding to the idea of the bab» liability of Mars were noticed. Some portions have a greenish hue, as though there were oceans. The plan- et's continents, or what we call continents, wero ruddy; and white surfaces sometimes seemed to form over these continents or oceans, and to melt away during the day, as if clouds were being dissipated by the action of tho sun. THE VEGETATION OF MARS. There were others, French astronomars, who sug- gested that the vegetation in Mars, instead of green, may be red. Spring may, indeed, come there, blushing like a maid. It was said, however, that we have no evidence that that ia the case. How do we know that these green regions are oceans, or the white regions snow? It seemed somewhat bold to say so— to say that that must be the case. Might not the whito region be frozen carbonic acid, and tho ocean something altogether different from what we have on. earth? That argument is put forward by Dr. Whewell, and it seemed very difficult; to overcome it. A man might certainly be thought very bold, on considering that he never could come nearer to Mars than 30,003,000 miles, to say what its surface contains. But we know now as certainly as though we had takea •water from it and had It analyzed by a chemist, or drank it; we know certainly that water exists there. The spectroscope comes in here. When the sun is not hieh above the horizon you recogniza in its spectrum a number of sharply defined dark lines. As his liirht shines through the vapors of our atmosphere, the physi- cists caine to know that these Hues were due to water in our atmosphere. Here I take the opportunity to cor- rect an injustice, of which I have been guilty to one of your leading physicists. Dr. Cook of Cambridge. I have been saying in my lectures tha* Sscchi anl Jansen found out that these streaks were due to water; but that fact had been shown in a much more sciontifio manner several months before by your countryman. He observed the sun, noted these bauds as they firs! faintly maile their appearance, while the sun was still high up. Then he took his hygrometer, and he noted that as the hygrometer showed greater moisture in tha air, these bauds became more distinct. He showed be- yond the possibility of doubt that they were due to •water In our atmosphere. Mars was observed in 1361 by Dr. Huggins, and it was noticed that across the faint solar spectrum of the planot. there were those wa'er bands. They might have been in the atmosphere of the planet, or they might have been caused ;by the moisture of our own air. But Dr. HuL'gins determined lo remove all doubt by turning his spectrum to the moon, which was low down ; so if the bands of the spec- trum had been due to moisture in our air, they would have been more clearly s?en in the spectrum of the moon's light, but instead of that they were wanting. Therefore no doubt remained that they really belonged to the planet Mars, that there was vapor of water in the atmosphere of tne planet. This was a moat charming Tribune Extras— Pamphlet Series. . How could water exist there without also jvaporatiou 1 All the operations of our atmosphere — jt- •.Indues. It was then midday iu Mars. That lutro- Snced a consideration of some Interest aa to tho study CJ Mars. We want ia thac study noi merely a clear . id. o . one side it luarks where tho day is beginning; t ier u'v-ro it is ending. Tlio presenco of the 'HI, therefore, eeems to indicate the gathering of miM.v clouds iu the morning and misty clouds in the & veiling. It lias i>ccn f.i«\ that after all, although there may be (rater there, there may not be au atmosphere carrying icrcat cloud mists, but one so shallow that on account of Jbe great cold, instead of clouds hoar frosc is formed apon the surface of the planet in the night, and when tho day Is proceeding that hoar frost is molted, and the surface of the planet is exposed at once. DIVERSITY BETWEEN MARS AND THE EARTH. This theory in relatiou to Mars was that it was a disk or globe covered with a hoar frost, and having other peculiarities different from ours. That theory seemed to me so unpleasant that I put forward myself, or at least I adopted, the theory that Mars is a globe like our eunh where all similar processes take place— rain, wind, Blurni, clouils, rivers', being produced, denudation tak- ing place— everything seemed so much like the earth. But ti'cn came this annoying theory that would put M.irs altogether out of the scheme of an inhabited world, that it '.van only covered at night by hoar frost, and that there was everything in Mars unlike tho earth instead of like it. I determined to destroy that noxious theory, and I began au e.i*ay for the purpose. But I found as I went along that th« new theory was as strong as tho one I had adopted lu its .-tiMii, and I finished that essay by advocating tho theory that I intended to destroy. I found there was ver\ good n-ason indeed to believe that Mars is in a, condition unite unlKc'i our earth; that it has a very rare atmosphere, that it has an atmosphere bearing the same relation to that of tola globe that tho oceans of Mara at id its con I incuts bear to ours. You will notice that tho oceans in Mars are very much smaller proportionately than tho oceans on our own earth. There is no Paciflo then-. Iu fact there Is no Atlantic. You have only oc 'a us i "inparativcly small ; the lands and seas are intermixed, Y in lako the caso of our own earth. Tho two Americas ii'iin ;i single island; Europe, Asia, a;.d Africa form bet large island; and wo have the oceans around ul.mds. Tnero Is nothing of that in Mars. You lavcl from any ouo part of Mars to another. You need not leave the sea or land, according to your tasto, if 3rou arc an inhabitant of Mars. Hero is a chart of Mars. There are tho various divisions as I charted them down, and hero you will notice you can pass by water from one ocean all around, on to the side oceans and again northward; in fact, there is no limit to the extent of the Journeys. And there is a curious feature, tho existence of bottle-necked oceans-, with narrow inlets connecting them with the larger ones. A French student who recently dealc with that matter has shown that if our seas were to become shallow, tho form of the oceans would be lika that; there would bo many bottle-necked se.is. It seems therefore as if Mars had a smaller quantity of waterin proportion toils surface than our earth. And so >o iu respect to the atmosphere; there will lie much less nosphere to each square i»i!e; and altogether we have ondition of things quire unlike that I had previously supposed. And then there is the email gravity of tha planet. If the gravity of our own earth were suddenly changed to tho gravity in Mars, a pound weight would bo reduced from 16 to 6 ounces, and the air would ba reduced in the same proportion. At tho hight of six or seven miles in a balloon ascent with Mr. Glaisher the air was so rare, Coxwell found the strength leaving him, while his companion was insonsi- ble. It was only by the skin of his teeth he escaped, for his arms being benumbed, he pulled tho valve rope with his teeth. At the hight of seven miles the atmos- pheric pressure is reduced to one-fourth. And here, in the case of Mars, I am speaking of a reduction to one- sixth, which would happen; and if you add the consid- eration that the quantity of air is less, vou have a rarer atmosphere, you have a condition altogether changed i so that light, as we know it, would become impossible, the cold would be greater than you can imagine, and the condition of things becomes altogether different. Evaporation would take place rapidly, and a considera- ble quantity of tho vapor of water would riso in the air In daytime;' snow would bo forme I and carried along bv tho currents— currents that would necessarily arise nnd carry it toward t e pole, and there would bo a gathering of snow at tho poles which would bo due in fact to th« daily forma- tion of snow and tho continuous sweeping of those snows toward the polar regions. The author of that theory, Mr Matthew Williams, says tho gathering of snow would tend to the formation of enormous glaciers, and then sometimes these large masses of snow would be broken up. I looked out for evidence against tho theory, aud I found evidence in favor of it. Gen. Mitch- ell of Cincinnati has given au account of an observa- tion of Mars, in which a great mass ns largo as this whito region was broken of,, and seemed to him to l>o carried up to the polar regions. We never look at M irs nearer than 30,- 000,000 miles. You see that as large a m iss was carried ofl as though a territory as big as Spiiz',) ir^on or Nova Zcmbla, or as large as England, wer.i broke -i off by som« great catastrophe. The idea auffgosttod by tbo natr theory aa to Mara I* th.U Mar* may havo iiesa Inhibited la pact iiuien, but la at present tuo bleak KB abode. V« Proctor's Astronomical Lectures. 15 know that on our own earth life ceases in those upper regions at the hight Coxwell and Glaisher reached, and in Mars lire only of the lower kinds could possibly exist. THE ROTATION OF MAES. I have yet to make a few remarks about Mars. I have told you the plauet has been charted. Its period of rotation has also been determined. It would seem strange that you could tell the time taken by a plonet turning on its axis, ex- actly, within a few seconds, or part or a second. You see that spot in the middle of the planet. You could not be certain, within a quarter of an hour, whether that spot is in the middle of the planet. But if you note this, you can observe it in the planet iu the second rotation. If you are a quarter of an hour wrong in that case, that q larter of an hour is divided between the two rotations. The difference is only seven and a half minutes. That ia divided into three rotations the next day, and so the error is reduced to five minutes; and so on for a month, until the error becomes smaller, and you can let the plauet pass away for a year, so that you can know when exactly it comes back and how many rotations it has made in the in- terim, and thus the error is still more reduced by rota- tion after rotation, until in the course of many years you get the time of rotation accurate within a second or much less. It had been shown by a certain German astronomer that the period of rotation of Mars was 24 hours 37 minutes and 23.J seconds, or thereabouts. Then another German astronomer, Kaiser, improved on that, and he made the period of rotation 24 hours, 37 minutes and 22 6-10 seconds. Well, then, an English student of astronomy, one who does not venture to call himself an astronomer, an English student, Mr. Proctor, thought he would try his hand at this problem. [Applause.] And to his great distress he found that his result was greater than the German's by a whole tenth of a second— that it should be 24 hours. 37 minutes and 22 7-10 of a second. Kniser thought it neces- sary to go over his work and publish a paper on the sub ject. From his paper I found he seemed to make out his case very accurately indeed. Tiiere was a wonderful amount of German care and labor, many details ; but I found, strangely enough, two mistakes. He called the years 1700 and l&CO leap years, whereas we know that in the Gregorian caleudar they are not leap years, and that made all the difference. And when that was corrected, I found my theory of the planet was correct, and the actual time it turned around in was 24 hours, 37 minutes and 22 7-10 seconds. It may seem to you un- necessary to be so exact. But there is one important question which may be solved by such information as that. It has been found that our earth is rotating more and more slowly as centuries go by. The moon liffs the tidal wave; that tiddl wave acts as a brake, as it travels in a direction contrary to that in which the earth rotates, and slowly indeed our earth, ia losing its speed. We cannot measure that chai.ga by any ordinary clork, because our clocks are set by the rotation of the earth. We time our clocks to the transit of the stars. How can we answer a quest-ion such as that except by having some true clock i Here is Mars, this small planet, a pocket chronometer, and we can have that chronometer's time, and so soon as we have her time we can compare with that our own terrestrial clock. There are well-marked places on the face of the planet, and there is this also, that the planet has nothing to disturb its rotation. Tno sun is so far away that the solar tides do not afl'jct it ; it has no moon, and the oceans are not suited to the formation of a tidal wave; therefore the change of the planet's rotation would be insignificant. The plauet is a suitable clock for getting at our earth's rotation. THE ASTEROIDS AND THE GIANT PLANETS. I now pass from these planets to the asteroids. There are now known 134 of these minor planets. There is a theory in the books that the asteroids are produced by the bursting of planets. That ia not correct. Observa- tions on the orbits which would result from such a catas- trophe completely deinoliatx that theory. ORBITS OP THE OUTER PLANETS. Considering the giant planets, to which I next we shall feel that they may be quite unlike this earth on which we live. Consider the enormous size of Jupiter. We are accustomed to consider him larger than our earth: but it is not merely that; he ia 1,230 times lareer. Here ia a difference altogether too great to be regarded as a difference of degree ; it ia a difference of kind. Our conceptions of Jupiter are necessarily different. We should expect it would be a different kind of body from that on which wo live, and we find clear evidence of that as we consider him. We have views of the planets here, but they are not aa clearly visible to this large audience aa I require. I have better views, and I shall have the room darkened and the views thrown upon the screen. As soon as you look on Jupiter you feel that you have to deal with a body altogether different from Mars and Mercury; altogether different from those which we hare been dealing with. Compare these views with those of the planet Mars, and you will see that there is no simi- larity in the conditions. Iu Jupiter you have bands oi 16 Tribvne Extras— Pamphlet Scrfet. clouds which havo sometimes been compared to the trade-wind zones. But our trade-wind zones and banda of clouds upon the equator would not be visible from a distant planet. When Jupiter is brought on, you will realize how much Jupiter differs from Mir*. You will feel whoa you look on these views of Jupiter, taken at Cam- bridge Observatory, that you have before you an atmosphere heavily luden with some kind of vapor or vapors, It may be many. Cloud masses traveling over the surface- of lands and seas would show eomo degree of agreement in shape with the con- tinents over which they traveled, and if disturbed by the wind they would be torn apart ; but we find them great masses, ns If their d>'pth corresponded with their breadth, as if the depth of these cloul masses was as great as their length and breadth — everything that the tele- ecopo shows us leans to the conclusion that there is a deep atmosphere. You have iu the lowest right hand picture a very email round disc of one of the satellites of the planet Jupiter, and the diameter of it is 2.009 miles. Imagine the 20ih part of that tiny satellite; 'hat would be 100 miles. It is Inconceivable that these cloud masses have no greater depth than the 20th part of that little satellite. You must feel that these clouJ masses, as they appear, Lave a depth comparable with their length. If the atmosphere of Jupiter were only 100 miles deep, the pressure at the bottom would be so great that the lower atmosphere would boa million of times as dense as platinum, the heaviest of all the elements. It is utterly impossible, of course, that any such atmosphere could exist; but that is (ho legitimate calculation, the pressure would be millions of times as great as ours, so as to produce a density equal to that of platinum. There is one peci/narity about t'ue planot opposed to that Idea. Instead of Jupiter being the deuscsfcplanet, it is less ileus,, than tho eartli It? 'lensity is one-fourth the real density of the earth aim corresponds witn that of tho eun, and this seems to givo an explanation of tho difll- cnlty. The great compression of tho sun's attraction •would malcc In- atmosphere dense, but his enormous heat expands the atmosphere, and instead of being a dense globe, wo have a globe less tfense than tho earth. Must it not, be manifestly so in the case of Jupiter, and that by its great size it is brought more nearly in rela- tion to the t-un than to the earth, and must it not be like the sun iu regard to tho heat within his globe 1 You Lave tin; argument derived from the compression of lh>- atmo-pheie of tho planets. Again, tho clouds aro formed ainl earned around and around, and tho planet carried nrouml and around in 10 hours, tho equatorial moro rapidly than the temperate zones. Notice tho equatorial band, brighter than the rest, and you will pereeive that it coiTe-ponds with the equatorial band of tho sun. There ap- no i.-atim'* In Jupiter like those in the earth; and all troes to «l>ow a planet more of tho nature of the HUH than like ours. lint misrht not the ap- pearances be those of ordinary eloiid-i, after a-111 That can be tested by experiment. The light of that planet, instead of giving tho same kind of light as if made of roeky matter and covered with btoncs, sbineg three times as brightly: It shines almost as brightly as if in tho midst of a mass of clouds or snow. If Jupiter were purely white, you might say that it was only these clouds shining that we see ; but in point of fact, Jupiter dues not look white. Therefore you have tho certainty almost that there must ba an Inherent light in it, and if it be Inherent light, if the'centerof tho planet elves it out, It must be at a heat corresponding to that oi red- hot Iron. The satellites of Jupiter may be bodies well lighted, though not intended to supply light to the planet. All tho satellites cannot supply tho planet with 1-lttth of the light which we get from the full moon. They are illuminated by the small sun of Jupiter, which is but the oue-twenty-fifth part of our sun in size. We will havo another picture of Jupiter. You .see how processes are taking place which seem to have led to tho uprising from some interior surface, perhaps a surface far down below the atmospheric envelope, the uprising of a great cloudy mass, surrounded by u dark border, which was distinctly visible to Prof. Mayt-r for hours. Everything, as I think, seems to show us that iu Jupiter we have a* scene of tremendous activity. THE RING STSTEM OF BATtTnV. Now to his brother giant, tho planet Saturn, with Ms glorious ring system. Those belts on Saturn correspond iu kind to those that exist on Jupiter; and I might ap- ply the argument on Jupiter to Saturn without any further explanation. This great bolt of Saturn during tho whole long year of Saturn— lasting 29 years of ours— remains persistently equatorial. Now the axis of Saturn is inclined very much as the earth's axis is inclined, but the equatorial belt never shifts, follow- ing tho sun, as ours does, along the ecliptic. It seeing by its position to show that it is produced by a force re- siding iu tho planet itself. Now there is one argument derived from the ring of Saturn. Thoy searching find out God." Myste- ries are brought before us which no effort on our part enables us to resolve. So far from inducing doubt.it Ehould encourage our faith. As we are in the presence of infinite space and intlnite time, so also are we 'in the presence oi infinite wisdom and infinite power. COMETS AND METEORS. THIED LECTURE OF R. A. PROCTOR REMARKABLE COMETS OF HISTORY— REPULSIVE AC- TION I!Y WHICII THE TAILS APPEAR TO BE FOr;M!:D— COMET FAMILIES OF JUPITER AND HIS I'lillXW GIANTS — THE METEOR SYSTEMS — METEOR.1? ANO COMETS IN THE SUN'S NEIGHBOR- HOOD--EVIDENCE OF THE THEORY THAT METEOR SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN EXPEIXED FROM THE GREAT PLAXETS. Prof. K. A. Proctor, F. E. S.. gravo the third lecture of the course of six, on Astronomy, under the anspices of the Young Men's Christian Association, at Association Hall, on January 17. The subject, ** Comets and Meteors," was treated as in form- er lectures, by means of pictures and diagrams prepared specially for Mr. Proctor, and also by pho- tographs, exhibited on a large scale by means of tbe oxy-liydroi_ren stereopticon of the Stevens' Techno- logical Institute. THE LECTURE. The longer I continue to give these lectures In America the more my difficulty seems to increase, When in Boston, I was asked to give twelve lectures, and fean-d it would lie too great a task. Before I came over to America I thought it impossible that any audience would attend so n a-iy as twelve lectures; but since then, since thatj diiliculty has passed away from my mind, the feeling I Lave is that these lectures are not neailv enough to give the facts I would like to lay before you.' ^Eacd time I give a lecture I fed more and more how much I have to omty- I men- tion this because I should like you to hear in mind that If I seem to bring the facts too rapidly before you, it is due to the difficulty under which I labor. I ff<*l th it I am taxing an audience greatly r>y bringing fa<-ts before them, one after another, with eucli rapidity. It is onlv tiie confidence I have In American audiences which im- pels me to go on with these lectures, bringing on these fact* without giving time, as It were, for any rest of mind. I de.-ire you, QOWever, to FOOOtfEJze MiG under which I labor. The subject I have to deal with to-night is really a fill subject for twelve lectures. It is full of mysteries, and full also of great discoveries which have recently been made. To deal with it in one lecture is a somewhat ambitious attempt.. We have, to begin with, the great wonder that comets and meteors should in any way be associated, they are so unlike each other. Comets are very large bodies, much exceeding the sun In magni- tude and the largest of the stars, and having that mysterious faculty that they possess of coming from fathomless depths of space, after journeys which must have lasted over millions of years, rushing up toward the Sun, passing close around him, and then passing away with no hint as to what depths of space they will fly to. It la a strange fact that we should have to' asso- ciate with bodies like meteors, so small in dimen- sions that a child could iu many cases carry them, bodies so large that our sun sinks into iussuiflcance In comparison with them. THE COMET'S COUIISE EXPLAINED BY GRAVITY. Now let us puss to the facts most important in this matter. Again, I remind you that I am obliged to leave out the facts dealt with in our text-books of astrono- my, to take the more striking facts associated with the views taken by astronomers of the present day. To begin with comets. We have in the first place the fact that comets come from outer space, and alter traveling almost directly toward the sun for a long period of time, circle around him. and pass away again Into the depths or space. There is a fact which seems at first to remove them from all the ordinary laws or motion, certainly all the Luvs presented by the planetary system ; but it was pre- cisely in that, especially, that comets first gave astrono- mers a proof lhat there was no resisting the truth of the law of gravity. Newton took the comot or 1G30, and having found that it was traveling on a parabolic conrsa — .-"ttsr described as an exceedingly long oval — w.is able to say that that comet would follow such ami such a course, although its orbit was of an entirely uiffiircut nature from the planets, and continually changing day by day. Yet he said: "I will follow that body aud tell precisely where it will go ;" and it was thif mastery of Newton over the laws of celestial motion tlias first convinced astronomers of the truth of the laws of gravitv. The comet came and folio .vcd the precise path that Newton suggested. Let us see how the comot m:ived. It came traveling up toward the sun, seeming to move directly toward him, marked among all comets by the directness of its patii toward the sun. When it was within a sixth part of tlio sun's diam- eter it circled around him and ' then passed away on a track precisely liko that on which It had an i vcd. Like all other comets of distinction it had a long tail, and as it approached the sun, that tail extended, according to the known laws of comets, away from the sun, and was thus carried b - hind the comet; but us the comet passed around ti. > f-un — ami pa.sHcd around it in a few hours— when It, w;> « seen on the other side, a long tail — I cannot call it tu,; Proctor's Astronomical Lcclur 19 Cnme tail— a Ion? tall, 90,000,000 miles in ex- tent, was seen, no longer carried b.>liiud the comet, but traveling now in front of it ; and in the day or two that that comet was lost sight of, that long tail was tiro wn out by the retreating comet. Now that comet had taken four weeks in approaching the sun over a distance of 90,00r>,000 miles, though hav- ing, at starting, all the velocity with which it had ar- rived; but in less than four days that wondrous tail, 9XOTX),000 miles long, waa thrown out in frout of the body. * * COMET OF 1630. There Is a fact which either shows us we have to deal, us to a comet's tail, with matter which has not been formed In reality, but is some wav made to become ap- parent to us, or else we have to deal -with a force incom- parably pi-eater than gravity. Tbis repulsive force of ttio snn seems incomparably greater than that of grav- ity. Gravity had led that comet over a distance of 50,000,000 miles in four weeks, and it threw out its tail in four 'days. There is the first evidence of this mighty repulsive force of t'ae sun. The comet came so close to the sun — a distance only the 160th part of that which separates our earth from the sun— that the heat to -which it was exposed was 25.603 times greater than the heat endured by our earth. There then was a heat which we might very well imagine would destroy the very substance of our ele- ments. ATI the materials on our earth -would, under Burn nheat.be vaporizod. Newton assigned a path to the comet of 1630, but was not able to assign a period to It. Ha was not able to say for how lone a time It would pa«3 away before It returuert; but in the case of Halley's comet. D.r. Halley not only calculated the path the comet would follow, but he looted through the annuls of astronomy to see if there were any comet traveling on the same path. He found one in the year 1607, and another In the year 1531, and noticing ' that the interval from 1607 to 1682 was not very different from the interval between 1531 and 1607—76 years about— he concluded that the cotuet had a period of 76 years, and he boldly presented the prediction that in the year 1759 that comet would return to our neighborhood. The prediction was an exceedingly bold one, and it was the first time an astronomer bad ever ventured to say a comet would follow a certain path at any given time ; and there was this Interesting circumstance about it, that when that comet returned, the astronomer who predicted it would long since have passed away. SUCCESSFUL PREDICTION OF A COMET'S RE-APPEARANCK. When 1759 came astronomers went over the calcula- tion made by Dr. Hallos1, an 1 they found, from their greater mathematical experience, how that comet might be dealt with. They were able 10 tell the very month, and even predict the day. They said upon April 13, 1759 •with a limit of error of one month, this comet would come back to its point of nearest approach to the sun. It actually returned, and made its nearest approach to the sun on March 13, 1759, or just within the limits of error. They did not know at that time that the planets Uranus or Neptune existed, and these had exerted their influence on that comet. But when the return year 1835 was approaching, as- tronomers had learued about Uranus, though Nep- tune had not been discovered, and also how to deal much more perfectly with the processes of mathematical analysis involved in calculating the course of celestial bodies; and they said this comet would return in November, 1835, and they put the dates between Nov. 12 and Nov. 16. A German astron- omer, Rosenberger, gave the exact date as Nov. 13. The exact date on which the comet did make its nearest ap- proach to the sun was on Nov. 12, and certain strange facts were noticed. As it approached the sun It pre- sented a very remarkable head, which you recognize here (picture shown), with a crescentic ridge of brightness. COMET OF 1835. II seemed as if it were forced from side to side by some disturbing force exerted by the sun. That comet passed around the sun, made its nearest approach, ap-1 came around on the other side, passing southward There fore it was observed by astronomers of the souther/ 20 Tribune Extras— Pamphlet Series. hemisphere that, instead of presenting the appearance It had when it approached the sun, it appeared not only without t:iil. but even without auy Lead. It appeared as u small bright speck, like the small central part within that crescent, -which you see here. Nothing distinguished that comet from a star except the fact that it was moving slowly over the heaveus, and as days passed on it increased, so that iu 17 days it increased 70 times in size. It seemed as if it were trying to develop a long tail, but it passed away before a tail had been developed. It was noticed that there seemed to be a power in tlie euu to raise from the nucleus of that comet vaporous matter, which was, again, swept away by the sun; and Sir John Herschel at that time said that, in his opinion, that was the nature of the economy of a comet— that mat 1 1 r is so raiM.-d, and that the sun has power over that matter to repel it. EVIDENCES OF THE REPULSION THEORY. You notice I a in dwelling on that fact of repulsion. I want 10 show tliat power of the sun in repelling matter from :t I will now deal with one of those small comets, •ve-ry curious, indeed, in their history. We have here all the evidence we can get, although it is not very striking. In the year 1770 a small comet made Its appearance, which, having been watched for a time, was found not to be traveling in one of these long oval paths, such as are here presented ; but in a path which, instead of liaving one of these long periods, was completed •within a period of 5J years. It was called, from the vaiin* of the astronomer, Lexell's comet. It was never seen agnin. Astronomers then were led to inquire what had become of this comet. Tracing it back, they found it was in a path so near to Jupiter that the giant power of that planet ar- rested it in its course, and sent it out on a patli entirely different from what it was before. It was useless to look for it. This question then arose: How was it that this comet of very striking appearance had naver been seen betorel Traveling in a period of five and a hair years, how was tt it had never been seen 1 They traced it back and calculated its path, and Uiey found that the ea-ne iriaui hand which sent that comet away had intro- duced it. That comer, in 1CC7, approached quite close to Jupiter; so close, In fact, as to intrude itself among its eatellitcs. Jupiter is not the planet to stand any non- sense of that sort, and so compelled it to follow another course. Another five and a half years, and another five and a half years, and then it was again seized by Jupiter, and sent outside of the solar system, and where it has gone nobody knows. There is rather a curious fact in connection with the history of the French revolution. Blanqui, a it-publican, was imprisoned, and ho took It into his bend to write about comets, and something made him look on Jupiter as a sort of policeman, and be descriii'-d Jupiter as beiug always patrolling ou the watch for con:ei«. When they came near he drove them Into the perilous straits, and It was well for thi) coiui-ts if they could escape from that time forth. But still there is one point about this comet of Lexell worth notice. It had cone into the midst of Jupiter's satellites. The satel- lites are not large objects, and !f th^ comet bad mass he could disturb them ; but instead of that til those satellites are still traveling the path they tmd before that comet had arrived, and we learn, there- fore, that that comet at any rate was mere vapor, had no power and no weight, although it was much larger even than Jupiter. It had uo powcr.no weight or attractive influence to disturb those little satellites which Jupiter manages so easily. Now we come to another comet— that seen in 1843, which is really interesting, as traveling on the siiortest period of any comet we know of, a period of three years and four mouths. It is noteworthy on this account, that this little comet seems to be getting closer and closer to the sun. traveling always on a shorter and shorter period. It is apparently retarded by the influence of some matter occupying space. It may seem a strange fact, to say that it is retarded, and yet it is traveling more and more quickly. But that is the eflVct, of retarda- tion iu any instance. If our earth is to be retarded, the effect will be that our earth will travel more and moro rapidly, because the effect of the retardation would lie to get the earth nearer and nearer to the sun, and ;ill ih3 time she is being retarded by resistance she would bo hastened by the pull of the sun drawing her inward, ,iud when she arrives so that she travels on the path of Venus she will travel as fast as Venus, and when tr.ivel- ing the path of Mercury, she will travel as fast as Mer- cury, then faster and faster until in the course ol tirno she will fall on the sun. This comet is traveling faster and faster on a smaller and smaller orbit. COMET OF 1818. But 1 pass from that, and KO to one. the facts by which are among the most curious — I mean the cornet which was discovered in 1820. It was carr',,lly watched, and it was then found that this coni'-t Had been seen before by Caroline Herschel and others, and a path was assigned to it, having u period of six years and eiffht months. Now this comet was in the hrst place remarkable, because its path cresset the earth's path; and, indeed, on the next return, in 1832, astrono- mers announced that that comot would actually cross the earth's path, and many thought that that meant that there would be a collision, and great alarm was excited. A member of the Paris Academy said It was Imprudent for astronomers to make such an announcement, for in 1771 announcement*! made in Proctor's Astronomical Lectures. 21 tbnfc wny had f righfened the people out of their wits. I*. 1771, a hundred years ago, tickets were offered for Rile purporting to be reserved seats in Paradise, and people actually bought those tickets. [Laughter.] la 1833 they wore not quite so bad, but still they were much frightened, and many unfortunate circumstances hap- pened In Prance on account of that fact. They required to lie told — anrt then they were not comforted— that the mere fact that the comet passed the path of the earth, would not interfere with the earth; that the pas- sage across the path of the earth, would not injure the path, for the path was not a material thing. The people were frightened, and they were not certain that astronomers had calculated the path so exactly that there would be no collision. But that passed away, and nothing more Wua heard until 1846, and then the comet was found trav- eling on its usual p.itli, and to the great astonishment of astronomers it was announced that the comet had divided into two parts, each having a distinct head and nucleus. It was noticed bv Capt. Maury at the Observa- tory at Washington; but strangely enough, on the night \vheu he observed the comet had doubled, the records of the German Obs( rvatory showed the comet to be single, and it would appear, therefore, that the greater clearness of the atrcos- phere in America had enabled him to recognize the chiinge before it was noticed in Europe. Two sepa- rate comets traveled along, side by bide, and the strange circumstance was noted that they interchanged light; sometimes one and sometimes the other was brighter, as if there were communication between them. They •were a kirn! of Siamesa twius. They passed into space, and astronomers thought they could watch the comets agiin and ascertain how they were separated, but the comet was never seen again. The year 18GG cams around, and astronomers calculated toe path of the comet. They looked for it. Tney examined the path over the Leavens a great distance on either side, but they failed to recognize that comet. I told you that comet passed tlie pitth of the earth, and there are other systems which aUo cross the path of the earth. It wus suggested that the comet had encountered meteor systems and split up, and was again and again split up, and so vanished. Yon will see there was an important connection between, that and what we have learned since about the comet's history. The year 1872 came, and that comet was again looked for. Other calculations were made as to its path. It was looked for more carefully, but in 1872 it was not seen. I leav^ its history for the time, presently to re- turn to it. WHY SOME TAILS ARE STRAIGHT AND OTHERS CURVED. There was a comet seen in 1858, and called Donati's couiet* Here Is a picture of the comet as seen in En- gland, and it looks like a plume, but in America thac comet was observed to have not merely the plume- ehnped body, bat also a perfectly straight tail, and in Borne ^pictured two straight tails. Let us in the first place, deal with that comet. Why should th tail of a eomet be curved! The position of a comet' ail is due to repulsive action, and if that rer e action take place immediately, it is qui clear the tail will be swept into a straight -liuo; -and if you looU at a straight Hue, no matter how placed, it would look straight. But if the process of repulsion takes place at a moderate rate, the tail would appear curved. You can under- stand that a curved tail b jhind a comet is due to repul- sion not taking place instantaneously. Tue head of the comet cousisis of two kinds of matter— 0113 was repelled with moderate velocity, very gre.it but moderate by douiparison— and the other repelled with great velorit^, and so swept off into a straight line. It would be mani- fest to you, that being tie case, since there was a sep- aration of the matter in the comet's tail, that if tho comet's head was complicated in structure, there would De an intermixture of the two kinds of matter, end the portion of the matter more readily repelled would escape, carried off by the other tail, carried ofl into the curved tail, and at last would be swept away ; and perhaps a little later another portion would be swept away, and so you would see extending from the curved tail various streaks of this matter. Yoa have here, a picture of tho curved tail, aud you will notice the variety ot streaks thrown out from that— thrown straight out, indicating tho action of that kind of process \ve have been describing. Matter more easily repelled was carried away with tho matter less easily repelled, aud from time to tluio soma pares were swept off, so that there was a combing out of tho tail of the larger part, while the straight tail rem lined perfectly distinct all the while. There was a curious fact indeed ; and it seemed to dispose of Tyndall'a theory that the tail of a comet is not produced by repulsion, but a certain kind of action produced behind a comet, an i bringing out as it were from space cloud-liko matter. Here is a process which seems perfectly to correspond with the theory of repulsion, and it seems explicable in no other way. So that there is some force in the theory of a repulsive power exerted by the sun. EXPLANATION OP THE PLURALITY OF TAILS. I must remark at this point that we owe to Prof. New ton of Yale College those views as to the formation and behavior of that comet's tail. They occurred independ- ently to Sir J. Herschel; but £ found a paper contain- ing a complete account of all the phenomena of that tail had been published many years before. Now let us con- elder the way i.i which the head is formed. There is the comet as it first appeared as a small rouu.1 object, not more distinguished in appearance than tha comet of 1843. In time the comet became lengthened, ;md then grew out a tail. There was iu the first place the formation of a crescent-shaped object, and from either side of that object matter was thrown off. The tail became divided behind the head. As time passed, all around the central bright part of the head, matter was raised from the head of the comet, even as Herschel had found mattei was raised from H.tlley's comet; it was raised and then condensed aud formed an envelope around the comet Over our rain-clouds the vapor of water ia raised, and the process of cloud formation takes place again, so thai we see two layers of clouds; so alter a time we begin to notice two envelopes were formed, and in face von can see the third envelope beginning to be formed Tribune Extras — Pamphlet Seria. When those three envelopes were formed, that v. as the time when the comet, as seen in America, had three tails. It seemed as though the three envelopes each of them gave the material when a tall was to be formed. And we are led in that way to an explanation of another comet, a very well-known comet, the six-tailed comet of 1744. This was called the six- 1 ailed comet ; but it seems to me that when we view the matter in the way we have been considering it we should look upon that comet as a three-tailed comet, not a six- taili-d. You will see clearly iu a rnoinjut that there is pood reason for redueiug the number of tails. A comet auch as the comet of 1811 has around its Lead an envelope formed, and from either side of the envelope there is a bright streak, with a dark space behind the head of tho comet. We don't call a comet auch as that a two-tar*p the chari 1 Is the heail of tlie eiuni-t. II"ro you recog- nize tin- different envelopes, connected one with another by brlKht streaks, and you cau perceive that from thea envelopes appear streaks of bright mutter swept aw-»y on either side of the head. In tho other picture, taken at a later time, the two streaks are distinct, one from an* other. Here Is a wonderful process, and remember the scale on which it is going on. Dr. Holmes spo^e with poetic license of ten million cubic miles of head of thac comet, and ton million leagues of tail : the tail was many times as larsro as Dr. Ilolines'a numbers. I must briefly touch on tho theory of Dr. Tyndall, and It is well worthy of attention. Dr. Tyndall went through this experiment : Ho had a long tube, ap- parently ciear of all material substance except air, a-)- sumed to be pure air, and what happened 1 He allowed a small quuntitv of vapor to pass into it by taking a small piece of blotting paper, im- mersed m wnter, allowed to dry, and then put into tho tube, and merely letting the air pass upon it. It seemed as if nothing was carfie'J in, yet when the light from the electric spark w.ts let into it ;t cloud made its appearauee. Ho opened the tube, and swept everything away except an invisible residua. Tho light from the electric spark was nuirln to suiup upon it again, and tho cloud again was formed, so that Dr. Tyn- dall said he had an exact analogue of the tail of the comet, and he considered that the head of the coiner, depriving the solar rays of heating power by not allowing tha heat to pass through, left the actinic power of tho rays in the matter behind the head of the comet, bringing down out of space clouds formed in matter not belonging to the comet, but brought down as tlie comet's tail; and Dr. Tyndall con- siders that he can represent not merely tho formation of a cornel's tail, but all the appearances presented by the head of even Donati's complicated comet. CONNECTION OF METEORS WITH COMETS. I pass from these facts, wonderful as they are, and introduce the subject of meteors. For a long timo meteors were looked on as phenomena of our atmos- phere, but facts began »o be observed which led to a diflereut conclusion. One fact was that tho meteors occurred in showers on certain days. Take, for instance, the Nov. 13 shower. "What could it mean 1 Why should a shower of meteors take place on Nov. 13? There is no reason \vliy meteors should show brlglitly ou tho 13tu of November or any special day, so far as tho earth was concerned. But, on Nov. 13, the earth is passing a particular p.irt of its course. In November tho oarth, revolving around the sun. when she reaches that part of her course is cotluted by certain missiles which'' utriko her atmosphere from without, and b.^oomo illuminated in pasting through it. Tho inference is this. If a trav- eler in passing along a certain r;ia;l found himself in a certain place alwa>s saluieri with a shower of stones, ho would conclude that some mischievous persons infested that part of the road and amused themselves at his expense. By tho wa> , this illu.-jtr.il l:>n which I m ida In a forn.er lecture, was Hii-.iiig'h- nr.-i i;«r;jroto 1 in a morning pape?. I Mvke or i tin a:-lioolb M s throwing stones at a travel -r; It w is d.-soiTicd us an occu: lenri' happen! i _; i i K ul mil. a:i 1 to my horror I found It in oue of the morning papers that it was cua. Proctor'* Astronomical Ltcturet. ternary In England to salute travelers with missiles!) fLaughter.l We suppose the sun in this place, and the earth in passing here is s alutcd with a shower ot stones. Thes Btoues would be carried by attraction to the sun, and there would be an end of the matter. How then does it happen that for centuries the earth is thus saluted on passing there by these meteors and e'uvt the force of gravity has been resisted! If these stoues have a motion of their own, they c;m travel around the sun; there can be always a stream by which the earth can be saluted with a shower of stones at that particular place. To remove all doubt, lot us reason in this way: If there were bodies traveling that way (indicating it on the chart], and the earth was passing there, these stones passing over a short part of their course, and the earth passing over a short part of its course, there would be a shower encountered by the earth. Suppose a shower of rain is falling from a particular part of the heavens, all the drops eeem to come from a particular part of tha sky,— from a particular direction. Thus also would appear the shower of stoues, only instead of having a certain rela- tion to the horizon and the point overhead, they would be related to that particular part of tiio starry heavens; they would seem to rush from a particular part of the heavens ; and this has been actually observed. Prof. Newton of Yale College notified to the astromo- jners of Europe that there would be a great shower of November meteors in 18GG plainly visible both in America and Europe. In point of fact it was not well seen in America but in Ea^land, and we know the differ- ence of time is only a few hours, so that you see how Closely he made his calculation. PERIOD OF THE METEOR STREAMS. As to the period in which they travel their course, it Is a third of a century. That was the actual time when the last great display took place, Arago being one of the astronomers who described it most closely, and Hum- boldt described another shower in 1779. If they travel on their course, having a period of 33 3 ears, we might account for the recurrence. But this t*eerns too immense. The^e objects, a few grains in weight, have been traveling on such a course of 33 years, which would correspond to a course carrying theiii tar away outside Uranus, and that seemed to Prof. Newton too grand, and showed that if they traveled a thirty-third part of the year the same course that our- nelves would follow, in another year they would be a thirty-third part behind, and the next year another thirty-third part behind, and the third year another thirty-third part behind, and so on until the en.l of 33 years, they would be brought to their place again. But, meantime, a strange fact had been discovered. The cornet of 18G2 was noticed to pass that part of the earth's orbit corresponding very closely with the course in which the August meteors eeem to come from, and Schiaperelli saia they may be associated with the comets, and Scbiaperelli concluded that the meteors follow in the train of the comets, and supposing thistobetrue.lt was possible to eivo the November meteors a period of 33 years, which before seemed incred- l)c> 1 1 • » n > a VM, ail thsy would have such and suoh acourso; and that being the case, the astronomers thought they would look for comats in the paths of meteors. They totmd that a comet had been observed that very year 1866, traveling in that very course. There w.w auoiher strange coincidence — a small comet wai seen traveling over the course assigned to these meteors. Prof. Adams undertook to show that the November meteors can havo no other course than 33 years. It had boon noticed thas where the earth encountered these meteors that parl of the heavens had been slosvly advancing iu the direo- tion which the earth travels — the shifting ol the nodes owing to the attraction of tha celestial bodies— and Prof, Adams calculated whether the perturbation would be such if a year and » 33d part were the true period o' these meteors, and ho found that the perturbation would not be so great. lie then took a period of 33 years and he found that tha perturbation would be as lur^e as it was observed; SD that he was the first to demonstrate chao they did travel in 33 years. Everything seemed to be done to show that tho meteors traveled in the track of the comets. Bat oua test remained, and that was to predict that aftej a comet had passed a certain place there would be a shower of meteors, and the prediction would be confirmed ; then there would he a new tan I of evidence. And that evidence was given by that very Biela's cooi3t which frightened people so much in 1832. which van- ished in 1856. and was again looked for iu 1872. Alexan- der Herschel, in England, predicted that when the earth came to that part of her orbit, Nov. 26, 1872, there would be probably a great display of meteors. That happened. It was a glorious display in Eagland and America, but it was still more gloriously seen in Italy, where it appeared with all the glory d'r the large meteor?, with a great number of minute ones. That shower came from the foot of Andromeda, or the exact puth that, the comet would have followed if it had struck the earth. Then came in a curious feature. It was suggested that siuco this meteor shower had struck the earth, why should not the astronomers on the other side of the earth look out for them or the comet there I It was said that it was Bida's comet which had struck the earth. It touched the earth on Nov. 29. The comet was looked out for near the shoulder of the Centaur. A nebulous object was seen and identified. The next morning it was seen again and it had shifted. That was not, the end of the matter. Astrouomsrs made a calculation to see if the meteor path accorded with expectations, but found it did not; they were far behind — many weeks behind. So it seemed shown that there were streaks of meteors traveling from the direction of the cotne.t's course. Toese are a few facts that show that meteors are associ- ated with comets. More than a hundred meteor streams are encountered by the earth within a year. It baa been discovered by Prof. Newton that this earth en counters about 400,000,000 meteors every yeai. We have then a very striking feature in the economy of our solar aystcm. The meteors are following the course of tha Tribune Extras— Pamphlet Scries. remote. In fact, there Is every reason to believe than there Is so grout a gathering of cometary matter follow- ing these meteor trucks, that when we see tUe turn in ;iu eclipwe \vu ehould see a gathering tliere, as we do see iu the coroua. EVIDENCE THAT MISTEORS ARE EXPELLED FUOM TUE LA.KGER PLANETS. In this lecture I promised to give some account of •what was expelled iu those great explosions from the BUII. If I was to .-ay that the com -ts were sljot out of the sun, you ini^bt be startled, or if I asserted that they •were also thrown from Jupiter and Saturn. But tlie evidence of that is very curious. In the first pi, ice, wo know that matter is shot out from the sun, with a velo- city — 60 great as to bo carried tar away from him. and eo would travel forevwr away into space. That has only been observed a few times, but It is probably very frequent. Tno matter which was expelled, it it struck the o.irth at nil, would strike in the daytime. If the sun is over there and the earth is here, the side of the ear h t«>,v;ird the suu will bo the illu mi- iiatrd side. Tne m.-t>'i>rie mat tcr coming from the sun can only strike the illuminated part, which is the day- time. You throw a stone at any object, it must strike the side of the object you aim at, that is turued toward you. Ilumboldt mentioned that the largjst n timber of meteoric masses had fallen in the day-time. But then this is scarcely sufficient. The larger aero- Jiies have been examined and their microscopic struc- ture studied. Sorby of Sheffield has examined them, and says they consist of a number of small glob- ules, and were evidently originally iu a va- porous st;tto beloro assuming their present Plate, or were at one time iu that condition. Then came a chemical analysis by Prof. Graham and Chandler Roberts of London. They found in the iron of the meteoric mass more hydrogen than iron contains in a natural condition. Prof. Gra- 11:1111, v,- ;n was a very good chemist indeed, said that in Lis op.uion certainly that meteor, that iron, had been • u< d Irom one of the stars that people space. Ho p(,ii.tcd out that there were stars that contained iiydrogcn in their atmosphe.re. These are some, of the fads connected with the larger meteoric masses. JIow shall we account for thesn meteoric streams (,f which I have been speaking! I have men- tioned OIK- a.s traveling close to the path of Jupiter. All < i mi t.s <,f i-lioit period have paths closely approaching those oi Mime of the large planets. That particular one Vent elc.M- to Jupiter, about seven years ago, long be- fore the explosive pouerof the sun was noticed, i call them Jupiter'.- com, • t family. Sir John IIiTschol said that It was very curious that they had that relation. If we put forward tin; theory that Juuiter expelled those. comets, we have a very Marl ling theory, but many of th<> them -II-M which have b 'en propounded, some of the mo.«t Important diameter, and which have proved to bo true, have been the most startling. It is said that as Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus go 0:1 their paths, they draw in the emiiets which travel cius: to them, and cap- ture them. I made a calculation a'toiit the November meteors to eco how close they must go to the path of Uranus Iu order to be captured, and found that they mu.-t approach nearly aa close as the nearest satellite. Only those which came almost iu contact with the planet could be captured. Now, if they were shut out when Uranus was as a smaller sun, then it would be explained, whereas we Had gre.it difficulty in imagining that a comet coming out of tpace would be cap- tured bodily by a planet like Uranus. Let us consider thus: if comets are expelled from a planet, tbey will be carried along with the forward motion. If it could appear that some of them went backward, then wo would have no evidence of the the- ory I have been advancing. If most of them travel for- ward, then we should have some evidence for the tne- civ. Now thero is this curious fact that all the comets of shori periods, the whole of Jupiter's comet family, travel forward. They do .not travel in all directions of slope; all uas-e a very moderate slope to the path of the planet. They do not have the slope even of some of the asteroids. That is precisely what wo notict — tba. tliey travel very much with Jupiter. Talcing the bal- ance between the two theories — that of expulsion and that of capture — it seems to be in tne favor of the more ttartliugone — that Jupiter has had the power to expel these cbjects. The comets that are eomimg from interstellar space have some of them tasen eight millions of years to make their journey, and we have no reason to think that it is tneir flrsc visit to our solar system. They seem to be floating from sun to suu. During these immense periods of time our sun and the whole of the solar .vsiem have, undergone changes. Donati's comet 8 an illustration of one of tbese long periods The facts must be remembered, that while showers of meteors ara unusual phenomena, meteorites fall every day nud every hour of the day. Our earth is absolutely growing by these falls. The time is uclually past whou the earth is growing visibly, but yet immense amounts of matter are added to it in thia way. And not only the earth, but the 11100:1 and Mer cury, and we may say all the planets are growing unde this meteoric downfall. How are wo protected from this downfall, with 400,030,030 or them every day 1 The rate at which they arrive is very much more rapid than that of a bullet. If there \vas no protection we should certainly be destroyed. Tnat protection is the atmosphere. When a meteor encounters the atmo.-v- phore its velocity is tirst reduced, and then it is con- sumed through the heat wlii"h is generated, auJ falls iu the shape of a vaporous dust. On the tops of moun- tains the material of these nr.'teors has been found. [A di icrarn of the appearance of the siia'.s coron.i was shown.] It would appear here as if there was an airirro- iration iu the sun's neighborhood of the matter thrown off from the sun with the aggiegatod gathering of the in i*u uric uiaMsch. These appearances of changes taking plaee, not merely in the present but ill all past time, teach us the reality of the. truth of those words of the Psalmist, "The heavens declare the glory of Go. I." They seem to have a real meanintr. " The heavens declare tlie glory o: (,i tained. It was thought tliat with Herschel'a great tel- CBtsope something more would bo determined. Herscael thought he could rccognizu in the bright part of the moou signs of volcanic action, because he saw a faint liL'ht as of volcanic eruption. We know it was only the rcflecttd light of tbe eartii. Other efforts were ma lo, and ir was at that time that some one in America, a Mr. Locke, conceived the idea of publishing that strange book, the Moon Hoax, which misled not only the mass, but those who were well edu- cated. .There was great ingenuity displayed In the method of its construction. There is the conversation between Brewster and Sir John Herschel, the enthusi- asm of Bnnvster, which is very comically described, as lie l( aps fr, in his scat and, catching Herschel by the La i «lieve in the transfusion of light. What the astronomer does when he sees the moon through a telo- ecope, or when he takes a photograph of the moon is to magnify the imago as much as it will bear. If he interposes a screen and tries to magnify the image, Lc is magnifying a moon less perfect; his best chance is by looking through the eve-piece at the imago in the focus of (ho leie.t.'ope. There is a limit in the telescope beyond which it cannot be increased. I heard, a few days ago. that the observatory to be established on the, Bocky Mountains will bring the moon within thirty miles of us; but that is impossible. I. is not a question of a place above the atmosphere, seeing the moon through the rarer par IB of tiiu atmosphere, but the optical difficulty. Tha optical lai*c« formed by the object-glass of the astronomef has defects, and if you magnify it you maguifv th« detects. When you get beyond a certain point it is use- less to magnify the image as it appears, and there is no hope, of any telescope larger than Russe's to get a close view of the moon. [The best view of it obtained, pcr- haps, is that at the Cambridge Observatory.] We have images here taken by the Cambridge refractor, and there are all the details, as you see, of the craters and 11 j,ws and irregularities of surface, but no sign of life can be seen. EVIDENCES OF ABSENCE OF ATMOSPHERE. When we begin to inquire- into th« relations of me moou, we see how hopeless it is to expect signs of life. We have an orb having no atmosphere, or a very shallow one. This is shown by the fact that shadows thrown by the lunar mountains are seen as tbebb black parts, indicating that there is no considerable atmos- phere. An observer watching our earth from the moon would not see black shadows but dark shadows, of greater and greater darkness, lint there would bo a certain amount of light in the valleys all around tbe mountains ; for we knowwe can st-ind on a mountain top wheu the sun ia rising and see that the valley below is not black: there is fwilight there, and it comes from the atmosphere. If there were atmosphere in the moon, an observer from the earth would see shadows thrown all around the mountains, but not black ones. The blackness of the lunar shadows shows that there is no illuminated sky such as ours, no atmosphere to illuminate those regions, and that is the first proof that the moon has no appre- ciable atmosphere. On our earth, as you know, there ia a twilight surface extending a very great distance, which divides true sunlight from the place where there is no sun, and the twilight surface extends over 18 degrees on the earth. Ou the moon we can recognize uo twilight surface what- ever. Luok at the earth from the moon, the picture of the "new" earth, when the earth is between the sun and the moon, and there would be scon all around the black disk of the earth this twilight. We, as you know, on the contrary, when wo have a full moan, see the edges sharply defined ; it is only the same circle, no extension on either side by twilight sur- face. That is the second proof of it. "Vet another proof of it. When the moon passes over a star, the star flashes out suddenly ; it there were an atmosphere round the moou, that star would bo seen precisely as our suu when (•inking. When he sinks, though ho seems not to pass below the horizon, yet ho is really below it, and a line drawn from the sun to the earth would pass below the horizon. There can be no doubt that if you aro looking at the earth from the moon, you would seo the stars close around the earth, when they were really behind it, they would be raised by refraction of the earth's atmosphere. Now, in the moon's case, we see nothing of that kind. A star, even some telescopic star, is visible in one moment on the moon's edge, and the next it is gone. These aro three convincing proofs that the moon has uo apprecia. bio atmosphere, and If it has no atmosphere, there can >>e no life such as we know. There may bo life of other forms inconceivable, and It would be idle to inquire what they may be. I believe there is co life. I find a limit to where life is on our earth. We may say the conditions on our earth are not the same throughout— greater or less light, less moisrure or more moisture ; but we find that these coud.t.ous really limit life on the earth ; beyond a certain bight on the mountains there is no life except of mere amnial- culae and these carried up by thp air; and so far as analogy teaches us we must believe that there is no life in the moon. THEORIES TO ACCOUNT FOR THE CRATERS. Besides, there is no sign of water. We can recognize regions, such as those inclosing the floors, which are sometimes perfectly level, and sometimes show Streaks and marks, ana they always remain un- changed. If there were water, the water undk that in a formi-r state of existence, there was a bubbling, and as the bubbles broke these circular openings were formed. We will have another picture brought on, still further illustrating this. Here you will see the Floor of Plato again, and the Apennines also, seen running across toward the left of the picture. This crater is the crater Aristarehus. We will now have that carried away, anil have an- other series of pictures of a different kind. We will have two pictures of the Floor of Plato. Yon will notice that the shadows there are thrown on the Floor, in tho picture on the right. In tho picture on the left, where it is morning, you will notice how that long bank differs from the appearance as presented on the right. You recognize how far the appearance of the moon may change, from a mere change in the illumination, and how difficult it is to say that changes are going on, from noticing the apparent changes. Here la an illustration. It appeared that a certain crater had vanished, as though a sort of cloudy matter had been thrown out. When the supposed volcanic erup- tion ceased, tho hills apparently had b.'OO made more sloping, and the crater could not be so well seen. But unfortunately for this supposed evidence of change, tho crater has again appeared as before. Our moon changes and shifts, not merely with regard to the sun, but to the earth, and, by a calculation of mine, I find that 1,300 years must elapse before you could see any part of it again in the- same view exactly. You have now a picture of tho lunar crater Coperni- cus. This picture is very difF-ront from that taken by other observers. It is quite manifest that the skill of tha artist has worked out tho picture iu a c^rniu w.iy Proctor's Astronomical Lectures. 81 2'vl as another will work it in another way, it Is ^7 comparing the two that you are led to t link that there was a change. I must Xneuiiou thai llae moon is unlike our earth in its general conditions, in nearly all the important respects which •we assoc-iate with it. The total day lasts 29J of our days. While the day lasts so long, the year is very much less than ours. It is only 346 of our days. It may seem rather strange that as the moon is a planet, in reality, that therelore it has a year less than ours ; tbat it ought to be the same as ours. But there is a Blow tiltiug of the moon, corresponding to the preces- sion of the equinoxes. That shortens our year by a few hours, but in tue moon it shortens it for a few days. AN EARTH-LIGHT SCENE ON THE ITOO-T»8 SURFACE. Tiiero you have a picture of tho lunar cr; ter Coper- Die is as it minht appear to the inhabitants of tho moon. It \vus drawn by James Hamilton of PniluaeU 'iia. You will notice the earth suspended as a luoon to the inhabitants of the moon. The earth id, according to no conception, too small. It would appear to them as a moon 13J times as large as the moon appears to us. We will have a picture of the lunar crater Tycho, from which those great radiations extend, which give the moon the nppe;irance of an orange, and which caused Dr. Holmes to linen it to a peeled orange. [Laugh- ter.] Always In these lunar pictures, these Imaginary ones, the mistake is made of introducing signs of weather ing which we know to lie due to the effect of rain, or more remarkably to tho effects of snow. We know that th» peaks of our mountains are becoming more and mort worn down by the glaciers. But as there is no water in the moon, there cannot be any rain or any- snow, and therefore none of these effects of denudation can he seen. Hire is an ideal picture of the Apennines. You will Liotice tiiu peculiar slope of them. A?i in we have tho erroneous signs of weathering. You never see mountains like those except where snow ia. IDEAL VIEW OF MOUNTAIN SCENERY IK In the picture you are supposed to be the Apennines from Aristarchus. MOON. looking TJNLIGHT SCENE ON MOON'S SURFACE: EARTH SHOWING ITS DARK SIDE. 2Vi7»Mt?0 Extras — Pamphfat Here Is a picture In which yon are oui>puoe«l to bo Fookin^at them from Plato. You will also see a little Work of the imagination here; a little villnprr: is inter- posed, probably the dwelling's of inhabitants of the moon who were to have received religions instruction from the earth, for you perceive there is a church there. [Laughter.] We will have a picture brought on showing the won- derful wny in which the moon is covercil with craters. It is different from the appearance of craters and moun- tains as we picture them to ourselves. When YOU look at that you will begin lo think that there is some other op- eration at work there than that which produces our mountains and the few craters we have. You seem to have an appearance produced by boiling over, or the pouring down of some very heavy rain, as a heavy rain on a muddy sur 'ace produces pits like these. As regards Dr. Hook's explanation, I need hardly say that bubbles would probably not be formed so large as that, aud no forms of matter known to us would be coherent enough to form these of miles in extent. Wo seem forced to a theory very startling, that we had on the moon's surface a pounding down of meteoric missiles, not necessarily solid ones, but a falling down of meteors on the plastic surface. It seems to me to be the only theory left. At the present day it is estimated that over 400,000,000 meteors fall through the day, but the result is very slight indeed. I have found that the earth would require 40X000,003 years to have her diameter increased a single inch by them. When wo look back upon the p;ist history of our system, we see signs that there was a time when larger meteors and more splendid comets were at hand to be absorbed in the solar system. While tha earth was still in a lorm of vaporous matter the moon was rolling on, still plastic, and these meteors falling down upon her surface would produce th u pitted appearance. I will have the room lightened up again while the email lantern is prepared, and then I will have three pictures of the residue from boiling a calcareous solution. You will see how very much line my pictures are those of the moon. I will undertake to s:iy that all those who are not acquainted with every nook and cranny of the moon will be deceived by these, especially the third and last one. You will notice that there appear in them eeas which have terraces around them. I will now invite you to notice what was suggested to me by Dr. Bernard of Columbia College, that wo have in the solar system the signs of a beginning and of an end. Jupiter and Saturn have made progress to a further state than the sun, but are etill full of life and energy. Then In the progression comes our earth, and Mars, and Venn B, and Mercury, which have lost most of their Inherent heat. In the moon wo have a body seem- ing to have lost all its inherent neat, and to have neither •water norair. All those sitrns of progression seem to point to the day of creation and teach us to look forward to the time when tln.se proee^s'-s liej_':ui. We seem to see signs of benlnning. Tin-re must have been a begin- nitigof those processes which in the moon have come to an end. Looking forward we see that our sun — the youngest as it were, so far as sitfns of passing on at old age is con- — will one day lose heat, and nil the other rriPTni^rj of the solar system will have lost their.*. There sc^ms to be an end of our solar system, a beginning and an end marked, and in that respect astronomy differs from other sciences, which give us no such signs of a begin Ding or end. CALCAREOUS RESIDUE LIKE M*)OX PHOTOGRAPH. In this picture of the residue of a calcareous solution before you, notice the black region around the crater and signs of terraces. You have in the next picture no terraces visible. Ninety-nine observers of the moon out of a hundred would not be able to tell me that this is not a photograph of some part of the moon's surface. There is one point I intended to touch on more fully. I snoke of the possibility of any planet only being in- tended to be inhabited during a short time of the exist- ence of the planet, — millions of years before it was lit, being followed by millions of years after it became un- fit for habitation. Lotus have an illustration of that. If it were known that some gentleman in Brooklyn only intended to remain at homo ton minutes on a given day, and you did not know whether it was morning, noon, or evening, and you called at random, you would bo surprised to find him at home. Take any particular time in the same way, and consider the chances that the planet is inhabited in it. Tlio chances are small; much more in favor of the present moment belonging to the millions of years before or tho millions of years alter it becomes fit for habitation Th.it is the case with tho moon, I feel tolerably certain. That the moon has long since passed the time when it was lit to be tho abode of life w is touched upon in tho second lecture, and that Jupiter and Saturn have not reached tho time when they are fit. But though wo are much more likely to see a planet when It is not lit for habitation, we must take tho immense number of them into consideration. There are millions of stars and millions whicn no telescope can rovoaJ. Aud you have the chances reversed; and though for Proctor's Astronomical Lecture*. every planet Inhabited now there may be millions not Inhabited, yet tlio number inhabited must be many mil- lions. So that we got rid of the painful thought that our insignificant planet is the only one inhabited. We *ot rid of the difficulty that the greater number we know of are not fit lor habitation, aud we can address the Creator in the language of the poet, God of the pranite and the rose, Soul of the sparrow and the bee ; The mighty tide of being flows, Tii rough countless channels, Lord, to thee. It leaps to life in grass and flowers ; Through every grade of being runs ; \Vhile from Creation's radiant towers, Its glories flame in stars and suus. THE STAR DKPTHS. FIFTH LECTURE BY R, A. PROCTOR. TILE SEEMING CALM OF THE STAR DEPTHS COM- PARED WITH THE REAL, VASTNESS OF THE MOVEMENTS TAKING PLACE WITHIN THEM— DIS- TANCES AND DIMENSIONS OF THE STARS- DOUBLE AND COLORED STARS, AND CAUSE OF THE .COLOR— THEORIES OF THE STELLAR UNI- VERSE—DISTRIBUTION OF STAR-CLOUDLETS, AND NEBULAE— THE LECTURER'S PREDICTION— MAR- VELOfS EXTENT AND COMPLEXITY OF THE SIDE- REAL UNIVERSE. Prof. R. A. Proctor's fifth lecture, and last but one, on the discoveries of astronomy, was given Jan. 20. at Association Hall, aud was equal if not superior in scientific interest and entertainment to any of the previous four. The subject treated was " The Wonders of the Star Depths," and the lecturer set forth in clear and at times eloquent language the various hypotheses which have been put for- ward in regard to the mysterious occupants of space. Additional interest was created and the subject more clearly explained by means of pic- tures illuminated by the powerful oxyhydrogen stereopticon of the Stevens Technological Institute, under the skillful management of Prof. Morton. The audience was very large and strictly attentive. THE LECTURE. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN : I have seen in one Of the papers a question relating to a point of great in- terest in the history of our earth ; that is to say, the gradual change of the earth's rotation period. It, is sun- posed to have been demonstrated that this effect is duo to the action of tbe lid il wave, which really acts as a brake, because the tidal wave travels in a direction op- posite to the earth's rotation, aud the question asked is, How much does the earth's rotation lose, at what rate is the great terrestrial clock losing time 1 I made a rough, calculation, aud I found the loss is so small is this: that at the end of 2,000 years the terrestrial time would be about three minutes behind what it would be if tho earth were to continue tororate from this moment on- ward without any change— three minutes In 2,000 years. You will perceive, therefore, that aa that is the accumu- lated loss, that the actual loss of the earth is so very small that a million of years will have to elapse before any really serious change in the earth's rotation perioi or the length of tho day takes place. THE CALM OF THE STAR DEPTHS. If you look at the sky in a calm, clear night, such aa you have in America, "when all the star* shine and the immeasurable heavens break open to their higuest," tho thoughtful mind is impressed with the feeling that a solemn calm reigns in those infinite depths. Tuis is tha idea suggested to tho poet. Nor does any other view present itself to those who stuJy the first teachings of astronomy. Wo know that the stellar sphere is carried from east to west as the sun and moon are carried, in. the period of a single day; and we kuowif we watch the heavens night after night, at the same hour, there is a motion from east to west taking place in, the course of a year. Aud there is yet one other mo- tion fry in, to show from f.n-t~ obe -r\ed iii England, and especially in India, from the pr i of L)r. E< laiV, that .-otiii'tliin^ which was c .illed me,- uicrisui, bin wlr.vh, after all, was nothing h.it a peculiar state of Mimnamln-.liMi'. induced in |i i i--iits, ir.ive to t lie m ilir lil--. i that ih.y \v.-re deprived of feeling; so that tlii'.v \vi-n- in reality nutli-r the Inllu "i:ce of Wieir ima:,-iii:.'.u,;i. a:id op, I.I!,O:M were performed tuat Were quite i>.u:i e- .. I -ay it Was a j)itv that ether was iu- iroilui-ftl j;i : then, as i: iire\ ei,te.J tic- progr. our lil.- tt8 to tins method of pro- diicingan • i. M\ friend, Prof. Broca, took it up in 1S57-S, anil pii-hrd it \ ery fir; and for a tim • it \\ as the fu-in»n in r.t: . - t.i ii i\-r amputations performed after having lieeii :i:i ••-; hi li/ -,\ ov ii.: :nllileiicc of Bra ill I Mn or bypnoti.-m. A cr-at many operations were performed In that way \vhirh W.T.- i|iii,o painless. But it was a proei -. whieii was lon_- anil ir. lions, and surgeons were in a hurry an I •„' ivo ii ui>. I regret it very iiiueb, as ; ; • ncv«-r ha- i" i :i ,i i -a-e oi ' il -atli from that method of prodm-iiii: ana--.t hc.sia. while you well know that a gieat many ca.-e.- of d ath have b^eu produced by oiher metboda. Ill I I- I MM I:«»l:IiER ON THE 5IIRACCLOUS. N "t only riii.i -i h' -i^ m,i\ li • produced, but the secre- •tions ma; he very powerfully affected by tho inllarnee of tin- miiiil over tin • in.ilv. Here we find facts of yreat import, !!!•• 1. There aro niauy facts \vliicli show th.it Che aeoretiona oi miiic may become puisonous for • a chihl from a men; t-mntiou in the mother, and especially fimn ong r. Ai.il if it were not the duty of every one to avoid anger il would certainly bo the duty of a younc mother who bas to nurse a child. There are ca^es. iilihou.-h thi-yar.' not ronimon, in which death La~ i-e.-nlif I ; and alii-rat ions of health in children from tola cauae are very frequent. A eie.it many men who h.i\ e ii-aehetl an a i In It a.^f owe tbeir ill health to such an Inll'lenet; ill chi Id ho. id. liverv one l. 78, also, that tho secretion of bile, t!ie H i -i i-tion of i . ..: •-, and the s -t-reiiou of saliva are very und< i i >.< ' i>t tin- nervous system. The ir or tin- ii.iw.-;>. wnn-ii tlep -nila on a secretion tbere.oi ou lu ibe liver, la also muob dependent on tin- mil lence of the ln:ai;luatio:i. The Emperor Nich- olas ii led to ace ii.it power there is m the Imairiuatioa luthi'i' : B ad-crumb plllB were Riven to a great many patlenta, and, aa a result, most of them wt-m jmr^eil. !•!•. a -i udfiii, not of metlicine but of iiie,,in-y, iia\ m^' tin- HIM that the word pill meant a .iJiir^.itiv.'. I, p " ]illl" In th:- dictionary; and tho lirat kind of )nlis th.it he found i here was one composed iiiainlv oi op.ii'ii and lu-n!i.im-, both astrinj;i.'uts, and rapulili- of jiiodiii Ih^r Kl«-at Con.i' ip.il ion. Ho Witnti'd to he | in i ce< i, ii nd took a eei :.nii ii ii in her of thfbo pills, and inut'Md oi li eonnn^ i-oii-' iji.ii d lie wa.s jiur^ed Just as In- wished to I"-. [Liiiif ht' -r.J Vomiting may lie pridmtd In thn samo way. Du rroa, ii t'reneli phy.siolo-iM. telN 1,1 a trial made in 11 ho-ldtal by :i nnr-e \\ lei u rnt ai omul and K-IVO to all ti.i- ii.itifnt- a vt-i \ barmle/w kind of medicine, and iin-n t. >!d them that ^-llM w.n .-oirythat bins had liy ml-talif lilvou them nil very iiowerful emetics. Out of luu p.i- lii-nts, eo were iifl'fi'twd n<< if tliey lind taker, the most \ mleiii ein-iie and Vomited for ii Ion;; time. This we see on a Veiy 1 ,ir.^.- seale on s -aboard every Summer. I have uo dou'it whatt-vt-r that se.i-sii-kncss l- in a irivat measure due to I h it, and if you could «o OU board of a steamer with the idea that you would not vomit f am well satisfied, from experiments I have niadi', that you would escape, u Kr<-at i:eal of sea-sick- MI- --..if you did not i-M-ape it altosrether. One fact I recall is vi-r\- iiitere>t:n^. A person had crossed, on one occ-iMon, a .-niiill iiav wh'-n it was very rou-,fh. There \\as ii man plajim: tho violin ou the boat. Tim person I reler to was terribly si-a-sick and vounled a jrreat dc:il. Ho had notf of oourae, made up his mind that be could ne! lie. sick. However, the point is that after that he could never hear a violin without vomitmtr. [Laujrhtei and applause.) To pass to somethlns IIMIV serious: You have all lie.u-d of what are called the stigmata— marks represent ing the wounds on the lim'is of Christ. Those mark! have appeared in persons who have dreamed or im- agined that they were crucified and suu'aring tae paina of Christ, having invoiced t.i • c.ml:i-ss of God to lei them have that suffering to punish th.-m for their faults, Tho most remarkable fact of that kind IA that concern- ing St. Francis of As.-ts,i. Tiier • is no doubf th:it he had the mark as clear as possible. If you compare with this fact one which is related by Dr. C.irter you will have the explanation of it. Dr. Carter says that while a mother was looking at her child who was standing at a window with the lingers on the border of tho window just under the lifted sash, -he saw the sash come down with great force and crush the three lingers of the poor child. The mother remained unable to IIMVC. feeling immediately a pain on tbe three flaeera at the very p.aci- whr-ro the child had been injured. Her li,ig.-rs swelled, an etlusion of blood took place and ulfi-raMou followed and she was a lonu' time in b -ing cured. It In the case of this mother the imagination could produce such results, you will see in the case of the stiL'iuiit.i the imagination may have been equally powerful. PERFORM VNCK.s OF RELIGIOUS DEVOTEES. The mind in a state of emotion has also great power on the In-art, the hrc.iihing apparatus, and several oi her organs. The most important of the facts here — which I must say I committed the fault of denying for a long time— are those whii-h ivl.iie to the fakirs of India. Yon know th.it they may remain dead to all appearance for a number of days, and if is even said for mouths, without any chaniro occurring in their body, without any change in their wi i-ht, wit hoiit their receiving any food. They show neither circula: i.)ii nor respiration, as their temperature had diminished very considerably, and altogether prc.-ent a scries of Hi -els wuich are cer- tainly very marvelous. But m irvel.uu as ic is, tho testimony of ROIUO ollieers in tho Brit- ish army who are men of pericet veracity leaves no doubt as to the possibility Of the fact. But iQ the light of the fact thiii I mcni nmed in my llrst lecture, that 1 had a dead animal in my lanoratory lying for several months \\ ilhont any sign of decomposition, ia a t« -in pc rat urn varying lioai 40° to CO0 during day ami night, we can understand that lln-so fakirs mav remain aole to live although they do not live— that is, do not have actual and act ivi- lilc. But u hy, you will say, do they come out! Admit that there is in us a power \\hlcli Is qn.t" distinct fro.n our or na irv power of mind, \\hn-li is quite di-tlnct I mm wh.it wo call coi'.sclousueas, winch dining our bleep is awake and watches; with WJiat Nerves May Do — Brown- Stquard. 85 lh!7 admission and t^ie facts I have mentioned before, we have all the elements, I think, for au explanation of What has been said about the fakirs. I flu d, unfortunately, that the titno presses 60 that I Fball uo obliged to pass over a good many facts and couietotho miracles of LaSalette and to Ihe miracles accomplished at the tomb of Father Matthew, and also •what has been said of a great many other instances of recovery from illness. I caunot but believe that there is no need of appealing to any other power than what we know of imagination for the explanation of what takes place in those miracles. They are very curious, but hardly more curious than what we see when we know without doubt that imagination, is the cause of such a change. The cure of any illness which does not consist In any disorganization of the tissues can often be ac- complished •when the person thinks that it can be done. If we physicians, who treat patients every day, had the power to make them believe that they are to be cured, we certainly would obtain Jess fees than we do, and I must say that the best of us would rejoice at it. There is no doubt at all that if we could give to patients the idea that they are to be cured they would often be cured, especially if we could name a time for it, which is a great element in success. I have succeeded in this way sometimes, and I may say that I succeed more now than formerly, because I have myself the faith that I can in giving faith obtain a cure. I wish, indeed, that phy- sicians who are younger men than inpself, and who will have more time to study this question than I have, •would take it up, especially in those cases in which there is a functional nervous affection only to deal with, as it is particularly, though not only, in those cases that a cure can be obtained. Indeed a cure may thus be ob- tained in certain organic aflections ; even in dropsy it may lead to a cure. You know that it will stop pam ; that going to a dentist is often quite enough to make a toothache disappear. | Laughter.] I have seen patients come to me with a terrible neuralgia, who dreaded the operation I was about to perform, and, just, at the time I was to undertake it, ceased to suffer. [Laughter. | LIMITS OF NERVE FORCE— LAWS OF HEALTH. I think I have shown that the power of nerve force is exceedingly various; that nerve force can be trans- formed into chemical force, into motion, into electricity, into heat, into light, and so on. But what are the limits of the action of nerve force! I may say that the limits of the action of nerve force, except after ic has been transformed into other forces, are our own body. Those persons who think that by an imagination, or by an act of will, or by the action of a mesuienzer, we can send in any part of our body an Influence that can modify it, those persons make a great mistake if thev think that this can take place by forces distinct from nerve force in the subject in which the action takes place. If we divide a. nerve jroing to a part, never mind how much we may imagine that we can move the muscles to which it goes; never mind where we go to be the object of a muscle, we shall not have the least action in the muscles to winch that nerve went. That nerve is absolutely" oute-ide of our control. Nerve force cannot be propagated to parts that are not in connection with the nervous centres. This fact is a death blow to the view that there are other forces acting in us than mere nerve force. To continue the illustration of this fact : If the spinal cord, which establishes communica- tion between the brain and the various parts of the body, is divided, the parts of the body that are below that section are separated absolutely from any act of will, any act of imagination, a ay act coming from emo- tion, in fact, from anything that comes from tlio bruin There is, I repeat, uo force in our system other than mere nerve force for tho tr.aismlssions that may oomo from the brain, as the seat of tho imagination, the seat! of emotion and the seat of the will. I shall uosv add but a few words on the production and expenditure of nerve force. Nerve force is produced as you know through blood. It is a chemical force which is transformed there into nerve force. This nerve force accumulates in the various organs of the nervous system in which it is formed during rest. Bat if rett is pro- longed, then it ceases to bo produced. Alteration takc-a place in the part which is not put to work. On the other hand, action which is so essential to the production oJ nerve force, if prolonged will exhaust force also, but produce a state distinct from that of rest. Rest will produce a lack of blood, while over-action may produce congestion. The great thin}:, therefore, is to have sulli- cieut but not excessive action. There is another law which is that we should not exercise alone one, two, or three of the great parts ol the nervous system; since thus we draw blooit to those parts only, and the other parts of the body suffer. In the due exercise of all our organs lies the principal rules of hygiene. This view, you know, comes from a physician. It is not in agreement with what the poet Churchill wrote : " The surest road to health, say what yon will, Is never to suppose we shall be ill. Most of those evils we poor mortals know, From doctors and imagination flow." Unfortunately Churchill died a victim to this view that doctors were murderers. He died of a fever at the age of 34, and that because he had been too carelesa about calling in a doctor to help him. But it is certainly true that the great rule of health is not to lay imagina- tion aside, and this is why 1 have quoted these verses. Imagination, on the contrary, is to be appealed to far more than we do, and this is one of the great conclusions that I hope young physicians will feeep in mind. To conclude with these great rules of hygiene, I should say that we should not spend more than our meana allow us. Many commit this fault. As before said, we should make au equal use of all our organs, and of the various parts of the nervous system. Those who employ the brain suffer a great deal from inattention to this law. Lastly, there should be regularity as regards the time ol meals, the time and amount of action, the time and amount of sleep — regularity in everything. It is very difficult indeed to obtain it. But there is in our nature more power than we know, and if we conform ourselves to the law of habit things will soon go on without our meddlius with them, and we come to be perfectly reg- ular, alchough we perhaps had naturally a tendency not to be. In conclusion. I have to thank the audience that has listened to me so patiently through these long and dis- connected lectures. I Loud applause.] ERRATA. Page 14. col. 1, line 18: for •' diva," real ymrs. Page 33, col. 2. lines 10, 11: lor " haJ the power of conveying various se.isutions in U of otiiur things," read is portrayed in the iiervei and that lliei/ carry with tliem its ttnimus. Page 33, col. 2. line 15: for ' I'bmims," read James. Page 34, col. 1, line 00: for " both astringents," re a I and an astral' gent substance. P.-iae 34, col. 1, line 06: for " l>n Cros," read Durand de (?ro.t. Page 34, col. 2, line 10: for " recall," reaU have hturd slated. Tribune Extras— Pamphlet Sena. but yet., perhaps, Is better suited In other respects for observing nebulae. You will have next another picture brought ou showing a, different appearance from that jiow outhe screen. You will have the great spiral nebula, tea seen from tbe Rosse Observatory, and not indicating all the enormous extension of that nebula. You s:>o there a process as though some great quantity of nebu- lous matter bad floated in with a spiral motion, travel- lug through a resisting medium, and in appronohing the center it traveled on a spiral course. Out: argument in reference to that is that it was mutter of siiu.ll density traveling in matter somewhat less dense. Hero is another different picture of the great Orion nebula, which has been compared to the mouth of some gigantic sea monster £oat picture was obtained by Sir John Herschel with one of his father's telescopes that toe used at the Cape of Good Hope, and to show the ef- fect produced by different telescopes on the appearance of nebula, we will have that picture removed and place another picture of the same nebula on the screen, the picture obtained by Bond when using the great refractor of the Cambridge University. And let me here mention the superiority of the refrac- tor at Cambridge to the Rosse telescope, and let rne allude, also, to the possibilities of great future dis- coveries by means of a telescope to be five feet in aperture, which it is said your optician, Alvan Cl^rk, proposes to make, at a cost, I believe, of $1,003,000. That amount will be wanted. It seems a considerable sum. But if any one can do it it is Clark, for he is unrivaled as an optician. Cooke of England was the only optician comparable with him, but Mr. Cooke is dead. I have never had an opportunity of making any com- parison between the great telescope of Cooke, 25 inches ia diameter, which is used in an inferior atmosphere, and was completed in the hands of his suc- ces-or, auh anJ. iiopo to do, i.s to carry on that system of star gau.ciug. combined with tlin system of Uarscnel ; to take one telescope and survey tiie whole heavens, counting the numbor of stars in dlffereut directions ; not a fii-ld here aud a field there, as Hcrschei did, but field after field, little square fluids, side by side, in the heavens, counting the number and mapping the results ; and t'.iea seeing where the stars shown by that telescope are richly or poorly distributed. Then take a telescope o£ higher, and afterward another of higher power; seeing, after each set of observations, whether the rich regions seen by one correspond wich the rich regions seen by another telescope, and so knowing something of tho heavens. Suppose you were looking at the sky and saw large birds spread irregularly over it; if you noticed that there were small birds also spread over it, th;it where the large objects were the small ones were also numerous, you would conclude that these large ar I small objects formed a single cloud— were intermixed ; J it were — and be certain that the large and the small ones were intermixed in the same clouds. That conclu- sion would be important in our star system. I pass to the results of the investigations of Sirur<5 of Germany, who numbered the stars and found that large and small stars are rich in numbers in the Milky Way, and inferred that there is an intermixture of them, and that the star system has not the shape of a disk, but that what was supposed a disk has no limits. I pass to Bo;ne maps which I made as a beginning toward a sys« ten? of star gauging, and I have not been able to go fur; but these few maps are an indication of the method. \ Here are all the stars on tho northern heavens, on a scale absolutely necessary to this kind of work, of sur- face projection, and you wi)l notice that here is the Milky Way. and here are gatherings of stars. I invite your attention to the dark region here. We shall now the southern heavens brought on, and there la a Tribune Extras— Pamphlet ScHe$. more marked gathering of stars in certain parts. There is a bright region here, know it as tho Magellanlo Clouds, and that part of the heavens la so bright that •\vheu it is ubove the horizon it has tho same effect as the rising of the young moon, aud you will see how poverty-stxicken that other region is all around it. The next map is one containing 324,198 stars. I thought I woulO pass from stars visible to tho naked eye to those brought into view by a small telescope; there were 40 charts, and T thought if they wero included in a single chart the result couid not fail to bo of interest. If my view is true, that there is an iuterspersion ol large and Email star.-, the tel< scope ought to bring in stars gather- ing more ricnly in tho Milky Way than elsewhere. There Is an equalicv of light elsewhere, but a rich resrion in tho lower part, That is Vhe zone of the Milky Way, aud by thus mapping the starsln it, the MH*y Way is distinctly brought into view. There are the Pleiades in the Milky Way and tho head of the Ball, and here is a region \vherc comparatively few stars are seen. Now I shall ask you to notice that a work of that kind must proceed slowly. There Is a want of laborers In the field. There is always a possibility that we may gather In laborers here and there, and there is a possibility that I may gather assistance here in this way. What ia •wanted is laborers to gather in. Any one can survey the heavens with a telescope, aud It is only necessary to carry out that survey on a uniform plan, ami then the •work <] aio will flc in with the work done by another observer. If you consider this map with its 324.000 stars, you will readily perceive that it takes time necessarily. Give a single second to each star, and it amounts to a consider- able time. The time 1 gave to that map amounted to 400 Lour.-, nearly. iLLr?ri:ATi"x OF MR. PBOCTOB'8 THEORY OF rna ONI VERSE. Take a more pnv.-orfnl leleseope, and tan number of P'II-S will be i. of meiflv li creased but multiplied. IVitli a ]2-iii'-h telescope you will get a greater number. and take one like Ilerschel'a— 13 Inches In aperture— and 20,000,000 stars will be seen. There la a tremendous •work, aud the results will be worthy of tho trouble ; and this la tho only ineaus we have of ascertaining tho architecture of tho heavena. Wo have to note here that the t-tars all move. There Is a wonderful process going on all around. The sun takes his family along. He is called a fixed star, but in reality he is moving rapidlv. The stars have a wouder- fullv rapid motion. I know not which is the more won- derful, tho rapid motion or tho relative immobility of the still heavens. The process of chaniro in a block of granite is relatively greater than those processes in tho still heaven?, yet these stars are everyone traveling 20 aud 30 miles hi a second, ana not a star In tho heavens but has some motion. Every one of them is traveling so rapidly, aud yet if when a man was born the heavens wore mapped at his birth, and he were to live threescore years and ten, or even fourscore, at the end of that tlmo the aspect>of tho heavens, to all ordinary observation, would be the aamo as at the man's birth. THE MOTIONS OF THE FIXED STARS. We will now have upon the screen a few maps in which I have jotted down the motions of the stars, of all the stars whose mol ions have been measured, Hera also you will see tho rate at which they move. These little arrows show the direction m which and the rate at which they are moving. I have boon obliced to make the length of each of them correspond to the motion of tho star In 36,000 years, that is that each of them must take 36.000 yeara to go to the other end of its little motion arrow. A great many of them travel in tho same direction, showing signs of being related tosrcther. We shall have another map showing the retrion of the Twins. These two stars seem to be drifting toward tho Milky Way, like waves toward some mighty shore. V ^ \ 1 I I THE DRIFTING STARS OF THE GREAT BEAR. "" we «h;ill h;.v^ a plomre hronirhr. on slu \vlnr tho Proctor's Astronomical Lectures. seven stars of the Groat Bear. Five of these stars are traveling In a common direction aud apparently at a coinuiou rate. Now these stars are notable also in -avingthe same kind of a spectrum, that leading order to which Sirius belongs. It has the strongly marked lii.es of hydrogen. Tuoy must bo really much further a Ta.y ihau these otuer stars, those in /^ the u;>i>'ir 1uc jsu-o, aud they are really fur- ther «> nay. WUar, I thought, when I uotetl that CrlfMnt, vv-.o 'hat they belonged to a drifting family, • id. i>roi 'jei.jd Chat when Dr. Uuggina should apply nie-.as pf dctciin. ling the recession or approach of a eii--, tn's would be found to bo the fact. The expert- IIIHUD Tas made audmy piedictiouvoriflod. Our kuowl- t- dgo of thi:, laet is based on a very simple principle. Lvht cornea to us by a series of waves. If we are ap- pro, ^hiug the source of these waves, they seein to come quicker; if we are receding from it. they appear slower. 1 ( > on are swiaiiuiug in the water aud meet the waves, they seem to have narrower crests. It Is the s:irae with sound. If you are on a railroad train when another tra'n is approaching upon which the bell is soundiusr, vheu that train passes you will notice a sudden change iu tho sound from acute to grave. So it is with light. li wo are approaching a star with rapidity, the waves will be shortened; otherwise they will be lengthened. The hues in the spectrum will be displaced, and we shall kuow whether the star is approaching or receding. Dr. Huggins found that these stars were receding at the rate of 17 miles in every second of time. There is another sign of change in the stars ; a gather- ing in a certain region. There is, in point of fact, a vast variety wl'ere everything seems so regular. Look at the milky -way in a dark and clear niarht. curdled in one p.»rt. branchintr in another, and how the branches sep.irato, gathering in nodules of light- ness and then fading, ana theu believe ttiat the star systems are so regular as you suppose! It is infinitely more full of variety and vitality than you have si>pp^_-d. Now wo will have a picture, which I h\ve drawn very roughly, to 'show tho variety existing in the star system. We e there streams aud nodules and branches of brightness, and it seems to me that when the astronomer has penetrated into the recesses of the Milky Way, that he has no more reached the bounds of the uuiverse than at the beginning of hia research. He has only examined more and more minutely a particular corner of the star system. Tt really extends ou every side, around and around that system, aud we have no reason to believe that we can reach the bounds of the star sys- tem. The telescope nriuKS into view, beside the larger stars, minute starry flakes; and if the telescope could be made stronger, it would bring into view more and more, and we should find that the extent was really illimita- ble. We find a group of guns of which our Bun Is a single member. Then again we pass to systems brought into view by the telescope, and find that the star system to which our sun belongs is only a part of that one— an atom in space. The astronomer can give the figures, but ho can no more express thrlr significance to hlmsell than ho can unfold their limitless meauiug to others. RICIITEK'8 DREAM. I do not know that I cau coucluue my lecture better than by quoting Eichter's dream, in which he shows the feebleness of man's imagination in the presence of the infinite wonders of the universe, aa translated by our own prose poet, De Qniucey : God called up from dreams a man into the vestihula of Heaven, saying, " Come thou hither and see tho glories ot My Kinsrdom." and to the angels that stood around His throne He said : " Take him ! Strip from him his robes of flVsh, cleanse his vision, and put a new breath into his nostrils; only touch not with any change his human heart, tho heart that weeps and trembles." It was done, aud with a migtity angel for hia guide the man stood ready for hia infinite voyage; and from the terraces of Heaven, without sound or farewell, on a sudile.n they swept into infinite space. Sometimes, with the solemn flight of angel wings, they passed through Z iharas of dark- ness, through wildernesses of death tnat divided tlio worlds of life ; sometimes they passed over thresholds that were quickening under prophetic motions from God; then, from beyond distances that are counted only in Heaven, light dawned as through a shapeless film ; by unutterable pace they passed to the light, the light by unutterable puce passed them. In a moment, tlie Ijlaza of suns was npou them, in a moment the rush of plan- ets was around them. Then came eternities of twilight that revealed, buC were not revealed ; on the right hand and on the left towered gigantic constellations that by self-repetitions and answers from afar, that by counter-posiWuus, built up triumphal gateways whose archways, whose archi- traves, horizontal, upright, rested, rose, at altitude of spans that seemed ghostly from infinitude; without; measure were the architraves, past number the arch- ways, beyond memory the srates. Within were stairs that scaled the eternities around; above was below and below was above, to man stripped of gravitating body. Depth was swallowed up in night insurmountable; high t was swallowed up in depth unfathomable. On a sudden, espn-ns its grateful acknowledgments to a K"turer, and es- pecially one who is not a countryman, as did Prof. Proctor's listeners on the evening rt Oct. 23 at Asso- ciation Hull, on 1lio occasion of the last Lcture of Lis series on the discoveries of astronomy During the delivery of the course of lectures just concluded, the good-will displayed by American audiences towards the distinguished Englishman, which has been shown, as Prof. Proctor himself remarked feelingly, by silence, by attentive cou- sideiation, and by appreciative applause, has been very marked ; and after the cordially- worded reso- lutions of acknowledgment had been passed, the scientist responded in a few heartfelt words which proved his thorough recoeuition of those facts. The subject treated by Prof. Proctor was " The Birth and Growth of tho Solar System, with an Ex- posit ion of the Nebular Hypotheses of Herschel and Laplace." TflE LECTURE. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN : I was rather hor- nlle.i \vlim I (Mine into the room to llnd circulating a certain p;i;>rr rc^inling mvs.-ir. (Tins was a biographi- es! flketck with a portrait.] I really have not the least objection to this, but should like the audionco to know that I had nothing to do with Its circulation. [Ap- plnosp.1 There are few subjects more difficult-, more full of pox-- plcxnies, than the thought of the origin of tho solar sys- trui. Tin- power- i;.:it have been ciron to m:in — not tho iri'liviiluul, but tho race— have been great. Tho mys- terica that lie around him are greater yot, and it sen us almost hopeless that man should iieable to recognize any- thing as to tin- laws according to which our system arose And yot Hint is a very Hi .subject ou which man mav exercise his t hou^hiM. It seems to mo It is well for man to follow out the paths that scorn to load him back- ward toward the origin of our system, lie need not ba afraid, whatever his religion, feelm r« may be, to follow OTlt those paths, 80 long as th'-y le.ul him to facts. It mny be that as he follows tliei.i he will llnd views that ho never entertained beloro; it may bo that he will flnd Extras — Pamphlet Series. much perplexity : but Inasmuch as the work is a stuiy of science— that is to say, a knowledge of the works and ways of God — it cannot but lead to higher ideas ot the wisdom and omniscience of the Almighty. I oiler this preface to my treatment of the subject of tho evolution of the solar system, because, strangely enough, many look with doubt aud almost with aver- sion on inquiries of that sort. They seem to bo afraid that too much will be discovered. They are men full of religious feeling, but they doubt, and I think that the conscientious stu lent of science may justly say to them, " O ye of little faith! Why are ye so fearful!" But I think both tho student of science and the theologian should have charity, one towards the other. It does seem to me a misfortune when wo find ou the one hand the believer in religion taunting the student of science who takes this special work forhis own, speaking of him as an iufi lei and as if his purpose was evil. Ou the other hand, I cannot adequately express the indignation I feel when I hear the student of scieuce — sometimes it happens; thank GodJ It is not often — expressing doubts ai to tho real truthfulness, and impugning the religious belief of those who differ with him. On each side there should be charity. There is a treat deal of truth and of the love of truth in human uature. Both sides a re seeking for the truth, and it seems to me tho greatest possible misfori-iue when they fall out with each other. TIIK EVIDENCE OF GROWTH IN THE FLAN'ETARY SYSTEM. Now if we look around at the condition of the plan- etary system, we find much to lead us to the beliet that it grew to its present state ; that there was a process of its development. Take the primary planets. In tho first place, we see that all tho planets circle in the samo direction around tho sun. Tuere are eight primary planets, and 134 asteroids, and all these boJies travel ;u ths same direction around tho sun. Then every one of the bodies whoso rotation has beeu deter- mined, turns in the same direction. More- over, the four satellites of Jupiter, tho one ef our earth, and (ho eight of S.iturn, travel still in tho same direction ; and wo flnd only one exception, in tho case of the satellites of Uranus, which may be said to travel in the opposite direction, if, tho course of travel being- nearly upright as compared with the planetary orbit, they can be said to have any direction. As fat as they have any directioL, however, it is worthy of note that it is a contrary direction to that vhich the planets travel around the sun. Well, I flnd so many of thesis similarities, concerning TR>ilok wo are bound, I think, by tho laws of probability, to believe that they arose from some process of evo- lution. Of course wo may believe, if we choose, that the Almighty ordains everything in that way ; that every planet was created in the first place moving io that direction ; that thus it was every tiling about us wan formed. The student of ecology, too, may learn of the existence of living creatures on tho earth hundreds of years past; but we may bolieve, if we choose, that all those fossils are signs planted there by the Almighty ; that they nro not the remains of living crea- tures, but mere appearances It seems to me that Proctors Astronomical tTnit 1a a pnlnfnl belief, making the Almighty God give evidences th;it merely lead meu astray. And, tberofore, when we find these facts in the solar system, It Is natural and right for us — our reasoning: powers not being given to us for nothing— .t is right for us to try and conceive how that state of things arose. The cctual probabilities are great against anything like chauce distribution of the solar system, particularly when we remember there are 142 primary and secondary phmets, and when we take into account their motion alone, each circling around t tie sun in the same direction. The chan-o that one is going in one direction and the next goiug in the same direction is only one chance out of two, and the chance that a third would go in the earne direction is ouly one chance out of four ; the Chance that a fourth would go likewise is only one out of eight; a fifth, one out of 16; so we must go on doubling until we find that the chance of 142 planets going around in the same direction — I hope you will be patient while I tell you the number— is one in, 2,774,SCO,OUO,000,000,000,000,0«),0;!0.000,000,000,000>000. [Laugh- ter and applause.] But that is 'not all. The way in which the planets travel is a fact in itself that seems to Indicate a certain process of evolution by which they have a particular motion. LAPLACE'S NEBULAR THEORY. Now if we consider the way in which that mo- tion arose we are first led to the hypothesis of the French astronomer Laplace. Laplace, in his ex- plauatiou of this motion, had the idea that there was a great nebulous mass having the sun in the center, extending on either side far beyond the present breadth of the path of the utte-mosr planet, that is. a path of 5,000,000,000 miies diameter, and the nebu- lous system of Laplace extended beyond that. That mass was intensely hot and vaporous, and it was rotating, and as the rotating mass contracted and it began to rotate more rapidly, the result was that a ring was thrown off by centrifugal force. In time the ring •would gradually break up, its parts would gradually amalgamate; many parts would have different rates of motion, and different parts would encounter each other, and in the course of millions of ages there •would be an amalgamation into one mass, having the same direction of motion that the nebulous mass bad, and traveling around a center which waa the sun. But as this minor mass went on contracting it would follow the same law as the original body which gave birth to it. It would go on contracting, and go round more and more rapidly; perhaps it would throw off true rings, which would become satellites. So the earth was formed ; she turns on her axis in 24 hours in the same direction, while she takes 3G5 days in going around the eun. So it was with Jupiter and S iturn and all the pi.ii.fits — all iu rotation in the same direction. That process would go on until one planet after another was formed. And so it was that the solar economy, as we at present know it, would arise. That is a rough account of the nebular hypothesis of Laplace. It seems to me that there i3 great difficulty iu laewayof accepting it. In the first place, we have nothing to lead us to believe that a great nebular uiasa Lectures. 41 of so enormous dimensions and Px*TPm« tonnifv ^...u'l rotate as a whole or exist as a whole. Wo hav-j no evi- dence to lead us to believe that the rings of Saturn are a continuous solid. We know they could not exist an nebulous rings, and we have now as the accepted theory that they are a multitude of separate satellites that could not have existed as a whole and rotated as a whole. Another point: That nebulous mass rotating by uni- form process, if contracting, must give birth to a uni- form system. There would be some law associating the planets' distances with their dimensions, and that, as we know, is far from being the cise. We have tliree parts of the solar system— the inner planets, the asteroids, the outer planets. The sun is 751 times aa large as the outer ones ; the outer ones over 200 times as great as the inner ones. Take any one of these families, and we find apparently no law in their arrangement. Among the ii;ner planets, there is first Mercury, a very small planet; then Venus, very much larger; then the earth, still larger, and dignified with a moon ; but then we come down again to Mars, which is a small planet. Then we have the asteroids, more specks, 134 of tuem. Then take the outer family, and there is still no progression. We have the largest of the planets, Jupiter; then Saturn, also immense, and then the planets Urauus and Neptune, about equal in size but smaller than Jupiter or S *i:rn. Laplace's theory does not explain why the famuy of least dimensions should be iu the middle, and the larger one outside and the smaller near the sun ; and we have no account of the relations of these bodies by his theory, and only aa ex- planation of the general facts first noted. ASTRONOMERS LIKENED TO A COLONV OP MAY-FLIES. We are led, therefore, to another theory, and I adopt what appears to me a suitable method of illustrating it. If we imagine a colouy of small insects, of the May-flies or ephemera, which live but a few hours, and living in and having as the center of their domain a large tree, these ephemera are not able to ascertain anything about that tree in their time of existence, as they live but one day. But we may suppose them to be reasoning beings, and that they have handed down from one to another the discoveries made by their ancestors, and they proposed to ascertain in time, by exercising their intellectual powers, the laws according to which the tree grew, and some- thing of the future of the tree. They would trace bacfe the history of the tree and arrive perhaps at some notion by comparing that tree with others, and that it sprang from a seed, and they would do as we do, and think that was the beginning of all things, for this tree would bo their universe. If they were told by some thoughtful May-fly that the tree resulted from the contraction of a great mass of vegetable matter, they might remain satisfied with this notion for a long time, but if they found by observing other trees that there were no such vegetable masses contracting in that way, it would bo just on their part to look to another theory, and finding the process of growth, they would trace tvac-k the process and say that it was the result of the quite different process of tree-growth to that stage* £2 Tribune Ertras— They woulrt rercv£*n!ze the process aud u.io it IMC!:, an 1 say tlr.it the tire, did not contract from a vegetable mass, but sprung froia a small vegetable mass, aud grew by the addition of matter. Then I think there 13 another polut to notice. They raav reject tlie notion formed of the vegetable mass, a:ul say very reasonably, that with all duo respect to the opinion of so highly eminent a May-fly as ho who propounded tlio condensation theory, whole days have passed since they have formed truer ideas. So I think it Is with the theory of Laplace ; w.; have a great respect for him, for ho was the greatest mathematician that ever lived after Newton. But we must consider these •Wonderful tacts that wo have recently learned about the planets — about the sun's conditions, about the heated condition of Jupiter and Saturu, about the relation of cornets and meteors. We have learned that the earth is growing, though not appreciably; as I have stated to you, the earth increases only one inch in diameter by the fall of meteors 111 400,000,000 years. We can hardly call that growth at all, but still, like the tree after it it has ceased to crow, and only lives, the present de- velopment of the earth shows us, leads us, to look back at the distant past, when the meteor system was more numerous, aud the whole solar system was grow- ing. It seems more natural to look at the process as a process of accretion than of contraction from some neb- ulous mass. THE THEORY OF ACCRETION. We will now have the room darkened, and this process •will be illustrated on the sereeu. With tins new view of the matter, does it promise to give us liglit ou auy ques- tions which, were previously unanswered 1 Will it ex- plain how the planets are arranged in the manner in •which they are 1 Wo shall find it will. You have a pic- ture illustrating the great difference in size between the outer part and the inner part of the system. Here are Uranus, Neptune, Saturn, and Jupiter, and here in the lower right-hand corner you will notice a circle only as luriri- as represents the planet Uranus; within it are Mercury, Mars, the Earth aud Moon, and Venus. We. mitrht imagine a great nebulous mass like the lire -mist of llei sehel, iu space, gradually approach- tag towards the sun, approaching spirally. Wo might conceive that as the beginning of all things, like the tree from the seed. We know that as one nebulous mass parses into an ither by condensation, heat and light are produced. There is evidence that these nebula* are gaseous. Well, then, these, nebulous masses would bo thrown into the great renter. There would be one center of aggre- gation. That center woulJ grow continually in size and power, gradually draw in more and more matter to it, and the more It drew in of these nebulous masses, the greater its power would become. How then does the secondary aggregation take Its origin I I suppose that •would arlso uot iu one direction only, but •ome in ono and somo In another, with a superabundance in ouo direction ; great subor- dinate masses would bo formed, perhaps, ' cot continuing i-eparatu for any length of lime. In the neighborhood of a great central aggregation, u cuthur- Pampltlet Scr;Vr. mg of that kind could not form, for the reason that .»> the motions near the great central aggregation would ci,« very rapid. Tako our sun, which is the original center of aggregation, aud we flu I that iu the sun's neighborhood the motions are very rapid. A body coming out of space aud falling into the sun would reach the sun at a velocity of 330 miles a second, and if only going around the tun, would travel 290 miles a second, but at the distance of Jupiter the velocity of an arriving object would be only about 12 miles a second; therefore it would be easier for an aggregation to form at that distance, some great distance from the center. It would not have to overcome the tremendous velocities which an aggregation would have to master in attempting to form near the sun; it would have time to catch the flying masses. A secondary aggregation at a considerable distance from the center would not Buffer from this great velocity. Au aggregation there would have gri-ater power over matter around it, and a larger and larger aggregation would form, and as it became larger and larger it would be more and more mighty; by a sort of geometrical progression it would grow larger and larger, while all the objects at- tempting to form within its influence would be kept down, reduced iu size. Thus wo explain the fact that we find Jupiter, the greatest aggregation, at a much greater distance thau the inner family of planets and the asteroids. Beyond Jupiter wo come to another system, which shows feigns of greater activity and development. At Saturn's distance the motions would be less rapid than at Jupiter's distance. There would still remain a great quantity of matter out of which an aggregation would be formed, anii so wo should find S tlnrn, uot so lari^o as Jupiter, because tlie matter would naturally decrease outwards from tho suu, but owing to the smaller velocity there would bo a greater freedom of aggregation, trid 60 \vo have Saturn, with a ring around It, and its eight satellites. And then we next coino to Uranus and Neptune, and tliey are smaller, because the quantity of matter diminishes with distance. Then take the inner family, close to the sun. Close Jo the sun, they are prevented from accumulating much by tho suu's neighborhood, because of tho tre- mendous velocity of matter there, and they are consequently small. Passing far out aeain, wo find tho influence of Jupiter beginning to bo felt, Jupitor resisting the formation of an aggregation within bis Influence, The combined influence of Jupitor and Saturn preventing agirregations from forming, re- sults iu tho smallness of Mars; ami close within tho palh of Juiiltcr's influence we find the zone of asteroids, each too small to form a planet. That is better than Lipl. ice's thepry. It Is not to bo expected that you could have a complete account ol those relations, neither could you by theory explain tho size and color of every bough and leaf, and the detailj of arrangement of a ireo. COMI'LIMENT TO AN AMERICAN ASTRONOMER. And now I shall allude to the strantrc results obtained by Prof. Daniel Kirkwood, of Ulooiniugton, In. liana., whom. I have called the Kepler of modern astronomy Proctor's Astronomical Lectures. from tho woyhe hns looked out for relation after relation, ami the connection between the different relations of the planetary system. Ilia researches are worthy of all praise. His results are full of interest. He took the paths of the asteroids and arrauaed them in their order of distance, and he found cer tain places whore, for some distances, there were no asteroids. There are asteroids at a great number of distances from the sun, extending over 400,000,000 of miles, but there were gups, like those between the rings of Saturn, and the way in which Kirkwood explained this was: ho noted where the gaps occurred, and he found them corresponding to the paths of asteroids having periods commensurate with the period of Jupi- ter; and a student of astronomy knows that this com mensurate period must have led to great perturbation. The periods of Jupiter and Saturn are as the numbers two and five, and when there is a conjunction in dif- ferent parts of their orbits the perturbation takes place there, and they disturb each other, producing what is known as tho great inequality of Saturn and Jupiter. In the same way Jupiter would disturb the motion of tho asteroids, if they had a period liKe his own, and would prevent them from forming, his mass ie 6O much greater. v And so you will find there are no asteroids in those particular spaces. This supports the tlieoiT that the solar system arose from motion and aggregations of discrete masses ; not from the contraction of a great nebulous mass. The riiiss of Saturn give further evidence of the same. The gap in Saturn's ring's— the gap in the true ring — cor- responds in position to the place where this influence would affect the paths of little satellites traveling be- tween the rings. There on the screen before you is the great Spiral Nebula as observed by Eosse, andthere you see two central aggregations. As we look on that nebula we find its condition unchanged year after year, and recognize in the slowness of any perceptible change taking plaee, evidence corre- sponding to the nature of its being. Herschel and La- place had a somewhat similar theory in regard to this nebulous matter and the stars. Hersehel's theory was based on the fant that he recognized in the heavens eigus of a luminous flre gathering toward1 certaiu centers of aggregation. There are parts of the heavens where he noticed that tho whole [field was lit up with a faint light, and he made the strange mistake of supposing that by increasing his telescopic power he could see the fire- mist better. But the real fact was he could not see it as well. If you want to recognize that fire-mist— and America istne best place to look at it — have no telescope at all. Use a telescopic tube, but with no magnifying power. I wish I had the keenness of eyesight for it. Provide yourself with a tube shaped like a tele- scope, with the thinnest glass, and place disks in such a position before your eye-piece so as to hide the stars of any particular constellation; carefully observe the heavens ant" you will have a clearer view of any fire-mist than you would by the telescope. The telescope will not mak» luminous bodies brighter. You look at tho moon with a telescope, and you think it looks brighter, but in does not. The intrinsic brightness is not increased iu the least. By looking, ono eye through the telescope, and tho other not through it. at tho moon, you will flurl that although to tho naked eye the moon is smaller. It is much brighter than in tho telescopic view. Toe fire-mist Her- schel recognized, if it is in the heavens, should be viewed without a telescope. ASPECTS OF THE NEBULOUS MASSES. I shall next pass to the gathering in of the fire-mist to- ward particular parts of the heavens. We will have a series of those views on the screen. These views are of different kinds of uebulaj. Nebulaj may be looked upon as flowers in a gardeu in different stages— one springing from the earth, another in full bloom, and another iu seed time. There you have a nebula after it clusters, and other pictures will show you the immense varieties of those nebulous masses, and I would remind you that the number of these nebula} is something enormous. There are -as many nebula) discovered as there are stars visible to the naked eye. Those pictures before you exhibit different kinds of nebulae. You see the size of the great nebulous mass, gathering toward certain centers of aggregation. Herschel thus illustrated how out ofthe great mass of fire-mist, stars might be formed. There you see three stars, and now we will have another picture in which still other forms of aggregations will be seen. There are certain, of these nebulous masses in which the stars form single clusters When examined by a powerful telescope the most wouuerful complexity is found in those nebulous masses. Oiher pictures will show you the process of the formation of stars, There you see a quantity of nebulous matter in certain parts gathering toward the center. And now we will pass to a series of pictures showing tho way in which these nebulous matters cling around stars; and those are on a larger scale, and you will see the nebulous matter apparently drawn toward the various stars. Then, you will recognize the great difference between the way in which that nebular mass is forming and Laplace's theory. We shall have the room more dark- ened for some time, as these nebular pictures do not show sufficiently unless the room is darkened; and we will have the pictures brought on rapidly one after another, the next three or four of them illustrating the same theory. In the first you perceive three rich stars, and the nebu- lous matter there also is rich. There you will recognize the same features. You notice the dark spors between the nebular regions, and the stars always in the brighter part of these nebular regions, and evidence of the gathering in of it toward the stars, but we have no evi- dence of Laplace's view of a rotating nebular mass. We will have another picture, and it will be a bright one. Here the nebula would appear to have changed in shape. Here is oue view of a nebula, and the next ono taken by Lascell of the same nebula, differs materially from it. This nebula is called Omega from its resem- blance to the Greek letter. The same nebula is in the picture by Lasoell, and it is so changed that it is difficult to believe that it is the same object. This leads us to tho idea that these masses change in form. This is a view or the heavens, illustrating the variation of th« diff.^nt jimta 44 Tribvn* Extra*— Pamphlet Bcrie*. of the hrarens In brishtneas. This ts the bright region In the southern heavens of which I said that when i; rises above the horiznu the effect is the same as is caused b.v 'lie young moon. There is In the midst Eta Argils. This is a i!e»ula which varies in shape, and the Btar in it varies from the first to the sixth magnitude. Here we see fresh signs of variability in space, which be.ir on the birth and evolution of our system. We ace that the suu wasonce variable.and the placets were stars of all variations in the early history of our system. While the aggregation was taking place, the sun would at some times blaze with fl lining glory, and there would be an interchange of brightness, regular or irregular, as masses of matter were a^trreerated into it. As to the question whether the sun is likely suddenly to have a defalcation of brightness, consider how some of tiie .-tare vary In brightness, and the thought is sug- gested that the same may happen to our sua. The pro- cess of evolution may be so far incomplete. Careful observations made by the Englis j astronomer Hind and others— a process not very rancL carried on in thia country— show that the sti'.rs vary very much in bright- ness; but that observation must be carried on a long time '-efore sure results can be obtained. VARIATIONS TAKING PLACE IN THE STELLAR HEAVENS. In the constellations, if we can imagine that there were tig urc* resembling the bear and the lion in shape In the old timnst and if we find now no traces of them, the idea is suggested that there has been a change, and Iw is once disposed to think this was the case; for I could not think how the early nations could imagine a bcai, for instance, if there was no such shape in Ursa Major. But by making the figure of the animal larger anil studying the head, and, as was suggested to Dick Swlveller by the Marchioness, by making beiieve a good deal, we can make it out. The four limbs of the Bear are differently placed here. View thai group forming the head, and there is a certain resemblance to the peculiar snout of the head of a Be;ir. Tlic stars arc small, but on a clear night you can recog- iii/.'- a certain resemblance to the head. We have here the head of the Lion, the figure being larger tban is usually depleted, and including several neighboring constellations. The grouping of stars all aroun I gives really some resemblance to the head of a lioiii T«il tmMp which I have made ttie tail is the con- stellation Coma B.-reuieis. Perhaps, after all, the stars never did vary niueh. There isonoueu there to make an imaginative people think there "was the figure of a lion. In these seven stars of the Bear the middle star has vi.- ried much, having declined from being as bright as the others. We cannot be certain that our sun may not di- minish or Increase In brightness. That middle star was once as bright as the rest, and now it is greatly reduced. This next picture shows how the great nebula in Argo has varied. Now, we have two pictures, In one of which is the figure like a kev-holc, and on the next it is greatly varied and everything is so changed as to show that the netiular masa is drifting hither and thither; that the regions of the fire-mist contain drift- ing masses. Wo shall have more pictures tend- Iu£ to siiow the disposition of these nebuiac over the heavens. The cloudlets of stars arc foimi r.Mu.uy naj made us recognize more fully th;m ever but'ore that '• tlie heavens declare tlie glury of God," and to declare with the Psalmisr, "O Lord, how manifold arc thy works! in wisdom hast thou made them all." Resolved. That in tendering our grateful acknowledg- ments lo Prof. Proctor for this course oi lectures and for t lie- pleasure and instruction we tuive darived fr.nn thorn, we cannot refrain at the same time from exi>ivs tin ure may be' as eminently successful as it h.is .jo,-.i honorable ami brilliant in the past. SIR. PROCTOR'S REPLY. Prof. Proctor replied . I thank you, ladias aim gpnM?.- meu, very earn 'stly for the kindness with which yo'i have expressed your thanks to me. I felt that I h;: t really undertaken a task of considerable difficulty M condensing into a scries of six, my lectures on so vast » subject. I know there was no difficulty in bringing these subjects beforo an American audience, if I only had Buffi lent time within which to deal with them; but to deal with the whole sub- ject of astronomy in six lectures was really a very great strain upon tho endurance of an audience. But for tlie way in which tLey have been received, and tho way they have been followed, and the close attention with which they have been listened to, I am very grate- ful to you indeed. Tho only feeling of regret I have had has been that 1 could not transfer some of your enthu- siasm lor science, esp:' -lally as it is represented in tha numbers that come to hear of those things, to my own people at home. . In regard to the lo-oimions. -which are so kind and complimentary, I can assure you, speakinar troni my heart, that during my whole stay in America— more than three mouths — I have not had one experience that has not been altogether pleasing. Everything has been more than gratifying. The kindness I have received ou all hands has been very grateful to me. indeed, add very remarkable, too. I had no thought when I came over here of meeting with anything like that kindness. There is one thing I would like to mention. Many have addressed letter.- to me, have proposed to call upon ine, and invited me to call upon them. I wish to say that I have felt unable in many cases to do so, however much I desired it, or cvr-i. to return an answer to some of tin- letters, unless a sin t answer, which is worse than no letter atalL I trust t! t;my of these— some of whom may bo here present, wi 1 i-colicct tue difficulties under which I have laborel. I feel that it is well thesa difficulties should bo ku,\u; and I now thank you heartily, not only lor the resolutions that have been passed, but for that greatest Kindness that can be shown bv audiences to a lecturer— a ttentlou to aud considera (ion of what he has to briny before theuj. [Great aj> The audience then slowlv dispersed, mnny remaining •o exchange pleasant greet ii.jfs with the lecturer. 46 Tribune Extras— PampUct Series. Prof. Asrassiz's Lectures at Penikese. THE PKAYJER OF AGASSIZ. BY JOHN G. WHITTIER. From Th« Chrittian Union. On the Isle of Penikese, Kinged about by sapphire seas, Fanned by breezes salt and cool, Stood the Master with his school. Over sails that not in vain Wooed the west wind's steady strain, Line of coast that low and far Stretched its undulating bar, Wings aslant aloug the rim Of tho waves they stooped to skim, Rock and isle and glistening bay, Fell the beautiful white day. Said the Master to the youth : 1 We have come in search of truth. Trying with uncertain key Door by door of mystery ; We are reaching, through His laws. To tho garment-hem of Cause, Him, the endless, unbegun, The Unnaineable, the One, Light of all our light the Source, Life of life, and Force of force, As -with, fingers of tho blind We are groping here to find What the hieroglyphics moan Of the Unaaen in the seen. What the Thought Avhich underlies Nature's masking and disguise, What it is that hides beueath Blight and bloom and birth and death, By past efforts unavailing, Doubt and error, loss and failing, Of our weakness made awaro, On the threshold of our task Let us litrht and guidance ask, Let us pause in sileut prayer 1" Then the Master in his place Bowed his head a little space, And tho leaves by soft airs stirred, Lapse of wave and cry of bird Left tho solemn hush unbroken Of that wordless prayer unspokci^ While its wish, on earth unsaid. Rose to heaven interpreted. As, in life's best hours, we he«« By tho spirit's finer ear LI n low voice within ua, The All-Father heareth us; And his holy ear we pain With our noisy words and vain. Not for him our violence Storming at the gates of sense, His the primal language, His The eternal silenct s ! Even the careless heart was moved, And the doubting gave assent, With a gesture reverent, To the Master well-beloved. As thin mists are glorified By the light they cannot hide, All who gazed upon him saw, Through its veil of tender awo. How his face was still nplit By the old sweet look of it, Hopeful, trustful, full of cheer, And the love that casts out fear. Who the secret may declare Of that brief, unuttered prayer T Did the shade before him come Of th' inevitable doom, Of the end of earth so near, And Eternity's new year? In the lap of sheltering seas Rests the isle of Penikese ; But tho lord of the domain Comes not to his own again ; Where the eyes that follow fail, On a vaster sea his sail, Drifts beyond our berk and haill Other lips within its bound Shall tho laws of life oxp >und : Other eyes from rock and shell Read the world's old riddles well; But when breezes light and bland Blow from Summer's blossomed land, When the air is glad with wings And the blithe Ronu-spiiiTow singa. Many an eye vrith his still face Shall the living ones disi'iaee, Many nu ear tho word shall seek He alone could fitly speak. And one name forevennore Shall bo uttered o'er and o'er By the waves that kiss the shor% By the curlew's whistle sent Down the cool, sea-so-nted air| In all voices known lo her Nature own her worshiper, Half in triumph, half lament. Thither love shall tearful turn, Friendship panse uncovered thef% Lnd the wiwst re\ erence learn tba t&BttU-r» e»ieut prayer. Agassis at TEACHINGS OF AGASSIZ. LECTURES DELIVERED TO THE ANDERSON SCHOOL OF NATURAL HISTORY. The following reports of some of the lec- tures delivered by Prof. Louis Agassiz before the Anderson School of Natural History on Penikese Island, during July and August, 1873, have been compiled from the note-books of students present at their delivery. Though necessarily incomplete, and to a certain ex- tent fragmentary, they will be found, as far as they go, substantially accurate ; and it is believed that in them the more important of Prof. Agassiz's discourses at Peuikese are fairly represented. FIRST WORDS TO STUDENTS. PROFESSOH AGASSIZ'S OPENING LECTURE AT THE ANDERSON SCHOOL, DELIVERED JULY 9, 1873. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN : Were I about to teach a class ia the ordinary sense I should make a very different beginning. My intention is not, however, to impart information, but to throw the burden of study on you. If I succeed iu teaching you to ob- serve, my aim will be attained. I do not wish to communicate knowledge to you, you can gather that from a hundred sources, but to awaken in you a faculty which is probably more dormant than the simple power of acquisition. Unless that faculty is stimulated, any information I might give you about natural history would soon fade and bo gone. I am therefore placed in a somewhat difficult and abnor- mal position for a teacher. I must teach and yet not give information. I must, in short, to all in- tents and purposes, be ignorant before you. The very first subject to which I will call your attention is one where you would naturally come to me with questions. Do not ask them, for I shall not answer, but I shall try to lay out your work in such away that you will find your own path without too much difficulty. What is the nature of the soil, and what is the geological constitution of this island ? I believe I know all about it; but I wish to prepare you to solve this problem, which is, by the way, no easy one, for yourselves. Try first to find how the island lies. Wo have no compass, but our main building runs East and West. Let that be your compass. You will find position an essential element in the study of geological char- acters. Perhaps you have already noticed the gene- ral outline of our island. You may have seen that a gravelly, water- worn neck of land connects a smaller island with the main one, and that the two run parallel. What is the meaning of the curve between 47 these two islands I What is the meaning of the flat beyond the curve ? What is the moaning of the loose materials about us ? What is the meaning of bowlders scattered over the surface ? It would bo easy to explain all these features upon well known theories, but I should do you a poor service by any such ready-made interpretation. There are many other points to be considered before you will solve the problem. You must, for in- stance, distinguish the difference between materials in contact with the water and those above it; between the various dimensions of these loose mate- rials and their relative size as found above or below the tide level. What relation does the island bear to the adjoining islands? How are they connected? When JTOU have occasion to do so, extend this inquiry to the main land. These are the elements for a com- prehensive appreciation of the way in which this island has been formed. This investigation would in itself be enough for a Summer's work. If you could answer me in two months the questions I have put to you here. I should say you have indeed done well. I wanfc you to learn practically how wide is the field of science ; how much investi- gation of a valuable kind may be found even in this small area. And the method of investigation you apply here will enable you to examine the same subjects wherever you live. You will find the same elements of instruction all about you, where you are each teaching ; and you can take your classes out and show them the same lessons, and lead them to the same subjects you are now studying here. And this mode of teaching children is so natural, so suggestive, so true ! That is the charm of teaching from Nature herself. No one can warp her to suit his own views, ehe brings us back to absolute truth as often as we wander. Until our apparatus comes of various sorts which has not arrived, we roust occupy ourselves with the geology, and I would advise you to begin by collect- ing all the various kinds of rock on the island. You will be surprised to hear, perhaps, that you will find on this small space three-fourths, perhaps nine- tenths, of all the rocks in the United States. With these and a few words on the animals the students were already begiuing to collect, the mode of handling them, &c., this introductory address closed. It can hardly be fairly appreciated by any one who did not hear the next session two or three hours later, after the first ramble was over, when the Professor collected his class again, and drew them out by questions, and without telling them anything except a few facts which they could not by any possibility find for themselves in the neighborhood, showed them what they had in their own minds, and led them by comparison and combination to un- derstand the significance of what they had already 48 Tribune Extraa- Dbserved. This second exercise showed the fresh- ness and originality of this undo of instruction from which routine was banished, and in which all pro- gress depended upon awaken in!; and stimulating tho mind by a direct contact with Nature. THK ART OF TEACHING. HOW STUDENTS SHOULD BE EDUCATED. GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF INSTRUCTION— METHODS OP IMPARTING KNOWLEDGE IN NATURAL HISTORY. No one felt more deeply than Prof. Agassiz the need of a change in the methods and aims of public instruction. He was a constant friend and adviser of tho teadier as well as the helper and inspirer of tho pupil. The essential object of the course at Penikese was, first, to show teachers how to learn, and then to show them how to teach. Prof. Agassiz felt that there was great need of getting out of the traditionary ruts, especially in methods of instruc- tion in natural history. In the earlier part of the student's course he deemed it of much more im- portance to learn how to observe and investigate than to acquire by rote a mass of facts heaped 1o- pether for tho student's convenience. He distrusted tho methods of the book*, and aimed to bring the student into direct and immediate intimacy with nature herself. ,This for years had been his method at the Museum of Anatomy. The great number of excellent teachers— not a few of them shining lights in tho courts of science — who were graduated from that institution, shows with what success. lu conducting tho school at Penikese, Prof. Agas- eiz introduced the method which he had pursued at the Mns 'iim with so much success. One of his first endeavors in the laboratory and lecture-room was to expound his views of the proper modes of teaching. Never attempt to teach, said the Professor, what you do not know yourself, and know well. If the School Committee insist upon your teaching any- thing and everything, decline firmly to do so. It is an imposition upon the teachers and pupils alike to require a teacher to teach that which he does not know. This much-needed reform has already begun in colleges, and I hope it will continue. More can be done in this way to improve our system of educa- tion than in almost any other. It is a great mistake to suppose that any one can teach tho elements of a science. This is indeed the most difficult part of instnn (ion, and it requires the most mature teachers Not much progress can bo made until people are convinced that everybody is not capable of learning everything, and that teach- ers should not be expected to master every depart- ment of human knowledge. Do you expect tho great artLstb of the world to be good Latin or Greek scliol- •Pamphlet Series. ars, or good mathematicians T No moro snonld you expect a teacher to be perfect in all departments of knowledge. To have a smattering of something is one of the great fallacies of our time. A teacher ought to know someone thing well. Select tho most common things for instruction, so that the pupil cannot take a ramble without meeting the objects about which he has been informed. Train pupils to be observers. Never attempt to give instruction in natural history without having your pupils provided with specimens. The nm.st common specimens, as horseflies and crickets, will do as well as any. Lot your pupils hold the specimens, and make them observe what you say. . In 1817 I lectured in Milton, Mass., and I insisted that every person present should take a grasshopper, and hold it, and look at it. It was an innovation at the time. Help me to make it a universal method throughout the country. Accustom pupils to bring in the specimens themselves. Induce them to go to the next brook or stone wall to get their own text books, for which they pay nothing. Some specimens are difficult to preserve, and it is delicate work to accustom pupils to handle specimens carefully. The earlier this training is begun tho better. The author of the Anatomy of the European Cockchafer, before commencing his investigation of this animal, ab- stained from all stimulants for weeks so that he might have full control over his muscles. The study of nature is direct intercourse with the Highest Mind. When you pit down to natural his- tory work, it should bo with the intention to give yourself up to tho thought. It is unworthy an in- telligent being to triHe with the works of the Cre- ator. Even to a materialist they are the works of the highest power. A laboratory of natural history is a sanctuary, in which nothing improper should bo exhibited. I would tolerate improprieties in a church sooner than in a scientific laboratory. Talk about your specimens and try to make the pupilsobserve the most telling and striking features. When you collect a specimen be sure to find out what it is, and make full memoranda of everything pertaining to it. Do this in every case. You havo chances to find new things unknown before. Col- lect carefully and preserve well, so that the speci- mens will tell tho story of the animal. There should bo a little museum in every school-room ; half a dozen species of radiates, a few dozen shells, 100 in- sects, a few fish, reptiles, birds, and mammals would be enough to teach well. Do Candolle, one of our most scientific botanists, said he could teach all ho knew of botany with a dozen plants. It is bettor to have a few forms, well known, than to make pupils acquainted with many hundred species tho first year; better bo well acquainted with a dozen sped- Agassiz at EOPTIP, as fiie result of tho first year's work, than to have $2,000 with which to buy a largo collection. When you are collecting, ho suro to make a careful record of the locality from which each specimen is obtained. In this way you can do good work for science by assisting in the determination of the geographical distribution of animals. A specimen, tho locality of which is not known, has but little scientific value. Every specimen in the Museum of Comparative Zoology is a genuine specimen, the locality, donor, date, &c. of all being carefully recorded. The first thine: to be determined about a new speci- men is not its name, but its most prominent charac- ter. We can study the plan of the radiates, we can learn the type, from onp specimen as well as from another, or from many. ' It is unnecessary to know a ffreat variety in order to know many. Peicikcse. 49 THE BKST BOOKS. DIRECTIONS FOR SELECTING BOOKS FOR STUDY. A CRITICISM ON PUBLIC LIBRARIES— RARITY OF WORKS OP VALUE ON NATURAL HISTORY— TOO MANY COOKS ARE MERE COMPILATIONS. Though Prof. Agassiz was strenuous in his efforts to encourage original research and immediate acquaint- ance with Nature, he did not overlook the value of books. His word? of direction and warning in this respect are of greav importance to the student. My design, he said, is not to exclude from yide Studies, $2. Travels in Urazil, *•'• Huxley's Comparative Anatomy, $2 50. Owen's Comparative Anatomy, three volumes, $8 to |10 per volume. Ciivicr'e Animal Kingdom. Wood's Illustraicd Natural History, tbroe volumes, $4 to >"> |>i-r volume. i < ii-'.s m's Animal.-* and Plants nndor Domestication, $6. Packard's Guide to Snuiy of lusccts, $1 Tin- American Naturalist, $4. II. J. ClarU'd Mind in N.iture. <>!i another occasion, at Penikeso, administering advice to students, Prof. Airassiz said, " Know one field well." In order to understand tho relations of the different branches of human knowledge, of •cicnce, read its history. Head Cuvier's Develop- ment of .Science, Do I51ainville, Pouchet, and others. Liniia-us and his school gave birth to the study of Natural History, inspired the whole world. Science has been built anew since the middle ages. Gegenbaur's Comparative Anatomy is the beet •work of its kind, but his classification is faulty. Ho becomes lost in complication of structure and multiplicity of derails, and fails to detect tho true nl'liuitios of animals. There is danger in paving i" > much attention to details. When one becomes absorbed in details ho loses all capability of broad views. !!ut UK-re is no in vest i^at ion so special, if made, with a view to comparison, but that it will Lelp one. Gcgenbaur paints his pictures singly, at Pamphlet Seriet. though there were no resemblance between tb« different things he paints. Until you know an animal, care not for its name. This whole world is a school for us. Science became what it is by the hardest possible investigations, under difficulties which are in great part removed by the finding of animals so abundantly in America. Under the present system of education in the United States, it is hardly possible to make the study of Natural History permanent and effectual. There ought to bo as many naturalists as there are schools, under the present system ; for to teach it, one must know something about it. A system should be established which would allow the teachers to be specialists and to go through the different grades of schools with the same branch of study. Prepare a student to do well for himself. \waken the power of observation that will enable him to find his way for himself. I always give new students a box of different specimens to find out what they can do with them. Do not wish to pour into students what they cannot hold. My way of teaching is by demon- stration, in which a pupil has a great deal to do himself. I would warn yon against manufacturers of books, men who are mere compilers, who know nothing — of their own knowledge — of tho subjects about which they write. Go to tho sources of information. You would not read Shakespeare from commentators and translators. Consult your own knowledge. Remeni' ber, too, that science is the recovery of tho ideas* that were in the Creative Mind. Love, devotion, simple humility, and submission to Nature, not au eudeavor to control Nature, give success to tho naturalist. BASIS OF CLASSIFICATION. THE STRUCTURAL RELATION OF ANIMALS MEANS OF MAKING CORHECT COMPARISONS BETWi:i'N DIFFICUl'.NT ORDF.HS OF CKKATUKKS — TIIK CLAS- SIFICATION OF KISIIKS — A VIGOROUS ONSLAUGHT ON TIIK DKVELOPMKNT TIIKORY. Classification in Natural History has a meaning, and is not a human contrivance. In classification we must shut out from the field of investigation all that which is arbitrary and empirical. Our classi- fication, to represent nature, must conform to it. It is a mistake to single out certain special features aa a standard, and adhere to these only. Classification is a difficult matter, and as evr'h we must recognize it. We ought to know and confess the limits of our information. Those who li.ive an answer for every question must make up answers. It is hard to say, "I do not know," especially for teachers. But I would trust no one who has not tho courage to d'* it. Agassis Be sure that the methods pursued predetermine the results. It is as important to be careful of methods aa of facts. Every chemist knows this. Chemistry and Physics are far in advance of Botany and Zoology as exact sciences. The chemists and physicists test their methods with more care than do naturalists. The astronomer goes further still, and takes his own physical organization into ac- count. Ho applies a correction to his observation, which is known as the "personal equation." The per- sonal equation should be allowed for by naturalists. Linnaaus, who had an eye for affinities such as few men ever had, was the first to introduce some con- siderations on the classification of fishes, which have had a permanent influence. He separated fishes like sharks and skates, with cartilaginous skeletons, from the bony fishes. Then he divided the bony fishes according to the position and characters of the fins. Astedi opposed this classification, and though at first unheeded, Cuvier afterward adopted his idea, which was that bony fishes should be separated into classes — Acantiiopterygia, with sharp spines in the dorsal fins, and Malacapterygia, fins without spines. When I began to study, I wished to iden tify fossil Sshes with those now living. But after studying fossil fishes for many 3rears, I found that the old classification, based upon cartilaginous and bony skeletons, would not answer. I tried the scales to see what basis they would otter for classification. 1 divided the scales, according to their form and structure, into four kinds, to which I applied the names, Cycloid, Ctenoid, Ganoid, and Placoid. When this classification was compared with that of Artedi, it was found, curiously enough, that the Cy- cloids and Cteuoids included almost exactly the same species as the Acauthopterygiaus and Malacop- terygians. Fishes like the sturgeon and garpike, in- cluding all fossil fish from the Siluriau up to the Cretaceous, not counting sharks. have Ganoid scales. Sharks and skates have Placoid scales. The sturgeon was the battle-field of naturalists for 10 years, but the question is settled now, and tho sturgeon is classed with the garpikes and other Ga- coids. Johannes Miiller found no two fishes more closely allied in anatomical structure than garpikes and sturgeons, which I had already shown to be closely allied with respect to their scales. The gar- pikes have reptilian characteristics. We see the importance of grouping animals by their general resemblances, criticising every step as T*e go< _,Do not not take up definite features as dis- tinctive ctaracters, but take the whole animal and classify by a general resemblance of all tho features. Johannes Miiller, the master of Comparative Anatomy at present, has made divisions resting upon distinctions which are physiological and Dot at zoological, considering tinners of paramount impo* tance which ought not to be so considered. Tho presence or absence of the nictitating membrane In makes the basis of a distinction between two classed of sharks, while in reality every vertebrate at a cer« tain stage of growth has a nictitating membrane. He divides selachians into two classes, according aa they have or have not spiracles, when really there is a perfect gradation from those which have nous to those which have perfectly developed spiracles ; thus widely separating animals which are closely re« lated in structure. Embryology will lead to better things ; but we should not follow the indications of embryology implicitly, but question every step. It will show ua differences akin to the difference among adult ani- mals. In the egg the structure is simple. The p;o- gress in structural complication is consecutive. We must examine the character of our standard as well as of our facts. The classification of mammals, though further ad- vanced than that of birds, is still not based on the true affinities of structural complication. Th« manatus, or sea-cow, for instance, which is usually classed with the whales, is shown by the study of fossils to be closely allied to the elephant. Batrachians are closely related to ono another anatomically. The lowest ba- trachians resemble the embryonic forma oi the higher batrachians. Among true rep- tiles, no embryonic affinities can be traced as in batrachians, The embryo turtle does not resemble any other reptile. At no period in its life is itsnak»» like or lizard-like; but at a very early stage it rG'? sembles birds. It points forward, not backward. IS is on anatomical grounds, structural complication, that we place the lizard before the snake and the turtle before the lizard. The crocodiles stand before ordinary lizards in complication of structure. They also have characteristics that ally them to the ex- tinct fauna of past geological ages. Though snakes are later than the geologic representatives of croco- diles, crocodiles are higher than snakes. A synthetic type is a group of animals in which characters found independently in other groups are found combined. Lizards are a synthetic type. They are comparatively old in geologic time, and these geologic forms are not among the simplest, for the first reptiles were higher than any that ever fol- lowed. Make transmutation of this if you can. It is not true that animals have followed each other in successive progress and development. Prophetic types are animals that at an early period combine characters which are found in animals of e higher order in later time. We have among these » natural series from lower to higher structures. Tbr gradation is a structural gradation, and in the em- 53 Tribune Extraa- bryonic condition as in batraehians. In turtles, tho embryonic condition points higher than themselves. "Winged reptiles were a prophetic type ; tbey antici- pated birds. Embryo birds point backward to the pterodactyl and to the plesdosaoma. There are thoso who assume that the earliest ani- mals must have been simple in structure, but each type starts with higher species than most of thoso that follow. Selachians and ganoids, which are the earliest fishes found, are infinitely superior iu com- plication of structure to any that come after them in geologic time. Yet there are men who call them- selves naturalists, who, iu face of the facts which Lave beeu known for -0 years, say that the amplii- oxus was the first-born of vertebrates, and resem- bles the ascidiaus. It is not only false but it is a lie. No bony fishes have ever been found in any of the older rocks. Take another case: The earliest embryonic fea- tures do not necessarily resemble the oldest forms. If it were so we should expect to find chimeroid li-hes in the earliest formation, which is not the case, as the Chimene are not found below the Jurassic. Sharks aud skates, which are higher in structural features, are found even as early as the Silurian period. Selachians stand very high in the class of fishes, and they are the earliest of the globe. Their eggs are few and large ; the embryo is large, and they have gestation iu the sense that mammals have. Yet gestation is not found in the reptiles, which come later, nor even in tho birds. Wo have to make a leap to the mammalia to find anything similar. This means that these fish have the highest structural features of the highest vertebrates. They indicated what was coming. That the lowest animal appeared first is a fallacy, and all talk to the con- trary is revolting dishonesty. In order to classify animals we should be familiar with the facts of geology ; should know tho order of succession of animals in time. RADIATES. A radiate is a spheroidal body with a vertical axis, the poh-s of which have unequal value, and the Segments of which have unequal value along their vertical lino. Radiates do not radiate in all direc- tions as tho books say. All their parts stand in equal relation to a vertical axis having unequal polos. Tho vertical axis may be so extremely lengthened or sh >n. uedasto make radiates of very dill'erent ai>p -anince. But they represent tho same, plan. A knowledge of plan is an essential aid to the thorough st inly of any animals. Eleven systems of nomenclature are used to de- icribe radiates when one system should and would do as well. This is the bight of absurdity. The radiates constitute one primary division of tho •uitnal kingdom. Radiation and radiation alouo -Pamphlet Seriet. holds together aa an organic unit polyps (corals), acalfphs (jelly fishes), aud echinoderms (star fishes) ; and when Liiekart proposed to separate polyps and acalephs from echiuoderms and make an independent sub-kingdom of them under the name Cooleuterata he carried science backward. Change is not always progress. Huxley. Ilaecklo, Liiekart, and a ma- jority of German naturalists are wrong in tbcir tendencies. They loso sight of plan in complication of structure. They mistake the mode of execution of a plan for tho plan itself. Radiates which are simple are just as much radiates as those which are complicated. Echiuoderms, acalephs, and polyps present three modes of execution of one plan of radiation. In polyps the radiating partitions or septa are thin and blood-like, generally numerous, never fewer than six, and sometimes there are hundreds. In acalephs the divisions between the cavities are very thick, and the cavities themselves are reduced to mere thin tubes communicating with the central cavity. In echinoderms tho cavities are entirely separated and the septa meet. Radiates may be long, cylindrical, and wormlike, as in tho holothurians, or they may bo mere fiat disks, as the flat sea-urchin and souio jelly-fishes. Their details may bo very different. Tho shape does not determine the class. Those features of animals which constitute analogies are general resemblance, uotba~ed on identity of structure. Homologies are resemblances based on identity of structure. Re- semblances based on similar combinations, on gen- eral external appearance, are often mistaken for resemblance based on identity of structure. That is, analogies are mistaken for homologies, as in the case with whales and fishes- Analogically, whales are referred to the fishes, but homologically they belong to tho mammals. There is a certain amount of bilateral symmetry in all those radiates. Thcro is one, and onljT one, vertical plan on either side of which the parts are symmetrically arranged. The natural attitude of an animal and the normal position may bo quite differ- ent. The normal position is the position in which wo must place an animal in order to compare it with tho order of its class. Aealephs naturally have tho mouth downward. Actinko naturally have tho mouth upward. Holothurians lie upon the side. These are tho natural attitudes, but for comparison we must place their axes all in one direction, place them in tho direction natural to tho majority ; that is with the mouth upward. RADIATKS IN PAL.EOXTOLOGY. Cuvior and Lamarck were the founders of the science of palffiontology. Cnvier gave tho science its present form. Ho studied tho fossil vertebrates aud Lamarck *\ovoted himself tj tho invertebrate Agassiz at fossils. Echinodcrms bave great palaeontological importance. They are the best preserved of all fos- sils, and are fouud in the very lowest fossiliferous rocks. They have been found on every geological horizon, and the chain of their existence, as we have it is complete. Darwinists cannot say that the tran- sition links will he forthcoming. Each epoch has its own peculiar, well-marked forms, and there is no transition. The order of echinoderms, which figures most prominently in palaeontology is the order of criuoids, or stone lilies. They have a faint resemblance to a star-fish, supported on a pointed stem, which is fixed to the rocks. During the tertiary period and at the present time, there are crinoids without stems, as the comatula. The comatula is not a star-fish, as some text-books say, but it is a true criuoid. The young comatula has a stem, and is attached to the sea- weeds, but it drops the stem when it reaches ma- turity. One interesting fact is that the oldest criuoids were most firmly rooted to the ground, and their arms or rays were very small. In these forms the stem and root elements prevail. In later times the arms become more fully developed, and the animals are less firmly rooted to th,e ground. This progression continues until iu the Tertiary period, and at the present time we find free, moving crinoids with well developed arms, •which closely resemble the higher order of star fishes. There is a steady progress from early to later times. This is beautifully shown by the class of echinoderms. We hf>ve tho same picture in their embryology. The older adult forms resemble the embryonic forms of later times. The embryo of comatula is like the adult Silurian crinoid. Such facts as these have led to the misconceptions of the transmutation theory. I may say here that- the best sources of knowledge of crinoids are the reports of the American Geo- logical Surveys. The constituent or radiating parts of a radiate have been called segments; but we need another word to express this idea. I think I have found a good name fur these fundamental parts of a radiate; it is spheromere, a segment of a spheroidal body. In closing his lecture, Prof. Agassiz .--aid: "Do we recognize in the manifestations of physical forces, as heat and electricity, anything indicative of thought and combination? Is there anything that shows that the lowest should be first ? Do we not have in this series which I have indicated an evi- dence of intelligent action which we do not find in physical forces? Nothing but a presiding intelli- gence could produce these wonderful gradations from the simple to the complex. Therefore -I arn opposed to Darwiuidm." Penikcse. 53 AMERICAN GLACIERS. THE ICE SHEET WHICH COVERED THIS CONTINENT. EVIDENCES OF THE GLACIAL PERIOD IN AMERICA— A LECTURE DELIVERED BY PROF. AGASSIZ, AUG. 4, 1873. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN: The facts by which we recognize the passage of glaciers over our globe are very different in different parts of the globe. Tho parts that have been studied are so different that the evidences are as diverse in Europe and America as we could well expect. This is chiefly owing to differences of climate. The evidences of a general glaciation are best known in Europe, but they are tolerably understood in North America, and hava been observed in South America. They have also been noticed in Asia, Australia, and parts of Africa, and there is no doubt that the whole of our globe was colder than it now is at a time not far remote, geologically speaking. The chief differences be- tween the aspects of glacial phenomena in Europe and America I will endeavor to explain to you. Not in Switzerland alone, so admirably exhibited on this map of its mountains made by Guyot, but in the Pyrenees and south of them, in Austria, in tha Caucasus — everywhere, the remains of glaciers are found in connection with mountains. Both sides of the Scandinavian ranga are full of great fiords, which extend all round Norway and Sweden, and it is probable that in the north <>£ Sweden there were formerly great glaciers trending into the White Sea. In 1840 I first explored Scotland, and found traces of glaciers descending from her mountains. There, as usual, I fouud the radiation of great masses of ice from mountain-centers, and yet there were uot wanting indications — few, but very telling — of still greater masses spread all over the country, without reference to inequalities of surface. For there were marks of glacial action on the tops of tho highest ranges — scratches from north to south. Dr. Bucklaud, of the University of Edinburgh, follow- ing my suggestion, first fouud them on the very summit of Shehallion, and to him we owe the first fact of that general glaciation which preceded all other. So, high up on the Scandinavian mountains, scratches are abundant, and all trending South,- ward. What are the characteristic features of glaciaX action in this country ? With the exception of evi- dence of a few local glaciers in the White Mountains and elsewhere, all other traces are the marks of a glaciation which has been uniform, and from north to south. Wh one side and fallen in a great unwieldy arch, or bridge, down the opposite. This, as yon soo. is a sure index of the direction of march, and it is as j>l na thcro as in the 1 niicd .States. Indeed, I would like to call atten- tion to the fact that all the marks upon the rocks are as fresh in one hemisphere as in the other. There is no indication by which I can distinguish the effects iii om: from thoso in tha other. 1 say this because some geologists have a -sinned that a differ- ence of climate, owing to certain processes, brought about the glacial period ; and that the northern hemisphere must have been first affected. But all the evidence leads mo to thiuk that the causes were astronomical and more powerful than supposed, so as to produce a period of cold in the northern and in the southern hemisphere simultaneously. I cannot believe that tin-re has been tliat alternation in the plane of the Equator which some students have sug- gested. One more remark: North of Talcahnano. as far as Santiago, is a \ alley of bowlders, beginning at Cliiloa, at the level of the sea, but ascending gradually northward till at Santiago it is many feet above the sea. In that direction has moved the ice, and you n:id all along the valley the material it has carried. Ou the east side of the Andes, and on the west, where the low coast range lies, you have something milar to Switzerland between the Alps and the Jura. This is occupied by erratics, and the explana- tion which has been found wrong in Europe will no longer do for this locality. The northern edge of the ice melted first; hence, in tin- noi thrin part of the valley stratified deposits lie along in terraces from Santiago gradually south, ami the-e alone v.onld a I lord the most direct evi- denee, i y<-:i if we were not acquainted with the other indications. I am satisfied that all these terraces were foniicd at a lime whan the ice-sheet terminated a; each of them, and banks were made in which there is no trace of marine origin. Here we have some- thing similar to the concentric ridges south of (Jayuga Lake— a parallel instance which shows the identity of the phenomena in both hemispheres and how entirely theoretical is the idea of alternate sub- sidence and elevation. E3.TR.YCT3 I'Ko.M AN'oTIIKR UEPOUT OF THE LECTURE. The following portions of a report obtained from a different source, while, in some cases repeating the foregoing expressions, are for the most nart import- ant additions without which tin; lecture would ho iinpri feet ly represented : There- 13 evidence of a great continental glacier Pa m2> Met Series. over Europe, overriding all the local glaciers of a later time. As the great European glacier waned, its southern margin gradually retreated toward the north, leaving in the mountain fastnesses and elevated valleys of the Pyrenees, Alps, and Juras the local glaciers which have done so much to remove the t races left by the great ice-sheet, and which give- shape to the present topography of those regions. Ihe mountains of Scandinavia — the Scandinavian Alps — were for a Jong time a center of claciatiou, from which radiated in ail directions immense ice streams which fed tlio sea with icebergs very much as the Greenland glaciers do to-day. As the great ice- sheet continued to wane it is probable that the local glaciers of the northern parts of Norway and Swe- den may have commenced a retrograde motion, and moved in a south-northerly direction toward tho Arctic Ocean. Northern Europe is covered with evidence of extensive glaciation, and tho many fiords which indent the shores of the Scandinavian Peninsula and of Scotland are but the mouths of tho great ice rivers. Eastern North America is a comparatively flat country, and contains but few mountains, therefore when the continental ice-sheet began to wane it left but few local glaciers behind it. Traces of local glaciers have been found in the mountains of Maine and New-Hampshire. With these few exceptions, there is over the whole continent north of the 40th parallel, evidence of a universal glacier which moved in a north-southerly direction. The cast of south trend of the glacier over \uw-Enghind is accounted for by the great de- pression of the Atlantic, which gave tho glacier a tendency to move in that direction. No part of this continent affords native copper in large masses except tho Lake Superior region. Loose bowlders bearing marks of glacial action are found all over the States south of Lake Superior, while none have ever been found north of this lake. This is strong evidence of the north-south direction of the, motion of tho glacier. The pudding-stone of Koxhury, Ma^s., which ex- tends westward to Foxboro, affords similar iucon- teslible evidence in support of this point. Bowlders of this pudding-stone are scattered all over South-Eastern Massachusetts, a few having even found a resting place on our own little Penikeso. Facts of this kind might be multiplied almost in- definitely did our tiuio permit. Mount Washington boars distinct glacial scratches and groovings within 200 'or 800 fe«-t «>(' its summit, and all the other mountains a;if his natu- ral history. "His life was a bundle of hints." It was therefore not at all extraordinary that he intor- lecturea to the Anderson School : You have already discovered that wo knovbut little, and that three-fourths of your questions we are unable to answer. We only know how to inves- tigate, and that you must learn, and we can only guide you. No one can make observers of you, bui you may be put under favorable circumstances. One thine I would recommend; that you set aside all conceit. Nothing is BO humiliating as the study of nature, and so beneficial. She is always right, though we may mistake. All knowledge is individual. It must be your own and not that of anybody else. Your having a firm memory will not suffice ; you must assimilate as you digest food. WTe must find out facts for our- selves, aud when we teach we must teach our pupils to find out for themselves. It is the bane of our schools to confound men with knowledge. By this system a whole class of powers is allowed to lie dormant. Encyclopedical knowledge is a fallacy : it is made up aud not in accordance with nature. • " * Un- derneath you may have a solid nucleus of investiga- tion of every department, but you must be in porno direction a specialist. Then you can judge of others by the attainments you have made in your own specialty. Now for the general application. You must study the history of science — not in manufactured text books, but look at the best books. For a universal view read Hiunboldt. Study the relation of facts to one another. That is the reason he is so great, and he has a keenness of perception which no one else has. The " Views of Nature" was his first step. ITo then fortified himself by investigations in every branch of physics and geology, and so meager were his sources of information that he had t > go every- where to determine in dill'cn;nt latitudes by minute investigations the certainty of his conclusions When Humboldt first published in a little paper of 1 \\ enty pages the results of these world-wide studies, ho laid the foundation of isothermal science. He sketched it exactly as it now stands, only no\v it has has grown into a beautiful picture. Now, that kind of outline sketches you should try to secure every- where. Dissect as much as you can ; h-arn to do it neatly and well, and work patiently at the same thing— BO yon will have a standard. As your guide in the study of structure I would recommend Gegonbaur. lie is the best authority on comparative anatomy. Yet there arc difficulties. (Jegcnhaiir has an insight into relations of structure according to anatomy, Agassiz at Penikese. and lie Is very comprehensive ; but ho lias no sense of zoological affinity. He sees similarities ami rela- tions but no general resemblances. ftl An Egg is a cell formed in a cavity which, by its peculiarities, crows larger than an ordinary cell, and has in it the potentialities of lite. Dollingerwas really the founder of Embryology, but published little. Von Baer was liis pupil, and all Embryologists have followed 111 liis tracks. D61- linger would work hard, make his discoveries, invite one of his students to walk, tell him all, and then invite him to publish. 1 lived four years under his roof, and my scientific traininggoes back to him and to him alone. J have learned much from others, but from him alone I learned how to work. All these unsatisfactory theories are untenable when made to tell what is not in tbem, — as when we make the Vegetable tell of the Animal Kingdom, and animals tell of the human soul. Dare to be inconsistent. As long as consistency in adherence to a wrong idea is a republican virtue, we are not on the road to progress. Prof. Agassiz ever evinced an earnest desire to keep students from wasting their time over worth- less books, and was at a great deal of pains to dis- criminate for us between genuinely good works an'd mere compilations or worthless text-books, and strongly inveighed against the publisher j of trashy scientific books, and the subterfuges and placing of " vile temptation before teachers by offering a percentage," by means of which they got them in- troduced into the schools. What we want, said he, in popular education, is the elements of a higher culture. Let it be known that our colleges are not aristocratic institutions, but are available to the poor and lowly. If they are not so now, wo must make them so. Everything we can do in that direction will be a blessing to the country. This is a digression from the business of the day, but I make it purposely that you may un- derstand just how I feel on these subjects. We ought to know each other in all these particulars. There are great business concerns engaged in the manufacture and sale of these worthless books who are our greatest enemies. They are really circulat- ing educational poison, and I beg of you don't shrink from rebuking them at every opportunity. I have aroused very serious opposition to my work by stat- ing these things openly, but I shall continue to do it as long as my strength lasts. Prof. Agassiz gave a brief bibliography of each subject as it was presented, and these short book- lists are now regarded as among the most valuable of students' memoranda. Often they would be ac- companied by a word of comment, as when he good- humoredly described a book of Do Bbinville's as " critical, satirical, diabolical,— and yet immensely comprehensive I" Nor did he hesitate (having given a well merited cautionary talk) to put at the students' disposal many books out of his own library. His library is unique in its number of books of foreign authorship not elsewhere to be found in this country, and a large part of them are presentation copies from their distinguished authors. He seemed familiar with the history of Zoology from Aristotle to Huxley, and the different phases which the science has assumed under its controlling influences. He had not only had such an extensive acquaintance with naturalists as to make zoological history for the past half cen- tury a part of his own experience, but had also made a special point of its acquisition, as for their advancement he urged others to do. Another thing which adds incomparably to the value of his library is the presence of hundreds of plates of all sorts of little-known animals, in as many varied stages of embryonic development, dif- ferent circumstances and conditions of life, or tran- sient phases of appearance or dress, as the specimens obtainable made possible. These were all drawn and colored under his own eye by accomplished ar- tists ; and their value in the study of zoology only those can fully appreciate who are pursuing the spe- cial studies which they illustrate. As he talked of books so he spoke of men. Speak- ing of Strauss Durckhuim. whose whole life was spent in studying and describing the bones and muscles of the domestic cat and the structure of the common European Dorbug (melolantho vulgaris), he described how he had seen him sit " day after day with a cat in his lap feeling of the muscles. He was a thorough Frenchman." Liickart, when he proposed the C&tenterata as dis- tinct from echinoderms, did great wrong to Von Bacr, and carried, for the time, science backward. Cuvier and Lamarck were the founders of palaeon- tology, and not much has been added since, and Cuvier really made it what it is to-day. The picture has been filled up, but Cuvier for the vertebrates, and Lamarck for the invertebrates, made the science. Darwin is one of my best friends, and I honestly like him; I wish all scientists were as friendly as well. Leopold von Buch was a man of indomitable en- durance. He explored all Europe on foot for the sake of studying its geology. 1 have known him to Tribune Extras — Pamphlet Series. go from Berlin to Stockholm for tbo sake of com- paring a single fossil shell with one there; or to start for St. Petersburg with only an extra pair of eocks in hia pockets Yet ho was a noble of Ger- many and welcome at the Emperor's Court. It is to him geology owes its present form. He vras a pupil of Werner, but had freed himself from Werner's errors. The Professor sought to encourage despondent ones by such records as this of Lyonnet. but he him- self, a monument of his own indefatigable industry and application, was our greatest incentive to steadily keep to our climbing up the hill of science. He said: Lyonnet studied for years the anatomy of the larva; of the ninth of a caterpillar (crosus ligni- penda), which lives in the "wood of the European •willow. He wanted drawings made of his work, but could tind no draughtsman, so he learned draw- ing himself, and bis figures are the -wonder of the scientific world. For their sake he was admitted to the Academy of Arts. Then ho wanted his drawings engraved, but could find no engraver, and so learned how and engraved his own plates. His book and his life are models of the most extraordinary patience, perseverance and skill. One afternoon, as the students -were all quietly at •work in our laboratory. Prof. Benjamin Peirce of the Coast Survey came in. His visit was a complete surprise, aad Agassiz's greeting was characteristic. He shouted, Y Hallo, Peirce!" ran and threw his arms round his neck and kissed him. That day the Professor was in his most genial mood, and just be- fore tea there was a sort of public talk between the two great teachers, who seemed as delighted at being together after a few weeks separation as school- gi rls. Prof. Peirce related that not long ago, as he was about to start for Washington to appeal to Congress in behalf of the needs of the Survey, Prof. Agassiz bid him good-bye with th*. injunction : " Tell them (Congress) that it is their duty to do something to derate the character of the nation." The conversation opened with some ideas in refer- ence to the nebular hypothesis, viewed mathemati- cally, and drifted through all sorts of median sub- jects to a statement by Prof. Agassiz, of his feelings upon certain religious questions. Among other things he said : I am m Knn-poan dictation; he has erected a wide-spread interest in the cultivation of the natur- al sciences ; and on this account has been every- where mi nlij.'ct of the deepest respect. Ilis inllu- eneo has not been confined to natural history, but Las affected the physical sciences as well. Asa physici-t I have recognized the difficulty of associ- ating the two. Yet that such an association exists theie i •, 11,1 .; i;i,t. But the processes by which the mathematician appn a<-ln -n Mio subject are far re- moved I" in tlu'.-e. i mi ' -icd b.y the naturalist. Tho modern doctrine of evolution, for example, has a different meaning when applied to inanimate things. The nebular hypothesis, as you know, is base'1 -*-\ evolution, yet far removed from the premises of that same doctrine, as it is alleged, is displayed in animated nature. With the former it is at all times the same matter which is displayed, the condition or state of that matter alone varying. In the latter, in addition to the matter itself being various, we are continually confronted with tho knowledge that there is something which evades our research. We mark the human soul as something distinct from tho human body. Now if wo can prove that there is something in the vegetable which is not in the ani- mal, something in tho animal which is not in tho vegetable, or something in the nature of man him- self which is not in the nature of the animals be- neath him, no attempt to prove a transition between their material semblances hero severally displayed will avail, lam inclined to believe that something of tho kind exists; that is to say, that there is a proper vegetable presence which is immutable, and can therefore never become animal ; there is a proper animal presence which can never become vegetable, and so on. In truth, what is is probably what has always been. Plants were from the beginning plaijte, animals animals, and men were men." Tho Professor sat down, and a silence ensucrt. And now for a lecture on fish. Not yet. Prof. Agassiz, who has been sitting listening with all his ears, cannot keep still now that the subject of evolution has been broached. As well imagine St. George with arms at rest when the dragon is seething before him. "Wo are very glad to hear," said he, " such testimony as this from one who commands his department. Wo learn from it the errors of those who are so wedded to their own fancies, who would twist all knowledge to make it suit some pet theory." He believed the present as- pect of the doctrine of evolution to bo in .great part tho result of this bias in judgment. Ho insisted upon honesty of purpose in investigating nature. Among the many causes which have interfered with progress has been the influence of tradition, and tho fear of offending tho proprieties. Ho valued tra- dition; it was the mainstay of tho weak in spirit and the wavering in purpose. But to the strong ho would say, cut loose from it. He had been accused by his European friends of being influenced by tho church, while by others in this country he has been denounced, as an infidel. Do not mind tho opinions of the prejudiced and bigoted. For himself he cared nothing for these expressions, Bo careful of ono thing only, " fail h fill ness to trutli as you believe it." lie had struck the sympathetic chord. Prof. Peirce is on his feet, to show by example the value- of discussion. " The urea test ireucral truths." •• .' Agassis at he, "had always resulted from the clash of opposing theories. All that was needed was the eager follow- ing of truth as each one saw it. In the history of geology Prof. Agassiz has told us that from tho discussions of the Noptunists and the Plutonists have arisen a more thorough knowledge of the scope of the agency exerted hy water and lire in the formation of the earth's cvust than would have heeu possible without that stimulus." He, in addition, spoke of the lasting good resulting to the study of logarithms hy the coutentions between the French and German mathematicians over a trivial subject apparently, viz.: Which was the better sign, the letter c, or the letter h ? Some one in the class here suggested that the same kind of good to natural history might resuit from debates between the evolutionists and the non-evo- lutionists. "Well," replied Agassiz, rather evasively, "per- sonally 1 like Mr. Darwin very much ; he is my friend." Here a cluster of pupils began making merry. " What is it ? Let us have it !" A Voice — " Darwin's son Frank was onre told that Agassiz did not accept evolution. ' That's all right,' said Frank; ' father does not believe in the glacial theory.' " [Laughter.] "Well, now," said Agassiz, turning to Prof. Wilder, " Dr. Wilder, give us some fish." Pcnflcese. 65 But no, we were doomed to go without that cours* to our feast. Dr. Wilder arose — a prompt, nervous man, with a crisp, well modulated voice. "Prof. Agassiz," he began, "is the director here, and when ho says any- thing is to be done, it is done. But I must confess that, after listening to tho delightful exercises of this morning, I have become rebellious, and I won't say anything about fish." [Laughter.] The Doctor then went on to say how he had been reflecting on the subject of freedom of thought as a necessity to true progress, and deemed it a fit occa- sion to have the position of the scientific world with respect to the theological world fairly defined. He then boldly launched out into the field of the rela- tions between natural and revealed religions. He contended that there should bo no compromise. The Bible and Nature stand confessed as the reve- lations of the one God, and, moreover, it was never intended they should conflict. I cannot follow him, nor the remarks which his address called forth. Tbe occasion had become a solemn one. A long silence ensued after this hist topic, which had grown so naturally out of the first address of Prof. Peirce. Each one was apparently thinking the same thought, drinking in the same influence. I felt as well as others present, while the storm beat about us, as one withdrawn from the world for a time. As I now write of that scene, its truth and beauty return in all their force. CAUSES OF THE D On Jan. 26, 1874, Dr. Morrill Wyman of Cam- bridge, Mass., completed bis work on the autopsy of Prof. Agassiz, and made a report, from which, the following interesting state- ments are taken: The autopsy was made at Cambridge, Dec. 16, 1873, by Drs. R. H. Fitz and J. J. Putnam ; present, Drs. J. B. S. Jackson, J. Wyman, C. Ellis, M. Wyman, and S. G. Webber. It was conducted in tbe interests of science, and in accordance with the wishes of the great nat- uralist, expressed several years ago. The arteries at the base of: the brain showed evidence of extensive cbronic disease of their lining membrane, with narrowing of the cali- ber of the carotids. In these arteries were very important changes. Commencing at an inch below the anterior edge of the pons varolii and extending downward, the walls of the left vertebral artery were stiff, in part calcified, and its linings loose. At half an inch from the point just mentioned, imme- KATH OE AGASSIZ. diately over the left olivary body, was a reddish-yellow, opaque, friable plug (thrombus) completely obstructing the vessel ; still lower was another more recent, but prob- ably ante-mortem, plug. The first was one- quarter of au inch loug, the second four inches long. A third plug, an inch long, was above the first, and touching it. In the left ventricle of the heart, there was a firm organized clot of the size of a peach stone attached to the wall at the anterior portion near the septum; around this clot a more recent one had formed, its center softened and granular. From this, probably, some small portions had been carried by the blood to the arteries in the base of the brain, doing their part in ob- structing them and causing the fatal changes above described. The lungs were adherent to the ribs on both sides of the chest, the evi- dence of old inflammations. The other oigans were healthy. T Tribune Extras— Pamphlet Scries. E TRIBUNE FOR 1874. A ye&r ago the Editor of THE TRIBUNE promised to make this journal during 1873 a much more valuable and complete newspaper than it had ever been before. Its facilities for the collection and transmission of intelli- gence from all pans of the world had been largely increased; its staff of associate editors, correspondents, and reporters had been Htri-ngtlicucd by the engagement ot some of the ablest men in the profession; and the Kditor was resolved to spare neither pains nor money in the effort to make TOE TRIBUNE the very first newspaper IE the world. He points to the achievements of the past twelve mouths with pardonable pride. While Tut; TRIIIUNE has retained all the excellent features that made it such a favorite in former days, it has exhibited an enterprise and acute- ness in its news department which have been the wonder of all its old friends. Remember- ing that the chief function of a daily journal is to give its readers the fullest, the best arranged, the most attractive, and the most readable history of the occurrences of the time, it has devoted its best energies to this business, and its success has been universally recognized and applauded. The year has been fruitful of startling events, and every incident has found in TUE TRIBUNE its promptest, most accurate, and most perfectly equipped historian. A TRIBUNE correspondent was the only civilian who witnessed the surrender of the Virginias, and his pic- turesque description of that transaction, transmitted by telegraph, is the only account the public has yet seen of an incident upon which depended for many weeks the question of peace or war. TIIE TRIBUNE published the only full and exhaustive account by Atlantic leli •.-!•;,]. h of the terrible Ville du Havre dis- aster, giving all the incidents of that catas- troph* ten days before other journals received them by the slow course of the mails. It dis- tanced all competitors in its thrilling story by cable of the adventures of the Polaris casta- ways. It anticipated every other paper in the country, and even the Government itself, by its graphic narratives of Ouster's battles on the Yellowstone-. The elaborate and deeply interesting letters of its special correspondent in the West gave the only complete account of the Farmers' Movement ever pub- lished in an Eastern paper. The reports of THE TRIBUNE presented the important proceedings of the Evangelical Al- liance in this city with a fullness and accuracy everywhere the subject of enthusiastic praise. During the panic its daily history of Wall Street made it absolutely indispensable to business men ; and its special correspondents afterward described the condition of affairs in the manu- facturing districts with an ability which no other paper seriously rivaled. These are mere instances of the uniform success in the most important branch of jour- nalism which has steadily attended THE TRIBUNE throughout the year, ana may therefore be fairly taken as an earnest of what THE TRIBUNE is likely to do hereafter. Its purpose in 1874 is to surpass its previous record, constantly increasing the efficiency of its organization, adding to its resources, and keeping up its ancient celebrity as an organ of cultivated and thoughtful men, and a high authority in literature, science, and the arts. It will continue to devote especial attention to the proceedings of learned bodies, to education, to scientific discoveries and ex- plorations, to new inventions, to agriculture, to the promotion of American industry, and to books, pictures, music, and the drama. Its financial articles have won a peculiarly high reputation, and will still be a prominent feature in its columns. Its reports of the markets have long been distinguished for fullness and accuracy, and its quotations have been accepted as standards in the cattle, pro- duce, and provision trades for many years. Its reports of local affairs are acknowledged to be the most accurate, intelligent and complete ; its domestic correspondence is always fresh and valuable ; and abroad it is served by the ablest writers and keenest observers engaged upon any American periodical. While it never can be a neutral in politics, THE TRIBUNE is entirely independent of all parties and all partisans. It believes that the mere organ of a clique cannot bo a thoroughly Tribune Extras— good newspaper, and cannot bo trusted for impartial and just comment upon current events. It maintains with the old fervor and will always defend the Republican principles of equality and justice with which, under the control of its illustrious founder, HORACE GREELEY, it was, for over thirty years, identified. But it values parties solely as means for procuring honest govern- ment on sound principles. For the parti- sans who deplore exposures of corruption or imbecility in high places as likely to hurt the party and hinder their success in holding on to the offices — who insist that a journal of their faith must follow their lead, execute their plans, and defend their acts, it has no feeling save contempt. Standing by its old land- marks, it defends the constitutional guarantees to the liberty of the citizen and the sacredness of the Nation's faith with its creditors, in- sists on the duty of Protection to American Industry, champions all proper measures for developing the material resources of the country, urges wise means for restricting the evils of Intemperance, seeks sedulously to foster the commanding interests of Manufac- tures and Agriculture. But it holds itself aloof from all entangling alliances, waits on no Caucus or Convention for its opinions, aims to judge every polit- ical act, of whatever party, separately as it arises, on its own merits, and maintains the liberty of candid and impartial criticism. During the present session of Congress its telegraphic reports from Washinirton, where it maintains the strongest force of experienced corre- spondents ever assembled there in the interests of a single journal, will be found incomparably more valuable and more interesting than those of any of its cotemporaries. And finally, in the editorial discussion of public affairs, THE TRIBUNE en- deavors to combine the utmost frankness of expression and independence of thought with a strict impartiality of judgment and that disr- nity and refinement of language which befit a family newspaper. It wastes no space in wrangling with other papers, pays no atten- tion to personal abuse, and reserves its col- umns for its readers' interests, not its Editor's grievances. That there is a popular appreciation of that Pamphlet Series. 67 sort of independent, vigorous, enterprising, and high-toned journalism of which THE TRIBUNE is now the chief representative in this or any other country, is sufficiently proved by the re- sults of the past twelve months. The close of 1873 finds this paper more prosperous than it has been at any previous period of its history, and the new year opens for it with the most brilliant prospects. In a short time its mechan- ical facilities will surpass those of any other journal in the world ; and on the completion of its new and magnificent building it will bo enabled to introduce various improvements of the most important character. THE SEMI-WEEKLY TRIBUNE. THE SEMI-WEEKLY TRIBUNE has grown very rapidly in public favor of late. In addition to a careful summary of the news it contains all the best of the foreign and domestic cor- respondent and leading articles of the Daily: it gives specially the scientific intelligence (including the proceedings of all American scientific societies), with the best of the book reviews, and the miscellaneous mat- ter relating to education, tho arts, re- ligion, &c. It has all the commercial news and market reports ; all the agri- cultural articles of the Weekly ; and gives, moreover, regularly a serial work of fiction, presenting in the course of the year three or four of the latest productions of the most popular novelists. As it takes only a few se- lect advertisements, it is enabled to give an. unusually large proportion of reading matter, and may be called, considering the extent and variety of its contents, the cheapest news- paper in the world. It is published every Tuesday and Friday, and reaches nearly every post-office east of the Mississippi within one or two days of its issue. THE WEEKLY TRIBUNE. THE WEEKLY TRIBUNE has been for the space of a generation the Farmer's favorite paper. Besides a complete condensation of the news of the week, a selection of literary and miscellaneous reading, and a full page of the best editorials from the Daily, it contains in every number a greater amount of agricul- tural matter than is furnished by any distinc- tively agricultural paper. This is prepared expressly for its columns by the best agricul- tural writers and practical farmers in the C8 United States; and as its contributors arc in cv'-rv part of the country it will bo found equally valuable in New-England, in the South," on the Pacific slope, or in the Missis- ,~ ,, n Hppi Valley. Great attention is paid to all subjects connected with tin- Farm, the Garden, and the Household, ami some of the original articles every week are illustratrd with wood- cuts. The market quotaii..ns of farm produce, cattle, provisions, breadstuff's, dry froods, and r. . .. all kinds tit merchandise, are exceedingly full and scrupulously accurate. Tlie utmost care is liestowrd upon the typographical arraugemeut of the pap.-r, and the print is always clear and legible, and generally larger than that of any other New-York paper. THE TKIUL'XE EXTRAS. A new feature lias been added to American journalism by the valuable TRIBUNE Extra Sheets whieh have attained such an extra- • rdinary popularity during the pasb year. n. llie.v present the fresh mut ox the best in- tellects of this and other countries, the most remarkable lectures, the most valuable scien- tific and geographical researches, at a merely nominal price. In tlie series of 14 Extras , ,,. .,, . already publisned will bo round, reprinted for t he most part from the columns of THE DAILY , some of tlie latest lectures of Tyndall, andBeecher; the explora- linns of Prof. Ilavdeu, the full history and , .. ., ,,' , ,, aescnpaon of the Farmers' Movement, the oesfc cms of the great Vienna Exposition, and the complete report of the proceedings of the T.'vin.r, l!,...l \li;, II..1F. -.111;^ ^t ^^ £vangelicaJ Alliance. Halt a million of the i.xiras liav<- already been sold, and the de- maud fur them is si cadi! v increasing. TERMS OF THE TRIBUNE. Extras— Pamphlet Series. A CllAXCE TO SAVE MOXEY. pAn.T(bvmall)lyear.flOOO i \\ LI M.Y, i yar. 800 nvecopiew. lyeur.. 12 60 Fen copies (aud one WKEKLT.lyear ....... $200 Five copies, 1 year.. 760 Tea copies, 1 year... 12 50 T wenty copies. ly'r. 22 00 TbirtV Copies, 1 year 80 00 E i.-h persr 111 i.rucuriiig a club of ten or more Bubscribers is entitled to one extra WEEKLY and <•! htty or in<»re to a SI.MI-\\ EKKLY. Papers addressed separately to each member Of Clul.s will l>e ehar-rd ten cents additional j . t i i-t '^'Specimen eujin-s ut el I her edition OI THE TRIBUNE, and circulars ^ivin^ full details of Ihe conn-ins of earl. Kxna sheet, sent free to anv address in tlie United Stales. All remit taiiees at, sender's risk, unless '•> dralt on Ne\\ -York, postal order, or in re^- isteltd letter. A THE TKIIJLNE, New-York. A MAGAZINE AND A NEWSPAPER. no™ ™' «™ "°™ THAN ™E PRICIj OF line NEW-IORK IUIBUNE has completed ar- raugements \vitii the principal magazines an.i periodl- calsor t,1I8 ,.cnmtry ;uul E „,,,,... ,,y wllu.u it la ei,:li>ied tosupply these publications, together with either edition of Tin: TKH.IM . at . \,-ry ma:U<'il reduction from the n-cular subscription prices. Tins TIUHUNE is the only ''"»•'""* i-ap-'- .'" New-York.if notii, the country, ,•*. tending this offer— which cannot fail to attract deserved :itu.mioa froul th() rcildilltr imblic d,irill!, lue pri.., .Ilt dines of retrenchment and economy. The periodicals for which subscriptions ma v bo sent, at any tiuio. to TUB TRIUL-XE are ^ven below. with the regular price of each 1>noa of U'° CO'""»1:U'OU Wlth TllB Publishers1 with with o ou 600 e oo 050 700 M^azine riiii per > iiiiz.tr .................... 40) Harper's Weekly .................. 400 s^n^MomMy"^".^::": I oo St. Nicholas ........................ 300 Littell'sLlvmgAtre ................ 8 oo North American u -view coo : '.I™ .'.'.'.".'.'.'.'.'.". c oo oiii r, MI 5 op 425 850 coo 25 e oo Nautical Gazette ................... 500 Galaxy ........................ 400 Tne Eclectic 500 5S22£KSS3:": ! :; % Popular Science Monthly .......... 5 oo fSSSSSgS/K^S^.: '.itS The Spience of Health ............. 200 New-York WecUiv ................. 3 oo TIU-:, Fitid ami ru-m 500 ::: J S cmmnev comer ................... 400 I.'-^ii.-'s L-nly's Journal ............ 400 . Leslie's Boys' aua Girls' Weekly II a so Boys of America ................... 160 OldandNew ....................... -i no Godey's Lady's Book.. . 3 oo The Nins.-rv".. 1 :,.i Weekly QrapMc ............... 2 5J Nature ......................... son Black wood's Magazine.. .400 The E,iininir-h u \ n-\v ........... 400 London Illnstralnl NOSVH ......... 1400 Lomiou (u-a;,hic . ...H oa iSfjSSH^.^^'. :1S I'uneh ............................... 700 Lloyd's Wn-uu Newspaper ....... 4 oo S°Ee|lnH« ^aUI" AUCo.ltllT.iridll. ....... ............. o UO Eoleotlo EnfflneeriuK .............. 500 50 oo 00 6 oo 675 *' So 300 4 50 575 500 500 400 300 e oo 425 300 375 coo 500 :, n.i l:t 'JO i;i -j.i T GJ 620 o oo 7 so 550 7 oo 1.1,1 7 ui c oa 675 I oo 4 oo 5 59 075 coo GOO 600 500 400 coo 525 4 OJ 475 700 r, mi r, on ll 21) 11 -JD 8 co c 20 i) J& 700 Mako >'0»r«'«" seleetlona ii-,.!n tins hst ana remit eitlier by money order, draft, or reRiatered letter, direct- ly to THB TaiBUNB, and you will receive both ouaffazlae uiuMiewspap.T. Io p Tnii TUIHUNE cannot supply specimen copies of tho ubove named periodicals. Addrt-s* Tin; TKIDUNE, New-York. TRIBUNE POPULAR SCIENCE. PART II. generation, that it has unearthed not on\y the probable ruins of Troy, but those -of a far more TABLE OF CONTENTS, ancient city beneath them, that had grown and DISCOVERIES ON THE SITE OF ANCIENT flourished and decayed ages before the armies TROY: of Greece advanced to the seige of Ilium. PAGE. ' A LETTER BY BAYARD TAYLOR 2 The lectures of Dr. Brown-Sequard on the BROWN-SEQUARD^LECTURES ON THE Nerveg? coyer ft field of knowledge hitherto not THE NERVOUS FOHOK.. . J2 much trodden. There is force in his urgent NERVOUS INFLUENCE 16 appeal to the younger members of the profes- INDIRECT SERVE FORCE ...20 gion to exten(i tliese inquiries, and in the NERVE DERANGEMEN r 24 , „ , . , , SUMNER'S SUFFERINGS 28 strange and novel features which he presents WHAT NERVES MAY Do — 30 in these lectures there is ample evidence that PROCTOR'S FAREWELL LECTURES ON AS- the study will prove as interesting as it is im- TR<)NOMY EARTH'S PAST AND FUTURE. '. 36 portant. The causes, character, and means of LIFE IN OTHER WORLDS 42 remedying many of the most obscure and painful OTHER SUNS THAN OURS 48 diseases to which the human frame is subjected, THE INFINITIES AROUND Us 53 -, . -,. -, -, , , , • r THE GERM THEORY OF DISEASE: are here indicated, and the argument is enliven- A LECTURE HY PROF. C. F. CHANDLER 59 ed by much that is curious and entertaining. • Although in a certain sense the outgrowth FEATURE* OF RECENT DISCOVERY. of his former lectures, the present series of dis- The admirable letter of Mr. Bayard Taj'lor courses on astronomy by Mr. Proctor is entirely on the discoveries of Dr. Schliemann in the new. They may be described as carrying out Troad presents a more complete and intelligible to their limit the thoughts that naturally arise account than could be gleaned by a laborious in astronomical investigations, and they at- perusal of the fragmentary narratives which tempt, in the light of the most recent discover- that explorer has published. In this brief page ies, the solution of the most far-reaching all the essential features are condensed which problems which can be presented to the human lie scattered through volumes. The treasures mind. Nor does he limit himself to the scupc of antiquity brought back by Dr. Schliemann of the mere materialist in these discussions; are of the highest archaeological value, aside he treads with reverent step the infinite abysses from their classical interest. It will be here- of the heavens, and leads us from nature up to after regarded as the great good-fortune of this nature's God. Tribune Extras — Pamplilet Series. , ANCIENT TROY. THE RESEARCHES OF DR. SCHLIEMANN IN 1872 AND 1873. ACCOUNT BY BAYARD TAYLOR OF THEIR RESULTS — FOUR CITIES EACH BUILT UPON' THE RUINS OF THE PRECEDING ONE — THE SC^E AN GATE — PALACE OF THE KINGS — TREASURY OF GOLD AND SILVER ORNAMENTS AND UTENSILS. [FROM A REGULAR CORRESPONDENT OF THE TRIBUNE.] GOTHA, Germany, Feb. 10. — Another chapter has been added to the "Tale of Troy divine." Of all the discoveries of tin- la-t twenty-five years, inestimable as is their collective contribution to our knowledge of the Pa-t. not one i- vii remarkable and unexpected as the recent finding of storied Ilium, after a sepul- ture of more than two thousand years, during which the very site of it bail been forgotten. It is even more surprising than the re-discovery of Nineveh by Lay- anl. vine,, the mounds of Ximroud and Kuyounjik sufficiently indicated the site of the old Assyrian cap- ital; while Ilium itself, and the whole history of the Trojan war, have narrowly escaped, of late years, being relegated to the region of pure myths by mod- ern scholarship. All (hi- is suddenly changed: many a fine]y--pun archa.'ological theory is rent like a cob- web: Homer is gloriously rehabilitated, and the \ery arms and ornaments of the Dardan heroes and heroines are delivered into our hands. Fragmentary reports of Dr. Schliemann's excavations in the Troad have from time to time appeared in the newspapers, and his great success, last year, in finding what is conveniently called " The Treasury of Priam," has been duly chronicled throughout the world ; but now, for the first time, we have the entire history of the undertaking and it.- results. The narrative, accom- panied by IMS photographic sheets of illustrations, is published by the firm of F. A. Brockhaus, in Leip/.ig, to whom I am indebted for one of the very earliest copies. I lose no time in preparing for THE TRIB- UNE a resume of the work as complete and intelli- gible as the space will allow. Even if I felt myself competent (which I do not) to examine the conflict- ing views of German scholars by the light of the ancient authorities, I should prefer to let Dr. Sehlie- niann have his full say. He has nobly earned it; and I shall therefore confine myself to the plain statement of his own arguments and conclusions. SKETCH OF DR. SCULIEMANN. Before beginning the hi-tory of his discoveries, it may interest, the reader- of THE TiUBUNE to learn -omething about the man who has made them. It will do us American- no harm to find that " self- made men " are not peculiar to our race and soil. Ours, when they are -uccc--fiil, are noted, and grandly so, for giving of their sub-lance, hardly for their own intellectual achievement-. \Vo have had, as yet, no such specimens a- l.'o-cne, the Liverpool merchant, or Grote, the London banker. Dr. Schiie mann ranks with these latter, a- an encouraging illustration of the fact that "Im-ine-s" need not prevent, or even materially retard, the development of high intellectual qualities. Starting in life with absolutely nothing, he achieved wealth by the time he was forty-one years old, and now, not yet fifty-two, he has won a permanent fame. Heinrich Schliemann was born in the Grand- Duchy of Mecklenburg in 1822. His father was very poor, but had received an indifferent classical edu- cation, and was very fond of repeating episodes from the Iliad to his young son. The latter learned some Latin during his early school years, but all his chance- cca-i'd at. the age of fourteen, when he was put into a grocery-store in the little town of Fiir- stenburg. There, for nearly six years, he weighed, packed, swept, and did all other coarse duties, sixteen hours a day. saw only the |owe-t and most ignorant da-s of the people, and seemed to have forgotten almost all he had ever learned. One evening a drunken miller's apprentice came into the grocery and declaimed a hundred verses of Homer in Un- original Greek. He was the son , ,f a clergyman, had failed at the University, and the father's desperate attempt to make a decent miller of him was about to fail also. Young Schliemann was so enchanted by the sound of the Greek, not one word of which he understood, that he used all his pocket-mone\ to buy three glasses of brandy for the student-miller, on condition that he would three times repeat the Homeric lines. " From that moment," he says, " 1 never ceased to pray to God that He would enable me to learn Greek." Having injured his breast by lifting a heavy cask, so that he was no longer able to work in the grocery, he went to Hamburg, and in a state of desperation shipped as cabin-boy on board a vessel bound for Laguayra. He left port on the I'Sth of November. 1841. and just two weeks afterward the vessel was wrecked on the Texel. With great danger and hard- ship the crew was saved. Schliemann made his way to Amsterdam, intending to enlist as a soldier: but finding himself on the point of starving to death, he pretended to be sick and was sent to the hospital. Finally, a German merchant discovered and as-i-ted him, and the Consul procured him a situation as errand-boy in a mercantile house. His salary \va- si MI francs a year, and the half of it he instantly devoted to his educat ion. He inhabited a miserable garret-room, without fire, for which he paid eight francs a month; his breakfasts were r\ e mush and cold water, and his dinner- never co.-t more than three cents apiece. After learning to write a good legible hand, he began the study of langiiM-e-: but his memory was so deficient, through lack of use, that he was compelled to carry bis books with him on his errands, and study by snatches a- he walked or waited. At the end of a year be knew Knglish and French, and hi- memory had improved 80 wonderfully, that he acipiired a good commercial knowledge of Italian, Spanish, and I'ortugue.-e, by giving only six weeks to each language. But these si udie- and the running of errand- from morning till night did not work well together; they damaged each other. Schliemann'- principal refused to give him a better position, but, by great <+ 1 fortune be obtained a place as clerk and corre-pondent in the house of Schroder «fc Co., Amsterdam, with a salars Ancient Troy— Bayard Taylor. 3 of 2,000 francs a year. FTe soon perceived the busi- ness necessity of a knowledge of Russian, and set to work to learn it. There was no teacher to be had ; the only books ho could procure wore an old grammar, a dictionary, and a Russian transla- tion of Fenel< in's TtMinaque. His habit of Studying aloud, in order to accustom his ear to the eouml of foreign languages, was so annoying to the tenants of the neighboring rooms that ho was sev- eral times obliged to change his quarters, but in spite of these disadvantages he was soon able to write Russian letters and to converse with Russian merchants who visited Amsterdam. In 18-10 the firm scut him to St. Petersburg as its business agent. A year af tenvard ho established a commercial house of his own, and for eight years thenceforth devoted himself with such energy to the building up of a large business, that no time was left for the prose- cution of further studies. Finally, in 1856, he was so far successful that he yielded to the old desire of learning Greek, the fascination or which he had dreaded, as a possible interference with his other duties. With the aid of two Athenians, he mastered the chief difficulties of Modem Greek in six weeks, and in three months afterward was able to read Homer with ease. In two years more he was familiar with nearly all the aucieut classics. In 1858, having acquired wealth and leisure, he left St. Petersburg, and spoilt more than a year iu travel, visiting Italy, Egypt, Syria, and Greece, and adding the Arabic to Lis catalogue of tongues. By the end of 1863 Schliemann found that he was a rich man aud retired from business, resolved to devote the remainder of his life to archaeological studies. The following year ho started on a trip around the world, visiting India, Cbiua, and Japan. Returning in 1806. he settled in Paris, and prepared himself for archaeological explorations in Greece by three more years of hard study. FIRST RESEARCHES IN ITHACA AND THE TROAD. In the Summer of 1809, with the Iliad and the Odyssey in his pockets, Schliemann started on his lirst tour of research. Landing on the island of Ithaca early iu July, he spent about a week in en- deavoring to identify the localities of the Homeric narrative. His own narrative, by the by, is almost Homeric in its terse, picturesque simplicity. He seems to have believed, in advance, that he should fin'1' ail which he went to seek, aud ho accordingly finds them— the palace of Ulysses, the Grotto of the Nymphs, the home of the swineherd Eumaus, and even ten of the twelve stalls for swine, in the neigh- borhood of the fountain Arethusa. But this faith is pardonable, when we consider the narrow limits of the island, and the fact that, there remain only one grotto, one fountain, aud one acropolis, which suit the conditions of the story. In Ithaca, where the people have no traditional history except that of the Odyssey, — where in every family, at this day, the first-born daughter is always called Penelope, the first son Odysseus and the second Telemachos, Scblicmann. was hailed as a friend and benefactor. Tho inhabitants of every village flocked together to hear him read Homer, in return for which they gratuitously entertained him with the best they had. He thus describes his visit to Leuke, on the northern end. of the island : It was tioou when we reached tho villaeo, and since I dosm-d to see tlio aucieut valley <>t Polls aud its acropo- lis, I decided to make no stay in Leuke. But tlio people bejrKed mo so earnestly to read some passages from the Odyssey, that I was finally obliged to comply. Iu order to be heard by all, I had a table placed, as a rostrum, under a plane-tree in the center of tho village, and then read with a loud voice the 23d Book of the Odyssey, from the opening to the 247th verse, wherein it is related how the Queen of Ithaca, the best and most chaste of women, recoeuizes her beloved spouse after twenty years of separation. Although I had already read the passage numiierlcss times, I was always freshly moved whenever I perused it, and tho magnificent lines made tho same impression upon my auditors. All wept prof u.sely, aud I was obliged to weep with them. After the reading was finished, they begged me to remain at least a day louiror. but this was uot possible. ~* mif — "^•^ WOiESPON1" «£ TOMBS OF |jj fiCHILLESAN rA PATROELUS.' CO ,--§ SIGEUMMf f ' as- iRUINS OF ALEXANDRIA THO A S MAP OF THE TROAD. Schliemann next visited Corinth, Mycenae and Ar- gos, spent a week in Athens, aud then sailed for the Dardanelles, in order to explore the Troad. This preliminary survey of his future field of labor was made during ten of the hottest days of August, during which he thoroughly examined the plain of Troy, from the shore of the Hellespont, at its north- ern extremity, to the site of Alexandria Troas on tho south, and the base of Mount Ida on tha east. Most archaeologists had fixed upon the little Turkish ham- let of Bounarbashi, some ten or twelve miles from the sea, as the site of Ilium Vetua (Ancient Troy), and persisted in considering the main stream — the Turkish name of which, Mendere, instantly suggests Tribune Extras — Lecture and Letter Scries. "Scamander" — to bo the SimoTs. They placed Ilium JTovum, the later Greek city, mentioned by Strain) and other authorities, at the point now called //;'•<- farlilc ("the place of the Ca-t! ••"), a broad plateau of no great hiulit, at t lie end of ono of the low lanu'es of hills which stretch into tho plain from the base of Ida. This position is jnst three mil •.» fiom the site of the Givi k camp at Siireum. A glance at the out- line map I send will make tho topography of t!r> Tio-id easily intelligible. 1 O.ioiiid explain that the term Jlinnt X«rtnn \* not us, d l>y i lie ancient writers. It appear-- to have lu-eii an invention of the French traveler, Lechevalier. who vi-itcd the Tread in 1788. But it is a convenient de-ii.rnation for the later (•I. k Ilium, and I ijuoie it in i his sense. Si hliemann's familiarity with Homer satisfied him, at once, tint thelat'.T had seen every local it y •which iio describes. In i'.iet, this impression is j-tronsrly forced upon every one, who visits tin- spot. I have twice 1. H. l;ed upon the plain of Troy from the deck of a v, .---I passing between it and Teredos, having on one li.md the sky-piercing peaks of Sanio- thrac-e in tin- di->'ance. towering over the low inter- mediate hills of Imbros, and on the other the broad, uncultivated fields of Troy, divided by the sinuous thickets which mark the course of Seamunder, -with Ida, farrowed -with piny glens, in tho background, and tho sn >wy ores! of " topmost Gargarus" over all. You remenih T, no doubt, the charming description of tbe scene iu " Eothen." In ten days Schlieuiann convinced liimself, in the most practical way, that the Mendere was the Seamai der and not the SimoTs, that Boimarhashi could not pnssildy ho the site of Troy, that the Inure natural acropolis near it bad never > orne "Priam's lofty house." and that Ilium Xorum had been simply built upon the rnhliish of Ilium Tctus—in short, that whatever was to be found of the real Troy must be, sought for under the surface of the plateau of Hissarlik. His chief reasons are the following : 1. After sinking a number of small pits on the liU'hts of Bounarbashi, he found no trace of aeifv having ever stood there. The primitive "bed-rock" Was reached, in i'ianv instances. 2. The tumuli, called alter Hector and Friain, have bet n opened, hn* contain no evidence of ha\ini; been u.-ed fi.r M-MM!; ure. l'>; t ween them and the citadel an- the remains of a small town, which could not have contained more than 12,000 inhabit an: s. 8. The ciiadcl, which has been supposed to be the fenjainiK nf 1'iiam. has a hiirht of 450 feet : ils -ides fall at MI au-leef l. at lirst, and finally of (xP, so that 1 lector and Achilles, in their triple race around the walls of Trov, could hardly havo made the break-neck devcrnt. 'Hi.- sab-tructions of tho ancient edilir • or I li.- -i mini it aie so limited in space, having onlv one end ance — a d. or a .\anl wide— 1' at they DOVI i CO .\'\ have belonged to in,, ci'adel- lialac-.' ..I a place BO ]> onlou-i and important as 1 r,,\-. 4. The- distance- from >iu'<'iim fnearlv 10 l-'iiuplish mile.-) is so irreat that the marches book and forth of tin- ( ;i eek> friim t h'-ir cani|i t<> tin- v, ;,lls of Troy, as described in the tir-i seven I'lnks of the ilia.', CouJd uot pos-rrihly have bueu pcrfurmcd iu the time mentioned ty Kamer. Troy must hare stood much nearer the sea, or the poet indulged in a reckless exaiTireiat ion, with which he has never been charged. 5. Instead of the two fountains mentioned by TTomer. there are no less than thirty-four at Bounar- haslii, tlieir nnited outllow forming a strong stream (called the Scauiandcr by former archaeologists), a part of whose waters are carried to tho JEgeau by an ancient canal, to prevent the plain from being inundated during the Spring floods. 0. Mount Ida is not visible from any part of tha hiirhtof Bonnarbashi. At Jlissailik, however, Dr. Schlicmann found all the conditions required. Moreo/er. a number ol passages in ancient authors, especially Strabo, all indicated that tho later Ilium occupied the site of tho older city. The distance to Sigeuni is three English miles; tho Scamander llnvs b,'t \\een; Mount Ida rises clearly above the eastern horizon, and a smaller stream, coming down from the north- ward, sufficiently represents the simols. The situa- tion is grand and imposing, overlooking plain and sea. The circumference of the walls of the later city is about three miles, which, supposing they indicated the site of tho ancient Trojan walls, would not be too great a distance for tho triple race of Achilles and Hector. At Bounarbashi tho space which, must necessarily have been traversed is nearly double. Finally, tho whole surface of the plateau of Hissarlik is covered witb fragments of marble and pottery, which can bo nothing else than the debris of the later Troy. No ono can deny that these arc fair and reasonable grounds. They have been sharply assailed, of course, by stay-at-home scholars; but tho man who digs day after day on the supposed site of a city to satisfy hims.df that its bon^f) are not there, who tries to run around its cir- cuit, and travels back and forth between it and the established locality of the Grecian camp, has an ex- cellent claim to be beard. Immmliately after his re- turn to Paris, Dr. Schliuniann published a volume called " Ithaca, t lie I'elo-.Mvie.ssus, and Troy " — but it does not seem to havo attracted any general atten- tion. In it he gives his views concerning tho site of Troy, feeling sure, probably, that no one else would be likely to anticipate his secret purpose of returu- ing to the spot and undertaking a:i excavation. KKTl'KN TO THE TK<>A1>. A few months after the publication of his volume Scii!i;-ma::!i returned to (ireecc. From this timo At bens has been his permanent home. Before be- frinuing again his researches, ho married an accom- plished Greek lady, who won his heart by her en- thusiasm for his labors and her knowledge of Homer. Iliave no detailed account id his explora- tions at lli.s-arlik in April, isru, further than their result and I he cans.' ol their being suspended. The plateau on \v!iic!i t he later Troy stood is about three nules in circumference and S) feet above tho level of tho plain. Its northern sido rises very abruptly; on the, west and son! h it slopes oil' gradu- ally, while on tin.- ea>t it is separated only by a slight depression from the low spur of hills which stretch out fruiu tho chain of Ida. At its north-western cor- Ancient Troy— Bayard Taylor. ner rises a second plateau, 26 feet higher that) th»j first (100 feet above the plaiu), and nearly 1,000 by 700 feet ill length and breadth. Schliemann iu- Btanfcly decided that the latter must be the citadel of Priam, and felt more than ever sure that its ac- cumulated rubbish might cover some distinct re- mains of " Troy town." He was further strength- ened in this belief by the discovery of an ancient bed of the Scamander, much nearer the plateau of Hissarlik than the present one. The presumed Simois had united with it at a point about two- thirds of a mile from the foot of the mound, thus forming just the battle-field, described in Homer as being bounded by the Scamander, the Samois, and the walls of Troy. Hiring a few laborers, he began to dig at the north-western corner of the higher plateau, aud at a depth of 16 feet came upon a wall six feet thick, which Ls now conjectured io have beeu a small fortification of the time of Lysimachus (306 B. C.). Hardly had this been reached, when the owners of the soil, two Turkish, farmers in a neighboring vil- lage, who used the plateau as a sheep pasture, pro- hibited Schliemann from digging further, unless he would pay them 12,000 piasters (about $500) as dam- ages, and bind himself to rill up the excavations again after he had finished. He offered to buy the laud, but they positively refused to sell it at any price. In this dilemma he turned for help to Safvet Pasha, one of the most enlightened members of the Sultan's Cabinet, in whom he found a man capable of under- standing his object and ready to render assistance. The result was that the ground was despotically P"rchased by the Turkish Government for 3,000 pias- ters ($12o) ami Schlieruauu obtained permission to make r^ searches. Here, however, a new difficulty arose. The newly- established Museum of Antiquities in Constantinople claimed possession of every object which might thenceforth be exhumed throughout the Turkish Empire ; and Sohlieiaaan was too experienced a man of business to go on with a great undertaking at his own risk and cost, and lose his chance of treasure- trove. The tirraau which he asked for, before begin- ning his labors, was only obtained, finally, through the aid of Mr. J. P. Brown, for twenty or thirty years Secretary of the American Legation at Constantino- ple. All these matters, however, were not settled before the beginning of October, 1871 ; and even then the Turkish Government ordered that all excavations should be made underthe eyes of an officer appointed for the purpose, whom Schliemann was obliged to pay SI per day. On the llth of October the -work was begun with eight men, but on tua second day afterward 74 men were employed in removing the upper soil. Firmly belie vina that the remains of the famous temple of the Trojan Minerva were under ths higher plateau, which he already called the Citadel of Priam, Schlie- mann relinquished his excavation at the north- western corner, chose a starting-point further east, and laid out a broad cut from north to south across the highest part of the plateau. His plan was to cleave the upper and lower plateaus down to the original soil, believing that the ruins of the ancient Trojan city would be found under all the accumu- lated rubbish of the subsequent ages. Immediately under the surface the workmen came upon the foun- dations of a building of massive hewn stones, be- longing to the first century of our era. These were removed with, great labor and hurled down the steep northern slope of the mound. Under this ma- sonry, which ceased at a depth of six or seven feet, the soil was composed of pottery, ashes, and debris of all kinds, filled with relics of the past of the most; unexpected character. The excavations were carried on until the 20th of November, by which time tha cut had reached an average depth of 33 feet. After penetrating about 25 feet below the surface remains of massively constructed houses appeared, and the antiquarian yield assumed a very different chrractcr. The Winter rains, which set in toward the end of November, obliged Schliemann to suspend labor un- til the following Spring. OPPER PLATEAU OF H1SSARIIK. SITE OF THE EXCAVATION?. 1. Scbliemann's Excavation in 1870. 2. Same in 1371. — Roman Walls. So far, no positive indication of Troy — as he then supposed, — had beeu brought to light ; but the relics which had been unearthed were so various and so remarkable, that the time and expenditure had been richly repaid. The results of this beginning may bo briefly stated as follows: At a depth of from 3 to G feet were found copper coins aud medals of Sigoutn, Alexandria Troas and Ilium, au enormous quantity of ornamented terra-cotta disks, and substructions of houses built with/Kojnan cement: from 6 to 13 feet no hewn stones/^ashes and calcined soil, witli traces of fires everywhere, quantities of oyster and mussel shells, tusks of wild boar, vertebra? of .sharks (which are not now found in the JEgean), and some rude specimens of pottery; at the depth of 13 feet, great quantities of stone axes, lances, weights and other implements sudjleuly appear: a little lower, i pottery of very elegant form and fine quality, deco- rated with the owl's-head, phallic emblems, knives of Hint, needles and spoons of bone, a few copper , nails, and a great quantity of curious terra-cotta disks, with a hole in the center, and adorned with au Trilvnc Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. almost endless variety of decorative lines, many of \vhich seem to Lave au emblematic character. TEKRA-COTTA DISKS. The Two Upper, Trojan— the Lower, Pre-Historie. At the depth of fniin 23 to 33 feet the relics again chanire. Having already reached the stone period, as he M.I a in ned, Schliemann was amazed to find be- low it weapons of pure copper of unusually elegant form . The vases, ui-ns, and drinking vessels were in t only quite 01 iL'inal in de.iign but very beautiful, brilliant, red, yellow, green or black in color, but without in iia:iieiital designs. At the first-named d( -|ith i-':: feet) the .bouses were of large sun-dried tiles, with door-sills of stone, but 10 feet deeper they Vfdrv wholly of enormous blocks of stone, without jnortar. In short, the grade of civilization exhibited by the remains increased as the excavation reached an earlier age. This unexpected discovery only in- crea-ed iln- desire to penetrate to the lowest histori- cal stratum, and there find, perhaps, some engraved relics of the lost Ilium. On tin- 1st of April, 1S72, Schliemann, accompanied by his wife as usual, readied theTroacl, and resumed <>pei -a! imis with a force of 100 workmen. lie brought \vithhimtwooverseers, furnished by Mr. Latham, direct, ir of i he railway from the Pine us to At lit us, and M. Laurent, a French engineer, who made a careful survey of the localities. Tlio expenses thus assumed for the excavations amounted to something more than $1,000 per month, omit I ing tho Greek holi- days twhirh, added to the .Sundays, make 147 idle days in the years), and estimating the waires of tho common laborer at, about 35 cents per day. 1 can only yivr. a hasty outline of the progress of the ie -cardies. Interesting as it is, from first to last, the mass of details would only confuse the reader who is simply desirous of knowing how Troy was found and what Mas found there. Schliemann beiran by laying out tho plan of ;i new cut, 4Gi feet deep, ;uid 233 feet (English) broad, t hinu^li the upper and lower plateaux, including therein his cut of 1ST1. The engineer calculated tkat the ."v.onnt. of debris to he removed would laeaauro 78.;"l"> cubic met, 'is— about 90,000 cubic yards— all of which it was necessary to move to the steep northern declivity and shoot npon the plain below. At the proposed depth it was sup- posed [hai i .ie bed-rock or at least the original soil would lie reached. On beginning to enlarge and deepen the excava- tion of the former year, tho soil was found to bo su aiming with small poisonous adders, called .Int '< linn l>y tie,- people, b. cans • th"ir bite is said to produce death before i !u> going down of the sun. Finding that the workmen handled iln-m with im- punity, and even were bitten without any results, >cliliemann discovered that, they had prepared themselves by drinking freely of a dec >ction of " snake-root," which trmw.s upon the plain. Ho judged it prudent to pivpa. e himself against da::t:''T by using the same antidote. Tho discoveries made during the first three weeks, when a depth of 48 feet was reached without iindinir the boMoai of tho ruins, were chieflv remarkable for th-iv indications of a much earlier civilixatioii than is ascribed M Troy. Tho figure of the owl-headed. Minerva, on vases and other ornaments, became so [i>qnent that Schliemann saw therein a certain syi.iv>ol of tho Trojan goddess. He insist •(! that the tltfO- (ilaii1:is At'iciic of Homer means, correctly trau.sia'ied. "th) goddess Athene with tho owl's face.'' and drew a uewfaithin his theory from tins inter, UVM: imi. With regard to the jidmitive symbols ol' tlie orig- inal Aryan race which he discovered, I will luertion them after iiuishiiu' the history of tha exploration. v.\si: WITH TTIR ov,*r.-i!r.vi>rn MIXI ::VA or- TROT. The owl-face on this vase is not to be mistaken. The circles below represent, the biva-.ts, ruddy hint- ing at Imi h bird and goddess, 'u ouo. This emblem is repeated, not onlv on pol tery, but on the pendant* of the golden ear-drops and diadems whict) were afterward found ill the so-called House rf i'riam. Ancient Troy— Bayard Taylor. By May. Scblicmann had 130 laborers employed, and divided the force, placing a part of the men Under the charge of a 1'arian Greek, named Photidas, who had worked seven years in tho gold mines of Australia, and understood tunneling. The great cut through the plateau was now driven from both ends, but the difficulty and danger arising from the masses of crumbling earth on either side greatly delayed the undertaking. Piiotidas and one of the men were buiied by the slide of a huge mass, but wore fortunately saved by some wooden props and dug out before they were suffocated. The eastern purr, of the plateau belongs to an Englishman, Mr. Calvert, who has a largo farm on the site of the ancient Thymbria, and Schliemann made an agreement with him to sink another excavation on the eastern side of the great cut. At the very beginning of this new work a Doric tri glyph was discovered, with a bas- relief nearly a yard square in the interspace, repre- senting the Sun-God driving his four-horse chariot. This piece of art, certainly of the ago of Lysimachus, is purely Greek, and therefore purely beautiful. The horses resemble those on the frieze of the Athenian Parthenon. Having reached the original soil on the northern side of the mound, Schliemann determined to run an oblique ditch, 150 feet wide at the top, and half that breadth at the bottom, to intersect the main cut. Jn proportion as he advanced, he was struck with the fact that the remains of massive cut-stone houses, copper weapons, vases of elegant form and rare and curious symbolical figures ceased suddenly, at the depth of about 33 feet ; while, below that depth, to the primeval, undisturbed earth, at 45 to 48 feet, a new and apparently much older class of relies was found. The same result had been attained, the previous year, in the spots where a greater than the average depth had been reached ; so, now, iu- etead of breaking up these ancient walls and re- moving them, the explorer decided to ascertain their extent and character. By the end of July a wall six feet thick and nine feet high was discov- ered, at a depth of 43 feet, on the northern side of the plateau, and a tower, 40 feet in diameter, based on the bad-rock, on the southern. Twenty feet of the tower were still remaining, and the mass -of loose blocks scattered around it indicated a much greater original bight. Inasmuch as both these massive ruins, on opposite sides of the in » mid, evi- dently belonged to the same period, and to the walls of houses occupying a plane connecting them, it was clear that an important city, inhabited by a highly civilized people, stood — not upon the original soil, but — upon the rubbish of a still earlier settlement, •whose remains were 14 or 15 feet in depth below it. It was only by degrees, however, that Schlie- mann convinced himself that the masonry be- longed to the Troy of Homer, which, itself, must have arisen upon the ruins of some pre-historic capital, of whose people we can only say that they belonged to the Aryan race. Until the 14th of August, a period of four months and a half, the woik was patiently driven forward. Then fever broke out among the workmen, the over- seers were taken down, and the aspects became so unfavorable that Schliemann reluctantly stopped work for the year and returned to Athens. lie first, however, laid bare enough of the tower to find that it was connected with strong walla on both sides; here, moreover, two copper lances were discovered. The number of articles, great and small, unearthed since the beginning of the enterprise, already amounted to more than 100,000! The evidence of successive historic periods was now clear, the chaos of fragments began to speak with an intelligible voice and language, but the name of ILIUM was not yet so distinctly written that the modern world must perforce read it. EXCAVATIONS IN 1873. By the 1st of February, 1873. the work was asaiu resumed, but little was done before the 1st of March, when the weather became fine, the Greek holidays were less frequent, and the workiogmen, to tho number of 158, were gathered together. Alter clear- ing away the Avashings of the Winter rains, Schlie- mauu followed the wall on the northern side of the plateau until he reached a part which was strongly buttressed. This, and other indications led him to believe that he had found the site of the Trojan temple of Minerva. Further excavations seemed to confirm this view; they laid bare the foundations of a building 280 by 70 feet in dimensions, formed of huge uuscnlptured blocks, and nowhere more than six feet high. The earth above it, however, was filled with an immense mass of sculptured fragments. It is impossible, within the space at my command, to describe the various objects discovered from day to day. Schliemann's previous experience had, by this time, enlightened him as to the proper direction of his labors, andhe sought to strike upon something which would serve as an indisputable landmark. The accumulation of terra-cotta disks, vases, idols, stone weapons, copper knives, needles, household utensils, with an occasional gold or silver ornament, continued; but the collection was already great enough for archaeological purposes. The high tower, the connecting walls, the foundation of the temple, and the remains of houses covering the same stratum of ruin upon which the former stood, promised more important results. With this view ho made various detached cuttings at the edges of the plateau, carry- ing them down to the level of what ho was now con- vinced was Trojan rnasonary. In tho beginning of April, at a depth of 27 feet, a house of eight rooms, adjoining the great tower, was discovered. The walls were about four feet thick, in some places 10 feet high, showed traces of a coat- ing of lime or stucco on the inside, and were, in many places, calcined and blackened by fire. In some of the rooms were earthen jars, for wine or other stores, between seven and eight feet high, and in front of the house a stone altar, for offerings, of a rude, prim- itive form. A little further there w:-s a great mass of human bones, among them two entire skeletons wearing copper helmets, within which the skulla were well preserved. To the explorer's Homeno enthusiasm nothing more could be added: ruin, con- Zrilvnc Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. flagration, warriors, helmets and lances — hero was Troy ! From day to day the store of beautiful vasos with the owl-l';iccd Minerva upon thorn increased. At the level of the tower and thu ruined d \vellinir all objects wore a distinctively Trojan stamp. A few days later, near the tower, a street was discovered. It was 30 feet below the surface, 10 feet wide, and paved with stone blocks about four feL-t square. Schliemanu immediately wiote. mi making the an- nouncement: "Beyond tlio least doubt it le:nls to the Scrcan Gate, wliich cannot bo more than I"'1 yards distant from tlio to\ver." llo ordered 100 workmen ta cany «:\ the excavations with all speed in that direction. In order to secure the tower and < lie adjoining house- from spoliation by tlio Greek and Turkish inhabitants, to whom the walls would have been a most welcome quarry, ho informed the, workmen that Christ hail once visited King Priam, and walked along that very street, on entering1 Troy. A. little shrine with a lamp and picture ol Christ wag also placed on tin; corner of the tower. which thu^ very soon Ixvame a sacrod place to Mos- lem as well as Oriental Chris: iau. Early in May, t!m exca/ation of the street, after having led to the linding of anotlier largo Trojan Louse, upon the ruins of which a dwelling cf tin- later Greek period, hail been erected, terminated at a massive double gate, the copper bolts of which were found among the rubbish. There could be little doubt that this reallv win the Scsean Gate, in mentioning which Homer always nses the plural. The first entrance is about 11 feet wide, with a smooth massive pavement, from which a ronsrhly- paved way leads to the second entrance, 20 feet further to the north-oast. The foundations of tlio large Trojan house, lying between the gate and the tower, proved, to have been built upon a mound artificially for. ned of the ruins of the prehistoric city. Its situation, its stately dimensions, and the treasures afterward found in its chambers, seem to justify the discov •;•• -r in calling it, if not the House of Priam, certainly the hou3e of a prince or ruler of the Trojans. A great quantify of beautiful and curious ra«es of the finest workmanship were found in this house. Among them were several of a peculiar form, with two llaring handles ;:'id two cars for drinking. S-hlici'iMin sees in the latter the dcpas amphikupellon of Homer, which, he insists, ought to l»e translated simply as "cup \\ i:h t.\\ o handles.'7 This is a minor pom:, in the presence oi so many more important discoveries, but it may Lo of interest to some persons. The disc ivery of Hie Sca-an (late of course di- rected all further exploration to the ncigh'mrhood of that locality. Tlie posiiion corresponds to the description of 1 lie Iliad, li is at, the north-west ei n corner of the wall > (' Troy, and fioiu 1 he hi^li to\\ er ve ir it, old KiiiLC Priam could Irivu had a clear and Complete. View of the I I.I '. I 1 •- li :•](! oil til! plain, lie- tween tiio Scainandur and ihe Simo'is. So, when Dr. Schli(;man:i, after having niiumairrd through half tlia remaiuiua ruins of Troy, takcj the only lariz<>, si::t ly mansion among them all, standing be«- twei-n the tower and the Sczeau Gate, and calls it "The House of Priam,77 I think he does not deserve to be treat :-d by certain German xarans as if he were an imp -ri incut school-boy. Let him have his House of Priam— and let us, too, so call it — whether Priam ever lived in it or not. For my part, I have far more faith in historical tradition than many people of greater wisdom : but 1 am always delighted when- ever t lie re varch of our wonderfully explorative ago jn-itilies the, trailiiiou; and vliev are not. •>, ~^ -L-— ,, < :,'>;-.NI>-I'LA\ OF THE SC.EAN GATE. Schliernauu's explorations are like a play in iive acts: ISo'J, ;7<>, '?!, '72. and '73,— the interest in- creasing until it culminates in a grand denouement, and then the curtain falls. Daring the month of May and beginning of June the rubbish, 50 feet deep, of three or four thousand years, was slowly cleared away, and the foundations, at least, of Homer's Sea-an Gate looked once more across the plain of Troy, to Tenedos and Imbros and the Samothracian Ida. Then— what particular day it was he does not tell us, — the city wall running southward along tho edges of the great mound having been further laid bare something happened, which 1 must allow him to tell in his own words: Imiacdiatelv he-iile the ir.ei-ie of Priam T catno upon a cropper ciliji-ct of :i most rein irkalile tonn, which nt- tracted my tittf ntioD so muob the more iiecuii-e I fan- oied I SilW SOiaoruiug ^oMcn j-lmnihTiin: behind it. A s'raimii nt' red :i.-iies ami cali-ined ruins, font or live feet thick, resfed on this copper article, and a'mve tin- .-tru- lillii tdwei-ed tlm \\all of lor: ill-al ion, twent\- feet iiitfli. Inn,! of c\- -at lo.ise stoaes an 1 e irt li. anil e vMen 1 1 \ he- loni'in^ to ilie i-eried after llie fall (if '1'i-ov. In order t.) secure tile treasure friini the iri'Cicil (it niv wnrknieii, anil .^avc ir, for lllllliail knowledge, lac u'reatest liat-le was iie.-e.-s iry ; s i, a I . houyli it \vas tint >••; lilll(^ for break- fast, 1 iiiiineiliately pri)cl,iiiiie I " rest I" to all. \Vin,c tliev were eatliifr aud reiio-*nnr I cut o-it ttie ireasun- wn h a l.ir^'e knil'c, in it \\ i taunt t he ur-aie-it e\ T, imi and tl e uin.st fearful a:iiiL-er: tor the IOOM-, treiiieii'loii-, \vail aliovc, (tins lllKleriliined, tlire ileil1 I evei-y iiio-ii.'!! t tl) topple down upon me. Jiut, the >l^ht. of si) nianv ol>- )'•(•!», each one of which was an Invaluable coat riliu tlon U> our knowledge, made me foolliiirdy, and I fur^nt tlie danger. The tiMii^nnri ol the treasure would h-ivo been in. it i-Miile without, the lirlp of in/ wife, who Ht.ind re.nly, ainl paclic I in ll.T sin wl ! lie art iel"S as I cait t hem our, nnd carried them away, T.ie tirsi iinn^r foua.i was a la r •>• nval sliirl I i.l e > i>|i • r, \\ i , li a raise 1 run, and a lm-> in t lie co iier. Tu MI came a copper p it, ue irly J.8 in. ned m diaiiiclcr, with I.', u handles; a copper tr uy, 1 Ancient Troy — Bayard Taylor. Indies lonsr, with a small silver vase, wcldort to it by the action of lire ; a coition flagon, weighing nearly a pound; two golden uolilots, ouu of which weighed nearly a pouud and a quarter (600 uram rues), and had i\vo months for drinking — a small one for tho host and a larvo one for the guesr. The, latter had been cast, bat tins former, as well as the flagon, were of bdonuered work. There were, furthor, pieces of silver which were probably "talents" — the tulttnta of Homer— throe silver vases, with two smaller ones; a silver bowl, 14 copper huice- heaiis. tnc same number of cupper nutile-axes, two large two-fdired copper daggers, a part of a swore', and some r articles. THE DOUBLE-MOUTHED GOLDEN CUP, FROM THE HOUSE OF PRIAM. All these objects were closely packed in a quad- rangular space, surrounded with wood ashes, and near them lay a copper key, 4 inches in length,— whence Schlieraanu conjectured that they had been packed in a wooden chest, which, left behind in the terror of the conflagration, was afterward covered by the ruins of the fal.ing beams and walls. Within the House of Priam, on the inside of the city wall, he found a helmet and a silver vase about 7A inches in hight, in which were two diadems of golden scales. a golden coronet, 56 golden ear-rings, and 8,750 small gold rings, buttons, &c. The fashion of all these articles has no resemblance to the ancient Egyptian or Assyrian ornaments: the Trojan jewelry.no less than the pottery, is entirely original. Whatever symbolic forms it assumes (with the exception of the owl of Pallas) point toward the far-off, mysterious home of the Aryan race in Central Asia. The value. Ly weight alone, of all the gold and silver found in or near the House of Priam, has been estimated at §20,000. GOLDEN EAR-RINGS, FKOM THE HOUSE OF PKIAM. Schliemann now hastened to bring his labors to an end. and thus secure the results of what he had al- ready accomplished. He broke away a large part of the upper Avail which rested on the ashes where the treasure was found, enlarged the excavation around the Scsean Gate, and opened new rooms of the royal house; but little of interest was found except a tablet of red slate, with an inscription in some un- known Ian gu a ere, and three silver bowls. He also, by sinking a number of shafts k the lower plateau of Hissailik, and lindiug now here auv trace of either Trojan walls or Trojan pottery, convinced himself that ancient Ilium did not extend beyond the cir- cuit of the upper plateau, and could hardly have contained a population of more than 5,000 inhab- itants. This, however, is no measure of the power of the Trojan State, or the auxiliary forces which it could bring into the Held. Tho large, heroic can- vas of Homer, he argues, has misled the antiquarian?, and he points to tho fact that Athens Vv'as famous when the Acropolis — smaller than the Ferganios of Troy — inclosed the whole of the primitive city. On tho 17th of June the researches came to an end. What has been uncovered will be left so. and it is to be hoped that the legend of the Savior's visit to King Priam will take root among tho ignorant modern Trojans and preserve the walls which no other argument could make sacied to them. Schliemann's wonderful success in 1878 was due, in a great measure, to the conclusions which he had reached during the excavations of 1872. He con- tinued the classification of the ruins and the relics they contained, and soon found that they might be divided into four distinct strata, each of which represented a long historic period. Further com- parison convinced him that the third of these strata, counting from the top, was tue only one which met the requirements of Homer and Greek tradition ; consequently, here was Troy. But under Troy there was an earlier layer of ruin, varying from 13 to 20 feet in depth, before the primitive soil was reached. This discovery is hardly less interesting than that of tho position of Troy. It carries the antiquity of the city back into that immense, shadowy past of the human race, which stretches like a mysterious twilight land behind our oldest history. The geo- graphical position of Ilium explains its importance in those far-off ages. The gorges of Ida protect it in the rear ; seated at the junction of the Hellespont with the ^3geau, it made a station between Colchis,- at the eastern extremity of the Euxine, and all the Grecian, Egyptian, and Phoenician coasts ; the rich plain around it furnished abundant supplies, which could readily be exchanged for foreign merchandise, and as its people became rich and impregnable within their citadel-town, the other and ruder tribes in their neighborhood would yield to their power. It is certainly older, by a great many centuries, than Athens, and its immemorial importance was no doubt the first cause of the jealousy of the sensitive Greeks. The topmost historical stratum, which is only 6} feet in depth, seems to begin about the year 700 B. C., when a Grecian settlement was established there under the Lydian dynasty. From that period, coins and inscriptions indicate the subsequent cen- turies until about the middle of the fourth century of our era. There are no later coins or medals than of Constans II., whose reign ceased in 361 A. D. Schliemann is of the opinion that the city was de- stroyed at that time, or soon afterward, but gives no conjecture of the manner of its fall. It seems to me that the raids of the Goths, then settled on the northern shore of the Black Sea where they built fleets, even sailing through the Bosphorus in proud 10 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. defiance of Constantinople, to ravaire the coasts of Greece anil Asia .Minor, give us an easy explanation. The Greek Ilium, which covered the whole el' tin- lower plateau of Hissarlik, must have contained 100,000 inhabitant s. It was a rich, and at that time donbtle». a luxurious ciiy, clearly visible from the •waters of the Hellespont, speedily reached and in- capable of resisting Mich stalwai • is. We have ll.iis an age if) for the first 6 feet of rubbish. At this dijn.i the Give!; masonry suddenly cva-i s and a .-tratum 17 feet in thick- ness intei venes between it and the massive budd- ings of the Trojan era. The relics here found are of a perplexing character, and will give plciitv of •work to lie- arch;e, .heists. The walls are built of earth a:nl .-mall s, me-, but the abundance of wood allies s!n>ws that the city— or the successive cities- was chieily built of wood. If the chronology of the Trojan auc can b • approximately established, it- will, of course, trive us t he duration of this interme- diate bi-H c t' ruin ; at present, it is scarcely possible even t,i guess. The ruins of Troy form a stratum averaging 10 feet in thieknos, ihe. depth (from the surface) leaching from •_':;: to 834 feet. Si m.-o the foundation of the city is conj'ctnr-'l to have taken place about 1400 L. C.. and its fall and destruction by fire to have occurred about 1100 13. C., this would give three centuries f>.r the formation of ten feet of ruin — which is quite sufficient it' we imagine a small but crowded city, with houses of more than one story and much wood-work, of which the ruins give ample evidence. The marks of intense heat are everywhere manifest. When the Sca-an Gate was first uncovered, the pavement seemed uniformly T)erfect; but at the end of two or time months the stone blocks along the upper part of the street, which had been exposed to the flame, crumbled almost entirely away, to a distance of ID feet from the Gate. The other blocks, protected by their situation, remain solid, and promise to stand for centuries. Finally, under Troy, there is a fourth stratum of ruin, varying from 13 to 20 feet in depth, as I have already stated. Tito age of this is a matter of pure conjecture, since t he vicissitudes of the city's hist or\ — frequent destruction and rebuilding— would have the sain-- practical ellect, or very nearly so, as a long interval of time. We have anywhere from two to live thousand years before Christ — taxing Kiryptian, I'lucniriaa. or Pelasgic remains as guides — as the dale of t he foundation of ttwfint Troy. l:i M \I\-i or THK FIRST PKRIOD. Filled with iiis Homeric enthusiasm, Schliomann gives us in the pi-e.-;.-nt work, only fragmentary and imperfect accounts of the characteristics of the earliest ruin-. The m-i,! remarkable feature, per- haps, is the siipi -ii inly of the terra-cotta articles, which indicate a irivaler decree of taste and skill than those in the subsequent strata. From the be- ginning down to the (ireek period, the evidences of tk ffradltclljl dcdinhifj nrili^ntinn are to clear, in the discoverer's opinion, that they mn-t be accepted. The early vases are of a shining black, red or brown color, \vi:h ornamental patterns, first cut into the 10 tery and then filled whb a white substance. Only Hne pice.- of pai'itcd terra-cotta was four.:!. 'I'ho iahabitants ol tlie city were certainly Aryans. This fact i;< illustrated in their manner ot building, and .il-oin the ircqncncy of the earliest An an reliuiciis symbols, upon the terra- ot. a disks— especially the two forms of the C'ld s : r-Jj^TL "— i I Ir- AUYA.N .sV.MI'.ilI.S— TIIK C KOSS. The first of these svmbi.l- refers to J-'i re, or rather the birth of lire, 1 he legend of which, ir. the Sanskrit liiij-l'i-d/t, has such an astoni-hini: resemblance to the outline of the Christian theology. The other appears to be a modification of the sain • idea. Since the path of early Aryan migration westward irua Central Asia seems to have been by way of the Cas- pian and Black Seas, it is reasonable to suppose that one of its many dividing and subdividing currents found a permanent rest ing-place in the Troad. REMAINS OF TIIK SKCOX1), OH TUOJAX PKKIOD. I must not omit to mention That, among other evi- dences of the destruction of Trov by a lii-rce conlla- gration, Dr. Schliemann found a layer of Blairs of melled lead and copper, in soaie places an inch t hick, extending over the whole site of a city. Tho blackened walls, the masses of wood-a .-lies and cal- cined stone, tillinar up the chambers of the ruined houses until a rough plain was left for tlio next city- "builders, would, however, have been a sr;llicient con- firmation of the Grork legend. With the except ion of the large and stately edifice of massive stone between the Tower and the Sciran G:«te, nearly all the houses of Troy were built of unbnrned brick (afterward part- ly burned and hardened by tin; conflagration), with sills of hewn stone. Tho size and character of the large house, together with t he greater excellence ot the vases fi>und in its chambers, the helmeted skele- tons at its dours, the heap of human bones, siigirest- i;r;- a desperate defense, and finally tlu treasures of gold and silver found beside it, en (he city wall— all these circumstances so disf iiiL'iiisli if, ar.img the ot her and loss important ruins that it may well have been a royal residence. The number of articles col- lected is so enormous, and their character is so iinu- enal and various, I hat I cannot undertake to describe them in detail. Only one inscription was found, and that in unknown characters. I copy, from Schliv- manifs photographic atlas, the form of a singular \ ase found in the House of 1'riam. The owl-headed Minerva was frequently recovered, especially upon another large vase in the royal house. Many of the urns and jars are made with shallow channels passing around the middle, to hold the cords by which they were siisp-a-.h-d. Of arti- cles of pure art, then' we nly found :t Unto mado of bone, and a fragment of a four-stringed lyre, of ivory, elegantly carved. Tho Aryan symbols, in- Ancient Troy— Bayard Taylor. 11 the two forms of tlio Cross, also constantly occur simony the relic i of Troy. CURIOUS VASE FROM TilH HOUSE OF PRIAM. REMAINS OF THE THIRD, OR PO8T-TROJ.VX PERIOD. The foundations of Tro .-, as we have seen, were 8oi feet below the present surface of the plateau of Hisso-rlik; but after the destruction of Priam's city tne s>te upon which the next-corners built waa 10 feet higher. Who these people were cannot yet be ascertained, but that they were also Aryans seems to be certain, from the recurrence of the same religious symbols, which can hardly have been used for a merely decorative purpose, since the forms of their pottery are quite different from those of the Trojans. They show the same degree of decadence in art, in compari-on with the latter, as these manifest when compared, with their unknown predecessors. Their architecture, moreover, shows a great falling off. The houses were constructed of small stones, loosely held together with a rough plastering of earth : the huge square blocks of " Troy town" appear no longer. One or two walls of the period are made of sun-dried bricks. The debris is of a dark-gray color, mixed with ashes, and contains enormous quantities of shells and fish-bones. Pieces of two lyres were found, a very few copper weapons, and a great many Ptoiio axes and kuives of flint or diorite, of very fine workmanship. After rising to the depth of 13 feet from the sur- face there is another change, hardlv determined enough to make a new historical division. The signs of convulsion— dumb hieroglyphics of lost his- torical events — which prevail throughout this third stratum gradually become more marked. The great increase of wood-ashes and the scarcity of walls— even of the previous rude walls of earth and dmall stones— indicate the existence of a city built OA woo;!. The signs of copper implements wholly cease, and all weapons and utensils are of stone, but of quite inferior workmanship. The vases a:id ves- sels of terra-cotta again show a difWent fashion ; yet, most sin gularly, they are covered with the same ancient symbols. There is more than one evi- dence of a general conflagration. If at that un- known period— certainly before 700 B. C.— Troy was a wooden city, it must have been I'lvquriitly de- stroyed and rebuilt. It would be very difficult, otherwise, to account for 17 feet of rubbish in four or five centuries, when the 1,050 years of the Greek city only left six feet behind them. Here is a great and deeply interesting field of further research. REMAINS OF THE FOURTH, OR GREEK PERIOD. The Greek settlement, which Schlicmann con- jectures to have taken place about 700 B. C., has left but few relics anterior to the age of Lysimachua (300 B. C.). But we know (Herodotus, VII., 43) that Xerxes, in 480 B. C., on his way to Greece, came to the Troad ; that he landed at the mouth of the Scamauder, visited the " citadel of Priam," and sacrificed 1,000 beeves to the Trojan Minerva. We also know of the Macedonian |Alexander's nude pranks at the mound of Achilles ; so that the age of the Greek city may be tolerably well ascertained without consulting its ruins. The bas-relief of Apollo, which appears to have etoad between two tri glyphs of a small tample, has been pronounced by Prof. Brunn of Munich, one of the best living authorities, to belong to a period between the mid- dle of the second and the end of the fourth century before the Christian Era. Inasmuch as the Greek relics found at Troy belong to the historical age, I shall not describe them further. Two curious coincidences, however, must be mentioned, before I close this Jong, yet all too- brief report. Several of the terra-cotta disks, belonging to the third or post-Trojan period, prove to be precisely identical in shape, size, and em- blematic decoration, with thoso found in the lake- dwellings of Northern Italy. Bath refer directly to India, to the Sanskrit myths of Prani.intka, the far earlier origin of the Greek Prometheus. An ancient vase, with a belt of curious characters around it, which Schliemann at first supposed to be merely ornamental, but afterward imagining they iiiighb have some affinity with Phoanician, sent to M. Burnouf, is probably the first evidence of a connec- tion between the JEgean and China. M. Burnout declares that the characters are early Chinese, per- fectly legible, and constitute the sentence : " For the earth' causes to spring from ten labors ten thousand pieces of stuff." There is, of course, a vast deal more in Dr. Schne- mann's narrative volume, and his atlas of 218 photo- graphs, giving us four or five thousand pictures of the exhumed objects, than [ am able to mention here. I have confined my labor to the narration, as clear and intelligible as possible, of las achieve- ments. Inasmuch as his own story is very broken and fragmentary, my task has not been easy ; but I feel sure that the American reader will bo glad to receive as much as 1 have been nble to give. B. T. 12 Tribune Extras — Lecture ami Letter Scries. BROWN-SEQUARD'S LECTURES, The following course of six lectures was de- livered by Dr. Browu-Senuurd of Xe\v-Vork, at the Lowell Institute, Boston; beginuiug Feb. 25, and closing Maicli is, 1S74: NERVOUS FORCE— THE FIKST LECTURE. TKANSFOIIMATION OF I.IUHT, 1 1 1'. A T, KI.KC TUICITY, ANI> CIIHMICAL !•'< MtCK INTO .Nr.IIVol'S HIKCK — A GUINKA PIG .-.UKVIVINC A11K!: Till: MKHULLA OULOMiAlA WAS I IT A \\ A Y— .NLKYKS KKI'T ALIVK roiriY uofiis AMU: >I:I'AI:ATU>N— C'O.MI-AKVTIVK rowKU OVKKTIII: M:I:VI:S OF OXYGKX, STUYCII- MXK, AM) T1I1C WILL— TI!i: UNITY OF TIIK NEltVK FOKCli. iFlUi.M AN OCCASIONAL CORRESPONDENT OF THE TRIBUNK.] Jii'vroN. 1-Vli. -o.— Til-- popularity of this course of lectures may be seen from the fact that a supply of tickets equal to die full capacity of the hall of Lowell Institute was disposed of within three- quarters of au hour after the office "was opened. Those who know <>f Dr. Brown-Se"quard's devotion to Prof. Agassi/, iii hi.-, la^t sickness need scarcely he reminded of the great alii-ctioi) they entertained fur each oilier. Tlie Doctor's tribute to. the memory of his friend did not fail to awaken the sympathies of his audience. The lecture was as follows: L.UMKS AND OI;NTLI;MHN : I have no doubt .you will excise tin; emotion that is upon me at this time. L-.ist year when I met you In-rc, there was sitting there a man who certainly deserved the great admiration that lias been bestowed upon him, and whose qualities of he.irt wen- Mi jirciit, that although I admired him more thau I ii-lmiie any unr, y.-t I loved him still more. Hisabseiiee to-da\- jn-tiiie-, tin- !•-. -Pile's that are uow upon me. The lee t HITS I have to deliver here are on a subject which is full of interest, and which deserves more study than it lias obtained. The various eftects produced by nervous torce arc certainly, even for persons wtio have nothing whatever to do \vith medicine, full of interior, ami I may say ot importance. I will go further. I have ini diiub! that per.-o.js who have not at all eni:a«e(l in the nn-ilical prote>~ioii could do more perhaps than ph\ -leians, in regard co discovering certain ot the peculiar:! .e-, of nervous force. Physicians un- foriunateh — | sjieaK of myself as well as of others — an- i'i.i-c- I. Tii'-ir inas prevents progress. They have received ;;n euniMi:,i:i \vaica has t'iveil them certain notions. and iii notions prevent a free examination of certain questions. Tan unbiased minds of persons who have not studied medicine, or who, if they h i\ e FUldied the loiiml.il ions nl it, have not on^a^eil in tho JHMd.ce of Hie |Holi'>MoII, p.TMIir lllein to llives! i-.l I e ami discover. J'crhai's a-, a iv,iilt of tlii- lecture that I bhall i lei nrr here, it will lie triveu to some of you to push forward (li-eiix en.-s in th.it line. Jlcf.ire enferinn into the proper subject of this lecture it is es.-ential to pa-..-i in review Home of the element a ry (|ne>!ii)ii:-i of physiology. I sliall do it very rapidly. There arc two elements in the nervous >.y.-!em which are united together, but which are, however, absolutely distinct, the one irom thu other. One cousidta in the IHTVC cell, which you see, rcpre.s -nled on ihi- iioar.l. I have made it nearly round, bin it is very rareh that it la so. That cell has atartiu,' from it a number of filaments. In tho spinal cord and In the brain those cells generally have cue element entirely diilerent Irom the other*. an.l 111 it element Is similar to the other element we ii i I in the nervous system; that is, lioers. There are therefore two kinds of elements ID the nervous system, the fibers and the cells, with their prolongations. Vv'u it lieco nj-i of tlioso prolon,'at ions is not known, and it m i v p vliaiM remaiu always uuUnown to us in this world. I(i- to be feared thai the power of our microscopes will r. -1111111 pr-tfv ne irly what it is, and if that be the ca-e, tnen we sliall never know much more as regards tho ramilicatioa of those fibers. Bat tho roaj.irlc.ib'.o pjiut of which I have not yet spoken, and waa-h you nu^at to keep in inind, i>, tiiat tho libers of tho un-v.ms system are united with those cells. Within the nervous centers, that is, the br. 1 1:1 and spinal cord, there is bat cue ot those libers united with cells. In other parts oi tl.e body there are cells which have two real libers starting iro.u thorn be- sides the ramilicalious. A DEATH-BLOW TO ANIMAL MAGNETISM. Now the nervous force la pro.iuuc.l ia tlio-o elements of the nervous system. I Lave, no ne-- 1, of course, to fjive a definition of nervous f irce, or nerve force, as you will perhaps prefer to call it. It is that force which manifests itself iu nervous actions. T le nerve force belongs oul.y to the elements I h.ivo de^-riboj. Are mere any instances in which we can 11 a 1 n -rvo-n foreo without tln^ existence of tliosa two elements t This question is now decided in this way. There are animals in which, and there are circumscauc.es iu man iu which, tho nervous tissue d,>c.s not exHt evidently iu the way I have desi -riiic I, and still there ia a nervous force; so that it appears that nervous force can exist without tho nervous el. -in -uis. TU>TJ are conditions, especially in m mstors, \v.i -rj tuo spinal cord, instead of bemi: or^raaizi-d, is a fluid iu which e\o- ments resembling tkose of tho nervous s\ -<-e:u are not. recognized, and still there is nervous action, and there- fore, nervous force. In some low lorms there are also tissues winch do not represent at all the known elements of the nervous system, but m wiiioh, uey.-riii -le-s, tue.ro is nervous action, and therefore n.-rvous force. A pro- 1'csMoual friuud iu Paris has shown tii i' there are cer- tain instances of disease iu man ia whic.i tuo uervoua system is so transformed that it is hard.y r:'c,>.y;niz,ible, and j-et there is every proi:a!'i!ity that it acted, and that nervous force was manifested. But tho great question is not there. The jrreat ques- tion its whether the boundaries of the nervous s> stem are also the boundaries iii Health of that m-ivou> force. In other words, cau tho nervous force spring out of tho nervous system to produce som;> action / As regards this, I may say that there arc no tads 10 prove it. You car. eauily undersiand that if I am rulit. tln> is a death- blow to what is called animal loa^netiMii. I'.ut this is a point that wo will debate more at IcniMh by and by. All I wish to say 111 this introdnetory lecture on this point is that there is no like- lihood at all thai nervous force can fret away from tho limits which :IIM con- stiVited by nervous tissue. Thciv is no quest ion, how- t> cr tm»t nervous force cau m.uiiiest it -eit outside of the boundaries of the nervous system; b.it it manifests it. -elf ulicn alter having been 1 ranMorm>-il into auotuor force. It is well known that m-rvuiu lore- is trans- formed into motor force. This I am, doinir at prcaonfc. Is i> o-.viiif,' to i-iotor forco that I hav,- any voice at present. 'l'ai> transformation into motor 1'orc . «, takes place at every uiumcut of our lives. Otli. r Nervous Force— Brown- Stqnard. 13 tiona are also of great interest. You well know that there are fishes that possess an electric apparatus. In them the nerves which go to the electric apparatus are enor- mous. Aud thosn uerves convoy nervous force, and not electricity. As soon as the nervous force is felt in that electric apparatus, eUvf rielty is evolved. Electricity-la a transformation ia th:it case of nervous force, just as ue know tlmt beat can 1)0 transformed into electricity or electricity into ln>nt, heat into motion, and motion into heat, &c. There are animals which are phosnhores- ceut, and which are so under an act of their wills, so far as we can judge, and under the influence of the nervous sjvtoui ; so that light also can be evolved as a transformation of nervous force. Tliere are cases of consumption in which lisht has eomo from the lungs. Tlie fact has been pointed out by Sir Henry Marsh and other physicians. The light appears not only at the head of tiie paticnr. but it mar bu radiated into the room. It has baen con- sidered that tlio light was only a peculiar effect of the mucus that came from the lungs of the patient. Ic is not likely that this is the case, because mucus in greater quantity is evolved, and all sorts of mucus, from the chests of people, every day, without any such phenome- non. I have read the history of each individual case of the kind so far as I have been able to get it, and in every one of the cases the patients, I find, were in a terrible Btato of nervousness, so that I cannot but believe that the production of light was in a measure at least, owing to the transformation of nervous force. HEAT, ELECTRICITY, AND NERVOUS FORCE. There are great transformations also of another kind. You well know that nutrition, which implies chemical change in our system, as well as secretion, which also requires chemical chantre, may take place under the influence of the nervous system. I shall show this more fully in a subsequent lecture. When this transformation occurs, it is quite evident that it is the nervous force that has been transformed into a chemical agent. Is nervous force ever transformed into heat ? Tliere is no doubt whatever that heat Is evolved from our sys- tem, and in a great measure owing to the action of nerv- ous force; but the question is whether that tranforma- tion is an immediate one or whether it gors through other transformation*. This is a point which it would be very interesting to determine, but which at the present state of our knowledge is not yet ascertained. Now that we have passed in review all those facts showing that nervous force can be transformed into the other forces of nature that we know, almost all of them, the question arises, " Can all the forces of nature be transformed into nervous force?" This is one of the greatest questions tbat we could undertake to consider. Unfortunately, the elements we have for solving it are as yet very few. We do not know positively yet — at any rate I do not know, and I have read considerably to find if the question is solved— we do not know positively yet whether electricity can be transformed into nervous force. You can easily understand that if it were possible to have such a transformation, a great many weak people would receive manifest advan- t<- 76 in being galvanized. Therefore the question. i-» of great importance. There is no douot at all, for this has been established by a good many experimenters, that the elements of the uervuus system bi-neiit in their nutrition under the influence of electricity and galvan- ism; but a direct transformation of electricity into nervous force is not y"et proved. As regards light, veri' little is known. You well know that nervous disturbance will come from tho action of light. There is no doubt whatever about It. L ight 19 certainly a very powerful agent and a moht useful one. Indeed, it is rather too much forgotten that light is almost essential to life; but we do not know if there is any direct transformation of lig'it into nervous force. It seems to bo so in the retina; but I cannot employ any other phrase than the phrase " it seems to bo." It would not appear to bo difficult to solve tho question by experi- ment, and a solution would be of considerable import- ance. There are other forces which certainly are transformed into nervous force. There is no doubt as regards mo- tion. Motion increases nervous force in the limb without the least doubt. What the French call massage, which is shampooing, pounding or kneading of the ncsii, increases nervous force without doubt. But there is still some little doubt whether it is not through an im- provement of nutrition, through a chemical change, that the influence takes place. There are other forces, heat, for instance, which per- haps are transformed into nervous force. The applica- tion of heat to children is exceedingly useful to help their development. If the air they breathe is cool, and heat is applied to (heir limbs, but not so much to tho body, they certainly grow faster. There is no question that in northern climes, children wlio are not well clad, andarenoc well cared for in regard to Hie heat sur- rounding their boJy, do not grow so well as children who are submitted to the influ- ence of heat. There is one thing which in this country especially is most hurtful and dangerous, and thatis beat applied to the lungs. It is perfectly well known that the mortality of children in tnis coun- try is enormous in tho Summer months, and that chiefly throng!) the influence of heat on the lungs aud on tho belly. Digestion and respiration are disturbed, and death comes, as you know, too trequently. Mora care could easily be attained in that respect, ami it may be that I shall have a chance to speak of it in one of the last lectures of this course. A DEAD OX KEPT FIFTY-SIX DAYS WITHOUT PUTRE- FACTION. Some physiologists have considered that nerve force is nothing but that which many physiologists admit under the name of vital force. The theory whicn is most important in this respect has bsen put for .vard by M. Flonrens. He considers that a spot in the medulla oblongata is the. focus of vital force. Taera is. you know, a spot which is pierced bv the in it.idors m Spam when they wish to kill a bull immediately. Djith oc- curs instantly. This kind of death is a very interesting one. When we perform the experiment in the labora- tory we find that the animal is so instantaneously and so effectually killed that there is no struggle whatever. The animal lies there, apparently having lost every vital power, and it la certainly a great question to knosv what becomes of the nervous force in those cases. It seems to have been lost altogether. I say it seems, for if we examine a little further we find that it is only dormant. It is accumulated in cei tain parts of the body in immense quantity. The nervous centers have lost it almost altogether, but the nerves are quite rich in nerve force, so much so that I have kept one of those animals tor nearly 56 days in my laboratory without any trace of putrefaction, at a temperature which varied be- tween 45 aud 65°. The lack of putrefaction depended certainly on the long persistence of nerve force after ileath. There is in these cases a great mystery however. Tliis nerve force wo can detect very easily. If we galvanize a limb we flud that there is a nerve force u Irilvne Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. tbcrc, ami that for a long time after deatb. But how 1s It that suddenly it disappears from the nervous centers, so raucli so that respiration, circulation, and all voluntary and involuntary movements cease t To thH qMe-tion would require no little study and ^ati'Mi, and tho person making it would liavo much to find that would he Interesting. Wf find, how- ever, in making these experiments that we can take- away the part which has been considered as the focus of life, by employing certain simple precautions, •without destroying life. At tho College of Burgeons in Ljuilon, in one of my lectur -s there, I had tried to show that death in the cases rel'erre I to is im- mediate. I had an animal— a sruinea pi;,' — on which the experiment was to ho performed. In making the experiment iny knife slipped and went all around the part, eairyini: awav mure than I h.id iut'.'iided. The pig survived three or four days until my IMV, tryintr to make the pig sijne.il, ilmwiie I it. [Laugater.] The vital focus, eo called, di>e- not deserve the nani" ; for there arc many C.tses in whim it has been destroyed, and life persists. Then-tore, we eamiot look upon it as being a center for vital force or nervous foree. T-iils leads me to examine now tho question, What are the place- in production of nervous force 1 Those plans of production, I may say, are as extensive as the nervou- ss >tetn. Fora, longtime physiologists hud con- sidered that the cells were the only parts that produced nerve force. But I have ascertained and proved, and I think most physiologists now admit, that nerve fibers can also produce nerve force. In experiments consist- ing in injecting bl iod into a limb which has been separated from the body for a lone: time, I iiavo ascertained tho nervous force which had disappeared has been reproduced. So that it is clear that nerve fibers can engender nerve force. If •we separate u nervous center from the nerves we find that in four days the norvo has lost its powei altogether. It seems, therefore, that something came from the nervous center which was useful in the produc- tion of forces there. But it is clear, too, that there are other forces reproduced in the pare. If wo allow the part to receive more blood the Injection will reproduce nervous force again. I have kept a uerve alive apart from the hodv for 40 hours by injecting blood in it. The nerve force, even in the brain, can bo re invigorated •when the brain has lost all power and is separated from the body. An injection of blood reproduces nerve force ai;aiii mid all tho activity of tiie brain •when In the animal is found to be manifested. In one ca-e. th.it of .1 p iiient of mine who had had a dissection of a iier ve, i ho nerve continued to act simultaneously for four day-, aad tho muscles to winch that nerve went were ju contraction for the same length of time, o \Ying to tiii- pei • -iM'-nce of life and action in that nerve separated trum tin- brain. A tier four days tho traus- lormation which we know can take place in the nerve ti>.-ne had de-iro\ed nervous activity, mid the muscles then remained ijuie-i-enl, completely deprived of action. There i- an in ..an In the body whoso functions have liccn VITV much di-ciiMPdi That organ is tho cerebel- lum. In in. in if, is a very largo or^an indeed. I shall not dn-cu-s us innrtioiis hen-, but I will Hay that tin-re is no doubt that the cerebellum is one of the principal foci, one of tho principal places where ner\ou- forco Is produced. In many animals the principal place Is the spinal marrow. But in man tie- cerebellum Is the proa i focus of the production of inrvous lorce. FOWLU OF OXYGEN, STKYCIINIMC, AND THE WILL. What LUW ia tho aK'-'Ut of yix'ductiou of nervous force in our blood t It is clear that blood Itself must be necr"*- sary to the production of nerve force. Still for a time the oxvgcn alone which Is carried by the blood mar suflice. Oxygen, even when tho blool seems to have iieeu taken away altogether from the part, can givet-ome uerve force to tho nervous system ; but there is a medicinal agent which has Immense power In producing nervous results. Wheu the .-pinal cord of a frog has been washed of every drop of blood, when injections have been mad" of pure water so as to carry away every particle of blood, if strychnia is put on the spinal chord, in a very short time the amount of " rcllex power," which is a manifestation of nerve force, is very much greater than it was before, showing that strychnia has Increased that power. This is the only fact wo know, which clearly proves that a medicine, putting aside oxygen, can have such a power, and a power, indeed, which is very treat. What is tho power of our will on the nerve force t This is a question which a great many patient- every day ask themselves. There is no doubt that nerve foree la very little under our will. It may be an admirable provision of nature. It may bo that we would spend it very foolishly, as wo do spend many other things. Still there are many circumstances when the deficiency of will power is really painful, ana in patients in whom the amount of nerve force is immense. I have tried to measure tho amount of uervo force in a frog. I have ascertained that a frog could lift a weight of 20 grammes to a point which was about a line and a quarter, GOO or 700 times in an hour and a quarter. This is an immense amount of nervous force, and man- ifested, too, when the spinal cord was uo more re- ceiving blood, when there was no more cir- culation. In this case the frog was beheaded. Compare this with the case of a frog having its head. Tho frog with a head, after a very short time, could not move at all willfully ; while still tho reflex action, as we call it, an irritation of the skin, determined a strong movement. There, may be, therefore, in certain circumstances, an immense, amount of nerve force accumulated in tho system. I would not say that there is no more production immediately after the cessation of circulation. Iliad not washed the ves- sels. There was blood left there; still there was uol much of it, and it was not charged with oxj gun after a time. There is an Immense difference as regards the amount of nervous force that remains in the system a;tcr death according to many circumstances, and especially ac- cording to temperature. If wo have considerably diminished the temperature of animals having a great heat, such as we have, and we then kill them by me. ins that will not bring on convulsions and an ex- penditure of force, we llnd that the amount of torce that remains is considerable, and thai it will remain there a very long time. In cold-blooded animals, when the tem- perature is very near freezing point, the amount of nerve force that remains in them for a very long time is also immense, while at a high temperature the trans- formation of nerve for^e into chemical force is very ranld. and then the expenditure ul nerve force is total after a time, which is not long. The principal question I have to examine in this lec- ture, however, is the one I shall now spend of ; namely, is there unitv of lorco or only one nerve force, or aro there main' lu our system I I have lor a long time tried to prove that there is unity of nervo force. If wo spend force, either in tho way I am uow doing, by mental uiuro thau by physical Force— Brown- S^quard. 15 labor; if \vo spend force with the pen in hand, when wo urc studying quietly at a table, we find, after having tieon at work three or four or five hours, tluit tlie nerve force that remains for physical exercise is diminished. Wo have drawn force from a focus which is the same that gives it for mental action and for physical exertion. If, on the other hand, we walk 30 miles and find ourselves physically tiied.we find then that very little nerve force remains for mental action. Tliere are facts, however, which seem to lie in opposition to this, and those facts will be fully explained in the last lecture, when I conio to explain the laws of production and expenditure of nervous force. I may say this much, ho vever, just here, that it is perfectly well known, contrary to what I have said, that we can do better with our brain if we have had some exercise than if we have had no exercise at all. But it is simply that a certain amount of exercise has led lo the production of nervous force liy improving the circulation, improving the secretions, improving respiration, and improving in fact all the great organic functions through which the secretion of nervous force takes place, so that we have become richer in our force because of the exercise we have taken physically. There is no doubt, therefore, that moderate exercise will lead to a production of nerve force and facilitate the exercise of our > i ram power; and there is no question that if we draw too much of the nerve force of our system, if •we draw a great deal more of it than can he re- produced during a certain time; if we walk, for instant, very fast for five or six hours, "KG Off then unfilled for mental •work and for a good many other things. Our respiration be- comes difficult. Our heart, after bavins beaten with much rapidity, comes to bea;; very slowly. We are weakened in every organ whose action depends on ner- vous force. There is no doubt therefore that there is a common focus of nerve force on which we draw for any of the activities of our system employing nerve force. Looking through a microscope for several hours, as mi- crographers know full well, is a cause of great fatigue, and renders mental work or physical labor thereaf- ter more difficult. THE I'NITY OF NERVOUS JORCE. There is one experiment that shows tUat nerve force is distributed as galvanism would be on a cylinder. Suppose a cylinder in the shape of my arm; suppose that this is charged with a certain amount of elec- tricity, and suppose that this arm or cylinder is then cut in two. just in the middle of its length ; there would be in eacn half of the arm then an amount of elec- tricity which would lie just one-half of tl.o amount that existed before. Suppose that the whole arm had manifested a force equal to twenty measures, the half of the arm would manifest a force equal to ten. So it seems to be with the nervons system. If we di- vide the cord across, as in a bird, behind the upper limbs, •we find that the bird cannot make use of its limbs &e before. The amount, of force is not sufficient in the upper part of the nervous system. So it seems that nervous force is distributed all over the nervous system, and that if a cause, operates to divide the nervous sys- tem into halves, each half has only the amount of nerve force which it had before. There is one objection in appearance to tl>2 view that there is unity of nerve force, £ra4 that is that the, brain Is a double organ ; that we have two brains instead of one. About that allow me to say that although we have two brains it Is pretty much as if we had but one, as by the force of our education one only Is raised to power The other is left with very little, power indeed. It would be very easy, as I may hereafter show, to develop fully the power of the two brains by proper educ.ition. But if we have two brains there is no objection to the view that there is a unity for the nervous force. It is no ob- jection because these two brain.* are united. There is communication. Every part of our nervous system is In communication with the other. Wo cannot touch a part of the skin or any other part of our system without producing a commotion all over the nervous system; in the same way that we cannot stamp our foot on the ground with- out shaking the whole world, and not only our world but the rest of the universe is shaker, by such a simple thing as that. Of course, a very little shaken [laughter |, but shaken nevertheless. There is no doubt that any action on any port of our system is felt everywhere through it. And that is tho reason why many persons suffering in their nervous system cannot have an excita- tion brought on any part of the body, as It increases the trouble where it exists. A few questions remain to be examined before 'closing the. lecture. One is, how happens it that there are so many ditt'ereuces in sensation if there be but one kind of nerve force. This is not a great difficulty. The va- riety of sensations has an organic cause, oi which I may have an opportunity to speak in another lecture. The nerve force is only an agent, most likely the vibration of a certain aaent, and the vibration according to the loca- tion will produce one efiect or another. The parts of the nervous system are not all alike; they certainly dif- fer one from another, and the vibrations may be greater or less, so that we can easily be reconciled to the va- riety of sensation, although we admit but one kind of nerve power. There is another question. That certain fibers seem to act on muscles, and others seem to restrain tho nervous action. This is a point of such great importance that I shall give a whole lecture to that subject. When cells are active, either morbidly or naturally, an irritation coming from a nerve and acting certainly through nerve forces may be sufficient to stop the power of that nerve cell. That seems to be an act completely different from that by which a muscle, for instance, is put in action by the vibrations taking placa; the transformations of nerve force taking place in the nerve, and also all the other actions that I spoke of— the emission of light and electricity. All these things may seam to imply some different action. But if you admit the groat doc- trine which exists now in science, and which has revo- lutionized natural philosophy as well as chemistry; if you admit that there is never a loss of force; that force is accumulated and that it is only transformed when it disappears, then you can easily admit that nerve force has been transformed in those various organs into some other force ami that there lies the cause of the different actions <•( winch I have spoken. But tho difficulty exists, how- ever, for that special case in which au action ceases m the cell. Suppose a person to have an attack of epilepsy. Hia head is thrown to one shoulder and he has not yet lost consciousness, and some one comes and draws the head to the other shoulder and the fit ceases. Well, there has been in that case an irritation starting from certain nerves when the head was moved, and this irri- tation goes to the cells of tho gray matter that were active in producing the convulsions find stops the action of those cells. But the stopping of tho action of cells is something different from the production of ao- 1C Tribune Extras — Lecture and Letter Scries. tion. Therefore it may ?>:om quite different. But we may at CiioiiL'h to replace tin- whole amount ol iierv.- i.nv • iliat •was acting lr I'.ne. Then-ton-, t le-re i> no reason a priori not to aduilt tho possibility and tin* probability that nerve force i •< rho .same in every m>t nice ; that it nff-cts cells of gray matter to stop them in the same w.u that it can put cells into activity ; in the .-ame way that it can put muscles into aotirltyi and that it cau put an organ uto activity. NERVOUS INFLUENCE— SECOND LECTUEE. SOME OF Till: 1'AtT.S THAT AKF. I'll 1 ICULT TO KX- ri.Aix— A M:I;KO 1:1 \>\ i i:s CONVULSIONS KY PI/LI.IM; AT mi: cui AT TDK— MOKE PEKSISTKNT VITAI.I1V IN AMERICA MIAN IN KUUOl'E, I1OTH 1\ MI.N \M> A Si M ALS— VARIOUS RELATIONS BE- TWKKN TIM; M:i:v(»rs srsTKM AND THE ACTION OF THE Ill.AKl — MI.IIIODS OF CHECKING CON- VULSIVJ. EFFORTS, -I « II AS COUGHING. AC. BOSTON, M.ncli 1.— Dr. Biowri-.Se'quard delivered hia second lecture to a large audience : LADIES AM> LI M I.I.VI.N : In tho lasc lecture I tried to t-how 8c-ver.il points relating to the force which we kuow to exist in nerv es. I particularly insisted on what I call the unity ol lorco in the nervous system. I espe- cially tried to show that every nervous action is tho caii-eof.in expenditure of nervous force. There are a lew 1'aets, however, whieh may be considered aa const i- tut i n g an olije, -non to t'laf. I will mention some of them. Tiie principal one is, that we kuow full well that certain parts of the bmiv may be extremely weak while otlr-rs remain strom.'. JJut that certainly is no objection, Mn.-e if we admit that the communication Is obstructed be- tween the, part whieh is weakened and the rest, it is quite natural tint there should bo a diminution of force lu that part. Besides this, then) is something in the iiei vons p\ Mem ;i.s we.ll as in the muscles that permits a reaction after an irritation. There is a proporty'of nerv- ous tl.--ne ami muscles especially which wo call excita- bility. Tho exejtability of the nervous system is entirely and ah.solule.v imlepeii.leiif of the amount, of nervous force. ivrhaps, it i.s wrong, however, to say as I have just done, that there is 110 dependence of one upon tlie other. Thf-re may be a dependence iu this way, that the greater tho amount of nervous foive, the lets excitability there is, and rice rcrsa, the greater the amount oi e \eii .ilninv thu less amount of nervous force, i'eopir \\lio IMVI- be-ii ill; people who arc nat- urallv cxtiemely weak, or UIOM- who have lost a good deal of blood and hare been v. e.;Kene >y-i, in i.s more or less charged \\i;n electricity all the time in health. The tww forces, electricity au«l m-rve power, are both present; but not alwava iu proijor- tion olio to the other, as sometimes then' may be an op;iosiic condition. JSut certa'uly the nerve force ia not electricity, as we well know that the spei-.l of the nerve i "ice is only from 80 to 300 feet iu a si-con 1, while tho speed of electricity as you kuow is thousands and thou- sands of times greater. Till: INTI.ULXCE THAT IS EXERTED UPON THE NEUVE3. I now come to tho principal objocc of this lecture, which introduces a suhj -ct that must extend to one or two more lectures — that is, tho mllaeueo that tho nervous system exerts upon it.-elf by the force that wo call nerve lorce. There are two Kinds of such influence, which are absolutely distinct one from the other. One consists in the pro'hu-ti.ni of the activity, either normal or morbid; tho other consists in the cessation of tho morbid or normal activity. These t\v.» nn-at influences of nerve force, acting upon parts at a distance more or less irreat, cover almost all the facts relating to the in- fluence of the nervous system upon itsc-lf. I shall this evening enter more fully into tho history of facts which show that tho nervous system can stop the actiou of a part of its extent. All wo know on this subject is of comparatively recent discovery, and tho principal fact developed is that which relates to tho iisart. Tho brothers Webber discovered that tho heart in a per- lectly healthy man may bo stopped suJdcnly iu ita actiou in a way which is quite difi'ercut from that which reirards muscles generally. If we galvanize a muscle that has been more or less in contraction by a current passing to and fro, stopping and passing again, so that the muscle is contracting and relaxing, as I show you now in this movement up and down exerted by tho front of my ar:n — .suppose that this is acting, and I pass a current into the nerves that goes to the uiusfles thus acting — immediately tho IUOVCUIL-UG stops; so that there is something similar to tho cessation of the action of tho heart. But tho action stops, not because the muscles have stopped acting. Ou tho contrary, tho muscles are acting with a wonderful power, tho greatest that they may have under tho amount of electricity that is pasMuir; and the contracriou remains perfectly fixed so long as the current passes. This is the production of an active state in tho muselo, and not the production of a passive state. According to the discovery of tho brothers \\vnl >er, when the big nerve in the neck that goes to the heart, and which we call tho pur tngnm, is thus influenced, the heart slops, passively, not act ively, like the muscles of my arm. Tho walls of the heart remain perfectly llaeeid, perfectly motionless from want of activity. During that time tho heart is Illh-d more and more by blood reaching it, and it becomes very much distended after a short tim -, as it .dues not reject the blood it is constantly receiving. Tiioro is, therefore, in that stoppage of tho heart's uc- tion a phenomenon qr.ito peeiili.ir. And it is a phenomenon which implies a c ita.n kind of act i vity. For although then- i> a passive- elleet obtained, u passivity produced in the heart, there is ati activity lu the nerves that tro to the heart to produce ih.it cessation. T. it-re Is an intluence upon c. rtain parts ul tin- lu-.irt be- longing t;> I lie nervous system, and it is ccrt.::u!y au ac- Ncrvou? Influence— Dr. Brown- 17 tivlty although it consists ITJ stopping a movement. It is just as if you were to stop the wheel of a carriage by pushing a wetl-o under it forcibly. ACTION OF THE NICKVOU8 SVSTEM ON THE IIEAUT. Tlio great agents or tlio rhyi iimtral movement of the heart are small ganglia, composed of c, '11s of gray mat- ter. They arc suddenly rendered i»assivo by Hi'1 1'iTiiliar influence exerted upon them. Such an e fleet bus been observed, first, by tlio g.ilv miz uion or the nerve of tlio neck that I spoko of; and it was afterward found to appear when tlio medulla ob'ougata, or center from which that nerve Starrs, was galvanized. iu cx- p?riments made by a French physiologist— Leg.allois — it was found that the crushing of tlio medulla oblongata produced an arrest of tlio heart. But lie did not dis- criminate between that kind of cessation and death. He thought that death was caused by this crushing of The minimi:. oblongata, and that the heart had ceased because it Had lost the source of its action. "When I took up the question I found that a f-imule pricking of the medulla oblongata could produce au arrest of the heart's action. My friend. Prof. Charles Runlet, who took up the question of the mechanism of the phenomena by which an organ is arrested in its activity, considered that what takes place iu the he.irt is similar to other phenomena which he noted at the time he published his paper. Ho established this law : that all suoii phenomena— which I shall call tho phenomena of arrest, though in English they are generally called inhibitory phenomena — occurred always through the same mechanism. An irritation starts from a pare which can convey rervous force, and the nervous force so con- veyed after that irritation, reaches the cells of gray matter which were active, and those cells of gray mat- ter are immediately stopped by that peculiar influence. For another illustration of this uiecnanism we are in- debted to the observation of a very intelligent negro, whoso master was affjcted with a disease of the spinal cord which produced convulsions iu the lower limbs. The most intense stiffness would manifest itself in the lower limbs. They were rigid like a bar of iron for a time; and alter ten minutes of this extreme rigidity they began to have violent. jerks. The jerks then disap- peared aiid the rigidity returned. All :tay long ihe lower limbs were in this state of muscular contraction. His servant, tho negro, having to dress him, found it very difficult to put on his pantaloons. Ouo day, ho by chance took hold of his big toe, and found as he pulled it that the limbs became perfectly soft and movable. The convulsions had disappeared altogether. The neero certainly had a natural genius for science. [L ingh- ter.] He learned the meaning of tho fact. Pie learned that whenever ho wanted to push his master's panta- loons up, he had only to pull his big too down. [L-ingh- ter and applause.] He succeeded every lime. And as the master found the cessation of the convulsions useful at other times besides when he was dressing, the negro was asked very frequently to act on the big toe in order to effect it. [Li lighter.] Tuis fact is not a unique one. I have seen 14 such cases. Many of my medical triends tave s.;eu them also. In fact it seems somewhat a rulo In cases where there is a certain disease of the spinal cord limited to a certain part, that this will be found. In this case you find exactly the same thing that exists in the heart when the par vuyiun is galvanized. In both instances there is a nerve that conveys irritation to tho cells. In tho case of the heart the. nerve goes to tho cells that are in the heart. In tho case of the big toe, the serve poes to the cells that were in a morbid state pro- ducing tijoee convulsions. In the one case, that of the heart, tho phenomena of movement were nominal ; in tlio other, the phenomena were morbid. Still, it was tho same mechanism in both. In boll; instances a cessation of activity was produced. rUEi'SUUE ON THE NECK TO CHECK THE HEART'S ACTION. A friend of mine. Dr. Waller, a ino.st intelligent man, a man of genius— although lie was not a negro— found that by pressing on the neck he could produce tho most interesting ptysiological phenomena. Ho lias succeeded in that way in curing headaches, neuralgia of tho face, and many other affections iu which there was pain or ureat congestion itv ol New-^ork, I liatl M •• '1 In thi-iii tli:it pusliini; til- in Uruim-nt as I -., oal to do along the cord, would be quite enough to kill the annaal imm.-diatcly. i'ol -tun itrU -fur me, I h;nl said tli.n ili-it!i was ihii- to tin- IH-IIIO: rhaj.re ac- company inn tin- in.'tt nun-lit, and imt to tlii- l.u-k of tin- li.lhiciicc cif tin- -pmal cord Aft.r pushing tin- in .1111 1. 1 in I"i .-mill- distance, I found the rabbit \\ Inch Iiail In . h op. rated upon, eatliif.' ;i carrot [lallfll- t'-i ]. 'J i iimri- tlian you il" now, ami Iiol at tin- rabbit Imt at me. [L in^hii i .J I could not understand • what it wa> due to, and I thru ]in-ln-il (In- liar ol iron its full lciii:t!i. or nearly one- n- • •; t: ,. -pjaal cord, but the ralilnt COn- tinm-d to rat it carrot 1-',, ruinate. y for mo ami i..i .ice, I found that ih. -PI- was no hemorrhage at all. 1 then t.,ok up i trs uud slnnved tli.it tlu-ri- \\.is no bl :m.-. . .lined in that way the p. i - v. :iit I had said, therefore, was :!• d liv tin- fact tliai in Europe death takes pi. ice >>\ lii-ni. -IT. i c . rbia :> a l.-ncy to hetuorriiaire iu Eu- r-p. in .,',.;, e of the differences between the annuals of i , aud there arc other iui- , Tin- In-art c .| bv a blow on the, belly. I/injr I", li ID : bad d' i> i inincd this. The fact was i>tcd on it. But the ex- iii»:i wi .11 In- thought. But, it takes science a lorn; \\ !;i c i. • i.i ... ; progress is had slo ffly ; uua in tlu> i -INI- it v. a^ a l.'iiir time before the fact.-* were jreuer- ! and a ti in- explanation reached. Goltz, a ph\ . . .aiiv, has made experiments ou a .: a How of tho tin ire r on the • ; in- b L the experiment which had been many tiaj.-s on man. Only since his time has it •.known ih. m pathetic nerve there has the o r Mopi'-. liea i'ii action. I nad published : uowinx bo w it is that in peritonitis, • h is an lull .1.1-1 1 1 ion of the tluii membrane iu the ah- doini n. from luck of action in tae heart. It UowtnKtoa mi of tne ramifications of the sym- pathetic aen . abilomcn, that the heart's action py nop .rtanr to kuow. as if we possess Hi' ve (J0 possess- them— jil in- in those ciises iu the abdomen, lid: of the patient. It is well known thai it,.- in. i: w.iii-h frequently save iu peritonitis1 that K til.- il-, of opium, iiiiiui i-l', s the cxcitaiiiliiv, •'in I i" : • prevents the iufl.ienec outheheari. 'J -' inilueii. . U.M-S up from the ubdoiucu to the spinal :. "'id ' rc in the mcitvlla oblonyata, and tiien di -. • • ...in the medulla, olilonsiula by the »nr fil'juin to tin- bl al t. A tn at in i . . fncta -.vl:li-h you may observe at watcr- f'""1 • the Influence that cold po ', : ;:•• I.IH, in iliininishiui; the a.-li.m "f ' ' t,rP<-at many persons who are I to have 1 ..m an. r having been unlmilttcd to i'l done!. . ami there arc many who are in 'i. in. . tbll 1 1 • atim-nt. Indeed, the per- Min i Know n, i nil iinati-lv Is absolutely una bit- to re- CetTI a douche I r without IM-IIIK iu danp-r ol dyinr limn a :i ol t In- h.-.iri V ac: ion. In experi- ii,i;,. . l»r. I^lekliiHou and ^''- Bend .1 . pushed (-o I.ir tin- inllueneo of <-o ,1 waler ..; i thai they had actually liad ail ... : n. It hhuw-. I.M i. fore, lli.it ': Lbe duu.-ln- or hho\\i.-:-!.ath, and that p. • ons wl.o have not thf- proper rp;ic:.on onsht not to ci'i.tliim- to cxpox- tln-ni^elv. s to ,-iirli a caiiM>. There ar.- in.iuv other causes that may .-lop tip1 heart's action. It is p-rfoerly well known that riuoii,,u can do it. In all Mich cases it is by pretty inn li the same mechanism. Chloroform kills in that way. One or t\vo breathings of chloroform may be suiii.-ii-nt, bv the in* II Il ace . \i-rti-d 0:1 tii,- r innlicaiion of tin- //«/• vagum iu the I u n ^s, the irritati 'ii iroin^ il]) to the utt'lti'l'i utilunyuta and (lien down to thi- heart and arrest uu' iis actioi.. Thi- is only io in- lear.-il, however, in per.Mius whose ni-i \ ons sy.-icm i- very excitable. In tin- larynx we also find wnat an effect may be pro- duced on the action of the heart. I have a-cdtaincd i nat I >v put line carbonic acid in the larynx -s of anini ils, tin- heart's action may be stopped immediately. Still I ,im ool.t enough in many instances to push r.iroouic acid with trreat violent- • toAanl the larynx, when it acts at tin- .-aim- time mi the mucous niemlirane ot the mouth, and loses something of its bad ell'ect whi-.-h consists in the arrest, ol the heart. DANOEKOUS M!. HI. iDS OF CL'UING HEADACHES. In oin- in- -..-..in -c I toDiid that a nioile 01 curing head- aches which is now employed mav be liable to fatal re- -ulis. A friend of mine had a vcrvii.nl le-adache. I tliou^ht that if I could ealvanizi: the cervical sympa- llicll> in tin- liecK, Which .iroes ro [he bloo I- Vessels Of the le-.id, I should produce a cessation of the pain almo.-t at ouce. I succeeded admirably, but I almost snc.-e.-d.-il iu lulling my friend. The heart's action stopped, and ho was iu ereat dancer ol death from a galvanization of tho par vds/um which had taken place at the same time £ was nalvanizniK the sy iiip.u hetic. Since that, I have bceu more prudent, aud have not r.-p.-,ite,| tin- expt-rimeut. Many physicians, however, ealvaniz.- tho s\ nip.ithetic. They do it, it 18 true, in a way win. ii is dill'.-rent from t he one I employe.! ; t aev applv the currents with more can-, si ill, i canuot imt confess that there is dauger in the process. I pass now to what relates to the arro-t of respiration. Tnere is no doubt that the resp.ra¥.or\ movements arc all doe to an activity of ce is of ^:\i- m liter, ju>t as fiie movements Of the ia-artare; the cells of uray 111 liter, as rejrards respiration, hem,; pl.tc • 1 OM t lie iiasc (if the bl-jiu and in a p irl ol i lie spinal cord, r.i • s m.- nerve, tlie jiur ra-jnin, wliie:i goes to :he hear:, has a SOt of libers which, lust. -a t of ifoini; down, 1:0 upward, anil to- W.ifd those cells ot -iav m .tier in I '.]<• t)aS6 ol' I he brain and spinal curd. .S> I hat if youci\il.- , I..- /mr riii/itnt, having one hand by which you e.iu act on the heart and another by which you can acton the brain, you can at will, at OIK; movement, stop the heart's aenou. and Iu a not ,ier >top the respiratory mo vein -nl s. Tn,- stopping of the respiratory movement is very peculiar. I have unioriunutely uo time to enter into details about it. But there are two kinds of m-rv • U n-r> aMe to -top tho re-piratorv nmvem.-nls. There is on • kind, neeordintr tii Bosenthal, proing cu tiio l.ir\n\, adia^' by tbe nerve which is called the sup, -nor larvnir.- il. Tins stojis res- piration by the ee — atiim of the di.iphr.ig n. which is tb-0 muscle that dilates tin- chest. Tins is rend'-ic I >o|'t ami inactive lli--t, as the heart is pe.nlered soil and inactive b.V (he ualv ini/.ilion of the neive. The other part of Me- jut/- fn /itiii >tops r.-siiiration by another mechanism quite dilleienl, which I shad not stop to describe. But respiration can he stopp -d h, a j;ivat mails' other means whlcb are important to be known, it, is import- ant to know, tor m-tance, that ii\' p i>-inir a current of carbonic acid tlirou-li the l.irynx, \\ e can diminish the activity of tlie rcoj.iiutory movements alaiost at ouce. Nervous Influence— Dr. Brown- I have seen convulsions stopped immediately by the passage of carbonic add In that way, and the rospira- tory movements themselves majr be stopped altogether for a time ; and as you are sure that, they will return if you stop noting with the carbonic acid, yon have there a means of diminishing the iiiilnonce of a morbid state of respiration. There are facts which I should have mentioned re- gimllnff the heart, which relate also to respiration. If •we take a pair of bellows and insufflate air into the mouth of an animal, we find that the activ/iy of the heart is diminished. If wo do the same with a view of affecting the respiration, we find that the animal does not then take the trouble to breathe. It seemed to the physiologist that first made the experiment that, as he was giving the animals all ihc air they needed, they would be perfectly stupid to take the trouble to breathe. [Laughter.] The reality is that they do not think at all about it. I may say that they have no power of think- in.?, as in many eases the activity of the tuind is lost for the time. But even if the mind remains, there is a ces- sation of the activity of the cells that serve respiration by the irritation of nerve-fibers iu the bronchia. I have ascertained for instance that if you divide the par vagum .n the neck so that the communication be tveeii the bronchia and the bram no longer exists, if you insufflate carbonic acid into the lungs there is no more stoppage of the activity. Therefore the stoppage took place through the influence that was propagated in the ramifications of the par vagum toward the brain. As Heriug has insisted upon, there are many facts which show that the very effort of breathing brings with it a cause that stops breathing. The very fact of drawing in air is a cause which stops the action of drawing in air. He has gone a little farther than I should go in saying that the expulsion of air from the lung.-; is also a cause of stoppage of expiration. It seems in reality as if these three movements, the movements of the heart, of inspiration, and expiration, had associated with them a cause that diminished them. When that cause ts deficient, iu morbid states, then we find the move- ments of the heart becoming exceedingly rapid, and we •flud the movements of respiration becoming exceed- ingly rapid and tumultuous. Tae regulation of those movements belongs to the proper action of those powers of arrest which exist there. As regards the heart, in cases of palpitation, for instance, we have a simple means of diminishing the palpitation; it is breathing iu rapidly and forcibly a good deal o,f air, dilating the chest as powerfully and quickly as wt> can. In that way an in- fluence is developed which I have found to be the result of the association of the nerve loice that goes to the muscles of the chest aurt the force which descends and stops the heart's action. At the same time rhat tus cur- rent goes from the brain to the muscles of the chest to. dilate it a current associated with that goes down the par vaffum toward the heart to diminish its action. In health at every moment this thing takes place. It takes piaco in a very slight degree indeed. Every act of breathing is an act which moderates the action of the heart. So then there is an admirable provision of nature by which an excessive action finds a moderation in Something which takes place usually along with it. MEANS OF CHECKING COUGHING, SNEEZING, &C. There ure many facts which show that morbid phe- nomena of respiration can be also stopped by the influ- ence of arrest. Coughing, for instance, can be stopped by pressing on the nerves on the lip in the neiahborhood Of the nose. A pressure there may prevent a cough when it is beginning. Sneezing may be stoopM by tho same mechanism. Pressing also in the neighborhood of the ear, right in front of tho car, may stop coughing. It is so also of hiccough, but much less HO than for sneez- ing or coughing. Pressing very hard on tho top of the month inside is also a means of stopping coughing. And. 1 may say that the will has immense power there. There was a French soldier who used to say, whenever he en- tered the wards of his hospital, "The first patient who coughs here will he deprived of food to-day." It was exceedingly rare that a patient coughed then. There are many other affections associated with breathing which can be stopped by the same mechan- ism that stops the heart's action. In spasm of the glottis, which is a terrible thing in children, as you well know, as it sometimes causes death, and also in whoop- ing-cough, it is possible to afford relief by throwing cold water on the face, or by tickling tho soles of the feet, which oroduces laughter and at the same time goes to the gray matter that is producing the spasm and arrests it almost at once. I would not say that, these means are always successful. I would not say that we can always prevent cough by our will; but iu many instances those tilings are possible, and if you remember that iu bronchitis and pneumonia, or anv other acute affection of the lungs, hacking or couarhing greatly in- creases the trouble at times, you can easily see how im- portant it is for the patient to try to avoid coughing aa best he can. There is also a series of other convulsive movements more or less associated with breathing, and it is very important iu those cases to counteract the influence by action on certain parts. There is a form of epilepsy which consists almost exclusively in what Basil Hall has called laryngUnius. He had an idea that it was essential to open the trachea and let the patient breathe through an opening there. But this is not at all neces- sary, even if it did good. Touching the larynx, with a sponge charged with a solution of nitrate of silver will very frequently prevent laj.yngi sinus, when it has iust begun and it has very little power. But iu those cases of laryngeal epilepsy, iu which the convulsions come from affections caused by a spasm of the larynx, there is no cioubt I hat this device or expedient changes the activity iu the muscles, and that activity is enough to produce a cure. There are a good many other phenomena of arrest. The most interesting are those relating to the brain. I cannot Iu this lecture speak of more than one of tnem, and that is arrest of the cerebral activity, of thought, of consciousness. It is well known that in epilepsy cer- ebral activity is lost. It is well-known, also, that in certain cases of syncope it is lost. Iu cases of sleep, also, it is lost, except of course iu great dreamers, and then there is hardly any consciousness, and in any case the condition is quite different from that of wrakefulncss. There is an evidence that- a theory which I advanced long ago to explain the loss of activity iu the brain is only partially true. It was that a contraction or spasm takes place in the blood vessels of tho brain, that blood does not circulate there auy more, and that, as I then supposed, the stoppage of tho circulation causes a ces- sation of the activity of the brain. But there is auother cause iu these cases in which there cannot be a contrac- tion of the blood vessels, because the principal nerve which produces these contractions has been divided? and even iu those cases a loss of consciousness can take place suddenly. Pricking the base of the braia may cause a complete loss of consciousness in an animal after a division of the nerves that go to the Trilune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. base of the brain. We cannot attribute that loss of con- pcio!i.-:;e-- r.i want of circulation, for the blood in .•. Circulating thei-i:. Uutthei-' i> another fact. If we jral- vamze tl.e ;«ir TH'j-ini so as to arrest tlic heart'; ii.-'ion, tln-rc tli' •'.. :- ii" < .reiilati.'ii ;it all in tin- lirain ; an 1 if we Lave j:alvai.;z -ii OM:\ tin- p.rtof t In- nerve which to the heart after having divided It, BO that th'-iv i- no circulation at all in the brain, tin- aiiiiniil remains eon- i- 18 fOI eiu'at nr t'-!l Si-coll Is. Therefore, A ,H I] we find - r!i ;l c r: mi 1! 1 it.itlotl Will produce a I 18 Ol con-cl'iil-iy s. Immediately, BT6 c innnt lo.ik il]ioli tbe loss of couftclouaoess as being due to 1 itioa ol emulation in the brain, as tn.it cessation dnc- not im- mediate!] • ' • Icra, too, tin; hr.ilu l—:::a:n- BOtive smie 1 1 me-, although tin re is no circulation in tin- brain, although the 1 I then ' •• ; y bl.ieu. It shows that tin- br.iin in-iv ri-iii mi .1. me \\ in-ii deprivi d of circulation, and e\m '•! 11 \\ --MI. We inil^t tin i-,- Ion- ail nut thai there is Ull active call-'- which produces the Ce.-sa;ion Of the activity of tin- bfaln iii those ca-i-s m winch it is pro- duced b\ ih' :i of the nervous system. INDIKKl T NT. KYI-: FORCE— THIRD LECTUBB. CATS!- "I I"-- m i i-N-i I'-rSNESS— NO I- IKK IN" TIIK III \I« Mill: I'M Al'ITATION— ENOHM"! s DOSES OJ >i i:vt IINIM:— srnDKX RECOVERY KI:I>M M:c>i::\i ll l> M. I UAKi.Y— VIOLENT REMEDIES lull in -i! i.-i.v. ]!«»>II»N, Man li .".—A larcc audience assemble*! to hear Iii. I: n\\ u-Se.|uanl s tl.iid lecture ou Nerve I'lllce. 1 Ir sp.iKe as fu]liiW>: J.Ai'ii - \M. i .1 vi M MI N : I tried in my last lecture to ehuw th.it mr\i- now-!- e.ni stop a food many of the ino-t iiiiiiort.ini ari-ihat t.ike plaee in our system. I li i\ e show a that tin- In-art'- action can be stopped sud- denly; that ie-piratmn can a No be stopped suddenly, ami I -ha.l 1 1 \ i" -aow I hit our e"ii-ci on. -ness may also In- lo-t -uddeaiy by an aei Miml.ir to those which arrest circulation and r. --piral n-n. i ialv inizatloii of a certain iiei vi in i hi- Deck. TOO know. Mop-, the hearl's action. As ri-L'.ii-iU i"ir roii-cion-iie-s there are a ureat many ciri-unitiain-1-s in wlneh it may lie lo.-t. Those who are Hit; I he.ilih Know full well that every t went v-fonr liour- i ii - v. iii lose conaclousnene t'«r a time. IN-I-SUIIS Cut of heallli ma\- lo-e eonx loii-m-ss Inaut.itt! \\hirh Ve . Jie ; they Will lose It ill 0 {lilcpS.V, apop e \ . nnillni-eii.ini ti. rm- nl asphyxia. In all t he-r ea.ses it }>. jio-s.lile I.i .elmi' I hat tin- lo.HR of Consciousness Is due «-nt i rely nr i-hii-ih : o t in- contract ion of tilt- Id.md ve->els In tin- br.iin. I .staled in the la-i leeiimi certain facts In oppoM-i..n t" that vii-W. I shall in.t li p'-at these; out Urn- is one Jiolnl nl t:n-at imp.inanee. to be noted. Then- i- ai:eivein the n. i K \shii-hiroesto the blood ves-els of t In- !• rain and ha- the pnwer when It Is excited to pro- dm-r a eonli a.-i ion Hi tho>'- blood vi ^-els, so that circil- lai," i'i> d In a i: I ji.irl of the br.iin. Then; is, therein! e, a -i "i 1 1 ot; to I In- t heorie- w lneli we liave ud- lllltli (I t"l a Ion- I ;me. a e Ml-e here fol - the ei'HSIltioil Ol the ueiiviivot i-oii.-i-ioii«oi-s,. |;ni i iiai ean-i- Is not the only cs — but, on the other hand, the nerve of the jiur t'lijniii was also divided, audit' 1 applied a galvanic battery to that part of thu par vagum troinjj to •In- heart, and which you know, by tin la-t leetitro. will pniiiuee a eessatiou ot the action of the heart— there was. under the.-e eiri'um.-iam-es, a cessation of tho a-tiou of the heart without any trouble in tJio i'i-ain but that due to eessaliou of circulation. In that ease there was a continuation of the activity of tile mind of tile, animal for ei^ht or ton seconds at least. In these cases the circulation, although improved in some pari.-n! tin- brain, ceased altogether after two or throe .seconds, on account of tno cessation of the aciiou of tho In-art, and still there was activity of the braiii. A9 noticed in my list lecture, the activity of the brain will persist in certain dlse-i>es — i-lndera, for Instance— al- ihoii-h there is hardly any circulation in the brain, and the blood is not at all charged with oxygen, but is dark and considerably altered. THE PIIKNOHCNA OF ARREST. But now, if, havinir matters in tho same way — that is, having divided the par vagum so that I can irritate the bnso of tho bruin without stopping the. heart, and the svmpathetic has been divided so that there is plenty of blood in the brain — if then, "with a- needle, I «ive but a touch to a certain part of the, base of the brain, the poor animal, in some instances, thoujrh not always, immediately ceast>8 to t'-cl and loses conscious- ness completely. He loses consciousness, although cir- culation continues and the brain is full of blooil. Tho loss of consciousness, in that instance at lea-t,isuot due to alack of circulation in tho brain. There mu«1 be another cause. And that other cause, onb-tantiateii byatrreat many facts which I have not time, to mea tion, is something quite similar in nature to what takes place \vheu the heart is >io]);ii- I in- tir- J.M! vaniz ition of the nerve that goes to the cells of tmv mut'-r within ir. It is the same thing that takes place when, certain parts of ihe nervous system being irritated, respiration stops also. In other words, it is one of those phenomena which have been called inhibitory, or phenomena of arrest. It i* important to know that often very slight phe- nomena will act very powerfully. A partition of the muscles of the eye in a person with what is called hypnoii-m is often quite sulli'-ient to chaniri' tliecomU- l ion of the tilings in the state of tile lirain so as to make the person losu conscio'isac.-s. In that case there is a condition hko '.^'it of Sleep, with I his dillcrence, t liar, w li'-n called, tne j.ersotl will act lilcn a somnambulist. It has beep •_•. 11 nest ion whuiln-r t h -re i> life lefi in thn head s 'pa/atcd ironi til.1 body. Well, t he expei iaienf s that show ""if the irritation of Inc. spinal cord near the nu-rliilln i!i!iniijiitii will produce a loss of conscious- ness independently of the loss of blood, which is ul.-o a cause of loss of conscioilsuc--. 'The ,c e\;i •rnuciiM show that the cnll.ingof th.- neck iiiu-t also prmluce a state of unconsciousness. 1'hilint liropl-d s may lliu- feel as- sured th.it per-ons who are decapitat-'d know nolhiu,' Of their f.ite Iminedi itelv al'ier the blo\V. si.Kiur- i i ii crs nt-- si.niiir iituiTATinv OF TIII-: xr.HVES. I pa.-s now to another kind oi arrest or inhioitory in- lluence. This part of my Hiib|eoi oii^ht. to have received the full and thorough Investigation which. Its luipor- Indirect Nerve Force— Urown-Scquard. 21 tance dcnvmds; but unfortnnatoly the labor of research has been loft to myself up tojthis time. Surgeons every day have to deal with such oases, and it is a great pity that more workers tli;in an old m m liko myself do riot study tlic subject. In many instances, uurter a prick or certain injuries of the nervous system, there is a cessa- tion and sometimes a complete want of that Interchange between tissues and blood wliieh we call nutrition. The circulation, though diminished, may remain pretty active; but notwithstanding the p.ToisOeuce also of respiration, nut so perfect as in health, though cer- tainly iiuHe enougn, we might stippo-e, to produce a fair condition of the circulation. But notwithstanding the, persistence of these two functions of circulation and respiration, we dud that the blood iu the veins is pretty much like the blood in the arteries. The change of color which we know to take place through nutrition, does not occur, and the blood returns to the heart prelty much as it has been sent out. It is red iu the veins and the temperature of the body has sensibly dimin- ished, owing to the lack of the produc- tion of heat. The interchange between tissues and blood has ceased. Is this owing, as the other phenomena of arrest of which I have spoken, to the cessation of the activity of certain cells 1 It is a Question yet to be decided. It is very likely that it is. We tind these cells ot gray matter acting on the various parts la which there is a function for the persist?. ucs of life; they are pretty well scattered everywhere. My friend Prof. Lister of Glasgow has poiutei out that almost everywhere, even in the walls of blood vessels, he has found cells of gray matter. Wo may suppose that the nrrcst of activity that takes place is due to a stoppage of the activity of those cells. Surgeons, as I have inti- mated, have very frequently to deal with conditions of arrest which are very serious:. Under an emotion, or under a wound, under a physical or mental shock, a man may fall down, having the four kinds of arrest of which I have spoken. That is, an arrest or diminution of the heart's action; of respiration ; of consciousness, and arrest of that interciiange between tissues and blood constituting nutrition. Those kinds of arrest may and do co-exist generally. The degree in which they appeal- varies; but almost always in the state which we call collapse, those four things are to be observed. I may say that, strang? as it may seem to the medical gentlemen present here tnis evening, one of the most dangerous of those is the cessation of that interchange between tissues and blood. Without any doubt, the cessation of the heart's action will kill after a time; but not so promptly as a cessation of what we call nutrition, which is really life. There are various facts relative to this. CURIOUS EXPERIMENTS— HOW HORSES ARE QUIETEI>. According to a discovery made by Prof. Sluff of Florence— a discovery which has been pushed beyond him by many others— we can very readily produce these conditions. He found that it was quite enough to touch the nostrils, as I do mine, simply passing the finger along the sides of the nose, to stop the activity or the heart and respiration, and stop consciousness in u measure. He did not find, but left another to find it, that interchange between tissues and blood is also stopped. It is well known now that most of those men who suc- ceed In quieting violent horses, put their fingers to that part, and sometimes inside the uares. Merely touching these parts may produce some effect; pressing hard upon them has far more effect. It is not essential that the application be made there, as a pressure of the lip may produce the same thing. In some animals, rabbits and guinea pigs, if we pass needles into their chest and heart, so as to judge of respiration and circulation, wo find that the needles stop altogether as we press the lips or part of the chock. It is not that the poor creature is fricrhtened, as when we have deprived them partly of their consciousness, or almost altogether, bv the use of chloroform, the same phenomena occur. There is a very curious fact mentioned by Catlin, who traveled in the West, and wrote two volumes on the Indians. Ho states that the calves of the buffalo. It they aro caught, and the air from the lungs of a man is strongly breathed into their nostrils, will become so fascinated by that peculiar influence that they will run after the horse of the hunter, and follow him five or six miles. It is said, and Mr. Catliu also alarms it, that in Texas, or in other parts of the country where there are wild horses taken by the lasso, if the hunter succeeds in taking hold of their nostrils, and then forcibly expels air from hia lungs into the nostrils of the horse, ho will follow him anywhere, and become perfectly tame. These facts do- serve to be studied. I have heard that when Mr. Rarey acted so powerfully on very violent horses, both iu this country and in Europe, he had something to do with their nostrils also. What he did, however, he kept in a great measure secret. That part of the system, at any rate, Las a great deal to do iu diminishing the activity of the principal organs. It is very natural, therefore, that such a power should be acquired by one who has done such a thing to an animal as intelligent as the horse. There are other facts of very great importance. Those persons who did me the honor to follow the lectures I delivered here last year know somewhat of my views in regard to paralysis. I will not enter at lentrth on that, subject, but I may say that paralysis, amesthesia, amau- rosis, deafness, the loss of any of our souses, the loss of any of the powers of the mind or body, can be produced by a mechanism just similar to that which we know to exist when the par vagum is galvanized so as to arrest the heart's action. I will mention a number of facts which show that paralysis, which may appear suddenly, can also disappear suddenly ; and if it can fMsappear suddenly after the cause of irritation has ceased, it is clear that it was that excitation which produced it. Tuere are many cases on record showing that the mus- cles, of the eye, for instance, or the muscles of the face can lose power under neuralgia, but not a neuralgia at the very place where the muscle that is paralyzed is found. Sometimes the neuralgia is ou the other side. Sometimes the neuralgia is in the arm, and it will be a muscle of the face that is paralyzed. But if you cure the neural- gia then the paralysis disappears. In the same way au irritation of the nerves of the teeth can be a cause of paral3'sis. There are instances of the paralysis of tne two lower limbs, as Castle of New-York has shown, that were cured by the extraction of decayed teeth. Many other cases of irritation of a nerve can produce paralysis. A small worm iu the bowels, producing no pain, may cause paralysis. If the worm is expelled the par.il.ysis may disappear iu an instant. A worm may produce, as I have seen in two cases, a complete hemi- plegia, or paralysis of the whole of one side of the body, aud as soon as the worms were expelled the patients were well. Therefore what mav seem a trifling cause of irritation of a nerve in any part of the system may produce a paralysis. In experiments on animals we find this better illustrated. The posterior columns of the spinal cord are perfectly well known now. not to serve eithT for voluntary motion or for the transmis- sion of sensitive impressions to the sensoria. But if wo lay hare the spinal cord and merely prick the posterior Irilune Extras— Lecture anil Letter Series. column, paralysis may be produced, whK-h may d:-ip- I»ear suddenly aft'T a time. Au experiment I imi'le in 1S34 shows :iNo that the ii ri- tati»ii oi certain ii'-: •. e- i an pro I IK-I- ;oim- "I paralysis whi'-h .a-.- \i-ry .-insular, and which were oh---i vcd only \\hi-nthesiiinaleord or the ha-e of t lie brain had liei-li Injiireil ill a certain way. In tlio-e e\pi i inn nt- tlie brain, tlie sp'ual c-.i d. anil tlr- n.r\ .-- 1:1.111;,- to t he |..v. er limb- \\.-i-e not at all interfered \villi. T.ie nerve- in the d' r-:il re-inn that \Vele not illVlili-d had nothing to do in a din >t way wnh the lower limbs. Yet \\licnthis di\Mnii\\a- niacli- tin-re \\a-a ]>.ira! \ -i - of voluntary Iliolioli 111 tlie lo\\er lllllh-, a p.ll .I'V vl- ut blood Vi in the hnili tin tin- tame r-..:.-. and a p.ir.U -i> of sensi- Jiilitv in tli- HI.I.' on tin- ••;j.,iMti- .-nti-. This st ranee Combin.;! .in n| i ll'.-ets occurred Ir.'in a mere irritati'ii ct in-; \ . - \viin-h li:ul no tli me to do in a diivet way either V llli moll ••. or -i- II- it lull, or the .-t.ite ..f lilooil VCSSClS 111 t iow. i- liinio. Theref ore it is aulte clear that in these IM-. - .1,1 irritation M.irtinir from a nerve has -on<- to dis- tant i i -.,-»• tlie tri-ay iiialter a:id -topped ilieir activity. Uini-i we li ivc .-nun limit,' >i!i,ii.ir here a.irain to what tak. - pi K-I- \\heiitin- In-. irf- action is stopped by ipal- v.ini/.hL- I lie nei \ e- that -o to it. TliK l\< L'l.ll nl -1 III MU siri'ATED IN A Si'KCIFIC 1-AKl nl 'I 111. T.KAIN. osls, the f-n-ts are very striking. Aniaur .-i' i- a 1. • -- oi -Uiit. I tind that in uiau au irri- tation i.: oue -i'lc "f the hrain can produce aniaiuo-is in t in- e\ e on tin- -am -i 1<- ; ic can produce aiuanrosis in the- .•• ..pp..-!:.- Mile ; it can pro luce aiiiauro-i- In l>- . And it can do -.inn-thing more curion-; It e 1:1 l>: ..'nice a I — "i 1 10 -. . r in one-half of one eye, and th.ii inn be tlie eye ol the -ame side or the eye of tiie i; ami it in i.v ne al-o in two eyes. Here are six Ian. i. in in- produced from ;in injury in a iinb :• i .: r n "t tin- I. rain. Wo cuiuiot, then-fore, ad- mit Hi it .n injary has been in a part of the braiu serv- ing for tbo functions of .-i-hi, because that 'would load to .in ab.-nn! .n ; in-e.iu-i- wo flnd that almost any pa> t oi tli.- l«r.iia i-an pro Inc.- that power, and that would li. to '.<> iic a n. i \ e center of si^'ht in every part of the br.iin. In e \perinient-i on the mrilulla oblimt/dta, we llnd .il-.i fa. I.- u hich e.innot In; explained by an lli- Jnry dm. Qerve that \\e are irritating. 1 find that almii.-r al.vav>an injury TO the spinal cor.1 or nie- iliiHu i.lil'iiii/'itu may jirodnee aiiuunisis iu the eye on HM - ; .in in.jnn a Inrle hi^ln-r up In tin- tn.'diillu iili'nn'int'i may produce amauro-is trenerally on the p. . An I it' \\c^i)a little more forward in a put ii l'-il ill'- //"//s rurnlii, then the amanroM- i- lnvaria!i, >- in Hi.- eye on tin- oppo-itu side. All tin--, t.i th.it an injury to the brain as wHi ID Injurj t" i h'- tn-rvo anywhere in our systrm, can produce 1-i'ln r i> u M!\ -i-, or aiuiMtheain, or loss ot >lwhi, |.\ a ne clianiMii quite -imilar to that by which nerve C-ellsar. : in the heart and t hereby the hea i I 's acil..n .-t..pp--d. I pa-- now to Boiuo facts relating to the i inn- ']•!' -t'.ii:. It I- pcil.-clly well kilo WI1 that Some- tin n> i iir. -I. i in- have tin- h i p| n ness ill tllO Colir-C of an or IT in Ic di -. a -c nt I In- 111 .mi to llnd t hat they have en red then j..it ie n t of pa rait -is. 1 1 i- a ran- t hill-.', but still docs dci-iir .-' mi' -I ini •-. In -nine of Ihc-i- ca -es the cure Iia8 I. ecu pi-Miluei-ii i r,- - 1 1: i pic motion ; or caused by a remedy ^ -•!! al tin- lime, which L-I\ di to certain other patients \\milil not all'.-et (iii 111. In tin .-trychnia la used v. ilh iiii.ie i II. ct. I will sav that if hone o|iathy has liny found itioii at any time — i limixh I most certainly |ie!i.\c it »ia- not— :l cert.nnly has no Value ill these ca.-c-. bii. 1 1 linia must bu givun lu x'lvut 'lo-cs to all'cct a paralysis. It must be triven in doses that will produce stilfness in the limbs, and it is at the expense of some fright in tin- I'.uuily— '•> it no moiv: a fright without risk — that a cure is obtained iu these eases. That state of stillness mu>; !>•• pi-rsi-to I in lor a iriven tiiui-. In this way N on cjn na de i s'-uid that the view which 1 have uot time to develop has .-nllh'ient yroun.ls. 1 can uii'h -r-laiid that wuen paralysis has beer, pro- duced there has been an inll.u-aco starting from the place wiier,- tin- di-ca-c i- ill the brain and acting ou cell- of -rav m.itti-r in i!n- spinal cord ilsjlt'. V.'e well know that stryc.mia will increase thL' pusver of cells in the spinal cord. Ta -rci.ir.- it is easy to uiidcrstan.1 that a do-e of .-trycanine may inciea-o tilO power of those- i -di- which had lo-t their l"..ivi- (uyiuu to the peculiar iniltience of nerve force, coining i'r.uu the brain. Now t ic problem lor in" ln-al m -:i :-. I tnink. clearly stated. What is to in l,»oi;ed for is not only what I have tried ni\ -.-if to do and many ol' my me, Deal friends have tried to do, nann-ly, to cure tie- or.'.uiic disease that exi-ti d in the br. mi, bin it is also to try to br -ale the communi- cation between that part and the cells of gray niatii-r affected, or to try to f^ve to these cells a new activity. Of other remedies having a p >wcr iu that respect eiiual to ,-t r.\ clinia, I know but very few. There are a good many other facts relating to the loss ofpowerot ih'- y.iriou-i s'-n-es which I had intended to mention, bur I .shall only state tint what relates to deafness and loss of taste or of the power oi olf iction is pretty much the same as what relates to the other parts Ihave mentioned. lean only say that all tha functi .:is of the brain can be lost for some lime throuicti a trilling influence, just as through a considerable influence- they may be irremediably lost. If we can Rive new life to cells which are at a distance from the place of dise.ue, we may obtain a cure or an amelioration. Tnere is a very singular affection which has been called aphasia. This is a loss of the faculty of expressin- ideas by speech. This aphasia may occur by attacks, just as epilepsy may occur by attacks; and it in i.y occur from irritation, )ust as epilepsy does. T.iat anhasi i may dis- appear very suddenly. In fact, there ar • cases ou record iu which the mere cure of ucuial.^ia has cured apha-ia. There are cases ou record in which the expel- ling of worms from the bowels has made the patient recover the faculty of speech imm 'diately. Many re- markable instances I am obliged to pass without m-;u- ti..ning. I saw once in London a hysterical pirl who had lost completely th- power of speech and con-en,as- in-.ss almost all the time, I may say, for ten days out of twelve. Sue was not asleep; her eyes were open. At times she seemed to sleep. Sao had also a eonsjd -rai^i- diininiition ot the power of tuo heart and the power of breathmtr. She hud, iu fact, a ^rcat in my ot the phe- iioun-na of arrest which wo U id to com;- I liron^rh an irritation of certain parts of iho spinal cor. I, and t hat irritation was increased wh -never a pre.--ar • was made, on the spine in the neck. Treaiin\' the .--pine was apparently the mode of cure. Tae dis".is-- was, ho\v- ever, cured one d,.\ .-ml b-nly. A shrill Iv ditl.-r.-nt irri- tation had be. -n ma. ie, an I she MI Idcnly recover.-'! and could not understand ilia' she had been so ill. This is what \vt call lethargy. Tin- eondu i.ui is cert im'y u t\pi- of tin- state oi lack of activity of cells, through the inllamce of irritation acting upon them and pro- ducing a ees-al ion. CAfsi.s n;vr ri;. i i.i-.n:i>i-:u OF THE NEHVODS ^^ -II.M. My I'rieii'l, 1'rot. r.ir;..irl oi I'.iris, has made, experi- ments which arc very interesting. lie sho vs that a Indirect Nerve Force— Brown- Scqitard. 23 thetics, other, chloroform, &e., act, not by altoi ins chem- ically or otherwise the properties of the brain, hut by an irritation in certain parts. Tin- irritation is propa- ftated to others and stops the activity there. In hi* < x- periinents chloroform did not ivarh any part of the spinal eortl ; but tno sphiiil cord had, however, lost a great deal of its power. So tnat it was Hear in HICM- experiments that a na-sthotics acted just as galvanizaiion prted on the par vuyuiit when it. stops the heart. Tho irritation alTi-eis certain parts of tho luso of tlio brain and tlius is extended io the cells all through the cerebro- spinal system, producing a cessation ol1 activity. Tucre is a power lu us that seeuus to direct our niovomeuts. That power may be stopped by tho irritation of certain parts. There are three parts which, so Jar as I know. are able to stop that power. It is a thing worth trying. If you try lt> stand on one foot with your eyes closed you will find that very soon you will totter. A state is pro- duced very much like that of drunkenness. I '.vouht not say that it will be so with all of yon. But I saw many white heads Here, and I had these in ujy mind. It is very natural when a person has turned fifty that his power of directing movement is diminished, his power of balancing i's diminished. When the eyes are closed it is very difficult to stand on one foot. That power is nlmost destroyed aud sometimes completely so by an injury to certain parts. It is known that an injury to the cerebellum hi animals destroys that power. In men it is very rarely so. Injuries in men are quite diff -rent, usually. I found that if a mere prietc of the finest needle were made ou the part of the spinal cord in birds where che gray matter in the center of the cord comes to the surface, that the prick immediately pro- duced a disorder of movement. Animals affected this way go about as if they were intoxicated. Another part may be the cause of this, aud this is very frequent, unfortunately, in this country. When the posterior columns of the spinal cord are diseased to a great ex- tent, this is also what we cull locomotorataxv. In all these cases, as my experiments oa birds, aud the experi- ments of others on tue cerebellum have shown in all tnose cases, tliere is an influence or irritation starting from the cerebellum or posterior columns or the cord which goes toward those ceils aud stops their activity Of course we do not know the location of those parts that serve to balance our movements. The phenomena jf arrest have been very well studied. It is due to a Russian physician, SeUseheuom, who studied the reflex power of the spinal cord to react and produce a movement after cessation nas come to it, that we know that this power is destroyed or dimin- ished through an influence coming from the. brain. It is not rare in cases of paralysis in man that tills reflex powei is completely lost. In that case an influence is exerted by an irritation starting from the brain, ou Uie cells of gray matter in the spinal cord, destroying their reflex action. This reflex power exists in a very great degree in the spiual cord aud medulla oblonyitla in Guinea pigs, on which I have readily produced an at- tack of epilepsy by a simple process, consisting in ap- pealing to tile excessive excitability in these animals when the neck is touched. Sometimes a breath of air on this part is enough to produce a tit. This refl yx action of the spinal cord, however, may disappear, and epilepsy bo cured by cutting a portion of the skin of tin; neck. A cut of half an inch has been sufficient in a number of cases. A physiologist by the name of Goitz adds to this the assertion that tlin power thf sympathetic nerve possesses to stop the heart's action, wbeu it is irritated, may ho CONVCLSIONS. AND EXTRAORDINARY MEANS OF CHECK- ING THKM. I pass now to a completely different kind of phe «omena of arrest. That is, the stoppage of convulsions of vari- ous kinds. The first I will speak of is a kind of convul- sions which we call eclampsia. Very frequently in this case, on irritation of the slun in children, may produce a cessation of the tit. Dipping a child in very hot water, or throwing very cold water ou it, m i.v stop convulsions. In other cases the introduction of acupuncture needles, — which the Japanese have employed lor centuries, and which we unfortunately do not employ enough — may have an immense power on our nerves. By what mechanism they act is unknown. It is certainly not through chemical process, since, they are of platinum, and have no chemical action. An irritation of the fauces or top of the palate by uitrato of silver may stop convul- sions. Ducros, a court physici.au for whom the Princess Adc- lida had a great fancy, was an ingenious man it ho was uot altogather honest. He succeeded in tho presence of the physicians in sloping tits or convulsions in children or men, merely by pressing the skin in the ueigborhood of tne ear. A pressure in the neigborhood of the nostrils may do this. If we are seized with cramps, and can put one loot flat on a very cold floor, the cramps may disap- pear at once. Or a drawing of tho muscled so affected may acton the nerve-cells or spinal cord and stop it. Hysteria is one of the most singular afiections we are subject to. I say we, because even men are so attacsed sometimes. A remarkable aud successful treatment of this, which I witnessed in Paris, is so peculiar and strange, that if it were not before such a trustl'-ui au- dience, hold aud daring as I am, when I am sure of the truth, I should not dare to mention tho fact. The daughter of a friend of iniaa was attacked with a tit of hysteria every morning. I succeeded for a time in break- ing up the tit by the use of violent means fur a half an hour before the paroxysm was due. But after a time the means I used completely failed. My friend then went to see a gymnast in Paris, named Trial, who was far more daring than I am, and was in the habit of treating hysteria in a very bold and unique way. Ho used to take his patients, as he did this lady, up a ladder, aftefr having bandaged their eyes so that they could see nothing. After they had ascended to the. height of about 20 feet, ho made them walk very carefully on a plank that was about seven or eight inches iu width. He, of course, was a gymnast, and accustomed to walk there. so that he could easily lead the person forward. When the young lady had reached the middle of the plank, which was pretty long — tor it was a large gymnasium — no said to bis patient, " Now, you are perfectly safe, and there is no possibility of your fit coining on again." He had previou.-ly assured her that this means was infallible ; had referred to hundred of previous cases, and exagger- ated his success in order to act on the mind of the patient. "Now," said he, "after I fiave left you, you will not try to lift up the piece of co ton-wool that is txed ou yo ir eyes until one minute has elapsed." He started away and left the patient there in great danger, as yon may imagine, of tailing. After a miuu:e had passed tho patient removed the bandage and opened her eyes. Fortunately for Mr. Triat no accident has ever occurred there. How many patients be cured that way, I don't know ; but I know the daughter of uiy friend was certainly cured. The next day there was no need of taking her up there. She bad had enough of it. ILanghter.J There are many other menus that may cure an attack of hybteria. The great point to be remembered is, that Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. faith in the patient In those cases Is the princlp il med . P!aei:: II- in vcrv lint water, as Dr. Or;-- ha- . fo-.nni, will slop tUo tit. Other iii-Mii-. - the application o . >•( til'' lieelC when tin- pa- tient <;oi':> n»t e*" t it, will iiN'i Micee,-:!. A liiMturo ti.-il very I.,'!.'.. arO i: >l the limb in:i\ .-tip[i tin- attack. All the iiiciii:.s of counter-irritation in iv In- trie, I l!ut in tie iere itia not t I lie mind that tin- atta' k 1.1 be-iiu, it must in: through a direct iuflu- caee CM rteii if tne transmlssloa of nerve ;.mi- tn ti.e Dells tint v.er • :iei;ve, tins caiiMiig :m arrest. C.nalep.sv iu:iv iif -topped in tin- s in,. • w.iy. Dr. King f "ind tii;ir by (1 rawing u:i th • !i:r/< r u: OU6 ol ln> \> Mi )Ut8 In- ai v, .1 \ s succeeded in st"pp:n !" ' " -• I ll:1Vl' Sl'cu ouo • •I" the kind n ..• i]J. M.uiy other iiiciius in:iy be sue cuipl >y- .1 n- • . as Well as hysteria. XKUVE DERANGEMENTS — POTJBTH LEC- TURE. trii.r.r-v, IN-\MIY, I'AUALYSIS, AND HYSTERICAL. ,\i i i ; II ING TIIE HEAD OPEN NOT NE- - UlY IN Ok* lillAIN DISEASE— EXPKKI- :.ir.M> ON i-i.i \rir.vn:i> MEN— MOVEMENTS OF •Hill l!i>l-Y Ilol RS .U 1KU 1>EATI1 — A CASK Ol'" I . 8 rA8Y. BOSTON. '•'. .—Those wbo braved a night's vi 'lent st"i in t<> hear l>r. Hrown-Se'qtiard were dis- ai>!'i>int' d if tli-y • 1 a dry season at {!n- Luwi-11 I:i>,titii:i-. Tlie lecture was as instructive una our system mav result i' ri i in i • i^o or iirrest of the activity of •r. I shall uow concludo this jiirtipf in.\ ' >". i -i t. T tuiitis or lock-jaw is one of the n i n \ nl -iv i- ; II r s v. i.i-ii can be slopped immediately by certs i-.uiiiu^ from certain parts of the 8\.-tin:. Tin- Kind <>!' t'-iiinus that stiychuine will a lie htopp.-d at ouce, as Rosen- thai lias h\ . - h ivo usi-ertaiued thiit a current of tralv.m- i-in ' MI :i peculiar manner will, iu many iu- . tup t !'• tri ini.s i xriioj by strychnine; not nl- .iii.'iln- iiuiinal, but Icnirihcuiiiff the life and L-'vnura of recovery. Tetanus, which comes from \>miinl- or n iun.-s to ncrvc.s, nriy also he 8topped. < 'him oiurin, i . i ulong ilio spinn or takeu iu- terna 1 . n b tb i-a.scj nniy i»roduce an irritation or 11 I a'-' "'i tlio cells of pray matter in the i-pnial i-m-d. SD that the meehaulain of the urresi ol con viil-iniir in t,-t:iniis in Just the- same us tin- im -i-ii.-ini- :n of tli'¥ arrest of tlio heart int! ' the L- i1 v.ui:z it. mi of tlio pai' Tugum in the . I have iilic.rh mi-ill ion. -il that opllepsv can be, Miippeit hy a inn |I.I:M-III <•' tiiai Kind. And I may add that v.lirn an nit.H'!, ol rjii ep.-y is to be^in, when then- lire certain M- mplitins iinlu alini,' it, a urcat liiiiny in -an -, • I e in I. i; .| tu prevent it. An irritation ol •nyjiartof the t-'.-m m.i> In -ulli -ii-nt to stop an K. .ui'l tin- in .1 I'lnii llseir in i\ in- oi ,i great many • Mini-. Ye In facn Individual case H U tmpofl- •-ill BtO a i-ni'i-i lii.it one ini-lli 'd tli.it h.ih Mii-'-i-i-led :i oilier parii'iit.i will Biicc'-i -d with the . . to ii(.-;il \\lth. TI.IT. TIir.dHV OF LIGATURE IN EPILEPSY. Thete ine c:!~e.s iii which there is what is called an aura starting froni a limb. From tha time of Qaica to out own, it has becu shown a treat many tisies that a ligature bound around the limb iu which this influence tak'-., plan-, will stop the fit. The supposed philosophy a was that something started from the limb that went in tin- brain, and that the liiraturo bcin.i: ap- I prevented that something from imssmt:. I have- siio\\n that the proi-ess hy which the attack is prevented i- jn>r the opposite of that. Iiistead of preventing -'iim- thin^ from [1:1 siii^', the Heat urp irritates the ncrvea in I ho tkiu and Bi'iul.s a current toward tlio braiu chaDglng the state of the cells tbere aud preventir.?; an att.iek. This has li-^en sliowu very clearly indeed in a i inanv in.-taiiees Ci it I have seen, especially since 18C i, '.vlien I Wiis connected with the Ilospitiil for Sp.lep- sy, 01 Lunlon. At that h.ispital I had a vtrv Intelli- Brenl nuv-e, to wliiiin I had t,'iveii the proper directions. Tiiere were three or four patients there, who had tnis partienliir kind of sy inpt'.iin. In these cases, when the nurse was not far from the patient, or \vh"ii ehn had : line to In- called to them, sha invariably prevented the iiliaek. In on.>, of tuoso cases, that oC a clergyman's daughter, there vas paralysis oa one side or the body and coiivulMim.s, chielly in thu i»tiralyzed limiis, extend- iag to the feet; always beginning hy the contraction, of the foot on that si le. As soon as the nurse heard that :iii attack was pending, she rushed to her patient, uiid immediately pinched her first; on the foot or leg of the side which was to be convulsed, and afterward on the healthy side. In every case the patioiic was saved. Still, it is not a rule that the flt will bo stopped ttheu there is such an aura. Sometimes the ligature and the piiieh will fail, and other means must be used. F,»r instance, iu patieuts having some trouble internally, the relief is found iu giving at oie-e something which will irritate the nerves of the stomach very powerfully : either brandy, or jj-in, or ruin, or ammonia, or some sim- ilar medicine. And if the . stomach be empty the chance of preventing an attack is greater. An immense num- ber of facts show that it is a'mo\~ mean ; iif irrit.it ion of certain nerves in the periphery of the liodv. Unfortunately, however, the menus that I now mention, though they hi^re been acci- •I;-:, tally emplo\ e I with great success, are too hazardous tube generally employed. There aro many cases ol epilepsy that have bei'n cured hv a mere accidental burning, by a fracture of the limb or by the wounding of a limb or part of the trunk. Iu fact, an irritatit.A in any part of tue system may sometimes be the means ot curing. Unloi innately, wo do not 1 now wln-n wo deal with epileptic p. uieiils what ehan.-i' there will be iu irri- tating one part rat her than anot her, :md wo cannot tor- men t our i r pat n-:it to death by trying the whole sur- face of the iiody to seo what will best serve to irritate the nervous centers. CUUIXO INSANITY BY IRUITATINO Till' NF.KVE3. Another kind of stoppage or arrest ot the activity ol oplls consists in the arrest of the ''HI :i--nviiy of the brain. In treating of epilepsy I have >p->i;e,i partly ol this si i bj >>ci, but w!i-it I h.ive in s.i v no-.v is d i -iti net fron: what I hiive previously Siiul. T.iku a ])atient who i( insane. T.:, r • :u-n m.iu.v eases piihiished iu l.ho medloiil Inuriial-, relating to in.sanit v, snowing I II it a 1 irite nuiu- Uer of patients have boon cured suddenly by means ol Nerve derangements — Brown-Sequa/rd, irritation of the slnn, tliat was cither accidental or em- ploypd by a physician. Tlioro aro other means raoro curious and equally effective, us iu the case I am about to mention. A patient in a lunatic asylum mot another one, who struck his hea.l ami broke the craniuin on tho right side. Tho braia ooze-d out ; a good deal of it was lost, and tho patient, •was cured of his insanity acd epilepsy. (Laughter.] This is rather a dangerous means of treat- ment, however, ami of course I speak of it only to show that an irritation brought to the brain may oitou cure. It is iu that way that bold surgeons— as many there were in this country in the period from 1825 to 1859— who Lave brought their instruments to tho cranium and made an opening there, iu cases of epilepsy, iu search of n disease at that place thai, did uot exist, have very fre- quently cured their patients. But not because they have taken away the disease that they supposed existed there, but because they have produced au irritation which has done it. But I may add that it Is not neces- sary to open tho cranium, though it haa been done, to iny own knowledge, more than fifiy times in this coun- try. All that is called for is an irritation of the skin of the cranium and of the tltu-ous baud that covers the bone between the skin and brain. Irritation there has a very good chance of curing epilepsy iu inauy very obstinate cases. There are many cases on record showing that an inflammation iu almost any of the organs of the body is sufficient to cheek insanity. Iu the same way other af- fcctious of the orain, such as auiaurosis or paralysis, may be cured suddenly sometimes without any cause that we can fiud, but with good ground certainly to be- lieve that au irritation has acted which has produced a change in the cells of the brain and diminished their morbid activity. For thcra aro clear cases in which those affections have been cured by such irritation. Those alterations of cells that were producing an arrest of the power of sight or paralysis, have been sub- mitted to an irritation of parts of the skin or of some viscus, and this irritation going to the morbid part and producing a change in the activity of those cells, has cured the dis- ease. So that a double mechanism of arrest may take place iu all these cases. There is iu tho brain an irrita- tion starting from the place where there is a disease. That we cau see after death. That irritatiou goes to pans at a distance and acts on cells to stop their activ- ity ; but another irritation starting from some parts of tho hod.v goes to the parts that are diseased and there acts ou the morbidly active cells and stops their activity, so that the effect that resulted from the disease ceased. Bo one phenomenon of arrest produced the cessation of another. CAUSES AND CDRES OF PABALTSIS. In reference to paralysis a view is held which seems to be iu opposition to what I have said here. Paralysis is considered to result from a cessation of activity of a part of the bralu from disease. Lst, for instance, a dis- ease exist in that part of the braiu that we call the an- terior lobe. TUat part is considered as being in great measure the seat of the will. That part is destroyed by disease, and we find a paralysis; and the view is, as I have said, that the paralysis results from a cessation of the activity of that part. If wo admit this view, then there is no need of accepting what I have taught here : that an irritation starts from a place that is diseased and goes elsewhere to produce an arrest of the ac- tivity of cells. But that view is entirely iu opposition to facts. We see every day that a disease which Is exceedingly limited iu extent iu tho brain can produce tho most complete paralysis, vliilo, on the other hand, we see that disease which has destroyed an Immense part of the br.iiu may uot produce a paralysis at all. It is impossible to conclude that paralysis pro- ceeds in a direct way from tho destruction of tissue that we see alter death. There must be an intermediate agency between tho seat of the disease and tho paralysis. And that intcrmiMliatu ag«'.in-,y is what I have tried to make you understand in saying that the irritation starts from the place where the disease is, and goes to other parts of tho brain, and also to the spinal cord, to stop the activity of those parts. It will be evi- dent to persons hero who know a little about anatomy, that it is impossible to admit the old view about paralysis. In the base of tho brain there is an organ which ia called the pans varolii. This is the ouly part by which communications take place between the braiu and the spinal cord and the rest of the body for voluntary movements. There is also another part in front which is called the erura cercbri— legs of the brain. That part is composed of two halves, quite distinct ouo from another. Let us suppose that there is a disease either in one part of iliepons varolii or of the crura cercbri, and that disease has destroyed a small part of one of these. What shall we say if the view that most all physiologists have is correct 7 Why, that the destruction of one part of the crura cerebri or pans varolii necessarily will produce a paralysis In some muscles of one-half of the body. But that is not what we see. In cases of disease there, the paralysis may exist in the same side of the body where the disease ia or ou the opposite side. It may be in one arm ouly or in one leg only. The facts are altogether in opposition to tho admitted view. You may see also cases ia which the pons varolii is destroyed without any paralysis at all. We should say also, according to the common view, that a disease that has destroyed only a few of the fibers would produce ouly a paralysis of some of the muscles. There are no such cases on record. Ic is essential to take another view of this matter. I have proposed this explanation: that paralysis appears only from au irritation which starts from the place where the disease is, and acts upon parts nt a distance so as to modify them. All of you know that a tickling of the soles of the feet produces different effects in differ- ent people. So we cau easily nuclei-stand that an irrita- tion in the brain which will produce a complete or a partial paralysis iu cue person will produce no paralysis in another, according to the excitability of different people. Take the facial nerve now. That nerve in almost all persons who have a ohrouio disease of the brain is partially paralyzed, perhaps only a few fibers of it. Well, as the disease which produced this paralysis is limited ia every instance, and as the disease may occupy every part of the brain, if we con- clude that paralysis comes because the nervous center of the facial nerve is destroyed, we would have to place that center in every part of the brain; in one individual iu one part; iu another individual iu another part, and so on. And as we fiud cases iu which a destruction of a considerable part of tho braiu does not result in that paralysis, we wouVd have to conclude that some indi- viduals no not receive that nerve in their brain. This is a reductio ad absurdum. We have therefore to throw overboard that theory. HALF THE BRAIN EQUAL TO THE WHOLE. There is one point about which I should like to deliver a whole lecture. I can only say now a few words iu regard to it. It is a most important topic. A study of the facts relating to the brain 28 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. has led me to conclude that each half of the- brain— paradoxical as ir may seem— is a whole brain. That i-, th it one-halt of the bruin Js siillleient for all tin- f unc- - ot tin- t\vn halves <«f th>- brain, if tiiat n the > I must mention a conclusion, although it n> i out- (-1 :,• ,,r n,, -uriject. It is tliac we are extremely neftlect- fill In (-dii'Mting only iino part of the 1m, 1\ . NVe educate OUT ru'i.: arm ami make use of the lixhl Mdr of tin- I M i !y as iniii-!i a> j.os-ible, and leave the Li inactive, except In w.iiku.g. Wo do i:»t per- furm wbat is really needed if we nav.- two brains. Then- • question tint it i- iiiir h. ii.it of making uso of only tide Of the 1. ."il.V, that consigns to one-half Of the lirain— th«- ri-ht side— the fat-nit v <>r expressing Ideas by np.-i di. If we tli •%•• 1. >]i''tl I'oth sides of our body cqua U , i;..t only -would then- be the benefit that \vo could write cr work with • n.mdas well as with the right, imt we should have two brains instead of one, and would imt in- iii prut- :<>f the power of apeeoli through di> of one .-i.ii- of tin- bi .u:i. I pass t.o\\ ID quite another subject. You know that In tl.<- second lecture I said that I would examine two MI H ot facts, oue showing tho power of arrest of activity that nerve force possesses, ami the other having Just the opposite object, tbat la, to produce an activity instead of an urn-sir. I now come, therefore, to tho study of tin- pt-Milnctiim of tho various kind- ot activity tliat tip- iii-ivt- foi-i-c n ."esses. The first question I have to examine is that which relates to theinil jeneo of nerve force in producing muscular contraction! It is essenti.il lir-t io sav a few \vordsou the power of muscular con- traction und to see if th.it power is distinct and independent of iiervo force. There have been a p. ot I many different views about this ; but as I have little time I shall only say that the view is almost universal now that tho nervous system is not esseutial to the existence of muscular contraction or ir- ritability; that contraction can take place without any interiercnce iif t lie nervous system. My friend, Prof. Bernard of Paris made gome luircuious experiments on j'-ct. Ho found that the poison woorari affects tho motor nerves iu muscles, so that tho conductors wliieh unite the brain with tho muscles be- >: paralyzed, while tho muscles remain active. Hi; drew the conclusion that muscles ri in. i in connected with the brain us regards their activ- liy. But there is au objection to this which I put for- ward I -n;.' :i.o. It is not clear at all thac in that case the miiM-ular power in the nV>er is lost. Tue.ro Is a state of tiii HIT-, anatomically and physiologically, insidn of t h i- .-;!i '.it i: ut i he muscular libers, wnicli renders it \ ery doubtful that the wooruri acts upon those parts, ami it limy be i hat I ho nerve power remains inside of tho Mien' i. or the muscular libers. The same objection can be made i-p tin- facts relating to the section ot nerves. A MAS : :i:oNGEH WHION I>KAD THAN ALIVE. It is \\e.l-lino\vu that If a nerve has been Ulvided, aid r four d..\s it lotji-8 it' power. Tins muscles, how- • -. • i , i • main |H-I f. i-i l.v uetivc, and we can produce eon- tiiiction in them. Unfurl umitcly, here, also, there Is an :; i i.t oi Dem , which Is inside ot tho nerve ilh, ami it i> not Known whether It has lost its power Hi l:ot. la 111'- ca^i- i.l I '., o deeiipltalod men, I in.ule a n i\|Hilnient of iiilllnu' oil' the uruirt. I found, after i -i n :ud a liali hum , in 0110 ease and fourteon in the other e.i>-, that all sik'iis of lite In the hlnb- had 1 1 1 -a 1 1| » -a I etl. Ut) to that time, cither t i ivaiii-m or a Khnck produced by a blow Vvitli mv arm or a i)ii])i'r-cntter, Hie ijiunciea to i .,-oi,.| tu t he iri ll.itlou. I :i-d t he blond of a man into one of thn*o arms, and th.- blond of a iloiT into another. In both cases local lifo was re.-toreil in tin s^ arms. The mii-ieles became irrita- ble ai_ra;n, and the Mrenirni of contraction was extremely ]io\v. mil. Indeetl. in tin- iiriii in which the blood of tte man had h. en injected, the power was immense. It was greater eei tainiy thiin diirinir life. There was therefore a ret urn uf miiM'iil.ir 11 ritalnlity I'.fter it had disappeared* and nervous c.vitatu'.iiy had not come. Tho nerves remained quite iiead. Tie re fore it seemed quite clear that the muscular irritability depended upon nutrition hv blood and the oxygen in it. The blood injected wad richly charged wall oxvj;-.>:i and ;hat was the reason why the muscular irritation became so creat. There •was more oxygen tiian usui.1. As the nerves had not rejaiiied any PO\VI r ar all.it was not through anv influ- ence of tho nerves on the muscles thac the part had re-acquired life. There al>o we tlml, however, that same objection, that we do not know whether tho ele- ments ot tiie nervous tissue which aro inside of tho Mii'.i'h of muscles had lo.^t their power or not. But there aro other lact-< more decisive. Professor Simpson of Edinburgh examined the .owerof contrac- tion in the umbilical mrd— the cord which unites tho in tus to its mother. In that cord the contraction by .ualvanism was made with great intensity. Some phys- iologists have thought that ther.-are no nervous centers there. If thero are, any, they are very small. In tho iris of au eye I have found a singular fact. Long ago I had discovered thac light can .affect the iris of tho eye, even when it has been removed from the body. Tho eye of tho eel had been removed from the body^for sixteen days and kept at a temperature of about 26° to 40° Fah. But I found that although the eye was in almost com- plete putrefaction, the light still acted as au irritant of muscular fibers. There it was impossible to admit that thero was nervous act ion. The muscular libers them- selves were considerably altered, Still i hey acted. But there is a fact which is more decisive to show that muscular irritability is independent of tho nervo'ir sys- tem forits existence. It is that if wo strike a muscla that is dying awav, wo pro luce i ri l_c.: at the place we sirike. All tho libers iu tiie muscle contract at that place. And as it is IMP.. --i .:.- to admit that iu those cases there has been a nervous action in every element- ary fiber, bec;iu.-M- tin- pa -. ; ., 1 snoice of, which aro inside of the sheath, are generally in the mi.ldlo of tho length of the liber, and any part of tho muscle may react in that way, it is, then-lore, imp. .-.-ibh- to admit that there is any nervous action hi Umuo ens -s. Therefore, they show th.it muscles are independent of nerves for their action. I pass now to a class of movements which wo call rhythmical. Ic is well known that the heart performs them. Ji has been t|iie..t i.uied \\ln-iner tlie^e move- ments depended on the nervous system. There U no question indeed that in a normal stati — I do not say in every Mate— tho rhythmical mov -meiits of the he-iri d - peml upon cells of gray mailer \\lin-li ere inside of the lnai t it.scif. The diaphragm, the m.i.-,t important of tho muscles of ii-spira: ion. p •<• v - IBS, l:Ue i h.- heart, the power n I emit: acting rh> Ilinileally qalie independent of tho brain, the .-pinal cor.:, and t In- inciliiHt utilmiijittii. In almost in I experiments w- Und that when we destroy tho brain or tin Nerve Derangements — Brown-S6guard. plot ply from the spinal cord by tho dissection of tlio diaphragmatic nerves, and we may SPO tno diaphragm continuing to art perfectly in a rhythmical way. We sec It even when \\e have rendered the warm blooded animal on which wo operate almost cold-blooded by diminidhhig tho tomperaiuro constantly. The dia- piiragm, therefore, possesses tho power in itself of rliylliuiK'al mo vein on Is. MfSCl l.AU MOVEMENTS AFTER DEATH. What is ilio duration ot those rhythmical movements when the parts are SP para tod from the body? It has been found that 48 hours after tlie heart has been sep- arated from the ehesc of a dog it continued to beat. There is recorded the case of a man at Rouen in whom the heart was found to beat for 06 hoars after tho dcatli of the body by decapitation. There is therefore a po&- Bioilit.v of long persistence of life in those organs. And I daresay that the great cause why we see those organs stop at deuthso quickly, is that the phenomena of arrest of their activity have taken place at the time of death. There are many other parts that possess rhythmical movements; the great vessels near the heart; the arteries of the heart in certain animals, as Prof. Shift" has discovered; the vessels of the wings of the bat, as Wliarton Jones has discovered, and the excretory canals of either the liver, or the pancreas, or kidneys in some annuals. Then also certain parts of the digestive apparatus of birds, sep-irated from the bodv, may coutiuue to act rhythmically. Indeed, I have found that every muscle iu our system, as well as in animals, can in certain circumstances, have perfect rhythmical move- ments; so that these regular movements do not dep?nd on a peculiar organization belonging either to the heart or to the dwphvagm. It is a property which every contractile tissue possesses, anil which shows itself only in certain circumstances different from the ordinary circumstances ol life. The uixt point I shall mention is that movements voluntary in appearar.ee can exist without nerve force. In that respect a very singular fact has come to my knowledge iu a positive way. I was called once to see a patient who was indeed no more a patient; he had died beiore I reached him. I was told that he was making certain movements, and his family and friends all thouirht he was alive. I examined him and found that he was certainly dead without any chance of re- turning to life, at least according to our very limited knowledge. I found that he was performing slowly movements that he had been performing with great vigor before I came. He would lift up his two arms at full length above his face, knit the flngfrs together as iu the attitude of prayer, then drop the arms again and separate them. The movements were repeated a good many times with less and less force, until at last they ceased. These singular movements, to persons not knowing what may take place in the humau body after death, must certainly have looked as if the will-power had been directing them. Evidently there was no such thing there. The heart h. ul stopped beating; the respiration had ceased for a longtime. Tho appearance of the eyes a;id of the other parts of the body were those that we observe in death. lucre was no trace of sensibility anywhere; no reaction to the operation of galvanism or burning any- where, as 1 had to make use of these means to satisfy the family. A needle was pushed into the heart, as there was no clanger from this experiment, a certain physiologist having, lor the mere sake of showing what the Japanese had done that way, intro- duced one many times into his heart. The needle introduced showed that tLe heart of my cholera patient did not beat. But what I did not do, tho proof I did not have in this case, Dr. Bennett Dowlerof New-Orleans lias given. From patients who died of yellow fever or cholera— and it is chieilv in those cases that involuntary movements resembling voluntary ones occur after death— Dr. Dowler has amputated limbs. It was a bold undertaking ; but Dr. Dowlcr has done it, and tho limbs amputated continued to move alter having been sep- arated from tho nervous centers; so that if tnere was nerve force actine;, then it was nerve force existing iu trunks or nerves and not tho nerve force that comes from tho will. Those movements, I repeat, resemble voluntary movements. EXTRAORDINARY FEATS CAUSED BY DISEASE. There are movements which of course require more force, but which resemble those movements in not being directed by the will. The fleld of pathology is indeed very rich iu cases in which all sorts of movements re- sembling voluntary movements are made by patients who, however, are not trying to perform those move- ments. There is one case especially of a young lady in Paris who was attacked with ecstacies every Sunday, and who performed a feat tho thousandth part of which not one among you could perform unless you were dis- eased like her. Every Sunday at 10 o'clock the youyg lady ascended a bed, and putting her feet on the top of the ectge or bor ler of the bed, took an attitude of prayer and began to address prayers to the Virgin Mary. She continued in that attitude, fixed like a statue, except that her chest continued to move and her heart to beat,audthe lips were giving utterauce to sound. All the other parts of the body were absolutely motionless. This was a feat that, you could not perform on level ground. Standing rigidly on tip-toe, even without shoes, is an utter impos- sibility, beyond a short time. I ventured to try my own power on the border of that bed, and fell immediately. [Laughter. | I was not ready to try it again, as there was no doubt that the thing was impossible. I had beeu called by the agent of police to see whether there was disease there, or whether it was a false pretense to make money, as the family of the girl was poor, and many came and paid for tho privilege of witnessing her attitude in prayer. It was clear that there was disease. I made an experiment which proved it. There are other movements which are performed without the will. Some of these are very singular. Sometimes it is a movement forward, sometimes it Is a movement backward as fast as possible; then move- ments sideways, or a movement like a horse in a circus, or a simple rotation executed on the same place on the feet. What may surprise nia-ny persons, there are two cases to my knowledge in which these rotary move- ments, instead of being performed as I just performed them, were performed with the head ou the ground. [Laughter.] The feet were against the wall, without which, of course, this action would be impossible. The patient turned with a rapidity that was wonderful. No person with will-power could have done it. The head spun around as if it were a top. In another case, I saw a most beautiful Irish girl who had a blow on the head and who had a rotary movement ou that accouut. She knew well what was the matter with her, and bad come to be able to prevent any bad effect of it. If she wanted to go in a contrary direction she turned herself in a direction almost at right angles to it, and the irregularity of her movement brought her to the right place. [Laughter.! She knew the amount of her rotation, her deviation from a straight line, and cal- culated accordingly. So when she went along the stree 28 Tribune £j.-tras— Lecture and Letter Scries. ehe executed a series of half-circles and in that way suc- ceeded iu t'ointf forward. She was in perfect in-alth oth- erwise. She c.nil.i not !,elp tin-. Tnere Wiis iiu irreMst- ible power pushing her so. Her will force could not OXelvomr It. The must Miigular of tln-e rotary movements are •• III. a the e.ir Will prodUee. All MI) .•! mil of cold v.itcr iu tin- i- ir u ill lu-oduci; .1 vcrv treat change sotne- . I:i a curious book ol a Fr. nehman of AUace — l'i r.. . iman n.ixx [,-icat laugbterj— there are, I dai .--.i\, more than tlm-e or four hundred of those Btranf ol roi.ir.v inoxcmeni> or change of direc- tion liy .-oaiethii)^' actuu-a^ain>t tin- \vill. Thi-.s<- dUea.^-r. ore particularly oommou m xvonn-u, and a great many of tue oaeea are allied to hvsterla ; imt they exist iroui un organic cause In man a .in. -nines also. SUMNER'S -rri-r.U INGS— FIFTH .lh.\ (IK TH U LI-:CTURER— CONSE- QUENCES .1 i::..H ATIXCf PARTICULAR Nl.KVKS— PEOPLE SAYING 1IIIM..S THEY DON'T WANT TO BAY— ENE /.'.«. :• ',i-ii:i> ix SUMXER'S CASE— WHY AM> llo\V II,. I.M'IKI.D THE TORTURE. BOSTON, M i; :i I"-.— Dr. Brown-Sc'quard's fifth lec- tnre un . \cr\n. ;s Force would regularly have been delix i T. d mi March ll. hut a summons to Washing- ton t . attend Mr. S.iuiuer postponed the delivery U.:tll last evening. It \xa.s evident wli'-n the lecturer appeared on tbe )>h:tlorm thut lie \\a-i suffering much agitation. gillie iiioiiH-nt .- 1 -1 •:; • .. -d hefore ho could obtain pos- 'ii 1. 1 in, voice, and wbeu be did speak tlicre was:* jn-iiinl'in.-ni --:.s in the utterance wbich sbowed tiiu deep einoi ion that .swayed him. His allusion to Mr. Sunnier m "P ning his lecture was more aftect- log tbaD a simple report of bis words can indicate. When, after talkiim a half hour, bis subject led him in- ii i- to i.-i din to Mr. Simmer's case, the Doctor broke ilo\x n completely, and was obliged to ask the ai.ili DCti t" , . . him fur the remainder of the evening. J.AI.II - AM) (iLNTi.KMLX: For the second time In lec- tiinii^' lieic I have lo liet your forgiveness for bein^ In.iVi-.l in UK- \\.iv lliat I .un. Since 1£>7 the eminent in. in that hi* li-tt us has boon under my care, and has been also a very dear friend. I sympathized with him Inivri.x, one 11: tie- ;.'.-ii'-roii.s impulses tuat led him to . py SIK Ii a Inch raulc in the. history of this country. Ai.'l Un ic lor,- n is easy lor you to uudcrt-taud that I am noxv !i.u .iy more about his greatness, and tin- hiuw in.it nar i mi i!r,r and you m this city, and I, us In- 'rn-inl, II.IM- n-i-i-ix i-.l. In u few minutes, when a I. itiv linn i- m 1-1. r ..i my i.civis, I shall have to say ^oim-ihiiiK' .iini'it 1,11.1 pi-nil .s-ion.illy ; sometuiiiK which I have IP v.-r ini-iiiiiiin-ii imt to a few friends, as ao long n- in- livi-d 1 l.-n-xv ih;it .1 ni'idi -iy by far uroatcr in him than aiiv inidy i;ii.-w. .. n ild li.ivi- lieon wouudud if I had ri'oUi-n it .ilmiil .1- I -li.ill lii-m^lil. LX.TUAOUUINAKY CON-I 'Jl IM l.S OF IHUITATIXO TUB Al HIKiKV Nl.ltVE. I IinW ri.;nn to (Ii.- Mllji-el of this li-ctlire. You TO- nicinli' I th.it 1:1 tin- l:i-( lerlure 1 k'lve t.i.-t s to show thai id e irre.iii -t dlkorden ni,i.\ oi-eiir rep.-.iti-Mlv flnd nln,, -.t Constant!] un.li-i- tin- inllni-m n nl I lie irru.il i,.n Ol 'lie UurVLili* ayetelU. 1 -.a. ill UuW UluUtlua 4 1'e W Ulol'U of these facts. When wo inject cold water in our ears, we remark that peculiarly disurderlx- movements come at once. In i-eriain animals, if \x e prielc a certain uerve —the aii'litory nerve— we flad thai a niimin-r of striiUK6 pheiioiiii na \vill occur immediately. In the flrst place, x\ hen i he pour creature tries to move, it turns arouud and around. It i.s hardly m its power tn \vallc straight lorxvanl. It turns arouud like a hor>e in a circus. Bat x\ hat is more surprising, wliat au-xv^rs iu the auimal to tin- hit arm, on the opposite shl • in th.t where tha injury \va-t male, isdriwn backward ill what we call tor.-ion ; that i^, the thumii, or what represents it, is turned outside, and this connection r. -m.i: .i.> alxvaj's the same as Inn;,' as the animal exists. Besides, there Is a eiin-ii.leraiile increase m the susceptibility of the skin. l-'io^-s, as you well know, very rarely produce a sound of the voice, but they shriek under this treatment very fre- quently. In superior animal*, and m the mammals particularly, an in.jnrv to thai nerve produces als.i very frequently (,'reat disorderly movements. Tiios • phenomena have l>cen considered as depending on something else than tin- irritation of the nerve; there are semi-circular can.ils in the ear whicii have been con.-idered as having peculiar poxver. But I think th • i| i^-nou is clearly de- eided, tor in iro^.- we can reach the nerve without touch- ing at all these semi-circular canals, and wo produce these phenomenal h.ivo m,-utioa?.d. It is thus certaiu that the nerve of audition has a power in that way to produce very disorderly movements. In man an aOction of tuis nerve is frequently folhrved by the greatest disorder. I have been called more than oncu to see patients who have been con- sidered as afflicted with a serious affection of the brain, but who had nothing but an affection of the an litory nerve, more or loss quickly controlled, and at any rate not threatening a fatal termination as the snrpoeed t not merely in a disorder in movement, but ;I!MI iu some disorder of tin- mind associated with it. There are cases in which, through, some irritation, a patient will utti-r certain words and not always the most desirable words. A most eminent mathematician — one of tho four or flvo most able and ingenious mat hcmaliclans of the a^t — is s>uf- ternii; irom tins atlection. IIo is certainly, as regards jiower of mind, above most men with whom I am ac- quainted. Hut very frequently, under this affection, a \\or.l.andoiteiione \xliu-li no man in society ought to niter, will come to his lips. lie lias >om, i.nies the power of conn-actins: his lips before tho sound comes out, so that he may be saved from the n:on ilieation of beiutc heard. J!ut sometimes it oi-eurs \\itli Mien rapidity that it is uttered fully, and the poor man has the morlill.-.i- tioii ol sax. in-: somethintc that very few eilnrated men would r-ay. [Laughter.] My Irieinl Dr. i;. ('. S.-yuin re- l.ited the eaM- ol a clergyman who Was troubled iu this way, and whose affection toob a peculiar form, immo- dialely after havinj,' be^'iin Die Lord'.- I'raxer, after hav- ing i-aid, " Our Fat her whicii art iu Heaven," he iuvo> riablx i \i-.aiiin 1 1, " l.el Him slay there." [( , real laugh- n-r.J Of cour.se In- had to ^ix'e up preaching. A.lAd] oi i in- in^iierii noiniiix in England bad to lean court for u nimilar reason. 6he gave utterance to thi Sumncfs Sufferings— Dr. £>rown-Sequard. 20 most unpleasant things for people to bear: "You are very stupid:" or, "Ibis is a madness in you." And sho said those things to the Queen or to anybody else, and that quite suddenly, frequently interrupting a conversa- tion for the purpose. In two of thoso eases, that of the mathematician and the lady, both of whom I have seen, I have ascertained that the aff.iotion was dependent on the irritation of ccrtaiu parts of ttio stomach, and bowels. Ouco a paiient, a young lady, was brought to me by her father. My office was up stairs at tuo time. I hap- pened to bo down stairs -when the gentleman caine. I asked him to go up, and told him I would follow in a few minutes. The father turned to me and said, "Please pay attention." I did not know what ho meant, but I said, "Is your daughter so very ill?" "Oh, no, but just listen." I listened, and just then the lady called out, "Hoo! lioo! hoo! boo!" (imitating a peculiar unrc- portablo tone, in which tbe sound was uttered.) His daughter was afflicted with that peculiar trouble which has no name in science, which, consists in the ejacula- tion of the sound of a word. Some of those patients, especially those who are hysterical, bark like dogs ; •which has given rise to the name hysterical barking. There are many other facts which show that even attacks of the greet convulsive affections may be brought on by a mere touch, or mere tickling. When I •was lecturing in St. Bartholomew's Hospital in 1858, a youne patient came to consult me, who was an epilep- tic, and who could not be touched in tbe back part of his head without having an attack. Ho committed suicide soon after. His fellow-students there had the cruelty to press on the back of his head fvery frequently. As he had no chance in life, he thought, except in the study of uudk'ine, and as he could not endure the treatment he received there, he was thrown into despair, and so com- mitted suicide. CONVULSIONS AT A TOUCH— NERVES GOVERNING BLOOD- VESSELS. My very ablo friend, Prof. Edward H. Clarke, has found in one of his patients that the touching of the breast brings on a fit of epilepsy. I have seen a number of cases in practice, in which the irritation of one part of the skin produced an attack immediately. In Guinea pigs, as I have said, it is quite enough to tickle the neck, or sometimes it is apparent to blow upon the neck to have an attack appear. Tetanus may be excited in the game way. It is so frequently in hydrophobia, the touch of the wound produced by the bite of the dog being enouffh to occasion an attack. A friend of mine, Dr. Bastiau of Paris, has seen a case of hysteria in a man who had a tumor in the ear which could hardly bo touched without soaio convulsive phe- nomena occurring. The tumor was removed and the patient recovered. Catalepsy is of the same category. It can be produced in some persons by merely striking the body. I had one case of that kind in London. The patient was the daughter of a physician there. A simple touch of a part of the spine was sufficient to produce an attack. Chorea and a good many other affections may be thus produced. In one case, sneezing was performed 60,000 times, according to the record of a physician, in 82 hours, owing to the simple irritation of the auditory nerve. Wiieii that was cured, the patient ceasud to sneeze. The next series of facts I have to sponk of consists of alterations of nutrition excited by nerve force. For many years, before a great discovery was made as re- gards the action of a certain class of nerves on blood- vessels, there were physiologists wuo admitted that blood-vessels were controlled by nerves; but facts bad not been brought forward proving it positively. I had an opportunity with a friend of mine, Dr. Tholozan, who is now the eminent physician of the Shah of Persia, to see how nervous influences can bo exerted on blood-ves- sels from dipping one hand into cold wat. r. If one hand is dipped into water at nearly freezing point, we find that the blood-vessels of the other hand are contracted, and as a consequence of that, there is a diminution of tem- perature. In one case this diminution of temperature was 60 great, owing to the lack of circulation there, that my friend lost 21° Fall, in ten minutes, the temperature of the air being very low that day. Wo found that on certain days wo were more excitable than others. Tlio mechanism was simply this : The irritation of nerves in one arm, when dipped into water, is propagated by the spinal cord and goes to the blood-vessels in the other hand and produces a contraction there, which re- mains, so that no blood reaches the part. Such an effect we sometimes see in people from an exposure to cold air, which may produce what Marshall Hall calls diyillt semi mortuis ; that is, fingers half (lead. The fingers seem to be dead, and really there is no circulation in the part. How life can be maintained there is a mystery. It may last sometimes for days without gangrene. Most likely there is some serum there which receives oxygen, just as the serum m the cornea receives oxygen when that part is wounded. But at any rate it seems mysterious that there is no decay when there is such an absence of circulation. When we galvanize the cervical sym- pathetic in the back of the neck we produce a contraction of the blood-vessels of the face immediately, and all the consequences that I have noted as following such a contraction. There is a diminution of the tempera- ature, a diminution of the sensibility, a diminution also of the vital property. If the reverse is done, if the nerve is divided instead of galvanised, then we have an opposite effect. The blood-vessels are paralyzed ; they dilate considerably. There is more blood becausa the channel is more open. The heart sends blood witk tbe same force everywhere; but if one part of the sys- tem is more free it receives more blood, and in conse- quence of the greater iuSux. of blood there is an in- creased temperature, au increased sentlbdity, and an increase in the vital property of the part. When I made my first experiments on th<> galvaniza- tion of the sympathetic, I came to the conclusion atouco that those nerves most likely came in a measure at least from the cerebro-spiaal system, although they belong to what we call the sympathetic nerve. I was led to this conclusion by facts which I have no time to men- tion. But the great point is this : I ascertained by a few experiments that it is chiefly from some nerves there, the first, second, and third dorsal nerves in the spine, that the sympathetic receive those branches. This fact was put in a more clear and forcible way by two otJier physiologists, Dr. Budge and Dr. Waller. THE TREATMENT OF CHARLES SUMNER. When, in 1857, I saw Mr. Charles Sumuer for the first time, he presented to me at once symptoms which I could not but recognize as dependent upon au irritation of sonle fibers of that sympathetic nerve, and a paralysis of others. As you know, ho received a terrible blow upon the head. His spine as he was sitting had been bent in two places, the cranium fortunately resisting. This bending of tbe spine in two places had produced there the effects of a sprain. When I saw him in 1'aria he had recovered altogether from the first effects of the blow. He suffered only from the two spraius of the epiue and perhaps a sliglit irrii»tion of 80 the spinal cord Itself. Ho had two troubles at time. One was that h-- could not make u-e of hi- brain at all. lie could not read a new-inner; cou'. 1 not write a letter. He wa- in a iriglittul slat'- a- regards tli.-ac- tivif. o; the mind, as every effort tin-re was mo-t p-nn- Jul to him. It seemed to him at times as if m- o-ead would burst ; tln-r.- -eemed to be -om,- great force within pu.-him,' tin- i way from on.- another. Any emo- tion wae painliil to him. i:\-eiiineoii\er-ation, anv- thin.' tb.it railed for depth of thought or feeling caused him saui-ring. M> that we hid to b • very careful wit h him. il.- h id another trouble resulting from tbe sprain Which wa- at the level of the lowest dorsal vertebra. The irritation pm luc.-.l was intense and tho result very painful. \Vhen he tried to m-ive forward he was com- pelled to |.ii-h one ii ot >low:y and gently forward but a Lnohi s. and th-ii di.i4 tin- other foot to a level with tin flret, holding Ms back at the same time to dimiMsh the piin that In- h.ul th.-n-. It had been thought that he |. n.il'. zed in the lower limbs, and that he had di>- of til.- i rain, and tin- disease of tho brain was con- .stn;. ,u v of this paralysis of the lower limb-. lortiinatel. ..very made of what we call the Ta-.i-n.oti.r in i \"ii- -y.-ti-m, led uie at once to the con- clusion ih.it he h ol no disea.-e of the brain and had no lysis. I!.- h-id only an irritation of those vasa- : n. i ••" •-, resulting from the upper sprain in the aplne. That iiri; ation was the cause of the whole mis- chief as regard.-, the function of the brain. The other (•pram cau-eii th" pain which gave tho appearance of p.ir.il v-i-i. \Vhi-n I a-li d him if he was conscious of any \\. ikne-.s in ins lower limbs, ho said, " Certainly not ; I have never nniii r.stood that my physicians considered me paralyzed. I only cannot walk on account of the ; What- ilo-ip was to apply counter-irritants to th..-. two -pi. mi-. Tint was dune. I told him that the lie-t pi. in ol i real incut would consist in the application of nioxa-, an. i that they produced the most painful kind of irritation of tli • .-km that we knew. I urged him then to allow UK- to i;ive hiai chloroform to diminish the pain, if not take j- awav aliogetiier. I well remember his im- ! he replied: "If you can say posi- ts. 1) ti. at I si. ill d live as much benefit If I take chlo- roform a- ir 1 do no', then of course I will take It; but if there i.s to be any deKreo whatever of amelioration in I do n..' take it, then I shall not tnke it." [ did not find courage enough to deceive him. I told bun tin- tnrli— 'hat there would bo more effect, as I thou.'fit. if h did not take chloroform. And so I bad to cuibmit him to tue martyrdom of the greatest suffering that can b.- . tin -led on mortal man. I burned him with the 11. tn i id the hope that after tbe first appli- cation be ibiuit to thn use of chloroform ; but for • he was burned In the same way, and i ' i \-- chloroform. I have never seen a patient who submiite I in Mich treatment In that way. 1 .-., nnot eoneeive thai it was from mere heroism that he did It. Tie- leil explanation WiW tills: Heaps of alm.se had be n thrown upon him. lie was considered a- an, H-. i.. himself in ]'.ii;s; an pretending to bo 111. I M-I, in- wanted to net well and go home us quickly 11- po--:ble. A few il o' e: eat Importance to hjin. And so In- ILI-SI d through that terrible suffering, the).- tliat I ll.i\e i:Vi-r li.lla |i .1 uiion liny belUi,', n. in .-r animal. I mi-Hi Ln tin , only to show what the man was. and I Shall only ad I l l.at M nre t li.it I h ave al \\ a\ < found In m r .id -init to anythni),- fur tin: Hake of what he Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. thought to bo ri.L'ht; and in otlrr spheres you know that siieli was his eharaefer. [Apnlause.j At this point Dr. Browu-Srqnnrd was so rnnch .iliertcd that ho found himself unable to proceed, and so shipped t lie lecture, after having spoken one- half of the usual time. WHAT NERVES MAY DO— Sixxn AXI» LAST LECTURE. fNITY OF TIIK NKUVorS SYS 1 KM— f;n.\I "ft \(V A CAT'S TAIL ON" A CiK'K's COMB — TIIFOIIV OF CATCHING COLD— INSTANCES OF I'lAVI K oK IMAGINATION — LIMITS OF NERVK FolICK — Iiri.l S |n|: IIFALTH. r.iisroN, March 19.— Dr. Bro\vn-St:4'i:ird delivered on March 18. the liual lectnn- in his course before the Lowell Institute. The audience was lartrc, and alihoiiyh t!io lecturer, having a half hour duo him from the last lecture, ventured to :idd about 20 minutes of it to tho regulation hour of the Institute, yet attention oriuten-.-t did not llatr from licirinnitic to end. and there were not a few rcm-eis expressed at tho close that the course of lectures was termi- nated. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN: I besrnn in tho last lecture to speak of the vaso-motor nervous system. That nervous S3>tem supplies the blood vessels and keeps them in a state of activity. When paralvzed, tho blood vessels, not having any stimulus to contract, yield to the power of the heait and become very much larger. That nervous system exists in all parts of the body \vhero blood Is present, so that a direct influence can bo exerted by the central organs of tin- nervous system OB all parts of the hody. But the question i-, whether this nervous system is the ouly..oue that acts on circulation. My friend 1'rof. Bernard has insisted upon the view th.it there is another nervous system acting on circulation and M-i-vinc to dilate blood vessels. This view, however, you will see in a uiomsnt, has no real foundation. Tae facts on which it has been grounded can be explain i \<, -i - ..t X.-\v Y.uk has per- li cily well proved that tin- eheiiiical Changes oci-urring in tissues must be a oaoae of activity of t he circulation. JHit there nro many other facts hesnlcs those ho knew, which show that when w<: irritate a nerve, if then- Is more blood in the part where that nervo pies, ic IB not bccaubo that nerve t'°*-'S to 'oloo i veribel.", and of- TT7mf Nerves May Do— Brown- S^quard. 81 foots them by dilating tliom, but because of the direct transformation of nerve force into chemical force pro- ducing mi attraction of blood. A great many facts indeed ehow us that circulation will go on without an impulse from the heart. In plants the circulation proceeds from chemical changes without any heart at all, "without any power that pushes the liquids forward. Tu f octal monsters In our own species, there arc cases in •which the monster had no heart, and in which the communication of its circulatory system with that of the almost half child with which it was connected, •was too slight for the. circulation to go on if wo were to look upon the heart as the only organ producing circula- tion. Besides, in embryos, in animals at a certain de- gree of their development form the ovum, circulation takes place while the heart is not yet formed. And we may say that instead of the heart beina the only organ that serves for circulation, that, on the contrary, the heart is formed by circulation. The circulation helps to give it a form of organization, and helps to give it a function when it has accomplished its organization. I long aco made an experiment with, frogs, consisting In making a section of the ventricle of the heart, dividing it so as to do away with more than two-thirds of the length, of that part. After a time a clot is formed there which unites the lips of the cut, and the circulation goes on with a part of the ventricle, which is so small indeed that there Is hardly an impulse coining from it. There is a pass- age, however, for the blood there, and that is all that is necessary, that the great cause of circulation, which is attraction, may be accomplished in every tissue through life. Even io our own species it has been my lot to see cue rase, that of a lady, in which the heart was almost entirely destroyed by fa:ty deposition. Tlie heart in this case had very little action, if any, but still life per- sisted for some time. In appearance there was a state of health, until suddenly one day death occurred. There is on record the case of a man who for three days had had no beating whatever of the heart nnd who, nevertheless, had had a circulation. He had had no pulse — the beating of the pulse depending on the heart— but the blood was circulating, and life was maintained all the time. There- fore, although I would not say certainly that the heart is a useless organ [laughter], it is certainly by far less important than it was considered to be, a great deal of the work of circulation being due to the attraction that tissues exert on the blood. That attraetiou is increased by certain nerves, and thereby circulation is consider- ably increased, sometimes locally to a most wonderful extent, by an irritation of the nervous system. In cases of inflammation we see this very plainly. Where the in- flammation exists inside of the cranium, we find that the carotid artery" beats with trcmeudous violence. Some- times we flud an enormous increase of pulsation in the arteries of the temple. As we flud ip such cases that the heart, as indicated by the pulse In the wrist, is not beating with much more force than usual, we must con- clude that there is considerable irritation and an in- flammation in the membrane of the brain or the brain Itself. A CAT'S TAIL ON A ROOSTER. If we put an organ taken from a living animal inside of another animal, very frequently this organ will bo en- grafted there. The infused serum becomes the object of chemical change?, the blood is attracted and the organ receives circulation. I once engrafted the tail of a cat on -A cock's comb. A few days after it was evident by pnckiug fhe tail that blood waa circulating in it, aud it certainly would ha :o stayed them had not the cock had a light and lost its tail. iLaiighter.J Other cases of graft- ing leave no doubt in this respect. It Is shown by the fact that ova in animals when they nre implanted on a mucuous membrane take hold of it, blood is attracted there and circulation takes place. Now, the question is, does the nervous system which acts so powerfully on nutrition, as you will see In a moment, act only through blood vessels and through lhat peculiar influence which I had named an attraction of blood 1 Certainly not. Whatever bo the suppositions we may make as regards the mechanism by which tho alterations I will speak of arcproduced.it is quite cer- tain that we cannot explain all the facts on the suppo- sition that the nervous system affects nutrition only through tho blood vessels. There must be other influ- ences. And the variety of facts I shall mention, although not so great as I should like to present, will be sufficient, I think, to show that we cunnot accept that position. The, mere division of a nerve is followed by a good many alterations, often producing atrophy not only of the muscles but also of the cellular tissue of the blood vessels, and also of the bones themselves. All the parts that wore animated by the nerve are more or less atro- phied after division. Dr. John Bead made an experi- ment to ascertain whether it was because the nervous s.vstem has an influence on tho nutrition, which is essen- tial, or whether it was simply the lack of action, the perfect rest in which the part was thrown, that occa- sioned this wasting away or atrophy. He allowed atrophy to take place, and then galvanized the limb very frequently, aud found it improved. But the prin- cipal experiment consisted in preventing atrophy by galvanization. He galvanized every day, and found that the limb did not become atrophied. I pushed the experiment further. I waited until atrophy had be- come considerable in the limb, and then I applied gal- vanism. I then learned that although tha nerve had lost uerve force altogether— as they lose it four days after dissection — yet there was soon a manifest in- crease iu size, and after a time the limb was brought to the normal size that it had before the operation. Even in man we frequently see cases of that kind. I once had a patient who from rheumatism had been without any exercise in one of his legs for a long time aud atrop'jy was considerable in the thigh. When the pain had diminished considerably he began to apply gal- vanism. I observed day after day a change for the bet- ter, and at the end of a week he had gained at the upper part of tho thigh five centimeters. or nearly two inches in circumference. This implied a rapid transformation for the better. Ic is evident, therefore, that in a great measure it is owing to rest or inactivity of a pnrt that want of nerve action and consequently atrophy is due.. CONSEQUENCE3 OF IRRITATION TO NERVES. There is a great variety of results, as 1 have said, when any part of the nervou« s.vstem is irritated. The irrita- tion may come in a direct way ; that is, it may, if it exist in the brain or part of the spinal cord, go direct to the muscles or skin or bones or glands or part with which it is connected. But there is another way. An irritation may start from a part of the skin or mucous mombrauco and go up to the brain or spinal cord and be sent back by the brain or spinal cord toward other organs which become atrophied. There are a number of cases which show that an irritation in tho bowels or elsewhere, in the skin, for instance, from a cut, haa produced an atrophy at a distance in other parts of the body. Tho variety of effect produced is considerable. Extras— Lecture anil Letter Scnca. On the sbln a great rrnnv alteration- may bo observed. A bulla, which H a rl.-inir like a bMsl-T on tin- epid riuis, ft liquid belnfflwtween the epidermis and tin- M;in mav be formed, or what \vc cull pemphygus, or pai> which Is the rising1 of a part «f the skin with rodnes-, or what IB known under the name of herpes— all these in i\- In- due t i an Irritation of tho nervous sv^tem. The • 'M'-nt in h' rp ta n to be that :>f -nni>li- in-ur i!uia. A gangrene nriv a'so in- d l>y a nervous afT-c- tlon. It is well known that in-ain- patien' s espe.-iallv those havin_- tr lull .mini i'i in of the gray matter of tin1 liraiti an I iho nitil'ill-t ''i-« of tin' ln-r I h'-i c i, no reason why nurses should always mid t-s]., . i.ii: , them ou the car. Acain, they- may h ive ha 1 tr-'nblo ni that orean when at- tacked; an 1 t:.i;dly. I h r: • actually founii that an Injury nf a certain p ir: u' tin- base of ttio brain i>rodu--- - almost invariable a hemorrhage of tbocar and ga!i.-_:n -M- ' :• It. It occurs in several epeeiea of animals, especially in Gu- m- . pi _•-. .So that there is no doubt whatever in mv m:ml that the affection of the ear in Insane patient.- is produced iiy a morbid Irritatiou of the iierviiua system, di-c-at changes may also occur in the hulr. in tin- nails, and even tho color of the iris mav bo changed ir.i.u the same cause. The nails ceaso to prow, as Dr. Mitchell of Philadelphia baa shown, in nianv oases t-y di-'-aso of tho brain. They become alti n-d in shape, and -Inw a series of lines, depressions, and protrusion^, or rnii:--3 and canals. So that a morbid Intlii' noe takes place on tlnne parts which are only secreted from tir- Mood. The hair may change color from one cl.iy to another under a uioi-bid influence. It may he i-haau'ed imt only in C"lor but in density and tliii-knesH, and become n of tao nci voua njstem will not produce lieil sore-. In c i-'-s of fracture of tlio limbs, for instance, tho patn-nt lyiiu' In thu position to have a pres- sure of th" iiati-s \\ill not have these sores. Ent on tin- other haul— and these has loJ mo to • I piopouuded loiijj aRO, and which is •iilntra —.u iinlinals. in dogs, for instance, win-si i. -.ion N nro liiccJ. which causes an inflammation of tin- hpmal coid and an inflammation of the nerves uriMii^; fiimi It, v. i il a. i a slouirhina- coming from a part of the ".icnini, wlncli u \-\-\ tie- .- une. QH in man. In .in-.te.id of lying down aa we do on the back, the s. Therefore, it cannot lie construed at liem^ >aa - -il i v pressure. Besides, I li.i\i .-.ecu u H!II u trlil iikr a i>ii ar u u :u i Ciix-o days aft(>r an in|urv, HO that e\. u :f v,.- Imax-im-d thai tlui poor • i . .it n 1 1 liad 1 1 1 rued and pi 136 I on ih,- part for a time, yet tin- ii-n^ih of lime would not be sufficient to pro- (Ui'-e tin- troiiba- t..i re, N'-;ih.-r Id the ' \ planation that the Blougblna -i due From decomposed water from tho pailciit u »al. factory one. L'ud lUljte.Ky Ihi., )3 a pow- erful cause of incn-a^o of the slouphlncr, but rot original cause, as in those animals I refer to there was not a drop of that water irritating the bai-lc. IMIl.-NAI. OKCANS SUFFKU FROM EKTT.KNAL IRniTATIOX. AH sorts of inflammation in tho viscera can b:- pro- duced from an irritation of tho nervous svsteiu. lnil.ua- m (ion of tho hums is extremely common in certain - of (iise ises of the brain. And iatl unmation of tho kidneys or bladder, or bowels, may come from an inflam- mation of tho spinal cord. Burns will produce also phenomena of that kind. A burn on the skin will fre- quently prove fatal by pro hieing an inflammation of that part of the bowels called the duodenum ; the inflam- mation may bo so rapid as to pro luce an ulceratiou in a few (lavs. The eyes are the theater of c on . si d arable alteration from tho nervous system. It is almost useless to ^o into a demonstration of the influei cr which an irritation on tho nerve of one eye may orotluco on tho other eye, because it is generally admitted now that an injury to one eye can Injuriously aff ct tho other. When I first upheld that theory I was alone in ir, and it was neees- s.ry to pile up my facts; now everybody Ins f,, mil it out. It is quite certain that an ininry to tho frontal norvo then, will produce disease in the corresponding eye, and the best thing to do in those cases Is to divide tho nerve between tho part which has been injured and the brain, so as to prevent the transmission of the in- jury to the brain, from which it is reflected to the othei eye. In tao same way an irritation of one eye maj produce inflammation in tho other. And if a patieni who has ono eye very much altered and irritated, ec that it is sure to bo lost, if tho patient begins to have inflammation in the other eye, it is now a common thing for surgeons to take away the eyo flrst injured to save the other. That of course acts in dividing tho nerve! which connect tho eye flrst injured with tlio brain, and prevents a propagation of tho irritation from tho brain to the second eye. Even oafaract and glaucoma can be produced by a nervous influence. But more than this, all tho inflammation of viscera that wo suffer from may and does como fr >m an Irrita- tion of the nkin. Of tho persons in thU room now whc suffer from coughing I daresay that nine out of ton— yes, 10 out of 20— owe their c>m^h to an Irritation which was brought to other parts than the part which, beins in- flamed, causes the cougn. An irritation of tho neck by cold, an irritation of tho feet, or arms, or any other part of tho body by cold, especially by damp or wot col. I, may bring on inflammation of some organ. When per- sons have an Inflammation Of the lungs, almost invaria- bly— I was on the point of saying iu all cases — this in- flammation has its origin, in croat measure, if not en- tlrely, iu some irritation of the skin, or of tho mucous mcmoranesln the neighborhood of tho skin, in tho nos- trils or iu the throat. rOWEH OF THE NEUVES OVER NL'TKITION*. There is a cjiie*tioa which now uns s, after having shown you how various and how groat is tho action ol the nervous sjstem on nutrition. It is, Aro wo to con- Mdcr th • nervous sy.teni.is e.montlal to nutrition I It is certainly not essential to nutrition, but witho-u doubt also it la mo-t ns-eful to nutrition. Bat, unfortunately, beside being most useful to nutrition, it Is in a inorlin] state most del i Imental to nutrlt ion. So that these three points are now particularly established: (i.) In tho first place the nervous system is not essential to nutrition, which can and does go on without it, as you well know it coes on in plants and fcotuses before tho nervous sys- tem 13 formed, aud as it goes on also in completely do- WJiat *7cn-cs May Do— Brown- Sf guard. 83 :uilnials after the de.sfruetrin of certain parts of the nervous system. F.U- Instance, the destruction of a CTOat part of thn .spinal cord in cats, allows cbe development of the lower limbs. There (s an atrophy or wasting la size or girth of tlio limi>, but tiio development iu length takes place. (2.) The second point 18 that the nervous system lias, however, a great usefulness in improving nutrition. (3.) And thirdly; it has a groat power in disturbing nutrition, especially under certain influences, prominent among which is the application of e>>ld to the slcin. I may say hero that the great danger cornea from the fact that we do uot expose ourselves suthYiently to cold. If wo accustomed our skin to the influence of cold, then wo should be iu very much less danger of having any of the morbid influences that cold acting ou the skin can produce. I now approach a i>road subject, about which, unfortu- nately, I shall uot have time to say as much as I should like. In fact, it would take a large number of lectures to develop it completely. It is the power of the mind over the body through nervous force. That power of the mind over the body is much greater than most of you imagine. Indeed, I do not think that any one among you, however exalted may be his or her idea ot the strength and variety of their power, has an adequate conception of its magnitude within the bounds which I will mention. You all know what inesmerizers have tried to establish. You all know what persons believing in animal magnetism profess and declare. You have heard of what is called the "od force;" and you have heard of a peculiar process which originated, iu New- England, and which we know under the name of Per- tin's Tractors. All these views that I have mentioned have a ground in nature, and I may say there is hardly any folly in mankind of any Importance that has not some ground, some degree of truth. THE POWER OF IMAGINATION. But thoueh there may be some ground for it, there may not be enough to establish the truth of a certain Tiew. The ground here is simply that the power of imagination ou the body is immense, and that what is done by persons iu a state of what is called mesmerism, or in any of the instances I have mentioned, which is apparently due to those odd forces— this time it has two dees— [laughter], is due to the imagination of the person under these influences. John Hunter long ago having to deal with a mesmerizer, showed very clearly what occurs in these cases. He said that he had observed of himself that by thinking of any part of the body ha could very soon produce a< sensation there, and if he thought of a certain kind of sensation that kind of sensation was produced. Having been urged strongly to go to a inepinerizer's, he teils us tnat he was very reluctant, to do so because he was troubled with that serious aflection known as angina pectoris and feared for his health. Finally he made up his mind to go, and determined to call some sensation from a part remote from that on which the mesmerizer was trying to fix his mind; so that when the mesmerizer was trying to act on his hand, saying, " Don't you feel this or that sensation when this instrument is put in your hands 1" Hunter at that time waa trying to give himself the gout in the big toe. (Laughter.] Hunter unfortunately knew by experience what the gout was, for he was careless of his health, and had that complaint in other and worse parts than the big toe. But this time he thought he would divert it to that member, and succeeded In doing it so well that all the attempts of the mesmerizer to produce a sensation in the fingers failed. Hunter had the tr;:e view aln ;:t tliN, •when he attributed it lo the. ini:igiii;i! ion. Ani'llnr man of immense g -iimn, although at limes, acc.inling to my notion, he was earned a'.vay by hallucinations and lllu- slons from a disorder ia his mind; ;hai in n, Swou'-n- borg, had1 also a very clear view of what J.>,ni Hunter has expressed. lie lived before Hunter, and therefore preceded him in this view, and lie, expre-sod it in his usual way, somewhat mystically but v: ry forcibly, for he said that the brain had the power of conveying various sensations in it of other things to any part of the nervous system. And this is what imagination may do. But the real discoverer of this influence, tue man who has established on most solid grounds the agency of the imagination in this mailer is Thomas Braid of Manchester, the real introducer of hypnotism, although some three or four Americans had h;;d a good deal of his i nought mixed up wlch notions more or less incorrect. Tne influence of the mind ou sensations especially is exceedingly great. Prof. Bennett of Edinburgh related the case ot a butcher who was once trying to hang apiece of meat ou a hook. He found sudden) y that he has suspended himself to the hook instead of the meat. His agony of pain, when ho discovered it, was terrible, but an examination showed that the hook had only £>assed through, tiis sleeve and had hardly touched his skin. [Laughter.] The exalcatiou of the senses that we see, especially iu mesmerized persons, inuy go to a most wonderful extent. Indeed, the power of the sense of hearing especially is such that it would be dangerous, if you wanted to reach the truth about mesmerism, to talk iu a room adjoining the one in which was the mes- merized person, about that which the mesmerized per- son was to find. Tue inesmeriZ3J parson would have a good chance of hearing what you say. All the senses indeed arc exceedingly delicate then. KNOWLEDGE OF TIME WHILE UNCONSCIOUS. Still there is another thing than an increase of the senses. Prof. Luycock of Edinburgh has insisted on a point of great importance. It you put a watch on the back part of the ho-ad of a mesmerizad persou— I have uot seen it, but it seems well attested— that person will know what time it is exactly to the minute, although some hours may have elapsed since the person had the opportunity to consult the time. In that case Prof. Luy- cock suggests that we all know that duiiu.tr sleep we have a power of judging of time. There is no doiiht that there is such a power of knowing the time, so much so that some people can wako themselves up within a minute of a fixed time. So it is quite easy to admit that the mesmerized person knew the time by that power, whatever it is. Tnerefore, thu power of knowing the time did not come from the fact that the watc i was there; or that the hands of the watch were seen by the hair or the sltin, or the bones, '*•, was that there was a knowledge within of the real time. Tne way to ascertain if the person sees would be to put tilers a watcii which gives the wrong tims. 1 could give a good many facts to show that even in health, in persons of imagination, a tit-eat deal of pain can be produced when there is no organic cause ior it. I could show also that lack of sensation may be pro- duced to such au extent by the imagination that pam. may scarcely be felt, as in the case of the Couvul- siouaires of St. Medard. These men and women were trampled under foot in the most violent manner, and never showed the least sensibility under pain. They had come to imagine that they could bear aluiott any- thing, and did do it. There is a story of one of these poor Sisters of Charity who was struck and beaten all 84 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. over tho Ixxlv, and trampled on by some 10 or 1- p-r-otis ovi-r IIIT limb- :i ;i:ni cheat, and etill bore it all •without any .-i-'ii of pain whatevi r. A- regards tin- pow.-r of pr.idn -iiu- an.i--tii.--ia, it HI i in.-, to in.- 11 n i". irt ii :i.it" tii.r tin- dis -uvt-ry of i-tln-r v, .1- inadi- ju-t when it was. It \\ . on wi-ll know, in 184C or 1S47 tli it the use of i-tln-r as an an.i-^r li.-:io \vi.i .11. It ,-t.n li-'l from thus i '. \t t 11' tinn- in I', i- gl.md Dr. l-'.n U-- i a? to show from facts observed Hi England, :i:i 1 e-p Olally in linli i, Irmi I'M- pri- of Dr. j: -li.it sirm-thin.: \\liii-:i w.i- e died im-s- ; .-in, but wh:.-h. after all, wa-< nothing but a peculiar etati- nf »>mnambulisii.\ incliu-i-il in p i i nt-, irave to tiii-'ii tin- i i -M th.it i . . di-pnvcd of feeling; so that tln-.v wi iv i ,i:i.| r the lnflii''i:cc of t-heir lin. i_-!i,:. '.inn. a:iil • 'inn- I I nut Were quite- pain .r- -. 1 gaj it w is a pity tUut etbcr was iu- trndii'i-d in : tin-ii, as it prevented the progress of our knc ia to this inetlioiJ of pro- ducing ana, -th sla. M \ fi i "Mil, IV, if. Broca, took it up iu ,n in r.n i-, tn hi\r amputations performed after 1. 1\ in,: lin u .u .'in 1 1/ -d ii\ ti.: inline nee of Braid i»m or In piioii-m. A cr .it in m\ - oiH-r.uions were pcrroriued luthu(\\ay wlncli w r 'piKo painless. But it was u IT"- is Ion? and tedious, and surgeons were iu a linrry an I -,- 1\ •• iinii. I regret it very much, us ; : • never ha- in > M ,i oaso of death from that inettiod of prod in iii;,' a:. . while. vou well know that u gie.it many. • : ath have bi;eu produced by other Uietl II . r.R ON THE MIRACCLOC8. N"t only . ma -;h. -i- in. >y be produced, but the secre- •tioiii may bi- rorj i' "\\eriullv affeet'-d bj- tho influence o: ihe ni'inl . 1\-. Hero we find facts of great importanei- iii'ii-i-.I. Hi"..- are many facts whicli show tint tin- M-C-: .ilj in a 3- become poisonous for u rhilil frmn a im-re ciiiotiou in the mother, and • • iaMv IP in one r. And if it were not the duty of e\ i TV inn- tu avuiil anu'-r it would certainly bo the duty of a yiuuix inn; ',i r v. lin ua.s to nurse a child. There are -. .
  • pat ion. Ho wanted to be.pnreed, and took a certain niiinbcr of tln>»o pills, aud iiid!<- ui i. ii.ng run--1 pal 'I ho wan purged just un h" u Mini In In-. [Lan^-lit i ) N '--ii ••'',: / may lin |ir.nlni i d In the snmo way. Du i 1 1 -, a t'ri ni-li plr. . .i trial nnido in n ho-i.lt.il ny a iiiu-i \\!n v. i 1,1 .uinin.l and jj.ivo to alt tl.i- pa tu- u i - .1 \. ly liartnl.-vs Kind ot medn-nie. and then t»lil lli> n, Ci it |he I .that hhc li.nl liy ml-talic tin n, a.L \.i\ IHI-.M 1','ul < nn-liL-d. Out of li>0 p.i- iient«, 80 were affecf«il a" if tliev had taker, the most \ lull-in i in -tii- and viiinUi d lor a long time. This \\u si-e on a vi-iy l.irx-- si-a!e on s-aboard every Summer. I have no doui't \vliatr\i-r that sea-sickness l> in a trrrat measure due to that, and if you could jjo on. Jioard of a steami'r wit.i the idea that you would not viiniit [ am well sati-lii-d, irom cxperim'.-nt.s I have matte, that you would cseupo a great i.eal of sea-sick- ne--, if you did in't eseai>.- it altoirether. One fact I recall is very interesting. A per-on had erossed, on one mi "i-inii, a .-mall l>av \vh"ii it was very rouirh. There was a man plaj in^' the violin on the boat. Tno person 1 i-eter to was terribly sea-.«ick and vomited a great deal, Hi- had not, of course, ruade up bis mind tbat bo could nut be .sick. However, the point is that after that lie could cover bear a violin without vomiting. [LaiiKhtei and aiiplan-i-.] To pass to something in •:• • serious: You have all heard of what are called the stijinntn— marks represent ing the wounds on th> lim'is ot Christ. Those mark! have appeared in persons who havi; dreamed or im- agined that they were crucilied and siitr-;in\p t.ie paina of Christ, having invn!;.-d tile i,r"iil:i-ss of God to lei them have that suffering to pnm-ii tli in for their faults. The most remarkable fact of tbat kind la that concern- ing St. Francis of ASMS!. Tner;- is no doab' that he had the mark as clear as possible. If you compare with this fact one which is related by Dr. C.irter you will have the explanation of it. Dr. Carter says that while a mother was looking at her child who was standing at a -window with the lingers on the border of the window just under the lifted sash, she saw the sash come down with great force aud crush the three fingers of the poor child. The mother remained unable to innvc. feeling immediately a pain on the three flmrers at the very plaee where the child had been injured. Her li.ig.-rs sw.-lied, an eilusion of blood took place and ulceration followed and she was a lontr time in being cured. If in the ease of this mother the imagination could produce such results, you will see In the case of the stii.'niat.i the imagination may have been, equally powerful. PEKFOKM.VNfKS OF RELIGIOUS DEVOTEES. The mind iu a state of emotion has also «reat power on the heart, the breathing apparatus, and several other organs. The most important of ihe facts here — which I must say I committed the fault of denying for a longtime — are those which relate to the fakirs of India. You know that they may remain dead to all appearance for a number of days, and it is even sai. I for mouths, without any chaniro occurring in tln-ir body, without any change in their wi ;_-;ii, \\ u limit th,-ir receiving any food. They show neither ein-iila: i.iii nor re.-piratlon, as their temperature had diminished ver.\ considerably, aud altogether present a series of ell. -els wnieli arc cer- tainly very marvelous. But in irvelmn as it is, the testimony of somo ollicns in the Brit- ish army who are men of pericet veracity leaven no doubt as to the possibility of the fact. But ia the light of the fact that I mentioned in my tlrst lecture, that I had a dead animal in iuv lanoratory lying for several months u iiinmt any nigii oi' deeompositiou, iu a temperature varying Irom 4U° to CU° during day an it night, we can understand that thet^o lukirs may remain aule to live although tin y do not live— that is, do not have actual and active life. But why, you will say. do they come out I Admit that there is in us a power whlct Is qii;!!' distinct fro.n our or. lin try power of mind, whii h is i|iute di-llnct Irom what we call coi'.sclousuess, which fining our sleep is awake and watches; with. What Nerves May Do— Brown- Stquard. 85 this admission and t^ic fncfs I have mentioned before, \ve have all tlie elements, I think, for au oxplauatioii of what has bcousaid about the fakirs. I find, unfortunately, that the timo presses so that I Blmll lie obliged to pass over a good many 1'acts and coitic to thu miracles of La Sale tie and to the miracles accomplished at the tomb of rather Matthew, and also what has been said of a great many other instances of recovery from illness. I cannot but believe that there is no need of appealing to any other power tliau what we know of imagination for the explanation of what takes place in those miracles. They are very curious, but Lardly more curious than what we see when, we know without doubt that imagination is the cause of such a change. Tao cure of any illness which does not consist In any disorganization of the tissues can often be ac- complished -when the person thinks that it can be done. If we physicians, who treat patients every day, had the v power to make them believe that they are to be cured, we ceriamly -would obtain Jess fees than we do, and I must say that the best of us would rejoice at it. There is no doubt at all that if we could give to patients the idea that they are to be cured they would often be cured, especially if we could name a time for it, which is a great element in success. I have succeeded in this way sometimes, and I may say that I succeed more now than formerly, because I have myself the faith that I can in giving faith obtain a cure. I wish, indeed, that phy- sicians who are younger men than inpself, and who will Lave more time to study this question than I have, would take it up, especially in those cases in which there is a functional nervous affection only to deal with, as it is particularly, though not only, in those cases that a cure can be obtained. Indeed a cure may thus be ob- tained in certain organic affections ; even in dropsy it may lead to a cure. You know that it will stop pam ; that going to a dentist is often quite enough to make a toothache disappear. | Laughter.! I have seen patients come to me with a terrible neuralgia, who dreaded the operation I was about to perform, and, just, at the time I was to undertake it, ceased to sutler. [Laughter. | LIMITS OF NERVE FORCE— LAWS OF HEALTH. I think I have shown that the power of nerve force is exceedingly various; that nerve force can be trans- formed into chemical force, into motion, into electricity, into heat, into light, and so on. But what are the limits of the action of nerve force 1 I may say that the limits of the action of nerve force, except after it has been transformed into other forces, are our own body. Those persons who think that by an imagination, or by an act of will, or by the action of a vnestnerizer, we can send in any part of our body an influence that can modify it, those persons make a great mistake if thev think that this can take place by forces distinct from nerve force in the subject in which the action takes place. If we divide a nerve going to a part, never mind how much we may imagine that we can move the muscles to which it goes; never mind where we go to be the object of a muscle, we shall not have the least action in the muscles to which that nerve went. That nerve is absolutely* outside of our control. Nerve force cannot be propagated to parts that are not in connection with the nervous centres. This fact is a death blow to the view that there are other forces acting in us than mere nerve force. To continue the illustration of this fact : If the spinal cord, which establishes communica- tion between the brain and the various parts of the body, is divided, the parts of the body that aro below that section are separated absolutely from any act of will, any act of imagination, any act coming from emo- tion, in facr, from anything that comes from tlie brain There is, I repeat, no force in our system other than, mere nerve force for the transmissions that may come from the brain, ns the seat of the imagination, the sea.0 of emotion and the seat of the will. I shall now add but a few words on the production and expenditure of nerve force. Nerve force is produced as you know through blood. It is a chemical force whioli is transformed there into nerve force. Tliis nerve force accumulates in the various ortrans of the nervous system in which it is formed during rest. But if re.-t is pro- longed, then it ceases to be produced. Alteration takea place iu the part which is not put to work. Oil the other hand, action which is so essential to the production ol nerve force, if prolonged will exhaust force also, but produce a state distinct from that of rest. Rest will produce a lack of blood, while over-action may produce congestion. The great thin^, therefore, is to have sutli- cient but not excessive action. There is another law which ia that we should not exercise alone one, two, or three of the great parts ol the nervous system; since thus we draw blood to those parts only, and the other parts of the body suffer. In the due exercise of all our organs lies the principal rules of hygiene. This view, you know, comes from a physician. It is not in agreement with what the poet Churchill wrote : " The surest road to health, say what yon will, Is never to suppose we shall be ill. Most of those evils we poor mortals know, From doctora and imagination flow." Unfortunately Churchill died a victim to this view that doctors were murderers. He died of a fever at the age of 34, and that because he had been too carelesa about calling in a doctor to help him. But it is certainly true that the gieat rule of health ia-not to lay imagina- tion aside, and this is why 1 have quoted these verses. Imagination, ou the contrary, is to be appealed to far more than we do, and this is one of the great conclusions that I hope young physicians will keep iu mind. To conclude with these great rules of hygiene, I should say that we should not spend more than our means allow us. Many commit this fault. As before said, we should make au equal use of all our organs, and of the various parts of th« nervous system. Those who employ the brain suffer a great deal from inattention to tins law. Lastly, there should bo regularity as regards the time of meals, the time and amount of action, the time and amount of sleep — regularity in everything. It is very difficult indeed to obtain it. But, there is in our nature more power than we know, and if we conform ourselvea to the law of habit things will soon go ou without our meddling with them, and we come to be perfectly reg- ular, although we perhaps had naturally a tendency not to be. In conclusion, I have to thank the audience that has listened to me so patiently through these long and dis- connected lectures. I Loud applause.] ERRATA. Page 14. col. 1, line 18: for •' d iys," rei3 years. Page 33, col. 2, lines 10, 11: for " li:iJ the power of convefire various sensations in it of otijer things," read is purtraijed in the 'nerves and that they carry willi them its animus. Page 33, col. 2, line lit: for ' Thomas" read James. Page, 34, col. 1, line GO: for " both astringents," rea I and an asfrtn- gcnt substance. Page 34, col. 1, line G6: for " Dn Cros," read Durand u Hall, another series uf liTtun-s supple- li:.-iual to tin.-.- ilcliveivd some turn- -ITU in tin- same li:ill. :nid vl-i.-h inaiiv per* MIS — ladle-; , ^.eeia'iv— B unaMe to attend cm aee.Miut uf tin- i'.mired ae- coimu.'ilaTiiiMs uf this usually adequate hall. The • d'thi; series was upon th.-r.i-! and Future <-f Our Earth, ami tin- lecture v.-as prnt'ii^-ly illu-tratcd with stereoptioon views. His audience. \\liicii was composed mainly of la. lies, -was very sympathetic with, ami I:AI:UI— MiWNKALL OF METEORS— THE ] \l:lll M\l>i: KIT roll MAX BY GRADUAL PRQ- , | 88] -_N, , PAH.YU.I:!, IN THE MOON'S CASE— THB IS i IMil. CYCLES OF I UK KUTURE. LA mi > AND GENTLEMEN: In the year 1837, on Man-ii 23. t ho French astronomer. Arasro, addressed to tli>- French .^ mate :i s-atemeut having reference to tin- wonderful v iiu • ot tin- study of astronomy as teach- ing triir thoughts uf tin- Creator. lie related how a cer- tain clergyman had come to him and complained that he found his people wanting in attention. Said he, "I re- peated to my people all that I had hitherto liccn teach ing about the wonderful power of God. hut they would not fix their attention. They seem to look upon these matters as ful---." Ariu'D said to him. "Pass from those older teachings and take what astronomy leaches;" and then Araxo related to him the wonders of astronomy, and the minister went away rejoicing. When the time cam,! at which ho knew the minister was to employ (• idlings, he waited witli impatience to hear the r ialt> Th iniir-t'-r came h.ick to liim, but be waa not r \r.ii:t had hoped- With despair pictured on hi- fare he said: " When I brunch t those wonders be- f i my andienre tle-y liad forgotten the sacred nature. of the piaee tie y were in, aud rose up and applauded mo to the echo." YAKIols VIIIW8 OP THE VALUE OF ASTRONOMY. tt appears to me there are In the teaching of astron- omy sever. il uaysof vie wlnir Uio science. The study of ii^ir.'iriinv i- int. :• -rmir and importau t, whether it be ron-ldereii either as an ad to tho memory or an < xer- ri->-of tiie mind; imt we pasa to a higher yalne of as- tronomy when we come to consider it m its theoretical a-p -el.ihe Mndy it presents of various problems or in- ter e •', and i In- way it replies to observation and cxperl- iij. nt. I'.-rhap-t in thn miinU of many, a IIIL-IMT vain.- nl a-t: Miiiiinv will li" fniiiid In Its utilitarian as- j.e, i, a- a in. -an -i nf as.-' rtalnlux' tho laws that cui.le the •u in in Ins f.nr.si! over t he oe.-an, or tho travolor In bis J'Hirn -v tlirnii^li tle> des.-rt, thus work in L,' out a use- ful pin ,'.'-•-. Hut all th<--e, nnlile as t le-y ma y be, seem tn ii' ':i-i ,-iiitleaiit compared with what astronomy iloes — and what every Other He), -nee .Im In brinirliiK 11B ll.to tin- pp lenOfl of the i-re.lt qlli ht'.in.s Whirl] aflfect ftll of us aud are of such vital interest. The question what wo are, what this earth 1", what nil this Is on around us an 1 in whL-h we ar,' t iluin: par;, • is to me In liri:i_- a--! rouoiuy before us i:i its noblest a-n -ef. This may li • ill'.is; r.itcd by coasidenn,' tir.' study of hr.man na'iire. The doctor who teaches na the wav in winch the human frame may b • fj.i.ir/.eil from il!, and the anatomist who convevs to us kaowle.Ue of th^ wonder- ful .-triu-rure ot the Irini la fr.iai >, do well. But " man does not live by bread alone, oat bv every \vord tbat proreedetb oat of the month of 9o.1." n^ voice is nil aivua.l us. Iiu sjieaks in all tho wor'ts of si-i-nc.'; and wliat we wish to de.il with now, in the particular course of lectures I am to Rive, la t' > forget, as it wer,-, the, in- tell.-et'ia! a-p.-ct of a-ti oaomv, to for^r -t even— or rather only to take !b" results of — , ho th"oreti -al :i>;>"t-ts, an 1 to consi.ler tho.s" qi 'si i >:is of \vllich I tiavo lieen speak- iiiiT— the qiie-tiiin- of the p ist. an 1 future of this earth, the prospeer of life in other worlds and the p:-e<"nee of infinities into which wn are broiu'.'it, intl-iities of spacf, inllnitier. of time, inflaities of m ittor, iutlaities in the .•el .nreuce of events, and tho trreat intinitj- — rhe Almighty God. IIVrOTIIKSES OF THE FORMATION OF TIIH STSTEM. I don't suppose ai;y one can bope from the teaoliinpa of science to learn anything clear or distmrt of the reality of tho Almighty. That always lies infinitely be- yond our conceptions, but it is well for us to tlud, and tlrs astrouiMiiy i-.-iieeinllv docs, tnat all things, even material things, are not within our power to understand ; that by the mere study of seientiuj tacts we are, brought into the presence of loconoeivahles. And therefore if it shall he »hown, as some men of science say it is. If it shall lie shown that the idea of a personal (i >•! is incon- ceivable, we are not th:-reforii to reject ir. Wo are. to re- member that it is only ono of many inconoeivables that lie around us. To-day I take tho subject of the past and future of this earth. I remind you that in tho course I i:ave before I dealt with certain preliminary considerations. T spoke, for instance, of tho two th.-ori >a »f the universe and the fjeueral f.ien nu wlnc.h b.uh of tho^e theories are based. I told you then hosv tho various planets circling in one direction round the sun, the sun also rotating in the same direction, and tho satellite lamlly turning in the same direct ion, seem t » point in a manner which there is no mistaking to a process by which the N-ilar system reached its present condition. Ouo of these th"orie.s was that it had contracted from a great nebulous mass; arid another th -ory was that tho solar 8: stem, inste;, i of coiitractin?. h'i.1 gro wn to its present condition by the in-lnwinir of ^reat flitrlitsof comets. [Here Prof. Proctor illu.str.it.'d th • two theories upon tbe s Teen.J Tlio picture shows you the ne'iatous mat ter—whnt the star depMis airir.lus in answer to the tneory. There 3 •mi have a picture where you see a number of stars sur- rounded by nebulous nritter, and this picture su.^ests a certain amount of evidence in favor of the attraction t henry, tho attraction tow.ird th-i various centcr.s of l!i:ht. Tho n-'\r picturo shows tho way in which neb- ulous matter sometimes extends over enormous regions uf space. This picturo illustr.itos tho wonderful neb- ula in Orion. There you POO It spread over enormous ro- irlons of space, and suc^nsts that, as regards quantity, there is an ample amount of this matter from which nchemcs like the sohir system may be formed. I am passing down from the earliest condition towaid which we can trace, back Die, past condition of our earth. This nebula lias been shown to be constituted of great quan- tities of glowing ifaa, hydrogen and nitrogen bciuj; pros- Past and Future— Eicliard' A. Proctor. 37 «nt In an elementary condition. In otliev words, tlioy fall to Rive tlie lines usus-lly given by tlii-so {rases, lint only in each casa a single lino ; and thy ide.i has been suggested by a physician of your own that all the ele- ments may havu been proilnce.d from tlieso elementary etatr.es of hydrogen and nitrogen. I hope to show you thrtt there is no possibility of arriving at tho real beaiu- uing of the earih. but I shall pass back to that first stage of whi -h we can liopo to have any information. INSTANCES OF FORMATION IN NEBULOUS MASSES. I shall show yon tho great southern nebula in Argo, although rather faintly. It looks as if motions were taking pi. ie« iu tho star spaces— as if some, progress were actually making under the very eyes of astrono- mers, toward tho beginning ot a new solar system. We see those great masses moving, changing iu place, and \ve may imagine that evolution is there beginning. Another picture snows the central part of that nebula iu somewhat enlarged space, and that contains a sun •which, as it were, is immersed in that nebula. This was formerly of the first magnitude, but it has now been ranked iu tho fourth magnitude. It has become scarcely visible to the naked eye on tbo darkest night. May ifc not lie tho first of a process by which a sun is being formed, or the last t We may see it tending toward an end, and fiud that there we have a sun which is gradu- ally flickering out. like a candle just before it expires. So we see we may have a system cither beginning or gradually dying out. Here is another picture showing the changes this nebula has actually experienced, and we will now have a series of illustrations of various classes of nebula, in order that we may have a choice between the various orders of nobulaj, from which wo may imagine our solar system arose. There you have great quantities of nebu- lous matter in great variety of shape. Here is one of these nebulre where you seem to see various centers of light, as if the nebulous master -were gathered in toward some centers. After dealing with these primary states we must pass to the condition of our earth as a center. Here is the other theory, that our solar system sprang from a gradual drawing in to word the center of great masses of glowing matter. Instead of being contracted, masses of glowing matter, hard or liquid, were drawn in toward the center, which led iu the first place to the formation of the center of our system, and afterward to subordi- nate centers of aggregation. Here you have one of the great circular clusters, a cluster tending toward a sin- gle center. Above you have also one somewhat tending toward the center, all suggesting the possibility that centers of aggregation may be formed. SIMILARITIES TO THE SOLAR SYSTEM. Now we will have au enlarged view of that great spiral. Here you see the central part of its true pro- portionate dimensions, and you seem to feel that that great center of aggregation will grow until it becomes a fitting sun. Over here, in this next picture, you see the first subordinate aggregation, and you see iu that system that a planet, that will occupy the same posi- tion as Jupiter does in our system, is being formed. Here is a picture showing the process of formation. Here you see the spiral branches are more distinct, one from another, and you see beside the central aggrega- tion, one of the first subordinate aggregations — tho Jupiter of that system— and another which we may re- gard as the Saturn of that system. And so we may per- ceive that the other branches, not perceptible by us, may lead to aggregation1', out of which tho smaller planets of that system are to be formed. In the next picture you will see one of tlieso spirals turned edgewise, so that you can notice tho flatness of its nature. We know that our system is, as it wcra, a Hat system, and if these spirals were not tlat wo should not find iu them tho true analogue of our system. You cau see our spiral has something tho shape of the gn-aC whirlpool spirals, precisely as a cloud nc.ir the horizon look's long and straight, although its shapj, vie wo J from bi'li/w, would bo probably round. Another series of photographs was thrown upon tho screen, and the lecturer continued : I told you that wo might rt'Coaiiiz1! in the signs of the star depths, the past probable condition of our solar system. It mi/ possibly be that in this ring of nebula we have a prior condition; that it is from this ring of nebula that these spirals are to be formed by a process of breaking up. I want to call special attention to tho fact tnat tbeso rings, like the spirals, are almost flat. When they are seen edgewise they have that elongated shape. PROCESSES OF AGGREGATION. Here is another nebula having only oue center of ag- gregation. Here, you see, is one center, and toward that center various branches seem to tend. That seem.s to me instructive as tending to show that these creaC spirals are not at resr. If they had been originally at rest, then there would always have been the appearance here shown — that is, a great center, and all around that center branches would be seen tending inward; but if they wero traveling iu some cases forward with great rapidity, then there would lie a tendency toward au oc- casional eccentric. In other words, the supply of mat- ter to the central aggregitiun would be greater at ona stage than at the other, if tho ne'oulous mass were trav- eling from a poorer to a richer region, or vice versa. And now in order to show that we have evidence of a prior condition of our solar system in that stage of neb- ulous matter, thougli not necessarily as a great rotating nebula, we will have a picture brought on illustrating the spectrum of a comet. Hare we seem to see the prior condition of matter, but we find in the comets other signs of the existence of groat nebulous masses. Here you see bands of comets whic'a correspond to the glowing vapor of carbon, and you seem to see the sign that comets coutaiu the glowing vapor of tl>at element — carbon. We have these comets traveling to us out of the star depths and bringing information as to th&sa great masses. Here is another picture of a comet, and I wish here to remind you of the enormous extt-ut of these bodies and the great quantities of glowing matter which we have to believe in as soou as we recognize the fact that these comets are made of such gases. Tie breadth of Ilalley's comet— the head of it— is 70,003 miles. You see the enormous quantity of glowing s, is presented before you. Nor was that comet of Halley'a by any means the largest of Known comets, but was in fact comparatively small. The comet of 1811 had an estimated diameter, not of 70,000 miles, but of 700,000 miles, and its tail was over 12,000,000 miles long. No matter .* hat Jegree of variety we give to the material of these comets, we yet 'lave immense quantities of glowing gas. In these glow- ng gases we recoguizj the first condition of our earth to which we can carry back our thoughts. THE CHILDHOOD OF THE EARTH. I hope to show you that there is no limit, either in the beginning or the end, to the processes of change, but we must stop somewhere, and it will be convenient to stop on either side at some point. I don't know liow we can go further back than to this nebulous condition. Wo have carried back our earth to this nebulous state, 83 Extras— Lec'iirc a:i.1 Lil'.cr Scries. nhen If grithi-TCil in from its earlic-t i-liil iho..d. ••<> i < ilona m.itr -r (roui without, captur- ing t!io-e p.iMi.Ui.s III it cain<- II '.tr cll"U_-:i t > ir, :ilnl K'r<>.'. ing, as it w . >. ill tli.iM' indrawn ]).irtici matter. Taat was tlie mere beginning, and during the •whole time of its hi.-torv until we 1-11:11 • to the appeal. i:ee of lifo upon its surface, ir has beet) gathering matter in tint w.iv. Kvervthing tint tin re :, in tin-, ri i, n;ir ho lie*, mtr brains, have liccn '. .• •>! 1 1. Ih.- £ illu 11 jig 111 .if in. ill T, ii< it fniin o:u> ]>:irt Of space, but the great force of cravity lias been en- • r l.andle or M-C, lias boon onco spreading throughout ti.r imiiicii.-ity of sp ice. Ami n >w we puss to another ]>irturc to siiotv you the relation between comets anil JIH-' . .- a rei. recent. ition nr \vh.it you niicht t" be a comet. It is iii reality cue of tlie . i'-e. A. 8i: i'M> .-TAGE OF EARTH GROWTH. N .'A- to ihc n.-xi -!.!_•• of our earth's condition. Bo- plntiing oa a .nvaf ina-s of glowing eras, it gradually ! I eh anired from a flattened condition io a globular iorm. becoming mure ami more elobular in ap- jie.u.ii.. •(• uiuil at last it presented a form pcrloctly elob- ul.ir, ur nearly so, invin^ only such an amount .of ilat- R • e..|-i-i-s;>,)ini -a to its rotation, and having moat of tin- <|ii i.i;i :a tint we recognize iu the sun. Tir of the sun shows what was probably the f"i" > "f our eui-tli. We can pciircely fail to re< ^ ze the fact that it must have once beon a sun. It n I hat at that timo the uioou was a satellite, a i ul t!:.i! ' . • in tli theu afforded the supplies of heat a ml li_-M necessary for thu existence of life upon the moon ; but what, vi-r view we lorin wo feel thac in the time ^ !'• ir i: Oral contracted, from a state of glowing gas, first ln-i;aii to have some liquid matter, or solid matt T, iu its •itutioa tuo earth must then have beeuasun. "• ' mother picture "showlnp: the sun's surface. It ina., b< in.it tiiis earth on which we live was not only n, but fho.vcd all those phenomena of spo:s. And i i p.iint out here a dilliculty to bo eon-ulrn- i. u>- nu : no be carried away too mnco by analogy , and •-'^ ' :';- ' i '"' has passed through, or will pass through, "II ' i ''i.»t the other members of the solar sys- »'•'" 1" ' • ! tnroiiKii; that ouco it was like the "'•'; "'•'' still Inter it presented the appearance Jui>n r doi -, and - • 0 . until at la>t it became like the iiioi.n. \V,- must i-ean-mber that tlio question of the «ini:iii il (i i mtity of m itn-r comes In as a verv import- it it r. Hi -il. rati .11, ali'l i; in i y be that HO t WO Orbs Of the univ alike, and no one ever had any <-!i.in- ' •'- 1 -poii'liii,' to any .single chauiro in the ap- ; -f any oilier orb. Tin re i, tin. ji,,pit t'> be reiiH-nibi r.-d : that volumf1 and -ni uee .IP- i. ,-. I together In snoli a way that the • •f the 'Hill-rent materials tii a fnnu th« sur- f.i-'i- uf a iilanel \\ill be iliir-ri'iit aCOOI luur to :he >izu of HP- i-l in.-t. Tin- MH-f.ii-i: of a pl.im-l, after all, is the important relation, so far at leant ic ;i,e naturnof Ufc la coi-C'Ttied. Lil I , '.ii tin m.i-t part, ou the surface. It is but a very small section of the earih'g ei-n^i, an.i a \ . ry s:uall potion of the dep;h of tho atnio-pln re, tliat i-^ necii'iie,! lt\- lit'i'. tfnrl'.ice. after all, is tbe (rreac question, und surf.icn and volume arc not Minilarlv eoain'cted. If a plan;-: u:i> t wic • tae diameter of another, it h.i.s lour ti:ne> tin- ^urtai-e, ci-^ht times the weight, an I fi.ir'.it tinn-s i he volume of that oth.-r. And that would make a very Lrre.it d.ll'.-iviicn in the constitu limi c.t' ii> atioi.spiiere and of its ocoaus. Th:-re would in- i i :hr tini .-- the quautity of water, eiirlit, times the taiantity ..I' o\y .-en. i-i-ht tiim-9 the i]iiin;it\- of nitro- iren, s1. lih a >ui l.u-e oniv four times as irivat; und that is i in- HI in i eonilition of our plant'! as I proceed to consider it. Bo, with eiirht times tho quautitv of matter beiujf sjireadover a aurf.u-. ly lour times as ereat, there would be twice tho quantity of matter— twice tho amount of water and atmosphere for eac'i square mlie of siirf.ici'. And that would prodtu-o dilfereuces that would be very marked indeed. Then from tho very bi-eiiminif of a planet's existence it has only a certain quantity oMieai, dep iiiliu.ir ii|i>)ti its oizj and the niiirht that resides iu it. Si> tlu suu at tho beuiuuing of ita existence had more heat than this earth has ever had. So again with the planets Jupiter and Saturn. I men- tion these facts not to negative any in.slru-tion wo may derive from the analojrios boioro us, but to prevent too much stress being laid on those analogies, i >h ill have ()(•;-, i.-ion, probably, to sajr that Jupiter represents tho earth as it was in its former state of existence; but there are essential points of difference. EmiLAUITV OF TUE SUN TO THIS EARTH. Now we will have another picture of tlu- su.i brought on the screen, and then we will proceed to consider tho nature of the sun's surface an 1 tha probability that tho earth's surface corresponded iu some de,gr<»o to that of tho sun. There we have a more spotted picture of the gun, and you see at the border, the MLTHS of tho exist* encc of a deep atninspheiv, and, asit were, tho floating over the surface of the sun of something very much likA slag floating upon the surface of liquid, molten metal. Wo have this theory of thn sun to consider, rel itod, as ic probably must bo, to tho past of our earth — tho theory that the suu is at present merely a bubble of uuiUer, as it were. You are aware that Prof. Young of Dartmouth has advanced this theory, and there is much iu tlie app.-aranc..1 of tho sun to su^gi^t it — to suggest tiuu that irreat center of our system, while there are cold spots upon it, is always ra llatin:,' its heat , so that there i.s a continuous transition of vis.-ous sub- stance into liquid globules, and thai I h .• boiling d >wu of iho.-e globules produces continual showers of meteorlo rays. They descctnd again, a-ud keep g itherin^ as they descend; but after a time as they approach tlie irreat ueatcentei ile-v again become vapor, aud so there is a continual down-fall. Another picture will be brought on tho screen, illus- tratinc, on a larire BOale, Hie n iture or the SUM'S Mirface. There you liavc that i.ppearane.:- resembling slag, ol s\ Inch I spoke. You 800 thu mottl-d ap|>e ir nice ; tho ri'il.ulie-t o!' the phenoiiieiia pre.seiilivl by the sun. We will no.v have another picture, showing every minute detail as ivvalcd bvthe tele-cone, with tho hope that \ve may po->ibly reco_;uiz> something thero that will MiiLCu'e.si. tlie IMIMI.T condition of tno surface of our own earth. You 806 ..II the.-i- co'np irativol.v smal bright points. ii;id ih • bright matter iu which the bright points seem to be ll'iinnr. Wo . shall now have another IL.-I me, shov.'iiiLr what 1'r .>!. L niL,-ley uf I'-tt-birgit b-i.s i\ei-i-d. n- resolved these bright polo cs into still small) r points, au i tucii ho has found that in tho Earths Past and Future— Richard A. Proctor. 89 borhood of the spots there is that wonderful appearance you there see. It is in some souse confirmatory of the theory of Young, that there are. continual showers taking place. You see the upiter part of the dense mat- ter, and here you have side vi-ws of the, showers; and owing to some great eruption— possibly or gas from the sun's interior— you sco rho.su showers spread. Nor need we be deterred from accepting that theory of Young's from the fact that the Ions streaks of bright lines assume a curved appsaranos, heeauso we know by duvet telescopic observation that trrcat cyelouio dis- turbances are constantly taking place there. I wish you to remember all the time that wo are dealing with the possible or probable past condition of our own earth. The appearau.ee of the suu may probably have h;id its analogue in the past history of this eartli on which we live. Now that picture will be passed on and another brousru t on showing the cyclonic action of which I have been speaking. At the present time tlie sun is in this condition. Gradually parting with its heat, forming these great showers, and graduullv contracting, as we believe, the sun will contract, the «ho wera will attain a greater depth, as it were, the crust of the shell becoming thicker, the Bides of the shell becoming less, the whole contracting towards the first condition 'of our earth, regarded as a liquid or solid globe. When the time came that the whole mass of the earth was liquid, what changes would then have taken place 1 We are in the habit of judging what would take place from the behavior of water when it freezes. We know that ice forms on the surface of frozen water and that below there is liquid. We are so in the habit of dealing with analogy that we suppose the earth must have formed a solid crust. ButI conceive that Dr. T. S terry Hunt and those who follow him are right in assuming that there would be a formation of solid mat- ter in the interior of the earth in the first place, and the heavier matter would all sink down, gathering toward the center, and that for a long time the outer part of the earth's crust would be liquid. Then, at last, there would come another change. The center would become solid. The liquid matter would become more and more dense, more viscous, less plastic, and at last it would be so dense that the solid matter so formed would no longer sink, and then at last the crust would begin to bo formed. It would ba separated from the gjeat solid mass of the interior by a sort of internal shell of viscous and partly liquid matter. And that, I conceive, was not merely the state of the earth at the first formation of the earth's crust, but is probably the present condition «f the earth. THE FORMATION OP THE EARTH'S CKTJST. We find that William Hopkins and, many others have adopted that view. And there U one very strange possible confirmation of the theory that the interior of the earth is of this nature, a great solid mass, separated from the solid crust by a viscous, plastic ocean. Ter- restrial ruacnetism. carefully studied, shows such a change m position of the magnetic poles of the earth as can only be explained by the theory, advanced by certain astronomers, that there is an interior solid globe rotating under the outer shell, but not ac the s_.mo time with it. Thus, there are four magnetic poles, two poles of the interior globe and two poles of the outer shell, and the continual change of the relative position of the great internal solid or liquid mass, and the outer shell, pro- duces a corresponding change in the position of what way be regarded as the mean magnetic poles of the earth. At auy rate, we find in this theory an explana- tion of these irregularities upon the earth's surface. We should have the surface con'rnctlng, and it would contract more rapidly than the liquid matter under- neath, and the result of that would be that it would, force out that liquid matter, and thus oceans would be formed of glowing liquid matier, outsidn of the crust. And wo find traces— >o the best geologists tell us— of just such processes. We must cither lake that view, or else we must take tbe view that was adopted as to the nature of all the change by the German. Meyer, namely, that in past ages there were such great downfalls of meteors thar, when they fell, thov were conver'^d uito liquid or gaseous matter* which spread itself orer the earth, and thus produced thoso great extensive regions which were originally in an igu.;ou.s llui 1 state. And hero I remark — to show how one m;iy be led to a theory and imagine it to be original with him when it is not— that the very theory which I advanced, and which I supposed was a novel and startling one, viz., that our moon's surface had been rent open bv great mcjteors and that the signs of such violent contact could bo recog- nized in the multitudinous craters of the moon, was the- old theory of M.eyer as to the former condition of our earth. We will now have a change made in the pictorial illus- trations. One remaining feature of the sun is to be men- tioned— it.s colored prominences — in order that I may re- mind you of that epoch of the earth's surface when the whole surface was surrounded by glowing flames. Then after the first formation of the solid crust there forced itself out from beneath, from time to time, the liquid matter, not unaccompanied, we may be sure, with great flame. So that at that time, if the inhabitants of the moon had studied the earth, they would have found existing all around the solid crust of the earth great Manic* such as now exist around the surface of the sun. THE RAIN OF METEORS. You now have before you a picture representing the meteoric downfall. We find much in the appearance of the earth now which shows that that was taking place all the time the mass of the earth was being formed, changing from the gaseous to the liquid condition, forming a solid interior and then subsequently forming a crust. All that time there was a continual pouring down on the whole surface of the earth of meteoric matter. Tueu we have clear sigus that some of this matter must have existed in large globo.s. Najr, we may go further. I speak of these globas as large, which they were in reality, but they were very small in comparison to tue earth. I have spoken to Dr. T. S terry Hunt upon the subject and he feels satisfied that it is the true theory that those meteors which fell upou the earth, and which, when carefully examined, show signs of the existence of certain forms of metals that wo assoziate on the earth with vegetation, were once covered with vegetation, that they were, so to speak, first the orbs of real vegetable life, and then, that ani- mal lite may have existed upon them. We know that those meteors fell in such massss that there are whole strata of earth that correspond iu structure with meteoric masses. And the strange thought is suggested that there has gone toward the formation of those strati* myriads of former meteoric orbs once surrounded or covered with vegetation. So that the startling thought of Sir William Thompson — which was deemed almost too wild even to be seriously discussed — the thought that life upon our earth may have commenced from the downfall of meteoric masses, is a thought that secutiS to have a scientific basis. TUB EARTH WITH A GLOWING CRUST. We will have another picture brought on while I pro- Trilune LxtraK— Lecture and Letter Scries. to co:i*l''.cr tlie next st.i,- • of t'n- earth'- exi-tenee . At tlr- -'.I,'- K wa- s:irr.ni:i le 1 by a i:lci\viii_' ern-t, v. hKh mii-t ;it tli it tim • h iv, • I. nl a deep atmosphere. Ttie whole tit tii>- w.itrr tli:it fir-n- ":ii- m- ma mi:-1 have been present lu the forai of Mi-am. All ilii- sti-.rn uii"u tin- Mil-face or Hi- rarrh \\oa.d be raised illti) till' .iMll i-pliere, illld tlllls til -I'0 Wo:ll 1 ll.- ill! iitiiiospia-re ex'-rtin^ a mo-t enormo-is oressurfl upon the surface nf t'ie i- irrh. (.£ rti- ap irt fr iai the intense Iieat that inu-t iiatui-.tlly liavi- t \Uted at tii.it si m--, quite apart from that intense beat, we know vcrv wei that umli-7 that cnon::oin pr-s-ar- the boiling ]iiii:it woiil 1 1) • very lii_-li niil.-i-l; .nil th'-reior.- the \\ h"lc .-. :• tin- oartli, tin- whole, of tli ii ^lowiii'-,' cni-t to which w.- li ivo ii.iw brought tin-, earth, would have continually faHlDir upon it en- it streams of water. linliiiiu' at a vcrv intense h.-at— li.ii Inu' at a Hindi crcat'-i- than our ordin ary water. J>ut th.it wmil.l not In- all. IIydr..i-ul.«rii- ..i-iil Wi.uld 1"- formed, and Milphnric ui-iil— tin i.iat we iv -,>:;ai/.n 118 tlio j-'n-at fi-solv- 1.1 HI-- im'iic-t metals are resolved — hyi-i->i-nt atmosphere, the >.rno la true of the oceans. AVith tin -.>n i h lii^r .-^ t alii HIT place, the tiuie would cumu whi-n tin- ciiliiui'- w.i- i-i-ninvi-.l from the atiijo.solicru 11 in 1 tin- n ^iiiiihur, an.l n< it in n,' would bo left but carbonic course, irmu the atmosphere we now li. ittir; ih i: o ionic ai-i'l must havo existed in iinich irrr.iti i mi iniiiH--. to make the material out ol v. in.- i tin- str it .i of tli • i-.irrli have buen forun;d. It is that Sum- I't'tho,- -tratii Jiilir.iti! liavinjj bi;en fiiinn-il ii\- Iivi:i_' i-n-.it:iri-N— Miat they ara the mere .1 "f i::Muini-i- iiii i|-iainitie.s of creatures that ''in '• alive. 1; H. al>o, sve llud certain of tlie.se i-t hivi- iii-i-n ini-iin-d hy th(> ilirect action ol rarimiili- ai-iil ii|>'Ui tin- crystalline rocks of the earth, l>Ut \\lii. li U' i-han^'i-il into flay. Thus chiilliri'S wi-ntnn; oarboaioo i locuully became wlthdrawu frum tli- ut iiin-iilicic. ami tin-n piohaiily i-.iine tlie time when tin- | ii "i- -- ul wiihilrawiii^ tin- carbonic acid Was helped l>y 111'- i . ; 'ii. AI.VI.s I ()K VI. DICTATION. \"' R U w.- kii-iw, withilruwd c.irbo:iio nclrt gas Hi'- air an. I i olao • it with oxytf -u. Thou we i- to tin- tun • wli.-u v.-,'rtatliiii was llrst intro'iuced HI -i', b-foro the solemn • I'l-L-iniiinx' of life on the earth, bc- hfe Is unit'iubtedly is tin- of lifi-. M.iy it b •, that KII.HI- -ir-r.i' . ! • In that form T - Of the I in ii I I inn-: i o.ilV-- i liat I II ml nivrtelfn.it in the li-a-it h.i if ii i in- is <| i --ti.in-i ii»n 'I \\itli tint nia'l -r. A in in of >i-i -ni'o inil-l .-.-I tlin-i- i|n ..in.- ap irt li-.nii I lii-ir r.-lii;ioii.H usprrl. i|illti- a|> nt limn III" liilrr|i|-'-l ili.nn which have b -I'M --'! upon tin', \\'.irl Ol '.'I. \V • in iv b- p.-i-i'i- -tly t the works of Ood will nut i -arh us \vruii»r. \\'<\ nnisl i!.-.il with tlii- m 1 1 :i-r < | UN- ap irl IYn:n I h • pri-- COIK-I-UI- 1 i ii.-rpi-'-t iti'MM. Ov--r .ni'l uv.-r .IL.MIII it lias b . •! . I lli.it. iinr inli-rpr.-.'.iii in , ;ir.. wruiirf, iiml U MI n wi-11 h'- so in HIM in.it IT Of Uiv c;,-i:-u or life. For iQStaOOO, It u uinli-:n i:i-;rable that t'.* flOHcriptions plren in tin- liible may not liav •• n-fi-rri'd ID sai-h process of cv.'liitmn as ilus I am now foilo-.vin^; an 1 where it is suit t.'i.it the Almighty mule tliis or mat kiud of ore nun-, it may bj that it means that he then tra\v laws to tin- uuiyer.se un.i'-r whii-h t.ie.y wore 8Ul)sequeiitly foraied. It seems to mo thac we can torui no idea of the Almighty God as consistent as to supno-c cuntinual processes of creation^ Any way, whatevi -r \ i -w sv.1 form, we tind that \ i IT -tation was iutroJuced at a sta.^i' not prior in tlie existi-iu-e of animal life oa the eurch, and it appears manifest tiiat the vegetation of thosa days was miii-h richer than the vegetation of our own time. It u.isMn-ii mat thos.) forest masses were formed from which the supplies of co.il that wo are now using wore derived ; and in those times trees existed on a scale so ^n-at that all of our lar^o forest trees wouid seem dwarfed into bushes by comparison. THE FIRST ANIMALS FITTED TO A DENSE ATMOSPHERE. It would appear that (he time at last arrived when animal life bccam : possible. The first erea' urea that lived we have proved to have breathed an atmosphere such as in our tun • we cotil.l not respire. That atmos- phere contained m.u-h more carbonic aei I. Tuey seem to have been fitted for life under those conditions. Then tlier,* was a sta:,'e when the asoect of the earth w is s'.rauijo indeed. TUo whole earth was sur- rounded at that time by an enormously atmosphere, continually laden with clouds -ii as we recognize in the planet Jupiter. Volcanic diMiiT-bamres were then taking placj to a far greater extent than at the present time, and thus its atmosphere was having continually poured upon it I'n-sii supplies of carbonic acid fras. We may \vellconeeivo that the aspect presented by the earth to Ihe iuhabitants, if there were any, of the m.iou, must have corresponded with souie decree of elodeuess to that wiiich we have now in I lie planet Jupiter. We here have a representation of the planet Jupiter. It is supposed to be a picture of our earih at the time when its atmosphere was ladeu with enormous clouds, and wuea underneath those clouds iiio.-e operations of abundant vegetation were takmt: place ; when su-an^e animals exlsted,such as geology Drives us tne record of: the enormous saurian, with lou^' neck sireiem-d aimve those oceans, as the imaginary sea serpent has been conceived to do in-day ; peculiar animals on land, and (lie startling dactyli. m creature, with enormous bat-like win^s.il.iatln^ in the dense atmosphere at tuac time — tiioso creatures that we find provide i with enormous eyes so that through the d iricuess of the cloud-laden atmosphere they were enabled lo search alter prey. THE SUUFACE GHADUALLY FITTED FOH JIAN. \Ve shall now have another picture of Japiter, with 'he appearance that the earlh may at that time have piv- M-nled. Now at. last came the Inn- when the animals Ii--... m lo improve in their qu.iliiv an 1 eliaracler. Wo may conceive that tho proc. .»es of evolution wont on, and the animals at. pr.--.eiii i \i.-i in^ on I lie earth ln-tfaii lo appear. Wheiiier tnit j»roci ss of evolution led to the introduction of in in upon tho .-ei-nr is a point I iu-e I not venture upon, for my vn-w-i on that matter would be wortli very !i;;ie, and ii must be left to the geologist, AI la-.tihero came the SKI;;.- \\ hen man e Relieved that tho process can continue for an indefinite period 1 It seems to me that tho way iu which man is consuming tho vegetable supplies of the earth is such as to show that there must bo au end. When man, the in- ventor of so muuy machines which are using up tho supplies of coal — when man insists upon using the ma- terials of the earth at such a rapid rate, we begin to see our way toward tho end. By that means it seems to me animal life will come to an end long before those mate- rial physical processes by which astronomers see-that the earth is passing toward its end. We see that the earth ij parties with its internal heat; that the great central sun. must, iu the long ran, draw do\vn to the stage when he will no longer have that great supply of beat which he now possesses. SOURCE AND CHARACTERISTICS OF ENERGT. There will be a loss of force, a loss of energy, using these terms as they are beginning to bo applied by men of science. Force is unchangeable. One foiin of force changes into another. All energy— working energy — maybe consumed; for instance, if you raise a great mass of matter to a great hight, you have a certain quantity of lorce available from the position of that body, and iu tho falling down of that body it may be m.ide to do work. Iu falling down it gives out its heat and has no longer available energy. It gives out energy according to the position of the body before £ fell, but it is too much spread to be useful. It becomes part of that heat that the earth will eventually radiate into space. So with the sun's heat whicli. being at a high degree, is a source of energy, but finally, when it will have parted with that heat, there •will no longer be energy, although the force will be spread throughout space and still be in existence. We find then the earth gradually tending toward the end. Is the end apart from that which will result from the consuming powers of man? Does it resemble the end we recognize iu the case of the moon ? Wo see in the moon an orb gradually dviug out. Is tne eatth tending toward such au end as that 1 It seems to /ne that hero we have introduced again the point to which I called your atten lion. Here then again we have introduced that question of tho prior condition of all the different orbs of the solar system, the larger orbs existing with much greater original heat and much greater relative quantities of atmosphere, and there- fore in a condition winch does not tend to reproduce orbs in aoy stage, in any of the stages, that the smaller orbs pass through. In this picture of the moon you see quite enough of the aspect of$ it to say that the earth will not pass to such a condition. The moon may be looked upon truly enough as an orb that is dying out nod no longer fit to subserve the purposes of life. In the fullness of time it shall fall perhaps on the central gun or earth, in some way to give out new sup- plies of heat and energy; but at present it is iu a dead state, and there is nothing in its appearance to show that the earth will ever have this aspect. NO rnonAim.iTY OF THE KARTII BEING T.IKE TUB MOOW. Thi're i.s the moon with its surface covered over wita these marks. IL-ro i.s a place [ooiuting to the picture upon tho screen] where tho meteoric missiles have fallen into the moon, corresponding in a certain sense to tho stage when missiles of tho saina kind were falling on the earth, but where. is tiie earth at that stage of ita existence had ubundant materials out of which oceans and atmospheres were to be formed, it would appoar as, if the moon, by virtue of its smaller siza, had not; and therefore all theso small signs of disturbance on tho surface of the moon have been unchanged. There have been none of theso processes, of which tho signs on the face of the earth have not been swept away, or if they exist at all exist far down below the strata of earth which have been formed by denuda- tion. Hero you have again that wonderful scene of barrenness, and I conceive there is nothing in what we know of tho earth to show it will ever arrivo at this condition. Again I say that this earth seems very unlikely indeed to present such an appear- ance as that. I don't say, indeed, that the atmosphere of tho earth can ne"ver fail to con- tinue to clothe it. We have seen that parts of the atmosphere have been withdrawn. It seems conceivable that other parts of the atmosphere will gradually be withdrawn by chemical processes, and that then a time will come when the earth will no longer have an atmosphere. Then there will be nothing to cover the earth with those signs of volcanic action. Therefore, I say the flual stage of the earth will be very different from the final stage of the moon. Here is a larger picture showing the proportion of the inoou'd surface and the kind of aspect which the earth might nave presented in past ages if tho atmosphere had been removed from it. There you see the signs of that process of aggregation. It must have resulted from having an ou-tside solid crust. Ifc would seem as if in tiiat respect the moon might have resembled the earth. Here is a picture showing a portion of the moon's sur- face, wuica corresponds to what might have beea the appearance of the earth in former ages. NO ATMOSPHERIC ACTION ON THE MOON. You see there is much to show us that at any rate no two orbs of different sizes pasd through identically the same stages. Here is the earth on which we live which was passing through these stages when m a very differ- ent condition from the present condition of the moon. The moon now has no atmosphere, and cannot have had any atmosphere of any apprecia- ble extent. If it had, those markings on its surface would have been swept away in great part, and the moon would bo reduced to the condition of our earth whou tho heat had passed away from it. But cur earth will never have the appearance of the surface of the moon, because those marks that might originally have been seen havo been removed by the downfall of hydro-chloric ami sulphuric acids in the first place, and after that by the processes of denudation, rain showers, snowfalls, and especially tho grinding action of glaciers. Now wo have traced the earth towards its flual condi- tion. We look to the solar system, and find also a ten. dency towards a final condition. Tho sun at least will gradually part with its internal heat, and we may loot forward to a long period during which the surface of the sun will be fit for habitation, simpljr because it retains and will retain enough of its former heat to be iu a hab- itable condition. Thus can we look forward to see more distant changes, to see the solar system, as it were, traveling arouud suiue dktaut center, and see 43 Trilune Extras— Lecture ami Letter Scries. aftr-r eh-mse and cycle after cycle, until, wo uiay lit.-lle.Ve, tli'- day •• hen. in tin- v...;,|- nt" t.ie j , " Drawn cm l.y ji"«x-r <•( in ver-en ai.y Jatr. Tlie wnrl'i'- A • u • • • ul licsutr. At rest on the In-art nf the ((reatcentr.il Son." Tin. i HBHDINO CYCLES i-r mi. l i I n:E. On the contrary, inconceivable as the notion is to UP, •we flud .- series Ol mailer, serie., after serie- oi tiuie-cliani.-! s. \Vi- :n-<-. lii'lc •(•.;, iu tin- comiiiion of a creat in- not knowing tli-- i.irl ilia! it wa- i of a rare — that lii-foi-i- it- linn- others of the saim- r.iee li.nl • Uted, that aft r it h id \> >--< d a\\ay others of tho same r.n B '.'. OUl : enine int'i In-unr. It M -cm- tn nil- iii.it these cycles arc unending, and, nltluni^h they art- inconceivable l>y us, wo must believe In tin- ir fiint i n ii.i 1 progresal pivei-r';y a- we believe ill the intiiiiM oi -p ice, although wo canuot form any con- ception of that ; pten-ilya- \\c believo in a continual of mil'-, not i>flii -vim.-, as I Lave seen recently In a -riial in this country, that progress a beginning, IM..UI.-O it implies nothing of th<- k.n U It in inllnito in some cases, and •we know in MUMI- t-a i - it inu-t be. Time anil space can have no limits. Tin- .-pact- the inind tells us of is with- out limit— 111 the -far ueprh — and so here science brings before us \viiat I ronceivo to bo the true teach- ing; not the materialistic, {jjwhich tells us that •wo may know evrrvthinj? aud may form an opinion a-i to tin- \\i-.loiu and power of tlio Almighty, 'nit tin- teaching which, after all, is expressed in the Scripture-. •• Can-' thoii by searching Hud out God! C.in-t thoii liml out II:s wisdom unto perfection ? It i- as nuh as h.-a\ t-n, what canst thou dol as deep as bell, what r.in-t thou Knowl" Aud apaln, those other •words of Jo!> when, -peakincof the wonders of creation, lie says: "I.o! tin-.- are but a portion of God's ways; they ntter but a whisper of His glory. Tho thunder of Ilia power who can understand ?" LIFE IX OTHER WORLDS— SECOND LEC- TURE. KOM: i.i- 11 u n \ M.TS FITTED FOR EXISTENCE— MER- CDBT, VENUS, .IL'riTER. AND SATUKN TOO HOT — M\l:> AND TIIK MOON TOO COLD— SOME 6ATKL- IIII-> t)F JUPITER OR SATURN POSSIBLY 1IAB- II \u; I.— SPACE AND TIME EQUAJLLY BARREN OF l.n i:. I'rnf. 1,'ii-lianl A. Proctor gave tho second of his •opplemental Series of lectures at A-suriatinji Hall on tho afiri iiniiii of April 4. As at the preceding I'-rture, tlio aiiilifiico which gathered was very rni'l :i|>i>ivriai ive, consisting largely of '1 In- ItiinK! treated of the probability and ]-'.--iliilify of " 1-ifo in Other Worlds," and the conclusion uriivitl al by tho lecturer, as tho re- mit of sririitiiir iiniuiis, wasadvcrso to tho popu- lar theory that t In- ot In -r planets of the solar wystcin, c-|.i rial! y the major ] il a m I .-. a i e a I J)l eSOtlt habi table. I-\i'irs A vi. < .I.N 1 1 i MI \ : [have received several lot- ter- rai'iin: my al lent nm to tliei.n-t ili.it. many of the nuilienn- v. hn liavi- i-olli-i-ri-il fo hi-ar tho present course of lectures wen- not. al.le to afteaM tlie fm nn-r course, rml that, ilit-n-fore, I oiuht m>t to i.r. r to m liter In th(> foiiin-r lietures im though they h.ol In en heard. Of thcso Ict'crd one linitusuio to ujention, 111 tlio course of the-e leftures, the ceueral facts relative to the translH of V. nn-. Thes" Ictteis I wouhl likf io answer. In the llr>t place, it will uot be just to repeat simply to-.lav, for in-tance, that \\liich I i:ave before, on the EUU'8 family o! jilamt-; Laving jrivi-n a prospectus and lectures tini; that there woiiM be, a C -rt.iiu novel;,'. It miL'lit he a pleasant but not a )ust thiiiL- to do, and all I t an ,-av in reieri-nce to the r. c]iiesr, i.-, to touch on those matters \\ hirh are neci »ary io make my .subject com- pK-te, and 10 touch tlie.u sutlii-icntly to demonstrate tho tads in -co.-ary, but to make the subject, so far aa pos- sible, new. In regard to the transit of Venus, T think you have had enough of it. It is not a subject which is perhaps sjiecially in\itinLr, and theretoro I do uot think 1 >hall cievoto any portion of these lectures to the treat- ment of if. FUTURE MEANS FOK MAN'S KXISTENCE ON EAUTII. Now I pa-s to the special s'.il.ji-ct of to-day'a lecture, iu which I am dealing with the .-u'.ject of other worlds than ours, need I hardly say, the sun's familv of planets, and I propose to-day, in.-t.-.id of civmg my con.-ideratiou to the distinction which exists between the. two parts of the two families, to discuss that sutject with special reference to the new I henry to which I have been led. Brcwster's theory was composed upon the Idea, that other worlds, the planets and the satellites, and possibly the suns them.-elves, are the abode of life, and were intended to bo the abode of lite, not merely for a portion of their existence, but for all time. Ti-at is Brcwster's theory, and it maybe considered a theory of the plurality of worlds carried to its utmost possibility. Then there ia the theory of Whewell. I shall hardly speak of it as if I believed he really had any theory on tho subject, but ho wrote a book to show what there was on the other side of the tubject. Still It is a theory which is associated with liis name, but ho really wrote the hook on the Plurality of Worlds to show that our world is the only inhabited world, and that tneiv are just reasons for so repardintr our earth. Tho view to which I have been led is this. I take the analogy of oe.r earth, and looking back tlffoiifjh its past history, I flint that lonjr before life bejran on the earth, even if we take tho lowest i.irms of life, that Ion;: brtoro then, tho earth existed as a s'o'>e, erlowin^ with intense he.it, aud for many millions of years, a inucli ion:er tinn than sho has been tho abode of life. Preceding that time, there was a much louder period w:ie:i tin- cai-tii w.is a m.-r« mass of vaporous matter. T.ien looking forward, to the future, wo seem to see tho tim • apor lachia^ when the earth will ease to bo tit. for the ah ) Io of life. Wo cannot tell when that time will bi>. it may He that the, higher forms of life will first suffer ; that I'm <|inlitv tdvcn to mau by which he has the power of e\hiunite cr.-atur.' «h> lives on wh.it Un- earth produce.— that quality miyemi'd- a mm. to his misfortune perhaps, to consume i he-« su'-stane •.•< ; that at last life will bo iiii]>ossibie to tin- human race. It may bo then that man will llrst perish from the face ot tin- earth ; alt- 'rlh it then- will be a time. \\heiianimal life, will coiulmn' an I vei: dablo life may remain as the, last form, asitwn th" I1.--I lurm of lifo Oil the earth, aud with IhesiiWill folio .v mo;1 • eh.ui ,' • ^. hpokell of 111 the I'ooU--) of asl rouoill V— t hi! eh lllLTes mat"- rlal and iiliv.Mcal, bv wnicli the earth will bo rendered unfit as an aln.de of life ; or it m.iv be that liTo will eeaso first through the f.icr of t lies • clrin',-.'.s. Now iu regard to the future of the earth as an aliodi- of life, wo can form no satisfactory opinion. We find, as the opiuiou of Life in Other Worlds— Richard A. Proctor. the geologists, that the interval of between one million ami ten millions of years is the- probable time during which animal lifo will continue ou tho earth. Looking forward to the, tuturo wo have no satisfactory means for our guidance. Wo might even say a few thousand years" was tho limit of time in which the human race could exist with anything lite comfort. W>- do not know, however, what powers man mav have to employ tho moans garnorod upon tiirth. ITo m:iv by souie contrivance, as Ericsson has suggested, be able to u^o those parts t-f tho sun's heat which are at present wasted and lost by radiation. Ho may construct instruments so as to garner up these supplies. One way of Ericsson's rs this: There Is a possibility that you might havo tho sun's heat gathered, that falls on some desert place, and the whole of it em- ployed in lifting up great bodies, and these might bo the. menus of driving machinery. It might bo gathered together in what we may call sun machines, and so em- ployed to drive engines and do that work for which coal is now used. It may be that is tho future to which man's ingenuity tends. THE EARTH'S CONTRACTION BALANCING ITS RETARDATION. It seems to us to lio within our range, seeing certain physical and natural processes, to say that t^e enrth •will one day be the scene of death and desolation. One of these corresponds with the moon's change in rota- tion by which it was worked down until its period was a lunar month. Tlie earth has a tidal wave, which is act- ing as a sort of brake, and slowly but continually reducing the earth's rotation. You will remem- ber that in the former course of lectures I dwelt on that fact. I have since heard news which will be gratifying news for all those who may be terrified with the idea that in a few millions of years that state of iiff.iirs would be brought, about. Prof. New- comb tells me that recent observations on the moon, since 1863, show that the moon is running away from her calculated place. Some change is tailing place in the moon's motion. Astronomers havo too thoroughly mastered the lunar theorv to bo in doubt about that. It must be that a certain change is taniug place in the earth's rotation, and not of the kind I have spoken of — not retardation. It is increasing in rate. Here is a strange piece of information, not the first brought to us, by the companion of the earth, its satellite, the moon. It seems to show a retardation in tho moon, and we know from that that the earth is accelerating her motion. It is shown, too, that it is not uniform. We can understand the retardation of the earth, the great tidal wave being opposed to it; but what are the changes which are leading to this accel- era^iou ! It seems to mo in this way. It is a process of cooling. The earth is gradually contracting, and that leads to a hastening of the rotation, and that hastening is to be regarded as counterbalancing tho brake action of the tidal wave. Now it seems as if it more than counterbalances a portion of that, but for eorue reason or other that change is taking place more rapidly than any other. Tho irregularity is then a pro- cess in the interior of that plastic ocean that lies he- Death. It is a curious law, hut we must accept facts as they are presented to us. We thought tho earth was losing in its rotacion, and now we find it is gaining with a variable rate of gain, and (hero Is no clear evidence that it is going to lose its rotation m any measurable manner. There is another change by which the earth must gradually he drawn in near to the sun, that the ether must compel the earth to travel more and more inward, until at last it must fall into the sun ; hut the period is so long that to our conception it is an infinity of time, if we only recollect tho extreme rarity of the ether that occupies space. Prof. Whewell studied Eneke's comet, and was led to this result : a man drawing a full breath takes in as much air as would form a globe thr;.'e inches in diameter; in order to take in as much air at the pressure on Encke's comet ho would be required todraw iu a globe 6,000 miles in diameter. If liio earth is to be chocked by an atmosphere like thatit must bo in a period of millions of millions ol years, and we can hardly doubt that before that this earth will have ceased to be the abode of life, so that whenever the earth falls into the sun there will be no destruction of life on the surface. MERCURY NOT TIIE ADODE OF LIFE. Now we will have the room darkened while we apply these considerations to the various planets. I shall have to mention a few facts from my former lectures, but I shall take them for granted and so procoed to apply them. The planet Mercury is not studied under favorable cir- cumstances. When it is nearest to us it presents a crescent shape, and when its full front is toward the earth, it is smaller on account of its greater distance. But we feel quite satisfied that it can hardly be the abode of life such as we are acquainted with. The sun pours upon it with from four to ten times as much heat as we have. In this picture you see the sun in the various sizes as seen from the different planets. Tho upper picture shows it as seen from Mercury; here as seen from the earth, from which tho comparison can be made. Here we havo illustrated before us the enor- mous supply of heat poured on Mercury. Upon Venus also it is greater than upon the earth. Another pic- ture shows us the appearance of the sun as seer from Mars. Another shows The appearance from the asteroids. Bat I want to call youi special attention to the sun as seen from Jupiter Saturn, and Neptune. I shall show that the sun is not the cause of the changes there, and when you see the smallness of the sun as seen there, comparing it with the sun we see, you will see that both in Jupiter and Saturn that tiny sun cannot produce tho effects that are ordinarily ascribed to it — changes of great activity that we cannot believe to be brought about there by the insignificant sun that would be seen there if those were inhabited worlds. VENUS NOT YET HABITABLE— CONDITION OF TIIE MOON. I pass from the planets Mercury and Venus rapidly be- en use we have so little telescopic information of them. It will probably dispose us to regard them as intended to be the. abode of life but not that yet. Only when the sun has lost the fourth part of his heat in the case ol Mercury, and in the case of Venus one half, will they be inhabitable. When the sun has lost half of his heat, the time will come when Venus will be inhabitable. It will then be with her as with us now. So we loolc forward for millions of years when she will bo inhabited as this earth is. It may be that the piai.ets are inhabited only for a short period, and not necessarily cotemporaueously. Here is Venus. You will see that there are certain markings. I woul.l cail your attention to thb great benefit of the clear atmosphere of America iu observ- ing these marks. Iu England they say they can watch- them and see them in the periods of the rotation. Th6 large telescope at Harvard and the other fine ones of A.lvin Clark and others fail to show them. Trie subject seems to me very much as if it were an optical delusion ; that she shines with so much light that th'> eye is de- ceived. Three other pictures of Veaia will be shown. 44 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. Indicating on a more correct i>l;ni tin- del'u-aev of ; markings. V,"e tee some i»ign> here ot nil atm<>-pl' : . which is- -ary to lnV. Tin -re v..u see tin- t wilight (•mil-. Hi. it • more marl; .-il, and you tlifi-- i- :i ii 1^-1 ulity of life, ad It depends upon the ex- i-tenee of an .l!ni.i*phere. Nuw we will pa-> t.i th • planet we lire- able to study to Hie lie-t adv. inlay -. our moon, which wo an- so used to • \ as .1 mi-re .-atellite, lull which Is a planet having I In- -aine pain around tin- sun as we li ive. We an- .-o ae- 1 Iu i--u' .11 I I he .-.Till as tb.6 Center of the. s.ilar in, that t tli.ii -h,- is a planet like our ow n. - a planet circling rein I the sllll, having HearlV tllC same patb aa we bave. We win ii"W h.ive a pictur- ni (he moon ! roui.'lit on the .-crecii, showing tlie relai T( size tif tin- earth. Now let tins In- ivim-m "Ted. You .der the d.am.-ti r of thin lesser orb, aud It is about the foiir.li p.rt »l tae earth. TllO surface Of the (noon i> all nit I Ins thin enth part, but tho Toluuiu dne> n..( ln-ar .> i kri • at a proportion. It is a little uioro than ih • tiftii-rii p.irt. If w • • a--nnie th it the same qiantiry of malt. : . • mi • character as on tho earth, then- win not he tin- s ime amount for each square por- tion. So tli- i.. . ihl h ive boon less relatively. W.- il.iii'i tin I riiniu-u traei-s of atmosphere on tho moon .Direst th it theory. In my last lecture I t-poko of tlie ch.iiiue., IP our atmosphere. That :it first lln-rc was chhiriue, sulphuric acid, and car- with some steam. Wo know that tho steam tonne. 1 the oceans. Wo know that ihe chlorine and sulphuric acid were gradually used up in fnrmiu:.' cbemloal combinations aud then, the carbonic •old WM w drawn hv tho processes of vegetable urowth. The, • c!i lilies show how the atmosphere may In- gr.idualh i laced in amount. I mentioned that it iMv li i I great -r density than now. It was wlth- drawn and reilnoe i in in-i.-n reduced to its present small •mount. 7111; M. HIN'S M-i:r\<:E V.VSTLT DIFFERENT FROM THE EARTH'S. ThN is a pletore of tlio moon in Its first quarter, and you nee it i, e.iveivd wiih IT tiers. Wo flud here much to t'-aeii u- th it v. e are not to think of other worlds from DOT OWD case. Wo see that the moon could never have I throiu'li the stages that we have. It must have unflti-d for tho aoodo of lire. Life would have en.; V. tho continued downfall of meteoric matter, mi.-- -iin;,' tho ide.i that tho higher forms of life eunid not, h.ive existed there. There we have the moon ten lln.^ toward tho full, and we rei-ot'inzD ii"i.,iii^- of those thinirs that are rc- (•••k'iil/ed a.s n. •!•••-,--. iry to life hero, ut any rate to tin- higher fi.rin, of life. Wo see, then, that the moon • I thron,'!i i - whou life wiis possible. We an- n.it to reu; u d ail th p. n,. 's of the solar system as at present 1)1 • .iii.i 1,- of life. We pass from our oart li tu the MI xt In i.rd -r of ill-ta:iee, and wo find el^us that tin-re IH no life, ir that analogy be extended, the state- men (may be made that l.fe iiiiin any planet is not ut pre-ent exi-lin^', nr the IMIII- Is past or is yet to come. There Is mil'-h to ^ho'.v th it the ilni>- lito lasted upon Ihe moon was vrv mii-h shorter than tho time life may la ^t up" 1 1 I h • earth. We find, a I ,.., in tin- easp of tho small orbs lhat a email orb radiating Us lieiU into space, having a volume not corrosnnn-'In^lv l-jr;:>, p-»rt?d with its heat more n-::;'.ily, and I taiuk WL> are !•• 1 to the ia fnvnee that the smaller orbs li:te our moon onlv- remalned for a very abort time th^- a'l.iieso! life. The theory "t' Dr. T. S:t-n-v Hunt was that the met. MI s travel- Ing aroiin.l ihe MI:I were, th.' ab.i-t.-s of life. T.ie metals in tho>e im-teors indieate a form.-r eo'i.litioa when vegetable life u:nst have been pres-nr. Then, acrain, ho flnds h.vdro-earli'iii, and, therefore, ho i-onceivf.a th& >trane;i' thought that in the first S|:IL;' of their existence they were covered \\itli vei:- talde growth. THE yfK.-TIOX OF Sl'OXTANEOfS GKNEHATION. But if we a.-Mime that then the sma'ler orbs must havo eiisH-,1 only tor a short time in fi.a* condition which \\ aa favorable to life upon its surface, this other thought is .-ii^eMed that that v< ^'. -table life must have bt'eu produced siiuntaneously. It seems to me if only Dr. T. Bterry Hunt can establish this view, that \.-.- table lil'o e\i.-'e:l, we, have leaved upi.ii us the iro:i-!n.-,iou that ,-pontaiieons generation is the true law in t !H>SO cases, and the controversy between ]>istiau and Ilnxler ma-[ bi- settled eventually iu favor ot the bclu-vers in spoiitaueous gener atlon. It would alvio-t .-eem as if there \\ere a >ta^c in tho existence of any orb when vital force was present in the crb ir-i li'; an 1 thus spon- taneous veeeiation must have been pi\> lu.'ed. This \\e.-«, a curious power of affinity by which they tend to proceed duveily toward a higher staire than of the elementary con:!i: i.m, tlie ani- mal condition ; and it would siii:{;cst the possibility that there is yet another sta^e when vei.eta: le matter is ready to pass to tho form of animal life, when sponta- neous (.'cm-ration is possible, lii-fore that il is impossible; afterward it is impossible. At a eeriaiu staye, however, it appears to be possible. Kow wo will pass from this picture to another which tends to fchow the cvi lence on which some asiivnomcrs were disposed to In lieve that some ere a in res existed on the moon who possessed the power of making fortii!-- <- lions, and they point to the fact that owniir to ihe small gravitating power of tbe moon it would be possiMo for creatures of tho same size as man to erect much larger buildings, and BO large, Indeed, that tin- si-ns of those buildings might be recognizable from the enormous dis- tance at wln.-h we view tho uioou. But we IMOW that theory is disproved, and we can hardiy coneeiv.'. l,o>v creatures Otherwise corstrueled than we could havo the ivaMining power to build those. A1TEARAXCE OF THE MOON'S SURFACE. Now we will have a picture illustrating that point. There you have the trreat black shadows which v.e find thrown, there you have tho minor shadows, and there wo 1! ml tho evidence, of the U'IM nee of atmosphere, and wo reCOiUliZ • tlie fact that if there be llihabilai.t- of th> nioon they would have, even at (he time when the sun's rays were poured on the surface of tin moon, a perfectly Hack sk^-. There ymi have a picture showing the moou as her surface probably exists at Ihe present lime, those enormous craters indicating the action ami iu>,-. ntall of meteoric masses, and very little to suKge.-t the idea that life at present exists. We will have now two pictures brought on in rapid Succession, Illustrating the way In which artists havo endeavored to pic t nre the moon, with euormmis circular craters. .Supp'i-e the ca-o of this crater (pointing it out), remembering I hat It would have1 a diameter of llvo er MX miles — the irrcat crater, C'opernicuH it l-1 called — Jo you not feel that tho outbursting of so small an orb Life in Other Worlds — Rlcltard A. Proctor. 43 ns tho moon could never require such a emit orifice in which to manifest the outlctl It seems to mo tliat there •wore downfalls of meteors, anil that those great niiissrs f all in x flown, as Myers conceived, upon tile moon, pro- duced these enormous craters. The artist has made a slight mistake hero. You will see that the floor hero upon which these smaller craters are *bown lies quite high from tho surface of the moon, but it uppeara from a careful study that tho floors lin rather below the surface. Instead of being, like ./Etna and Vesuvius, aliove tho ground, they aro probably de- pressed lielow the general level, precisely what wo •would expect if irreat im-ieono bodies forced their way down, and the place where they haa fallen had been covered over with a slow filling up of plastic matter. PKOF. MORTON'S LUNAR PICTURE. I wish to correct a remark made in my former course of lectures about those pictures. You have one here drawn by James Hamilton of Philadelphia. In my former course I told you these pictures were drawn by him, and then I showed another picture, remarking that it was drawn with much less artistic skill. The real fact is this. Just before I gave the lecture, a letter from Prof. Morton was placed in my hands and while I was still arranging the pictures, glancing over the let cer, I found this statement made, that the pictures were drawn by James Hamilton, except one, •which was drawn "with much less artistic skill." I forgot the natural interpretation I ought to have put upon that letter, for, knowing Prof. Morton's disin- tereste 'ness and modesty, I might have known that he •was the artist of inferior artistic skill, and that it was a little mere self-abnegation. Reading the letter and stating the facts I simply brought them out as in the let- ter; and there was Prof. Morton present all the time and allowing me to state it. [Laughter.] We shall have this picture brought on the screen. I thiuk there is much in it indicating great artistic skill, and not only so, but there is a clear recognition on Prof. Morton's part of the way in which the craters must have appeared. [With these delicate words of compliment the picture was exhibited. 1 I think this is tho real appearance the craters must have presented on the moon — saucer-shaped. Here is a littlj work of imagination— a little village with a church, corresponding to the suggestion made about requesting Sir John Herschel to advise some means by •which religious instruction might be conveyed to the benighted inhabitants of tne moon. [Laughter and applause.] I have another remark to make about this picture. I laughed about this picture, saying that it was a mere fancy of the artist. But it would appear that some gen- tleman has constructed a picture of this sort, and as- suming this was a photograph taken from his picture, he grew highly indignant and wrote to THE TRIBUNE, saying that he had good reason for placing upon his pic- ture that little village and that little church. His letter abused me in round terms for taking that little village to task. The fact is, I did not borrow from that artist, did not even know his name, and the picture I really used was this one of Prof. Morton's, and I am sure he would not be angry were 1 to suggest tha probability that villages do not at the present time exist on the moon. THE CONDITION OP MAUS. I shall now pass to the consideration of tho planet Mara, introducing a picture showing that, thi.s one planet is the only one which gives signs of being the abode of life. Here wo liave learned that these rugged regions ure continents, and these dark regions are oceans. We Know certainly that th^y nro oceans, and that the familiar water, such as we drink, exists in the planet Mars. We know it as certainly as if we had sent some one there to bring us back a pint o* it to analyze, and, therefore, when wo see great \\ id ' regions hiding over these well-Known marks on Mars, we know that they aro clouds, ami therefore we Know that storms, rain, sun and elouiis exist there. Then recognizing the fact that there are continents above tho general level of tho ocean, wo know those rains must find their way down to the ocean, andean only do so along brooks and rivers, gradually growing larger until they pour their waters upon tho ocean. Wo have then all the terrestrial signs, BO to speak, that we recognize as in tho case of our earth, marking tho latter as the abode of life. It maybe thought at the first view, that we have a planet which we can hardly dismiss from tho list of habit- able worlds. But, first of all, M irs is a much smaller planet and must have had much less inherent heat, and, therefore, on that account alone bo a much colder planet. I reminded you of the apparent size of the sun as seen from the planet Mars, and how much smaller it appeared than the sun we see. Then tho probability is that Mars, being relatively smaller, the atmosphere would be rarer relatively, and cold would result from that also. All the facts about Mars suggest an intense cold, which would render life impossible to creatures constituted as we are. Here is another picture showing the planet Mars and the extent of its polar snows. Tho extent of these polar snows is not so much greater than those on the earth as to force us to believe that there is a much greater de- gree of cold. There (pointing to the picture) are the polar snows in the Winter time of that planet, and here you have tho polar snow in much smaller extent in tho Summer time. But you must recollect that if the quan- tity of water is less than on our earth the vapor would be less and the quantity of snow or rain fall would bo less, and therefore less than on our earth. Here is an- other picture showing you these same polar snows more perfectly. Here you see they extend to a degree of alti- tude corresponding in Mars to tliat of New-York, ami showing that in the Winter timo an exceed- ing bitterness of cold must prevail. But I thiuk we must not apply that question of snow to the ordinary analogies that we have In the earth. We, must take into consideration that a great intensity of cold must there prevail, and if Mars was intended to bo the abode of life the time has now passed when life could have ex- isted. Tne conclusion forced upon us is that the rela- tively small extent of the oceans, and therefore the rel- atively small atmosphere of Mirs, precludes the idea of tliat planet being the abode of life. Here is a map of Mars, and you see tho way in which oceans and seas are mixed up together, with no excess of ocean, as in the case of our earth. Another curious fact about Mars is the way in which travel would be possible from any one part of the planet to another without leaving any particular element that a person most desired to remain on. He may go on laud or water, just as he likes. He may go all over the planet on land, and visit any part of it, or he mav travel all over it by water, and visit every river, bay, ocean, and lake. THE ASTEROIDS — DOES NATURE WASTE 1 And now we pass from tueso planets with the thought, as I conceive, tliat we have not yet found any one of them that can at present bo the a>)odo of life. In the case of the moon and Mars we ecem to see that life haa passed away, that those planets have become rcfrigor- Tribune Lrtras — Lecture and Letter Scries. ated and life no longer exist* upon tlioni. Of the five • '1- .1 round tin- sun two arc ton muril In- il-'-i an 1 two •in- tuo rnld. Uh.v should We insist Upoll |-i gardini: the {••:< -'lit time as that to which our iv ing should iipidyt It M, of course, tin- treat linn- for ourselves, I, ut It Is not necessarih specln> linn- to which our reasoning should applv. \V-- .-In-ill I regard the past lime \vln-n Mars W08 Inhabited or tbe future time when Vi mis and Mercurv Mill In- the abodi : •' . Then- i- no special rca-on for 'ding t!.i- present time, any more tlian ai-.v man has la regarding Ills own time as m ce-s.irdy tin- mo.-1 im- liortant BO fur as tlie earth Is concerned. So the exi-:- i net- of tl.i- caiV.i is tin- most important time !ou l.i\.-,in ihi- ;i -t pieiure, tho scale on which ti funned— Pallos, Juno, Vesta, and Cen-s. The \\ li- I • in i-^ of tlie.-.- planets combined is very much . U •••••, remain to bo discovered, and thus -,\i- n i I'lrnize a schi me of millions of orbs. If I hey follow tbe -.line law as i In- other planets, then, being )i .-mailer than the eartb on which we live, it must l.av.- 1 ei u \ i r\ 1, MII: ago when they possessed inherent heat i-:.. i ._•;, in lie the abode of life. They must have had it bi.- -.10! i time, as they would bavo parted with it very quickly. Thus wo have presented for coutempla- ti< n the siraiiLir f.ict that millions of millions of years a^" the-.- i l.uiets were the abodes of life, each for its own lire. pei 0 I. I ~ Men-, indeed, a waste I Are we to regard those little i rl>- as Indicative of an enormous waste in nature? W.i-1 to • the law of nature. Wo judge of e.nisc all our ideas are limited, so far as time and apace an- concerned. But we cannot apply our ld> a iv, and where there Is nn infinity of matter an i • •.'.!• cm hardly pay there is a waste. Sup- • i l..mdnd \, n-.s, or a thousand, or a year • i, or a few days only, to bo the time during \\ i'-:i li:,. hus lasted on those small t !i in MILTS to our knowledge tho fact that of tin- niiiniii-r . f - els f.illinir from a tree — perhaps only ;— In many years often may produce a tree. 8 • r ' us waste. The Idea of waste is continually ie us. 80 it is wltb tbe planets of the solar ve measure them by liuuinn analogy there i"- an immense wi.stc, but as there is au infinity of time and -pare, tlicro can be no waste. Ai.il i" :, re u,- pass from these smaller planets I would remiml vim «.: ..n- great wlgn of waste In our own earl h. 'i'hi i\ |. i l Inhabited IH tlic surface. All th-- ci'-nh-al '"•' ' • waste. BO far as we apply our mode of D < nt. -o long as we regard human life as the ; lest ni i • ie of the Almighty. When wo cou- : thai i 111 -i iron- number of millions of cubic miles of m. »iter whi'-h la-, i- iio l:\nicerciitiiresexistinirwiihin them, \\e are amaze, | at the apjia i.-iitly enormous waste. Only a thin eiu-t i,f the , .irth n iuhajiited. II , lellire.s nf the pl.im-l, -llggestilliJ curioilrt thought- as to iio'.v iheee planets may pass- eaob other with.nl, - e, and, (In refn re. during tho long uh, n th'i e 1 1 la net- \\r r, Hi,- al'odes of life, the UviUfC creatures UDOD them might h ,\ e i xr hai.C' d Ideas v.-ith tne creatures of Other planet-, lhat traveled mll- llous nod n.ililoua of uilleb away from tlioiu. THE GREATER \Ve will now pa.-s t .invo the clearest p,, -slide evidence that then- planets are not tbe ai'n !es of life. I showed you how that tiriv sun poured mi Jupiter. Here is Jupiter mark* d in tins strange, way. Here are trreat Mn-aks showinc signs of great disturb- ances talcing place in those belts. This slantin:: streak shows .-urns of great forces being at work; this streak— which had, be it remembered, an enormous surface— for you must keep in mind that when you are dealing with Jupltor you nre deali'ig w'!b a planet whose diameter is ten times that of tin- earth. Tin- \\holesurraco of the eartb would not :•(• moie than this ]>oition of the belt which I now indicate; and a surface equal, probably, to the w ,'t !•• of our (eminent v. as perceptible in an opening through which the dark srrtare below could bo seen. Now tins streak changed from Its present p"-i'i >n until it was slanted rurbt across one of these belts, nnd cor- responded to the motion in t!:at atmosidiore at the nito of 200 miles ]n-r hour. That motion continued upwards of six w eek.s, and we must accept the inference w li at a (Teat hurricane was blov/ini:, shifting tins erear open space In the cloud layer gradually, so lar jis the facts are con- cerned, but shifting it with enormous rapidity, so far aa the planet itself is concerned. That is a planet had sbruniz in. So hero is an atmosphere so den> • that tho d •iisity would bo greater Ulan that of the hea\ n-st metal-, and we know ii,-veithele.ss the true weight of J.ipiter, and we know Its density Is only one-tourth that of the eanh. Wa find in JupKcr the same reason for a small density aa in the earth, or in oilier \v»r Is a great, heat. That great planet— th<- lirs t suU-niiiiato airirregatiou in the solar system, and containing ro matter than all the other planets put together— must m the first processes of its construction have engendered an enormous heat, and that u ould not pass away so quickly as that of tiio earth, and the planet would remain much mor,- healed Hi in th!, > cart u ; and doubtless, we .still see in the planet a condition w;:eiv life is utter'y impossible. PO -nni.rrv or j.iri'. <>\ .11 rirr.u'.- SAIT.I.I.ITES. But 1 told you we loiuid .-la-iu to suppose that till planets around Jupiter are the abodes of life, we llnd those satellites bare a Harface iar_e enough to euublo them to lie lit abodes for li\ ing creatures. Tl:>- lar_,e-t one of them i- larger t hail tho moon, and the others are^abouc the same size. \v.- tin i in deiimg with them tho same fact lh.il we loiind in t lie moon, that, being smaller bodies, the in at would pass rapidly Life in Oilier Worlds — Richard A. Proctor. 47 away and the tune fitting for lifo would bo smaller. So the changes vve have, to Hud life- oil them is smaller. Upon the earth we find millions of years that life was possible, and nilllloua «>f years before and after. In the satellites perhaps we liavo only to deal with thousands of years. Tin- re- fore, taking the present time, we find the chances very much reduced, because tho interval when lite is possible is very lunch smaller proportionately than hpri'. You see the largerof Jupiter's moonsisalarge body. Still you recognize that those small orDs could not re- main so Ions the abode of life. Even if supplemented with the heat of Jupiter, only one. of thorn can possibly be Inhabited at tho present time, and probably not even one of them is so. You see you must go back into tho past or into the future to tind tho time. Hero is a curi- ous relation of the satellites of Jupiter which is well worth noting. In tho uppermost picture you will see all tlie three satellites in a straight line. The lower picture shows them iu a different arrangement. You eee they must circle around like the hour hand, the minute hand, and the second hand of a clock; so they have a certain orderly motion that brings them time and asaiu into a straight line. They are so adjusted that they will continue this forever. THE SATURNIAN SYSTEM. Now that picture will pass, and we shall have a picture of the planet Saturn. There you have a picture of the planet Saturn. I conceive that this planet is doubtless intended to support life, and afterward to be a scene where life will exist; but still I feel that it is not so now. We have these enormous belts, with signs that the. atmosphere changes in shape. It seems to flat- ten at the poles and bulge out at the equator, and these must be of such enormous extent as to render life impossible on tho ring planet. It •s an orb still too active to be the abode of life. Another picture will show you the changes, in which also you will notice how large a portion is bidden from the sun's rays by the belt. That dark mark is the shadow cast by the belt, and on all the planet that is behind it there is this great dark shadow. Let us inquire whether that arrangement is such as to accom- modate the wants of living inhabitants. On this part of the planet where there is Summer, there Is no shadow of the ring, but where the Winter is there is no sun. Therefore the cold, if there is no inherent heat, of that Winter, instead of being moderated by some effect of the ring, or heat reflected from it, is enhanced by it. If wo are to believe that all the orbs have been in- tended to support life, in this ring we have a family of orbs. It is made up of a multitude of minute satellites. No astronomer has seen them, but this dark portion ha-\ been said to be due to the fact that there wo see througj the ring between a number of small satellites. That view might he accepted if that was the case. Peirce and Bond of your country and Maxwell of my own country have shown that if it was a solid, it would have been broken up and been thrown in fragments on tho surface of the planet. Now a ring made up of small satellites could possibly exist, and the thought is sug- gested that they are intended to bo the abode of life. If we take Dr. T. Sterry Hunt's view, we can hardly refuse them to be tho abode of life, of animal lifo and vegetation. Then thero would be accidents all the time, a series of collisions, producing a widening of the ring. So you seem to see these multitudinous collisions may result in a constant destruction of life. Here you will see disturbances in the equatorial belt. You will see with the aid of the great power of the tele- scope, great cloud-like masses. Changes of color have been recognized in them. A milky white color had changed to a ruddy color, to different shades of ruddi- ness, and agiiin back to the original white. We seem to see signs of internal activity of the, planet ; that the sur- face below is of a red boat; that tho planet below tho cloud layer is glowing with a red heat. I think we, may safely say that both tho planets Jupiter and Saturn are still glowing with ruddy surfaces. This picture shows the length of tho Saturnian year. These are the shapes shown when tho planet is looked at through the tele- scope. It gradually opens and closes in thi* manner and these changes require for their completion 29 years, or thereabouts. I think 1hero again wo have the thought that the planet cannot he the abode of life. We know that behind the ring, in that portion on which that black shadow rests, we should lind Hie coldness of death. Now we will have a picture of the planet wilh the ring withdrawn and the great shadow shown. It grows wider and wider, spread- ing out, not with a rapid change, but taking seven and a half years to pass to this last appearance. Then it slowly passes back into its former state, taking nearly seven and a half years to do so. It takes nearly 15 years to go through these, changes. When you consider this enormous shadow you must think there is not the adaptation to hying creatures which we recognize aa necessary. Here, on this earth, we find the most per- fect adaptation between the requirements of living creatures and the planet itself. What creatures are there living here who could exist on that planet in thia long Winter? I have calculated that in some places in the latitude of this part of America, of Madrid and Rome in that latitude, there would be an eclipse lasting seven of our years. Therefore we seem forced to the theory that Saturn is not now the abode of life, nor in- tended to be for millions of years, but among its satel- lites there may possibly be a different condition. But there again we find bodies so small that the chances are very small that this is the time when life is existing there. BARRENNESS OP TIME COMPARED WITH THAT OF SPACE. These views may appear at first tight* somewhat new and startling, and the thought especially of the enor- mous waste that exists may occur to many, but it must be remembered that one of the great results which sci- ence teaches us is that we are over and over again mis- led by the want of knowledge. If then we look at the whole of the solar system and find nothing to lead to the belief that any one of these great orbd is inhabited, there is nothing in that which reflects upon the wisdom of the Creator. When we pass from our earth and tho solar system to other systems in the infinity of space, what opinion are we to form ? I think the same general opinion : Our solar system is the abode of life, because our. earth is inhabited. A question arises here: Has our solar system been continuously the abode of lifo? When it began on earth, had there been life in any other planet 1 When it ceases on enrth, will any other planet cease to be inhabited ? This earth is passing to its end, and when life has passed away from it the solar system will be a scene of desolation, with no life upon it, and then will come the time when the next satellite will be tho abode of life, and so on for the future as in the past. The time during which life has existed on tho solar system, has only been this short time or that short time, separated by enormous intervals when there was no life. I think if we take the analogy of space, compare space with time, the analogy will be a true one. As one is inconcei vable,so is the other. And what do we learn about Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scrice. epace t — tliat the occupied parts of Rpaoe arc inlimteiv small compared \viili tin- unoccupied parts. If \ mi ti;kc the o'o'ar s\ oteiii, thi- distance > i < tw • n tin- pi mets com- prised in it ;ind tin' orni;iied ji.-n-i-i .ire Inconceivably qmall, comparatively. If we take tin- distances «>f our »<>lar -y-:.-m ii-i.m oth'-r Mil.u- .-v^-ems we still ll'id the crrii| ! Spaces incoiu-eivalily sin:;!! coinpar d with tin' v;i<-:iiii - . So I thiiil; v. •• ni.iv h-tly take the ana. .iinl I.HII-, :iiul In l;i ve Ill.it t!' CU Pled parts Of lime are inroncer. ill eompar • 1 with tin- duration of tin- linn- wh'-n no h'f h:i.- i \iM>-d. Il ui:i> ap; ear to our conceptions that ill taking this view of uiir uiuvri>e we .iro calling up a -1-'1' "'' "f great liarrei!iie~s :i:i I d -o!atl.iii. Alter ;ill it is tin- same With spare, ami We mtl-l take the-c ln:i!t. rs !13 WC fllld thrill. Lot us take the evidence that is brought before u- and no: insist up,m this or that th'Ki-v arcordiiig as it seems natural t<> our conc.-ptiors. If we Hud great depths of t-pa.-e \\e III. IV We.l li.-li. \r that tllC iilflllitC duration Of time Is only broken into at inconceivably great intervals bf the period* during wlileh life has existed. At any i it' - . nee ha.- 1 1 r.i n d it that In 'tore us, audit see ins the . of tin- matter. We a;e Ir.i to i-i coi::i:z • tin- ti.iiieness of our coneep- d \\eniu-t in- continually misled in appljing flliito C01icln-o>;i- lo jnlinilc matters. OTIIKR SUNS THAN OURS— THIRD LECTURE. A .N A 1. 1 .., Y 1:1 1 \\lli N l:llS OF COLORED SUNS — VARIETY l: A lllll: THAN UNIFORMITY THE RULE OF THE f.M\ I Mr. rrnctur delivered bis last matin6e lecture, tin- ilm .1 ut l.i-, faiw. rll series, at Association Hall Apiil G. Tli.-. Hiilij.ct, "Other Suns than Ours," required an illustrated description of aim -' tin- out ire heavens, as well as M'eeitic r.-niarks upon the brightness, colors, itnl iii..tin;i, (.1 tin- stars, the nature of the Milky Way. ..ml the hypotheses of the lecturer and :>t her ast i-mmine: > a.s to the constitution and extent •»f ' hn-ts. Tho audience was large, and, is '" tin- pi \ious lectures, mainly composed of ladies. The a i ran Cements for darkening the ball w.-ie p. rle,t. m.| enabled the numerous and beauti- ful illu-tia: MM-, to lie exhibited, to great advantage. LADIES AM- pointed out that all the parts of the earth are inhabited, that it seemed (he purpose of tho Creator to supply lifu niust abun- dantly, on land, in sea, in temperate zone. In torrid /one, and in arctic zone, maintaining it at all hi^hts above the sea level, and at all depths below the surface of the earth. Every p:irt of th> earth H"i-ni"d to be Intended to bo the abode of life. That was a true analoiry; but then that shows us only in what way a world is inhabited when it Is passing through tho spe- cial sta^.! of time intended for its habltability. We inn>t not overlook the olher analogy of the past condi- tion of the earth that shuws us so clearly those Ions intervals of time when no life at all ex- isted, and we are bounrt to take this analogy, and to accept, not as a mere fancy, but as a probable theory, tho view that tho various orbs forming the soiar s\ s'eni are only intended to be lor a short time the abode of life. Then we may proceed to inquire whether this or that member of the solar evstem seems to be at the present time, likely to be the abodo of life. It seems to me it is the just way to view the matier. We are to form our idea of tho solar system from the knowledge of our earth, which is a member of it; and so in the case of suns, we must take what we know of our '•bright, particular star"— rho sun— and from that knowledge inter whether iho sun is intended to be for the greater part of its existeuce the center of the plan- etary system, and then what are tho conditions under winch the various planets traveling around other suns may probably exist. We will now have the room dark- ened and a view of the sun placed upon the screen. PERIOD WHEN THE SUN'S HEAT SUPPORTS LIFE. We have in our sun a scene of continual activity, and wo have there tho same argument th-it is derived Iroin the earth. Activity implies life, implies a certain deflmto period during which life exists. We know the activity of the earth has had a beginning and will have an end. Wo infer that the activity of our sun has had a beginning and will have an end. We recounize in tho pa>t history of the sun that it was then intended to sway the, various members of tho solar system, and to supply them with tho requisite quantities of light and heat. It was only when the sun had contracted that the system, properly so called, began to exist. Now wo see all these wonderful processes, how its face becomes covered over with spots, and WO know that they indi- cate enormous disturbances, eruptions froai b,-low, with all tho cyclonic disturbances which sweep over the, sun, and then with that glory o( light now depicted before you. Not that we always see it, but we know it is there, that the glorious corona spreads around, and so wo have a picture of what our sun is. Bat you are to consider whethef it is possible for tho sun to supply in the tutnre. light and heat for the worlds around It. All tho theories wo have, point clearly to a dellnite period when exhaustion must supervene. Whether we regard the downfall of meteoric matter, or the contraction of the sun. or chemical proi-'.-^es. In ro- ni>ect to .ill MUM processes as arc connected with tho supply of the sun's heat, wo seo that every ono of these process--* must have an end, and tho time will come that the sun will not have that high temperature which ho s. upon the worlds urouud him. liven though wo Other Suns Tlian Ours— Richard A. Proctor. know thoro Is no real loss of force, there is a loss of energy. LIMIT OF THE StTN'S ENERGY. We shall have another picture to show that thosp dis- turbances, all these great .spot.-, sometimes rover even ;i vast surface. We have to consider that there is tho sun giving out his life to the worlds circling around him. And thus coming to view the suu. as one having a defin- ite period, we have to derive tho same argument that wo derive from tho earth ; and as we judge from the com- parative shortness of the time that tho earth is to be, tno abode of lite, and that other worlds are not at present passing through that short period of life, so we derive from the suu the knowledge that the period is comp :ra- livcly short. So when you take tho millions of .stars re- vealed by the telescope, the chances are small that it •will always bo as it is now, and it is ouly tflo gro.it num- ber of these suns that leads us to believe that they are tho centers of schemes of worlds. We will now have a picture of the sun as painted by himself. Tiie two last were tho productions of an artist. Tins is one of those wonderful photographs taken by your country- man, Dr. Ratherfurd. The diameter of that orb is 840,000 miles. There is tho great central machine of tlie solar system working with an energy so immense as to force us to view the probability of exhaustion. It seems almost as if we could not consider those enor- mous om flows, as it were, of light and heat, without recognizing the possibility of existence; ami this re- minds you of that strange thought of waste apparently taking place in the universe, since we see that of those immense supplies of heat from tho sun only one pare in 230,000,000 is employed by being received upon the planets. Again, if we look upon our earth as the only planet which is the abode of life, then see what a pro- portion is waste. The heat falling upon Jupiter is waste, and all on Saturn is waste, and only the heat received by the earth sunservss a useful purpose; but after all •we cannot be. sure that the support of life is tho only useful purpose in the pouring one of the solar rays. At any rate we have that result, that ouly one part in these many millions is poured upon the earth. Again anil again when we study nature we find what appears to be waste. Now we shall have another picture, painted by the object itself, of the solar corona. There you recognize signs of the intense activity of the central orb, and those signs will be more clearly indicated in the next picture, where the fainter parts are depicted, and where the signs of tremendous energy exerted in tho sun are •well brought out. And now we know that the whole mass of the suu is constituted of elements with which we are familiar. CONSTITUENTS OF THE SUX. By analysis we can see the sun's lie-lit spread out into a rainbow streak, crossed by a number of lines, which indicates that the sun's great central mass consists of liquid or solid matter glowiujr with intense heat, but relatively cool vapors cut off a portion of the light. The spectrum before you shows, the lines of Fraunhoi'er. The pictures of the stars I am about to show you, were not vised in my former lectures on the stars, but they have been specially prepared. Multitudinous as these lines appear before you they are but few of tho number that reallv exist. The spectrum is covered by myriads of those lines. In order that here, as in tho two former cases, we mav have something to satisfy us that wo are not merely dealing with tho work of the artist, we shall have anotner picture brought on tho screen, in which yoc will iind "what the sun has himself done in photo- graphing his spectrum. Tho upper part shows the Picture as drawn by Kirehoft': but the other shows tie lines photographed simply by their own action, and you know it truly indicates tho nature of the solar spectrum. And now when we pass to the stars wo find there is a resemblance generally in their character to the solaT substance, and hero we are led to the thought of tho wonderful variety in the system, tho lines indicating the presence of tho eras hydrogen, existing with various de- frees of density, seeming to imply various degrees of size in the stars; because if \ve assume that one of these suns is made of all these various elements familiar to ourselves, in a quantity proportionate to its mass, then those of less specific gravity will extend above the others, and the larger stars will have tho lines of those elements more strongly shown. Here is another picture showing the characteristic differences. In the upper- most picture you will see the lines of hy- drogen strongly shown, and that spectrum belongs to what I call tho kingly order of stars. Here is Sulus, 5,000 times the size of onr sun, and proba- bly having, therefore, the various elements in its sub- stance in corresponding proportion. We cannot wonder, '.hen, that that star and others show tho liu^s of hydro- gen strongly marked, as they are here indicated. In tho next spectrum are exhibited stars showing, apparently, a resemblance to our sun in constitution. The third pic- ture shows us stars probably resembling our sun in hav- ing spots upon them, and spots so much larger that the light of those suns would seem to vary greatly. Our own sun, be it remembered, is a variable star. If ho were watched from some distant point, he would be found to vary in brightness during those 11 years that tho spots seem to wax and wane over its surface. We are forced to believe that certain suns are not sufficient to supply light and heat steadily to worlds like ours. UNFITNESS OF CERTAIN STABS TO SUSTAIN LIFE !>' PLANETS. There before you is the star Betelgeux. and there is that other and wonderful star which has received the name of " Myra," in the Whale, which changes in bright- ness. We can hardly conceive that life could exist In a world circling around such a star. Imagine wliat it would lie if onr sun varied constantly in brightness, and sometimes only had a brightness one-hundredth part ol that which it now has! We begin to find among the stars signs that they are not at present— and perhaps some of them may never have been — fit to be the central luminaries of circling worlds. Here is another picture, showing how Dr. Huggins and Miller studied tho constitution of the sun. There you see llie lines of the solar spectrum, and the various lines of the elements compared by Dr. Huggins with those existing in tho atmosphere of ttiat star. Dr. Huggins found in tho star Aldebaran, nine ol. our familiar elements, with the probability that many others existed. He found mercury, iron, sodium, calci- um, antimony. &?., and here then we find that lesson^ which seems to teach us that although any particular, star may not have life in the worlds circling around it,. yet wo seem to see tho purpose. Here it contains the elements with which we are familiar. We know our suni contains the same elements which tho earth does, and; thus we infer that a world circling around a central suu is constituted in tho same way. Looking at the star Aldofaran. we infer that these elements exist in the worlds circling around it. Alter all so long as we fail to believe that there are in other worlds reasoning creatures, we find, as I conceive, very little interest in the question of life at all. The 50 Tribune Lstras— Lecture and Letter Scries. grr.it point of interest 10 u* is whether there in- crr.itr.r -. re.i-iining as we do, eap.ible of appre -lat Illg iri'iind tl;cm, ami recognizing flic nature of Iln- varh'ii- i bangOS wliien I shall have presently In dc- n-ilb.-; fur I shall d--seri in- [,i you the condition of life in tin- \vm 1 I circling arniunl til- C"lorct Mir-. We know thai th'' existence ii f man upon tin- eai "i i- inn • li shorter tban tbe existence of animal life, md *nu sin>n IT than animal a: d \ ' -g table life com!iin>-d. ami s,i v, e in- ten-ifv I In- argmifiit in view of tins fact. This picture illustrates the way In which tbe colors of tlii- double star- ;u-i- broiiiriit about. Tlie uppermost picture -h<>\. •- tin- lending lines in tho solar spectrum . jtt-l.iw it .n-i- n.i- two >pee'runir> of die doable star. Beta In f'vL'iiu-, a double star having one compoin ni • •range iiml tin- other blue, and this epectrnl an.ily-is sho-.v- why th'--e colors exist, that it is not inherent in the light of those stars, but that their at:n>-p!nT- cuts off certain •waves of tin- light, .iml I'-ave, thi' r.--t of certain colors. In the third M'-'''nim you see uinnv bands or lines • «\iT the yclio .-. i i or.mgo part, and therefore a great jiart of the \eil»w and orange is cut off, and tint blue and vmieT iiL'nt- show ao tbat tbe star sblnes as a blue sr.ir. in others there la a saperabandaoce of orange and yellow, and that -tar shines as an orange star. There is one p'-cuiianty about the double stars in the fact that we very M-id"m - • Larger component of two stars showing the blue enii.r. Von see here the central sun Is • •rang'-, ami the two comi>.uiio!i stars are green. That is the star (i.iiiiina, of the constellation Aiidronipda. Then j mi see the ii' \i t ,vo stars, imtii Mue. The third star on tne upper row is one or considerable interest, and is star 61 "f the Swan. I Hi: OX A IT. \M-.T OF A DOUBLE STAR. Now, let ns inquire what must be the nature of the life on \voi id- circling 11 mud one of those double stars. In the tii-t p:.iee, there are many ways in which the worlds circle abonttthem. Suppose, In the case of our own folar sv.-iti-m. that at some distant epoch our solar system ciriM-ie(| of ,-i sun and Jupiter as a subordinate or sorond -n:i, t'lnwln-r with heat, and forming, with tho Bon. a doable star. Now, if you consider the other oros nf the solar n.vMi'iu divided Into three classes— Uranus, Neptune, and Saturn, circling outside both the suns, th' ii Mars, the K.irih, Venus, and Mercury circling urinind the eentnil sun, looked upon as the special family «.f tho central sun himself, then a family of world-* rin ling around Jupiter— it ia evident how in tho douiilt; Mars throe families may exist. There Is a little, family of the orange «tar, another fumllv circling around tho blue star, and yet another circling iirmind lioth tin) Htarc. Tint is to s.iv, circling around the common orn of the stars. Now, according to those varn.ti- conditions, different states would exist. Tbero •would be iiil! rent portions of light received by those Mai -. Again, take tin- j] ln-i ration drawn from Jupiter, bc- r.ni-M- it himp'.H' i .. in liter. Suppose, instead of Jupi- t«-r t-hining as be does, be ba« a oonslderablu amount of brlglitncMs as a bl'ii< .itar, whilo the nun is an orange star. Then we Hiiall have illustrated tho state of air.urs in tho world cireling around the or. nitre Mar. mid having the Mm- Htai traveling iiroiind it. Wlion tho earth is mid- M-UV iK-tween the him and this lilun Jupiter, then one half of the earth would tin llltiiiiin.iteil l,v tllO blue star uml the other naif bv tho orange, and there would bo no night. Tin-re would bo a coiiiliiii.il change between oruntjo da\ ami bin- il.iv. siipp ,-ti- the hlue sun to travel onward us Jupiter doiH, tin-re would gradually i -.in i,- rln- change that Jupifc-r, after siilninsr 'it his liicrhfst at night, LTadivilly wo ild ',< .•i-mni-a funii-.- Mar. Then II ere would be the nr.i:,g • .1 . v. an I af IT t !,•• orange Min Iml set. the blue sun would still remain i:i view. «sn I tho orange day would be followed by :i short bine day. Then *,he blue day would per, and thea would be t wiliu'lit of a strange cliir icier, twilight pro- duced by the bhic and nia'.i'.'e. a st-itn of tlimg-i »lto- pether different from aiivwecan im igim-. Thentliit change would gradually gn on until tlie. Idne and orange stars would be in the saii.e p irt of tho sKy, and tllLTe would probablv }><> white sunlight. Again let us t;ike the « II otof - Msonal fh mges. Sun- {inse the d-iy to be ns it is at the eq iin-.x. ciiu.il f t'lio mo.m would bo orange. There would be an (.ring.1 and blue hemisphere of the moon, but the hemispheres would overlap, so that the moon's surface would be div.d id luto four parts, as if to divide an orange into four segments, one part orange, the opposite part blue. Where tin* two com- bined it would bo white, and the other portions would be black. Thus again the planets, as observed from tho earth, •would show wonderful changes in color. At one titno they would he lit up by an orange and again by a bluo MI;:. Then again the 1 indscan:1. would bo very strangely colored; to those parts that were concealed from the blue sun, there would be an orange shadow ; to those that were concealed frniu thn orange MIII, there would be a blue shadow, and a blaek shadow would be cast on those parts where the bh-n 1> d light of :,ho orange and tho bi.ie suns was obstructed. These shadows themselves instead of being neutral would bo colored. Wo can hardly conceive of the wond.Ttnlly enhanced beauty of the t-kv at sunset under these, circumstances. Wo rccognizo in these worlds vcrv curious and varied relations, lint \\cmay bo satisfied that precisely filed relations as I have boon speaking ot undoubtedly existed. DIFI'-FIiKXT STARS KKCAlIDKD AS SUNS. We shall now pass on to Kia Ar_iis a star, which, as you well remember from one of my former lectures, was once of gre.it magnitude, but is now almost invisible. In the «var j.sir, it was shining more brightly than any oi her .-tar in t he heavens except the star Slrins ; at tho present time it is barely visible on tho darkest night. Now this picture will passawav an 1 wo shall Introduce you to a new one. You have In tho upper row there, one of those wonderful clusters of stars. You eee bow Other Suns Than Ours—Ridtard A. Proctor. 51 laree some of them arc and can imagine how brightly they shine. Yon can scarcely fall to admit the prob- niiility that circling around those orb3 there are worlds In which life may exist. Wo can easily calculate how much liirht the various stars of that cluster arc capable of giving to these orbs that circle around them. The sky of those worlds must bo covered, not as our sky is with Stars, but with suns. There is a wonderful display of their powrr to the inhabitants of such a world. [Prof. Proctor here quoted, that passage from the poet White, in which these lines occur : Why should we thus shun death with eenseloss strife ; If light may thus deceive, why may not life JJ Now we shall have another picture of star clusters, showing the enormous variety that they represent. This picture will give place to another, showing the nature of one of these great clusters. As wo find in our solar system orbs of different charac- ter, as we find all these forms ard variety in this one system, So in each one of these infinitely varied systems — to say nothing of the infinite varieties, as in the col- ored, double, and variable stars — tbere is a variety cor- responding to that in our own system. Now we will have a picture showing a much greater scene of glory. There you have the great nebul.i of Andromeda, which Las been considered as made of multitudinous suns, and where the glory of the scene must be so enhanced that the gazers must turn away from those suns, unable to enduro their brilliancy. Now T propose to present to you as clearly and suc- cinctly as I cau, the views I have been led to with regard to the distribution of the stars iu space and the rules I would suggest as to their observation. Sir William Her- eehel said it was the great object ot his ambition to as- certain the constitution of the stellar heavens. Here we have a picture representing the northern stars of the Milky Way. I think that their aspect, that the appear- ance of the Milky Way forces us to the conclusion that it is not made out of stars, spreading further and fur- ther out into space, and by the combined luster making that appearance, but that it is a complicated system of stars, and that when we come to analyze it we may expect to flud there varieties corre- sponding to those which are exhibited in all parts of the universe ; that we are not to look tbere for uniformity or to assume that there is a uniformity where all the stars have been marked by variety, but that we are to find in these that there is a great variety. We shull have the picture of the southern heavens brought on the screen and there you will see other evidences of that variety. There you see the Magellanic clouds of light, with great openings i:i rhem and a great rift in them in the lower p:irt. That great rift will be shown bet'cr in the next picture. There you see the two branches, extremities of the Milky Way, branching out into space, and between the two that great space. STARS OF DIFFERENT SIZES MIXED IN SPACE. I must remind you of the utter incorrectness of the common account of the Milky Way that it is divided into two branches. I may say that the ordinary text- bonk account is not more incorrect than the description of the lad who said that the Milky Way was a kind of cloud in the heavens called the trade winds or the aurora borealis. The book says the Milky Way goes right around the heavens and is divided into two parts along half its extent. This division is not along half its extent, but tlieie are multitudinous nodules of lighf. The principles on which my application depends are Very simple. Suppose you were traveling on an open flat surface, and perceived a number of trees along tho horizon, all of the same size. Suppose you took an opera- glass and found a number of smaller objects rosemblinflT the other trwfe. Now there are two theories which you might ferni iu explanation of that appearance. You might conceive that those smaller trees were really aa largo as the others but at a much greater distance ; or you might suppose that these smaller trees were really smaller — were young trees. You might test it in this way. If you found in looking around tho horizon that they were more thickly clustered in some parts than in others, then you would find much to show whether they belonged to the same clumps as tho smaller ones. If you were traveling at random ic would bo a very astonishing thing if just behind each clump of largo trees there should be another clump much smaller and lying in the same line. If you find thia appearance repeated several times, there would be no doubt of it. You would so have learuedthis fact, although it would not lie particularly interesting, you would have* learned the facD that each clumo of trees was made UD of different kinds of objects. Now apply that to tho case of the starj. If you look at the star depths, you sea the stars clustered together iu clusters of large stars. If you find others that ara much smaller, and if you find that those which look much smaller are as richly spread as the others, you can, make the same inference; not that the smaller stars are lying further away, but that they are really mixed up with the large stars in the same clump. You cannot suppose that, placed as the earth is, at random in the heart of the star system, that one cluster of larse stars would have just behind it, but at an enormous distance another cluster of smaller ones. You are bound to be- lieve that stars that are different in siza are mixed in space. AN INVESTIGATION INTO THE DEPTHS OF SPACE. We shall have another picture brought on the screen, and there you will see how I map the stars visible to the eye. You will see that there are clusterings there, and you will notice that they form a festoon of light, which corresponds to the Milky Way. I was able to apply to this map, having a map of au equal surface, a plan by which equal parts of the heavens are repre- sented in equal space on the map. In order to know what proportion any part will bear in the number of stars, I take a portion of this map, say where tho stars are thickly spread, and weigh it, so as to know what proportion it bears to the map of the whole heavens, and then count the stars on it. Then I know what the proportion of stars is there. Now, if you take the Milky Way and weigh It and count the stars on it, you find that the stars are so thickly spread there that it would require 5,000 more stars to make certain other parts appear equal to it. Then again there are spaces where the stars are spread so poorly that 4,030 stars would have to be obliterated from the parts just shown, to make those other parts equal. Here tho southern stars are brought into view. There you recognize a much greater peculiarity of the distri- bution of stars. That cljud is the great Magellanio cloud. It seems as if that bore the same relation to that section that the sun does to o ur planets. I would not for a moment think of that for a theory, but then it has more to say in Its favor than that of Madl?r, -which Is that one star in the Pleiades is the center of tho whole stellar system. There you see the upper rich region and the lower rich region, and you see also this comparatively poverty- 82 Tribune Exlras— Lecture and Letter Scries. stricken region. The old theory of Sir William Herscbel was that, tin? Milkv Way was ir.-ide up of stars lying in & long train, lining further and farther away. Rcmom- beriug my plan, you -will sen that all I had to , aro shown thatall thosu cloudlets are part and parcel of 0119 system. THE EXTREME VARIETY OF STELLAR SYSTEMS. Now we shall have that picture whiou is intended to indicate another astronomer's theory. 1 call your at- tention to it, because I want to show that there is no evidence in its favor. Ttio center of the stcll ir svst -m. if it has a center, will bo in tho plane of the Milky Way. He extended the argument in this way: As you go nearer and nearer toward a central sun you will flnd tno stars travel more and more slowly. Nowthitis not true. The nearer you come to a irreat cluster of stars the slower they move. They have a drift in one direction, and the stars which lioover tho central sun would seem to lag behind, so he reasoned that as wo approach tho sun, we shall flnd the stars drifting in another direction. Another map will now ba brought on tho screen, and there you will see how I jotted down all the stars of the northern heavens, and how I jotted down l»y them littlo arrows that indicate the direction in whicli each is traveling. You will see that the arrows are of different lengths; each one indicates by its length tho distance the star with which it is connected will travel in 36,000 years. Here are tlio stars of the southern heavens, with ttioir little arrows attached to them. I conceive that no such regular ar- rangement, after what is shown in this n.-w map, can be believed in. There you hava tho theory of Sir William Herschel; but I repeat I conceive that no such regularity of arrangement can bo believed in for a mo- ment. The next picture, which will now b.- broughl on, shows what I tuko to ho the variety of constitution in tho stellar stream. With all those there are varie- ties of star cloudlets and varieties of arrange- ment which we can never reduce to uniformity. We. ought no longer to adopt those uniform rules, but be ready to admit those views which seem most varied rather than those which appear most uni- form. We see in tho star depths the mo-st wonderful ex- liiiiition of vitality— a vitality so great that no imagina- tion can form any conception of it. Wo find, In tho words of the psalmist : " Whan I consider Thy heavens, the work of Thy fingers, tho moon and tho stars, which Thou hast ordained ; what is man, that Thou art mindful of him, and tUo sou of man. that Thou visitest hlui 1" TJie Infinities Around Us— Richard A. Proctor. THE INFINITIES AROUND US— FAREWELL LECTURE. EVIDENCE OF THE INFINITE IN SPACK— THE INFI- NITY OF MATTER— EVIDENCES WHICH POINT TO AN INFINITE GOD— THE LIMITS OP OUR SENSES— THE VARIETY OF THE UNIVERSE— RESOLUTIONS OF THANKS— ADDRESSES FROM PROFS. HITCH- COCK AND NEWI3ERRY— PARTING WORDS OF MR. PROCTOR. The 101st and. farewell lecture in this country of Prof. Richard A. Proctor, the eminent English, as- tronomer, who was to leave for his home across tlio water in the Cuba, April 8, was made the occasion of avery pleasant gathering. The usual crowded audi- ence was present to hoar the Professor's views on the subject of "The Infinities Around Us," and many warm admirers lingered after the lecture to shake bands with the scienlist and wish him Godspeed on his voyage. The use of the stereopticon was dispensed with, no pictures being exhibited. A pleasant pro- gramme to follow the lecture having been arranged previously, the stage was tilled with prominent gen- tlemen, among them the Rev. Dr. S. Ireuzeus Prime, the Rev. James Waters, W. H. Fogg, W. Oliver Stone, Seabury Brewster, the Rev. Dr. Vincent, the Rev. Dr. Chessire, H. B. Sands, M. D. ; R. W. Weir. M. D. ; the Rev. Thomas Armitage, D. D. ; A. F. Hastings, Theo. Roosevelt, Robert L. Stuart, Noruiau White, James B. Colgate, Samuel B. Schiefl'elin, J. W. Pirsson, S. A. Bunco, John Taylor Johnston, S. S. Constant, Nathan Bishop, the Rev. Dr. Sey- mour, the Rev. Dr. Roswell D. Hitchcock, Prof. Newberry, Prof. Peaslee, the Rev. Dr. Sawyer, the Rev. Dr. Holme, and John R. Ludlatn. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN : I have to-night to speak on a subject not astronomical in itself, but one of those to which the study of astronomy naturally leads us. I suppose that there is no thought more common or which has been more ordinarily entertained than this— Shat space must necessarily be infinite. Utterly incon- ceivable, though, the idea of infinity is. Ev- .try one must have had the thought that if you take a line, as it were, a line through, space, \n any direction, there is no boundary ; the line may be carried onward and onward, forever and ever, and whether it meets a solid substance, -whether it arrives at a void space, still it may be carried onwara aud onward, aud c.o forever; but that this space in that direction, rim^t bo influite. To a student of astronomy this idea is, perhaps, more naturally presented than to any other, because he is in the habit of considering telescopic power, which carries the mind's eye, as it were, further aud further into the depths of space, still without any limit. Thus the idea of the iu- fluit.v of space is the one with which the student of astronomy naturally has to deal. We begin, then, with this subject of the Infinity of space first of all, because it is the one we are best able to deal with, the one about which we feel the most cer- tain. We mar entertain doubts as to infinity of tituv, in past or iu future; although, as I shall presently show, infinity of time as an idea LAS not near as much force upon us as that of infinity of space. In infinity of space wo recognize a view that we must bold. We have, the.u, som.'thirig th it is inconceivable, and that yet must be admitted. And I want, this eveu- ing, to bring before you the Idea that that which u in- conceivable may necessarily bo that whirli is true. So, inconceivable is this idea of infinity of space, tho id-'a that all around us there are immensities of space, not in rdv a.s Sir John Ilerschel has sai.!, practical infinity, but real infinity, absolute infinity, going on forever and furever. OTHER DIMENSIONS TH VN LENGTH, UHKADTir, AND THICKNESS. Tho Idea seemed so inconceivable that men in out time, great mathematicians, of most powerful uiimi.s, have endeavored to escape- from it, by this strange conception, that our idea of epaco may be limited by certain imperfections. They be- gin by conceiving: the possibility that there niigut be a kind of creature having only length, living always as 1C were, having for itsbody an Influite straight line without any breadth, only length. Aud then they p.iss tmni that idea to tho idea of a creature living always in space of two dimensions — in thickness and breadth — and show how to creatures of that kiud the idea of space of three dimensions would he inconceivable ; and they say, therefore, that we may be limited by some such want of concept ion in our powers, aud that there may be space of four dimensions; in otner words, souiethiug else than length, breadth aud thickness may be a uossibihty. Now, if you consider you will find that you can thus get over the diffi- culty, although the explanation is not a whic more conceivable than the difficulty it is intended to meet. For instance, if there were creatures living in space, of one dimension, having only length, then in- stead of living on a straight line, as the first siippusit iou was, it might have for its body, or raiher its con- ceptions might be liniice.l to, a perfect circular ring; then the conception of that creature would be that leugth measured witn the circular ring was infinite, yet we know tho circular ring would have a certain measurable size. Prof. Clifford, the great mathematician of Eugluud, one of the leading mathematicians, one of tho rising mathematicians of our day, has pictured the case of a creature having only length and breadth, living on the surface of a sphere. Then to creatures of that kiud tho idea would be presented that surface was infinite, Just as to us the idea is presented that space is infinite, and yet their surface would be the surface of a sphere ; and, although it would havo no limits, as we know that the surface of a sphere has no limits, yet it would not be infinite in dimension. So says Pr.if. Clifford auJ so say the German mathematicians, from whom tnat idea has been borrowed ; so it may be possible that it is only our limited conception which gives us the idea that space is infinite. IS MATTER AS INFINITE AS SPACE 7 Well, I pass from these conceptions with tho remark that to me they seem not a whit less inconceivable than the absolute, infinity of space. And it api»>;trs to me that so far from high matuematical power forcing upon us the possibility of such conceptions, that as soon as we take the rationale of the matter, tho ordinary, simple explanation of tacts, we are bound to admit that space of three dimensions includes the whole or possible space. You will have length aud breadth, and you will havi- everything that lies above it or uclow it. In otuer words, if you have added to length and breadth the con- ception of thickness, you have the whole of space. Wo Lave then infinite space. Wo have brought Us fore us, Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. as I conceive, that which is utterly beyon I OM" powers of conception. Then arises the thought: If spice is liiflmtL', may it not be that matter is not so, that the matter which occupies spac3 is liiuitcJ. th it the rceion of space occupied by matter Has its boundaries 7 And you will all remember the reasoning that w.is applied by Aristotle to that matter. He said : If you take in all material particles ia space, a Had drawn from ouo to the other is limited ; it has its two ends, and 110 space can be without limits of w-iieh that is true ; that evry part of it, bo at the two ends of a limited line. Yot after ail, so soon as wo apply to tMa matter ordinary reasoning, wo flud ourselves led to a contradiction. And why should wo wonder at that when we recognize the ceri .ii:i:y that there is here something contrary to our powers of conception I You will see that is the Idea— toinsisc upon the fact that as \ve deal witli these in!inki.:s wo have continually en- forced upon us the knowledgj of tho fact that there is something far beyond our powers of conception. And you will presently see that I propose to apply that to the proulem full of interest for us all. But t'.ien comes in an astronomical view of this ques- tion of the infinity of matter. It has been shown that if there, were spread throughout tho universe an infinite number of suns like tho stars, spread uniformly throug'i the spare, then it cau readily be shown that the wliol • of the heavens ought to Rio w with tho same brightness as the suu's surface. It does not matter ho'.v f.ir apart those suns may be. or how small their dimensions might be, compared with the distance separating them, still you would have the whole of the heavens glowing with the glory of sunlight unless light were gradually extinguished as it travels through space. For let this be remembered. Any group of stars of ;imi(cd extent would look as bright, wherever it were placed. If you carried it away — if it lay at a certain dis- tance—the stars composing it would gather at a certain portion apparently occupied by that group. Now, sup- pose the group carried twice as far away, then tho stars would only cover a part of the ap- parent dimenMiins that they properly covered ; but then also, the group would only look one-hundredth part of tho size. And therefore although the quantity of light •would bo reduced in proponlon to the distance, the brightness would remain unaltered. Therefore ir fol- lows if you conceive space filled with an infinite number Of stars. separated by any average distance, however great. any certain inclosed part of that space would have a certain brightness; tho portion next beyond it of the same, si/B •would have the same brightness, and a similar portion next beyond that the same. Now suppose that that brightness of which I have been sp"aliiug was a millionth part of the same size. lu other words, the, hpaco that the sun occupies in ouo of tlnuo Croups covers but tho one-millionth part of the M> ice that tho whole irroup appears to occupy; then the next tn-oup covers another millionth, an I the next another millionth, and if you go on iniiiiit"i.\, you only require to take a million of those groups t< have a million times the millionth part of sunlught ; therefore you have tho whole of that region glowi •with the plow of sunlight. And HO wo come to tho con- clusion, if stars are spread inll'jl'ely through space, the whole heaveus ought to shine with a giow of sunlight. Ir that is not the case, then we are forced to tho couclu Bion that light must be extinguished as it travel* through space. A METHOD OF EVADING Trin ASTRONOMICAL OBJEC- TIONS TO INFINITY OF MATTKU. And yet t.htira ii a way to get over that which I had thought o!, but w.ii;-h was originate:! by 5:r John Herschcl. He, points to the fac: that the dimensions of tho several component p irts of any system are very small compared with tho distance that separates one Irom the. of'er. And winm yo i pa*sto a sys'em of a higher order, you flul tho dimensions of tho first sv-tem are very small compared with those of the next. For instance, take the solar system. Tha dimensions of the earth and of.i -r p.ir;s of the soiar sys- tem are very small, infinitely small, compared with the li-tances that separate th * various parts of the system from each other. Then agiin, tho distanc-s that sep;.- ato pans ot the solar system I'rom each other aio small lomparcd with the distances that separate our solai- system from its neighboring systems in space. Proceed to a higher order an I \ ou \\ill see that the dimensions of the solar uui verso are very small compared with the dis- tances that separate it trom its neighboring universe. Go on in that way; curry up the order of systems higher and higher without limit; and then if you apply to sys- tems of that kiml— if you apply to them a pro-ess of cal- culation—you Had that no lunger have you that result of heavens that glow with tho glory of sunlight, but instead of that you mav have any ord>r of brightness you please, according to the relations you mav suppose to exist between the parts of a system and the distances ihat separate one from the other. And thus wo have this curious conception of tho infinity of matter occupim? space. If wo are to believe in that infinity of matter wo have tins coaceptiou, that it may be compared to a tree. Begin with a lower twig, and travel along that twig until you come to Where it joins the next twiir, and so on until you come t.o whero it joins the next twij:, and you have a gradual enlarge- ment; you come to a new ordur ot twig at this point; you come to a branch, and then to a larger branch, and so you go on from that larger order, and then you have the whole tree at last, and thora an end. Bit if you be- lieve In the infinity of matter, and if you choose to feel that there is a continual passage from one system to anotber upwards gradually increasing, or downwards gradually diminishing, tuea you no longer have the difficulty of which I speak, and it ap- pears to me if wo accept infinite space we are almost bound to accept the infinity of matter. Oihcrwiso see the difficulty in which we land ourselves. Suppose that occupied space his a certain Unite extent, let that ex- tent be what it may, there lies outside of it an infinitely greater region, so that again you have what apptvirs incongruous, that you have occupied space which is iu- Ihutely small in proportion to the unoccupied space. The idea of the inliniio occupied space is beyond our powers of conception; but, not a whic less be\ oud our powers of conception is the idea of an infinite un- occupied space; and ihns wo are led to believe that matter is inlinite, and that an infinite <]Uautity of matter occupies space. INFINITY OF TIMK AS WF.LL A3 OF SPACE AND MATTER. And thus we are led to thu next point that we, have to deal with, an infinity of time. We arc very naturally led to pass Irom (he infinity of space to tho infinity of time, in tlus way, that iho only way the human mind can be- i urn- acquainted with the character of matter is by tho (light of iighl. And then we recognise ihis, that, every part of suace wo have not yet become acquainted The Infinities Around Us—Iiichard A. Proctor. with, and that therefore Dime is occupied iu conveying light messages th;it wo Imow not of. We are immedi- ately led from tho infinity of spat-o to the iiifliiity of time. Let. us make this comparison. As wo take iu epace au infinite line, a quantity which extends in every direction, so let us take au inliuite lino i;i tune. L >r us carry back our thoughts inflnitely, au infinite progress backward. Do wo como to au endl Is ii not a thing that can have no endl You como to the beginning of all things ou that side, the begin- ning of all created matter. Beyond all that is the in- finite void of time. Suppose you como to the end of all things; beyond all that is the infinity of time, the infin- ite void of time. We have ou either side of us in Unity ; the idea that the whole of time has b^en and is to be ex- pended, in the past and future; tho idea that the whole of time has been occupied by the occurrences of events, or the idea that there has been some part of time unoccupied. Both Ideas are equally impos- sible to our conceptions. Since both are equally incon- ceivable, we would naturally take that which is most congruous, the idea that the whole of time has been occupied. We are led again to the utterly inconceivable idea that there can be no beginning and no end. One need not be repelled there by the words of Scrip- ture. The words of Scripture are, " in the be- ginning ; but they don't say that there was a beginning of time, but a beginning of forces, as far as •we are concerned. It has been said that the very idea of the progress of time implies a beginning. It has been said that the very idea of space implies a limit, but we know it has not a limit. So we find ourselves, whether we consider space or time, led to iuconcaivables. EVENTS AND MATTER OCCUPYING TIME AND SPACE. Now let us consider that as far as we know they are occupied by events and matter. What are the events tliat have occupied time and the matters which have occupied space 1 The matters that have occupied space are those which astronomers have brought to our mind— worlds, system?, systems of systems, universes in stars, collections of universes— and the mind is carried ou to yet higher ideas of what occu- pies space. But as to what occupies time, we recognize continual action iu those parts of space, one upou an- other. We recognize a sun gathering in all around it, deriving power from the indraft, and spreading out that supply of power over the creatures that live upon the worlds around. We recog- nize all the progress of time, and iu the regions of space we recognize the continual action of power. There is continual force and continual energy. We are told by science that so far as our knowledge goes there is an end to all that energy. The earth, for instance, was once an orb like tue sun, which gradually parted with its inherent lieat until it reached its presant stage ; and looking into the future of the earth we trace the titre when it will be like the moon, when it will have dismissed its inherent heat and no longer be fit to bo tne abode of life. Passing on the other side, wo come to orbs like Jupiter in a longer state than this cart!), still instinct with their inherent fire; and still higher than that we come to orbs like our sun, fit to be the center of schemes of circling worlds. Wo find these various orders, and recognize the fact that the orbs of our order are passing rapidly down to the next order. The sun is gradually parting with its inhe- rent heat, and will unquestionably assume one day or another the state of the planet Jupiter. Tben again the planeta Jupiter aud Saturn are passing down to a lower order. Our earth h passing down to tho order the moon presents; Hie moon may he HI ill furl her parting w.'tli its inherent heat, and so them is a eontin- iial progression from the Hgher to the lower order-i. Hut is there au end to that progress 1 Does it imply ou one hand a beginning from which all these orbs arrive at this state, or, on tin- oilier hand, aueiid to which they am all lending, and to an end when all the orbs in the universe will bo equal in point of ht-iif, and then, although the force in tho universe will remain unchanged, tue real acting energy, depending, as wo know it does, on temperature, will have pasted away. Th;it is the view tj which we aoeiu tending. WILL THE UNIVERSE BE RICNKWKD? I have heard the view insisted upon by a philosopher of this country, for whom I have high respect, as tend- ing to show that astronomy is the one science teaching us that therj was a beginning: aud that there will be an end. Here again it scorns to me tho finitcuess of our conceptions has le I us astray, aud when we view the matter rightly we recognize iu this progress a progression which neither implies a beginning nor an end. We find ourselves merely mem- bers existing through a long series of agus, and it ap- pears to mo that we may look back into tho iuliuite past through which these changes had a present state. It is as though. persons reasoning about a tree, for instance, springing, as we know it does, Jrom a seed, were not aware of the f.ict that tue tree, after it was dead, would give birth to other trees, and so there would be a con- tinual progression. In the same way we can under- stand— it is quite conceivable — that the state of things which now appaars tending toward an endis really tend- ing toward a condition where there will be a new be- ginning, and evidences of energy will continue forever, and thus there is neither a real beginning nor a real end. At any rate, we see that the universe, having infinity of space, and infinity of material occupying that spuco, has also infinite power. The quantity of ma- terial matter would not imply power, but material matter separated by enormous distances at least implies power. Take our sun, for instance ; grant him his present enormous mass, let all the matter lie gathered iu upon his surface, aud power is not im- plied, but let that matter be restored to its original distance, and give the sun his in-drawing power, and then iu the sun resides power making him fit to bo the center from which are to be dispensed endless supplies of' life aud energy. Since this distance of matter implies power, and since matter is infinite and distances are infinite, and matter occupies infinite space, according to our assumptions power m the universe is infinite also. And thus we come to the conception that there is in tho universe, quite apart from all ideas of God, iuh'nito power. We have been led then from the thought of infinite occupied space, to the thought of infinite tiinu occupied by events, and now to the thought of infinite power; aud yet all these ideas are utterly beyond our powers of conception. Why, then, dismiss the idea of a God merely because He is beyoTd our powers of conception 1 Tho materialist is right when he says this or that djc- triue is inconceivable, but ho is wrong when he says I will not admit it; tho idea or space is inconceivable, that we must admit; the idea, of infinite timo is incon- ceivable, that we must admit ; the idea of infinite power is inconceivable; but, taking the view that iuUuite Trilune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. space and Infinite time are brought to our knowledge, we must admit the idea of infinite power. TILE ATTRIBUTES OF DEITY DEDUCED FROM ASTP.OX- OMY. Why, then, stop short of the idea of inflniio wisdom end beneficence of the design of the Creator merely bo- cause it is something that is inconceivable to us J I; seems to me, then, we may fairly turn from this to the consideration of the possible attributes of D.-ity with- out being disturbed by the thought that tlio very notion of the Deity— of a being infinite in existence, infinite in space, infinite in time, infinite in power, is inconceivable to us. Why, those very attributes that have been as- cribed to Deity are the things we have been, forced to 6ee. We began with infinity of space, and it is infinity of space we attribute tu the Almighty. We are led 1'rmn that to infinity of tiu.e; thence to an infinity of power; und it is by that we ure led to the mere physical con- sideration of the qualities of the universe. Thus, then, naturally we may turn to the thought of possible quali- ties on the part of the Deity and the way in which, in Borne sense, His authoriiv may be exercised over the dominions of the universe. Take, for instance, the senses by which wo became acquainted with the uar.ure of the uuiver.se, and let us remember how utterly feeble those senses are ; on how narrow a basis we form ail our codc^ ptions of the universe. Tnere are five feebla senses ; only one of those senses-, the sense or sight, brings to us any kno.vledgi of outlying space : and that sense existing only in two small pupils which are to tell us of the universe. We may. indeed, extend the powers of the eyesight by means of the tele- ecope; but thcu we, in point of fact (I do 1101 use the word in jest), see as through a glass darkly, because we have only a small part, a small portion of the heavens brought out iutoviaw; find it is only by combining the views thus formed, combining them iu the imagination, that we can form an estimate of the real wonders whicli ap- pear; so we can imagine what might be seen if the power of the eye was increased to that of the largest telescope, and we can conceive what would bo seen if the power of the eye was increased a million fold 03 . j-ond that of the largest telescope; the wonderful dis . plays of the dark clouds and masses of matter gathering in various portions of spice, tlie power of recognizing their motions as the telescope enables the astronomer to do, learning the harmony existing in their motion?. That is something that the feeble sense ot sight only adequately extended might bring before us. THE LIMITS IMPOSED BY OUR SENSES. Nav, there is another thought connected with this subject, which is dwelt uooti HI a little book called "The Stars and E ir.h," which you in ly have si-en— tbr> aufhor of that book is unfortunately unk nown— that wonderful thought that everything taat has gone on in the universe, everything that has occurred, is at the present moment eonveving its messaire into tin? dept IM of space; the time when ijfo began on this oarth, al though it may have been 11 mi:lion of years away, all that has happened t\< m the earth, is at this very mo- ment conveying Its message mto the depths <>r cp iee ; nil that was hai>p -nm._' iluring the millions an.l millions of years In which the earth \\as forming, is eonveying its record hit" spic '•. N i.y, further bar If, when the world was a nebulous mass, ami when 1 1n- polar system was beginning, as we understand , that message is still being conveyed into the depths of spapp. Now if We a. unit the idc-u of a Deitv, Inllaite iu the power of «cune and ID the power of per- ception, then to Him ail those records are being at this \vrv moment conveyed. But after all the sense of sight affords but one of tno feeblest methods of ascertaining what is going ou. Our conceptions are feeble; but we can conceive more powerful means of learning what is going on. Light takes a certain time in traveling ; it travels with enormous velocity; but still our sense of sight is not a cotempor.ineous ouc. We have ii>- formatiou about a star at one time, whilo an- other star is presented to us at another time. The seen" is not that which exists at the time H ia presented to us. We turn to another force, the mes- sage of gravity, which, according to our present modes ot measurement, acts instantaneously, and conceive tho possibility of a creature perceiving by it, as we see. at the moment. We caimot doubt bat that all the ID- formation that will be conveyed to such senses must be, as it were, possessed by the infinite and inconceivable Being oi -c-upying all space an:l existing for all time. If we have these various conceptions presented before us, we can think as to what 1s possible on the part of the Almighty; but we have to remember that we too must be Ma absolute part, as it were, of His exi-tenee. The whole universe is at this very moment conveying information not only and not merely about its present slate, but about its past ttate. Every p.irt of the uni- verse at this present moment is conveying its message, as it were, to the Almighty. Nor can we doubt that o being of infinite power, of Infinite future existence is indicated by the present state of matters on this earth, for precisely tho saiuo reason that the present state ot things throughout the universe indicates what is past, it also indicates what will follow. We hays then a now conception brought -before us, or at least a new idea, which is utterly inconceivable; and added to tho ideas of infinite space and infinite time and infinite power, "We have an idea of an infl-iito knowledge of the Almighty. You see, then, we have been gradually led by the f tudy of these, various orders of inconceivable ideas — we have been grailua'ily led to those ideas about the Almighty whicli form so great a subject of dispute. It seems to me to dispute this matter is hopeless and must be end- less, because it is based upon that which is inconceivable. THE VAST VARIETY OF THE UXIVEKSE. Rut now let us consider the field through which the action ot the Almighty is exteiried. And hero we have the teachings of astronomy before us. We have thought of tut> wonderful power displayed, but have not con- sidered the wonderful variety. We have in our solar svstem, for instance, the great central orb that controls the system, an orb swept by cyclonic 8tortD3, surrounded by tho zodiacal light, circle 1 by various planets, these planets differing from each other in kmd; there is thf» terrestrial order of small planets ami giant planets, the asteroids and the multitudes of satellites and the meteoric sx.stem-*. All are traveling aroun 1 the sun. Wo must recogniz* the fact not merely of variety, but that these varieties must extend through infinity. We see. that I be various Hiins, for instance, are not alike. Some are double and others are single; some arc variable and others are fixed. Tlion we co:n.< to these \\oiiilc-r- fnl star clusters, chaiiiriai? like el. nils before tho Summer br.-ezf. Wo seo ail th".so processes talcing place whicli itilicate a vauety of cxust- mce in worlds circling around tho*o suns. Then wo are lO'l t>> the o,u:-stion of lile, lile in other worlds and of inflmt'- life, I have brought it before vou u ifb more detail iu this, the oonoiusioii or tin-' c mrse of lacturcs, because in the theory of life iu other ivoi-iAs we Tlie Infinities Around Us — Richard A. Proctor. 67 have a theory which, as sucli, seems to limit tho domain of life. According to it our world is probably the only inhabited world of tho solar svstem ; according: to it, probably in not more than two members of that system is there any life at all. But then when we remember that tho systems are numbered by millions, and that there is aa infinity of suns, is seems to me such a conception is incorrect, and that, in answer to another class of thinkers, from tho infinity of numbers wo have no right to say that life does not exist where there are no creatures to study them. It seems to me as unreasonable, as those philosophers do, to deny existence except in relation to life, as it would bo unreasonable to deny existence in this earth before there were creatures living upon it to admire the works of God seen from its surface. And after that tho great point is that by the study of astronomy chiefly we have brought before us various forms of Infinity and various forms of incouceivablouess, and that this iucouceivable- ness teaches us that religious ideas are not in any way to be dealt with merely as they affect our powers of conception, and it is no answer to any form of religious belief to say that it is inconceivable. We may say it is inconceivable that there should be a miracle, but here we have science teachmsr us tho infinite and the inconceiva- ble. Why then should we consider tho mere argu- ment that such and such a work is inconceivable, when after all, it is only inconceivable to us because it is be- yond our experience. Why should we say it is inconceivable as overthrow- ing any relifrlous form of belief ? It seems to me, then, the insrructive part which astronomy brings before us are these iuconceivableuesses, for there are other studies which lead us clown in an opposite direction, an infinite sinallness, an inconceivable infinity of division aud subdivision, and it may well be there are no limits in that direction also. Tuere are other thoughts. Wo are apt to limit our conceptions with the view which is brought b fore us. It may seem a strange and startling thought that tho very reason we 'possess may be merely a lower form, as it were, of possible modes of existence. THE SHORTNESS OP LIFE COMPARED WITH THE LENGTH OF TIME. We see different modes of existence — the existence of the mineral, the yet higher one of tho vegetable, and the yet higher one of the animal — aud we may separate the animal from the human in this sense — the higher ex- istence of the living creature. But may there not be higher orders of existence, orders as inconceivable to us as the seu.se of sight is to the blind man 1 It seems to me these thoughts would well bear our study, and that it would bo well to remember that what wo know is not the measure of that which is possible. Now, in astronomy after all— and I must leave the?e subjects, which do not belong to my domain, although 1 think it not unworthy of the student of one science to show how his science throws light on subjects belong- ing1 to another— in astronomy after all we have to deal with space, we have to deal with the way in which space is occupied. Aud tbe great infinity that is brought before the student of astronomy is the infinity of space, is tho infinity of unoccupied space. We pass from this earth on which we live, an orb that seems to us the emblem of all that is stable, all that is important and magnificent, and we find ourselves led step upwards to tho higher orders of existence. We paw to orbs, in the Ural place, like tho planets Jupiter and Saturn, orbs com- parofl with whirh this earth is a mere point. Then wo are led to tho sun, and then; wo recotrnizo not merely dimension, \n\i powers so gioat that those other orbs from \vliicli we have passed sink by comparison into utter insignificance. Then wo are led to tho stellar distances, distances that separate one part from the other, and them is suggested to us one thought that is well worth tho .considering. If wo take tho analogues of one infinity and infer from this tho analogues of another, we may well believe that tho theory I havn advanced about the time in which life exists is the true one. FOE bo it noted, in spaco wo find that occupied space bears what may be regarded as an infinitely small proportion to unoccupied space. In other words, throughout spaco wo find the dimensions of each orb are infinitely email as compared with the distance separating it from its neighbors. And may it not be that in timo tho same law holds— that as the dimensions of an orb of matter are infinitely small as compared with the void around it, so the length of timo occupied may bo in- finitely small as compared to tho unoccupied timo on either side. That corresponds, as you will sec, with my theory that life on this earth will last but an infin- itely short time compared to the void that has passed before and the void to be passed thereafter, and that this is true of the other worlds constituting occupied space. So with this idea that the present; condition of tho sun, which is tho center of circling world.?, is infin- itely short as compared with its future and its past ex- istence. To return to the analogues of space, we pass from the solar system to the distances that separate that systoin from its neighbors in space. We pass from ouo orb to another. Wo pass to tho star-clusters to which our sys- tem belongs, to the stellar cluster of which, again, that isonlya portion, aud then we find ourselves brought face to lace with infinity— with infinity of space, for that phase of infinity is all that lean venture to deal with. Yet I can remind you that we aro led up from uatrro unto Nature's God; and when I say infinity of space, I cannot fail to recognize infinity of power and goodness also. Seeing, thou, infinity of space, finding ourselves in pivsouce of th > Almighty, we are led to those feelings that the poet Eiohter ascribed to the man in that wonderful dream that ho describes, aud which Da Qaiucy has translated. This dream I re- peated in one of my former lectures, Imt I know of no words more fitting in which to bring my lectures in this country to a close. PROCEEDINGS AFTER THE CLOSE OF THE LECTURE. At the waii'usion of tho lecture, the RIJV. Dr. S. Iranrcus Prime addressed tiie audience as follows: As this is the last lecture Prof. Proctor will trive in this couu'rv, and as this is tho last timo his voice will be heard here.it gives mo great pleasure to comply with tho request of the Committee Who have had this cours*3 of Irct uros in charge, and pr.'Sont to Prof. Proctor a minute showing of feelings with regard to tho course of lectures he has given to us. Having listened with tho highest satisfaction and de- llght to the lectures of Prof. Richard A. I'm, -tor, whose fame had long preceded his visit to our land, wo d^siro on his departure from us to return to his own, to give a faint but sincere expression of our gratitude to this illustrious scholar for tho instructions we hive received from his eloquent lips. He, has !•• I us with r^vernit steps through tlio sublhucst paths of tho heavenly B8 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. •worlds ; and -while ho has brought down the suns and stars that we may study tb'm with him, their study, •with his genius and learning as our guide, iia3 taught us not to admire ouly, but also to adore. In parting with Prof. Proctor -we give him the as- surance of our grateful appreciation of his labors in tlie United States, our hearty coii.srratulations on t!io success which has attended him through the 103 lectures he has delivered in his journey of Biz months, and regretting that he is constrained to leave us (for a season only, we trust), we wish him a pleasant voyatre, under propitious skies, an unclouded sun and favoring stars, ;md bid him to-night a respectful and aCectionate farewell. [Ap- plause.] I shall now have the pleasure to say that the audience will listen to a few remarks from Prof. Newbeiry, to be followed by Prof. Hitchcock. Prof. J. S. Newberry of the School of Mines of Colum- bia College, in accordance with this introduction, spoke as follows : REMARKS BY PROF. NEWBERRY. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN : In consenting to say a word in support »f tbe resolutions which have been laid before you, I felt at first that I had committed myself to a great impropriety ; for If you look over the whole list of sciences, you will know that the one I am devoted to Is at the other extreme, and that it has been far from the theme of Prof. Proctor's lectures, which have been showing to you the wonders of the heavens, and carry- ing yon from sun to sun and from star to star, while I am chained to the earth, and not only so, but am com- pelled to del ve deep down into the mines that aro sunk in its substance. And so while I could not refuse to say the word that was asked of me, and thought that the choice was one not fitting to be made, I think that perhaps in another sense it is not unfitting in Its propriety ; for at the infinite remove I am from the euitjects which have been brought before you, knowing that I have derived pleasure and light from the interest- ing lectures 1 have been permitted to listen to, I might take it for granted that the interest extends through all the ranks of scientific men, as if from some dark and remote corner of this audience there should come to you some echo of this appreciation and interest. [Applause.] So I take extreme pleasure in saying that I have listened not only with interest but with great profit, and that I am greatly indebted to Prof. Proctor for giving me so clearly and lucidly the last word upon the structure of the universe, tho last word of what wo know of the structure of tho universe : and it would re- quire no ercat stretch of imagination to say that I can v.r.ive into my studies of tho structure of tlie earth what ho tells us about the structure of the far distant ortm, inasmuch as ho has shown that one plan pervad es tho whole, and th.it nearly tho same substances are in them, and that they are controlled i>v tho same forces. Therefore iinlividii. illy, as a geologist to him as an as- tronomer, and as a member of th" audiences which have listened to him, I am sure that I only <• \pres-t your feel- ings when I echo the gratitude which has been ex- pressed, and the Rood wishes for his safe return home and also for his speedy return to us. [Applau.-e.] REMARKS OF PROF. HITCHCOCK. Tho Rev. Ur. IlitchcocU then added a fe.w words. I am not sure, said hi', but I shall learn wisdom by and by, find decline invitations to meet the [•enlli'ine:i in that Side morn. [I/iu-hter.] I came here, to-ni-ht without the slightest idea <>f being called upon to say a word. I represent, without pr«t»-iration , the science which tlie eloquent lecturer of tho ever.ing will admit to be the mysterious queen of all the sciences. I have been re- minded this evening, as I sat listening, of that striking remark of Emanuel Kant, the great metaphysical phi- losopher, to this effect: "There are two things that I stand in awe of— the starry depths, and the sense of re- sponsibility in man." It has been a dictum of philoso- phy : " I think, therefore, I am "—cogito eryo sum. What follows from the fact that wo think infinitely! The infinite thought pledges infinity of being to us in the time to come. A word has been said by Prof. Newbcrry about the science that is beneath our feet, so to speak, in contrast with tho science which is above our heads— the science of the microscope in contrast with the science of the telescope. That reminded me of the teaching of tho Great Augustin of the Fifth C3iitury, who, speaking o' God, said : " Great in groat tain ,M (»i:tf/>ius in magnis); greatest in the littlest (in minimis w.ixiinus)." Those who have heard Prof. Proctor will bo only too glad to welcome his return to this land, and we shall all give him a hearty poodby, and shall follow him in imagina- tion, not to the May-poles, I suppose, of Merrio England, but to greener grass and a sorter sky than he leaves be- hind him. God bless him on his voyage. [Long ap- plause.] MR. PROCTOR'S PARTING WORDS. Prof. Proctor then rose and advanced to tho front of the platform, and was.received with great applause. Ho said : I/idies and HAVE WE TWO BRAINS? A LECTURE by Dr. C. E. Brown-Sequard 2'J U. S. SURVEY OF THE WEST (WITH MAP): EXPLORING EXPEDITIONS under Lieut. G. M. Wheel- er .. .35 THE EFFECTS OF ALCOHOL: AN ADDRESS by Win. A. Hammond, M.D 45 THE TRANSIT OF VENUS: A BRIEF ACCOUNT OF THE PREPARATIONS OF ALL NATIONS. . 53 AMERICAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY — MEETING •AT BOSTON: AUTHORSHIP AND .AUTHENTICITY OF BOOKS HEART, LIVER, -.AND LUNGS, ETYMOLOGICALI.V Cou . . SIDERED — Hon. J. H. Trurubull. ...:.: • "•••• .THREE OF JUPITER'S SATELLITES — Prof . S. Alex- der ........... ... ............................... SAFETY'AT SEA (Illustrated IRON STEAMERS THAT WILL NOT SINK Tribune Extras — Lecture and Letter Serins. THE ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. SESSION AT WASHINGTON — FIRST DAT. CLASSIFICATION OF INSECTS — AN AUTOMATON TO PLAY TIT-TAT-TOO — HOW AND WHY WE HEAR — SOUNDS DWELLING IN THE EAK — FLAME PKE- VENTING SOUND FROM PASSING — THE STRENGTH AND WEAKNESS OF PINE WOOD. [FROM THE SPECIAL CORRESPONDENT OF THE TRIBUNE.] WASHINGTON, April 21. — The National Academy of Sciences is obliged by the terms of its charter from Congress to hold a meeting in April of each year at Washington. It usually happens that the accumu- lation of papers which the members are anxious to put on record is too great to wait for the annual op- portunity, and that a meeting is called some time during the Fall to throw off the superfluous load. This was the case last year, and led to the meeting in New York in October, which was fully reported at that time in THE TRIBUNE. But the Washington meeting is always regarded as the one of greater consequence; and as the National Academy is the highest scientific body in the country, this session must be considered as of the utmost importance. To it the most eminent men in their special pursuits whom America possesses, contribute the fruit of their painstaking researches, not unfrequently em- bodying in a single paper the labors, not to say the aspirations, of months or even years. The mooting was held at the Smithsonian Institu- tion, a temple of science which is the fitting reposi- tory where from all lands and seas curious and val- uable things have been collected, till now it takes high rank among the few great museums of the world. The venerable Prof. Henry, Secretary of the Institu- tion, presided over the deliberations of the Academy. The limited number who by the system of election can be joined to our "immortals" were more largely in attendance than last year at Columbia College. There was a sprinkling of curious visitors, but the Academy makes no bid for popularity. Prof. Le Conte was called upon for the opening paper, which was a delicate compliment to a rival institution, as he is the President elect of the Amer- ican Association for the Advancement of Science, a body which has a larger hold on the popular heart than the Academy. CLASSIFICATION OF THE RHYNCHOPHOROUS COLEOPTERA. BY JOHN L. LE CONTE, M.D. Dr. Le Conte's paper began with au allusion to the fact that it ti.o January meeting of the Academy of Sciences in 1867 be had opened the subject now under consideration. The j,Toup of insects referred to are exceedingly complex in their ohUiacteristics, and good European entomologists had made frequent efforts to settle their classification. These attempts were reviewed historical ly, and the methods and systems were detailed of Schonherr i7> 1833-34 and Prof. Lacordairs in 1863, the latter being somewhat supplementary; of Mr. H. Jekel in 1860 ; the remarks of M r. Stiff rain in 1847, and of the work of Prof. C. G. Thompson in 1865, and the careful studies of Dr. George H. Horn, 1873 From the la^t-named work Dr. Le Conte seleets a statemeut concerning the males of some genera having eight and the females seven dorsal abdominal segments. and calls attention to ( he importance and wide extent of this characteristic. He has made a series of dissections of Khyn- chophorous insects, and makes a division of them into three series: (1.) Haplogas ra, having abdomen alike in both sexes; ventral segments noi prolonged upward into a sharp edge. (2.) Allogastra, abdomen dissimilar in the two sexes; ventral segments prolonged r pward, forming a sharp edge. (3.) Het-ero- gastra, abdomen alilxe in botli sexes; ventral segments pro- longed upward to fit into tlr; elytral groove. Many other dis- tinctive characteristics wero given, with a detailed description of the very numerous genera belonging to each of the series. Although princij ally devoted to classification. Prof. Le Conte's paper gave nany points respecting the habits of some of these destructive insects. The Attelabidse and some RynchitidaB provide for their progeny in the Spring. The females roll up the leaves of trees and deposit in each roll an egg. the inside of < he leaf furnishing food to the larva when hatched. Other F in. -hites deposit their eggs in young fruit, the kernel of whi' ;h is eaten by the larva? ; others in undevel- oped buds of tre< •», which are thus destroyed. A European species of the Khinomaceridse deposits eggs in the male flowers of the Pinus mi'ritimus, the development of which is thus prevented. The results of years of laborious dissections and study seem to huve been compressed in this paper of Dr. Le Conte, and the exact anatomy and characteristics of a vast number of inserts, many of them the pests of the husband- man or fruit-raiser, were given at great length; but the paper was far too technical for the average reader. AN AUTOMATON TO PLAY TIT-TAT-TOO. BY PROF, f AIRMAN KOGERS OF PHILADELPHIA. This paper described combinations of mechanism for imitat- ing mental processes, illustrated by means of diagrams showing the peculiar requirements of an automaton which should play the game of tit- tat-too against an opponent; the play of the automaton to be a resultant effect of the play of his opponent. Among the various classes into which machines may be divided, we find those which have for their object the mere transformation of motion according to various sequences. :is is the case in Blocks, certain portions of moving machinery, and especially calculating machines. In all these the apparatus being constructed according to a certain law, goes through operations .automatically, which resemble to a greater or less extent the operations of the human mind. In the case nf th-i calculating machine it reproduces and extends in a regular sequence the form with which it starts. Babbape, in speaking of his analytical engine, ha* suggested that a machine might bo made which would play a game of combination such as draughts, provided the maker of the ma- chine himself could work out perfectly the sequences of th« game. He doos not appear to have published anything further on this Kiibject, except to suggest that the child's game of tit- tat-too is the simplest of aU the games of combination, and therefore possible to bo played by an automaton. The author of this papej findb that the sequences of this game being rea-lily tabulated, it is possible to arrange a ma.chini; which wi: I follow them, and which will have the power of ap- parently eelecting the course which will lead to success when there aro two ways open to it. It differs from the calculating National Academy of Sciences. machine In so far that it not only follows out a reg-ilar sequence as the result of its construction, but it is able to follow out the principle of the game when modified by the varying and unexpected moves of its antagonist. Tlic manner in which this is done is briefly as follows : The opponent to the automaton makes the rirst move in the inline, and in so doing causes a curtain cylinder or equivalent device to change, its position. Tins, from the construction of the apparatus, causes the automaton to make that play which the proper sequence of the same requires, and at the same time moves the corresponding cylinder into position. The next play of the opponent moves the third cylinder, and the combination of the three cylinders determines the action of the automaton for the fourth; and .so on throughout the sequence. If the player plays perfectly, the game will be drawn, as the automacou's play is mathematically correct. If the op- ponent makes a mistake, the automaton, by a simple do- viee, takes advantage of it, and makes such a play as to win the game. Illustrations were then given on the blackboard, showing that there were three general con- ditions of the problem, the third being much more com- plicated than the other two. The application of this mechanism to a game of this kind is intended to illustrate its character, and to show that its addition to apparatus for registering physical phenomena, or for performing geometrical or mathe- matical operations, may enable such mechanical de- vices to have a use much more extended than hereto- fore. The paper of Prof. Rogers excited much interest, and the practicable character of the proposed autom- aton was very clearly demonstrated. Prof. Hil- gard inquired how many pieces of machinery were necessary. Mr. Rogers said that in the first of the three cases involved by the problem, there were 18 levers required ; in the second case, 32; in the third, 48. As many cylinders were required as there are units in the game; as many levers as there are com- binations. To economize machinery, the board it- self turned round a half or more. Prof. Hilgard asked whether we do not really think very much as the automaton acts — whether the mental process was not similar to the mechani- cal. Prof. Henry said that the question was trans- cendental iu its character. Mr. Rogers mentioned that several solitaire games could be played by an automaton, and that the machinery lor this was very simple, but it had not the same interest as a machine which could take advantage of an opponent's mis- takes. Three papers by Prof. A. M. Mayer of the Stevens Institute of Technology , Hoboken.in the absence of their author, were read by the Secretary of the Academy. FUNCTIONS AND MECHANISM OF AUDITION. BY PROF. A. M. MAYER. This paper was entitled Suggestions as to the Fuuciions of the Spiral Sea Ire of the Cochlea, lead- ing to an Hypothesis of the Mechanism of Audition. It opened by a reference to the paucity of investigations on the form and functions of Ihe cochlea, and mentioned as ttie principal if not the only contribution to the sub- ject the statements and suggestions of Dr. J. W. Draper in his work on physiology in 1853. Prof. Mayer dissents, however, from the view taken by Dr. Draper respecting the action of the auditory apparatus, bating his 8 on a measurement of the wave-lengths of the av the months of the resonators. If in these circum- stances we close the mouth of either oue of the resonators with a piece of cardboard, the open resou itor will Strongly reen force the sound of the forks. If we now ro\erthc mouth of this resonator with, card-board, we shall again have nili-nce. Now substitute for card-board, when both resonators are open, the flume of a b.ii'.> wing gas-burner, with one resonator, and use something more permeable to sound than the card-board with the other. I5y trying a series nl iimri! and more permeable diaph'-agm», it was found that tracing paper just eqnab-d the i-ll'-et of the gafi- flaino in guarding the mouth of the resonator from the entrant of sound. A sheet of heated air above the gas- burner was found to bo exactly equivalent to tho gas- flame. The passage of a sheet of cold coal gas over the mouth of the resonator produced a similar effort; and sc also did carbonic acid gas. though in less degree; but cold, dry hydrogen closed the mouth of the resonator more effectively than either of the above gases, though not equal in this respect to the heated air above the bat's wing flame. Among other curious results, Prof. Mayer has ascertained that there is an absorption of sound in the bat's wing flame; that the flame is heated by the sonorous vibrations which enter it as sucb, and isMie as heat vibrations. Ho has endeavored to obtain a quantitative mathematical analysis of this absorption and hopes for exact result?. TESTS OF THE STRENGTH OF PINE. BY PROK. W. A. NORTOX OF YALE COLLEGE. This paper was exceedingly elaborate, and gave the results of a series of experiments on the sets or residual deflections of pine sticks after having been sui jected to a transverse stress. Tn 1839 Prof. Norton demonstrated that thhinjnis ImnT'iliitnx. In others we find the part that answers to tho braiu is hardly large enough to meet the requirements of such an organ. Now if you hold your arm upon a table aud try to make dots with a pencil In your 6 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. fingers without chnngins the position of your arm, you •will be able to make perhaps 1,000 points. Wei), if MH-II a power as that exists — .iucl, indeed, the number which I have given is not too large, as I have counted 792 points made by myself, and I am a miserable draught.-- man — if such a power exists with so little movement, you eau easily understand what an immense number of fibers it would require to establish commmne.ition be- tween the brain and the periphery, were all the libers continuous froui the lirain to the periphery, or viee versa. Atrain. if we divide a portion of the spinal cord we may find a diminution of sensation and voluntary movement. or both, below the point of division; but the communication is not utterly severed; there is not always complete paralysis, as there should be to satisfy the conditions of the bell-wire theory. In fact there is no necessity of more than a very few fibers to establish communication between the bruin and the spinal cor.l. Ic is more like a telegraphic com- ruunie.iiion than a movement along a wire, by which sensation is conveyed from the periphery to the brain, or the brain transmits its orders to the periphery. Let me invo an instance of what I mean. If a piece of ice is laid upon uiy foot, I have at once, the sensation of a contact, sensation of a temperature, the sensation of the extent of the surface of the ice that touch: s me, the sensation of the weight of the iee, and, it it is left upon my foot, the sensation of pain, anil the sensation 01 the skin to which the ice is applied. All those (onus of knowledge are communicated at once. I believe that all these impressions are communicated to the spmal cord, which as a siusrle wire transmits it to tlie brain. rr.KTixAciors ADHESION TO EXPLODED THEORIES. Now. as t<> tho two sides of tlic brain, the old view Was that '.lie lei i side of the brain «ovcrns the movements of the riirht side of the body, and the right side governs the movements of the left side of the body ; and that there i> a similar arrangement respecting perception and sensation. Facts oppose this view. I am sorry to say that physicians adhere too pertinaciously to old views like this, without regarding more recent discoveries. We are constantly holdms on to our old clothing, wearing it when it is worn out. I am sorry to speak thus severely of a profession which is my own, but tho discoveries of tile last ten years seem scarcely to be recognized by the medical faculty. Younger members of the profes>ion should seizs oppor- tunities lomake themselves familiar with the advances of modern ili-e iver.v . Take such facts as this for instance : One-third of one-half the brain may be utterly destroyed without any symptom of the injury: then one-third of the other half, and still no symptom. Still another third of either half may ba destroyed without any indication of ill-health. There are hundreds of the first-named cases ; I know of eleven or twelve of the latter. But Abeivr.nnhie and Spii-er relate still more remarkable case-. A lady of refinement had had very slight *ymp- toms of any t rouble with the brain. She hid irone to a tea party and enjnyed hew 1C there; had walked about ami talked as if in her usual health. X. 'thing in her sens.i- tions indieated any serious trouble. She was found dead in her bed the next morning. The autopsy re- Vt-aled that one half of hei • lirain was entirely destroyed, and moreover that this de-tri'etion had been of lonir standing. The ueeount of tin- i-to bo found in Aber- from hie, page 177, 4th edit ion. Let n.s n. .w consider the question of the locality of the intelligence of the brain. Most idn sinlo^is's are agreed thut tins is the gray matter of the upper pa-'.s of tho brain. But the method of communication Is still open to research. Here tho lecturer went to tho blackboard and drew a figure some what like a sheaf of wheat without a band around it; the stalks ivpresoiiting the nerves, tha heads of wheat representing tho cells. Now you may subtract from this, by disease or otherwise, say the upper third, and still you have the nerves and rhe nervo cells and the processes can bb carried on; but in the progress of such destruction downward there would eventually be reached a point where the functions of the brain could no longer exist. This view would explain the facts as we find them. Bat there is no ease oa record where the gray matter on both sides of the brain has been destroyed without the loss of intelligence, and wo must regard that gray matter as the seat of the in- telligence. B:itva-;t p irtions maybe removed before the loss of intelligence becomes apparent. This I have myself tested and proved by vivisection of the lower animals. Now, in respect to the locality of the powei of speech. It has been said that the loss of brain power to express ideas in speech was located in a certain part of the brain. This affection is called aphonia or aphasia. There are throe uiodjs of expressing ideas — by speech, by gestures, and by writing. It is with the first only that we are concerned. Some very bold theorists have tried to locate all these powers in a partic- ular part of the brain. Lst us confine ourselves to facts. Dr. Broca of Paris has advanced the view that a certain small portion of some of the convolutions of the brain held the power of speech. I admit that facts seemed to favor this view. But we flud that there is no relation between the decree of aphasia and the extent of the dis- ease in that part, and there are cases where the de- struction of those cou volutions is very great and tho injury to speech very lit- tle. Secondly, wo find that disease may have overtaken the anterior, the posterior and tho mid- dle lobes of the brain, tho particular convolution sup- posed to involve spaech not being aff'cced, and yet there is marked aphasia. Now is some one of these lobes tho locality of the power of speech 1 Such would bo the reasoning of my opponents. We should be obliged to concede that in some parsons the faculty of speech ex- isted in one part of tho brain ; in some in another ; in others another, and so on ad injlnitiim. This is a reduc- lio ad ubsurdnm. There is the ease of the paralysis of the insane, where flie gray matter may bo diseased on both sides of the brain. In these cases the power of speech does not seem to bo involved. There are cases of aphasia where the diseased person has had the power of spei eh restored during delirium. The speech is c iheivnf, though the sense may not be. It is cvi lent then that the faculty of speech is not actually lost in such cases; and yet we find that the third frontal convolution is act'ially diseased insthese aphasiaes who talk in their delirium. Bui the most den.-ivo argument i:-. tonnd in the cases that I have seen, where the third frontal convolution, the alleged organ of speech, has been destroyed, and yet tho patients have not lost the power of speech. T.icn-l'oro tho theory is itself destroyed. There are fitly cases on record to show that the question of rii:lir.-!iaii ledness or left- handednes^ does not apply in these considerations. The lecturer hern cited cas "s in t he praet ice ol Jacmot of MontpcliiT and Mr. I'rescott-IIewiU of London. In the latter case the nillent had sutlVred a destruction of that part of the braiu for 20 years, and yet for 20 years had spoken. National Academy of Sciences. THE LOCALIZATION OF CENTERS OF MOTION IN THE BRAIN. Wo shall now take up the question of the localization of motion in oertaia parts of tho brain. I am surprised at the avidity with which a certain scries of facts have been accepted as proof of mis Theory in England. A very eminent man, of -whom I slioul I not like, to say anything- seven-, my I'rieu I Pro!'. Carpenter, Ins ac- cepted thoso views. I may say that all England has accepted them. Prof. Huxley indeed has written me that he only accepted this view in part; hut I cannot 6eo hnw he can accept f the artificial sun and planet were those that will be presented by tho real bodies at the tiiuu of the transit. It is found that 8 Tribune Extras— lecture and Letter Scries. the sun looks a little larger and the planet a liitl<> Ptuuller than tlieir true magnitudes. When the. light of the sun is close to the plau-'t the space bet -veen Is ap- parently filled by a lijrament known as the black dr •>;>. It is commonly supposed that tin- moment of disappear- ance of the black drop is tho moment of contaci : but the uncertainty thus occasioned is of M-rious moment, it is not due inerelv to a had atmosphere; it is an ab.-oi nte effect iiide]>LMident of this caiiM-. In oh>erving th • ar i- flcial Venus tin; same difficulty is more or le-s encoan- I red. Kven ina fairer atnnis|iliere than w,- hupe lor at the time of the tran-i; we must e\[>ret this phenomenon. In moving toward the edge of the sun, before reaching it, there is again a similar source of error. A eioinl seems to pass through the thread of liirht between tho plam-t and tho edge of tho sun; tlio hriirht lino crows darker and darker, Rnd at last dis appears— that being the moment of true contact. No ordinary observer ean II x this time with accuracy. Another method lias been suggested— observation by pho- tography ; hut the difficulty here is that tho ohotogr.ip h is dependent upon the comparative actinic power of tho thread of light, and every photographer Icnows that the slightest haz ; will make a difference in the impivs - on on the sen* m :• plate. The light thrown on one n:a.le may be live or even ten times greater than on ano'h sr without auv corresponding difference in tlio fads. I think we shall not attempt the photographing of the interior contact. It was supposed that the movement of Venus into tha BOD'S atmosphere oould be observed by means of tho spectroscope with great accuracy; but a commit tea in Germany, including Z iwlnor and Awera, came to tha conclusion that this was after all one of the most un- eertaln methods, and it was finally given up entirely. It, has b'-en found, however, that the momeut when the planet first in ikes a notch on the sun is a well defined occasion, and th:- experiments of Striibner of St. Petersburg agree with ours on the artificial Venus in this particular. Another method of determining tbis problem con-ists In observing the distances of tbe centers of the two bodies. Tho Germans thought of doing this by nn-ans of he I in m i- ter* ; but the use of tho necessary u um- ber of these instruments is impracticable, as they are cumbrous and expensive. I believe there is not a heli- om •(••!• in this country. Tho Ameiican method of photographing the transit has been already published : this is Me method of Prof. AVinloek, and experiments have shown that it is likely to 1)0 eminently successful. The photograph is taken bv means of a horizontal telescope into which the image is deflected. It was at first supp.»,-d that tho measures could be taken direct upon the photograph; but Ibis has elements ot inaccuracy, e-.;, .-pt by tho method of phonography de- \ led bv I'rof. Winlock. Tho other methods of photo- graphy will not give a closer approxlmati >n, according to M. l> linn-, than one minute of arc; but wo have already much closer measurements of th • solar parallax than this would provide. Our present uncertainty does not exceed thirn-i'iur hundrcdius of a second. Such photogia|ihs v. .Mild In- of no value. Tho method of Prof. AVilllocK was (hell ilescri lied. M'\ MoNS AND ORGANIZATION. Let us now coiisiilcr the maUer of stations. Suppose for insiaiie-- that \ve li.nl tunr ;-,t Ltlons, two northi'rn and two si. nth T;I. li't!:e-e were divided lu .• t \vo classes of n'.'-i r\ .ii i A and 1: at the north and A and B at t he south, a.- A i.s not comiiara'ile, with I:, Ih.- lailurool' eilbcrAat the uorth and li at tho south, or li at the no-th and A at the south, would ren-lcr all tho four ob s'-ivations valueless. Therefore, all tho observations will b > of the same character. Tho chief clement in BO- lectiiiir stations has been their meteorolnirv, yhe i| ae>tion at issue being their liability to bad weal her at the time of the transit. About two years ago circulars were sent to Am -riraii Consuls in almost every part of the world where tin- transit is visible, to ascertain the condition of tho weather at thos^ points in November and D -comber, and every otliT M'liive of .-imdar information was utilized. We Had taoiig'it of selecting from a numb'-r of others Kurd's I>lands in the Southern Indian Ocean as being one among tli-- iicst stations. Northern stations with proba- bilities i.f e;ood weal her are easily to be had. E-peciallv favorabl'1 in t.'iis view is Peking in China and Vladivo- stok in Siberia. In Japan tho wcathir i- ^earccly as favorable. Ilakodadi was very objectionable in respect to weather; Yokohama was just as bad; Nagasaki was rather bolter. Tin- only satisfactory station in the southern bemis- p!ii re in i e- pee t to weather was found to be Hobart Town, in Tasmania. New-Z -aland is nearly as iavorable. But from all the other proposed Southern stations tho accounts were very l:a I ; notably at the proposed Station at Kurd's Islands the almost uniform report was " clouds, r.iin, tempests, and snow :" the chances of observation there di'i not exceed two-tenths; this station was then- lore given up. The most favorable station left at tho South was Kersueleu Island, though somewhat n-'iirhbor- ing to Hum's Islands, and that, was selected. A party will also be landed, it practicable, at Cmzei's Island. In st-adof sending lour parties to each hemisphere, we shall eend three to the north and live to the south, to equalize the chances as to weather. We hope to get complete results from two parties in each hemisphere. Tue following is a list of the chiefs of parties and their stations: Northern stations, Wladivostock, Siberia, Prof. A. Hall, U. S. N.; Nagasaki. Japan. Geo. Davidson, U. S. Coast t>ui\vy ; Peking, China, Prof. James C. Wat- son of Ann Arbor, M'.cb. Southern staiions, Crozet's Island, South Indian Ocean, Capt. Kiymond, U.S.A.; Kerguelcn Island, South Indian Ocean, L our.-Commau- dcr George 1'. llyan, U. S. N.; lloliart Town, Tasmania, Prof. Win. IlarUnos, U. S. N.; New Z -aland. Prof. C. H. Peters of Clinton, N. Y.; Chatham Island. Somh Paci.ie, Ivlwin Miiitli, U. S. Coast Survey. The coustitution of each pirty Is such that in case of disability on the part of its chief, the second officer can tak1 his place. Kadi parly will have three photographers — a chu-f photo- grapher, who must have been of long experience in tho business; an assistant that has had practice, and a second as.Mstaiit trained only for the o.-c.ision. Nearly all the second as-istants' positions have been l! ed by >tmlcnts or graduates of vaii us .schools and technological colic ires throughout the country. Tne par- lies lor t ho southern station \\ill sail, \ve expect, about June 1. Tlies • are all ready ; the photographers are to ne in mil practice, hen- next week. Tne northern parties \\ ill go later and not all together. The Navy l).-p.irl mem h i- fmm.Vii .1 a ship, the Swatara, to go :o the southern .stations. The longitudes of the stations will bo deter- inii.ed by occuliat ions wherever t.de;;i aph communica- tion is impra.-tieablo; bat already tin-re is such com- munication between Vladivostok and Ilobart Town. Arrange me 1 1 Is are made with tin- ( !•' vei iiiin-nis for cx- ohanglug longitude signals, and tne pro-peci of the ex- ten.-.i .ii of cables to New Z -aland and other points gives fair hope tha^ tin-re will bo only a few points where the method of (.'ccultutioua will be tho solo resort. National Academy of Sciences. 0 THE COLORADO CAfiONS. BY MAJOK J. W. POWKLL. This was an elaborate descriptive essay, an account of the progress made in tho survey of the Colo- rado and its tributaries by parties under direction of tho Bmitbsouian Institution. The following extracts show the character of the. country : The whole region embraced ID the survey is a canon country. At the very beginning wo liavo a series of carious through the Umtalt Mountains, as the channel of Green River, Flaming Gorge. King-fisher Canon, Ked Canon, tbc. Canon of Lodore, Whirlpool Cation, and Split Mountain Canons. Then Yanipa Canon, the canon along the lower course of the river of the same name, and many other triburary canons. Then below, in. descending the river, the Cafion oi' Desolation, Gray Canon, Libyrinth Canon, and Si illwatcr Canon, with their laterals; then Cataract C.ifion, a profound eiiasin below tlio junction of the Grand and Green, then Narrow Canon, which termi- nates at the mouth of the Dirty Devil River; many canons lateral in all these have also been explored. Along all the streams mentioned we have series of canons, and yet all of these represent but a part of the caiious explored and mapped, for there are many pra- fouud chasms, the channels of intermittent streams, dry during the greater part of tbe season, that are hundreds of feet deep, and that never have a continuous stream for their entire length. But I cannot slop to enumerate all of these dry gorges. Then Glen C. iion, a b'eautirul chasm curved by tbe river, in tbe bright-red homogeneous sandstone of Ti i- assie age. From the mouth of the Puria River to tbe mouth of the Colorado Chiquito is the beautiful gorge to which we have given the. name of Marble Canon. The walls are of limestone, and near the toot are of a crys- talline structure which receives a beautiful polish ; white, gray, slate-color, pink, brown, and s iffron-col- ored marbles are here found, carved and fretted by the waves of the river, and polished by tbe floods of sand which are poured over the walls during the seasons of showers, giving to the walls of the canons, which have assumed architectural forms on a giant scale, an appear- ance of great beauty and grandeur. Thou we have the Grand Cafion, tbe most profound chasm known on the globe. "Were ahundred mountains, each as large as Mount Washington, plucked up by the roots to tbe level of tbe sea aud tumbled iulo tbe gorge, they would not till it. Perhaps tho most wonderful of the topographic fea- tures of this country are the lines of chit-, escarpments of rock separating upper from lower regions by hold, often vertical and impassable barriers, hundred or thou- sands of leet high und scores or hundreds of miles in length. 1 wiil enumerate some of the more important. First, we have the Brown cliffs, an escarpment which forms the southern boundary of the plateau through which the Cafiou of Desolation is carved ; then the Azure cliffs, the southern escarpment of the plateau through which Grav Canon is cut ; then the Orange cliffs, a broken escarpment, which commences at the foot of the Sierra La Sal, on the ea.-te.rn side of Grand Kiver, past the Grand, then across the Green River, and then down in a south- westerly direction para; lei to the Colorado River ab.mt fltty miles, and then turns again to the south-east and crosses tbe Colorado, terminating in the slo[.c of the Sierra La Sal, two or three scores of miles south of tin; initial point. Thus tho h«-ad of die Colorado, the junc- tion of the Grand and Green, is encompassed by a tow- ering wall — tbe Sierra T/i Sal— on the east ; on I lie north, west, and south the Orange Cull'-; on i-verv side ;» facade of storm-carved rocks is prcx-nted. Tin- In- dian name for this basin j- Tum inn in' n, . the land of standing rode-, j: n:<--, pinnacles, thousands and lens ot l IKHI ..i :nN forma Of rock, naked rock ol1 many dill' rent <•"!., i- am here seei: ; so that bel'.ovo wo had learned llie lnili.ui name wo thought fof calling if tho Btone I I or Painted 81 one Forest; und these 1'Ouka are not Ir igiiieni s or piles of irregular masses, lint stand :ig I'.inns, carved by the rain drops from the solid m i sire hedft, Weird, strange and grand is the Tuni-iiin n-n in ir In ir,,i,i. Passing by many others, lei i.s -p -ale <.i tin- •• im.r.- only. Tho Ilunicane ledge is an escarpment due to a fault having a northerly and smirherly direction, .-larting away to the North of Tokerville, in Uuah Terniorv, and running South across the, Colorado Ki\v. I: probably continues iu this direction as a laull or a told tor iu!) miles. The Vermillion cliffs have an easterh an 1 we-terly trend ; this lino then crosses, in an irregular way, the bead waters of the Rio Virgin, still on Hi1 ea-t crossing the bead waters of t:ie K in ib and tao folds around tho uort hern extremity of the Kaibab plateau, then ero-ses the Colorado and turns in a so utaarly direction across tbe Little Colorado by a monocliual fohl. Tais escarp- ment presents a wall of tnassic red sand-stone, and is due to erosion ; tho l)eds below have been strippe-l away by the rains and rivers. Wlnte cliC's are approximately parallel M these; the line is a broken angular escarpment in Jurassic linn-stone and homogeneous gray sandstone, capped by beds of limestone. Tns are cut, for so it appeared to the observer standing on the south-west margin of this great district of conn ry ; but it has proved, in fact, to bo a complex .-y-t -m of plateaus, bounded by walls of faults, escarpments or cliffs oi erosion, and canon gorges. Chief among tiie-o arc the Mark-a-guut, P.iuus-a-gunr, A<|a.min. an I K.ii- por-o- wits plateaus, lying to the north in the Mirve\el district, aud in which head tbe Dirty D,-vil, the Escolaute, tho Paria, tho K.inab. and the llio Virgiu R'vers. The upper beds of which these plateaus are composed are of tertiary age, but they carry on, their backs extensive outflows of lava and numbers of dead vo c tnoes. The numerous plateaus, mesxs, and terraces to tue south of these are co.npoM'd of beds of cretaceous and Jurassic age, but I pass them by without further mention. Tae Paria plateau, ou [he south dido of tho river of tho saiuo name, is a great tablo of trias. Ou tho north side of the grand canou wo have the Kaibab, tbo Kanab. the Vin -karet and Shevwitz plateaus. Tuuse are extensive tables of carboniferous age with many eruptive m.i- and volcanic cones. For tin1 great plati'aii to the south of the Colorado River, hounded on the north by the grand canon, on tbe south-west by an e.-,earpmeiit. which is the continuation of the Ilunicane ledge, but which In this locality has received the Dame or Aubrey dill's, and on the north-eist by a i,rea! cs-irpi.iont which faces the Little Colorado, and who-.- . .i,t.-rii boundary is not dctermiuud, I propose to retain tha 10 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. name originally given to tlie whole series of plateaus- Colorado plateau. These plateaus cau be thrown into classes on ecologi- cal grounds, as follows: The tertiary plateaus to the north, cretaceous plateaus immediately south, trias^ic plateaus next m order, and carboniferous on the south. The geological classification serves well, also, tor geo- graphic purposes, as each group has peculiar topographic features, depending on the texture and structure of the roots of which they are composed. A VARIETY OF SUBJECTS-TniRD DAT. AN INSTANCE WHERE SOLAR TIDES KXCEIvD THOSE CAUSED UY THE MOON — A NOVELTY IN INORGANIC CHEMISTKY— 1IIE THEORY OF CYCLONES— NEARLY ALL THE ATMOSPHERE OF THE EARTH TWO HUGE CYCLONIC WHIRLS. WASHINGTON, April 23.— Disagreeable -weather tended to reduce the audience of April 23 at the Smithsonian Institution. The subjects discussed did not equal in general interest those of the previous day, hut they had at least the merit of bringing forwaid some novelties in scientific discovery. The statements of Prof. Ferrel respecting the tides of Tahiti were cm ions rather than important. The discoveries of 1'rof. Gibb.sof Harvard, who is equally noted as an original investigator, and as an editor of The American Journal of /Science and Arts, of com- pounds in inorganic chemistry having the character- istic of metamerism thathas hitherto been unknown except among organic substances, seems to open a new iield of research. Prof. Gibbs mentioned that lie had given no name to his new compounds; for •which we may be truly thankful, since names that chemists are apt to indulge in when making discov- eries in organic chemistry, are rarely limited by six or eeven syllables and sometimes reach a dozen. The communication from Prof. Alexander, the dis- tinguished astronomer of Princeton, suggests a very interesting though difficult inquiry. Prof. Hayden gave a glowing and rapid sketch of the explorations in which he has been engaged, and of the work accomplished and under way. He was warmly greeted by several of the professors, who evidently held liis work in high esteem. Prof. Silliman told of the localities of the American ores of tellurium— that curious substance which once on a time a bold experimenter swallowed, the result being that his friends dropped oil' gradually. He noticed after a few days that everybody seemed to avoid him. Finally he cornered one of them and begged an explanation. " Why, the fact is," said his friend, with his nose in his handkerchief as ho spoke, "yon must be aware that you have u horii Me Binell." '1 he experimenter was obliged to retire into obscuiity for some weeks, till the tellurium was out of his system. 1'mf. I'd \> Ts theory of the law of cyclones was exceedingly interesting to the meteor- ologists present. THE TIDES OF TAHITI. 3Y PROF. WM. FERREL OF THE U. S. COAST SURVEY. In 1858 the U. S. Coast Survey took advan- tage of the surveying expedition under charge of Capt. (now Commodore) John Rodgn-sto obtain a series of tidal observations at the Island of T iliiti in 1 he Pacific. A soil-registering tide gau^e was sent by the Coast Survey, and left by the expedition in tho hands of a French soldier at tap town of Papeetee on that island. By this means a series of observations nearly complete was obtained from June 1 to Ojt. 1. These were re- duced by the Coast Survey and published m the report of 1SG4. The great peculiarity of these tides is that the solar tide is for tho most part greater than tho lunar tide, although the force pro- ducing the latter is more than double that producing the former. There is only one other case, of the sort in the world — at Courtown, Ireland. It is not, however, due to any exception in tho general theory of the tides. Certain constants iu the tinal expressions, which have to be determined by observations, are unusually large in this case. It is yet impossible to specify, however, what are the irregularities of ocean bottom and of coast outline which occasion the phenomena lu thij particular instance. A representation was here given by diagrams of the solitidal intervals ; i. e., a mean of the curves for morning and evening tides, as furnished iu the Coast Survey Ra- port. The small diurnal tide was eliminated from the representation, which only gave the semi-diurnal tides. The sou' tidal intervals were given instead of the luui- tidal. because the former were the larger. In Jane, however, at the time of the quadratures, when the solar and lunar forces are in opposition, the sun has its greatest declination, and tho moon is near the equator, and hence the solar tide is smaller and the lunar greater than usual. Hence also, iu Ji-ue and July, tho times of hitrh water at tlio quadratures follow the moon, and tho range of the solitidal interval is from 0 to 12 hours. But toward September, at tho quadrat u:i and midnight. From theoretical considerations applied to the observa- tions, it was, however, shown that tin- observed times of hiirh water in the small tides, aff-cted by abnormal dis- turbances of the winds and changes of barometric pres- sure, necessarily differ considerably from the theoretical calculaiion. which merely depends ou the lorces excr- ciccd by the sun and moon. i METAMERISM IN INORGANIC CHEMISTRY. 1JY IM.'OI'. WOI.COTT GIBBS OF HARVARD UXIVKRSITY. Although this paper was o£ a technical char- acter, audits greatest value is of course to those who are interested directly in chemu-al researches, it pre- sents a discovery so novel in its elur.ieier that it cau scarcely !>;• without interest even to I lie non-professional Miidenl. Hitherto what has been deiMUiiin ited metame- rism has never been observed cxeept in oriranio substances. Bodies are said to be metumeric when they are of the same composition and atomic weight, but dif- fering entirely in their properties, iu c.mseqivMico of dif ferent molecular constitution. Prof. Gibbs has discov- . Ted six such bodies bearmjr such a relation to one an- other and to a seventh whicli was not of his discovery. National Academy of Sciences. 11 That is, if you were to talro those seven substances and separate eacli into its ultimate constituents, you would find each giving not only the same materials to ultimate analysis, but weight for weight the same amounts of these, materials; and yet each of the seven substances is intrinsically different from thj other in its character, appearance, and chemical reactions; and no one of them can be transformed mro the other. In the whole realm or' inorganic chemistry there has been no similar instance recorded, although among organic bodies there are not- a few such cases. The substance with which the series begins was dis- covered by Dr. Eidmami. It is an exceedingly stable compound. Its constituents are two parts of cobalt, six of ammonia, and six of uicric oxide. Its chemical 1'or- ni ula is: Co 2 (N II 3) 6 (N O 2) 6. The six other bodies metameric with it, were obtained by Prof. Gibus by making the compounds and combining them when made, in the manner indicated in the nota- tion which follows. It will be observed by the chemist that the combination of the compounds is that of an acid with a base, in each instance making a true salt, obtained in crystalline form. For the "sake of abridge- ment in notation, in what follows, the ammonia (N H 3) is represented by A and the nitric aci I by X. Oa ac- count of the difference in their atomic constitution. Dr. Cibbs divides the seven substances iuto three series. First series — Eidmann's discovery: Co2 A6XG Second series — Dr. Uibbs's discovery: (Co 2 A 4 X S) II II II 2. Co 2 A 6 X 6 3. Co 2 A 6 X 6 4.. Co 2 A 6 X 6 (Co 2 A 8 X 4) = IV (Co 2 A 4X8)2 (Co 2 A 10X2) = II IV (Co2A4XS)3 (Co 2 A 12) = Tliird series — Dr. Gibbs's diaciiverv: VI VI (Co 2 X 12) ^ (Co 2 A 12) = (Co 2 X 12) (Co 2 A 8 X 4)3 = (Co 2 X 12)2 (Co 2 A 10 X 2)3 = As each of the salts thus obtained is beautifully crys- talline and perfectly well defined, and each salt of the second and third groups gives the icactions of each con- stituent with perfect distmctnsss, uo doubt cau exist as to their real chemical structure. 2. Co 2 A 6 X 6 4. Co 2 A 6 X G 6. Co 2 A G X 6 COMPARATIVE VELOCITY OF LIGHT LIST A1E AND IN VACUO. BY PROF. STEPHEN ALEXANDER OP PRINCETON COL- LEGE. This brief paper merely contained a few interesting suggestions on a small correction of the velocity of light as deduced from experiment. In accordance with the und ula tory theory the velocity of light must be less in atmoopheric air than invacuo, in the inverse ratio of the index of refraction of atmosuheri1; air to 1: that is. as 1 to 1.000291. The velocity theu as ascertained by experiment under the air should be increased by just about 0.003294 of itself to be equal to that in vacno; i.e., to the extent, almost exactly, of 5o miles per second ; a very small quantity indeed in comparison with the whole velocity of 183,000 miles per second ; and yet small as it is — and so small as to be below the limits of error of the experiments in question— it is yet very closely equal to three times the velocity of the earth in its orbit. It is an outstanding excess, and no more, with which •we oft:-u have to do. as, for example, in the measure- ment of temperature; but the scale on which those dif- ferences sometimes present themselves makes them, _ email as they aiay be m their original comparison, graud I of our public domain. In comparison with ordinary standards. Prof. Alexan- der was not aware that anything has yet been put for- ward elsewhere on this subject. Prof. Bilgard remarked that the postulate of ttm paper that the utulululory theory iv<|iiiird tliat light must move more slowly in air than in vacuo, was not by any means settled. Them had been an approximate experiment— on aberration, by Prof. Airy, who filled a telescope with water and sent, light through it— but n- deviation w.is observed after the- most careful observations. We aro not sufficiently acquainted with the clu.raehr and properties of the luminif orous ether to speak with certainty on these subjects, but the investigation i.« well worthy of the highest effort. Prof. Il-nry spoke a few words of merited praise about the com- munication. RECENT WORK OF PROF. HAYDEN. SUPPLEMENTARY TO TRIRUNE ACCOUNTS OK EXPLOR- ING EXPEDITIONS AT THE WEST. Prof. F. V. Hayden appeared before tlie Academy to give a general account of the scientific explorations and survey at the West in which he has bseu en- gaged. As full accounts of these explorations have appeared in THE TRIBUNE it will be unnecessary to reproduce the details with which our readers aro already familiar. The following particulars are concerning more recent work and bring the story of these explorations from the accounts in Tin-: Tiua- UNE Extra of Dec. 30th to the date of the meeting. The party returned from the fl dd-work in Colorado in October and at once commenced the prcparati"ii of the annual report and the construction of the maps. The seventh annual report, containing the preliminary results of the survey for 1873. will be readv for presenta- tion to Congress in May, and will form an octavo volume of about 800 pages, with over 301) illustrations, sections, profiles, maps, &3. Tue geological and rum- eralogical, as well as topographical, structure of the remarkable mountain region of Colorado hits been worked out with care; sections of all the mines have been made with the utmost at- tainable accuracy, showing the connection of the mineral lode with the country rock, so that the light which will be thrown upon the origin and hi--- tory of tlieso formations will be of great value to science. T\vo classes of map*, on a S'.'alo of four miles to one inch, have been prepared. The first class are in con- tour lines of 230 feet, upon which to represent the vari- ous geological formations in the areas explored, with suitable colors. On the second class the peculiar moun- tain forms will be delineated, in excellent relief, by a peculiar kind of brush-work. T.i :•*• ;uv the topograph- ical maps. When the survey of Colorado is completed the great features of the physical history of that Territory will be summed up in one volume, with iin atlasof maps and sections. Prof. Ilavd'-n regarded this work as a contribution from the General Govern- ment to Its ward, the Territory, toward the development of its resources. It will also form the i>a>u upon which more detailed surveys can be carried on by th" eniiimii' nity itself. Dr. Ilnyd'en closed with an app -al to tin- nn-iu of the National Academy to spare no etlort to enlist the continued sympathy of Congress in the great \\oi!; of making known to the world the unexplored portions 12 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. Prof. Henry said that we are inviting thousands of foreigners to come here, and we ought to be able to tell them what we have to offer them. For this purpose a survey of the whole United States ought to be made. We have three organizations for this purpose — the Coast Survey, the Engineers' Survey, and this Civilians' Survey. It is very desirable that there should lie no wrangling between these organi- zations; that their work be brought into coordina- tion and unity. lie recommended that the Academy take this matter into consider:) lion, and perhaps suggest the I'ormati >n of a commission. Prof . J. Lawrence Smith of Louisville, Kentucky, followed up this observation with one on the lack of unity in the State surveys. His own State suffered much from the need of correct surveys from fixed points determined by the Coast Survey. It is ex- ceedingly desirable that the method and system of all surveys be placed under otiehead and conducted with uniformity. Col. Forshey of Louisiana enforced the foregoing views by hi.s experience in that State and remarked also on the value and interest of Prof. Hoyden's work. In the matter of hydrographi" surveys there •was almost an equal deficiency of unity of plan and useful results. Gen. Barnard 01 Washington referred to the ex- treme difficulty that was found in conducting the operations of the war without maps of a topograph- ical character. He considered that much of the delay which characterized our undertakings in the war \v;is principally due to our ignorance of the country where they were carried on — an ignorance of topographical details paralleled in no European countfj'. He also alluded to the difficulties which ordinary civil engineering operations find in our deficient surveys. The opening of a water supply, for in- stance, when; a canal or railroad was being con- structed, could not bo predicated with any certainty when the geological and topographical features of a section of country were almost unknown. Col. Forshey was glad to hear the proposition (suggested by Prof. Henry) that a Commission be appointed to unify the surveys throughout the United States. Prof. Henry mentioned, in the absence of Dr. Bessel, that the entire scientific operations of the Polaris were under his management, and that his report of the work effected during the voyage of that vessel would be presented to the Academy, in accordance with the provisions of the acts of Con- gress concerning that expedition. MiNERALOGICAL NOTES. BY PKOK. 15. KII.LIMAy OF NEW-HAVEN. The, subject which he proposed to treat was the telluric ores of Colorado. The rock-s are principally pnetssic, and frraoite \vitii excess of feldspar or quartz. At tbe place where tlie miner. il i» found there is a re- luurkablu dyke of ~>0 feet in thickness. It is on the Mile Of this dyke that the mineral roiitaiiiini; tho httlc-knosvn substance tellurium is found. Prof. Silliman snowed the evidence that tlie tellurium was introduced by tho Plutonic invasion of this dykp. He had found in many instances that telluric ores were associated with cold, and the association was very unfortunate for the gold miner, as in one iustancb $3,010 worth of gold thus associated was thrown uway (through ignorance), while the yield of tho rest of the ore was only $10 or $50 10 the ton. Prof. Sillimau asked Prof. End hch to perform an experiment, showing the presence of tellurium by using concentrated sulphuric acid. A bright purple color was rapidly obtained when the ore was thus treated with heat, in a test tube. In one specimeu of these telluric ores there was §55,000 extracted from a ton. Specimen-! of telluric ores were exhibited, and Prof. Sillunau mentioned that thesn and many other very valuable specimens, now the property of the Smithsonian Institution, were procured in Prof. Haydeu's surveys. ON THE LAWS OF CYCLONES. BY PROF. WILLIAM FERREL OF THE COAST SURVEY. There were at one time two rival theories with regard to the motions of the atmosphere in cyclones. According to E spy's theory, called the radial theory, the atmosphere flowed iu from all sides toward the center in the direction of the radius, and i.sceiided in the middle of the cyclone and flowed out above. Ac- cording tojRedfield, Reid, and others, the motion of the atmosphere above aud below was that of a circular gyration around the center of the cyclone, and there was no motion either to or from the center. In the. year 1859 in a paper published in Kunkle's Mathcmalhical Monthly, Prof. Ferrel first demon- strated the effect of tho earth's rotation upon auy body moving upon its surface, which was to cause a deflecting force at right angles to the di- rection of motion, to the right hand in the northern hemisphere, but to the left iu the southern. It was also shown that tho off 'ct of this deflecting force upon air tending from all sides toward a center, was to cause it also to gyrate around this center, aud that consequently Espy's theory could not be true. If the atmosphere has a circular gvration, the deflecting force arising from tho earth's rotation is in the direction of the radius from the center, and causes a depression and low barometer in tho center; hut there is no force to overcome the resistance to the gyration, aud hence the atmosphere is soon brought to a state of rest. Taero must, therefore, in all cases be some motion below, toward tho center of the cyclone, so that tho deflecting fore:' — depending upon tho earth's rotation — arising from tins com- ponent of the motion, may overcome tho resistance to gyrations; else tin; gyration KOOH ceases. The resultant of the gyratory motion and the motion toward tho center gives a motion, the direction of which makes an anglo with tho iso- bar, or lino of equal barometric pressure. (Here Prof. Ferrel drew a circle on the blackboard, show-in;,' the line of tin- isobar in:; perfect cyclone.) The greater the re- sistances, the greater this angle inns' be, and hence, since resistance Is as the square to tile velocity, all other things beiii;; I be same, the mororapi.l tho motions of tho almnspliere.il] the cyclone, tlio greater must be t his an- gle. (Tho unglo was shown on the blackboard as formed by a tangent to tho circular isobar.) On tho open sea. where, the amount of resistance i8 small, especially wiicn tho velocities are not very great, this angle must be small, nnd the gyrations nearly cir- cular,as RednVld's theory requires. In violent tornadoes on laud, where the resistances are very great, this National Academy of Sciences. 13 Is large, and the directions of the motions at tho surface do uol differ much from those of the radii, and hence there is au approximation to Espy's theory. As Ee>-ii give.i for tho ordinary cyclone. Anti-cyclones aiv ;ilways station- ary; having their centers lu tho interior of a continent or larger island where the atmosphere in Winter is colder and consequently heavier than over the sur- rounding sea; and hencs it descends in the middle and flows out at all sides below, aud tho deflecting force already explained gives rise to a stationary cyclone. Each hemisphere of the earth contains one grand anti- cyclone, with the cold Polo in the center and the one- half of the torrid zone for its external warmer part, and in these anti-cyclones we have a verification of what is stated above, since in the northern hemisphere tho gyrations nearest the Pole are from right to left, giving rise to the eastward current in tho mid'llo aud higher latitudes, while toward the external border at tho equator the gyrations are the contrary way, giving ri-o to the general westward motion of the air in the torrid zone. lu this case, also, as in ordinary cyclones, the barometer stands the highest at the dividing paraliol of latitude of about 35 degrees, which separates the two systems of gyrations or winds. At the business session, Prof. F. A. P. Barnard, President of Columbia College, New- York, was elected Foreign Secretary, vice Prof. Agaseiz, de- ceased. The constitution and rules limit the num- ber of members to be elected annually to five. The following individuals were honored by election April 23: Prof. C. F. Chandler of New- York, chem- ist ; Geo. Davidson of San Francisco, mathematician and astronomer; Prof. 0. C. Marsh of New-Baven, Conn., geologist; George W. Hill of Nyack, N. Y., mathematician ; Prof. Henry Morton of the Stevens Institute, lioboken, N. J., physicist. LAST DAY OF THE MEETING— HASTE THE SAKE OF ADJOUKN.MKXT. SCIENTIFIC VALUE OF THE POLARIS VOYAGE— AN IN- TERESTING DEBATE ON THE FORMATION OF THE NORTHERN PART OF THE CONTINENT— THE GREAT TELESCOPE A GREAT SUCCESS— OTHER SATELLITES LIKE OUR MOON— LAWS OF STORMS— SILURIAN FOSSILS. WASHINGTON, April 24.— It was evident when the session of the day began, that the Secretary, Prof. J. E. Hilgard, was pushing matters with unusual rapidity. There were many papers of interest and value that had been under consideration, which were either declined, read by title (that is, not read at all, except the title) or hurried through with little ceremony. Two or three times a rising debate on tho subjects presented was brought to a close by an appeal from the Secretary urging baste. And, to tho surprise of most of the members and all of the audi- dience. the Academy did actually Irnish its pro- ceedings and finally adjourn at the usual hour of closing the session for the dnv. If those who imagine that the work of Polar expe- ditious is a mere useless expenditure of enthusiasm 14 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. could have been present at this meeting, and seen the deep interest taken by all the members of the Academy in the scientific results of the expedition of the Polaris, they might have found cause for changing their opinion. In this memoir and the de- bate which followed nothing was more evident than that in order to obtain a satisfactory answer to the many unsolved questions of the history of the earth an immense number of facts is yet to be amassed, which can only be procured by new expeditions to the higher latitudes. In the interest of science alone, Polar expeditious are of the highest order of value. Everybody that takes the least interest in astro- nomical science is anxious to know whether the great telescope in Washington, with the largest achromatic lens ever constructed, is really a good instrument, and whether it has met the sanguine hopes ent'Tfai ic.l during its construction. To such inquirers. Prof. NYwcomb has sivena most interest- ing and a categorical reply thac is perfectly satis- factory. Tho astronomical paper furnished by Prof. Alexander seemed to tear away the last hope of habitaoility in any part of the solar system ex- cept the ear: i». Prof. Proctor has shown that none of the primary planets were fit to be the abodes of life; and Prof. Alexander now disposes similarly of the satellites. Those interested in meteorology found much of interest in the calculations of Prof. Loomis concerning the law of storms; and Prof. Newberry gave information of scientific value re- specting fossil plants of the Silurian age. KESULTS OF THE POLARIS EXPEDITION. 15Y DR. E. BESSELS. This manuscript was entitled the History of Smith's S.niiicl irom a Geographical and Geological Point of View, a n. I somo other General Results of the Polaris Expedition. It is probable that Smith's Soand must be regarded as the best of the three gateways ro the pole. A channel of almost :;nn M;I m ica I miles Ions, and in some placep scarcely 25 miles wide, separates Greenland from Gritmell L ind aim the an-iiip 'lag > si. nth of it. Connecting it with BalThi's 15. ly and Davis's Straits, we can regard this channel as one having for its ceosrraphical homologne only the i:->i| Sea. It was discovered in July. IfilG, when Bylot an 1 r-allin. in smacks of 3G and 50 tens, sailed through Davi /> Straits to 77° N., when Ballin discovered Smith's Sound and described it as a deep bay. For more thiin 21)0 year- th • east and west capes of tue Sound were tlie northern Pillars of Hercules. John Ross in isiH, Desiring the Sound, described it as bounded by a range of elevations which he named Dulrina Momita'tis. Inglelirld, in 1852, Searching for the Mirvivors of the Franklin Expedition, sailed over the lo- cality ot 1lie-.e imagiii'ii T mountains, and readied 78° 28' N., Which has been passed only t wice MIIC.C. The most iiurtlierly points determined by him are Pelham Point of the i aM and Cape Sabine of the west coast. Kane followed on the heels of ingieiieid then^xt year, and reache I \\ lib his ship latitude 78° 37'. One of his pledge parties traveled to Capo Constitution, 80° 25' N., sighting land beyond on the west coast In R2°. He supposed erroneously tluit Cape Constitutiou was the northernmost point of Greenland. Thirteen years ago Haj'es readied the boundary of navi- gable water in the Sound nt latitude 78° 18', and could penetrate no further. The Polaris, under Capt. Hall, was more fortunate, and reached 82° 16'. the highest latitude a ship hits ever reached. The land found between 81° and 82° seems to me to be of great importance in demonstrating that Greenland has been separated from tho continent in a south- north direction. That entire tract of land, and probably the whole coast north of Humboldt Glacier, shows Siberian limestone, having at times almost perpendicular cliff.i of an average hight of 1,500 feet, with occasionally lower elevations covered with irregularly distributed hills, and mountains not systematically disposed in ranges. Garnets collected in this locality were found identical with somo at Fiskernesset, in lat. 62° N., and a verv characteristic white quartzite was identical with that of Cape Alex- antler. Besides these there were collected hornblende rock, gneissic granite, sandstone, ani other specimens of rocks found in position considerably south of Polaris Bay — even labradorite like that of the const of Labra- dor. The identity of these specimens with rocks near Ita was recognized by several Esquimaux from that place, to whom Dr. Bessels showed them. From these observations he concludes that the direction of the geo- logical drift is from south to north. On the North American continent in general the mam drift of erratic material has been south war i from north- erly latitudes, a fact naralleled in the North German plain in erratic blocks and dabris of Scandinavian ori- gin ; in Sweden and L ipland by drift from SpHzaergen ; in Iceland by debris from both Spitsbergen and North- Eastern Greenland. Smith's Sound seems therefore an exception to the general rule, and wo must conclude that its drift was transported by floating ice-fi -Ids and icebergs, and i.ot by glaciers. Among many specimens which Dr. Bessels examined between thu degrees of lat- itude named, he only found one pieue showing glacial scratches. This was Silurian limestone, identic il with and not to be mistaken as other than that of the immedi- ate vicinity. He sought ia vain for erratic blocks of this limestone further south than the original deposit. None of it was to be found between 70° and 73°. PalEBontological researches, as well as the fauna and flora of the region, point to the determination tliat the continent and Greenland were formerly connected. Greenland is now known to be an island. It is a rule in the formation of islands by separation from main land that the sea between will be shallow, especially if its width be, inconsiderable. Tlie soundings of D.ivis's Straits and Baffin's Bay are deeper than would be ex- pected, Dr. Sohott having some time ago computed the average depth, by Airy's method, at 250 fathoms. By the kindness of Baron von Ofcter, Dr. Bessels was sup- plied with soundings for 6° of latitude, showing a greatest depth at 67° 25' N. of 930 fathoms, and an aver- age in 28 soundings between 67°- 25' and 74° Of of 290 fathoms, corroborating Dr. Schott's computation. With these we may take into account the s. minting (.f Ii .ss ut 70° N. and 71° W., giving 250 fathoms, and a sounding probably by the Advance, at CJ° X. and 59' \V., giving a depth of 2S8 fathoms. Along the east coast of Davis's Strait, and its northern continuation, a narrow, \v>irm current ll.iws, moving from south to north at a mean velocity of 0.2 miles per hour, turning to tho west oil' Jones's Sound, and there de- lli'cted to the southward by the cold Arctic current. The velocity of tho latter d' tiers according to locality ami season, but never exceeds 12 miles per day. At Smith's Humid and Kennedy's and Robesou's Channels, the ex- National Academy of Sciences. 15 podif ion observed a northerly current with a velocity o T 8 — 12 mili'8 per 24 hours. The current spoken of by In- gelfield as setting north 72 miles per clay, near Cape Sau- marez, must have been a local eddy near the coast— an eddy into which the Polaris was once drawn and carried rapidly to tue northward. At all other localities the current llo\vs to the south. That this current cannot carry any drift material from south to north is evident. Still, we find between 81° and 82° minerals and rocks that doubtless had their origin in South Greenland, indi- catn.g that the current must at some time have had the opposite direction. This condition could only have been produced by the fact tint the separation of Greenland from America must have occurred in the same diiection that the current flowed. The outlines and form of David's Strait tend to strengthen this view. That the southern end of 'the strait is the older is ap- parent from the fact that the southern portion of it is evidently broader than the northern ; and also the fiords on the south-west const of Greenland are by far more numerous and deeper than further north. Let us construct an ideal current chart of that period, when both countries were yet united. According to the theory, a warm current must have moved along the easi; coast of America, and must have entered Balliu's Bay, having the full strength of an unweakened current in washing the end of that bay. Thereby considerable atmospheric precipitation as rain was occasioned, accel- erating the growth of the glaciers, which moved on toward the valleys, and there formed spurs. Tlie fiords we must consiaer as the former beds of these spurs. What was the agency which caused the separation, we can only surmise. There are two probabilities; either the channel is a fissure which gradually widened be- cause of the influence of the current, or it has been eroded bv the action of a glacier, the south end of which gradually melted down. The latter hypothesis seems the more probable of the two, and we may regard the channel itself as formerly an immense fiord. But we know that the soundings of fiords are usually shallower at the month than at the head; while with D.ivis's Strait and its continuation exactly the reverse is trut) : the greatest depths are found at its entrance. In reality nothing else could be expected. We know that the bottom of the North Atlantic is slowly but con- tinually sinking, and has been ever since the miocene period. Among other evidences is the fact that the Ber- mudas rest on a coral foundation. This motion roaches far north arid includes a part of Greenland. At Disco, for instance, the colonial store-house uad to be removed from a small island to the main land because its site was inundated by almost every high water. Further north the Liud rises. Kane and Hayes saw terrace-like formations, which Herschel regarded as old sea-beaches. The Polaris expedition detected similar appearances. There was decided proof of the rise of the laud north of Humboldl's Glacier, and many ter- races were seen, though, too much weight must not be given to this appearance, as similar terraces can be formed by the melting of snow. In the case of Hall's land, there was evidence of its rise in the discovery of Crustacea in fresh-water ponds more than thirty feet above sea level, which could not be reached by the highest Spring tides of GJ feet. Also, at elevations of 1,800 feet above sea-level, the expedition found marine shells and the balanus, identical with those of animals at present living in the neighboring sea. Later, mixed •with these numerous remains were found numerous pieces of drift-wood. The expedition also discovered a fine, limy mud, 1,200 feet above son-level, showing by aid of the microscope, specimens of I'olijt/ialanncc, These facts as to the rise and sinking of the land must bo regarded as important, factors in thechang" of level of the bottom of the seas. It seems prohabl • tha.t the former conditions ofdcpihs underwent change, they becoming gradually Obliterated, beeausu many ieei.crgn melt In the middle of Davia's Strait and Tallin's Hay, dropping the debris they carry, ami gradually producing shoals. That the scp.iiMlion of Greenland frum America must have occurred from south to north, seems more; than probable. IIovv this took place, is as yet an up MI ques- tion, needing for its solution many additional obser- vations. Dr. Bessels read from the report of the, Polaris ex- amination the results of the scientific work oi the expedition. This was published some months ago in THE TRIBUNE. Prof. Nowberry made the following remarks in respect to the expedition in which Dr. Bessels had borne so prominent a part : Some of us will remember how, a few years ago, the matter of the organization of the Polaris party came be- fore us. and the duty devolved upon us of prescribing a. formula of observations. Instructions for observing in some directions of science were delegated to the Acad- emy by the Government. Part of that duty fell to my charge ; and it became my duty to write out some views which I wished to submit to Dr. Uessels when he left us. Tnat paper was transmitted to him just about the time of the departure of the expedi- tion, and members of the Academy will remember with what sympathy and concern we saw these men take their lives in their hands aud go off to the Far North to execute this scientific commission, • and nothing is more proper than that we should recoirnizi the importance of the contributions that have oeen made to science; that we should welcome back those who have gone upon such a dangerous mission, and that we should express our regret that the chief of the party has fallen & victim to his devotion to science. I shall limit myself simply to the expression of the degree of satisfaction I leel aa to the accuracy of the statement that Dr. Bessels has made here, and has made to me personally, in regaivl to the evidences that are furnished there I pointing to map] of the great changes of level. It may be a matter of a little time and need- ing a great extent of observation to connect those with the changes we have found in lower latitudes, and in that way to work out plans that cau give the physical history of the northern portion of the continent, running through that remarkable period, the glacial, aud to con- nect that with the niioceue before, whou the tempera- ture was so very different. This change of elevation to which ho has referred I have received notice of with ureat interest. You will remember thatDr. Bessels mentioned that in the cliffs of Hall's Land there were found, l.SOi) feet above the pres- ent level, mollusks such as are living iu the sea at the present time. We llnd them all the way down to Like Champlain, and I have myself collected them there, evidently indicating the cir-ct of the same general de- pression. We find these rocks with many recognizable shells upon the shores of an ocean uerhaps that has pre- vailed over the far north, presenting an ancient coast line that at times has been washed by the sea waters and at other tiuif-s was elevated by the erosion that has cut up that great system of ttords. Tho matter of the transportation of tho drift from south to 1G Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. north la of great importance, and can be certainly known if wo couid find larger amount." nf bowlders with grooved surfaces. In the gradual elevation of temperature, a-nd a diminution of the magnitude of glaciers, there came a time when the glaciers tliere were local, carrying \vith them tho mate- rial by which it passed this coast, and very probably have left those striated bowlders which could hardly have had any other route than such as I have referred to. I cannot express tuv own immediate degree of satis- faction in welcoming back Dr. B/ssds who has so faith- fully executed the commission we commitr.,^1 to him. Dr. Bes.sels replied: I should like to mako another re- mark on the raising- of the land. I thought I might find pome clue in coll-ctins some specimens of the stems of old willows that grew on that land, and on examining those different willow stems, I found that there was not a single onu of them older than 19o years. That is indi- cated by the number of rings, although I do not think that such a rise as l.GOd or 1,800 feet could have been pro- duced in 196 or 200 year.?. Dr. Gnyot asked : Will Dr. Bessels please tell us what the diameter of that tree is, which is 196 years old? Dr. Bessels— These willow stems were a little larger than uiy finger. Dr. Guyot— Might I ask Dr. Bessels how he would ex- plain in the transportation to the North the coming of the bowlders from Labrador. It seems that the sea ought to have come as low down as Labrador. The Chairman (Prof. Henry) —Where would be the point of separation between Greenland and the conti- nent! Dr. Bessels — The point of separation would probably be in the vicinity of Newfoundland, becanse in. tracing such a Hue following the coast of Greenland would just exactly give us the shape of the continent required. You will remember that Burckraeister was the first to point out that such a triangle with the points to the south was the shape of the continent. [Dr. Bessels here drew an imaginary triangle on the blackboard.] The apex of the triangle is pointing toward the south, and in tracing the line from tue south cape o£ Greenland to the eastern cape of Newfoundland that would just give the triangular shape required by the theory. Dr Guyot— Tuat is true; but all that space from Smith's Sound ought to be open, in order to give the driit from Labrador. Dr. Bessels— Most likely, but that is what I wanted to flml out, tliougli wo did not find soundings greater than those iu the low fiords, and we found the lesser deplhs toward the north, the greater toward the south. Dr. Gnyot — And the separation would bo still in exist- ence <>n i lie nortuern part. Dr. Besicls — We find the same motion of the earth is existing still in Australia. The liutle continent Austra- lia is tilting jUat nko a boat under a heavy pressure of eca. Dr. Gnyot— What I want to know is whore was the connection between Greeland and the continent. That is the point, and I think that could not bo anywlieiv than just in the southern part. Dr. Besselt — Well, I think the last connection must have been somewhere in the latitude of Labrador. Dr. Guyot — Anyhow, this transportation of drift north- •ward is very interesting. All or a part of Bnerinn's Strait would bo open at that time, and the change of separation would interrupt tno currents from the Pa- cific, and change the whole circulation from the Pacific Bea. Prof. Nowherry— Wo think the circulation of the soa must have changed, because we find that the amount oi atmospheric saturation from existing currents is not enough to form glaciers. Dr. Bessels— It is so very small that the region under consideration could not have been so affected. The Chairman— Would not the abnormal appearance >f the drift be explained by simply supposing that tho sea of the North is not coincident with tho pole of the earth 1 Dr. Guyot— Certainly. Prof. Newberry — I venture to refer to the fact ad- mitted, that wo have traces of the lower Silurian rock stretching through to the utmost point readied north, and the upper Silurian, also. The elevation of these series of later deposits has come lower this way, as you know. In the mouth of the St. Lawrence we have these same deposits 500 feet deep in the sea, and down about New- York on the Hudson, 200 or 250. The depression seems to be greater toward t:ie north. The Chairman then announced that tho photo- grapher of the Smithsonian Institution desired to take a photograph of the audience. Thereupon everyhody turned about and faced toward the oppo- site end of the hall. Grave professors ran their fingers through their hair and struck an attitude. A solemn rigidity crept over the spell-bound group, at last to be interrupted by a sigh of relief as the black cloth was finally replaced on the camera. The next address was an account of the new instrument at the Observatory. THE GREAT TELESCOPE AT WASHINGTON. BY PROF. SIMOX NKWCOMB. The initiatory movement in the construction of the great telescope was early in July, 1870, when Congress authorized tor it an appropriation of $30,030. The contract was made witu Alvau Clark & Sons of Cambridge, Mass., to manufacture it. Tho price agreed upon for the enure telescope was S1G.03J. Ch.iuce & Co. of England agreed to furniah the glass, they hems: the only makers of achromatic glas* suitable for large re- fractors. There were many failures in casting the glass disks, and fully a year elapsed before Chance & Co. de- livered the glass to the Messrs. Clark; but even this was more expeditious than has been the case in other in- stances, as at least one order given about the same time had not at last accounts been tilled. Alvau Clark & Sons finished tho great telescope in October, 1872. It is not too much to say that the glass fully mot the high hopes that had been entertained concerning it. Tho telescope is mounted on what is known as the Gorman, or rather tho Munich plan; but this has not been rigidly adhered to where improvement was pos- sible. Certain important modifications have been made in the machinery by which the instrument is operated; some of these were devised by tho Messrs. Clark, and one was adopted from Mr. Cooke's great telescope at diieshead. As a result of these improvements, the ob- server can point tho telescope by means of the circles alone so nearly that an object sh.ill bo in tho field of view of the finder without the observer havi-m been re- quired to leave tho floor or to look at the object. Tho question is 1'requeutly asked. How does the new instrument compare with other telescopes 7 This Is dif- lleult to answer, since there are no refracting telescopes in this country of comparable dimensions. Tho question as to tho comparative efficiency of refracting and re- fioutiut telescopes is frequently raised. It must bead- National Academy of Sciences. 17 mlttcd that great reflating telescopes give very variable results and are very apt to prove unsatisfactory As at instance oi this, if we examine the record of Hersehel's •work, we find that nearly tho wholn of it was done with Ms two-foot reflector; we shall almost arrive at the conclusion that all the work accomplished with the four-foot reflector might have been done with the smaller instrument. The same comparison of results leads us to a similar conclusion with regard to the four- foot reflector of Lassoll — probably tho largest ever con- structed. He had under the clear skies of Malta made many important observations; but when he took his four-foot reflector there, hoping with it to verify his discoveries, it does not distinctly appear that he suc- ceeded. Struve, after looking through the four-foot tele- scope, wrote that it was not in any remarkable degree more powerful than his own 15-inch instru- ment at Pulkova. The only exception to this gen- eralization is the fact that the four-foot in- strument of Lassell did really discover the two inner satellites of Urauu?. Prof. Newcomb having redis- covered these with tho new instrument, and thus veri- fied Lassell's discovery, thinks that they could never be seen with a 15-inch refractor. In the new telescope the outer satellites of Uranus look as if of about the size that d, JTrsce minoris appears to the. naked eye. Tne smaller satellites, strange to say, have beeu best seen •when the moon was shining, and its light was plainly apparent in the telescope; the first .of ttiese appears about half as bright, and the second about one-third as bright, as Titauia. It must be admitted that it is impossible to make a refracting telescope perfectly achromatic. The second- ary spectrum which is obtained is for certain kinds of observations a serious objection to this class of lenses. This is especially the case where an extremely faint ob- ject has to bo observed alongside a very bright one. In iDvestia-ating the working of all ordinary telescopes, if •we confine ourselves to the yellow and green rays, we shall find the rays to be brought to very nearly the same focus; but on exairiuins: tho other rays we find that the red and the blue rays come to a longer focus, while ttie focus for the extreme indigo and violet rays is so much longer that they form a halo around the star's image. Possibly this can be avoided by adopting a device of the earlier astronomers —by having telescopes of one or two hundred feet in length, and by making changes in the curves of the glass. Tue difficulty in a refracting telescope is a theoretical one; it is inherent in the instrument, and can never be entirely avoided; that of a reflecting telescope is me- chanical in its nature, but has hitherto proved the more baffling of the two. On the whole, for regular work of almost; every kind the refractor is beticr th.m tho reflector. Our trier.ds have asked whether tbere is difficulty in the Washington telescope on account of spherical aber- ration. This proves to be a very small factor ; its total amount is lees than that produced in thcleu.s bv ordinary atmospheric variations of temperature— an effect which is noticed, when work is first begun with the instrument of an evening, but which rapidly wears away as the glass acquires the uniform temperature of the rest of the instrument. It seems to bo only the rays -near the edge of the glass which are thus affected. Prof. New- comb has looked through many other refracting telc- ecopes. by way of comparison, and after full considera- tion he gives it as his unhesitating opinion that the new instrument must bo regarded as a great success. Tlio following paper, in tho absence of its author, was read by tho Secretary : THREE OF JUPITER'S SATELLITES. BY PROF. 8. ALEXANDER OP 1MJINCKTOX, X. ,T. It is claimed that the other sah-lliics of il10 planetary system resemble our moon in the coiiicidcne,, of their times of rotation and revolution ; MIX! that in consequence every satellite presents always nearly tho same side to its primary. One occasion for this belief js found on observing the special vicissitudes whirl! ihn light of the satellites exhibits, each spccili ,1 eimnge recurring when they have again arrived at the sumo position in their orbits around their respective primaries. Another evidence is found in tho remarkable phenomena of their apparent loss of light on certain occasions. All Jupiter's satellites, except tho second, have at times been seen when in transit on the disk of the planet, appearing in whole or in part as dark instead of bright spots; and sometimes after at first ap- pearing bright they seemed to become dusky. This, as Prof. Alexander has intimated in previous publications, would seem to be due to the absorption of, and possibly also, to the interference of light; i.e., of the light re- flected from Jupiter meeting that of the satellite; and all tnis on a scale such as is only seen in astronomical observations. The extent of the undulations of light coming from the planet should, it would seem, be greatest whore the pen- etration through its atmosphere and the return are most nearly in a vertical direction, i. e., near the middle of the disk; while near its edges those undulations traversing the atmosphere (both going and returning) with great obliquity, would be more restrained. Ac- cordingly a satellite may sometimes — as it does— appear briiriit, possibly unusually bright, at its first entrance on the disk of the planet. As it advances, under the par- tial efivct of absorption, &c., it becomes dusky. Near the middle of the transit it seems relatively black, con- tinuing so sometimes to the end of t"ie transit, tho pas- sage of the disk being, very possibly, in the retrion of a bright belt. It is not strange, under these circum- stances, that tho dark spot should not always be rouud. Aside from all this, however, the phenomena in ques- tion would seem to be consistent with the theory of a, coincidence in the times of rotation and revolution, for the appearance of the satellite in the course of its transit as a black spot has within moderate intervals of succession recurred when the satellite had returned to a like position in its orbit around its primary. Admitting tho absorption already indicated, then, instructed by the revelations of the spectroscope, we may regard it as possible that the satellite may be colder aian if s primary. This would happen—indeed we would have a reason for t— if the satellite, like the moon, had little or no at- mosphere. All these analogies woukl IIP quite consistent th the hypothesis that all the satellites (inclmlinsr the moon) had been similarly condensed from the nebulous state, and then subjected to tho stringent conditions which prevail in satellite systems. The loss of atmosphere is one of tho suppo^able conse- quences of those strineent conditions, as indued M. L'i- )lace has intimated, when, afti-r stating the distance at which the attractive force of the earth is in rqiiilibrum with that of the moon, ho adds: " It at tins di.-tanco thu iriuiitive atmosphere of the moon had not been deprived jf all elasticity, it would be carried to the .-artii, which would thus draw to itself (I'asjiircr). This is perhaps tho reason why the rnoou'a atmosphere is nearly iuscusible." 18 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. Syslcme faillondc), (Book IV.. chapter 10, conclusion: We may fairly inquire whether this has not been the case with all the satellites and their common expe- rience. THE LAWS OF STORMS. BY PEOF. ELIA3 LOOMIS. This moraoir \vas entitled Results Derived from an Exainjn;,tion of tho United States Weather Maps for 1S72 and 1873. It was a continuation of the re- searches concerning: which Prof. Loomis presented a memoir at the Academy's meeting last October, -which -was at that time reported in THE TRIBUNE. The mate- rial emp'.oycd in these investigations is the United States weather maps for the years above named, one map daily at 7J a. m. being selected. The method em- pi, .yoi is tii plot out the lino of storms on skeleton maps month by uionih, reduce the paths to tabular forms by means of a protractor, measuring with reference to a meridian, ami thus ascertain the progress of each storm on a scale of inches. Reduced thus to tabular form, the highest velocity is fouud in February, 31 mUes per hour; the lowest in August, 17.7 miles per hour; the average for the year, 25.0 miles per hour. The average direction of thu slorin paths for the year is N. 82° E., and is found to toe 33° more northerly in October than in Julv; the vd-c:ty iu February is 75 per cent greater than iu August. The diversity of the direction end velocity of particu- lar storm* i:mrh exceeds these averages. Ou Oct. 20, 187U. a storm traveled N. 44° W. ; on Oct. 25, 1872, N. 18° W. ; on May 1C, 1873, N. 160° E., or S. £0° E., showing ft ranee of storm paths of over 180°. The velocities have a range from 0 to 57.5 miles per hour. As the mean values of the storm paths would thus form a very uncertain guide in predicting their velocity and direction, Prof. Loomis undertook an investigation or the disturbances accompanying the storms, using the material afforded by the weather maps. There seems to be a direct con- nection between the fall of rain and tho course of a etortn path. The rainfall of each storm was therefore collated, and the distance on each side of the path to •which the rain extended. The whole number of storm paths was then divided into four classes, according to their respective velocities, with the following results in 152 cases : Velocity in miles Extent of rain Velocity in miles Extent of rain per bom, area in miles. i"1' «»ur. area in miles. 3S.8 500 21.0 " ^05 These numbers indicate that the rain area generally extends 500 miles eastward of the storm center; that When tbe rain area exceeds that extent tho storm ad- vances with a vlocity greater than the mean, and when the rain a;., M -i less, the velocity is below the mean. The comparative acceleration or diminution of velocity can be deum n! from the table. A similar das - <>f comparisons to ascertain the connec- tion of rainfall with the direction of the storm gave the following re.- ults: CourBp of the Storm. Ails of rnin area. N i.) !•:. N. f>:r K. .-.. i n; K. N. iis3 K. Tho average course of tho storm paths for 24 hours co- Inci.lcs vi-r.v closely with tho portion ot the axis of the, ram and tor the preceding eight hours. By divi ling the paths of 79 storms into quadrants tbo following table of the prevailing winds was obtained : Velocity of wind in W. a I'.'" storms and prevailing -winds, the following result was determined: Velocity of -torra in Velocity of win 1 in mile- tier hour. E. quadrant. 3-J1 8.8 18.1 7.8 li.3 These numbers show that the stronger the wind on tho west side of the storm, the less is the velocity of the storm's progress. When the velocity iu the oast quad- rant is equal to that iu the west quadrant, tho vdocity of the storm is seven miles greater than the mean ; but when the velocity of the wind in the west quadrant ex- ceeds that in the east by 45 p-r cent, the velocity of the storm's progress is seven miles per hour less than the mean. A comparison of barometric observations showed that when the barometer after a storm has passed rises 50 p. T cent more rapidly than usual, the storm-center ad- vances 21 miles per hour more rapidly than the mean ; but when the mercury afterward rises 50 per cent less than usual, the storm is one that has traveled 13 miles per hour less than rithe mean. The barometric pressure at the center of the storm does not afford an index to its progress. When the barometer ris,;s rapidly as the storm passes by. the pressure at the center is increasing, but when at the rear of the storm the barometer rises slowly, the pressure at the center is diminishing or the storm is increasing in intensity. If the rise of the baro- meter is 22 per cent greater than usual, 'the central pressure increases one-tenth of an inch in 24 hours ; if 22 p^r cent less than usual, the centra! pressure decreases a tenth of an inch iu 24 hours. When the winds on the western quarter of a storm are stronger than those on the. eastern, the storm is increasing in intensity ; the re- verse is true when the winds on the eastern quarter are strongest. But this rule is subject to numerous exceptions. Prof. LDOIIJIS then explained the process by which he applied similar computations of tho relative velocities of the winds, &c., at high altitudes, such as that of the Signal Service, stations at Mount Washington ; coming to che conclusion that at the bight of 0,000 feet in the west- ern quadrant of a storm, the velocity of the wind is more than double that of tho storm. By another series of computations he obtained the forms of the isobarlc curves in at least 200 cases. Iu 55 per cent of the whole numher of cases the major axis of the isobar exceeded its minor axis by half its length; iu 30 percent the major was double the minor ; iu 3 per cent the major axis was at least four times tho minor. The storms of tho United States are mostly of an oval form, with tlie longer axis most frequently in a direction about N. 40 E. About three-quarters of the great storms originate in the extreme Wost. In a case of which the details were particularly reviewed It seemed probable that the llrst development of magni- tude iu a storm began with tlio collision of moist air from the Pacific Ocean against the peaks of mountains fu Oregon, resulting In heavy rainfall. But the most remarkable fact elicited was that the storm, once orig- inated and organizi-fl, traveled over the highest moun- tain ranges without indicating sensible, obstruction, proceeding eastward across the whole coutiuent of North America. . qnn'lrant 7.6 8. E. qnndrant. 8.3 W. nnmlrant. in 1 By further comparisons of extremes of velocity of LOWER SILURIAN FOSSILS. 1JY PROF. J. 8. N i:\VI5F.UHY OF COLUMBIA COLLEGE, NEW- YORK. This was a memoir on tho so-called Land Plants ot the Lower Silurian in Ohio. In the January number of The American Journal of Science Mr. Leo LesQucrcui ascribes two fossilo found in tho upycr National Academy of Sciences. 19 portion of the Cincinnati croup, near Lebanon, Ohio. These ho considers as the remains of hind plains, and refers them to ttte genus Sigillnria ; and this case is Cited as the. first instance whero plants so highly organized have been met with in Lower Silurian rocks. Through the kindness of the Rev. H. Hertzcr, to whom the specimens in question belong, they had been in my possession some time before the publication of Mr. Lesquereux's notice, and I had examined them with some care for the purpose of determining, if possible, their botanical relations. I had also made careful drawings of them, of which copies are herewith sub- mitted. As the result of my examination I am compelled to say that I fail to find either in the external characters or internal struc- ture of these specimens any satisfactory evidence that they represent land planes; still less that they form species of the genus Siyillaria. Their external markings are fairly represented iu the accom- panying figures, and 1 am compelled to say that they exhibit no internal organic structure whatever. They are simply casts in earthy limestone without carbon, aceotis matter, or any traces of woody tissue. The smaller specimen is a discoid section of a cylindrical trunk of which the external surface is very smooth, but is marked by a reticulation not unlike that of one section of the genus Sifjillaria. I fail to find, however, any dots or tubercles in the centers of the meshes, such as are referred to by Mr. Lesquereux, and which were they present might be supposed to represent the place of the nutrient vessels of the leaves. Taken by itself I should say that this specimen might bo considered to represent a sponge or some other low form of marine life, quite as well as Slf/illaria. Since the specimen is so small and forms so little of the original organism I think it would be unsafe to make it the base of any general aud important con- clusion. The layer specimen is represented, like the other, of the natural size. Tuis is also a cast of a nearly cylindrical trunk of which the ex- ternal surface is roughened by irregularly disposed and unequally sized lenticular prominences. These re- call, in a rude way, the leaf scars borne by the trunks ot some Lveopodiaceous or Cycadaceous plants, but they do not exhibit the spiral arrangement, nor the details of structure which the leaf-scars of such plants almost uni- versally retain in the fossil state. In the interior of this trunk are seen a fovv irregularly scattered points of car- bonaceous matter, but they are not contiuous fibers, and to ray eye show no traces of cell structure. Taking all the characters of these interesting fossils into consideration, I am disposed to regard them as casts of the srems of fucoids. Hud they been lanu plants they would almost certainly exhibit more distinctness and regularity of surface marking, some coating of car- bonaceous matter, aud some tr.ices of organic structure. A large number of specimens of sea-floated hind plants, which we have found in the Djvoni.m limestones of Ohio, all assert their botanical affinities by these characters. The remains of fucoids, on the con- trary, consist almost universally of mere casts of their external surface, carbonaceous matter nnd internal structure having both entirely disappeared. For these reasons, therefore, I should hesitate to hang npou these specimens so important a conclusion as that promulgated by Mr. Lnsquereux. I would not be under- stood, however, to assert positively that they are not the remains of land plants, for they are too imperfect to be decisive of that question, but ouly this, that they do not afford characters which permit one to accept them as evidence of tiie existence, ofland plants, and certainly not of Slyillariti, in Ohio, during the Lower Silurian age. The remains of what hava been called land plants are found in the Lower Cambrian sandstones of Sweden, and two species have been described (K.^iln/im, ;.,-nnitr- sonum, Torell, and E. Torelli, Lenarson). Thesis plants are pronounced by algologists not to bo alga}, but are referred to vascular cryptogams aud monocotyledons. It is not certain, however, that they arc not tliallogens. as all traces of structure are lost, and nothing is k>ft but the cast or impression of the external surface. (Geological Magazine, September, 18G9.) Lana plants of Gaspe have also been found in tho Upper Silurian strata, Canada, by Prof. Dawson. Hero, with a large number of fucoids, a few specimens have been found.which he refers to his genus Psiloplayton. In these the scalariform axis, and the outer fibrous back both remain aud serve as satisfactory guides in their classifica'ion. (Dawson' 's Prccarboniferons Plants of Canada, p. CG.) With these exceptions no land plants are reported below the Devonian. On this point, however, the evi- dence is all negative, and highly organizsd land plants may be nt any time found in the Lower Silurian rocks. Indeed, the variety and high rank of the Devonian flora prepares us to expect such, a result. Strict accuracy compels us to state, however, that up to the present timo positive proof of the existence of land plants in the Lower Silurian has not been met with in other countries, nor is it furnished by the specimens under considera- tion. What we know of tho physical condi- tion of the region about Cincinnati during the Lower Siiurian age strengthens the conclusion that the specimens before us are the remains of marine and not terrestrial vegetation. As I have shown in the* Geological Report of Ohio, the Cincinnati axis was raised above the sea at the close of the Lower Silurian age, and when the Cincinnati group was deposited an open sea occupied all that region. The shores of this sea were formed by the Eozoic highlands about Lake Superior, in Canada, in the Aiiiroudacks, arid along the Blue Ridge; nowhere less than 000 miles away from the locality where these fossils were found. It becomes, therefore, ex- tremely improbable that two distinct species of terres- trial plants should bo wafted from thoso distant shores and deposited in the calcareous sediment of the sea at this point. The remains of fucoids are, however, not un- common in the Cincinnati group, and the only objection to grouping these fossils with BulhotrcpJns aud the other Silurian algae must be found in their some- what peculiar surface-markings. These are, how- ever, not unlike the markings on tho stems of many recent and fossil fucoids. Tho summit of the stem of the tri.mt kelp Macrocystis is n> irkt il with irregular rings left by the removal of their great fronds, and the stems of many fossil fucoiJs are scaled or tuber- culated more regularly and distinctly than are these specimens. Among such I will only cite Arthrophycut nullii of tho Medina, the tuberculatcd fucmd railed Ifalt/nicmtisot the Cretaceous, and the scaled Phytodcrma of the Jurassic. HOW THE EARTH WAS FORMED. BY CAI'T. C. E. DTJTTOX, U. 8. A. This paper w:is entitled A Criticism upon the Contractional Hypothesis. The hypotheses that have been put forward to 20 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. explain the operation of forces beneath the earth's surface in producing its characteristic features are here referred to two types : (1) those attributing the surface features to contraction from loss of heat, which may he failed the contractions! hypothesis, and (2) the argu- ments winch attribute them more or less to disturbances produced by external changes, which may be called the fractional hypothesis. The contractioual hypothesis assumes that the earth may be regarded as of two portions— a cooled exterior and ;\ hot nucleus. The secular loss of heat is supposed to bo greater from the latter than from the former, ami by a consequent contraction of the nucleus it is assumed that the shell would tend to collapse. Owing to the unequal ability of certain portions of the shell to bear the tangential strains thus occasioned, the yielding taking place along the lines of least resistance would be manifested in the production of table lands, or moun- tains, or disturbed stratification. The smaller con- ductivity of materials underlying the land is held to account for the primary division into land and water, the land having been left behind in a general con- vergence of material toward the center. There can be no reasonable doubt that the earth mass consists of a cooled exterior inclosing a hot nucleus, and secular cooling and contraction are necessary corol- laries. As the process was of immense duration, we nrny take sonic starting point, and assuming the loss of temperature to have been continuous, may arrive at a period when the whole mass was lluid. As was pointed out by Sir William Thompson, this was a period of homo- geneity, both as to material and heat. The first result of loss of heat would apparently be consolidation, and the argument of Hopkins is here accepted that consoli- dation would begin at the center, where pressure would enable congelation to be effected at high temperatures. Materials solidifying at the surface would sink by their Increased density, until the surface was so far reached l>y solidification proceeding from the interior as to leave only an imperfectly liquid mass, where such movements, gradually retarded, at length ceased. The result would be a solid globe with perhaps isolated reservoirs of liquid tint might consist of matter having a higher melting point. MATHEMATICAL BASIS OF THE ARGUMENT. Here follows in Capt. Dutton's memoir a summary of Fourier's solution of the problem of secular cooling. It is based upon certain factors, which are represented thus: V, denotes half the difference of the two initial temperatures. r, halt their sum. t, the, time. x. the iliit. mce of any point from tho plnne. T, the temperature of the point x at the time t. k. the conduct i vity of the material in terms of its own thermal capacity. With these, data a formula is computed. To obtain tho coefficient of k, Messrs. Thompson and Forbes made experiments on rock material with thermometers im- bedded at dUtance^ of from three to 25 feet during a period of 14 years. V, representing the, maximum tem- p'-rature of the interior ot the, earth at the beginning of cooling, mint bo hypothetical; for our purposes we may take it as the melting point of tho more refractory material forming the chief bulk of the nucleus, and as- sume it to be that of the anhydrous silicates and that they are 600 to 800 miles in depth. Allowing for tho effect of pressure upon the congealing point \ve may ac- cept Sir William Thompson's estimate of this tempera- ture as, at a maximum, 7,00')° F. A course of mathemati- cal reasoning then is put forwar.1 by C:ipt. Button, which shows that if it be possible to determine a true mean rate of increase of temperature per foot of descent at any point near the surfac >, the time required to elapse from tho epoch of the establishment of the cooling to the present time can bo deduced. This moan is placed by some investigators at 1-50 of a degree of Fahrenheit per foot, by others at 1-60 ; the formar would give about 100.090,000, and the latter about 130,000,030 years. The correctness of the mathematical deductions can- not be questioned, but the data on which they proceed are open to doubt. The coefficient of k may not bo an invariable constant, as it seems probable from experi- ment that the conductivity of material incn>as3.s as fluidity is approached. The time required to establish an increase which may be represented by 1° Fab., divided by 50.6, would thus probably bo largely aug- mented. Tais would also reduce the basis of the con- tractional hypothesis by reducing the total dissipation of heat and the contraction inferred from it. Again, as to k, if porous roclrs are saturated with water they are much worse conductors than those on which Sir William Thompson experimented : this value, now represented at 400, might theu be put at 259. The effect of this would be to extend the duration of the cooling. Another factor open to question is the rate of increase of temperature per foot of descent. Its value, varying widely with lo- cality, is found in some places one-fifteenth and la others one one-huudred-and-tenth. Proximity to igne- ous masses may vitiate any average based on such observations, as these case* may be extreme, and aqueous circulation below the surface may equally vitiate other observations. KKSUL.TS AS TO THE AGE OF THE EAIITIT. (1.) Lot us assume that tue earth, wuon first ceasing to be fluid, had a temperature of 7,000° F.. and now ex- hibits an increase of oue one-hundredth of a degree for each foot of descent near thn surface. Tho period be- tween would then be about 625,000,000 years. At a depth of 300 miles the Increase of temperature would bo about a fifty-six hundred and fortieth of a degree per foot of descent; thence inward the total amount of coolinsr would bu inconsiderable ; outward it would augment at an increasing rate to the mean temperature at the surface. (2.) Tike the present surface rate of increase of tem- perature at, per foot, one degre3 Fall, divided by 60.6. The epoch would be about 160,003,030 years, and bo- low 140 miles the rate of increase of heat would be inconsiderable. (3.) Take the valuation of k at 400 instead of 250, and of tin' surface rate at 1 divided by 50.0, tho epoch becomes about 98,000,000 years, and bolow 150 miles the rate of increase would bo less than 1 divided by 2,700. (4.) Take k at 250 and the surface rate at 1 divided by 230, the epoch would be 2,503,000.003 years, and at a depth of 600 miles tho cooling might bo disregarded. Hut in general the application of this theorem is fatal to (he contraction hypothesis, as it shows that after 200 or 300 miles tho cooling has been comparatively little; \\ ere it otherwise tin- present rate of increase of hoat per foot would be lower than the lowest reasonable estimate with our present knowledge. Our acquaintance with the laws of plutonio action is insulli /lent to take it into account, but as an element in the problem it may be regarded as of Inconsiderable moment. Chemical changes could scarcely take place at the limits of sensible cooling, and cannot bo regarded as operative at greater depths than 200 or 1100 miles. The contraction of this portion cannot bo more than one-tenth, if we assume the Assyrian Eelics. 21 total contraction of the earth's radius at 30 miles since the formation of a cooled exterior. OBJECTIONS TO THE CONTRACTIONAL HYPOTHESIS. By tar the greater portion of this cooling muse have taken place before the palaeozoic age. By tar the greater portion of the residue must have occurred bo- fore the begiun'ng of the tertiary period, aud yet the whole of this contraction would not account for the dis- turbances which have occurred since the close of the cretaceous period. To account for the tangantial com- pression in mountainous regionswo shonhi bo compelled to assume contraction since the Permian period. But wo find the L uirentian rocks excessively disturbed, and cannot attribute this to secular contraction of the inte- rior. Shrinkage of one-fifth in linear density implies an increase of 95 feet in tneau density; aud this is incom- patible with any reasonable supposition as to the con- dition of the earth's mass while the Laureutian sedi- ments were accumulating, if wo consider their distor- tion as due to contraction. Again, a vertical section through the Appalachian chain, aud thence westward to the liwth meridian, shows a highly disturbed surface for 250 miles. If the contrac- tion was general, there must have been a vast slip over The nucleus. But the friction and aduesiou between the crust and the nucleus seem to have beeu overlooked. Tue analytical method applied to this would demonstrate its impossibility. Again, the ten iency to corrugation along certain belts with series of parallel folds is assumed on a doubtful basis. The shrinkage of the nucleus would institute a strain in all directions within its own tangent plane. Relief by horizontal yielding in one direction would give no general relief ; the intensity of the strain in all other directions would still re- main. The case is not that of a collapsing cylinder, but of a dome, and great deformations of the earth's surface must ensue. The plications of tlie palaeozoic rocks are not of this general character. They an- localized in long and rather narrow belts. Still more discordant is tlie evulence of the tertiary plications; the disturbance from Cape Horn to Behring's S3a is a continuous, nar- row belt. If we admit contraction along tue belt alone, we cannot explain the regular figure of the earth as au ellipsoid of revolution with an eccentricity proportioned to its mean density and angular velocity. Here tb.6 analogy of the withered apple fails; if corrugated by shrinkage it fails to preserve its figure, or if preserving it, must corrugite uniformly. TJ avoid prolixity this argument is not carried into the discussion of details of surface. t Prof. Guyot road a memoir of Prof. James H. Coffin. The following papers were read by title only : A Memoir on the Zodiacal Lurlit. by Prof. S. Alexander; On Some Points in Mallet's Theory of Vulcaiiicity, by Prof. E. W. Hilffard; The Polariza- tion of the Zodiacal Light, by Prof. A. W. Wright. Mr. James D. Warner of Brooklyn read a purely technical paper on a New Set of Bernoulli's Numbers, which arc a mathematical invention for shortening certain algebraic processes by their application tc the* coefficients of development of expanding series. At the conclusion of this paper, without another word vro or con, without stilted resolutions, or any other of the numerous devices for closing an ex- tended meeting, Prof. Henry simply rose from his chair and said : " The Academy is now adjourned." And it was adjourned. ASSYRIAN RELICS. PHOTOGRAPHIC COPIES AT WASHINGTON FROM THE BRITISH MUSEUM. COPIES OF GEORGE SMITH'S RESTORED CHALDEAN TABLETS IN THE SMITHSONIAN I.N^IIll TION— HOW THE CUNEIFORM CHARACTERS *WERE DE- CIPHERED AND THE STORY THEY TELL— THE RECORD OK THE EXPLOITS AND DECREES OP ANCIENT KINGS. | FROM AN OCCASIONAL CORRESPONDENT OF THE TIUHUNK. | WASHINGTON, U. C., April 24.— I make it a point to stroll over the Smith'sonLiu Institution ;it least twice a month to see the additions to the curiosities whicli are there on exhibi ion. Last week my visit was rewarded by a view of the famous tablets which pre- sent the Chaldean account of the Deluge. These tablets are copies of those restored by George Smitli, eura- tor of the Assyrian aud Oriental Departments of tho British Museum, aud were procured by Professor Henry, at the request of Professor Mason, of Columbia College, Washington. Professor Mason lias for several years made a specialty of Oriental languages and history, and is said lobe the only man in this country who can decipher the character of the cuneiform in- scriptions, lie was in the building at tha time I visited it, and I found him in the great upper hall busily en- gaged in hanging the uiaguifiuent series of phototype published by the British Museum, of whic'a mention will be made further on. These copies will be placed in tho large upper hall, which is to be devoted to ethnological subjects. All the natural history specimens which have hitherto been kept in that hall will be taken down stairs. New cases have been made for the proper exhibition of ethnological curiosities, and the vast collections of tho Smithsonian illustrating the habits and life of iiorth American Indian tribes, as well as of many other unciv- ilized peoples, including some that are prehistoric in their antiquity, will thus be brought together and ar- ranged with accurate classification for the use of the professional student. The systematic method of arrange- ment of the collections of the Smithsonian Institute, under the care of Prof. Baird, adds materially to their usefulness and value. Professor Mason soon became enthusiastically inter- ested in the subject of the tablets, and gave the follow- ing history of their discovery aud restoration: Some twenty-five years since, Mr. George Smith, a young eusraver in London, sho ,ved considerable interest in matters of Oriental art and curiosity deposited In tho British Museum, and, finally, upon the return to En- gland of Sir Hoiu-y Rawliuson. the distinguished Oriental scholar, astonished the latter one day by easily decipher- ing: the inscription upon one of the Assyrian re.ics brought by L iyard from Nineveh. Mr. Smith became an employ6 of the Museum, and ultimately curator of the department of Oriental antiquities. In 1816 Mr. Layard, while making his excavations on the supposed site cf Nineveh, broke through into a largo room, whicli proved subsequently to be the library of Aasurbanipal, who was King of Assyria B.C. 663-040, and who estab- lished this library B.C. 667. Toe writings of the ancients were engraved upon tablets, which, in mo-t instances, were made of stone; bur. at the Eunhrates's mouth, the area covered by the Chaldean Kingdom is entirely allu- vial, ami stone is altogether wanting; therefore, tho CiiMklean tablets are mane of terra cotta, or else of un- burutclay. LnyarJ found large numbers of these tablets, 23 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. arranged about the room in four divisions, lying in piles like blocks. These he collected caretully and sent to England; but during the transit homo, owing to care- less packing, nearly all were reduced to fragments. THE STORY OF THE FLOOD. Large numbers of these tablets comprised the gram- mar, lexicons, dictionaries, and spelling book-* of the language, and one of the tour divisions of the library was known as the Mythical and Mythological section. In this latter section Mr. Smith discovered the story cl the Deluge, and in a paper read heron- the Biblical Archjeological Society of London describe:! as follows his patient labors in attaining its restoration and trans- lation! From the Mythical and Mythological section of Assyrian texts I obtained a number of tablets, giving a curious serins of legends and including a copy of the story of the Flood. On discovering these documents, which were much mutilated, I searched over all the col- lections of fragments of inscriptions, consisting of sev- eral thousands of smaller pieces, and ultimately recov- ered 80 fragments of these legends, by the aid of which I was enabled to restore nearly all the text of the description of the Flood and considerable portions of the other legends. These tablets were originally at least 12 in number, form- ing one story or set of legends, the account of the Flood being -m the eleventh tablet. Of the inscription de- scribing the Flood, there are fragments of three copies containing the same text; these copies belong to the time t written or translated is at present very dilli-ult to decide. * * * On comparing the Deluge text with dated texts of the time of Sargon I., it appears to foe older than these, and its original com- position cannot be. placed later than tbo seventeenth century before the Christian era; while it may be much older The eleventh tablet, which, as Mr. Smith has proved, contains the account of the Deluge, comprises two hun- dred aud eighty-nine lines of cuneiform character.-', in- scribed upon botii sides of the tablet. The copy sent to the Smithsonian is in two plates, showing each side of the origi ial inscription, which are handsomely mounted to protect them from injury. Assuriianipal, in whose time the library was founded, is supposed to be the King who was known to the Greeks by the name "Sar- daiial.alu-," and who occupied the relation to Assyrian history i hat 1'isislratus did to that of the Greeks. T.ie htu lv iif ihe cuneiform characters has since isiij been closely pursued by Oriental scholars, and the results :>,t tained i:i i --ailing the inscriptions contained in the Brit- ish Museum have been long foretold as describing the hiMni v of the Chaldean* and Assyrians. FAOMMIl.i: ril'.I.K. \TK)NS 1JY TUE BRITISH MU- BEUM. The British Museum has already published siz volumes of the cuneiform lextn in tac-similo. giving also tin results, as far as ascertained, of the labors of various M-hohir.s m ih'-ir translations. In addition to these, ai enterprising I/.ndon linn has published an extensm series ..I pliiitngrah.s of objects in the Museum, and I hat portion which relates to Assyrian history hasjust been jeceivedat the Smithsonian, and is the collection already spoken of as being prepared by Prof. Mason forj exhibi- tion. A largo portion of these photographs are of the sculptures in the North-West Palace at Nimruil, which is nearly opposite the supposed site of Nineveh, and are of three groups or periods, B. C. 884, B. C. 745, and B. C. 668, aud afford to scholars tests of progression in the art a* ^heseithree dates. Tue oldest sculptures discovered by Layurd at this place, are of the time of Asshur-ua-zir-pal, B. C. 884 to 850. The deeds of this monarch are related at length, aud no details seem to have been considered too minute or Insignificant to bo depicted. The exploits of the King in hunting ara as minutely finished as those describing his military expeditions. From these former slabs it appears that he " preserved " his game, having a large park stocked with wild animals, the supply of which was kept up bv tribute aud by pres.mts. The King is represented riding down his enemies, bending his bow aud shooting at their defenses, or receiving submission. All the details of slaughter, and of the cruel, barbarous treatment of prisoners are given— such as impalement on high poles, cutting aud dus mbowel- ling — aud show exactly the various arms, engines, and military implements of the time. Tiie f.vmoas "Black Obelib.t," found by Layard in the C3utral Palace at Niturud, was erected in this palace by Shalmaueser II., and represents the incidents of thirty-one campaigns of that monarch, and among others receiving the embas- sador aud tribute of Jehu, King of Israel. This occupies the top row of one of the four faces, and is the first mention in Assyrian history (B. C. about 850) of a Jewish king. The Assyrian series of plates closes with the reign of Assur-bau-i-pal, aud these as works of art present the most advanced specimens. In tLe hunting scenes the sport is tamer as compared with like scenes in the reign of Asshur-ua-zir-pal of 200 years before. The lions are now carried in cages to the spot and then let out, while in the earlier time the game was roused in the open country and hunted down. Thi very expression depicted upon the face of the game shows the decadence of the sport, and all accessories of the scenes depict a lazier and more ostentatious mode of hunting, and foretells the decay of the empire, which i« less than 00 years {B. C. 50D) crumbled to pieces. In one of the photographs is showu a small glass vase, found at Nineveh, bearing the name of the Assyrian monarch Sargou. the date of which places it iu the year 719 before the Christian era. This is the earliest kuowu specimen of transparent glass. Many of the tablets bearing decrees of the King are trilingual, though merely variations of the Semitic writing. These inscriptions, being placed in parallel columns, long sot at fault the efforts of scholars to de- cipher them, until it was discovered that the three great divisions of the Cualdean Empire were Inhabited by people who varied in speaking and writing their language greaily, and the three columns contained these three variations. TJic Poet Longfellow, by James T. Fields. THE POET LONGFELLOW. LECTURE BY MR. JAMES T. FIELDS. A DISCOURSE UPON HIS CHARACTER AND POETICAL WORKS— HIS GENIUS AND ZEAL FOR STUDY— IN- TERESTING DETAILS OF THE ORIGIN OF SOME OF HIS FAMOUS POEMS— HOW THE " PSALM OF LIFE " AND " EXCELSIOR" WERE WRITTEN— HIS TRIBUTES TO HIS FRIENDS — A DELINEATOR OF FINE AND TENDER SYMPATHIES. I FROM AN OCCASIONAL CORRESPONDENT OF THE TRIBUNE.! BOSTON, April 24.— The pupils of the Girls' High School have had another addition to tlie debt they already owe Mr. James T. Fields. He has always taken a great deal of interest in the school, and when he had prepared his interesting lecture on Tennyson, he first submitted it to their indulgent ears. The lecture on Longfellow, which he read to them on April 24, surpasses any of his previous essays of a similar nature in its admiring apprecia- tion of his subject and intimate acquaintance with it. Its delivery may be. considered as a eort of literary dress rehearsal, and, if the evident delight of the young ladies and the few score of visitors who heard it is any criterion of the favor with which it will be received by the general public, it will prove more successful than either of the half-dozen similar essays which have been so favorably received during the past Winter. The lecture, which is fully reported below, occupied in delivery hardly an hour. THE LECTURE. FELLOW-STUDENTS: I once had the pleasure of speak- ing to you ID this hall cm "Alfred Tenuyson, the Foot Laureate of England." I am to speak to you now on one of our own stars who have sung, a poet of such marked and varied excellence, a character so reverenced and beloved among us, and iudeed everywhere, that I have only to mention the name of Longfellow to secure at once your sympathy and your interest in my theme. It seems to me that this earlv hour of the day is the selectest one for reading an essay on Longfellow to such an audience as this; for lie is always young, always full of the spirit of sunshine and the dawn, always im- parting strength and courage to endeavor, and alwavs singing in his own peculiar way that " life is real and earuest:" that we must all strive to "act in the living present," and that "still achieving, still pursuing," should be the end of our flying and fleeting existence. Somehow the world has always had an irreverent habit of elevating its nose at living authors of genius, as if it was a crime for a really great poet or prose writer to be alive and well and enjoying the society of his friends ; as if dust and ashes added a certain respectability to merit, and it were highly appropriate to wait till a inau be safely under the ground before he was lo be con- sidered aa heir to fame and celebrated accordingly. As soon as a great author is (load, wo all be- in to do him justice. Then we crowd about his grave and throw in tributary flowers that should have nude glad his heart and all his living senses while ho wtill lived among us, and when he could htivo heard tho voice of piviiso not with the dull, cold car of death, and felt tho laurels around his living, sensitive brow. L'.;t us try, t<>- luy, to be just to a living pout, and express wilhout ro^ervo that earnest pride we feel in him, :md which thuau who will come after us will bo sure to cherish. THE GRAND AND HEALTHY LESSONS OF HIS POETRY. The poetry of Longfellow is full of grand and healthy lessons. " Stand up to your work, whatever it maybe, and do not be afraid of it," is one of them. We aro sometimes unmindful here in America that corn must bo ground before it is baked. Wo are apt to hurry every- thing, and to forget that if wo do not know a thing cor- rectly we really do not know it at all. But L mgfellow is to be placed with the army of scholars as w,-!l as with the gifted band of world-renowned singers. I am to speak to you of a man whose poetry is not ;vu exp TI - ment, but au assured and lasting fact ; of 0:10 who has no infirmities which I have been able to discover; of one whose fancy never disordered or mis lirectod tho purpose of his muse. Some poets, and good ones, have sometimes fl.mied out, vaguely bristling with dictionary words, and shocked us with their vagaries of thought and expression ; but Ljugfollow is never lalse or affected ; his language is always that of man to man and human heart to liumau heart. He never writes of one thing for the purpose of putting another. His purpose is always direct, and he goes to his worlc with the certainty of the arrow and with a power .that is thoroughly in earnest. In the year 1820— just fifty-lour years ago— the question was started iu The Edinburgh Review, which raised such a breeze throughout America that the query is destined never to be forgotten. The exact form of the inquiry is precisely in these words: " Iu the four quarters of the gl >be, who reads an American book'?" Now I don't think at that period this question was an impertinent one. We really had not much literature to show, as to quantity or quality either, in those days. Twelve months after that question was asked, a young lad had just entered his name as a student in Bo wdom College who was destined, forty years later, to become the most popular poet iu the civilized world, including this same kingdom of Great Britain, whore The Edinburgh Review was published. MORE READ THAN ANY OTHER LIVING POET. To-day there is no disputing the fict that Henry Longfellow is more read than auv other living poet; that his books are more widely circulated and bring more copyright than any other written in English verse. There must be somo reason lor this popularity, among high and low ; some sufficient cause for thi^ lasting and firm regard for tho man who at a very early ago came singing out from the borders of Maine into tho world of song. E.irly he says somewhere— and I wish you all to remember this— that " genius is ouly the infinite capacity of taking trouble." I often think of the infinite pains Louglellow took when a, youth to become a scholar, ripe, and mature. Starting off iu a. small brig, m tho first year of his college life, ho goes into Denmark and studies Danish, and ob- tains a knowledge of Icelandic, German and Dutch in tho same way. He resolved to be not a m< re king of shreds and patches, but a rc.il master in tuc studies ho Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. determined to conquer. Holmes speaks somewhere of one who " pi-rf jrrns a little with the lead pencil." Little performances were not what Longfellow was after in life. Let me give you a glimpse of him as he app-'ar-.Ml years ago, from that little book, "A Year in Spain," and which contains au excellent account of Mr. Longfellow, •whom the writer met ia his wanderings. lie says : My companion was just fr.im college aul fall of the ardor excited by classical pursuits, with health unbroken and with a curiosity which had never yet been satisfied. He had suuiiy locks, a fresh complexion, clear blue eyes, and ull the indications of a joyous temperament. This is a true and interesting picture of the young scholar in his first travels into the grand old world of art. and romance. There are those called poets who live in the sleepy Hollows of thought, "where it is all the time afternoon." But Longfellow is not one of these. He has made himself controller of that high art called poetry by romiuir in contact ac all points with the treat interests of humanity, H.iving been kissed by the fairy queeii of song in his cradle he henceforth became her living subject to do her noblest and best work. ins rnorurxD AXD SPECIAL SCHOLARSHIP. Some scholars never carry their understandings about with them, but leave them dozing on the liurary shelves. A mere scholarly man could not have written us Loug- fcllow wrote. A man may be very expert in all the dead languages, but utterly unlearned in any living one. A quotation quoted from a quotation is not the most enlivening to the present race. This all-alive and sharply modernized world of ours has outgrown the dead-letter times, strange as it may seem perhaps in Oxford and Cambridge. Longfellow's scholarship is profound and special, but, ii never clogs for a moment the impetus ot his nineteenth century genius. He can answer correctly more questions than almost any man of his time out of the pages of the past, but he never intrudes his wisdom into his poetry. It is there, v*3ry deep do ,vn, like the roots of things, but the garlands of song cover up and conceal the river of knowledge that is flowing beneath them. If ho were not known as the great poet, he would certainly bo recognized everywhere as a preeminent scholar and thinker. In poetry, we are ape to have many acquaintances but very few frit-nils. Wilh how many men and women are we on speaking terms In poetry, but how few we really love and cannot live wituout! Our supreme favorites iu the. poetic art you <-:m easily catalogue, and Longfellow is one of them. There is never any coldness, never any unsympaihetif relation between him and his readers. I dare say you all remember those beautiful dedicatory stanzas in the new volume, published in 1819. where he flows out in that deep, tender strain of salutation to all who have ever sent him messages of friendship founded on a perusal of his writings. MORE WIDELY QUOTED THAN ANY POET SIXCE POPE. Since Pope, no poet has been more quoted than Long- fi 1 ow. lie has gilded to i in- stock of English letters and speech HH many lines, couplets, and verges as any other of a hundred years. This is u sure test of poetic thought and inspiration. You must look to Shakespeare and a few other great onus lor a larg.-r currency of expression than our American L'Mitrfcllow had. The mottoes on thousands of title-page* are from him ; if yon go to En gland, you will h ar him cited iu Parliament. In Westminster Hall, and iu the cathedral ; every pulpit admits him, for his thought is wide enough to embrace all creeds and all spiritual- ities in his hallowed and responsive verse. It is be- cause ho humanizes everything he touches, that his lyre has nothing alien to any soil. I have heard hiui quoted by au American monk with a cowl, and I have heard him snug by a band of humble worshipers in a e... nip-meeting among the bills of New-Hampshire. No he ,rl but can receive him and find consolation in his melodies, and this is one reason why ho is one of the most popular of all poets writing English. Someone seeing a copy of one of his books lying in a low drink- ing saloon has said, " This is indeed true fame." The poorest cottager, if he have any books at all, must be sure to have something that Longfellow wrote. Being overtaken in the country by night, I found lodging in a humble house, I was shown to a little room next tbe roof, and there the only book beside the Bible was his " Voices of the Night," and I was forced to repeat. "This is indeed true fame." No poet has ever paid tenderer tributes to his> friends than Longfellow, and that is a good sign. When Haw- thorne, his friend and fellow-student, was buried on that beautiful May day, iu 18G4, the heart of the poet seemed to be weeping in that tender requiem that followed al- most immediately after the funeral procession of the great romancer. Iu the lines addressed to the River Charles there is a verse commemorating three friend- ships, one of which was Charles Sumuer's. He sings in his own melodious way: " More than this, thy name reminds rue Of three friends, all true and tried. And that name like music binds uie Closer, closer, to thy side. Friends, my soul with joy remembers, How like covered flames they start, When I fan the living embers On the hearthstone of my heart." HOW THE " PSALM OF LIFE " WAS WRITTEN. It is always interesting to know under wh.it circum- stances a poet has framed an immortal poem or sonnet or soug. As I happen to know something of the origin and birth of many of Longfellow's poems, l,-t mo divulge a few secrets in regard to them. Tae "Psalm of Life " came into existence on a bright Summer morning iu July, 1838, iu Cambridge, as the poet sat between two windows at the small table in the corner of his chamber. It was a voice from his inmost heart and he kept it some time in manuscript, unwilling to part with it. It expressed his own feelings at that time, when he was rallying from the depression of a deep allliction, and he hid the poem in his own heart for many months. lie was accused of taking the, famous verse, " Art i- long and time is fljeiing." from Bishop's poem, but I happen to know that was not in his mind, and that the thought came to him with as much freshness and originality as if nothing had been written before. "There is a reaper whose name is death " crystallized tit once, without cll'ort, in the poet's mind, and he wrote it rapidly down, with tears Idling his eyes as he com- posed it. "The Light of the Stars" was composed as the poet looked out upon a calm and beautiful bummer even- ing, exactly suggestive of the poem. The moon, a little strip of silver, was just setting behind Mount Auburn, and Mais was blazing iu the south. That flue ballad, " The Wreck' of the Hesperus," was written in isuo. A violent storm had occurred the night before, ami as the poet sat smoking bis pipe about midnight by the fire, the wrecked Hesperus came sailing into his mind. Ho went to beJ, but the poem bad seized him, aud he could not TJie Poet Longfellow, ly James T. Fields. 25 sleep. He got up and -wrote the celebrated vorses. " T4io clock was striking three," he said, " when I finished the last stanza." It did not come into his mind by lines, but by whole stanzas, hardly causing him an effort, but flowing without let or hinderance. THE ORIGIN OF "EXCELSIOR." One of the, best known of all Longfellow's shorter poems Is "Excelsior." The word happened to catch his eye late one Autumn evening in 1841 on a torn piece of newspaper, aiid straightway his imagination took lire at it. Taking the first piece of paper at hand, which hap- pened to be the back, of a letter received that night from CiiHrlesSumner, Longfellow crowded it with verses. As first written dowu, "Excelsior" differs from the per- fected and published poom; but it shows in its original conception a rash and glow worthy the theme and author. On a summer afternoon In 1849. as he was riding on the beach, " The Skeleton iu Armor" rose as out of the deep before him and would not be laid. The story of "Evangeliuc" was first suggested to Hawthorue by a friend who wished him to found a romance upon it. Hawthorne did not quite coincide with the idea, and handed the theme to Loufe'Tlow, who saw at once all the essential qualities of a deep and tender idyl. It is a delightful tribute to Longfellow's genius that all young people delight so iu his poetry. They find in it a childlike simplicity as well as the essential quality Of supreme interest. The child detects the imitation article quite as readily as the parent, and will pass the spurious lyre and accept the real one with a judgment that is marvelous. Old and young, the laborer and tko professor, alike find occasion for the inspiring words of Longfellow which they cannot do without. Every- where, anywhere, he is in most perfect and delightful keeping. Tiie untaught grace of poetry, ths power of infusing the author's mind into the heart of the reader is his, and this endears him to his readers, and will endear him to generations yet to come. TUB DETRACTIONS OF CRITICS. One of the commonest and most unfounded charges against authoislrp in every age is plagiarism. Now nine times out of ten what is called plagiarism is paral- lelism. If I were, an artist and could paiul- like William Hunt, I would make a picture which would stand for all times of Hercules telling his servant to show a fault- finding visitor out of the room. It is a groat fault in anybody who cannot praise easily. Habitual fault- finding is an immoral trait in any character, and a lesson we all should learn is to find out good thinars in what we see. Longfellow has not escaped detraction any more tlian the rest. The vultures of criticism have hovered and pounced on his reputation after their usual manner, but no great harm has ever resulted from their attacks. Always master of himself and his theme, the poet has sailed away out of his detractors' sight and quietly let them rave. Longfellow now lives of course above the region where the envious critics delight to bark aud bite. But some of us remember what dissat- isfaction was called up when he published a new volume of his works. The rats of reputation went on gnawing at his laurels for years, though they proved to bo pow- erless against true genius and artistic skill, aud the true son of the muses went ou from strength to strength, whi.e these vermin died at last from inanition and neglect. One of his purblind critics said he had " really written some brilliant pieces by accident." "Accident, then," I said, "was never bel- ter employed. Let us vary our railroad casualties with some accidents of the Longfellow type." I hope they still show the little room down In Bowdoin College, for it was in that pleasant apartment that the young poet of 19 wrote many of his early pooms. Those were nil published in 1825, during his last year iiwollege, in a periodical called The United Slates Lilcran/ Gazette, the sapient editor of which advised him to irive up poetry and buoklo dowu ",o law. I am very glad that Ljug- fellow did not take his advice. THE FRIEND OF HIS RACE. In estimating Longfellow, I see no reason for comparing him with anybody else. Ho is sufficient in liis own depart- ment, and has his own power aud influence. Tennyson is Tennyson, Wordsworth is Wordsworth. Longfellow in Longfellow. He may not be this or that, but a writer should not be judged by what he is not. What he is should be the real question. Negations are not answers, but qual- ities in possession are what wrtl doterjnlue eotem- porary judgment as well as tbe judgment of posterity. What a procession of youth and beauty wander in per- ennial loveliness through Longfellow's pages. It cau never grow old or fade away. If I were called upon suddenly to prove that Long, fellow is preeminently a poet in every sense, in im- agination, in artistic skill, in all the equipment of a high- born singer, I think I should be willing to select from 1m later pieces the exquisite poom of S.indalpaoj, which if you wish, I will read to you. [Mr. Fields here read the poem.' No English poet-scholar has ever made such mastatly translations as Longfellow. Dante, as rendered by him, can be read now in the very spirit of the erreat Italian poet. Now, Just what I claim for L mgfellow is this : A high and honorable place in the poetic and prose litera- ture of this century ; a rank with the great spirits that still rule us from their urns; a name that can never die out of ( he annals of English literature and song; for I find iu him those priceless qualities of excellence which the world, having once witnessed, never forgets. Longfel- low goes iu a straight line to ins reader's understanding. The highway to the hurnau heart is the one he most travels. His verse gives no translation to his reader. He id never a satirist, never a trifler, never a scoruer, but a delineator of flue aud tender sympathies, which makes him the friend of his race. It was never truer than now that poetry has its own exceeding great reward. Aud let us never lorget. my friends, when we are estimating poetry, what Long- fellow himself teaches m one of his best and noblest efforts, that— " God sent his singers on the earth, Wish songs of sadness and of mirth Tbat they might teach the heart of men, And bring them back to heaven again." Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. THE HOUSE IX AMERICA. PROF. MARSH'S DISCOVERIES IN FOSSILS. ANCESTRY OF THE NOBLE ANIMAL— THE MORMON BIBLE CONCERNING HORSES— SKETCHES BY PRE- HISTORIC MAN — THE FAMILY TREE OF THE HORSE. [FROM THE SPECIAL CORRESPONDENT OF THE TRIBUNE. 1 NEW-HAVEN, April 18.— Few facts in the history of tlie race have been the occasion of wider gener- alizations tbuu the circumstance that the horse — the most important of all the animals which man has pressed into his sei vice— was utterly unknown on the continent of America at the time of the discov- eries of Columbus. Xot only tha horse, but all the related family— the ass, the zebra, and the quagga— were equally wanting. The Western hemisphere, in this total deficiency of both its divisions, presents a marked contrast to the Old World, since Europe, Asia, and Africa are each the native habitat of one or more members of this largo family. But the recent labors of science have opened a new page in tho horse's history, and have changed entirely the scope and nature of the inquiry. It is now known that in the eras with which geology deals, America was not only for countless ages the home of the horse, but of an immense variety of an- imals of the horse family or nearly allied to it ; and in the long series of these varying forms there seems to be presented evidence of change, progress, and development, which is welcomed by tho believers in the theory of evolution as supplying many of the missing links in the ancestry of the noble animal. Foremost among the laborers in this special field of research is Prof. O. C. Marsh of Yale College. Headers of THE TRIBUNE have had descriptions of his explorations at the West, and it will be only necessary here to summarize them in a few words. Almost every Summer for some years past he has or- ganized an exploring party, chiefly at his own ex- pense, in quest of fossil animal remains in the terti- ary formation in our Western Territories. He has met with unexampled success. A greater addition of new fossil animal forms has been made since this class of explorations was under- taken, than during any similar period since Cuyier described the extinct animals of the Paris basin. A fe*v <>f the extraordinary creatures which Prof. Marsh has identified, have been partially described iiiTino TKIIIL-NE. His expedition last Summer was peculiarly rich in discoveries of fossils of the horse family. It is to these the present letter rc-lates. the date of the discovery of America? This is a question of more interest than would be at first sup- posed. The horse of Europe was probably cotem- porary with the earliest man, and there are traces of the existence of that animal among some of the most ancient relics of the cave-dwellers. In the cavern of La Madelaine, Dordogne, France, among remains of pre-histuric man of the flint period, the antler of a reindeer waa found having seven figures of horses carved upon it. Coarsely executed though they are, there can bo no question as to what these flint carvings were intended to represent. These are horses— not asses, nor of the ass family, since the ears are short, none of the tails arc tufted, and one of the tails cer- tainly indicates by its thickness that it had the abundant long hair covering it which distinguishes the horse. It is not at all* likely that the cave- dwelling man held the horsa in subjection; it was probably one of the animals which ho hunted; a kind ol venison among game which included the auroch and the cave bear, the reindeer, and perhaps tho elephant. SKETCH OK A HORSE BY PREHISTORIC MAN. Did the horse exist in America after the advent of man, and become extinct between that period and ANOTHER PREHISTORIC SKETCH. But Brigham Young has hailed the discovery of fossil horses in America as an evidence of the truth- fulness of the sacred writings of tho Mormons. Years ago, in a discussion in England, the represen- tative of the Mormons was worsted in argument upon the point that these writings make the blunder of describing horses as existing in America coeval with man, but prior to the advent of the Spaniards. There may be other instances in the Mormon Bible, but the following will serve to illustrate the point : The book of Ether describes a pciiod subse- quent to the building of the tower of Babel. It gives the particulars of construction, under divine command, of a number of covered barges, "exceed- ing tight," that would "hold water like a dish," each provided with an air-hole in tho top, closed with a stopper, to be opened when needful for ven- tilation. These remarkable vessels were loaded with provisions ; a small colony embarked upon them, and a strong wind, miraculously provided, drove them across the ocean. Tho voyagers were 344 days alloat, without light or fire ; but at last they reached the promised land, where, ii is slated: In tho space of sixty-and-two years rlioy became ex- ceeding rich, having all manucr of fruit and of frriun, and of silks, and of flno linen, and of cold au1 of silver, ;uid|of precious tilings, and also all 111:111111-1- of catcle, of oxen, and of cows, and of sheep, and of swino, and of goats ; * * * and they also had lioraos and asses, and there wore elephants, and curoloms, and cumotns ; all of which were useful unto man, and moro especially tho elephants, and curoloius, aud cmuorns. Tlie Horse in America ; Prof. MarsWs Discoveries. 27 Now there is not a trace of the horse among the antiquities of the Indian tribes on this continent. Not a legend, not a fragment to mark its coexistence with man, in all the records that have been com- piled, in all the mounds that have been opened — unless the two following incidents bo accepted as evidence to the contrary : (1) Dr. P. W. Lund was the first discoverer of fossil bones of the horse in youth America. He found in 1841, in a cave in Brazil, among other remains of animals, the greater part of the skeleton of a young horse which he described as Eqnus neogsus, and declared to be identi- cal with a specimen found in a another cave asso- ciated with huniau bones. But Owen says, after critically reviewing this case, that it affords no evi- dence of the contemporaneity of the human and equine races in the Brazilian caves, (2) Prof. Marsh has in his possession a bone picked up by an explorer among the ruins of one of the deserted cities of Cen- tral America ; it is the coronary bone of a horse ; L e., the first bone above the hoof. There is no doubt of the antiquity of the ruined city ; as to that of the coronary bone the reader may form his own judg- ment. AN ASSYRIAN HORSE. The omission of all attempts at depicting the horse or any member of the horse family on the part of the American aboriaiues, if it were known to them, is very remarkable. The earlier sculptures of the old world frequently introduce the horse; on the remains of Nubian tombs and Egyptian temples we find tliis animal carved. An Assyrian horse among the bas reliefs of Ashurbanipal is not less remarkable for the elaborate trappings of his harness than for his own. noble bearing. He is every inch a horse. Surely such an animal would have left some traces in Indian tradition ; but we read that "When the Cherokees first saw the horse bestrode bv Do Soto they were as much amazed as were the soldiers of Fabricius when they first beheld the elephants of Pyrrhus. But they named it in- stautl.y ' the animal with a single finger-nail. Modern science has made no better generaliza- tion than this uniungulus." This is the distinctive feature of the race; equally true of the horse (Equus caballm), of the tame ass (Asinus vulgaris), of the wild ass (A. onager) still abundant in Mesopotamia, and almost as different from the- do- ini'stic species as a greyhound from a poodle, of the zebra (J. zebra) of South African mountains, the quagga (J. qutigya) and the peetsi (A. TiurchcWi), both also of South Africa, and of the kiaug (.1. hcmionns) of Thibet. If you claim the transformation of species, said Cuvier in the early days of the develop- ment hypothesis, you must produce, for instance, between the palootlierium and the horse, since the former has three toes and the horse only one, an animal similar to each in other respects, but hav- ing the intermediate number of toes. It is pre- cisely this gage, thrown down HO confidently by Cuvier a half century ago, that the palaeontologist of to-day is prepared to take up : but the present evidence is far more extended in its scope than that which the Father of Pakeoutology deemed unobtain- able. There is a vast portion of the Territories of Wyoming and Utah, which in the period that geologists call the tertiary, contained enormous lakes. The oldest of these lakes remained so long in eocene times, that the mud and sand accu- mulated in it by slow deposits to more than a. mile in vertical thickness. In these deposits Prof. Marsh has found the remains of the Orohippus. This ani- mal's skeleton resembles that of the horse more than it does that of any other creature of the present day ; but it was scarcely larger than a fox. Its skull was proportionally shorter than that of the horse, and the orbit of the eye was not inclosed behind by a bridge of bone. But the remarkable characteristic of the Orohippus was that his fore feet had four toes and his hind feet three toes, all of which reached the ground. Above the eocene, in the order of geological de- posit, many centuries doubtless having elapsed in its formation, theniiocene appears. A district known as the Bad Lands of Dakota, Nebraska, and Colo- rado, and another west of the Blue Mountains in Eastern Oregon, contain deposits of lakes that ex- isted in the miocene period. In thelatter of these lo- calities Prof. Marsh has obtained the remains of the Miohippus. It resembles the Orohippus in several particulars, but had this noteworthy peculiarity— it had only three toes in the fore feet as well as behind. All these toes reached the ground, and were useful, or, at all events, usable. There is no depression in front of the orbit of the eve. SKULL OF THE ANCHITIIEKH'M. In these miocene lake deposits another animal ia found, closely allied to Miohippus. but differing in having a deep depresssion in the skull in front of the orbit. Prof. Marsh has discovered some and Prof. Leidy other species of this animal, which 13 28 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. called the Anchithcrium. It had three toes ou each fore foot and three on each hind foot ; but its outer toes were proportionally smaller than those of the Miobippus. The Anchitherium and the Miohippus were about the size of a sheep. Alinvc tin- mioeene formation is the pliocene. Again a ires have elapsed while this deposit was form- ing, and here again \ve liave animals of the horse kind. Let us Delect Two of tlieui for exaiuiiiat ion, the llipnarioii and the I'rotohippus. Each has three toes In-fore and three behind, l>ut in no case do the outer toes touch the ground; they are like the pos- terior hooflets of the modern deer and ox. The ser- v in a i ile hoof if e; if!i is atout er t hail in t he preceding animals. 'Hie skull of each has a deep depression, m front of the eye. deposit. Name of Compara- animaL (in size. P'prrsvY/Ti in front of the i ye. Number Toes tTuit (/ :i>,\-< four/I tin to foot. ground. eocene oroliippus fox none 4 front. 3 hind all midpcne nuoliippm slie< p none 3 e.i' h all mioeene anchitheriam sheep deep 3 each* all pliocene i.'.l.i niiciii ass deep 3 each 1 each pliooeie pliohippiu nes very deep 1'each 1 each quaternary tquus horse none 1 each 1 each SKULL OF THE IIIPPAKION. In the Flioccno we also find the Pliohippus — or at least Prof. Marsh does. It has a deep depression under the eye. It and the Ilipparion about equal the ass in Inght. The Pliohippus has but one toe — that is, its foot is like the modern horse. SKULL, OF THE MODERN HORSE. Lastly, at the very top of tho pliocene formation and. just wh'Te it is passing into the quaternary, for the first time tho bones of the true horse are found. It equaled in size the horse of the present day, an 1 in some species surpassed it. The exist inir horse haa DO depression in front of tho orbit. Occa- sionally it has a supcrtluoiis hoof hanging about the true one. There are many other facts of a similar character about these skeletons a. id those of other connate forme, all indicative of a series, of progression, or as the beln \ i i^ in that theory would call it, of do- \elopment. In respect to the toes the argument maybe briefly stated thus: The single-toed hoof represents the highest capacity for speed; four toes might be useful for support iu the marshes, but tho necessity for speed would sooner or later make ani- mals with fewer superllusus toes take precedence of the others. The reduction in the number of toea mav in this manner be due to the gradual elevation and dryintrof the region inhabited. The struggle for existence of the early horse was principally in successfully running away from beasts of prey. Also, the hoof is a weapon of offense. At the present day, if a horse wounded or a mare embarrassed with colt, is overtaken by prairie wolves, the hoof is used to great advantage, each kick that strikes a wolf squarely usually killing it. Nothing could be more inconvenient than superfluous toes in kicking. But what is to be done with the depression in front of the eye? This was developed without apparent reason and disappeared equally without reason. Ah, there are some things, perhaps, which even the de- velopment hypothesis cannot explain. Let us tabulate our facts : * The two outer, smaller than those of Miohippns. a \ / a \ / •» \ / if W sr M XI £1 JK MODIFICATION' OF TilK HOOF. (1) Forefoot of the Orolnpi.ns. ('-') Foot i«f tlie .Miohippus. (3) Foot of the Ilipparion. (4) Foot of the modern uorse as occasionally seen, with superfluous hoollrt. It will be seen that there are yet more worlds to conquer. Prof. Marsh lives iu the hope of seeing the skeleton of the predecessor of tho Orohippus; say with four toes behind and live in front. And having got that equine ancestor, he will not lie satis- lied till, somewhere at tho bottom of the eocene, or even back in tho cretaceous deposits, he finds the greatest-great-grandfather of all the horses, which should be about tho size of a first-class bhu k-and- tan, and should have live well-defined toes on each foot. iouchii.g the ground. With this fossil in his possession. Trot'. Marsh would probably be able to en- joy life without goiugto tho liocky Mountains every Bummer, Have ice Two Brains ? by Dr. liroicn-St'quard. 29 HAVE WE TWO BRAINS'? A LKCTURE BY DR. BROWN-SEQUARD. INSTANCES WHERE PATIKNTS USED ONK HALF THE 15KAIN INDEPENDENTLY OF THE OTHER— THE LEFT HKAIN PRINCIPALLY THE ORGAN OF INTEL- LIGENCE AND KXTERIOR RELATION; THE RIGHT, OF ORGANIC FUNCTIONS AND NUTRITION— THE NEED AND MEANS OF DEVELOPING BOTH SIDES OF THE BRAIN. IFROM A SPECIAL CORRESPONDENT OF THE TRIRrNE.] WASHINGTON, April 22.— The lecture delivered at this date by Dr. Brown-Sdquard. which attracted a crowded audience, was one of the- "Toner Lectures." As mauy readers may not recall the circum- stances under which that course of lectures was established, a statement of the facts will probably be of interest. Dr. J. M. Toner, believing that the advancement of science — that is, a knowledge of the laws of Nature in any part of her domain, and par- ticularly such discoveries as contribute to the ad- vancement of medicine — tends to ameliorate the condition of mankind, determined in 1872 to convey real and personal property worth about §3,000 to five trustees; 90 per cent of tlie interest of which was to be applied for at least two annual memoirs or essays by different individuals, and, as the fund increases, as many more as the interest of the trust and revenue will, in the judgment of the trustees, justify. The essays or memoirs must be relative to some branch of medical science, and be read in the City of Wash- ington under the name of the Toner Lectures. Each of these memoirs or lectures is to contain some new truth fully established by experiment or ob- servation, and no such memoir or lecture is to be given to the world under the name of the " Toner Lectures" without having first been critically ex- amined and approved by competent persons selected by the trustees for that purpose. The trustees are the Secretary or chief scientific officer of the Smith- sonian Institution (for the time being, Prof. Joseph Henry), the Surgeon-General of the United States Army, the Surgeon-General of the United States Navy, and the President of the Medical Society of the District of C jluiubia. THE LECTURE. LADIES AND GENTLEMEN : I have to-day to put forward views which, if they liavo tlio value that I attach to them, deserve all your attention. I confess, liowever, that although I have coine to a conviction my- self, and I am. perhaps, rather difficult in that respect, I do not accept easily as proved what is drawn from facts. I confess, however, that I feel great embarrass- ment, a8 not ouly are the facts I have to dwell upon new, and iiot, perhaps, easily to bo accepted, hut besides they require for their full understanding a Knowl- edge of medicine, which probably docs not exist among many of uiy hearers. However, I will try my best to render the subject as clear as possible, even to persons •who know nothing about medicine. EVIDENCE THAT WE HAVE TWO BRAINS. As you perhaps know, the subject is this, put tint; it in an interrogative way, llave we two hraius or one 1 And if wo have two brains why do wo not educate both of them 1 As you will soo by these questions, if the, first is dc- cidi-d negatively, of course there is no i C.IM.II for t hn leeuiro. The very fact, therefore, tlmr , I urn in jour presence to speak about an hour on iii.it sui>j -et. implies that I have come to the concliisicn tint v, •<• hav.- I . <• brains, perfectly distinct the one from the ot.ier. There are views held in science in that n i , , altogether different from mine. They consist in admitting t hu r the leftside of the brain is the, only organ serving to t h". movement and feeling of the right side or the bodv, :! ITN~DENT ON ONE SIDE OF TIIK Hit A IN. As regards the faculty of speech, the fact that we have two brains perfectly distinct, one from the other, U not, pernap.-, so ciisily proved as it may be as the man. We well know that a lesion In on?-half of the brain, the left side of the brain, will produce loss of the faculty of expressing the idoas by speech ; that that be- longs almost exclusively to the left side of the brair, but the very fact, I may say, that the loss of the faculty of expressing ideas by speech depends on a disease in the left side of the brain— thai fact is itself a proof that the left side of the brain is quite distinct from the right side of the brain, that it is in fact a brain in itself as regards that function of the organ we call brain. Therefore the fact which is perfectly well known, that out of one hundred cases In which the losr, of the faculty of expressing ideas by speech existed, there is only one— it one— in which the disease was to be found in th right side of the brain— that fact isextremelv important in show- ing that the two sides of the brain may act independ- ently one from the other. I shall have to return to this by and by, as much of ruy argument depends on this point. As regards sight, a theory has been put forward by a celebrated philosopher, Dr. Wollaston of London, which has been admitted by a ereat many physiologists, although no one has admitted it without some reluc- tance. But as there was no better theory put forward, that one was received as being at least probable if not demonstrated. Wollasron had the view that the right side of the base of the brain is the center for sight in the two right halves of the eve. The right half of the right eye is of course the one to the right of it, and the right half of the left eye is the one nearest to the nose. The inner half I should say of the left eye and the outer half of the right eye have for their center, according to that view, the right side of the brain and vice versa the left side of the* brain would be the center for sight in the left or outer half of the left eye and the inner half of the right eye. There is therefore, according to that view, a condition which is quite peculiar. If wo admit it for a moment then we ought to find that a disease in the left of the brain at the base must destroy only one half of the power of sight, and objects then if s.-en are, seen in one half. Suppose a man to be looked at there would bo visible, if it is the left side of the brain which is atti'Cted, only the right half of the body. Wollaston himself had that trouble. One day trying to read the name of an instrument, the barometer, ho read "meier" only; the other part of the word. •' baro," he could not read. Another eminent friend living in France, Professor Agassiz, hail the same trouble. He saw one half of certain objeits. And a good many patients who are iittncted especially with certain disorders of movement and wit h diabetes have also that trouble, they see but one half of objects. There are, therefore, cases which scorn to be in favor of the view. But continuing to review what ought to take place, we lind that if the disease exists only in a small part of the leftside of the brain, in that portion which serves to sight, we ought to ilnd that then only- one half of one eye will b" ati'.-cted. There arc such cases. If it is the other part of that same half of the base of the brain which is alf-cted, then il is only one hali in the other eye which should bo affected. There are also facts of that kind. So that there are three kinds of facts which seem to support the view of Wollaston. r.ut what of that? Wo philosophers do not accept conclusions because there arc facts which support them. We accept conclusions when all the known facts are either lu perfect harmony I nave we Tu-o Brains? ly Dr. Brown- 81 or clearlv prove the conclusion ; and also when there ia no fact that seems to be in opposition. It is requisite, therefore, either that all the facts prove in favor of the theory, or that together with a number in favor tlioro is none at all in opposition. Such is not the case here. There are a great many facts which show that a disease in one halt' of the brain will produce complete loss of sight of the two halves of one eye, either on the same side or on the opposite side, or the two halves of both eyes. Therefore there are three series of facts, and one only would bo enough, which demonstrate that the theory ought to be rejected. VISION AND THE HALVES OF THE BRAIN. But as regards sight wo find this, and it is a point of fmportancb iu this lecture. Wo find that a disease any- where in one-half of the brain can exist without any alteration of sight at all. A disease existing in that part where the optic nerve goes into the bruin, destroy- ing that part altogether, may not bo a cause of loss of sight; so that one optic tracu alone may be perfectly sufficient for the functions of the two eyes. Therefore I conclude that it is quite enough to have one brain to Lave our power of sight; and as it is so for each half of the brain, I can conclude — and this is a point of import- ance in this lecture — I can conclude that each half of the brain is independent of the other and each of them possesses the powers of serving to the sensa- tions of sight. You will ask how is it that a disease iu certain cases in the brain will produce loss of sight, and that a disease in the same part sometimes will not pro- duce loss of sight. As regards that I cannot develop at length what I would have to say, but if some of you were present at my lecture in this city last year and some of you present at the Academy of Sciences to-day are here, they know that an alteration in any part of the nervous system, whether in the brain or elsewhere, can, by producing an irritation, act on other parts, so as to produce the loss of a function of those other parts: and so it is about sight particularly. In many experiments I have ascertained that injuring a small part of the spinal cord produces a loss of sight in the eye on the same side. An injury to the medulla oblongata a little higher than the part of the spinal cord which produces loss of sight on the same side, will pro- duce a loss of sight, but to the opposite eye. There is, therefore, a power of producing by irritation a loss of sight; and indeed there is nothing more common in chil dren having worms in their bowels than a diminution in the power of sight for a time, or some trouble in the power of sight— some change in the iris, some change in the vessels of the eve, in fact some disorder in the organs serving to vision. Well, it is in the same way that an irritation existing in certain parts of the brain will produce at a distance from the place where it exists, a loss of the function of sight. Tue cases that can serve are, therefore, not those in which we find that the dis- ease exists— the loss of sight exists when there la a dis- ease somewhere. The cases that can serve positively must clearly bring us to a conclusion ; as those, on the contrary, which establish that an injury in any part or one-half of the brain — aven in that part wlncli receives the, optio track — can exist without producing any loss of sight; and that fact has been observed— not very fre- quently, but more than flve or six times to rny knowl- edge—and iu those cases in the most decisive manner. Therefore the conclusion I have drawn is quite estab- lished. Either half of the brain may serve to the power of siglit. THE VOLUNTARY MOVKMKXTS. Now, as regards the volitional movemi -nts, the volun- tary movements, if you ui;e. to call them so. Those movements, as you well know, have been considered aa depending on each half of the brain tor one-half of the body. Still, many physiologists hive ascertained that there are muscles iu our system in the nee];, in the eye, in the throat, and in the back aNo-thero are, many muscles— which escape paralysis wlien Mien- is disease In one-half of the brain; and for those parts at le.i.sl soaio theory has been imagined to try to explain how it was that the left half of the brain, for instance, is not the regulator of the movements iu the right sides of the body. I shall pass over that theory and come to the point of importance in the object which I have in view. As regards volitional movements, tlc-ro are cases on record which leave no doubt that either the anterior lobe of the brain, the middle lobe of the brain, or the posterior lobe, the throe essential parts of the organ, can be destroyed and voluntary movements not be in- terfered with at all; but still more, there are cases— not many, but a few— Chat exist and are decisive. They have been recorded by the most accurate observers, an 'I some of them in hospitals whore there were many medi- cal men and many students, so that there cannot be a doubt about them. Tliere are many cases — perhaps the word "tnauv" is too strong, but there are at least seven or eight to my knowl- edge—of the destruction of the whole ha\f of the brain without any interference with the voluntary movement. Therefore we are not to look upon one-half of the brain as being necessarily the organ serving to the movement of the body on the opposite side. And also another conclusion ; we are to look upon one-half of the brain, in some individuals at least, as being able to control voluntary movements in the two sides of the body. If so, certainly the point I have in view — that is, that we have two brains — is established as regards vol- untary movements. We have certainly two brains as re- gards voluntary movements; and if it is found in most cases that even a slight injury limited to a small part of the brain will produce a paralysis on the opposite side, or sometimes on the corresponding side— if that is found, it is on account of this principle which I men- tioned a moment ago ; that is, that an irritation iu any part of the brain can affect functions iu other parts through irritation. And I shall say about voluntary movements what I have said about sight, and a worm in the bowels, as well as an irritation in a tooth, or an irri- tation in the ftomach. an irritation iu the lungs, an irri- tation in the heart, an irritation in the skin; in other words, an irritation wherever there is a nerve subject to be irritated; an irritation there can produce a paralysis as well as an irritation in a part of tlie bruin. And therefore when we see a slight alteration m a very limited part of the brain cause a complete paralysis on the opposite side of the body, wo are not to conclude that It is owing to the loss of function of voluntary power there where the disease exists iu that small part, but tli.it it depends or it has been Drought on by an ir- ritation starting from the place wliero wo see the dis- ease, and acting upou remote parts so as to produce the loss of the function. The mere fact, I may say, that a di.seasa exceedingly limited in extent can produce a coinploto paralysis iu the opposte side of the body, is sufficient to show that it docs not depend on tho loss of the f unctiou of will ; for one-half of the body cannot locate In a very limited part of the brain the whole power of the will located in that bruin. If it S3 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Scries. were the other side of tho brain which produced that complete paralysis, if we found that paralysis is more or loss extensive, more or less durable according to the extent of the disease in one-hull of tho lirain, then wo might conchiile that tho disease has destroyed the power of will in that halt' of the brain, and thereby produced the loss of voluntary move- ment on tho opposite side. But u is not what we see. We see that the lesion which has destroyed one half of the brain may allow voluntary movement, but a lesion which is not larger than a poo- in any one part of the brain can produce a loss of voluntary move- ment. Therefore we are to admit that when the paralysis of movement comos In connection witli disease of one half of the) brain, it depend* on an influence starting from the place where the disease is acting upon remote parts so as to produce a cessation of activity there, and a paralysis therefore. SKAT OF THE FACULTY" OF SENSATION. There is the same reasoning to bo made as regards perception of sensation. There also we find the same tiling. I shall not insist on that point therefore. We know a thousand cases of disease occupying1 one-half of tho lirain that has not produced the slightest alteration in the power of feeling. But, if it is so ic remains to be explained how it is, however, that the two halves of the brain come to bo somewhat different, and that the physiological and pathological study .of the two halves of the brain indicates great differences in that respect. If wo pass in review what is known, wo find very great differences indeed. Those differences depend on the fact that through the fault of our fathers and mothers, the faults that weigh upon us and have led us to make use of only one-half of our body for certain acts, and one-half of our brain for certain other aces also — wo find that it is owing to that defect iu our education that one-halt of our brain is developed for certain things, while the other half or the brain is developad for otner things. As regards what belongs to tho lefD side of the brain compared with tho right side of the brain, allow me to say tuo most important feature iu its physiology or pathology is what a French physician has discovered. It is, as I have said already, that to that side of the brain belongs the faculty of expressing ideas by speech. Basides, that mental lacultf of speech the left side of the braiu pos- sesses iu a much more marked degree than the right the power of moving the tongue and larynx and muscles of the chest to produce the sounds of articulate voice. Ar- ticulation of sounds in speech in a great measure de- pends on the left side of the brain. I mean by tho words "in a great measure" that it is chiefly tue left side of the bruin which has the power of actiug upon those, or- gans. So tli tt more frequently in cases of disease of the loft si le of the braiu ao we find tho difficulty iu tho mechanical part of the speech than iu cases of disease of tho right side of tho braiu. But that, although mechan- ical, is .something lilco a gesture. There is a mental si-n in it. and although it is a mechanical thing in it>«lf, I cannot bui. consider it as representing SOLUO mcutal trouble. MEMORY. NOT MUSCULAR POWER, LOST. My pupil and assistant in London, who ha* In roine a Very eminent man since, Dr. Howling Jackson, has also insisted on tnat point, that it i.« tin- mory of direction of movements ot tiio muscles which serve to articulate, •which Is l<>st, and not the mere power of moving tho muscles of the tongue, larynx, or cuust. I have h 1.1 m-oof Of itiu a great many instances, that, when toll to do so. the patient could move the tongue in any direction, could move the larynx and utter sounds very well, but could not articulate, so that it was the mental part of that mechanical act — the mental pjrt of which was altered, and not purely a mechanical action lost. The left side of the brain is also the one that loads in gestures, and that by a very simple reason, which is, that it is tho left side of tho brain which leads chiefly the movement of the right arm, and it is chiefly with tho right arm that wo make our gestures. Still, it is likely, as pathological facts show, or at least appear to show, that even tho motion of tho left arm depends on the left si le of the brain as regards gestures, as we flud that in p.itiants who have a disease of the right side of the braiu tho faculty is lost of making gestures with either tbe right or the left arm. That of course, shows, or at any rate seems to show, that the left side of tho brain is the organ for gestures chiefly. In a few cases, however, of dis-a-iof the right side of the brain, tho power of making gestures has been lost as well as in case of disease of the left side of that organ. As regards the power of writing, there is a difficulty there, as you will early understand. Still there are many facts which show that tho power of writing can be lost more easily, and is lost more fre- quently in cases of disease of the left side of tho brain than in cases of disease of the right side of the brain — a difficulty which many of you have understood without my mentioning it. Wo conclude that the right arm is not rarely paralyzed in diseases of the left side of the brain, and as wo write with the right arm, it is very natural that, on being paralvzod, we cannot write; but very few patients have lost altogether the movements of the fingers, and cannot form tho least sign, though many of them cannot at all form a letter. They will be able, however, if they have a letter written by some one whose handwriting is not very much different from theirs (and sometimes when it is diUVruut), they will be ahle to imitate what is under their eye, but they cannot from memory write anything; at all events, thoy cannot express ideas by writing. They are attacked with what is called the agraphia— that is. a loss of the faculty of expressing ideas by writing. Ij many of these cases of patients attacked with agraphia. there is a perfect power of moving the right arm. Tuo arm is not paralyzed in cases where tho left side of the brain is paralysed; ihere is no paralysis on the right side of the body or tue loft ; no paralysis anywhere. In those cases, it lias occurred sometimes that the patient could not writ:- at all ; so that it is clear that tho loss of the faculty of expressing ideas by writing does not depand on the paralysis which in these cases had no existence. INTELLECT MOST DEPENDENT ON THE LEFT SIDE OF THE BHAI.N. Another thing depends on disease of the left side of the brain more than tho right side of the brain, and that Is intelligence. Alterations of the mind inamtestnig themselves in tho various forms of insanity depend more frequently, I should say, on diseases of t!ie left side of the brain than on diseases of the right side. This is all I know now which belongs to the loft si le of i ho brain. Tho right sido of the brain is quite different. From ul! that I hive stated about the loft side, as you will see, that organ is chiefly tho organ serving the mental facul- ties, either iu speech, or in intelligence, or in gesture, or n writing. That organ, therefore, is tho mportant organ in our system adapted ;o the life of communication between ourselves and our irctbreu In a mental way. But tho other organ— tho right sido of tho braiu, in some individuals, as you will Hare we Tivo Brains ? ly Dr. Brown- Sfyuard. 33 see, has the rower of this one, and in all perhaps it might have had if the proper development bad taken place ; but this other serves contrarily to the first one. The right side of the brain serves chiefly to emotional manifestations, hysterical manifestations included, and to the needs of the nutrition of the body in various parts. There is, therefore, taking a large view of the differences between the two brains, this difference, that one of them— the left — serves to what wo call t'.io life of relation, while the right serves to what we call the organic life. This view, which I had put forward already five or six years ago, has begun now to receive demonstration from several physicians, and I am therefore the more emboldened in maintaining the correctness of that view of mine. The right side of the brain is remarkable in producing alterations of nutrition either in limbs that are paralyzed, or in the back. It is perfectly well-known that a number of patients die every month in every large city of ulcerations taking place orU the nates or on the sacrum coming from an irritation of the brain. Tliese patients are more numerous among those attacked by disease in the right side of the brain than among those attacked with disease in the left side of the braiu. Either codenia or jed sores, either one or the other of those ITVO kinds of ulceration is more frequent in cases of disease of the right side of the brain than in cases of the left side. The proportion is considerable. It is as two-thirds for the right side of the brain and one-third for the left. There are many other points which show the same thing. An ulceration in the lungs, an ulceration in the liver, a hemorrhage for instance and sudden inflammation— all these disturbances can take place under an irritation of the brain as I have shown; butintheso cases it is chiefly the right side of the brain that has the power. I have already said that hysterical and emotional symptoms are more common in cases of disease of the right side of the brain. This has been established already bv a good many physicians— Drs. Brequet and Du Floret and a good many others, and myself. We have collected cases of paralysis in one-half of tlie body, caused by hysteria, and this proporiiou has been found ; but of 121 cases of paralysis caused by hysteria (a paral- ysis which is usually merely transient, and very rarely lasts long) — in 121 of these cases there was disease of the brain on the right side 97 times, and disease on the left 24 times; so that the right side predominates in this class of affections. That paralysis exists on the left side of the body more frequently than on the right side you well know, and, as it affects chiefly the right side of the brain, it affects chiefly the left side of the body. SIDES OF THE BRAIN UNEQUALLY DEVELOPED. Now as regards other points, my pupil, Dr. Jackson, has ascertained that an inflammation of the retina pro- duces amaurosis more frequently In both eyes from dis- ease of the right side of the brain than the lefi side. Convulsions of the eye take place very frequently in cases of disease of the brain. I have ascertained in taking up the cases published by Dr. Prevost, Dr. Char- inel, and many others and myself — I have ascertained that out of 69 cases in which these convulsions of the eye occurred there were 47 due to the disease in the right side of the brain, and 22 due to disease in the left side ot the brain. Therefore there is a great difference between che two sides of the brain as you will see. It Is so as regards general convulsions. Collender and myself have euowii that general convulsions will occur much more frequently in cases of disease of the right side of tho brain than in cases of disease of 11m left side. I have ascertained that both will occur far more frequently in cases of disease of the right side of the Vain than In casus of disease of the. same extent and 'he same location in tho left side of the brain. Not only disease, in tho right side of the brain wdl havo the greatest power in that respect, but it will ai*n. if tne, patient do m not die, produce a more marked paralysis; it will produce, also, a more extensive paralysis and a more durable one. So that, as regards degree, as regards extent, a.s regards duration of the paralysis, the right side of the brain Is, by far. worse than tho left, showing again that that side bus the greater power of nutrition. There are a good many other points showing a difference of the samo kind. I pass them over, as time presses. There n, therefore, as you will see, a radical difference l>- ween these sides of the brain. But now this depends, as I have said already, not upon the fact that tho two si 1 n of the brain are very different originally, but it depends on development. Every organ which is put in use lor a certain function gets developed, and more apt t'i per- form that function. Indeed the organ in size shows it. The left side of the brain, which is used most, in our system, is larger thau the right side of the brain. Tho left side of the brain besides receives a groat deal more ulood than the right side of tae brain, because it lias a preponderance in our system, and every organ that acts much, receives more blood. As regards the influ- ence of action on the brain, there is a fact which iiatters know very well. If a parson is accuscome.1 for many, many years from adult life— say from 20 up to 40 or more— to go to tlie same halter, the hatter will find after a time that he has to enlarge the hat of his customer; and, indeed, a person advanced in life, even having passed 56, as your lecturer has, has a chance to observe such a change. There is no period of six months that lias passed that I have not found that my hat, Lf neglected and put aside, became too sm.ill. The head, therefore, growing, is very strong proof th it the brain grows also. Action, therefore, is a means of increasing size, is a moans of development; aud I have no doubt that a good mauy among you have observed that after they pay great attention to a subject, they have not oaly acquired knowledge on that subject, but become much more able to solve q.ues- tions relating to tbat subject— that they have developed the part of the brain which has been used for tho acts that they have performed, aud that part has become far more able to perform its functions. This is perfectly well shown by every tlimar in our system. We well know what a power a pianist can have, if that piauUt con- tinues to exercise his fingers and braiu on the piano. But such a pianist neglecting to perform the acts that he was accustomed to perform before, it is very eoou found that there Is a defect. We must go on, therefor,', exer- cising the organs in which we desire to havo the great activity of life. There la no doubt, therefore, that the left side of the brain, as is shown by its great enlarge- ment compared with the nglu side, and as is shown also by the quantity of blood that it receives, that organ is the one which is predominant in our system. But our being right-handed, shows it also. RIGHT-HANDEDNESS NATURAL TO MEN AND ANIMALS. It is quite certain that right-handedntsa depends something on nature. As you well know, the wildest populations in the world are right-handed, as we are. There is no population anywhere in tho world that has act been found rigut-hauded. There is therefore in mail Cl Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. a cause -which makes the right side of the body to be se- lected as the one to be used the most, aiid together -with that right side of the body the left side of the brain, which usually moves that right side, la increased con- siderably in power and in size. There is, therefore, a development given through some natural cause primi- tively, but a development given to the left side. We find that individuals who are left-handed make use of the right side of the brain, and when they become confused— when they lose the faculty of expressing ideas by speech— it is the right side of the brain that is affected, showing the connection between the development of one-half of the brain in the use of one arm, and the development of that same half of the brain in the faculty of expressing ideas by speech. There is therefore » connection be- tween these two things, and on that point I shall dwell a little more in a moment. There is primitively a differ- ence between the two brains, and Proressor Gracciola has discovered in children the second couvolutiou— the convolution of the left side of the brain— is developed quicker than the convolution oil the risrht side. That may be in a measure owing to hereditary traits, I must say, but at any rate as there is an evidence that there is a natural tendency to make use of the right arm, it is certain that a part of that ability of development on the left side is due to sonae- thiner natural — that something natural will be found, if it is examined, in the gn-ater supply of blood to that part. Even parrots and birds show something very in- terestinsr as regards right-handedness. Parrots perch only on the right leg, or mostly only on the right leg. Very few parrots out of 20 taken at random perch on the left leg. according to what Dr. William Ogle ascer- tained after having examined a great number of them. Parrots of course are known to have something like speech — a parrot's speech of course. It is perfectly well known that the mechanical part of speech belongs to them, and it is remarkable that their left brain receives also more blood by far than their right brain. There is therefore a relation between all these things in the development of the right side of the limbs ana the amount of blood received by the left side of the brain. There is another point of importance. Prof. Broadbent and others have found that in the left side of the brain tbe mass of gray matter is greater and there are more convolutions than in the right side of the brain. A, REVIEW OF SOME POIXT8 DEMONSTRATED. Now we come to four points of great importance for Ihis lecture. They are the vital points, I may say, in tbe argument I have discussed here. The first of these P lints I have already spoken of. It is, that we find that ngrophia is connected with the left side of the brain in pc Tsons who are right-handed, and with the right side of tiiehraiuin persons who are left-hand ••l I' THE COUNTRY— DETAILS OF THE WORK ACTUALLY PERFORMED— NEW AND INTERESTING FACTS RESPECTING COLORADO, WESTERN UTAH, AKI- ZOXA, AND NEW MEXICO. [FROM AN OCCASIONAL CORRESPONDENT OF THE TRIBUNI .] WASHINGTON, April 30. — The surveys of our Western Territories, conducted at the exu ;nso of the Government, have assumed such magnitude in them- selves, as well as iu the interests which they involve, that the rivalry between them, which has now almost taken the form of a contest, becomes a matter of general interest. Of the two classes of Western surveys, those un- der civilian management and those under tueWar Depart- ment, the formerhave by far mare greatly enjoyed tho ad- vantage of newspaper publicity. Of tho labors of the War Department in tiiis field, little has reached the pub- lic, except a comparatively brief sketch published in THE TRIBUNE after the return of Lieut. Wheeler's Expe- dition of 1873. Pending the discussion of the cost, pro- ceeds and value of Territorial surveys which is likely to engage the attention of Congress within a fewdays.it seems desirable that a full account should be given of the work that has been done by the Bureau of Eugiueeiw of the War Department. As a preface to this account, a brief resume of some of the facts stated in conversation by Lieut. G. M. Wheeler. U. S. A., the officer in charge of the United States Survey West of the 100th Meridian, will prove of interest. VALUE AND PLAN OF SURVEY. The need of an accurate and careful topographical survey of our western territory is not open to question. The experience of older countries may be taken in this macter as a guide. In Boaeuiia, tor instance, maps have been published showing by gradations of color not only the elevations, but even the geological sections. As yet such a map of our country could not be constructed. The survey which has been organized and conducted under the War Department owes its origin and charac- ter to the absolute needs of that Department; the knowledge obtained is also of vast service to the Ds- partment of the Interior, to the settlers of the West, to scientific investigation, to industrial enterprises, and to the country at large. The scheme of the survey primarily includes the en- tire mapping of the Territories ; not a sporadic survey, touching here and there on points of interest, but a complete Jone, connecting the work with that of tho Coast Survey and extending the determinations of local- ity over the entire area of the United States. Tho atlas sheets when finished will delineate the whole country west of the 100th meridian— an area of nearly l,50:).oao square miles. In the past three years the survey has covered 228,000 square miles, and at this rate it will take fully 10|years to complete it without assistance from other sources. Better to facilitate topographical representation, and to preserve uniformity of publication as to scale and size, the region west of the 100th meridian has been laid off in rectangles, each emiiracing about 18,000 square miles. Each map published will ba on a scale of one inch, to eight miles, and will represent the area m one of these rectangles. Thus as the work proceeds the maps will Tribune Extras — Lecture and Letter Series. eomp-ise a continuous series in atlas form. Six of these rn:.ps are now in tho hands of rho engraver, and the ad- vance proofs indicate fine examples of topographical vrork, giving in detail the mountain systems, vallPVf. water-courses, routes of comraiinic itiou, &e. SPECIAL FEATURES OF TIIK WORK. A line drawn through Cheyosin:!, Virginia City, Tac- BOII, Camp Apache, and Denver, will, said Lieut. Wheeler, approximately cover the area gone over hy us. Our work must be exact, so that it can bo referred to by future topographers. It Is probably the best of any of the kind. One of the most important branches of the survey is the establishment of the meridian marks, and •we do that with the utmost precision. No better work of that kind can be done, tlie probable errors being a minimum compared with any that have ever been made. Our meridian marks have already oecom-i of use to the local surveyors in numerous instances. The de- termination of the variation of the magnetic needle, which has heretofore given so much trouble, is anotiior of the advantages obtained with the exact meridian. Our survey, while it gathers information as to the general physical structure of the country, is eminently a mountain survey. It extends to the tops of all the mountains, and their characters and contour are a sub- ject of special study. We have established the meridian at all the main astronomical stations. The percentage of area in the country surveyed suitable for agriculture is not large ; a large part of the horizontal area covered by mountains is out of the range of cultivation. Small settlements spring up in the vicinity of the mining camps, but their permanency is uncertain, owing to the migratory character of the miners upon whom they depend for the sale of products. Within a radius of 15. 20 and 30 miles of the mining camps, these ranches are numerous, and the frugal Mormon, who thinks a great deal of a dollar, often brings his products 100 miles to market. With the development of the mining resources and a proper system of irrigation, the western half of Utah is capable of supporting 1,500,000 people MIXKRAI, INDICATIONS— TIMBER. Since we commenced our survey, it has indicated a great many mineral resources that were not generally known before. We visited a great many mining dis- tricts, and have gathered a groat deal of information which is entirely new. Besides the precious minerals there are copper, lead, iron, and coal. The coal fields in Utah are immense; perhaps greater than those in Wyo- ming on tlie Union Pacific Riilro.ul, and when worked will prove of great benefit to the raining industries. The coal is of the caking s >rf. and is said to bo of excellent quality. It jrill take the place of that now brought from Pittsburgh. Coal crops out from tin 35Dh to the 4:)d parallel, anil in various parts of tho great Colorado 1'latoan. No tin, platinum, or zinc was found. There pre evidences of patrol mm, but notliing definite. Im- mense bods of rock Halt are found, and also of alkali deposits, from which hor ix is manufa 'hire 1. This latter MIII-MIH- -, I am inform • 1 by p UVJOIM who know, will become an important article of commerce, since, as it becomes cheaper, It can bo put to now uses, and the demand may consequently increase with tho supply. The area of timber in Western Utah is comparatively email. Mr. Walker of tho Census ISmvau has made a map of tho country west of the Mississippi that shows by graduation of color the present timber growth. Wo g ive him such information as we could. Then» is an im- ire use forest in Ariz >na and New-M 'xieo, something like those in the region of I h" lakes. or rvcn larger. Pine, fir, and quaking aspen aro tlie principal trees. Tuero is some timber that could be utilized In the building of railroads for ties, &!•. It would be of crest advantage to the Southern P.M-jfl" an-1 Atlantic and Paeifi", roads We have discovered a new route for the form T road, which tliev eoul I follow with advantage. Besides thu routes for railro i Is, we have examined north 'iid south lines of communication ; one near thR Rocky M nintains, one along the meridian, of. Silt Lalo. an 1 another west of the Sierra Nov.idi. Salt Lake City and D'Mvr are the only points south of tbo 40rh parallel that promiss to become great commercial centers. Almost all of this country is destitute of rain for most of the year. There are irenerally two rainy seasons — in June and July, and in December and J innary. T iere ar^ exceptions, however, in this wide territory. Anvmg tho plateaus, summer rains are prolonged fully three mouths. SCIENTIFIC WORK— INDIANS. Tho collections ot specimens in natural history aro verv large, especial] v those of this last year, considering the brief length of time and small number of collectors. This part of the country has never been explored before, except along certain linos, and many new ornithological and iiotanioal specimens have been secured. From C>lo- rado alone we have over 12.000 botanical specimens, and wo shall secure an exhaustive report on th ; fl >n of that country. Wo have a very good botanist ; be is now with Prof. Gray. Ho is a man who will, from tiim to time, suggest some practical deductions. Oar examinations include character of soils, humidity, temperature, &c. Dr. Loew, our chemist, has measured tho tempQrarure of the soil at the surface and a foot below, and made many analyses of the soils. We have given some study to the Indiin tribes, in the way of gathering vocabularies of their language, speci- mens of their work, accounts of their ha>>irs and dispo- sition toward settlers and toward each other, and many historical facts that will be interesting material. We have annually sent over to the Interior Department a email map showing the lines that divide these tribes. When it is understood that the expedition has often beeu divided into from ten to twelve parties, it will bo apparent how a mass of information has boon collected of no little value. This is the only systematic interior survey that has ever been undertaken by the Govern- ment, west of the Mississippi. It is very needful that there should bo a unity of plan and purpose in this matter of surveys, as they come now from a variety of sources. Engineer ofllc-er.s are stationed at the Military D-pirtment Headquarters who arc constantly making surveys for the information of the commanding officers in the opening of routes of supply, movement of troons, &•?. At the headquarters of The army an Engineer officer is also ousage-l in com- piling information ; this finally all comos together and is embodied on a general map. Then, again, Congress has been authorizing expeditions troui ths Interior De- partment and Smithsonian Institution. I have prop u <• 1 ail elaborate plan covering cost, sizr1, etc., for tlie prose- cution of this work. It is iiased on a unit of force; but it has not yet gone beyond the War Department. We do not utilize anything obtained bv either the Interior Department or Smithsonian Institution in the construc- tion of our maps. THE WORK OF THE SURVEY. The following general subjects for observation will give an idea of the undertaking: (1.) The establishment of primary geographical posi- tions iiy astronomical methods. (•2.) Obtaining accunte topographical information by trigonometric methods of tho various mountain systems of the vall"ys and of tlie deirital plaint. (;!.) Determination of altitudes (bypaometrioally). (4.) Careful study of geological formations. (•>.) Examination and collections of the living and ex liner (anna and tl >ra. (ii.i Invi'stigati >n of resources (wood, water, grass, an 1 agricultural pro lir-tions). (7.) Ascertaining location and extent of precious and economic lulncriU. (8.) Observation of climatic oscillations and influences, and seasons of rain and snowfall. (9.) Selection of routes of communication for rail and common roads, for military and other purposes. (in.) U 'searches as to utilizing tin prvsi-nt water- supply as a means ot irrigai ion. (11.) Ascertaining the condition of mining and other Industries, After the conversation with Lieut. Whoolor, of winch the main features are given aiiovo, the following account of tin* work of ill" exploring expeditions iindur his ch.irgo was compiled from materials furnished: United States Survey of the West. 87 EARLY EXPLORATIONS AT THE WEST. ! England. Germany, Spaiu, Russia and Franco have i made elaborate surveys and maps of their respective territory, the value of which is incalculable. In onr own country the most, finished and exact have been those of the coast, along which the principal interests were for a Ions time situated ; next came the survey of the great lakes. The results of each of these undertakings are in the highest degree creditable to the officers engaged, and they have proved of groat benefit to the country. ] The earliest history of survevs and exploration In our Western interior is found in the chronicles and adven- tures of the old Spanish and French travelers and mis- sionaries. Their experience and the wonders wnich they ! relate are still full of interest, although the information they gained has been superseded by more accurate and detailed reports. One of the last and most entertaining of this class of historians was Padre E-icalanta, a Span- ish priest, who penetrated from the Gulf of Mexico to the Great S lie Like of Utah. Some of the records of his travels are yet in the State Library at Santa F6, N. M., others among the archives of the Spinish Government at Madrid. The first to attempt an organized survey were Capts. Lewis and Clark, who were sent out under the auspices of the Government of the United States in 1804. They were absent until 1806. They were followed by M-ijor Pike, U. 8. A,, 1805-7, who discovered the sources of the Great Colorado of the West. Rsctor and Robordean were the nexr, in 1818. After them. Major G. H. Long, U. S. A., conducted an exploring party, under orders from the Secretary of War. The first explorers of the sources of the Mississippi were Lieuts. J. Allen and Schoolcraft, 1832. The wanderings of Capt. Bmneville, U. S. A., from 1832 to 1836, were woven into a graceful nar- rative by Washington Irving. In the order of date*, sub- sequent explorations were made by the folio wing officers: Commander Wilkes, U. S. N., 1838-42; Nicollet, under Bureau of Engineers. 1836-44; Lieut. J. C. Fremont, Eu- gineers, 1812; Cant. Boone, of the Dragoons, 18i3 ; Capt. J. Allen, 1843; Lieut. Fremont, 1844-46, assisted by Lieuts. Alierfc and Peck; Abort, Engineers, 1845; Frank- lin, Engineers, 1846-47; Ahert and Peck, Engineers, 1846-47; Col. St. George Cnoke, 1846-47; W.irner, Engi- neers, 1847-49 ; Derby, Engineers, 1849; Lieut. Webster, Engineers. 1849; Lieut. Simpson, Engineers, 1849; Capt. Mnrcy, Infantrv, 1849; Capt. Stanslmry, Engineers, 1849; Col. Johnson, Infantry, assisted by Lieuts. Smith, Bryan and Michler, E igiueers, 1849-57 ; Lieut. Prtrke, Capt. Pop?, Capt. Sitgreaves, Lieut. Woodruff, Engi- neers, 1851; Capt. Marc.v, assisted by Capt. McClellan. Engineers, 1852. From 1852 to 1857 the explorations and surveys for a railroad, route from the Mississippi River to the Paciltc Ocean were carried on, principally by officers of the Corps of Topographical Engineers. The resulting reports attained a worldwide reputation on account of their valuable data, and to this day they are frequently consulted. TOPOGRAPHICAL MAPS. To enumerate all he officers of the arm v who, fitted by education and training for such work, have taken part in or directed surveys in the Western Territories, Is aot necessary for the purposes of this letter. There is Lardly any important portion of the West that they have not penetrated, and their labors have supplied the basisforthe principal topographical maps of our country. The Engineer Bureau of the War Department has, since its organization, published several hundred maps, which are the most accurate, and, conoeq.ueutly, tlie muse fre- quently consulted. Of the map'i I; pared and compiled by Lieut, (now M>ijor-Qjn.) G. K. Warren, a l:u-gc edi- tion has been distributed. It is still tin- b •.,(, map of Territories west of tho Mississippi K:\vr. To the com- mon intelligence there is no media n that conveys in- formatioii ao directly as graphic illustration. In tho prosecution of explorations and surveys west of the 100th meridian, it has been the aim of tho officer in charge so to direct tho operations that tho results wili meet at least a portion of tho needs of the actual set- tlers, to enable them to carry out thoir enterprises. At the same time care has been taken to collect d.ita upon scientific problems that are of inter 'st ami value. Tuo facts ascertained by tho expedition) are promptly re- duced to practical results, and the wtrlr Is vigorously pushed forward to completion. The volumes dewrlbed hereafter, covering the surveys of Lieut. Wheeler, will be forthcoming as soon as Congress sees fit to onler the publication. Photo-lithographic copies of the atlas maps will be issued in advance for immediate use. ASTRONOMICAL WORK. Tne duties in this branch of the survey a*; the main field stations, conducted with instruments of the most approved pattern, were first undertaken in the year 1871, althoush in 1869, at Camp Halleck, Elko, Camp Ruby, Peko, and Hamilton, Nov., longitude by tele- graph had been detenninedllby connecting with the Coast Survey station at San Francisco, signals having been sent from that point through the kindness of Prof. George Davidson of the Coast Survey and others. In the year 1371 the services of two principal astronomical observers were obtained, and connections were made that year with the meridian of tho Naval Observatory at Washington and that of the United States Lake Survey at Detroit. The sending stations were Carlin, Battle Mountain, and Austin, Nevada. Subse- quently in the field season of that year, the astronomical position of Fort George, Utah, was determined, connection being made, with tho Mormon Observatory at Salt Like City. Tae longitude of Camp Independence, California, and Prescott, Arizona, was determined by lunar culmin- ations, and at all the stations this year, latitude was de- termined by the use of the zauith telescope — the method originally introduced by Capt. Andrew T.ilcott of the Corps of Topographical Engineers. By the exercise of care and after considerable labor in taking the field in 1872, the org.iniz Uion for astronomi- cal work in its methods, personnel, a:id instruments, was considerably improved, and three parties, two fully equipped and moving between several points of the field, and ou3 at the M >rrnon Observatory at Salt Like City, were actively employed. The results of this sea- sou determined with creditable accuracy the positions of the following loints : Beaver and Gunuison, Utah ; Pioche, Nevada; Fort Fred. Steele, Cheyenne, and Laramie, Wyoming Territory. Observations were begun at the crossing of Green Rivr by the Union Pacific Railroad, and completed in tuo following year. The observers of this season were Assistants J. H. Clurk, E. P. Austin, and William W. Maryatt. ESTABLISHMENT OP AN OBSERVATORY. It was proposed to establish a connecting field-ob- servatory at Ogden, Utah, from which point tho signula for a large stretch of territory to the north, south, east, and west could be sent. A substantial brick observa- tory on a stone foundation was planned, and has been essentially completed except the dome. It has three observing rooms that may be increased to five, and. U connected, with the mum wire of the West- 38 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. irn Union Telegraph Company. Connections may be at any time mad>3 •with the wires ot the Atlantic and Pacific Company, and of the Deseret Telceraph Company of Utah. To Prol. H. B. Herr ot the Lohigh TJuiversity of Pennsylvania the superintendence of the construction of this building and the charge of the observations neces- sary to connect it with the observatory ar Salt Lake and that of the Lake Survey at Detroit were delegated. He •was unable to perform the latter work, having to return to duty at the university. The observations were made later in the season by Dr. F. Kampf. Tiiree main field astronomical parties were organized, and took the field about the 1st of June, 1873, leaving it on or about the 15th of November. They were in charge of Assistants J. H. Clark, Dr. F. Kampf, and Win. W. Maryatt, respectively. Prof. T. H. Safford of Dearborn Observatory, Chicago, joined the survey on the 15th of June, and conducted the observations necessary for the determinations of Santa Fc and Fort Union, N. M. The following mam field scations were occupied during the past field M ason : (1.) Santa F£. S. M. 12.) Kurt I'liinii, N. M. (;•!.) Trii:iilm1, Col. (•1 ) L;il>r:iu, i "I. (5.) Colorado Spring, Col. (0.) Hughes, Col. (7.) Georgetown, Col. (S. ) Otden, Utah. n, ;i little less than 300 foot below sea level, m the heart of Death Valloy proper. This valley, of the ordinary oval form, is fully 7C miles in length, varying from 6 to 15 milos In width, surrounded by frowning mountains of volcanic and setlimeutarv origin, the Telescope Range, rising higher tnau 10,000 feet. The lino, crossing this dismal area from the montu of Death Valley Canon to the thermal springs in Furnace Creek, presenting alabyrlnihlau maze of efflorescent, saline forms, creates at the level of vision a miniature ocean, the vibrations of whose contorted waves has a sickening effect upon the senses. The lurid glare, horizoned by the bluish liazo radiated from the mountain sides, appears focussod to this pit, though broad iu expanse. It seems, coupled with the exu-omo heat, to call for the utmost powers of mental and phys- ical endurance. The journey through the Valley of Death occasioned the utmost apprehension evinced through the entire season. To this was added the effuct of the fearful cloud- burst experienced while among the Telescope Mountain, to the west, and the absence of the guide who had ven- tured toward the north-western arm of the Valley, it was feared, to return no more. The transit of 48 hours iu a temperature that remaincdat 117° F. at midnight, so exhausted both men and animals that further travel was rendered precarious. A PATHLESS FOREST. San Francisco forest, through wuich Lieut. Ives con- ducted his laud explorations, was traversed for a dis- tance, of nearly 200 miles from San Francisco Mountain to the Sierra Blanca range. Tue subsequent expedition of 1873 extended its limits far into New-Mexico, proving it to be probably the largest continuous forest area in the United ^States south of the fortieth parallel. The expedition returned to Washington in December, and at once began the preparation of maps,|. which will be pushed rapidly to completion iu pursuance of the pro- posed atlas scteme. Much of the data was late in being received from the field, and some delay was experienced ; still, satisfactory progress is making. In the Spring of 1872, with a larger appropriation, the Survey entered upon its duties with a more completely organ- ized force, having for its field portions of Utah, Nevada and Arizona. The piiiit of departure and re- turn was Salt Lake City. The experience gathered by the topographical assistants aud the addition of new skilled labor made the Topographical Corps of this year quite efficient, and permitted the elaboration of methods to meet the growing wants of this class of survey, aided by improved and perfected instruments. The area covered by the topographical work for this year is not so large in extent, but the result is fully as valuable, as more details were gathered. In 1873 the Topographi- cal Corps was still further enlarged, experienced per- sons being retained and others added. The instruments and methods were also further perfected, and the work of exploration for this year fully elaborated into an entire survey of the new and interesting regions visited. The parties, six in number, took the field troni Salt Lake City, Denver, and Santa Fe. The locali- ties of the prominent natural objects, such as mountain peaks, mesa edges, buttes, &c.t are determined by a species of secondary triaugulation. Each belt of triangles is checked at distances not ex- i ceding 20ti miles by bases that now or hereafter will bo turther checked by the primary astronomical positions. Minor details are gathered by the topographers, using ordinary trigonometric methods lor uorizoutal Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. and vertical distances, «» that within specified areas a eufficieut amount of material for the sc ile proposed is gathered. The Survey was most successful in obtaining the requisite topographical information over large areas in Utah, Colorado, Arizona, and New-Mexico. At the present time this is rapidly undergoing reduction for the final atlas sheets. The moving field parties are usu- ally so constituted as to bo able to subdivide, and retain in each an executive, astronomical, topographical, me- teorological, geological, and natural history assistant. Topography is one of the most important branches of the work, since it is to trustworthy maps of the coun- try that we must always look for the most ready and certain knowledge of its general features. In this coun- try it has not as yet attained the dignity of a profession. It is hoped, however, that ;,t uo distant d:iy it will com- mand the attention it deserves at the hands of our scientific institutions. Up to the present time, the area covered by the survey has been as follows: TABLE SHOWING THE AREA SURVEYED. J.siHJ. JS71. 1N73. 1873. >69->73 N.vnda 20,400 27.2oo 6,2uO .... Oil.XoO «':ililoruia 19.150 .... .... 19.150 Utah .... 34.400 2,500 3li.!HiO Anzoua 32,400 9,900 17,500 59. ,800 New-Mexico 31,000 31,000 I'oloraui 21,500 21,500 Total 213.-100 78.750 50,500 72.500 228,150 The total com of this work has beeu a little less than $225,000; approximately one dollar per square mile or one-eighth of a cent per acre. GEOLOGICAL, WORK. The Geological Corps of the Survey has been pro- gressively enlarged in the successive field seasons. Mr. G.K.Gilbert remained u member of it during 1871-2-3. In 1871 ho was assisted a portion of the Summer by Mr. A. R. Marvine, who was succeeded in the following years by Mr. E. E. ilowcli. In 1873 the Survey was so fortunate as to secure also the services of Prof. J. J. Stevenson, and in the same year Dr. O. Loew, in addi- tion to his multifarious labors in other departments, assisted in the geological work. In the season of 1871 Mr. Gilbert followed a devious course in Nevada and California, starting from Carliu on the Central Pacific Railway aii'l touching in uc- cession the Bull Kun mining district, Battle Mountain, Belmout, Hyko, and Piocliu. in Nevada; (/amp Inde- pendence and 1J \-ert, Wells, in California; and Camp Mohave, Arizona. From tiie last placi ho accompanied the boat party up the Colorado River to Diamond Creek, at "which point land travel was resumed. At the cross- ing of the Colorado, near the mouth of the Grand Canon, he was met by Mr. Marvine, who had just commenced his geological examinations at St. Gaorge, Utah, and between that point and Camp Apache the routes of the two geologists intersected a numijer of times, and they were enabled elleciivdy to combine their observations, the chief bearing of which in this region was upon the definition of the southern or south-western boundary of the great Plateau System. All that portion of the United States west of the Plains IB characterized by corrugation ; that is, the geological formations uncc horizontal have lieea bent and broken and thrown into ridges so as to produce a mountainous • country. The ridges vary greatly as to night and length, but agree in a general northerly trend; so that in traveling north and south, it is generally easy to follow •valleys, whilj in going east or west one is confronted by range after range : that he must climb or go around. In the lower parts of this great mountain system the slow but indefatigable agencies 01 rain und stream have ac- cumulated go great an amount of detritus that the valleys are clogged and the mountains nearly or quite buried. In this way have beeu produced the great desert plains of Utah, Arizona, and Southern California — vast seas of sand and saline clay, from the surfaces of which a few half-sunken peaks jut forth as islands. These intermissions of the mountainous char- acter are mere concealments, not interruptions of the corrugated structure ; but that struc- ture is interrupted in one place — oerhaps in others, but in ono notably — by a tract in which the strata are almost undisturbed. The general surface of this exceptional region lies from 6,000 to 8,000 feet above the ocean and it is intersected by the celebrated canons of the Colorado and its tributaries. By these gorges and by other modifications, chiefly dependent on erosion, it is divided into a great number of plateaus which the surveys now in progress are defining and naming. The geologists of these expeditions have found it convenient to designate the region, considered as a geological prov- ince, as the region of the Plateaus, or the Colorado Plateau System. It is surrounded on all sides by areas of corrugation, the ranges at the east constituting the Rocky Mountaiu System proper, and those at the west having been designated as the Cordilleras. At the north and south these mountain areas coalesce. The northern portion of the Plateau System falls within the belt of country studied by the geologists of the Fortieth Parallel survey and rendered accessible by the Union Pacific Railroad, has become tolerably well known. The definition of the southern half has been accomplished by the recent Engineer explorations. WESTERN LIGNITES— AGE OF THE ROCKY MOUNTAINS. Tne field of operations in 1872 comprised parts of both Cordillera and Plateau regions, and included their joint boundary from the Wahsatch range south-westward to the Colorado River. At the opening of the season Mr. Gilbert crossed the Cordilleras westward from Salt Lake City to the Nevada line, and returned eastward to Beaver, near the Hue of separation, where he was joined by Mr. Howeli, who had spent most of his time east of the bounding line. Between this rendezvous and the next at Toquerville— which also happened to be near the same line — these gentlemen exchanged fields. Mr. Howeli keeping to the west among the mountain ranges, and Mr. Gilbert exploring the plateaus about tue bead waters of the Sevier and Virgin Rivers and Kanal and Paria Creeks. In returning to Salt Lake City Mr. Howeli once more bore to the we.-~t —this time so far as to touch the min- ing town of Pioche, Nevada, where a week was spent in a geological examination of the locality; and Mr. Gilbert, after visiting the Colorado canons at Paria and Kanal Creeks, returned northward over the .Sevier Plateau. One of the most interesting subjects of study duviag the season was the record of an ancient lake tha1. covered the Sevier and Great Salt Lake Des- erts, ana which Mr. Gilbert refers to the glacial epoch. A great deal 01 atii m ion was also given to some faults and fo ('.s within the Plateau region, of far le.-s magni- tude tl-an those found among the Cordilleras, but of the greale^i interest, since they are the simplest elements of mountain structure and their study promises to throw grea; light on dynamical geology. In i873 the work of Prof. Stevenson, who accompanied Llei t. Marsh ill, was conlined to the Rocky Mountains, and was quite independent of that of the other geolo- gist. His investigations led luiu to very delinito con- clusions in regard to the a.i;r of the Western lignites and tli« age of the Rocky Mouut.iiw. *uU his notes comprise United States -Surcey of the West. Important additions to our knowledge of the distribution of the strata and crystalline rocks of the region, of its ancient glaciers, aiul of the relation of its economic min- erals to its geological structure. Mr. Howell, start in g with Lieut. Hoxie from S;ilt L:iko City, remained with his division nearly to the end o2 the season. The earlier part of the Summer was spent in a portion of the Plateau region immediately east of that examined in the previous year, and was largely devoted to the study of the system of faults, there well displayed. At Fort Wiugate ho passed — though at a later date — the initial point of Mr. Giloeri's examinations ; ami in the area to the south — the principal area for that season — the routes of these two geologists were so near as to enable a combination of their work. Dr. Loew's geological examinations moreover were in this region and tracts adjacent to it. Among the results of the Summer were the further definition of the boundary of the Plateau — continuing the work begun in previous years, the recognition and partial survey of souie almost unknown volcanic belts of great extent, and the accumulation of many new facts in regard to the great cretaceous co.il-field of the Plateau region. Vol. IV.. "Geology," will comprise reports by Messrs. Gilbert, Marviue, Howell, and Stevenson, upon the geology of the regions they have severally examined, aud by Drs. Hoffman and Loew upon mineralogy and chemistry. The chemical report will include analyses aud discussions of soils, minerals, rocks, mineral waters, coals, aud vegetable principles. Amoue the topics treated in the geological reports will be " the Lignites," geologically and economically considered; iron ores, metalliferous veins, springs aud artesian wells, erosion, mountain structure, descriptive and theoretical; stratig- raphy aud the distribution of tue several formations, metamorphic rocks and nietatnorphisin, eruptive rocks and their distribution, and the phenomena of the glacial epoch. The illustrations will consist principally of woodcuts incorporated with the text and designed for the elucida- tion of the matter rather than for mere embellish uieut. Some points of structure aud especially certain peculiar phases of erosion will be illustrated by full-page helio- types or other prints from photographs made in. the field. An atlas of geological maps, uniform iu size with the topographical, and of course based upon them, will accompany the report. MINES, MINERAL WATEKS, AC. More than 150 districts of precious nutal.s in the terri- tory covered by the survey have been visited and ex- amined as far as circumstances permitted. The reports show a great number of points at which precious min- erals have been discovered. Their value will be ivalizeu in connection witii the geological and other investiga- tions, aud the mining localities will be indicated iu the maps. The want felt of comprehensive aud accurate maps of the mouutuiu areas about which so little is known has repeatedly been called to the attention of Lieut. Wheeler by prominent meu botii iu public and private life, and especially since the discovery of pre- cious minerals has awakened a new aud vast field of in- dustry in those distant regions. Mineral waters have been collected at various points, and in the more interesting cases several gallons of the •water were evaporated, the residuum being kept for a more exact determination of those that occur only in email quantities. The most interesting mineral springs were those of '•Qjos Calieutes," ou the Jemez Creek, about 50 miles west of Santa Fe. These springs are situated in a deep but spacious canon, tho wal's of which are ovor 1,500 feet in higbt. The creek rushes through over u rock v bed with great rapHit> , and s.mi • Mexican tanners have built huts along the margin. Hprlnas ..r tbis class are invariably warm, the cold springs showing limited if any mineral qualities. The principal warm spring is in continuous ami vio- lent action, a current ol'carbonic acid cs,":iuii!r thron-h the water, wlttch has a temperai niv of n;'/> F ihrenheit. This water is used for bathing aud drinking by the Mexicans, who flock thither. Tliis spiing \vns found to contain chiefly chloride of sodium, sulpiiat« of soda, c .r- lioiiiite of lime, carbonate of magnesia, and chlori le of lithium. Smaller springs of .similar composition, a few steps from the chasm, contain, in addition, car- bonate of iron, and have a lower temperature. 1U8° to 130°. Two miles above this group of springs i.-) another, quite distiucc, 42 in number, all issuing from calcareous mounds, undoubtedly former spring deposits. Tuere is a cave iu one of these mounds whose walls are coated with glittering crystals of caloite, and two snow- white columns stand iu front. Tneso springs contain, beside the above-mentioned substances, carbonate of soda, their temoerature ranging from 80° to 105°. A. quantitative analysis has been made from springs oi bod groups, aud will be reported in the final volum s. The&e springs have some similarity to those iu Marieubad, Bohemia, and undoubtedly deserve attention. At some future tima wo may here find one of our fashionable watering-places. Mineral springs in the caflou of the Rio Francisco at San Isidro ami other localities, have been carefullr examined. Lithia was found accompanying the soda salts ; borat.es, whicii are so frequently encouncered iu Nevada, have not been fouud yet in New-Mexico and Arizona. A FARMER BECOMES A MINER. An extensive collection of ores from New-Mexico aud Colorado was made. Tuese will be subjected to analysis. There is a vein of rod oxide of copper of 80 feet width and 3 feet hight, iu quartzite, iu the vicinity of the Rio Francisco. A deposit of silicate and green carbonate of copper of about the same hight and of a width of 46 feet occurs on the Burro Mountains. Some new copper mines were discovered by the parties of the expedition on Mount Turn bull aud in the Gila Valley near the Rio Bonito. The silver mines of New- Mexico are extensive, containing chloride of silver, na- tive silver, argentiferous galena, and argentiferous iron pyrites in many places. A characteristic ore is the de- posit of chloride of silver in. slate and silenite at Silver City. On the Madelina ruts occur argentiferous cer- russite and massicote. Gold is louud in various places in sand alona- the Rio Francisco and the Rio Meuibres; iu quartz sandstone, talc, and soil on the Placer Moun- tains. One farmer in the vicinity of Silver City sub- jected the soil of his corn-field to a washing, and obtained such favorable results that he sunk a shaft. The profit of his labors last year was $1,800 m gold. The region above 7,000 feet receives nightly dews, aud has occasional springs aud abundance of timber aud grass. The country below this altitude sutlers from the dryuess of the climate, but the streams are often flanked by belts of good bottom lauds that may be irri- gated. A report will be made describing m detail tlie auds suitable for farming. Iu New-Mexico aud Ari- zona many soils were analyzed. Lithia was present In all of them — a substance not so common iu other coun- ries. Potassa and phosphoric acid were found iu all in sufficient proportions to insure production of crops. In Mime localities the soil contains ad uiuoh 43 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. of tbese elements as the best soils known. Sonic soils were found deficient in liine, some in sulphuric acid; but this want can be easily supplied by an addition of gypsum, which occurs iu many places. There is also a class of soils productive without irriga- tion. In such cases the underlying strata pivbably fur- 7iish water, which ascends by capillary attraction. Specimens of such soils have been ta'ceu in sealed bot- tles to determine f ho hygroscopic moisture of the sub- soil. This was found to be 4 to 5 per cent, while at the surface it was was from \ to 2. The valley of the Rio Graude del Norte, in New-Mex- ico, recalls the features of the Egyptian Nile. A large population is entirely dependent upon the river. An an- nual rising of the wun-rs carries a muddy sediment su- perior in fertilizing properties, as was proved liy anal- ysis, to that of the great African wver. While the amount of phosphoric acid is nearly the same, the uuiount of potash is considerably higher. Thousands of acre.! are lying idle along the valley of the stream awaiting the enterprising farmer. PLANTS, TEXTILE FIBERS, &C. There are many plants growing in New-Mexico and Arizona which have strong fibers that could be utilized for the manufacture of rope, paper, &c. One such spe- cie?, Yucca Amjustifulla, is now utilized at Denver, but there are many more. The root of this plant is used by the natives as a substitute for soap, and is highly prized on account of its cleansing properties for wooleu goods. Another plant of great interest is the maguey or mescal. crowing in Southern Arizona— a peculiar species of vucca. Tiie plant consists of about 80 to 100 lanceolate leaves from two to three feet Ions, pointed to a sharp thorn at the end; all the developed leaves are concen- trically united at the ground; those undeveloped— the heart of the plant— remain soft and perfectly white so L'Ug as the sunlight is kept away by the surrounding outer leaves. The Indians bake this heart in coals for eight or 10 hours, when it acquires an exceed- ingly sweet taste, much like honey. The Mexicans, t;lso, prepare from this baked mescal an alcoholic bever- age. The fact of this substance turning into sugar by simple heat has no parallel in our experience. Speci- mens of all valuable plants collected during the survey, Including such as are used in- Mexicans and Indians for specific diseases, will IK- snbj 'etocl to chemieil investi- gation. The geographical distribution of. plants affords a study of peculiar interest in those regions where the altitude changes from 5,000 to 8.000 feet, and on some oc- casions, 10,000. Above 6,8(10 feet there are vast forests of pine and hr. ;ni;l the climate of the eastern mountains, •While below fi.fmu feci, is a region v.'hero the cactus grows. Tbe cacti are especially developed in Southern Arizona, where the ynr.id cactus (Ccrcits yif/antetis), 30 to 40 feet in bight, and three to four feet diameter, is pn e'miuent. Between t lie re-ion of these cacti and the Zone of th" pine, grows the everywhere prevalent juni- per, in higher altitudes accompanied by pifion, a pecu- liar cuniler, with an ealahle fruit. A large eoUeciion of plants was made in New-Mexico and Arizona. CURIOUS BOTANICAL OBSERVATIONS. It is hard to believe, that the vegetation of the plain s, which is so strikingly somber in its imsrmMr, is really as iliyer-ltied as that of most other regions of similar area. Certain orders, as the Leguminous family about Den- ver, or the Cactus family further south, do preponderate over the others just as other orders in other places do on the remaining plants. But there may bo as many species and genera in one'placs as the other, only it ro quires more than casual observation to distinguish be- tween the allied forms. Tne vegetation of the plains disturbs all our preconceived ideas of plant life by pre- senting an extraordinary class of representatives. The physical conditions are just as peculiar as the plant life One is the exact measure of the other. Imagine a vasV open expanse, absorbing, without the protection of ac intervening foliage, most of the sun's rays, and from want of aqueous vapor in the air parting with that heat as readily at night, and the reason why our familiar forms of plant life are crowded out of existence is ob- vious. They are unable, to endure an alternation of tem- perature so extreme and so rapid. The mountain flora is especially fresh and attractive, and up almost to the limits at which flowering plants grow the luxuriance and beauty of the vegetation are wondcrfil. Under the great diversity of physical con- ditions furnished by the deep shade of the pine woods, the sunny valleys, the rocky slopes, and the snow-ted Alpine bogs, plants seem placed where every tendency they may have to vary is intensified, and it does not in the least surprise one to see some of our best-known forms going off in all sorts of unexpected developments. The best agricultural region visited by the botanist during the past season was the San Luis Valley. While much of it is barren and unpromising, much more is capable of raising good crops after irrigation has been practiced. The portions bordering some of the creeks are absolutely covered with the most luxuriant growth of grasses and sedges. Indeed in ninny places one may ride a mile through the grass without the animal being seen among the tall grass. The following facts show plainly the productiveness of the soil • Yield per Weight Acre. per hasli. bush. tt>. OaU 40 to 50 40 Barley 40 55 Bald Barley 50 75 Yield per Weight Acre. per hush, bush. 16. Wheat 30 05 to 68 Potatoes.. 2aO to 300 bush. .. Turnips, onions, beets, cabbages, and radishes grow to an immense size. Along the Rio Grande, iu the south- ern portion of the valley, all our familiar garden vegetables were readily raised. Ttie foot-hills and higher mountain ranges back of these have much valuable pine and spruce timber growing upon them, but it is probable that ere long tlio greater needs of a rapidly increasing population wiH have exhausted the supply, and it might therefore bo wise in Govern- ment to become an active participant in the rage for timber planting which is so prevalent iu portions of the West. In certain places the curious fact was observed, that trees attained their maximum hight and di iiueter just before the level of timber-line was reached and sud- denly were reduced (the same species) iu size, disap- pearing entirely a few hundred feet higher up. METEOROLOGICAL WOJ'.K. A system of observations with the barometer and pry- chronicler, combined with a journal of our meteoro logical phenomena, and onserved peculiarities of climate and climatic influences is adapted to the li MM) stations at the astronomical basis, aoil to the movable; stations of the various field parlies. A voluminous record is thus accumulated, containing the elements of much informa- tion upon points important to the survey, the elimina- tion of which, from the mass of figures, is a labor of no trilling character. The primary object of this record is the barometric determination of the relief of tho country traversed, no other means suQlciug except t{ supplement thU general plan. United State* Survey of the West. 43 From the fixed bases of the barometric stations the theodolite and spirit level give local relative altitudes with great exactness; the course of streams, the dip of strata, and even the character of vegetation contribute hypsometric facts in more or less certain figures. And all these sources of information are utilized, but alti- tudes so determined are onlv relative and must bo tixed by the primory determination by the barometer, which offers a coii.mou reference for the survey. In reducing and computing the numerous observations, they are treated in accordance withtlie latest authoritative views upon barometric hypsometry, and the altitudes so de- termined will give the relief of the country very satis- factorily. Tue R-.'cord furnishes statistics of temperature, humid- ity, rain, snow, and nil facts relating to tlie climate of the country which could be collected. This information will be published m the condensed form of tables, with such an analysis of the barometric readings as will beso ex- hibit the action of the forces at work. It is hoped that by a careful arrangement of the data, material may be presented for further meteorological investigation and assistance rendered in determining the laws of atmo- spheric movement and tbeir influence upon the ba- rometer. NATURAL HISTORY. In 1871, tho celebrated Collector F. Bischon, assisted by Drs. Hoffman and Cochraue, made abundant and valuable collections in tho line of entomology, botany, ornithology, &c.. many new species of Coleoptera being found. In ornithology the contribution was valuable in numbers as well as in embracing many forms rare and new. Similar results were obtained as to serpents and reptiles. An extensive herbarium of the region visited was obtained. Unfortunately, however, these collections were rendered partially valueless by the Chicago tire, in •which the note-books were lost and Mr. Bischoff himself perished. In 1872 the services' of Dr. H. C. Yarrow, U. 8. A., of eminent ability Doth as a surgeon and a naturalist, were secured, with Mr. H. W. Henshaw as an assistant, and Mr. M. 8. Severance as an ethnologist. The party under Dr. Yarrow took the field early in the season, their labors resulting m a collection of 830 birds, between 300 and 400 reptiles aud a large number of fish, insects, plants, &c. which, on examination by competent natu- ralists, proved fruitful in the way of elucidating many points with reference to geographical distribu- tion. A large botanical collection was also made. Particular attention was paid to ethnology and phi- lolugy, aud numerous rare crania were, added to the ex- tensive collection of the Army Medical Museum, while to tho Smithsonian Institution were contributed IIUPI- hers of specimens illustrative of the manners and cus- toms of the rapidly decreasing tribes wnicli inhabit the section visited, together with several vocabularies of Indian languages. The crania in question have already served a goodpurposw, not only in the way of materially increasing the number of interesting specimens to be found in the national collections, but also as a means for the comparative study of the subject of cr.iniology. The vocabularies will form part of an extensive work on Indian languages now in course of preparation by the Institution. NATURAL HISTORY COLLECTIONS IN 1873. The expedition of 1873 took the field June 1, and though the period of its operations was greatly curtailed by rea- son of the early close of the season, the result, was a col- lection never, perhaps, exceeded either in the number or value of the specimens, by any made in the same length of t-lino and under similar difficulties. It em- braced 1,200 birds, among which many were entirely new, and was fruitful in tho way of nests, Oirgs, fish, n-ptlle.s, na. and New- Mexico. There is also a flue suite relating to the canons of the Colorado, a selection of which, of the landscape size, will lie brought before the public at au early day. In his annual rcnotf to the Chief of E igineers Lieut. Wheeler proposes to group the material at his disposal into the following forms : 1. Six quarto volumes. 2. One topographic i! and one geosrnohical atlas. 19" bv 21". Vol. 1 is to include the general report concerning the expedition of 1ST 1 anil 1872, describing the country traversed, fac;s relating to its industries tue eon'licion of presc-nt ami extinct aboriginal tribes, ic. The text-matter will aggregate aliout 250 pages and 12 plates in illus- tration. Vol. 2 will C'linpris" the sv>t>Miia' e report upon the lonsitu'le and lati- tude eairp ligns "f 1*71 and 1872 in tbeir due order of bequeace, and, if sulricien'.u • ii"I:n I'll lirlore goiii"1 to press, can receive in ad ition the results fnuii ilu- ii"ld .MMSOH of l.S7ii, i"clu ling the establishment of the obs'Tvatorv, ami the in ire matured pi in fur a comprehensive system of astrono nical ileie-inin.nions in the area west of the one-hundredth meridian. This volume will not exceed 250 pages, with but few addi- tional plates. Vol. \i. This volume will ernhnce the collected data from a very Urge nmnher of Imr.rly sta'ion.". and from meteorolo.'ic.-d record coiucetcd with altitude work, illustrated by various tables and plates. The text- matter will not exceed f>0 pages. The tables and plates will complete a volume of moderate thickness. Vol. 4 will contain thj fi.nslied report of the geological work fir the years 1871 and 1872. The sections will appear in Immediate con- nection with the text. The size of this volume will not dilfer greatly from '225 pages, increased br a few geological plateg. Vol. 5. Tnis volume, known to be the one upon " Palaeontology," will contain a report anil num. Tons plates of the new vertebrate and invertebrate tb-sils. for th • vears 1871, 1872, and 187rf. The pages of text matter will not exceed 100. and the plates for illust-ating new sulijects probablr not more than 50 or GO. Vol. 6. This l^st voliim • of the series will render the matured results. for the years Is71, 1*7'J, and 1573, in the different branches of natural historv, th ^ manuscript matter for which will call for at least 200 paces of quarto text and several plates. The following maps have already been published for central distribution. In 18G9, map of South-eastern Nevada, 1 inch to 12 miles; 1871, preliminary map, 1 inch to 24 miles; 1872, preliminary map, 1 inch to 24 miles. Advanced copies of Atlas publication are now ready. The finished work appears to be of the best that has been executed in this country. Besides tile preliminary sheets, there will be four full atlas Sheets presented as photographed, in crayon and in colors, accompanied by au index sheet and general topo- graphical .-he.ets, progress m p, and a map allowing the areas of dr linage, and the several basins of the territory •west of the Mississippi. Tins edition will be made as large as the funds of the Survey will admit, but is not expected to meet the constantly increasing demand for trustworthy maps of tins section of the country. It is intended to have oue topographical and one geological atlas. The barometric profiles gathered by the observers over the numerous routes of travel followed by the sur- veying parties are numerous. The limited working force of the office does not admit of their preparation for publication at pr.'sent. LOSSES BV DEATH— THK MUKDEtt OF LORIXG. Considering tin: fact that the several expeditious num- bering each year from 125 to'200 men. have traV'-rsed these remote aud inhospitable regions, where want of *vatcr, lieu?, d. in u'er from hostile Indians, etc., render the tenure of life often precarious, it may be considered remarkable that only six deaths have occurred, three of which were caused by tho murderous hand of the Apache. In 1871, in the well-remembered stnge mas- sacre near Hickenburg, three members of the expedition of that year sold their lives dearly. One of them was young Loring, a writer of rare ability and fomise ; another, Mr. H;imell, chief topographer to the expedi- tion ; the third, Mr. Severn, a prominent member of the boat expedition of that year— all serious losses to the Survey. During this year two guides were lost in the Death Valley region, and it is supposed that they perished, no information to the contrary having as yet been received ; at the time of their loss strenuous effort was made to discover them, but without avail. lu 1872, in Paria Creek. Utah, oue gentleman was drowned. Dur- ing the past season Mr. William W. Maryatt, a most prominent astronomical observer, died at Buzcman. Montana. O:her accidents inevitable in a lift? of so much toil, privation, and adventure, have occurred, but no others were very serious. DETAILS OF ORGANIZATION. To secure an economical and yet thorough prosecution of the work intrusted to his charge, it is proposed by Lieut. Wheeler that the unit of forca in any given area shall consist of three flild parties, with at le ist one offi- cer in executive charge, one to b3 known as the triauicu- latiou party, the others as parties for collecting topo- graphical, meteorological, geological and other data. These parties will carry ou their operations in lines nearly parallel and make a thorough trigonometric con- nection over the entire district surveyed. For the mam astronomical work there will be three distinct parties ; one to occupy the central and connect- ing station at Ogden, Utah, to be in charge of an engi- neer officer; a second to occupy points accessible by railroad communication within the area west of the 100th meridian, and a third lightly equipped for duty away from the railroad connections, yet at points wh TO; the telegraph has penetrated. The parties so orgauizad would consist of One officer, in charge. Officei-s in churgi' o' parties and as assistants. Three civilian astronomical assistants. Six civilian topographical assistants (including meteorological.obssrva- tion). Four civilian geological assistants. One naturalist and three assistants. One photographer. The following olhVersand eivilian assistants have been comieef"(i witii tu<- S irvy: Lieut. Geo. M. Whs-li r, Corps of Engineers, in charge. Lieut. K. L. lloxie, Corps of Knuineers. Li«-ut. \Vm. L. Marrhall, Corps of Engineers. Lieut. S. E. Til lin .11. Corps of Engineers. Lient. An Irew H. Itusse.l, ii.l U. S. Cavalry. A. A. Surgeon H. C. Yurrow, U. S. A., naturalist. A. A. Surgeon J. T. KoMirucu. U. S. A., hotaaist. A. A. Surgeon C. G. Newnerrv, II. S. A. HoM.it il .steward T. V. lir >wn. T. S. A., meteorological observer, Civ -ban Assistant John H. Clark, r.stronomer. Civilian Assistant Dr. K. K unpt, astronomer. Civilian Assistant T II. Snll'onl, n^tronoiner. Civilian Assistant \Vin. \V. Altrvuit, astro uiuier. Civilian Assistant Louis Nell, trian^nlatio.i and chief topographer. Civilian Assistant Gilbert Thompson, lopoyr.ipjer. Civilian Assistant John J. Youuu1, top.igruplier. Civilian Assistant .Max Schmidt, topographer. Civilian Assistant E. J. So nm -r, toi o.'rapber. Civilian Assistant H. J Amswortli, as-ist^ut topographer. Civilian Assistant J. E. \Vcyss, topographical draughtsman. Civilian Assistant Charles Herman, topographical ilran^lnsinan. ( in liiiu As-distant A. A. Aeuirre, topographical draughtsman. Civilian Assistant J. C. Lane. topographical draughtsman. Civilian Assistant (J. K. Gilbert, geologist. Civilian Assistant Prof. J. J. Siev. u-on. geologist. Civilian Assistant E. K. Hoitell. geologist Civilian Assistant l>r. Oirar Liew, mineralogist and f nalvtlcal chem.st CivJian Assistant II »'. llm-haw. collector (ornithology). Civilian Assistant Ji'hn Wolfe, colleetor (lioianv). Civilian AsiiHtant lie m;e .M. Iv-asiiv, (vdlecior ( iialxonlology). Civilian Assistant 'I'. II. o'.-ui iv in. photographer. Civilian Assistant c. ]>. Qet'n:/, neteflrolotnoal nssietant. Civilian Assistant !•'. M. I. e. meteoroloirlcaJ ns-istaut. Civilian Assistant Hemanl Gilpin I" 'te irolOgical asii>tjnt. Civilian Assistant Francis K itt. di^hiirsing clerk and auaistant topo- grapher. Civilian Assistant Geo. M. Lookwood, property and purchasing clerk. The Effects of Alcohol, by Dr. Wm. A. Hammond. 45 Among those who have assisted iu elaborating the re- sults (if tlio Survey, especially the natural history, may be mentioned the followinc students of science : Prof. R. F. BairJ, Prof. O. C. Mar-h. Prof. E. D. Cone, Prof. H. Allen, Prof. G. \V. Tivon, jr., Prof. A. K. Veir.il, Prof. T. P. James, Prof. S. T. Olney, l)r. G. A. Vasey, Mr. W. II. Eilwmls. Piol'. Cyrus Thinniis, Jlr. K. H. Stretch, Mr. Tl'ieo. L. Me:ul, Biron Osten-Sncken, Pmf. 1'.. T. (.reason. Prof. I'. S. Uhlcr. Dr. E Cones, Prof. Win. Iloldt-n, Dr. J. J. WuoiiwnrJ, Dr Geo. Otis, Mr. W. G. Binnev, Prof. Q. A Allen, Prof. AsaGrav. Mr. II. Ulke, Mr. J. S. Milner, Mr. G. Browu Gooile, Pn f. 4. A. Ilageii, Mr. J. H. Emcrton, anil many others. THE EFFECTS OF ALCOHOL. AN ADDRESS BY WM. A. HAMMOND, M. D. INAUGURAL ADDRESS ON ASSUMING THE PRESIDENCY OF THE NEW-YORK NEUROLOGICAL SOCIETY- DELIVERED MONDAY, MAY 4— THE EFFECTS OF ALCOHOL ON THE NERVOUS SYSTEM, ILLUS- TRATED BY EXPERIMENTS ON MEN AND ANIMALS. The New-York Neuroloeical Society met on May 4, at the College of Physicians and Sur- geons. A large number of prominent physician s were present, among whom were Prof. L. A. Sayre, Prof. Willard Parker,' Drs. Leute, J. C. Peters, D. B. St. John Roosa, Meredith Clymer, Murray, and others. The occasion was the delivery of the inaugural address on tbe " Effects of Alcohol," by Prof. William A. Hammond, as President of the Society. He was frequently interrupted by applause, especially when displaying the delicate test for alcohol in the liquor distilled from the brain, spinal cord, and nerves of a rabbit wbich had been fed on alcohol for several days and then killed. The following foreign physicians were elected honorary members of the Society : Drs. John W. Ogle, B. W. Richardson, G. Fielding Blandford, J. Hughliugs Jackson, F. E. Anstie, J. Russell Reynolds, Henry Mandsley, and H. Cbarlton Bastian of London ; Drs. T. Clifford Allbut and J. Crichton Brown of Leeds, Eng.; Drs. Labbadie Lagrave, A. Brie"re de Boismont, J. Baillarger, and G. B. Duchenne (de Boulogne) of Paris; Drs. Albert Eulenberg and C. Westphal of Berlin, and Dr. Thomas Laycock of Edinburgh. A short discussion followed Dr. Hammond's address. T1IE ADDRESS. GENTLEMEN: In returning thanks for the honor you have conferred upon me, in electing me to the presidency of the New-York Neurological Society, I must congratulate you on the auspicious awakening into life which the Society has exhibited. With a roll of mem- bers which in numbers aud eminence would be worthy of any society in the country, it enters upon the self- appointed task of studying the science of medicine in all its relations to the nervous system. INCREASING LIABILITY TO NERVOUS DISEASES. If there is any higher scientific labor than this lor a physician to perform I do not know what it is, and its Importance augments daily with the advance of civiliza- tion and refluement, those groat factors which do not stop at promoting man's intellectual and nhysical development, but which, as if every good thl'ig must have its attendant evil, render him more liable to a class of diseases before which all others are of secondary rank. The thought which the statesman or the scientist elaborates from his brain, and which may bo of momentous weight In tbe affairs of mankind, olten leaves him who gave it birth with weakened or perverted mind, or I he prey of some painful a flection which of llself makes life a bur- den. The youth who, by ambition or the constant spur- ring of his teachers, is induced to make Inordinate men- tal efforts to attain distiiictiun, breaks tl»:\;i mentally and physically in the attempt, or el.-o gains hi.-, object at a cost to his nervous system which is a dear price for any possible eminence he may thereafter rc-irh. Not long ago I cut from a daily newsjiap-r mi ad\ •ertisemeno of a school near this city, in \viiicii it was set forth us the sole inducement to pare:,ts to send their sons to the institution in question that at it "bovs were waked up and set agoing." I thought then, and I often think now. of the anguish in store for some of the "dull bovs" whom the teacher, doubtless with the best intentions, may " set agoing." The nervous irritability, the head- aches, the sleeplessness, the confusion of ideas, the en- feebled body, the premature old age, the early death — not, perhaps, before the intervention of some organic disease of the brain or other part of the nervous organ- ization—which a forcing svstem is apt to produce, are but a poor return for the doubtful honor of being " waked up and set agoing" — to say nothing of the lamentable failures attendant upon the process. I might go en and invite your attention to many other ways in which civilization affects for good aud for evil those organs which in their full development place man at the head of all created beings, but I am induced by the preeminent importance of the subject, to limit this address to the effects of alcohol upon the nervous sys tern. I think I was one of the first to study the influence of alcohol upon man, from the standpoint o' careful and exact experiment. In the year 1856 I Instituted a series of investigations on myself which yielded definite re- gaits, and which placed in a very clear light the evils and benefits of the powerful agent under consideration. These related to the general influence of alcohol, and il may be well as a preliminary to the special subject of inquiry to consider, somewhat iu detail, the subject of that study, and of the researches of others who have pursued a similar lino of research. In go doing I shall draw largely from a former publication, not now ?eadi'y accessible. THE USB OF ALCOHOLIC BEVERAGES. The propriety of the use of alcoholic liquors as bever- ages, the lecturer said, has been a subject of discus- sion for many years past, and is at the present time en- gaging a great deal of attention. Pew, however, who have participated in it have considered this matter in its true ligut, and this is especially true of the advocates of total prohibition who have generally in- dulged in invection instead of argument, and whoso facts are based mainly upon the immoderate use of the agents in question. No one can deny that alco- holic liquors, when imbibed in excessive amount, are not only injurious to the individual who takes them, but are also in the highest degree ruinous to society. We can even go further and admit that there are cer- tain alcoholic compounds— such as the distilled liquors, brandy, whisky, rum, &c. — which, when taken habit- ually even in moderation by healthy persons, exert a more or less injurious effect, varying according to the quantity Imbibed and the constitution and temperament of the individual. It is also undoubtedly true that even fermented liquors— ale, wine, porter, &c.— when used1 ia excess, lead to results in manv cases whU'h are decidedly abnormal in character. And it is not to be questioned that the habits and mode of lifo of a great many persons 46 Tribune Extras — Lecture and Letter Scries. are such that not only is DO stimulant of an alcoholic character requisite, but any such stimulant even when taken in very small quantity acts in a manner prejudi- cial to the well-being of the organism. But it is illogical to argue from the excessive use of spirituous liquors by all persons, to the moderate use of some persons, and I shall endeavor to point out in what the difference consists, fur that alcoholic liquors are not only beneficial to, but are actually required by certain classes of individuals, is not, I think, a matter for doubt. The experiments of Dr. Percy have been often brought forward as proving something in regard to alcohol which WHS not true of any other substance. This observer injected strong alcohol into the stomachs of dogs. Tho quantity ranged from two to six ounces. Death followed, and upon examining the blood and brain for alcohol, it was always fouod. The presence of alcohol in the blood and brain, to those who look superficially or ignorautly at the matter has rather a horrible aspect ; but when wo know that there is no substance capable of being absorbed by the stomach and intestines which cannot also by proper means be detected in the blood and viscera, the subject loses much of its striking char- acter. Dr. Percy used alcohol of 85° specific gravity, which represents a mixture containing about 80 per cent of absolute alcohol. As tlie strongest brandy con- tains bnt about 54 per cent of alcohol, the concentrated character of the liquor used by Dr. Percy is at once seen. In one case six ounces were injected into the stomach of a dog — a quantity amply sufficient to cause death iu an adult man. Tne amount of essential oil present in onions is far less in proportion than the quantity of al- cohol contained in the mildest wines, and yet we cannot eat one onion witliout this oil passing into the blood and impregnating the air exhaled in respiration with its peculiar odor. Doubtless the brain of a person who had dined heartily on onions would exhale the character- istic odor of the vegetable. EFFECT OF DOSES OF ALCOHOL. Many other physiologists have detected alcohol in the blood and viscera, of animals after its inject! m into the stomach. I have several times performed experiments with reference to this point, and have never failed to recognize the presence of alcohol in the blood, brain, the stomach, expired air, and urine or dogs to which [had administered strong alcohol. But with liquors contain- ing from 8 to 15 per cent of alcohol, such as the German, French, and Spanish wines, I have never been able to lind it in the solids, though detecting it easily in the products of respiration. It, is not to bo doubted there- fore that alcohol, like other substances, is absorbed into the blood and e\erts its influence on the system through t be inn li ii in of tins (In id. Pare alcohol is a violent poison. In the dose of I'1 •* than one ounce I have seen it cause death in a medium-sized dog, and many cases are on record of fatal effects being immediately produced in the human subject after comparatively small quantities had been swallowed. When diluted its effects are not so rapidly manifested, and from I his form when taken in sufficient quant n-s the condition known as intoxication is produced. Previous to this point being reached the nervous and circulating system becomes excited, the mental faculties arc more active, the heart heats fuller and more rani. My, tlic lace becomes Unshed, aiid the sense* are rendered more acute in their operation. If now the lurther ingeMion is stopped, the organism soon returns to its former condition without any feeling of depression being experienced ; but if the potation* are i-outinucd, the complete command of the faculties is lost and a condition of temporary insanity is produced. If further quantities be imbibed a state of prostration, marked by coma and a complete abolition of the power of sensation and motion follows. Such is a brief ontlin" of the obvious symptoms which ensue upon the use of alcoholic liquors in considerable quantities. When taken in amounts less than are sufficient to induce any marked effect upon the circulatory and nervous systems, there is, nevertheless, an influence which is felt by tlie indi- vidual, and which is mildly excitatory of the phvsicil and intellectual faculties. But there are other results which follow ihe use of alcohollic liquors whicli are not obvious to ordinary examination, and which, except in a general way, are not perceived by the subject Himself. We know that a certain amount of tissue is decomposed with every functional action of the organ to which it belongs. Just as steam results from the combustion of fuel, so thought results from the combustion of gray nerve tissue, motion from the combustion of muscle, and the force to secrete bile, from the combustion of the sub- stance of the liver. We know very well that if fresh fuel is not supplied to the engine from time to time steam ceases to be formed, and the machine set in mo- tion by it no longer works. The like is true of the body, and were it not for the formative processes which are continually going on whereby new material derived from the force is deposited to take the place of that which is consumed, death would very soon result. It must be di-tiuctly understood, however, that ordinary food does not directly furnish any force inherent iu tin- body, but that it must first be converted into flesh and brain and heart, etc., from the destruction of whu'h organs the force peculiar to each is evolved. The p:-o- cess by which food is converted into tissue is called pro- gressive metamorphosis, and tUat by which the tissue of organs is converted into force is called regressive meta- morphosis. USE OF ALCOHOL IN DELAYING THE DESTRUCTION OF TISSUE. Now it is often advisable to diminish the destruction of tissue without, at the, same time lessening the f.>rc3 which would otherwise be derived from its full continu- ance, or it may be necessary to obtain a great amount of force from an individual in a limited period. In alco- hol we have an agent which, when judiciously n~cd, en- ables us to accomplish both these ends, together with others scarcely less important, which will be alluded to more at length hereafter. The action of alcohol, in lim- iting the destructive metamorphosis of tissue, \vi.l be best illustrated by an example. Lot us suppose that a workman laboring twelve hours a day upon a diet con- sisting of 10 ounces of meat and 16 of bread, finds that he loses weight at the rate of one ounce a day. Now in order to preserve his health and perhaps even his life, he must, either take more food or lie must lessen the waste of his tissues. Meat and bread are expensive, and he finds it difficult to Obtain them; or, what is not at all improba- ble, the quantity that ho ears is as much as he has any appetite for or can digest. The alternative, presented to him is to work less. If lie is his own master this would be an eXL'ellent way of getting rid of the d;f!icnlty. He \\onldshorlen tne period of his labor to ten hour-:, a:id then, instead of losing weiglw, ho would hold hisow:i, or perhaps gain an ounce a day. But it may !>:• that this alternative is not open to him — ho must work 12 hours a day. In this condition of affairs he takes a mug of porter or a (-'lass of wine, or, what would be worse, a dram of whisky, after his midday meal. He finds that ho is pleasantly exhilarated, his vigor is increased, and TJic Effects of AlcoJiol, ly Dr. Wm. A. Hammond. 47 he labors on to the close of his task contentedly; ana wiieu it is concluded he is more cheerful arid less fatigued than ho has been before, when his day's work was ended. He returns to his home, and on weighiue himself finds that he has lost but half an ounce. Be repeats his experiment the next day; like results follow, and when he weighs himself he finds that ho has lost nothing. The inference, there- fore, is that the beverage he has imbibed has retarded the destruction of his tissues, and has itsdf aided in supplying the material for the devel- opment of the force lie has expended in his labor. Now, it may be supposed that this is altogether a fancy pic- ture based only upon assumption, like too many others which encumber science. In science, however, we be- lieve nothing which is not demonstrated, and even then we do so provisionally, with, the full understand- ing that if to-morrow new facts are brought forward which appear to be inconsistent with those upon which a favorite theory rests, and which are of greater weight, the hypothesis shall be abandoned without hesi- tation. Let us see, therefore, what evidence we have to support the view tbat alcohol retards the destruc- tion of the tissues and supplies material for the genera- tion of force. One of the products of tissue metamor- phosis is eurbome acid. Many years ago Dr. Prout ascer- tained that after tlio use of alcohol tne amount of car- bonic acid excreted by the lungs was considerably re- duced. Within the last few years other investign tors have arrived at similar conclusions, alter extending their inquiries to the other excretions of the system. DR. HAMMOND EXPERIMENTS ON HIMSELF. Desirous of ascertaining the facts for myself, I insti- tuted a series of experiments calculated to determine the real value of alcohol as an aliment, or a substitute for aliment. Perceiving tlie difficulties attendant on guch investigations when conducted on other persons, I performed thesa experiments on myself. Tney consisted of three series: First: The influence of alcohol when the food was just sufficient for the wants of the organism. Second : When it was not sufficient. Third: When it was mote than sufficient. Four drachms of alcohol diluted with an equal quan- tity of water were taken at each meal. Not beiner an habitual drinker of alcolfolic liquors in any form, the experiments were not open to the objection that they were performed upou a person hardened to tiie use of intoxicating beverages. During the first series, when the food was of such a character and quantity as to maintain tne weight of the body at its normal standard, I found, as the result of ex- periments continued for five days, during which time 60 drachms of alcohol had been taken, that the weight of my body had increased 226.40 & to 226.85 ib, a difference of .45 ft. In the same period the amount of carbonic acid and aqueous vapor exhaled from the lungs, had under- gone diminution, as had likewise the quantity of other excretions. While these experiments lasted, my general health was somewhat disturbed, my pulse was increased to an aver- age of 90 per minute, and was fuller and stronger than usual, and there was an indisposition t,o exertion of any kind. There was also headache and a sensation of in- creased heat of the skin. Later experiments, however, snow that alcohol does not actually increase the heat of the body; no that the sensation of heat present after its use is one o; those abnormal manifestations of nerve action met with In several other conditions of the system. The inference to be drawn from these experiments certainly is that whore the system is supplied with an abundance of food, and where there are no special cir- cumstances existing which render tin- use of alcohol advisable, its employment a<* a liei'eragn is not to bo commended. But there are two I'aet.s which cannot be set aside, and these are that the body trained in weight and that the excretions were diminished. These phe- nomena were doubtless owing to the following cauae. First: The retardation of the deeay of the tissues. Sec- ond: The diminution in (ho coMsnmpi ion of the fat of the body. And Third : The increase in the assimilative powers of the svstem by which the food was more com- pletely appropriated and applied to the formation of tissue. Tiie quasi morbid results which followed are just such as would have ensued upon the use of ?>n excessive amount of food or the omission of physical exercise when the body has become habituated to its use. If I had increased the amount of exercise taken there is no doubt there would not have been the undue excitement of the circulatory and nervous systems that was mani- fested. The truth of these propositions is demonstrated by the second series of investigations, during which the food ingested was such as I had previously ascertained involved an average decrease in the weight of the body of .28 of a pound daily. Under the use of the alcohol not only was this loss overcome, bat there was an average increase of .03 of a pound daily. The effects upon ths exertions were similar to those which ensued in the course of the experiments of the first series. But, unlike the first series, no abnormal results were produced in the general working of the organism. Di- gestion was well performed, the mind was clear ana active, and there was no excitement of the circulating or nervous apparatus; in fact, all the organs of the body appeared to act with energy and efficiency. It is in similar cases, therefore, tnat the proper use of alco- hol is to be commended; that is, when The quantity of food is not such as to admit of the due performance of such physical or mental labor as may be necessary, or (wh;tt amounts to the same thine) when the digestion or assimilative functions are not so efficiently per- formed as to cause the digestion and appropriation of a sufficient quantify of the food ingested to meet the re- quirements of the system. In the third set of experiments, in which more food was taken than was necessary, the ill effects of the alco- hol were well marked. Headache was constantly pres- ent, the sleep was disturbed, ttie pulse was increased la frequency and force, and there was a general feeling of malaise. I am sure that had the experiments of this series been continued I should have been made serionsiy ill. Notwithstanding all these abnormal phenomena, the body continued to increase in weight above the ratio which existed before the alcohol was taken, and the excretions were diminished in quantity. After such re- siilts are we not justified in regarding alcohol an food? If it is not food, what is it ? We have seen that it takes the place of food, and that the weight of the bod v in- creases under its use. Any substance which produces the effects wbich we have seen to attend on the use of alcohol is essentially food, even though it is not demon- strable at present that it undergoes conversion into tis- sue. If alcohol is not entitled to this rank, many sub- stances which are now universally placed in the cate- gory of aliments must be degraded from their positions. A COMPARISON BETWEEN ALCOHOL AND OHDIXAKY FOOD. Alcohol retard." tht> ileotnirnon of UIP tissues By this 48 Tribune Extra? — Lecture and Letter Series. destruction force is generated, muscles contract, thoughts are developed, organs secrete and excrete. Food supplies the material for new tissue. Now, as alco- hol stops the full tide of this decav, it is very evident that it must furnish the force -which is developed under its use. How it does this is not clear. But it is not clear how a piece of iron deflects a magnetic needle when held on the opposite -ide of a stone wall or a feather bed. Both circumstances are ultimate facts, -which for the present at least must satisfy us. That alcohol enters the food and permeates all the tissues, is satisfactorily proven. Lallemand, Peron, and Duroy contend that it is excreted from the system unaltered. If this were true of all the ak-ohol ingested, its action would De limited to its effects upon the nervous system, produced by actual COD tact with the nervous tissues, but there is no more reason to su ppose that all the alcohol taken into the system is thus excreted from the body than there is for supposing that all the carbon taken as food is excreted from skin and lungs as carbonic acid. It is not at all improbable that alcohol itself furnishes the force directly, by entering into combination with the flrst pro- ducts of tissue decay, whereby they are again assim- ilated without being excreted as urea, uric acid, &c. Many of these bodies are highly nitrogenous, and under certain circumstances might yield their nitrogen to the construction of new tissue. Upon this hypothesis, and upon this alone, so far as I can perceive, can be recon- ciled the facts that an increase offeree and a diminu- tion of the products of the decay of tissue attend upon the iugestion of alcohol. With these imperfect remarks relative to the general influence of alcohol upon the body, I proceed to the con- sideration of the special subject of inquiry, the effects upon the nervous system. The general action of a large dose is shown in the following experiment. EXPERIMENTS ON DOGS. I caused a dog to take mto its stomach thrse ounces of strong alcohol diluted with a corresponding quantity of water. Immediately on receiving it the animal retired to a corner of the room and lay down. At the end of five minutes I endeavored to make it walk about the ap rt ueut. but it did so with evident reluctance, though up to this time die gait was not staggering. I should hive stated that I detected alcohol in the expired air In forty-eight seconds after administering the liquid. After eight minutes the dog walked with some difficulty, and on carefully examining tfie gait I found that the posterior extremi- ties weie beginning to he paralyzed. This paralysis gradually increased, the gait became more, and more staggering, and at the end of fourteen minutes the ani- mal could no longer stand. The paralysis had now reached the anterior extremities. Sensitiveness was sMll present, though evidently l< -rued in acuteness, loud noises were perceived, and the eyes were involuntarily closed when the motion of striking v as made tieforc them. The respiration was hr.iTieil, ;.n persons, is a point in regard to which I have no doubt ; but those persons arc not in a normal condi- tion, and when they are restored to health their pota- tion- should cease. I have seen many a weak, hysterical •woman drink a pint of wbi-kv or brandy a day without experiencing the least intoxicating effects, or even feel- 1111: excited iiy ic. Tlie exhausted tissue has seemed to absorb it \\itii an energy as thoutrh it were its one thing craved, and recovery has been rapid under the use wbeii all other means have failed. I have seen strong men struck down with pneumonia and fever, and appa- r>nllv saved from the grave by brandy or other alco- holic liquors. I have prevented epileptic seizures by its moderate use. Neural trie attacks are often cut short by it, and sometimes entirely prevented. It has been effi- cacious in catalepsy, and in tetanus it is one of the best antidotes to the bites of poisonous serpents, as I have repeatedly witnessed: in the convulsions of children from tecihiugaud otlier sources of refi"X irri- tation it is invaluable; in the spinal irritnuou to which women, and especially American women, are so subject nothing takes its place, and ia certain forms of gastric il\M>ep-ia ii must be given if we wish to cure our patients. DANGER OF EXCITING ALCOHOLIC THIRST. You know all this as well as I do, and you know that I h-ive by no means mentioned all the diseases in which so far as our knowledge goes, alcohol in some form or other is the sheet-anchor of our hopes. I would not like to lie cut off entirely from the use of alcoholic liquors in my practice, and yet I often try to do without them, for I am. fearful of exciting a, .thirst which will not stop at my bidding. Still, when they are clearly indicated I give them without self-reproach, feeling that I have done my duty, and that I am no more responsible for the consequences of any after abuse than I snouid be In]- the shipwreck of a child whom I had in good tailh, and with ilic, object of contributing to his welfare, sent on a voyage to Europe. I would not send my son to Europe to be educated if I could in all respects educate 1dm iqually well in this country ; neither would I pre- scribe aleoh' lie liquors if I could do without them. I know that I am digressing from my subject, but in view of the great imp.iriance of the whole matter, I ask your indulgence tor a little, Turthcr wandering. With reference, to the moderate use of alcoholic liquors, it must be remembered that we are not living in a state of nature. We are all more or less overworked; we all have anxieJies, and sorrows, and misfortunes, -wl.h'h gradually in some cases, suddenly 111 others, wivr away our mind and our bo. lie--. We have honors to achieve, learning to acquire, and perhaps wealth to ob- tain. Honors and learning and wealth are rarely got honestly without hard work, and hard work exhausts all tjje tissues of the, body, and especially that of the nervous system. Now, when a man finds that flic wear and tear of his mind und body aro lessened by a glass or two of wine at his dinner, why should ho not tnlte it ? The answer may be, Because he sets a bad example to his neighbor. But he does not. ni3 example 1? a good one, for he uses in moderation and decorum one of things which experience has taught him are beneficial to him. And why should he shorten his life tor the pur- pose of affording an example to a man who proiuibly would not heed it, and who, if he did, is of less value to society I None of us defend dram-drinking. If is a vile, a per- nicious practice, hut the instinct that drives men and even women to it is human, and we must take it ac.it exists, just as we are obliged, to recognize other instincts fully as vile and pernicious. The inborn craving for stimulants and narcotics is one which no human power can subdue. It is one which all civilized societies pos- sess. Among the earliest acts of any people emerging from savagery is the manufacturing of an intoxicating compound of some kind, and one of the first things a colony establishes is a grog-shop. It was, as Dr. Cham- bers remarks, "an awful outburst of nature" wnen out of 500.0UO men who took the pledge in the United States 350,000, according to The Band of Hope Review, " broke it;" and he very pertinently asks, "Have the same pro- portion ever broken vows of chastity or any other solemn obligations I" But if we cannot overcome the instinct by prohibitory laws, we can regulate it and keep its exercise \vithin bounds. M}' own opinion is that the best way to do this is by discriminating legislation in f.ivor of wines and malt beverages and against spirituous liquors. I would make it difficult to get whisky and at the same time easy to procure beer, and I woul 1 likewise offer every encour- agement to the growth of tao vine and the hop. Expe- rience has shown that total prohibition while failing to a great extent In practice, drives men and women to opium and Indian hemp, substances still more destruct- ive to mind and body than alcohol. DIPSOMANIA OK METHOMANIA. Another point seems to require notice. There is a condition, a form of insanity it may be, known aj dip- somania, or, more properly met Romania. It is described us consisting in an irresistible impulse to indulge in alcoholic liquors. Doubtless there are individuals who, while recognizing the injury which excessive indulgence in alcohol inflicts upon them, are, in a great measure, powerless to control their morbid appetite. At one time they mitrht easily have retrained, but frequent yielding, and perhaps also the direct action of alcohol on the brain, have so weakened their volitional power that restraint is well-nlah iuipo«sinie. Probably many who pass for ordinary drnnkarks are in reality metho- niar.iacs. Indeed, I supyosi1 th"ro are very few of those who are habitually juore or loss intoxicated who in their more sober moments will not lament their inability to abstain, and curse the feebleness of will and the strength of the appetite which keep them drunkards. For all such the lunatic asylum is the proper place, BO long as they coirmit no outrage on the persons or property of others. If they plunge info crime punishment should follow with as much certainty as for sober criminals. As for confiding in the honor of such persons and allow- ing them to rangi' at largo while nominal residents of un incbriaie asylum, I regard it as the uttermost kind of follv. What would we think of the wisdom ami pru- dence of a superintendent of a lunatic asylum who would trust to the honor of a patient who had previously at- tempted suicide, and allow him to no at laru'O on his ph-due not to kill himself} And vet this is essentially the nature of the discipline at inebriate asylums. I have TJic Effects of AlcoJtol-Ecmarl-s of Dr. Willard Parker. 51 never seen a drunkard cured by this kind of restraint, aud I hav • seen many who liave told me liow re;idily. while patients in such institutions, they fouud liquor enough to keep up the desire for more. Gentlemen of the Neurological Society, I am afraid I have greatly trespassed on your patience, and yet I liave very incompletely fulfilled the tusk I set for my- self. To consider tiie subject of this address with even moderate fullness of detail would require more time than I h .ve to give and much mere than I would ven- ture to ask of you. Many of you are, I am surf, much more capable of doing it justice than myself, and I leave it in your hands, confident that it will be elaborated with a completeness wortty of its importance. As to the influence of alcohol over other part? of the body, and many of its more important relations to the system at large, I have not even alluded, as they did not come within the scope of the limits I have adopted. Tliere is much for us to do in the department of neuro- logical medicine, co winch fro in time to time your atten- tion will be invited. There is not one among us who cannot contribute an idea of value to the rest. I ask you therefore to show your loyalty to the Society and your devotion to the cause of scientific medicine by freely interchanging such suggestions as may occur to you in the daily exercise of your profession. Remember that facts should come before theories, and that though an hypothesis may suggest a practice, hypothesis by itself is the dreamiest of scientific rubbish. With your aid and forbearance I hope to discharge to your satis- faction the duties of the honorable office to which I am called by your partiality. THE DISCUSSION. , REMARKS OF DR. WILLAItD PARKER. Dr. Willard Parker, who was present during1 the delivery of the essay, was invited by Dr. Hammond to give his views upon the subject discussed, and re- sponded as follows : I should not be willing to take rp much of t'oe time of the Society, and should simply say I am very happy of this opportunity of being present. I have heard your address with very great pleasure, and iu most points I should agree with you, though in some points I should differ. There is one point I am ex- tremely glad to see brought up Before this Association. I do not propose 10 speak evil of this mat- ter of temperance. There are many men of many minds, and many women, too. We will simply let them have their way. The temperauca movement of the last half century has undoubtedly accomplished a great deal. Its purpose has been to ac- complish ii simply upon the basis of moral suasion, and then they have intended to influence legislation to a certain extent. I say nothing about that, either as opposing it or advocating it. There is no subject before the public mind to-day so important as that of the use of alcohol, not only in our own country, but in all countries. In the northern regions we find more of the stronger distilled liquors used than in the low latitudes. There of course they are using their light wines, unless vou come to Germany, where they are drinking beer. The starting point appears to be, first, What is alcohol? I fully concur with you as to its being a poison. Others have experimented upon the subject besides yourself, and all seem to have arrived at the same conclusion. But because it is a poison gives no one a license to say that it may not be used with the opposite effect at proper times. It is one of the most valuable medC eines we have, but as to the advantage or disaiivantago of every corner shop here or in lirooklvn practicing iu this matter and dealing out this liquor, that is another question, and we shall leave that for the present. The important point hero is the scientific aspect, and on that is the stand our professional brethren should take. The question we have to decide is. first, " What is al- cohol?" and then the great question, in the wcond plac», which you, Sir, have handled so ably, is "What does it do to you or to me?" The point is as to alcohol —its use, and what it, does to the individual. lam not prepared to agree entirely with the proposition you advocate so strongly, that alcohol pro- duces force. I do not understand it so, and I understood you to say you did not account for it, but simply assumed it does it. It may do it aud it may not. I am not ready to assent to that proposition; I am not prepared to say I shall not assent. My views have greatly changed of late years in regard to this mat- ter. When I first took up this subject, if a patient came under my charge pretty well worn down by drink, I knew I had an exceedingly bud subject to manage. One of our first questions is, what kind of a constitution does the individual bring to us, aud we recognize, if he is a toper, that he is a bail subject. I have followed on and followed on, and I have reached a point like this. I don't see how we can make food out of it; but what place can we give it in the dietetic department ? My feeling is that no individual system in health is benefited by the introduction of al- cohol, hut it is not always easy to decide what is health precisely. But when there is feebleness in the system, from age or sickness, and food is to be taken into the stomach, the stomach requires power to convert it into the proper condition to become proper, nourishing blood, I have conceived that, in a person taking that substance into the stomach, by the use of a certain quantity of alcohol, in the shape of wine, or beer, or brandy, the food will, with the preseuce of the brandy, have a perfect assimilation. In that way it 13 entitled to a position. I have a chimney in my house, for example, which does not draw very well. That re- sembles the old man. I put in a little kindling wood, in addition to the other fuel, and by that I get a good flre^ and am extremely comfortable. I don't know about it ex- actly, but I learn from the experiments of these gentle- linen that when alcohol is introduced into the stomach it arrests the process of digestion. About the nitro- genous substances I am iu doubt, but I fancy it does not do a great deal with the starchy substances. In per- sons wlio eat a great deal of meat and drink alcohol, it arrests the process, and after a time the stomach will evacuate itself, and the pieces of meat come up hard- ened. When the alcohol is taken into the stomach before the food Is taken iu, it acts upon the pepsin and hardens that. Some French physicians say it passes through without being changed, like an atom which gets into the eye; when it is removed it is unchanged, and the eye quickly recovers. Then other persons are very strongly of the opinion, and I think Dr. Duprey proves, that only a limited quantity of it passes away, that a portion is retained in the stomach. What becomes of that portion? Tuat is not yet settled iu my mind. I want to see this subject carried forward iu this Society, and if possible to assign to alcohol its true, legitimate, effective position in the materia uiedica in the world. It has been proved by workers in all kinds of employments as well as by those who were traveling ia high latitude?, that their health failed, so that sveii 52 Tribune Extras — Lecture and Letter Scries. :he innurnnce companies have been looking to it. There £ a fearful cutting short of life and usefulness by tlia nabitual use of alcoholic drinks. I mean wine »nrt the whole list. If there is any differ- e ce between wine and rum. there is an article in each which produces the effect. The other in- erredieuts are like ',ue clothing we have on; it may be Winter or Summer clothing. When you come to the matter of beverages, I suppose, as about 80 parts of the body are water, water is the only beverage on earth tliat repairs the system. You take the milk that wo pec from the mother's breast. It is only water we have, thmi.v!i there is also sugar anil c.iscin. I am ?xceedinglv anxious to see this go on. I will talk with pou some other time about the cure of inebriates, for I Jon't airree with you there. We want a military man- igeineut of these fellows, as we have at West Point, riio.v are to be re-educated, and moved at the tap of the drum. Dr. Hammond — If yon can treat them as soldiers and lunatics, I think you can cure them. I don't say that chrome alcoholism is absolutely incurable. I say the present inebriate asylums will not cure them. That is, according to my experience. Dr. Parker— The inebriate asylums have- been very great instructors. I find there are three classes of inebriates. One class Is made up of respectable gen tie- men— young men or the heads of families, who have yielded to a social feeling, and by that have got to a cer- tain point where they cannot live without liquor. Their will power is cone. There is another class where the de- sire is inherited, and who have their fits once a month, or once a year. In all creation, no human power can re- strain them. I have known it to come on from the individual's going into an apothecary-shop and picking up a cologne-bottle and smelling it. Then we have a third class, many of them raised, in our cities, the children of those who have suddenly come to wealth, children who have no true education; who feel that having money they must get the worth of it. The only tiling that can bo done for them is to have a place for incurables, and place them there in order to protect their families and friends. REMARKS OP DR. J. C. PETERS. Dr. J. C. Peters — I have but few remarks to make. I have paid but little attention to the subject of late; but 30 years ago — In 1844 — I made many post mortems on the cadaver of drunkards, and in many of those cases I was surprised to tind the small amount of injury done to the stomach where alcohol had not been used iu large quantities; but when taken to excess the ap- pearance was certainly as great as that referred to by Dr. Lente as being heuiorrhagic. The amount of hemorrhage found in the mucus membrane of the stomach, bowels and bladder, Is certainly extensive, and the injury was very great. I regard the effect of alcohol in larger quantities upon the stomach As very little short of a corrosive poison. The shock is almost equal to that of a sureical shock, and is very much like it. It occurs In the course of a very few hours; nnd I pre- sume that shock falls upon the great solar plexus, ulthoiiL'li I presume the injury to the mucous membrane of the stomach itself Is very great. Wo can tlnd a sma/ quantity of alcohol in the peritoneum : \ve will not llnd It lower down in the bowels, as it Is absorbed very rapidly. Experiments, Mr. President, similar to those which you have performed, in which alcohol has been detected ill the brain, are numerous. Christiaou and others have extracted a quantity of alcohol sufficient to be burned, as we burn it usually in a lamp. I might say a few words upon the point which you have especially noticod in connection with your account of my experiments, namely, the great firmness of the, brain of one who has used alcohol to excess. It was a fact which struck me very forcibly. We. know that alcohol will coagulate albumen. The brain substance is composed in a great degree of albuminous substances, and it is the great affinity of alcohol for the albumen which, I presume, is the grand reason why the brain is so often found in this hardened condition. We know also that alcohol is a stimulant; that it stimulates the stomach and improves digestion. It will increase the quantity of the gastric juice which is thrown out, and this operation of the stimulant will help many a weak stomach to digest food which would otherwise lie in an undigested mas^. Alcohol in excess causes the pepsin to be precipitated, and digestion is stopped. I have been exceedingly cautious in advising alcohol for any sick person, especially in the case of women — nervous, hysterical women — because I am so fearful of establishing a habit of using it; but when I do prescribe it, it is for the pur- pose of food. I never allow alcohol to be taken on an empty stomach under any circumstances. I prescribe it in fixed quantities, as I would arseuic, and when its work is finished I order it stopped, as I do any other medicine after it has accomplished the object for which it was intended to bo administered. 1 was also, at the tirno I speak of, 30 years ago, struck with the infrequency of tubercular diseases in drunken .persons, and those who died •om an e cohol ii alcohol in this disease has gradually worked its way into the profession until whiskies aud spirits of all va- rieties is almost an established treatment in diseases of a tubercular character. Dr. Aloiizo Calkins thought th:it in making these ex- periments with alcohol an excessive quantity had been used, as innch often as two ounces of pure alcohol. The result would be expected to be different if one half- ounce were used. It is analogous to taking an immod- erate quantity of food in the stomach; a portion is absorbed, while the greater part passes off indlces- tion, and only a part of it is appropriated. So it might be with alcohol; a small part of alcohol might bo appro priated, but the greater part would pass away. REMARKS OF DR. MEREDITH CLYMER. Dr. Meredith Clymer, who was present by invitation, said: Dr. Parker put this question, "What becomes of the portion of the alcohol retained in the system 1" in view of recent experiments showing that a portion of the alcohol taken into the system passes out, and a portion remains in. Now, that question is connected with the question of food. This is an interesting subject to us all. Dr. Hammond stated that he could not explain it. and it seems to me that these experiments are decidedly in opposition to the conclusion that alcohol is food. It it were food it would bo assim- ilated; and yet wo find by these novel and admirable, experiments which Dr. Hammond has shown us, that after a certain time it is retained in the nervous tissues. I only wisli these experiments had gone further, and that he had submitted to the same tests tho other organisms of the body — the stomach, liver, Ac. — and 1 am quite confident he would have found the same results — that they would have appeared in those tissues just the same as in the brain. The experiments are of great The Transit of Venus— Preparations for Observation by Different Nations. 53 value particularly iu regard to these hemorrhages— one of the most common of post-mortem results. What have these observations of osteology shown; that the por- tion of alcohol returned iu the system acts directly upon the nerve tissues, and upon what tissues? First, upon tlie cellular tissue; then adventitious tissue is gradually substituted for the healthy tissue. We find This takes place in tlie stomach, the liver, aud the bruin, and that probably accounts for the hardening process. The first post morteuis which I made were iu 1843. Some were men who had died from chronic alcoholism. In several cases the odor of alcohol was very strongly perceived on the removal of the cerebral membrane, and its presence in one if not in two cases was shown posi- tively by chemical tests. The change iu tissue takes place by the direct poisoning- of this tiss:ie. Then comes the f St. Paul's IMand, New- Amsterdam, Yoko- hama, Tahiti. Noumea, Miscate, and Snrz. Since the close of the war the subject has again been taken up, the French Academv has applied to the <; ivernment for aid, an. 1 under the head of "Public Instruction" a provisional appropriation of S2 1.003 has been made to he expended under the direct inn of a commission whose head id Alplionse Martin. Lately this appropria- tion has been increased, by one-half. Germany has decided to furnish four parties for helio- meiiic observations—one in Japan or China, and the others probably at Mauritius, Kerguelen's, ana Auckland Islands. Oilier countries have male preparations on smaller scales, even yew-South Wales granting $3,000, and, uuder the direction of Mr. Russell, establishing three parties' Ht Sydney. E len, and the third in the Blue Mountains, about 5'i miles west from Sydney. Most of the European nations sending parties to comparatively unknown re- gions have attached a naturalist, and the expeditions in this way will contribute to the natural sciences as well as to astronomy. It would have been desirable to have had a naturalist attached to the United States parties bad the funds of the commission having the matter in charge justified the necessary outlay. AMKKICAX PKKPARATIONS. In 1871 the United States Congress appointed a Com- mission to expend sueli appropriations as might be made for the observations of the transit of Venus. It consisted uf the following members: Rear-Admiral B. F. Sands, superintendent U. S. Naval Observatory; Prof. Joseph Henrv, President National Academy of Sciences : Prof. Benjamin IVirce, Superintendent U. 8. Coast Survey; Prof. Simon Newcouib, and Prof. Win. Harkuess, U. S. Naval Observatory. Tae Commission selected Admiral Sands for chairman, and it is to his warm sympathy with the cause of astronomical science, und to his executive energy in properly bringing the matter I'eforo our Government, that the thanks of American fcienti-t.- are due; for with imvloouate provision for de- fvayiii'-' the large outlay necessary, wo might have given ica-on for the doubt of De Tocqueville which Prof. Tyn- dall quoted to us : "The future will prove whether the passion lor profound knowledge, so rare and so fai;h- ful, can be born and developed so readily in demo- cratic so-ieties as in aristocracies. As for me, I can hardly believe it." The letter of Admiral Sands, March 5, 1872, ask.ng for *150.000 to he expended in tnreo annual HIM ailments of >.vi,otii> each, received the indorse- ment ofthe Secretary of theNavy.and the ;ippropriations asked were granted by Congress. It was resolved to ••miiiii.y imth photography. and eye-observations of con- tact, ami after discussion as to the various photo- graphic methods proposed, it was decided to lorm Hie linage of the sun on the sensitized plate by means of a fixed photographic lens, five inches in diameter, and having a focal length of about forty feet, ivllecting the sun's light from one surface of U plate ot gla.>s, I lie plate being moved by clock- Work, BO that the rays of the sun, utter bring rellected from the plate, will always strike the photographic lens in lines parallel to the line connecting tlm ecu i IT of the M-necting plate, the. center ot t le- li \ed len.-,, I lie cemer of (he sensitized plate. To carry out tlm methods of by the eye and car, it was resolved to pro- vide live-inch puuaforials, furnished with micrometers, by which the distance between the two cusps of Venus could be accurately measured, as Yonus entered uputi and lefr the sun's disk. The principal work of carrying out the views of the Commission has devolved upon those members of it coniH-tcd with the Naval Observatory. After most of the arrangements had been completed, th-re was a change in the members of the Commission, caused by the retirement of Admiral Sands from active dutv in tho Naval Department on account of advanced age, and the resignation of the Superintendent of the Coast Survey. Both these gentlemen were retained as honorary mem- bers, and R-ar-Admiral C. H. D.vvis. tho present Super- intendent nf the Observatory, and Cipf. Patterson of the Coast Survey, were added to the Commission. OUK STATIONS AND INSTRUMENTS. Eight stations wen; selecte;!, an 1 so far as is now known v.-ill be occupied ns follows: Vladivostok m Siberia will be occupied by Prof. Hall of the N iv.il Ob- servatory, with probably Mr. O. B. Wheeler of the Like Survey as assistant. Pekin will be ocr'ii>i< <> by Prof. J. Watson ot Ann Arbor. The Coast Survey party under Prof. G. Davidson, who retains Mr. O. II. Pitt- mann as first assistant, will occupy Nagasaki. C.ipt. Kavmond of the United States iingineers will occupy Crozot Island, with Lieut. Tilman as assistant. L'eui. -Commanders Rvan and Train, U. 3. N., will occupy Kergueleu's Islan I. Prof. Ilirkuessof the Naval Observatory with Mr. L. Waldo of Columbia College. N. Y., as assistant, will occupy Hohart Town. Bluff Harbor, New-Zialand, will be occupied by Prof. C. H. F. Peters of Hamilton College, N. Y.. assisted by Lieur. Bass of the U. 8. Engineers. Mr. E. Smith with Mr. Scott as assistant, both of the Coast Survey, will occupy Chatham Island to tho extreme east. Three photographers will be sent with each of the above parties, and all the members of the various parties are subject to the discipline of tho Navy during their ab- sence. All of the Southern parties and one of I.he North- ern are now in Washington in active preparation for the transit. Eacli party is supplied with an equatorial, a transit instrument so modeled as to be used as a zanith tel- e.-eope at will, a clock, with chronograph, two tox chronometers, a set of engineer's instruments, a mag- netometer, a photographic outfit, a chest oi carpenter's tools, suppli.-s, &C.; and \\ill carry with them three wootieu huts, put up in sections, to be, pinned and MMcwed together when they are needed by the observ- ers. The instrumental outfit has boen designed and constructed under tho immediate supervision of Prof. Harkness, to whoso accurate knowledge of the capabilities of portable instruments much of the success ofthe expeditions \\ill be owing. Mr. Alvan Clark constructed (he equatorial*, the pliotographi J ap- p.iratus, and the optical parts of the trau.-it instru- ments, of which the oilier p.irts were made by Stack- pole Bros, of Nuw-York. Tuo clocks were made by E. Howard ot lioston, and the chronometers by J. S. & D. Negus of New- York. The magnetic instruments wore made by Mr. Kahl'-rof Washington. The Southern parties will be conveyed to their destina- tion by the U. S. third-rate sloop-of-\\ ar Swatar;., under the command of Capt. Ralph Chandler. The s \\alara usually c u i ic.s nine gn.is, but will carry but one. a Co- pound J'arroi t , until she is through with the exp- li- tmus. Shi is now lifting u» at the Brooklyn Navy- Yard. It i.-s e \pecled she \\ ill sail from New-York the last of May. Uor route will include the Capo ot Good TJic Oriental Society — Meeting at Uos/tn. 55 Hope, thence eastwardly, leaving parties at the stations named. While waiting lor the observers to determine their geographical positions and to observe the transit-, she will lie employed in exploring some ot the neigh- boring islands, or doing work for ihe Commission. Each party ia provided with magnetic apparatus sufficient to determine the magnetic elements of their own station. Negotiations are now in progress having in view the telegraphic determination of tlio longitudes of the Northern stations, and Hobart Town, with possibly New Z -aland, of the Southern stations. The longitudes of the isolated inlands will lie determined both by means of chronometers, and by observations of star oecnlatious by the rnoou. Prof. Henry Draper lias the management of the photographic part of the expedi- tions now well under way ; and in his work lie has de- rived much benefit from the early efforts of Mr. Walker, photographer to the Treasury Department, to provide ou!y efficient photographers from among the numerous applicants for positions on the various parties. THE ORIENTAL SOCIETY. MEETING AT BOSTON. A SESSION OF MORE THAN USUAL INTEREST — AN ETHIOPIC MANUSCRIPT PICKED UP IN THIS COUNTRY— PHOENICIAN INSCRIPTIONS IN BRAZIL A FORGERY— CRITICAL EXAMINATION AS TO AU- THENTICITY, &C., OF THE OLD TESTAMENT — THE HEART, LUNGS, AND LIVER IN DIFFERENT LANGUAGES. I FROM AN OCCASION 4X CORRESPONDENT OF THE TRIBUNE. | BOSTON, May Si.— Be it known to such as are not acquainted, with the facts, that tlie American Oriental Society was born in. the year 1845, thaD it is therefore twenty-nine years old; that it has uo less than 150 members, mostly college professors, hterateurs, dis- tinguished philologists, and explorers in the Oriental and the antique— all, however, wearing our American garb, and most of them speaking English without ac- cent. Further, that it has a library in New-Haven of about 4,000 volumes, which is yearly enriched by ex- changing its own publications with those of nearly every similar society in the Old World; that it is also in possession of several important Sanscrit inscriptions, and a valuable Greek inscription from Autioch, which is referred to the third century before Christ, not to mention a sufficient amount of trash which always con- stitutes tie lumber of such societies. It is perhaps ne- cessary to add — for nobody would discover, it except by accident — that the Society holds two meetings each year, one generally at New-Haven in the Fall, and the other at Boston in the Spring. The need of this explanation is found in the fact that this Society moves with muffled oars, and is enabled to steal back and forch from New-Haven to Boston with- out contributing in the slightest to the noise which exists in the vulgar world. A further explanation is that, like all polyglot societies, it is the perfect horror of reporters, and that the horror is to eouie extent re- ciprocal. Under these circumstances, it was not sur- prising that the annual meeting held May 20 in the rooms of the American Academy of Science and Ar;s, at the Athenieuiu, was small in pom*-, of numbers, and that it received little or no recognition from, the daily press. Yet every other man of the twenty who were thus ignored was of scholarly or intellectual prom- inence, and the meeting was one of the most 'interesting the Society has hell. I send you some er ..mbi th.u fell from the table. There svcre present Prof. El ward K. Saulsnury, 1're,- ident of the Society, and I'urmcrly 1Y.H. 3OC in Y College; Dr. Ezra Abbott, Krcorl. oim of the most accomplished biniieal and claa lie il selnlaiM in the country ; the 11 'V. Dr. A. P. Pi ;iih, i , , Professor of Moral Science in II irv.ird Univer.Mi v ; 1'roi. C. M. Mead of Andover; the Rav. Dr. H il'm An I. r »:>, S -ei.-- lury of American Board of Foreign Mi»ion>; I'l'-Uev. Sclah Merrill of Andover, Prof. W. I). Wliiim-v ot Yale, Corresponding Secretary, known not only to a'l Ori- ental and liucuistic scholars in this country and Europe for his original contributions to litei.i! ire, but es- pecially known to your readers as the correspondent of THE TRIBUNE with the Haydeu expedition lu-a year; the Hon. J. H. Trurabull of Hartford, the oracle on all matters relating to our Indian languages, and whose Yankee skill in untying philological knots secim almost intuitive; Dr. Win. H.iyes Ward, editor of The. Iur. Francis Mason, and called forth appropriate remarks from Prof. Waitir-y, th j 11 v. Dr. Peabodv, the Rsv. Dr. Anderso.i. and Dt-. Ward. WHO HAS LOST A MA.NU3CUIPT ? Prof. Whitney read the correspondence since tho List meeting. A letter from, the R3V. Clurles H. Brigham of Ann Harbor, Mich., may result in fluding t!ie owner of a stray manuscript picked up last November on tho premises of the Michigan Central Rulsvay by a laborer. The manuscript is made of thin, soft parchment, in tho form of a roll, and, according to Mr. Brigham's desei !;>- tioa, is a genuine Ethiopic document. It was ct>; j -e- tured by some of the members that tho manuscript might have been obtained in Abyssinia by some one who accompanied the late English expedition. The Rev. Mr. Trowbridge from Turkey gave an inter estiug account of arrow-headed inscriptions in tho vicinity of Amtab, to which place he is aiiout to return to establish a new college. la monasteries in the T.mr.n Mountains he had seen some very be.intifal manuscripts in the ancient Armenian language. He expected great good would come from the establishment of tho college, which might be regarded by the people as a ropo-itorv for inscriptions and manuscripts. Mr. Trowbridge was encouraged by the Society to explore ancl al ruins iu the vicinity of his ticid of missionary labor, and to send 58 Tribune Extras — Lecture and Letter Series. L.)uie at the Society's expense whatever might be valu- able. The paper following waa by Prof. Fiska P. Brewer, on the Greek inscriptions found near Beirout, which was published in the second number of tho proceedings of the Amcriciiu Palestine Exploring Society. Prof. Mead of Audover read a paper on the use of the Hebrew Kol with negatives. In H.-brew a iinivei sal negation is expressed by the use ot this word (mcanini: nil) with a negative particle. Tuere is no compound word corresponding to our word " none " and " no." Gramujariaus have referred to hut one pasture- in the, Bible of a partial negation (Num. xxiii, 13). Prof. Mead undertook to examine a,l places in the Bible •whore Kol occurs •with, a negative. II n examined 320 passages. Only six of these can be called cases of par- tial negation, and all but one of these occur in sentences In •which Kol is made definite. The remaining papers of the morning session were on the Chinese Sien as Constellations, by Prof. Waitney ; on Certain Pticenician aud Greek Inscriptions from Cv- Iirus, by Dr. Ward ; on the Hamath Inscriptions with remarks on L >noriuant, also by Dr. Ward. Copies ot these inscriptions were shown to ni'Mubars. Dr. Ward also remarked on a supposed Pacouieiau inscription found in Brazil purporting to have been left by mari- ners. He was entirely convinced that it was si forgery, though a very ingenious one. It was dated in the lime Of King Hiram, which woul.1 require a more antique form of letter than that which was usad. Palaeograpli- ically, it would hardly bo older than ihe fifth century B. C. For an inscription so old as this purports to be, tho state of preservation was remarkable, aud another evidence of the forgery. Dr. Ward thinks tiiis forgery may be an incident of the struggle between the Masons and tlu- priests in Brazil, Kintr Hiram being invoke 1 bv tho former m this way to give antiquity to their claim. 'Ihe Suci ty then took a recess from i to 2 o'clock. The afternoon session was more lively thau that of the morning, aud was distinguished for the bold, straight- forward, and scholarly, yet courteous way in which Prof. Adler ventured to arraign previous methods of studying and interpreting the Old Testameut. I select his paper from among others, because of its more popu- lar and element. a-y character, and because, though pre- sented entirely from a philoloific.il aud philosophical point of view, its bearing on theology gives it a special interest to all classes of readers. METHODS OF STUDYING AND INTERPRETING THE OLD TESTAMENT. Prof. Artier, who spoke entirely without notes or ruau- n-ei ipt, -aid : It seems to m;: that nothing is of so much Importance In the ranee of Semitic study as a clear no- tion with regard to the chronology of the Old Testament. The question whether a certain part of the OldTesia- ment was written sooner or later than some other part has a.-ignilie.uice not only in the studv of the Bible, but in Egyptology, in Indian studies, and in many dill".; rent brandies of research. Whatever can throw light upon it ouirht to claim the attention of scholars. Tno Pri>fes- sor then ga VD what his studies in (Germany especially ipalilled him to present— an account of the sialns of opinion in regard in t lie exegesis of the JJible in Ger- many at the pre-ent 'nesi<, more especially, con-i^tcd of a nirni>er of frag- ments joined together by the, hand nf a later editor, but essentially fragmentary 111 its charac- ter. Tuat waa the hypothesis of Vater. He noticed the dill -rent accounts of the creation, the difficulties iu the Insierv of Joseph, certain other contrary stories and ant ch onisms, and solved the difficulty to himself by aci ep mg tho opinion which Geddes had pronounced before Dim— Lhat w-3 have h^ra a collection of frag- ments bound together in a sinsi'lo volume. Astruc in- troduced a more plausible hypothesis to explain the same phenomena. He regarded the book of Genesis, and, later, the Pentateuch, as the work of a compiler, believini: that Moses had before him ceriaiu old docu- ments, from which he had selected as the occasion seemed to warrant. This represented Moses in the light of a modern editor, aud this view did not gain the allegiance of scholars. Ewald, in denounc- ing this opinion, put forth his own view, that the prev- alence, of different names of tue deity (Elohim and Je- hovah) in different parts of Genesis, was dua not to the fact that different authors had written different parts, but was to bo attributed to the different terminology which the same author thought it proper to employ on different occasions. He endeavored to show that the names Elohim aud Jehovah had their peculiar signifi- cance. Tuch's Genesis, a new edition of which has been prepared by Merx, with a prefatory post- script of his own, brought prominently before the world the supplemental hypothesis. Accepting the fact that the hands of different authors were to be seen in Genesis and the Pentateuch, he held that there was one principal record, arid to this supplements had been made by the editor and compilers of the books. This hypothesis found favor with many until the appearance of Ilupfclti's work created a new phase in Biblical criti- cism. He made divisions which have been essentially ad herd to. First, the main distinction between Elohist and Jehovist; again, with regard to the first of these, a new division into first and second Elolmt. We would then have first and second Elohist and the Jehovi^t. In order to combine these records of different authors he supposed an editor. Iu addition to this the book of Deu- teronomy required its separate author. Hero then, including the editor of Genesis, were five persons, to which was added later a sixth, who had joined the book of Deuteronomy and a great part of Joshua to the Tcti ateuch. Although important a Iditions and changes have been made, the basis of the work has not been altered. Homer has made some important additions to this theory. He tries to explain different portions of tho Biido from the fact that they originated in the Kingdom of Israel or of Judah. Graf applies tho theories that Ifivu b: en applied to Genesis to tho whole Pentateuch. He calls attention to a statement, which, ii true, would bo of the greatest importance in establishing the chronol- ogy of the Old Testament. He endeavors to show that contrary to tho received opinion, tho laws of Leviticus are not older thau those of Deuteronomy, in which there appear* nothing of circumcision, nothing of a day of atonement. Graf then endeavors to prove that the laws of Leviticus were inapplicable to any st:itn of thinsrs which had existed in Israel before the time of the Jiaby- loni.sh captivit v. He therefore fixes their date after tho time of the exile. What Prof. Adler especially desires to call attention to, is the fact that Graf deduces his propositions in a historical and archa'ologi.-al manner; that he enters into the hill j -els of The boolcs and endeavors to show from ;:eii'Tal historical principles what can have been prior and what later. This chantre of meilioil is of threat im- portance. Hitherto literary peculiarities have taken Tlie Oriental Society— Meeting at J3oston. 57 precedence. B.it In the case of a book like the Old Testament, containing as it does the relics of the litera- ture of a people, it always seems to be a very precarious thins to deduce important theories from peculiarities of style. The difference in style, excepting the later Chal- daic and the more degenerate style of Ezra, Daniel, and even Ezekiel, is not sufficiently pronounced to war- rant important results. An exception may be made as to the ciiaugo of meaning which, is traceable in the his- tory of words — a change which, reflects the character of the time and the conditions of life. A erood example is incidentally given by Geige in his Urschrlft. The word tsadek (righteous), ho thinks, caiue to mean a mighty man— a man of violence — in which sense it is used In Isaiah xlix., 24. It seems to me, said Prof. Adler, that for all the labor that has been expended upon the criticism aud exegesis of these books, comparatively scanty results have been obtained, scantier than the nature of the books or the high attainments of the men who have devoted their liyes to this study should warrant. There is such diver- sity with reference to the composition, of the books of the Bible that it shows how little the study of this chief part of Semitic literature has become a science. Thus, for instance, with regard to the second Psalm, two prominent critics differ as regards the time of its com- position to the extent of an interval of a thousand years. Ewald attributes it to the time of King Solo- mon ; the other critic, whoso name escapes me, puts it a thousand years later. Another evidence of disordered criticism is found on the 118th Psalm, 10th verse. A certain modern critic thinks he must find the peculiar circumstances under which these words were written (" In the name of God I will cut them off"), aud he tells us with a very sober face that it refers to Alexander Juuu&us subduing the Idumeans and forcing them to enter the Jewish community. He would translate, " In the name of God I will circumcise thee." With Graf I think we have entered the proper path. The proper way setms to be to study the archaeology of the Jews— which is being done pretty well— and to study the principles of mental development and the laws of national development, and to attempt to apply them in the particular field which we cultivate ourselves. I do not, see why we should hesitate to acknowledge that the greater has risen from the smaller, and the higher from the lesser. I do not see why we should hesitate to acknowledge that idolatry was practiced. The prophets tell us themselves that it was practiced, and I canuot conceive why we should be more scrupulous — if to deny it be more scrupulous— than the prophets them- selves. Now. wherever we have met with idolatry, we have found mythology. It would be strange indeed, if we should, have idolatry in the Old Testament and not some relics of the ancient myths. Indeed, it would al- most be derogatory to the character of prophecy to sup- pose such a thing, else where would be the superior nobleness aud strength of convJction of the greatest of ant.iq.uity if they had not to combat the same difficul- ties among the Israelites as were found elsewhere? I do out refer at length to the vast learning and splendid results of Geige. His labors in the field of Biblical criticism are of such great importance, and can be eo little appreciated without an intimate knowledge of the later writings of the Jews, that I reserve a more extended discussion for some future occasion. In conclusion, let me direct your attention to one thing more. It is the fact that the. text of the Old Testament was preserved with such scrupulous care by the people, that mistakes made in multiplying manuscripts were per- petuated as well as the correct portions; and wo aro aide now to delect many of those. In the 15th chapter of Exodus, for instance, I think it is clear that the 12th verse ought to be in the place of the llth ; the connec- tion is then properly prescrve'1. So Psalm Ixxi., 3, is to be corrected according to INalm xxxi., 4 (it 1 verse in Hebrew), and to be read Beth Mczudot; the miatuko occurring from improperly dividing the. Inns into words. Sola Job xxxili., 21, "My flesh nulls away so that it is no more seen, and my bones are dry: they are not seen;" the word for "seen" in Hebrew is Ka-aJi ; which probably, by the change of a letter, was substituted for Eavali, which means to "drink." and which, if restored to the text, makes the parallelism, complete; thus, "My bones are dry because they have no drink." An example of a mythological construction is the story of Achan. Any one who has ever read carefully the Book of Judges must be aware that the mental and social condition of the people there set forth does uoc permit us to suppose that a reign of pure monotheism preceded. The fact that Jephtha offers his daughter without any blame attaching to himself ; the face of a Levite serving as priest to an idol, gainsav this. The whole character of the book shows that the time of Joshua, as it is represented to us, is rather the picture of a golden age, rather an idealization than a historic period in tha realistic sense of the word. Into this period the ideals of the people were projected. The word Achau at first sight seems to have no explanation in Hebrew. But we find that the name of the valley was Amek-Achor, " valley of wailing." We are elsewhere told that m this valley of wailing there was a huge heap of stones. The people had no explana- tion for this mass of stones thrown together. They sought one. Everybody who has traveled in mountainous countries knows how peculiarities of the country are personified. There, then, was a mass of stones as one element for a tradition ; the " Valley of Wailing" fur- nished the other element. To connect those was simple enough. Amek-Achor was the valley of a niau named. Achor. The stones were easilv associated with the Jewish custom of stoning offenders, and the priests, therefore, laid hold of this fact to impress upon the people the necessity of offering their booty to the syna- gogue by telling of the punishment which had befallen Achor. Tuere seems to be some verification of this theory in the fact that in 1. Chrou. ii., 7, this man Achau is actually called Achor. We should bo apt to receive this very readily if it were a Greek myth. As it is a Hebrew myth I doubt whether it would be received as such. I do not offer it with any degree of certainty, but only as one of the means by which those who study the Hebrew books in the light of philology may in time arrive at conclusions which would be more certain than those of to-day. DISCUSSION OX DR. ADLER'S PAPER. Dr. Gardiner of Middletowu came immediately to tho rescue of the inspirational theory ; but his good taste prevented him from precipitating a theological discus- sion. He simply rose in protest, aud said he supposed that to take any view opposed to this would be to take theological grounds, which would be out of place. He supposed Prof. Adler had meant to present this view not as the prevailing view of German thinkers, but aa the view of some. Prof. Adler by no means wished to say that that was the generally received opinion in Germany; but it is the received opinion among the majority of writers, if Trilinnc JL'jctras — Lecture anil Letter Series. lie mistook not Not certainly what ho stated in the latter part "f his ivmaiks. In what he had presented as more or Irs.- g •nrrally i-.-r -Ivi-i! ho would pause with Graf. He owed to <; -rge the \i -w th.it tin- id--as of the later iirrimi wrr.- pro] -i-tni into tin- 1'nrun r part <>t Jew- ish hi.story. iieuuuid mention Delib-oh as a conserva- tive, differing from HIM.,:- \n-ws, but eone.-iinig tin- fact that tin- IViitatein h \\as written by M.I.-I-S while lie asserted chat there wa> a .Mosaic koruol and a Mo-aic spirit. Dr. Hopkins of Cambridge, who liy the way is a sourd J. • -i-njiali in. h.id listmril in I'I-K''. Adlrr with a good deal Hi .satisfaction, lie thought tin- discussion entirely i>i"i"T. Aaaliterarj society, 11 wa- interesting and in- structive in have vn-ws of different schools of thought brought lirfore tlieni. Hi- iiill'i-n-il from 1'rof. Adh-r in a (rood decree, imt was uo;i.- ih • le-.s gratified at his clear and learned expn.-ilnfli of .1 \ iew which is taken by an Important school of 4 modern learning, still bethought some of Prof. Adieus conclusions rather liastv and per- hapsraab. He- Mi^^.-.-ii d that conjectural emendations of author-, wlirthn .s.ieivd nr profa in-, was at the pp-.-- ei:tda\ in, i of me gi cat sources of dissatisfaction and error. IIKAKT, L1VKK, AND LUNGS, KTYMOLOGICALLY CON- MI >i:i:i:i). Thellon.J. II. Trumbuil readan intereMingand original paper on " Tin- Names for the Heart, Liver and Lungs." Tin- drill of the paper, which exhibiicd great ingenuity a- \\ell a- i \t:'ii-ive rr.>riin-h, was to show the pruuarj- and secomlarv i leas which are associated with the iiiiucs for the siipermr viscera imt only in the North American Indian languages, but in the European and Asiatic lan- guages. 'J'he Chippewa OJHIH. Illinois A/Jiini, denote the lungs of a man ; and C'hippcwa Abuitiui, literally "lung max" one who is aslavo or servant. To say that a man \\ as " all IUIIKS" was to call liim an inl'erior beim:. Tlie exprc-.-iiin "ill- is Inn^y," means be is a dolt, he bus no wit. It is so in the Sioux; ('/mi/it, lung's. ('Jnn/ huka a fool. In Arrapahoe, Kuna, luuya; Kunanit, cowardly. Take the \vnrd " pluck" in Enjrlish. It has tbe double meaning nf that which is plm-Kcd or pulled altogether from tbe OUtaide of a sl:ui^rlitered animal: it is thru used lur c..iir;,^,-, ,.p.nt, ener^'v, as to plurk up heart or spirit, llrart in tin- ancient E^yj»t lan is a word deimt- iliK menta: .-tatns and activities; su in the Hebrew .ind lu the Ciiine-i; n. « ntal eonM n ul ion ; al>o desiro and aupeiiie. of Hi- Inter the liver seems to liavo been regarded aa Hie j. rnliar seat. Tlio character for the hear l. sin, r ntcrs intu i he eom pi is] i ion of a great n umber of words. He luiim! i.fj; I.e^inuing with the radical fin. In the Indn-Km npi an lamilv we have ever> where the rcfeience of lin- nmral characler, the will and emo- tions to Hi-' In-art. n\ tin- orientals the liver was re- garded a- ti:>- seat nf the pas.-.mns and the animal nature nt num. Borne Chinese •writers make the lungs the seat Of riKbtCOUSUCSS ai.d tlie ll\ i-r the .seat ol' belie voleiice ; mere vigor and courage .-eeiim to 'lave beeu assigned to the Kail. The derivation of the French, Sp.mi-h, I'lirtu^iieso, and Italian names of the liver (folo, Idiradn, I'uadn. 11 i:a!i i,) are from the liga with u liich t In K .mans u.-ed to sti w the hveis of geese. " It inii.-ht pass," said ihe doc- tor, " fur an et\ ninlogical ji-ko if it were not a fact." Ill (Jhine-e. " his lun-s uiid liver" expressed his in- Iiinst tiiouglils. In many languages lung> are named fur their light miss. The old nal urali-ts held that ihe Nnialler the luugs in proportion to the, body the greater the swiftness of the animal. ITenco Inrse Innsr* lie^nn to be a--.iej ated with dullness, -lii_'^ishi|,-s-. Tin- imtion • I contempt attached to the luiiirs eoim-s f i oin this mitiiiiiof lightii.--s, lacking we.igiit, tln-n I'ri.m the no- tion thai the larger l!ie lungs th" slower I ae animal; and ainoiii; the American Indian.-, from the fa--t thai tlm lunirs were the last ;>.irt and t lie lea -t wnrtlr.- p irr, wnich \\asgivi u a\vav when an animal was divided at a feast. Tne least impnrlant gilesf received the liin^s. 1'aji rs \vere also read by IVof. \Vhit.nev on the Anus- i-iini ; by I'rnf. S iiiUbury. an el-_'iiit I r ui-l.it ion from the (i, rmaii of Schuaase on .Midi i u ned in art in its re la( inns to the ideas of Islam; and by the U -v. .Mr. Jenks ou tl.e Identity uf the llebie\, Sha-blai and tli.- £gvp- tlan Suti. The .Socletv, uMer passing a vote uf thanks to the American Academy fur tne u«o of its rooms, adjourued to meet iu Wew-JTork on tle-yithof October. SAEKTY AT SKA. IRON VESSELS THAT WILL NOT SINK. PRIXCIPLKS OK r<>Nsn:r\ ui mi: OCEAN STKAMKUS— MKTJ10D AI M il'fl.l) IN NAVAL VKS- SELS AND Till! (IIIKAT KA> H.KN— •HIK (.1 I.I.I I_\U OR DOriH.K SKIN .sV>lK.M. Iron sliijilmildinfr was made possible by Corf, who in 1784, or thereabouts, introduced his dis- covery for the manufacture of plates and bars? of iron by the use of roils. Iu the pruce-s of growth of a new science of construction some errors, some misconcep- tions arc inevitable. Wile ii iron was lirst used lu ship- building, the attempt was made to follow in the metallic construction the plan so long adhere I I n with wooden ships. Iu them, ribs of wood are set up attached to the keel at the bottom, and bold together at the top by the transverse ueck heann. Oa this plan the earlier iron ships were, and now are, to a certain extent, con- structed. MODE OF CONSTRUCTION. Iron ribs took the place of the wooden ones, and the ehcathingof planks, caulked and covered with copper, was replaced by plates of iron ruited to the ribs. As tbe experience of the .shipbuilders ii.cre ised and aa science was furnished with the data of previous < -xperi- nients, the tran.-\er-e const ruction, or that which more closely imitated the old wooden ships, was lound to be less efficient than that known as die loniriln linal sys- tem. Tin.-, latter consiste I in running along the inside of the ship, parallel with t m- kelson, strong side kelsons, placed a lew leet apart, and meet ing or running into one another at the bow or stern, as the ship's Hues be- come line at cither end. The kelson, it will be understood, Is almost like the koel, the difference being that It is pi. iced m-ide of the ship insii ad of outside. It runs direcily over the keel and is bolted to it. Side kelsons are similar, running parallel wi; h the main kelson. To siren:,; lien I lie-e loniritmtlnal beams, angle Iron was worked irai^veisi-if nvcrtnem, forming a system of ribs which added to the sircnglh, while requiring le.ss iron thau was formerly used iu tbe transver.se syMem. Looking downward Into the bottom of a vessel thus coiir-tructi d, \\ e should see that it was divided into a series of M|iiaro compartments. Over these were placed plates which, parallel to the skin or outer covering of I he ship, formed a .-eeoml skill, one ship built Inside of the ot her, as It ueie. '1'nus b.\- con le'critig every slxlhor tr.in.-\ ersc rili with the bottom, tbe whole of tuo Safely at Sea— Iron Vessels that will not Sink. ship's bottom and sides was divided Into a number ot small water-tight compartments or cells, any one, or lilmost ;inv number of which, could lie filled with water without emlangei ing the slap's ability lo Hunt. Two thicknesses of iron bad u> be pierced before vital dam- age could lie doiio to tlic vessel. This is called the " cellular eonslrnclio'i," iii.d ships built in this way are said to have a "double bottom" or a " double skin." <;I.M:R.\L Al'l'LIl-AHlLlTY OF TI1K DOUDLE .SKI'S. Though be-t applied to vessels with tlio longi- tudinal system of Irani in?, the cellular or douolo noli 0111 can bo used iu ships having trans- verse frames. This construction was used for vessels of war, where great strength aud security were ret|tiired, but by Johii Scott Russell it was Introduced iu the Great Eastern, the first ineret.nnt steamer having a double skin. It probably saved the Croat ship in a moment of peril. The cellular system must uot be confounded with the water tii' lit compartments or bulkneads used iu all our transatlantic steamers. These bulkheads are iron divisions running directly across the ship from side to side, and from kelson to decks, dividing the vessel into as many separate transverse compartments or di- visions, any of which may by some accident become full of water without endangering the safety of the vessel. The construction of tiie bulkheads may be illustrated by a long hall or room divided by walls into a number of sections, communicating by doors. Shut these doors, aud any of the divisions might be filled with, say smoke, without the others beiug penetrated. Their distance apart should be about equal to the ship's beam. The idea originated with the Chinese in their trading vessels, and was introduced iu England by Mr. Williams about 1839, or a few years earlier, in very nearly the present form. The recent loss of so many iron vessels has given a foundation to the idea that tneir strength is inferior to that of the old wooden steamers, or at least that they are more liable to sudden aud serious disasters, aud that less rough usage will unfit them as efficient sea-boats. What safeguards are provided against accident in our ordinary transatlantic steamers 1 They are all provided with water-tight bulkheads, which divide them into seven or eight sections, and which are supposed to be a sufficient safeguard against any ordinary calamity, out they are not built on the cellular system, with double skins from the keel to the water line. SAFETY OF CELLULAR CONSTRUCTION. By this latter mode ot construction we actually reduce the chances of accident to a fraction, lor we place one sLip inside the other, aud we make it necessary that noth the inner and outer skin be pierced before we have recourse to our water-tight bulkheads, which under all iircuinstances are the last resort. The facts of the case are these ; Our iron vessels, as at present built, are not is strong as the old wooden ones. Less force is re- quired to pierce a hole, either by a rock or by a collision, through the plating of our iron steamers than was re- quired to break through the seven or eight inches of solid wood used in the vessels of a fsw years ago. Though the desire of the owners of steamships to make money has thus induced them to depart from the sound practice by building single-skinned ships weaker than their modern predecessors, it is no argument against the use of iron m the construction of vessels. The more we study the science of shipbuilding the more we learn ;o appreciate the fact that a vessel is to bo regarded (imply as a beam or girder, subject to different strains, lepeudiug upon the way she happeua to Uo sup- ported by tbewave>, win-tiler ill the ml. ).,!,• li wave, or Whether by two w a . . -.,,,.,, :, I . ., -|, ,• ,,,'. T. iu calculations, we treat a sliip, ;md as tin- iv-ult of our figures we lind :b;1t the stiengih mil I hi- pl:ir | in i he bottom and iu the top of our vessel; that tin- resisting power of the upMci- deck lo crii-hnr,' an I tensile .-train , must be about equal to that or the Nim.'.s hot; ..m. n \\ill be observed in looking ut an Iron lieam or gir ler that the strength is placed at th.< top an. | bottom. In this case the dictates of both science and pr.u t 06 have been observed. Jiut, in opposition to this BJ '• m, which has been proved to be correct, our pr - ,t iron \,-^eis grow gradually weaker from the bo t m up till tin- upper deck is the weakest of i.ll. Now hi n-n.-i b c..ald be insured in the bottom, which shoulil at leusl 'nnal, if uot more than equal, that of our wooden ships; but to do this would require that the iron bo mn>-h thicker than at present, aud the weight would bo increased in a greater proportion than the strength. STRENGTH INCREASED IX PROPORTION T't \V1 K.III. Here comes iu the value of the cellular construction with the double bottom ; the weight is incr<-a^efi m pro- portion to the strength, and wo obtain a result wliicii for safety is far ahead of that secured by the mas-t of wood In the wooden ships. If the longitudinal system of framing is adopted, we shall also have a gain as to weight over the transverse system, and this amount of iron saved can be used in making the upper deck cel- lular also, as was done in the Great Eastern, thus making our vessel conform closely to the structure of a girder or beam, the result which we wisii to onrain. List us see whether the cellular svstem has d> m> •any- thing to prevent vessels sinking. When the Great K i-t- ern was entering the Sound she struck on a rock and perforated her outer plating. The d mi ige \v s serious ; seven holts were made, one 85 feet long by four or five wide. Transverse bulkheads as put into a ship would not have saved her; she would have sunn so rapidiv that her passeuirets could not have re/iehed the upper deck, had she not had a double bottom three feet in-nlo of the one pierced, which being intact kept her afloat and would have continued to do so had she desired to make the voyage home again. She was repaired in New- York without beiug removed from the "water by Mr. B. S. Renwick. Other cases can be given of naval vessels with the cellular construction which have been saved after almost equally severe damage to their outer plating. Two diagrams will more cloarlv explain thr constiyic- tion of vessels built with the longitudinal system of fr itn- ng, and with double bottoms. No. 1 Nh-_ us a cross section of such a ship, and No. 2 is an enlarged view ol tin- bottom from the ki-el to the water lino. Tin- parts lettered .V B, C, D, are the longitudinal frames running the length of the ship, the parts marked d an- the plalo of the Inner skin meeting tbe outer plating at the water line, on a point a little above it. The gusset piece" art- worked in to strengthen the construction, the ribs of angle iron, as shown by d. also giving still HSS to tin- sides and serving as braciufa's to tho longitudinals A, JLJ, C, D. 60 Tribune Extras— Lecture and Letter Series. It will be seen how comparatlvolv safe mist be a gliip with all the WHteMierht oells V, V, V. The mere pierc- liiK of the outer sUell, eaffl.iient in itself to sink vessels of the prosunt build, will uot injure a ship built in this r. Tiie distance apart of tne inner am) outer plating should be lictwccn two and three feel, preferably the latter. This method of construction can be need either for steumi'rs or Biiilinir vessels, ami in cither case the protection is of the most perfect nature which can prac- tically lie used. Enough lias been said clearly to demonstrate the superiority of cellular ships. Whether the dan- ger menacing them be a rocky coast, an approach- ing vessel, or an opening in I he seams of the plating, so long as we have two thicknesses of iron be- tween us and the water •we rim rest in the cotu- fortuble assurance that no ordinary calamity can cause our vessel to become puiidenly unsea, worthy. In advocating the adoption of the cellular construction for the transatlantic steamers, it is not pro- posed that an experiment be tried, but simply that the vicwsot sunn- of the most eminent shipbuilders of the world be adopted. John Seott Russell has, both in his practice and in his great work on ship- building, advocated most strenuously the adoption of double bottoms in ves- sels of any considerable siz". Sir William Foir- bairr considers that the cellular construction is the only method which pre- sents the maximum of safety, and ho advises its adoption. Others equally eminent in all matters per- taining to shipbuilding predict that the longitudi- nal framing combined with an inner skin will enable iron ships to meet safely the dangers which now are almost certain to cause their destruction. Haste to be rich alone delays the adoption of these im- jirnvi nil-ills. The law may eventually do much, but more <-an In- done In the pniilic— by travelers and shippers of freight not in med almve its value, by snnpiy refusing to iiainiiMK • those, lines which do not hold out as an Inducement, at least for paeseneer traffic, the safety lifi'ordi-u I iv ocean steamers wilh double bottoms, which Shall be a little better than egg shells. Thus can the, pocket nerve he touched of those who, \\itli the light of science and experience, for the sake of a saving in lir.-t cost, seii'l everv year many thousands of souls am..-s the broad Atlantic in ships whoso construction violates the known rules of safety. Pa| I' • r.ifi,'' Page Page Page Patre Page Page Page 3fi. col. 1, ^7, col. 1, :•". ••.,!. 1. read Lieut. :;s. c..i. 2, :M, col. 2, •10. col. 'J, i L.col. :'. 11, .•„!. 2 43. col. 2, 44. c<.l. 'J, •11, <-ol. '_'. 44, co>. 2, 44. col. 2, ERUATA. line?: For"Tacnnn," read Tucson. line 'Js; For "U. II. Linn.'.1' rea.l .V. II. Lonar. lilies :U-3'J: For " Linits. J. Allen ana Kcbool- J. Alli-n anj l>r. Hcboolcrali. In.' 'J.'i: For "O'C Onl." read O. C. Onl. liu. •:;:(: For ••Tinipsoii." r-Mil fi-mpaon. lineal an>ir>i: For "Knntl," read : I : For " Isidro." rea<1 Yslilro. lmt;.r>::: Por •' Membre«," read i/im' lii.e 117: F.ir " Jase-1'tes," read (.'i.-xi-Utes. Inn- '_': Fur " Hickenliurg." irud line 6: Por " HameU," read Hmnr Inn' li: Fur " M-vern," read H'diiio hue S3: For "liott," read Klell,, i LIBRARY FOR ONE DOLLAR— With . Illustrations. -Literature, Art, Science, History, and Religious Discussion— The Fifteen Tribune Extra Sheets, containing: Extra No. 1.— Illustrated.— Tyndall's six Lectures on Light. Price, 10 centii. Extra No. 2 — Beecher's Compulsory Education; Fi-d is's Misters ol (tie Situation ; Phillips'* Lost Arts; Bellowa's Is There a God 1 Murk Twain's Sandwich Island Letters. Price. 10 cents. Extra No. 3.— Illustrated.— Prof. Wilder^ Brain ana Mind; Prof. Barker's Chemical Discoveries of the Spectroscope; Prof Young's As- tionomicBl Conquests; Pruf. Young's Present Knowledge of the Sun. Price. 10 cents. Extra No. 4.— Six Shakespearean Studies by John Weiss; seven Art Studies, National Academy Course; Parton's Pilgrim Fathers as Men ol Business; Bret Uarte's Argonauts of '4'J. Puce, 10 cents. Extra No. 5.— Illustrated.— Tbree Lectures by Prof, l.ouis Elsberg. on Sound and Hearing, Voice and Speech, and Explanations ot Musical Harmony ; Pro.'. Ben.j. Silliiuan's Deep Placer .Minn-? in Cal- foruia; Ur. K. \V. Raymond on the Seven Senses ; Parke Godwin oa Trne and False iScieuoe; Prof. E. L. Youmaub on the Limits of Science. Price. 10 cents. ,. Extra No. 6.— Beeclier's Seven Lectures for Ministers: Thoughts tor Ministers — Thoughts upon Prayer— Praver-Meetiiis as It Is — The Ideal Prayer-Meeting— UnMO in Churches— Society in the Church— The Fin- gers of the Church. Price. 10 cents, \ Extra No. 7.— Beeclier's condu linfc Lectures: Revivals in the Church — Relip-ious Awakenings — Thouithts on Revivals— A Reliaioiu Experi- ence. 'Also, " The Moravian Church." hy de Schweinitz; " Creed SiaU.-- uients," by Thomas Starr Kins; " The Deatii Menac"," by Boree, and a "History of Sectarian Appropriations." Price, 10 cents. V Extra No. 8.— The Method of Creation— Twelve fjectnres bv Prof. Airai-siz, conceiiiiiii,' Aunnal Life.— Vestisies of Antiquity, shuvying ihe similarity ot the remains t TH and U'estern Hemispheres, by Dr. LL- Plouseou—Tlie Hossil Man of M-nione. illus- trated—The Art of Dy.-iiif!, a lecture by Prof. Chandler— The West in Ages Past, an illustrated tlescnptior. of the wonderful Fos.-ils discovered in the Rocky Mountains by the Yale College Expeditious under Prof. Marsh. Price, 10 cents. Extra No. 9. — Illustrated. — Six Lectures on Astronomy by Richard A. Proctor, and Lectures by Prof. Ag'issiz at the Auder.-ou School on Pemkese Island. Price, 10 cents. (Pamphlet Edition, 20 cents.) y Extra No. lO.-Illustrated.— Science for 1873.— Proceedings and Discussions of the Annual Aleetiui of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, at Portland. Price, 10 cents. Extra No. 13.— The Farmers' Wnr— Lettsrs frun the Western States The Rise, Progress, and Purpose ol the Farmers' Granges, price, 10 cents. X Extra No. 14.— Exploring Expeditious— Prof. Afrnssiz's six Lectures on the Valley of the Amaz.m (delivered in New-York in lSl>7, and now published in complete lorm lor the fiist time)— .New Routu to the Y'etlowstone Park (Ci pt. Jones's Expedition of 1.S73) — The United States Surveying Expedition to the Rocky Mountains during 1S73 (Letters by Prof. W. D. Whitney of iale College, and Dr. F. V. llaydeu. Chief Geoloaist in charge of the Expedition). Price, 10 cents. Extra No. 15. — Discoveries on the site of Ancient Troy (Letter by Bayard Taylor)— Brown Seyuani's six Lectures on the Nerves— Proc- tor's lour Farewell Lectures on Astronomy. Price, 10 cents. (Pamphlet Edition. 20 cents.) Extra No. 1C.— The Brooklyn Congregational Council— Proceeding, Discussions, Decision, and a Review by Rev. Dr. .Leonard Uucou. Com- plete. Price. 10 cents. Extra No. 17. — Metropolitan Sermons— Reports ot Serin ms by the the vrinnpnl piva 'hers of all denominations in New-York. Brooklyn uud Jersey City. Price 10 cents. (Pamphlet Edition, 20 cents.) Extra No. 18.— Stunner Eulogies: Senator Schurz's Gre.it Speech at Boston— Congress Tributes— Congressman Elliott's Speech, Price, 5 ecu '.s. Tribune Extras. NOB. 8, 10, and 14. inclusive. wi!l be sent by m-iil to any address in the United States lor -~> cents; Nos. 1 to it inclusive, or Nos. U, 7, 8, 10. and 12; or Nos. 8, 1O, 12, and 14 ; or Nos. 1, :',, 0, 0. 8, 10, and 14, will be sent to anv address for 50 cents. tip- The entire Extra series above described sent bv mail for$l. [$?* Additional Eitra sneets containing the Credit Molnlier reports, and the popular novels. (No. 1) " Lords and l.ailie.," (No. '-') " May," (.No. 8) " A Pair of Ulne Ki es," each by mail, 10 cents— aud (*No. 4, 20 pages) "The Wooing O'T," 20 cents. /Eitrn No. 12.— Evangelical Alliance Extra (thirty-two pageb), 25 /cents. Extia No. 19.— Meeting of thi National Aci.lcmv of Sciences at Washington, April, 1874; Have We Two Hr.ii'.- .' Ur. C. K. Ifrown- Si •.inanf ; Ejects of Alcohol, SiirgiMin-Ui-uenil llamaiond; IionirteilOW, J. i. Fields; Wheeb-i's W est ITU Surveys ; The Transit of VeiiUb, itc. Price, 10 cents. (Pamphlet edition, 20 cents.) Extra No. 20.— Metropolitan Sermons (Second Series.) Price 10 cents. (Pamphlet Edition 20 cents.) Ad.in-ss THE TRIBUXF, New- York. » The trade supplied hy the News Companies iu New- York, aud II. L. Sbepajd & Co., Boston, THE NEW TRIBUNE BUILDING. ptg Ribr^iS^? ' ' a If I? -" '& :|B iUs^lJsSa essay iBi iulk' .fii'-TTi ta"iSiA rjiSS&S'S.f" The new Tribune Building, now in course of erection, occupies the historic site of THE TRIBUNE, on the corner of Spruce and Nassau-sts., one of the most important central points in the City of New- York aud the most eligible location on Manhattan Island for a great newspaper office. The new Tribune Building will be the largest newspaper office in the world, aud will contain more than four times the space of any other printing-house in the city. When complete it will front 91 feet on Printing-House-square, 100 feet on Spruce-st., and will extend through to Frankfort-st., a clear depth of 168 feet, aud with a front of 29 feet on the street last named. Only a portion of the building, that fronting on Printing- House-square, 91 feet, and on Sprnce-st., 52 feet, is now erecting, and this will be so far completed as to allow its occupation by THE TRIBUNE before the remaining section is begun. In this front building, as well as the completed structure, will be a cellar, basement, and nine stories, excluding the attic. On Printing-House- square, above huge foundations, laid in with granite bond-plates and cap-stones, a majestic tower will rise nearly 260 feet. The main entrance will be in the front of this tower, which, from the starting point of the foundation, 25 feet below the sidewalk level, to the top of the finial, will measure 285 feet. The bights of the stories areas follows: First story, corner oilier (to be used us Tin: TIUHUNE counting-room), 21 feet, with a rise of 18 inches above the curb at the intersection of Nassau and Spruce-sts.; first story, office north of main en- trance, floor 8 feet 6 inches above the curb 14 feet high ; second, 12 feet 6 indios ; third, 1:3 tret : fourth, 11 feet G inches ; fifth, 11 feet ; sixth, 10 feet !) inches ; seventh, 10 feet 6 inches ; eighth (com- posing-room), 20 feet, and ninth, 10 feet. From 1 ho curbstone to the eaves at the top of the outside wall of the west (Sprucc-st.) front will measure 106 feet ; the roof is a Mansard, with peaked top, and rises about 40 feet from the eaves to the top of the peak, making the bight from curb to peak on the main front 146 feet. On the Sprnce-st. side the decline of the curb is about five feet, so that the bight at the south-eastern corner will be over 150 feet. Sixty feet from the curb, the tower is corbeled out, projecting from the face of the wall 2 feet 6 inches, and this projection is continued to the top of the masonry of the tower, 196 feet above the curb. At the bight of 150 feet a little balcony appears on the front of the tower, and from this the national flag will bo displayed on suitable occasions. One hundred and sixty-seven feet from the ground will be an immense clock with four dials each 12 feet in diameter, which will be illuminated at night. The figures on the dials are to be cut in granite and gilded. The inside facing wilJ be of plate glass, through which the light from within will display the figures. The tower will be four-sided, and at the point where it rises above the roof will be 17 feet square. It will be of solid masonry to the bight of 196 feet from the curb, and above that point will he of iron covered with slate, rising 64 feet higher. In the lower part of thia spire will bo four arched openings to be reached by a staircase, and from these far-reachinsr views of the city, the bay, and all the surrounding country about may be obtained. The construction of the building is of the most substantial and enduring kind, such as shall insure its standing for ages a fit memorial of the great Founder of THE TRIBUNE, and a perpetual testimony to the success of the great journal into which he breathed the breath of life. The foundation walls rest upon a concrete bed 10 feet wide and 18 inches thick, composed of Portland cement, sand, gravel, and stone, a composition novel in this citv, and hardening very quickly into extreme solidity. Upon this concrete is a continued course of granite slabs 18 inches thick, and varying from 10 feet to 6 feet 6 inches in width. Under the piers of the front and the tower walls are other granite slabs over tnese, some of which weigh more than 10 tons. Upon these granite courses the brick work rests. The piers of the front are of so-called Croton pavers' brick, laid in Portland cement, with granite bond-stonea 10 inches thick. The inner walls are of Haverstraw brick, laid in Rosendale cement. On the level of the basement floor starts the granite work of the front extending in solid blocks, bond- alternately through the whole depth of the pien to the second story. Baltimore front brick, laid in black mortar, will be the chief material above the second-story level. The trimmings of the first story •vrill be of Quincy granite, and of the others, white granite. Windows, coruices, and towers will also have heavy granite trimmings. The solid character of the structure is shown by the thickness of the walls, which, beginning at the street level in the first story, will be 5 feet 2 inches thick, diminishing gradually to 2 feet 8 inches at the eaves. The north end south tower walls are to be 4 feet thick to the le.vel of the main cornice, then 3 feet 2 inches to the level of the eaves of the tower roof. The main piers, window piers, and jambs are each to have a reveal of 13 inches. The intervening space between the pilasters, of which there are five, or the western and southern fronts respectively, is 16 feet. Geomet- lical designs in white, black, and red brick will vary the appearance of the exterior, and a row of small gramic, columns extending around the entire front, on three streets, will make an imposing feature of the seven! li storv. The excellence of the interior of the building will fully equal the merits of its exterior. First among its claims to praisa is the fact that it is ibsolntely fire-proof in every part. All floor beams will be of iron, supported only by solid masonry. The floors will be of tile, and the partitions of tile or plaster of Paris. Not a single cast-iron column will be used as a support. The stairways will be of fire-proof material, and will be built in substantial inn son ry, and the- elevators will be thoroughly protected. As the roof is entirely covered with slate, no danger need be looked for from that quarter. The arrange- ments for light, heat, and ventilation will be un- equale'l. Ail the offices, halls, and staircases will be lighted from the outside, and in every room a direct supply of fresh air will be furnished through openings beneath the window-sills. The heating will be by steam. Three elevators will give easy access to every story, and the whole building will be supplied with every device for comfort and beauty. The, main entrance, 9 feet wide and 18 I'eet 6 inches hiuh, is flanked on either hand with mas- sive columns of highly polished granite. Lining and linishinirs <>t granite in the vestibule will cor- respond to the outside, and the ceiling vill be vaulted in groined arches with Baltimore brick. On either hand, as the vestibule is entered, will bo seen large directories guiding to tht, numerous offices in the building. South of the main portal and entirely distinct from it will be the entrance to THE TRIBUNE count- ing-room. Just within the, doorway will be placed a Jit'e-size statue of Mr. Cm-ley of marble or bronze, the material for the work not having been decided. THE Tnii'.rxK counting-room will be 20 feet in width, and neenpv the whole front on Spruce-st. It will bo admirably fitted and provided with pneu- matic and speaking-tubes, electric annunciators, and other means of communication with the edito- rial rooms. These will be in the seventh story, and the compositors' room in the eighth, till the entire building is finished, when the editorial rooms will be in the lofty eighth story — which has a hiirht of 29 feet — on the Park front, and the composing-room, stereotype- room and proof-room will lie in the rear of the same story, running from Spruce to Fraukfort-st. With the exceptions of these portions of the building and the basement room looking on Spruce-st., which will be also used by THE TRIBUNE, the entire building, from the ample bankers' office in the basement to the eighth storv, will be for rent for professional tenants. No manufacturing business of any kind will be admitted to the front building. In the base- ment and first story of this building there will be handsome bankers' offices, 45x27 feet, north of the main entrance. The rest of the available space on the first story will be taken up by the counting- room. On each of the floors above, to the eigth, there will be seven eligible apartments, provided with every convenience. When the front building is finished, THE TRIB- UNE will remove into it from its present, quar- ters, which, with the other structures on the estate, will be immediately demolished, and the building of the rest of the edifice will be pushed forward rapidly. Richard M. Hunt of this city is the archi- tect. The mason work is done by Pster T. O'Brien of this city, and the cut-stoue work by James G. Batterson of Hartford. THE NEW- YORK TRIBUNE is beyond a doubt tlu- most influential, fearless, ;tu>i independent pai>i-r m the couufrv. It never outers tue tield ot'srurrliinr sensa- tions, but gives tau news and discusses all puMic sub- jects in a spirit of <-:indor and houestv. — [Great BjiTiiifi; ton (Mass.) Courier (Administration Republican.) «• CHEAPEST AND BEST." A STANDARD NOVEL FOR TEN CENTS. THE TRIBUNE series of Standard Works of Fiction, boeun less than a year ago. baa proved a great success. In the ct..-eatial quali- ties of real merit and clie ipn-ss no other novel publication ill the world can compare with THE TKIHIT.VE " Extra'1 serie*. i'o any regular sub- scribers to THE SEMI- \VEEKLT TRIB -.XE who lose one or more mim- OI-TS containing inst.illinents of the Novel while in course of publica- tion this reissue is a great advantage, enabling the:n to obtain the worls complete at a merely nominal sum. Four Novel " Extras," con- taining the following standard and popular fictions are now ready : No. 1. LOKPS AND LADIES. Price 10 cents. v_ o J MAY, by Mrs. OLIPHANT. / *°- z' J K1JISOOE OF FilJULE l'O\VX. \ -pr>«; 10 cents. No. 3. A PAIR OF liLUE EYiiS. Price 10 cents. No. 4. THE WOOING O' T. Price 20 cenl*. Either of the above senc by mail, postpaid, to any address in the United States on receipt of price. Ai.dr '.ss TUB TRIBl'NE. New- York. THE CROWNING WORK OF A LTFE.-The complete series ol Cambridge Lecturei bv 1'ruf. l.o.n-, A.u.nsi/. cm THE METHOD OK OKEATIOX. in which are Kivea his lat.-st aimvr to the Development Theory of Darwin, and his best argument airainit the nmtprialiNtic tendencies of the age, is puMishel in full in THIS TlUIiUNE EXTRA No. 8. In these memorable Lectures Prif. Asjasiiz eave to the scientific world the ripe*t f ru t ol Ins voirs of stilly, re- ;enrch, and observation on the conflict between S",itjnce and Chris- lianity. TltlBUNE EXTKA No. 8 contains the entire aeries without curtailment. Price by mail, postpaid to anv address in the Uni'ed Ktates. 10 cents. Address THE TlilBUNE. New-York. THE GUE1T FIMILY NEWSPAPER, T2EE BRXBUNE, Which publishes all the news. Which is honest and independent in all things. Which instructs and educates its readers at the same time that it gives them the news. Wbicii reports the best thoughts and opinions of lead- ing men, as well as the actions of others. Which brought the first news to the American public of the surrender by the Spanish authorities of the steamer Virginius to the United States, a TRIBUNE correspondent having been the only civilian present and witnessing the ceremony of transfer, and the first messenger to announce the fact to the Admiral in command of our Guif squadron. Which surpassed all other papers, secular and reli- gious, iu its reports of the procaedings of the Evangeli- cal Alliance, at its recent meeting in New- York, in Octo- ber, 1873. publishing daily from 18 to 24 columns, in all 32 pages, closely filled with tlie narrative of the Alliance meetings, an achievement in journalism for which THE TRIBUNE received the formal thanks of the Alliance and the compliments of the religious press of the country. Which gave a complete and adequate account of the transactions of the American Association for the Ad- vancement of Science at its recent annual meeting at Portland, Me., and republished the same in a TRIBUNE Extra Sheet. Which published entire, Agassiz's great series of lee tures on the Method of Creation, being a conclusive scientific answer to the Darwinian theory. Which has reported fully and faithfully, during the past year, the lectures of T.vndall on Light; of John Weiss on Shakespeare; of Wendell Phillips on Art; of Prof. Young on Astronomy ; of Prof. Youmans on Sci ence, and of Bret Harte, Parton, and Mark Twain, on lighter subjects. Which published Beecher's Yale theological lectures in full — eleven prac'ieal sermons to young ministers. Which has the most complete and intelligent foreign correspondence of any paper in the United States. Which carries on no quarrels with its rivals, and ex- cludes mere personal issues from its columns, devoting the space thus rescued to*news and more important matters. Which recognizes agriculture as the foremost industry of the country, and prints more information of value to the farmers of the country than any other daily paper, if not more than any agricultural paper. Which admits no impure or immoral advertisements to its columns, nor publishes anything which is not befitting a refilled family circle. Which is always the first, fullest, and most trustworthy in its news, sparing neither money, effort, nor exertion to bupply its readers complete intormafion of every im- portant event. Which anticipated every other paper in the country, and the Government itself, in the news of Ouster's vic- tories over the Sioux on th« Yellowstone, and of the safety of the Polaris survivors. Which had the fullest, most graphic, and intelligent accounts of the events of the recent great financial crisis. Which disclosed the crimes and corruptions of the Brooklyn ring iu advance of all other papers. Which was never so prosperous and flourishing as at the present time, and which is erecting the finest nowapape »ffico iu the world. WHAT THE TRESS OF ALL PARTIES SAY OF THE TRIBUNE. Never so pood a paper as it is to-day.— [Ad- vance, Chicago. A journal wliich has not now its peer.— [Pe- terson's De lector. At the head of the newspaper press of the country.— [Sentinel, Saratoga, N. Y (Democratic). The greatest newspaper in the country.— [Ga- zette, Elinira, N. Y. (Democratic). Surpassed by no American journal in ability, energy, and enterprise.— [Christian Register. Boston. ' THE TRIBUNE is the best paper in the world in our estimation.— [Merchants' and Manufacturers' Bul- letin, Cincinnati, O. Achieving wonders, outstripping itself, iu the hands of Mr. Greolc.y's successors.— [The Old eeliool Presbyterian, Sr. Louis. Beyond all question the best newspaper in the United State*.— [New-Haven Journal ami Courier (Administration Republican). Beyond a doubt, the most influentinl, fear- less and independent paper in iho country. — [Gt. Har- rington (Muss.) Courier (Administration Republican). In the endeavor to popularize science, no other newspaper lias ever risr>n 10 tin; liight achi'-vc.d by THE NEW-YORK TRIBUNE.— [Tho Univer.salist, Boston. If any man wants a very complete, ably conducted, and valuable newspaper, OIK; tiiat keeps up with the limes and is nowhere excelled, let him try THB TRIBUNE.— [Watertown (N. Y.) Tunes (Independent). THE NEW-YORK TRIBUNE fulfills every re- quirement of a first-class newspaper. I! is prompt and reliable, ably edited, and vigorously managed.— [Newark (N. J.) Register (Independent). The greatest achievement of newspaper re- porimg tnat has ever occurred was i t of THE NEW- YORK TRIBUNE with the Evangelical Alliance.— [Ciuciu uati (Oaio) Commercial (Independent). American newspaper enterprise is probably at this time more tnlly illustrated in the daily issues of THE NEW- YORK TRIDUNE than in any other journal. — (Wilmington (N. C.) Star (Democratic). Unquestionably, in all that relates to the collection and publication of nows, tlie leading journal in the United States. It, was never so good a news- paper as it is to-day. — [Now-Haveu (Conn.) Palladium ( Ad t n iu is t ration Republican). THE TRIBUNE feels just pride in the success it has achieved and the, position it has .secured in the front runic of tlie leading journals -if the world. Its honorable record is a glory to all the Press. — [Albany Argus (Democratic). It is a great newspaper tlie public care for and they have tc iu THE TRIBUNE, more so than iu any other paper iu this or un.v other country. It is a greater newspaper to-day than at any previous time in its his-, tory. — [New-York Commercial Advertiser (Admmistra tiou Republican). THE TRIBUNE daily spreads such a feast of good tilings before its readers that Uioy have no reason to complain. Its reports of current events are extraordinarily lull and accurate, and Ms special cor- respondence from alt quarters of the worl ! lias bccoma a aiurked and important feature. — [Brooklyn (N. Y.) Argus (Independent). Some one said, years ago, that newspapers in time would do away witd all order iniiiiinauuus ex- cept text-books. THE NEW YORK TRIBUNE, witti its scientific lecture numbers, seems to be over-fulfilling the prophecy. Among tlie poor people it ia obvi.uiug the iiec'i.ssiiy for scientific text-books, and is an apo.-'ilo of compulsory educaiiou.— [Leslie's Illustrated Newspaper. The greatest newspaper of the country, and we think the greatest in the world, is THE IRIBUNE. Groat as \t was under tho immortal Greeley, it is out- stripping with wondrous strides all tho bright record of tho past, aud stands to-day as a raost illustrious example of successful effort aud well-directed aim. — [Scrautou (Penn.) Timea (Democratic). HKNRY 1.. SHKl'ARD A CO. S I't BLIi ^TIONS. COLLINS, WILKIE, THE DEAD ALIVE. By WILKIE COLLINS, the greatest Knglish novelist. EXTRACT FROM THE AUTHOR'S APPENDED NOTE. " It may not be amiss to add, for the benefit of incredulous readers, that all the ' improbable events ' in the story are matters of fact, taken from the printed narrative. Any thing which ' looks like truth,' is, in nine cases out of ten, the invention of the author."— W. C. Price in cloth, extra, " " Paper, $1.00 .60 HKN'RY I.. SHIl'XKD A CO. S FT BLICATIOXS. HAILEY. JAMES M. (The Danbury News Man), LII-'K IN DAN15TRY. Fullv illustrated. IT. E r f—1 x cr n> U) 7; o o n o o C - / His |)nrtr;iit, to use one of our expressions, looks as serene as the second story of a castk- n the air. — Boston A • User. A genuine humorist. — .V. Y. Nation. The most popular humorist in the United States. — Chicago Post. A thoroughly enjoyable book. It can be read and read again, and it will not tire you. It has "lily the fk'llK-MK to .nmi>r. ']'<>! Cilo /l'/i!i/<'. A humorist of an uncommon order. — .\". Y. Derian Studies, by John \\Viss; Seven Art Studies; Par- ton's Pilgrim Fathers; Bret Harte's Argonauts of '49. Price, . .10 No. 5. Twelve illustrations — Three Lectures by Prof. Louis Elsbergon Sound and Hearing, Voice and Speech ; Prof. Benj. Silliman's Deep Placer Mining in California : Park Godwin on True and False Science, etc. Price, . . ...'..... .10 No. 6. Beecher's Seven Lectures for Ministers. Price, . . . .10 No. 7. Beecher's concluding Lectures, etc. : "Creed Statements," by Thomas Starr King, etc. Price, ... ... .10 No. 8. Sixty-two illustrations — The method of Creation. Twelve Lectures by Prof. Agassiz ; Fossils found by the Yale College Expeditions. Price, .10 No. 9. Twenty-eight illustrations — Proctor on Astronomy and Agassiz at Penikese. Price, ....... .10 Pamphlet Edition, ...... .20 No. 10. Ten illustrations — Science for the Year. Proceedings and Discus- sions of the Annual Meeting ( 1873) of the American Association for the Advancement of Science at Portland. Price, . . .10 No. 13. The Farmer's War: Letters from the Western States; the Rise, Progress and Purpose of the Farmers' Granges. Price, . . .10 No. 14. Exploring Expeditions — Prof. Agassiz on the Valley of the Amazon ; ('apt. Jones (U. S. A.) on the Yellowstone Park ; Prof's Hay den and Whitney on Colorado. Price, .... . . .10 No. 15. Discoveries on the site of Ancient Troy-Letter by Bayard Taylor; Brown -Sequard's Six Lectures on the Nerves ; Proctor's four Farewell Lectures on Astronomy; Price, ... . . .10 Pamphlet Edition, . . . . .2c No. r 6. The Hooklyn Congregational Council; Proceedings, Discussions, Decisions, and Review by Rev. Dr. Leonard Bacon. Complete. Price, .10 No. 17. Metropolitan Sermons — by eminent preachers of all denominations in New York and Vicinity. Price, . .... .10 Pamphlet Edition, . . . . .20 Tribune Extras, Nos. 8, 10, and 14 will be sent by mail to any address in the United States for 25 cents ; Nos. i to 9 inclusive, or Nos. 6, 7, 8, 10 and 12 ; or Nos. 8, 10, 12, and 14; or Nos i, 3, 5, 6, 8, 10, ir. and 14, will be sent to any address for 50 cents. ^gT The entire Extra Series above described sent by mail for . . i.oo No. 12. The Evangelical Alliance; Meeting in New York, Papers, Discussions and Proceedings. Complete. Thirty-two pages. Price, . .25 C^ Additional Extra sheets containing Credit Mobilier reports and the pop- ular novels, "May," by Mrs. Ol'iphant ; "A Pair of Blue Eyes," and "Lords and Ladies." Each by mail, .... -io &T Any of the above sent by mail on receipt of price, by HENRY L. SHEPARD & Co.. 31 Hawley Street, Boston. HENRY I,. SHKI'AK!) & CO. S I'UULLCA J h i \ -.. JERROLD, BLANCHARD, THE BEST OF ALL GOOD COMPANY. By BLANCHARD JERROLD. Comprising : A Day with Charles Dickens ; A Day with Sir Walter Scott; A Day with Thackeray; A Day with Douglas Jerrold. Consisting of a bright biography of each writer, a sketch of his career as an author, an estimate of his genius, and extracts from his works. With specimens of manuscript, portrait, and illustrations by ROBERT HARRIS. The whole is calculated to give the reader such an idea of "The B-st •>! .ill Good Company," as would be gained by a personal acquaintance. A happy method of bringing some of the great masters of our literature into more intimate rf lations with the people. — Christian Union. Entertaining reading. — N. Y. Evening Mail. Capital in design and execution. — Prov. Evening Press. It deserves, and undoubtedly will receive, a large popularity in this country. — Pkila. Evening Press. Many new anecdotes of the distinguished writers in question are given, and Mr. Jerrold has written his part of the work in a pleasant, gossipy style, that carries out the illusion that he is the genial club-man, who, having introduced the reader to the best of all good company, remains to take a welcome share in the conversation. — N. Y. Graphic. Price in cloth, extra, gilt top, $2.50 HKVKY L. SHKPARD & O .). S PUBLICATION^. RE-ISSUE OF DE QUINCEY'S WORKS. Messrs. HENRY L. SHEPARD & CO., Take pleasure in announcing the completion of their illustrated edition of the works of THOMAS DE QUINCEY, "The English Opium-Eater,'' includ- ing all his contributions to periodical literature. The wonderful productions of this "great master of English composition" have not hitherto enjoyed the advantages of ready perusal. Whether this has been owing to their having been so long embedded in the anonymous pages of various periodicals, or published at too high a price, and too inferiority when after- wards collected, it is difficult to say, but certain it is that they have never received that justice in the way of publication which has been awarded to many works of even inferior pretensions. The publication of this re-issue of De Quincey's Works has been undertaken with the view of remedying this defect, and of bringing the writings of so gifted an author within easy range of those who may wish to possess them. The series are printed on fine toned paper, in beautiful clear type, and are fully illustrated with Steel Engravings. The price is $1.50 per volume, $24 for the set, a price which we hope will encourage the purchase of writings which have been well characterized "as a combination which centuries may never reproduce, but which every generation should study as one of the marvels of English literature. It is the only complete and illustrated edition, and the only edition containing a general index. CONTENTS : Vol I. — Confessions of an English Opium Eater. Vol. II. — Recollections of the Lakes. Vol. III. — Spanish Nun ; Last Days of Kant; Joan of Arc: Roman Meals; Superstition. Vol. IV. — Murder as one of the Fine Arts; Templar's Dialogue on War ; The English Mail Coach. Vol. V. — Shelley ; Whiggism : Goldsmith; Wordsworth's Poetry; John Keats ; Homer. Vol. VI. — Judas Iscariot ; Richard Bentley ; Cicero; Secret Societies; Milton. Vol. VII.— Walking Stewart; Wellesley ; Schlosser; Protestanism ; Pagan Oracles: Miracles; Casuistry; Greece under Romans. Vol. VIII. — Pope; GivtA Tragedy; Language; Manners; Charles Lamb ; Herodotus; Plato's Repub lie ; Sortilege. Vol. IX. — The Caesars ; The Theban Sphinx ; The Essenes : .Klius Lauria. Vol. X. — The Incognito; Rhetoric; Life of Milton; Revolu- tion of Greece; Style; The Dice. Vol. XI. — Coleridge and Opium Eating; Hebrew Lady; Temperance Movements; Milton and Southey ; Christianity. etc. Vol. XII. — Carlyle on Pope ; Mackintosh's Works; Anecdotage ; Her- der; Universal History; Charlemagne; Goethe; Lessing. Vol. XIII.— Letters, etc. ; Orthography ; J. P. F. Richter ; Conversation ; Presence of Mind ; Macbeth ; Sophocles ; Traditions of Rabbins ; Modern Greece. Vol. XIV. — Autobiographic Sketches. Vol. XV. — Biographies: Shakespeare, Pope, Goethe, Schiller ; Tory's Account of Toryism ; Political Parties. Vol. XVI. — Suspiria ; Chronology; Wilson; Hamilton; California; China; National Character ; Freemasonry; Notes from Porket-Book. General index. HENRY L. SHEPARD & CO/S PUBLICATIONS. OUR MAGAZINE, AMERICAN HOMES, Which has been before the American public for nearly four years, has been enlarged, and its mechanical and literary standard so raised, that, as the ''Chicago Inter-Ocean" says, "it is really a. first-class periodical at $2.00 a year." OUR CONTRIBUTORS INCLUDE, EDWARD EGGLESTON, Author of "The Circuit Rider," and "The Hoosier School- master," C. A. STEPHENS, Author of "Camping Out Series," JULES VERNE, Author of "Twenty Thou- sand Leagues under the Sea," JUDGE COZZENS, Author of "The Marvel- lous Country," "Jimmy Sloan's Coort," &c., CHARLES BARNARD, Author of "The Soprano," "Money and Music," &c., EDWARD SPRAGUE RAND, Jr., Author of " Flowers for the Parlor and Garden," &c., Prof. GEORGE LOWELL AUSTIN, EBEN E. REXFORD, J. M. MERRICK, Author of "Nugaelnutiles," W. E. ENDTCOTT, MRS. K. T. WOODS (KATE TRUE), MRS. MINNIE MYRTLE MILLER, MARY E. BRADLEY, Rev. PETER PENNOT, Author of " Achsah," FAITH APPLETON, BARTON GRAY, And other prominent anil brilliant authors. As the "Boston Daily Advertiser" says, "There is room for a periodical which, furnished at the low price of $2.00 a year, is yet first-class in character, tone, literary contents and execution ; and well would it be," continues "The Advertiser," "were all the homes where the larger magazines do not go, supplied with reading as good in tone and style as that in AMERICAN HOMKS." OUR PREMIUM. We have published a magnificent oil chromo, " Life's Voyage," which for beauty and as a work of art will challenge competition. It is in size 14 1-2 by 22 1-2 inches, and will be mounted, sized, varnished, and finished in first-class style ; and as we are determined to offer such induce- ments to the people that they will subscribe for the AMERICAN HOMES in preference to any other magazine or paper published, we have concluded to give this chromo framed in a polished black walnut and gilt frame, with a year's subscription to the magazine, for only #3.25. HENRY L. SHEPARD & CO., Publishers, BOSTON : N. Y. : CHICAGO : 31 Hawley Street. 24 Bond Street. 92 Market Street. Sample copies sent on application. AGENTS WANTED IN EVERY STATE OF THE UNION. IENRY L, SHEPA^D ci CC. _ JBLICATIONS. •' ..• VERNE, JULES, ADVENTURES IN THE LAND OF THE BEHEMOTH. % the author of "Twenty Thousand Leagues Under the Sea," "A Journey to the Centre of the Earth," etc. MER1DIANA. Illustrated. Paper cover, 25 cents. This is the first presentation of a book by JUI.KS VKRNK, — illustrated, — for ;i low price. I'L i ninted on tinted paper, and is elegantly bound. Price, square Cvo, • • $1.00 It is quite as \vnnrlrrfu; r.nJ i.i-i • 1 ' ''t'.!:. ' this fanciful Frenchman has written. //. }'. /•: ma : r Hfflffl H